The URL can be used to link to this page

Contract - B-5 Construction - 8/12/2021 g-42424-24S• CITY OF ROUND ROCK Utilities and Environmental Services >?* ROUND ROCK TEXAS Project Manual For: Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements July 2021 Prepared By: AECOM dk'VC-- tn. re 1;141. • -to" • ✓�. .-J4HN N. BtiSER A"" ° ROVED tY if CI ATTQRN Y � � - �u�. )1.101,t 1 Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System ImproVements TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Description No. of Pages 00020 Notice to Bidders 1 00100 Instructions to Bidders 4 Exhibit A 1 00200 Bid Bond 4 00300 Bid Form 2 00410 Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience 7 00500 Agreement 5 00600 Insurance & Construction Bond Forms Performance & Payment Bond Instructions 2 Insurance Instructions 1 00610 Performance Bond 2 00620 Payment Bond 4 00650 Certificate of Liability Insurance 24 00700 General Conditions 41 00800 Supplemental General Conditions 2 00900 Special Conditions 5 01000 Technical Specifications 4 Attachment A 529 02000 Plans, Details and Notes 8-2016 Table of Contents 00090665 00020 NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE TO BIDDERS Pursuant to the provisions of Texas Government Code, Section 2269.101, it is the intention of the City of Round Rock to select a prime contractor by using the Competitive Bidding Method for the construction of the Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements, as generally described herein. Sealed bids addressed to Juan Martinez, City of Round Rock, Utilities and Environmental Services Department, 3400 Sunrise Road, Round Rock, TX 78665, for furnishing all labor, material, and equipment and performing all work required for the project titled, Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements (project includes demolition of the existing chlorine feed system, chlorine building, and select salvaging of existing equipment, construction of a new chlorine feed system, chlorine building, and reinstallation of salvaged equipment, installation of a new fire water line and building sprinkler system, and associated work.), will be received until July 6, 2021, at 10 a.m., then publicly opened and read aloud at the same address. Bid envelopes shall state the date and time of bid and "Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements." Bids must also be accompanied by a "Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience" included in Section 410 of the Project Manual. No bids may be withdrawn after the scheduled opening time. Any bids received after the scheduled bid opening time will be returned unopened. Bids must be submitted on City of Round Rock bid forms and must be accompanied by an acceptable bid security as outlined in the Instructions to Bidders, payable to the City of Round Rock, Texas, equal to five percent(5%) of the total bid amount. Plans, Bid Forms, Specifications, and Instructions to Bidders may be obtained at roundrocktexas.gov/solicitations. Bidders shall be responsible for printing or obtaining prints of the aforementioned documents as necessary. For questions, please contact the City's Project Manager, Juan Martinez, 512-341-3332. In case of ambiguity,duplication,or obscurity in the bids,the City of Round Rock reserves the right to construe the meaning thereof. The City of Round Rock further reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities and irregularities in the bids received. The successful bidder will be expected to execute the City of Round Rock's standard contract and to furnish performance and payment bonds, all as described in the bid documents. Contractors and subcontractors shall pay to laborers,workmen,and mechanics the prevailing wage rates as determined by the City of Round Rock. A non-mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 3400 Sunrise Road, Round Rock, Texas, on June 29, 2021, at 10 a.m. Publish Dates: Round Rock Leader: June 16, 2021 June 23, 2021 00020 03-2021 Notice to Bidders 00193093 Page 1 Pfluiervi11e Pflag: June 17, 2021 June 24, 2021 00020 03-2021 Notice to Bidders 00193093 Page 1 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Prior to submitting any bid, bidders are required to read all drawings(plans), specifications, and all other Project Manual and/or Contract Documents carefully; to inform themselves by their independent research, test and investigation of the difficulties to be encountered and judge for themselves of the accessibility of the Work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the Work and the time required for its completion and obtain all information required to make a bid. The aforementioned documents may only be obtained from the City's website at the following web address: www.roundrocktexas.gov/solicitations. Bidders shall be responsible for printing or obtaining prints of the aforementioned documents as necessary. 2. Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings (plans), specifications, or other Project Manual and/or Contract Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he should notify at once the City and obtain clarification or addendum prior to submitting any bid. Any addenda issued will be posted with the documents at the web address mentioned in 1 above no later than two business days prior to the Bid Opening Date. Prior to submitting a bid,the bidder is responsible for determining if any addenda have been issued and for following any instructions required in any addenda issued. 3. It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received at the place and time named in the Notice to Bidders in the Project Manual. Bids received after the scheduled opening time will be returned unopened. 4. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes plainly marked "Sealed Bid" and showing the name of the project, the job number if applicable, and the opening date and time. 5. Bidders shall be responsible for submitting a copy of the City's Bid Form, Bid Bond Form, and Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience from the Project Manual documents posted at the web address as described in 1 above. 6. Bids shall be accompanied by a bid security consisting of a certified cashier's check in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total maximum bid price, payable without recourse to the City of Round Rock,or a bid bond in the same amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract and execute performance and payment bonds, as stipulated by item 15 below, within ten (10) days after notice of award of contract to him. Bid securities must be submitted in the same sealed envelope with the bid. Bids submitted without a bid security may not be considered at the sole discretion of the City. Page 1 00100 6-2019 Instructions to Bidders 00426487 7. If awarded the bid, bidder must submit Form 1295 on the Texas Ethics Commission (TEC) Website at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/whatsnew/elf info form1295.htm and submit the signed Form 1295 to the City Clerk at swhite roundrocktexas.gov within ten (10) business days of notification of the award. Instructions for completing a Form 1295 are attached as Exhibit "A" to the Instructions to Bidders. 8. No conditional bids will be accepted. 9. A bidder wishing to withdraw his submitted sealed bid prior to the scheduled bid opening time must do so by presenting in person a written request signed by an authorized representative of the bidder to a City employee at the location for which sealed bids are to be addressed. No telephone, facsimile, or email requests will be accepted. The City will expend the time and effort that the City in its sole discretion determines is necessary to investigate the authenticity of a request before complying with a request. The City shall in its sole discretion determine if the City will comply with a request and the City shall not be held liable for not complying with a request. If the City does not comply with a request, the request shall automatically become null and void. 10. A bidder wishing to revise his sealed bid after submittal but before the scheduled bid opening time must first withdraw his bid as provided for in the Instructions to Bidders and then submit a sealed bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. No revisions to a bid will be allowed after the scheduled bid opening time. The bidder shall be responsible for ensuring the amount of the bid security is as specified in the Instructions to Bidders. 11. All bid securities will be returned to the respective bidders within twenty-five (25) days after bids are opened, except those which the City elects to hold until the successful bidder has executed the Agreement. Thereafter, all remaining securities, including security of the successful bidder, will be returned within sixty (60) days. 12. Until the award of the contract, the City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive technicalities; to advertise for new bids; or to do the work otherwise when the best interest of the City will be thereby promoted. 1 3. In case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the statement of prices in the bids,the City reserves the right to consider the most favorable analysis thereof, or to reject the bid. Unreasonable and/or unbalanced prices submitted in a bid may result in rejection of such bid or other bids. 14. Award of the contract, if awarded, will be made within sixty (60) days after opening of the bids, and no bidder may withdraw his bid within said sixty (60) day period of time unless a prior award is made. A Notice to Proceed will be issued within sixty (60) days after contract Execution Date as defined in the General Conditions. 15. Within ten (10) days after written notification of award of the contract, the successful bidder must furnish a performance bond and a payment bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Amount. Said performance bond and payment bond Page 2 00100 6-2019 Instructions to Bidders 00426487 shall be from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas, indicating it is authorized and admitted to write surety bonds in this state. In the event the bond exceeds $100,000.00,the surety must also (1) hold a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of $100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in this state and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety or reinsurer on obligations permitted or required under federal law. In determining whether the surety or reinsurer holds a valid certificate of authority,the City may rely on the list of companies holding certificates of authority as published in the Federal Register covering the date on which the bond is to be executed. 16. Failure to execute the Agreement within ten (10) days of written notification of award or failure to furnish the performance bond and payment bond as required by item 15 above, shall be just cause for the annulment of the award. In case of annulment of the award, the bid security shall become the property of the City, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages. 17. No contract shall be binding upon the City until it has been signed by its Mayor after having been duly authorized to do so by the City Council. 18. The Contractor shall not commence Work under the Agreement until he has furnished .__., certification of all insurance required and such has been approved by the City,nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until proof of all similar insurance that is required of the subcontractor has been furnished and approved. The Contractor's insurer shall use the certificate of insurance form included in the bid documents or the standard ACORD form. 19. If the bidder's insurance company is authorized, pursuant to its agreement with bidder, to arrange for the replacement of a loss, rather than by making a cash payment directly to the City,the insurance company must furnish or have furnished by bidder,a performance bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(b), Texas Government Code, and a payment bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(c). 20. Any quantities given in any portion of the Bid Documents, including the drawings (plans), are estimates only, and the actual amount of work required may differ somewhat from the estimates. The basis for payment shall be the actual amount of work done and/or material furnished as specified in the General Conditions. 21. Bids shall be submitted on a separated contract basis.No Texas sales tax shall be included in the prices bid for materials consumed or incorporated into the Work. This contract is issued by an organization which is qualified for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Section 151.309(5)of the Texas Tax Code. The City will issue an exemption certificate to the Contractor. The Contractor must then issue a resale certificate to the material supplier Page 3 00100 6-2019 Instructions to Bidders 00426487 for materials purchased. The Contractor must have a valid sales tax permit in order to issue a resale certificate. Upon obtaining consumable materials, the Contractor will issue a resale certificate in lieu of payment of sales tax, and the following conditions shall be observed; 1) The Contractor will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporated, materials to the City at the time and point of receipt by the Contractor; 2) The Contractor will be paid for these consumable materials by the City as soon as practicable. Payment will not be made directly but considered subsidiary to the pertinent bid item. The Contractor's monthly estimate will state that the estimate includes consumables that were received during the month covered by the estimate; and 3) The designated representative of the City must be notified as soon as possible of the receipt of these materials so that an inspection can be made by the representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled as the property of the City. 22. The Contractor, after execution of the contract and pursuant to Internal Revenue Service (IRS) regulations, shall furnish its Taxpayer Identification Number(TIN)to the City. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate information on a W-9 form(which can be provided by the City upon request). This form shall be submitted directly to the City's Accounts Payable Department to ensure security of the information. 23. If the Bid Form includes Add and/or Deduct Alternate bid items and/or otherwise provides for Alternate bids, the City will determine whether to select or not select one or more of the Add and/or Deduct Alternate bid items and/or Alternate bids at the City's sole discretion and for its greatest advantage. If the City selects any Add and/or Deduct Alternate bid items, the total bid amount will be determined by adding the amount of the selected Add Alternate(s)to,and deducting the amount of the selected Deduct Alternate(s) from the Base Bid or the selected Alternate bid. Page 4 00100 6-2019 Instructions to Bidders 00426487 EXHIBIT "A" FORM 1295 INSTRUCTIONS Pursuant to newly enacted Section 2252.90 of the Texas Government Code, as of January 1, 2016, any business entity entering into a contract with a local government that requires approval of the governing body must submit a disclosure of interested parties to the local governmental prior to the execution of the contract. The Texas Ethics Commission (TEC) has adopted a form for the disclosure of interested parties (Form 1295) and has created a website application for business entities to submit the required information. The only exception to this requirement is that if a business is publicly traded they do not need to do a Form 1295. The City of Round Rock may not enter into a contract that requires the approval of the City Council until the business entity that is a party to the contract files a Form 1295 with the City Clerk. The instructions to complete Form 1295 and file it with the City Clerk are as follows: 1. Upon being notified of a bid award, the award recipient ("business entity") must go to the following website: https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/whatsnew/elf info form 1295.htm and follow the login directions on the website application to complete a Form 1295. If this is a business entity's first time logging on to the website application, the business entity must create a login Username and Password and then follow the application's instructions to complete a Form 1295. 2. The City does not have a Contract ID Number System. Please insert 000000 and the project name in this box. 3. Even if a business entity has no interested parties, Form 1295 still must be completed using the website application and filed with the City Clerk. .•. 4. Once confirmation is received that the information has been submitted, the business entity MUST print and sign the completed Form 1295. 5. The signed Form 1295 must be filed with the Clerk of the City of Round Rock within ten (10) business days of the date of notification of the award. The signed Form 1295 may be scanned and e-mailed to the City Clerk at swhite@roundrocktexas.gov. 6. Once the City Clerk receives the signed Form 1295, the City Clerk will submit confirmation of receipt through the TEC website application within thirty (30) days of the filing of Form 1295 by the business entity. 7. This process must be followed for each contract a business entity enters into with the City of Round Rock including Supplementals and Change Orders. 8. A Form 1295 cannot be handwritten. It must be completed electronically through the TEC website application. 9. If you have any questions regarding the process of filing of Form 1295,please contact: Sara White,City Clerk 221 East Main Street Round Rock,Texas 78664 Phone: (512)218-5404 Fax: (512)218-7097 E-mail: swhite@roundrocktexas.gov June 2019 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AMA Document A310 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE B-5 Construction Company, Inc. P. O. Drawer 1488, Magnolia, TX 77353-1488 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Harco National Insurance Company 4200 Six Forks Road, Suite 1400, Raleigh, NC 27609 a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF ROUND ROCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Five Percent of Amount Bid Dollars ($ 5% ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally,firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has submitted a bid for CITY OF ROUND ROCK LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, Project No. LCSCB NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and materials furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 13th day of July , 2021 B-5 Construction Company, I. Pri ..al) (Seal) (Witness) (Tide) o'•P\,,N UR.'•., Q`'• '••tip Harco Nation I suranc ompany arvai inpLA (00;,--144.31, &: : S E A L Surety) (s oaf) � (Witness) Aa Adorn,y-in- of Rebecca Garza It ife) AIA DOCUMENT A310•BID BOND•AIA•FEBRUARY 1970 ED.•THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 N.Y.AVE.,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 POWER OF ATTORNEY HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY Member companies of IAT Insurance Group,Headquartered:702 Oberlin Road,Raleigh,North Carolina 27605 Bond# Bid Bond Principal B-5 Construction Company, Inc. Obligee CITY OF ROUND ROCK KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Illinois,and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Jersey,and having their principal offices located respectively in the cities of Rolling Meadows,Illinois and Newark,New Jersey,do hereby constitute and appoint Rebecca Garza their true and lawful attomey(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,which are or may be allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,as fully and amply,to all intents and purposes,as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by their regularly elected officers at their principal offices. This Power of Attorney is executed,and may be revoked,pursuant to and by authority of the By-Laws of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY and is granted under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly held on the 20th day of July,2010 and by the Board of Directors of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting held on the 13th of December,2018 "RESOLVED,that(1)the Chief Executive Officer, President, Executive Vice President,Vice President,or Secretary of the Corporation shall have the power to appoint,and to revoke the appointments of,Attorneys-in-Fact or agents with power and authority as defined or limited in their respective powers of attorney, and to execute on behalf of the Corporation and affix the Corporation's seal thereto, bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other written obligations in the nature thereof or related thereto; and(2)any such Officers of the Corporation may appoint and revoke the appointments of joint-control custodians, agents for acceptance of process, and Attorneys-in-fact with authority to execute waivers and consents on behalf of the Corporation;and(3)the signature of any such Officer of the Corporation and the Corporation's seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certification given for the execution of any bond,undertaking,recognizance,contract of indemnity or other written obligation in the nature thereof or related thereto, such signature and seals when so used whether heretofore or hereafter, being hereby adopted by the Corporation as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Corporation,to be valid and binding upon the Corporation with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." w..�.w..,� IN WITNESS WHEREOF,HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents on this 13th day of July,2021 OM STATE OF NEW JERSEY STATE OF ILLINOIS ;•pap �y'•; C►#5931Zgi` Coun of Essex =�=yo �r�ti%�'� SEAL� ty County of Cook i n 1904 � SiEnA4L :p0% = dabZ d'+ti tlNO"464/ + � Kenneth Chapman '•�y�''""'' 1 •`� Executive Vice President,Harco National Insurance Company �'''�•*••''�� and International Fidelity Insurance Company On this 13th day of July,2021 ,before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument,to me personally known,and, being by me duly sworn,said he is the therein described and authorized officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY;that the seals affixed to said instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies;that the said Corporate Seals and his signature were duly affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies. ` ��A.�go*, ,� IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand affixed my Official Seal,at the City of Newark, `Q�;••�a••.a..,j►.,� New Jersey the day and year first above written. T WO" 1,7 i +0 1, 11:. •,A01300 , J o.` Shirelle A.Outley a Notary Public of New Jersey mot My Commission Expires April 4,2023 CERTIFICATION I,the undersigned officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit,and the copy of the Sections of the By-Laws of said Companies as set forth in said Power of Attorney,with the originals on file in the home office of said compr4os,and that the same are correct transcripts thereof,and of the whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been reaoked and is now in full force and effect. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand this 13th day of Juiy,2021 . „ . C2xe p""liv Irene Martins,Assistant Secretary VER2 2/2019 e-POA-Single_Principal-Obligee IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para presentar una queja: You may contact Harco National Insurance Company Usted puede comunicarse con su Harco National at: Insurance Company al: 1-800-333-4167 1-800-333-4167 You may also write to: Harco National Insurance Usted tambien puede escribir a Harco National Company do IAT Surety at: Insurance Company do IAT Surety at: Attn: Claims Department Attn: Claims Department One Newark Center,20th Floor One Newark Center,20th Floor Newark,NJ 07102 Newark,NJ 07102 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de to obtain information on companies,coverages,rights Texas para obtener informacion acerca de companias, or complaints at: coberturas,derechos o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P.O.Box 149104 P.O.Box 149104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512)490-1007 Fax:(512)490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.gov Web:www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail:ConsumerProtectiontdi.texas.gov E-mail:ConsumerProtection( tdi.texas.gov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS 0 RECLAMOS: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un or about a claim you should contact the agent or the reclamo,debe comunicarse con el agente o la compania company first.If the dispute is not resolved,you may primero.Si no se resuelve la disputa,puede entonces contact the Texas Department of Insurance. comunicarse con el departamento(TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU FIANZA DE GARANTIA: This notice is for information only and does not Este aviso es solo para proposito de information y no become a part or condition of the attached document. se convierte en parte o condition del documento adjunto. CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1of1 Complete Nos.1-4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos.1,2,3,5,and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form,and the city,state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2021-777195 B-5 CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC., MAGNOLIA, TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 07/12/2021 being filed. CITY OF ROUND ROCK Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract,and provide a description of the services,goods,or other property to be provided under the contract. 000000 LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested Party City,State,Country(place of business) (check applicable) Controlling Intermediary BELL JR.,CECIL MAGNOLIA,TX United States X , 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. El 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is �� J and date of birth is to to L)(..Y'T5 my �?' My address is ?O55 eed #ock1 [kOflLlLC& , V , q/J55 , . (street) V (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in R County, State of TJLI3 ,on the , day of ,20 0-1 . (mont (year) / 4 _'0'41 4Signature of •uthorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) t providedby Forms Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.1.ceffd98a BID FORM PROJECT NAME: Lake Creek Pump Station - Chlorine System Improvements PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas OWNER: City of Round Rock, Texas DATE: Gentlemen: Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to do all the Work, to furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, insurance and miscellaneous items, to complete all the Work on which he bids as provided by the attached Bid Documents, and as shown on the plans for the construction of the Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements and binds himself on acceptance of this bid to execute the Agreement and bond for completing said Work within the time stated, for the following prices, to wit: Any addenda issued will be posted with the Project Manual and/or Contract Documents on the City's website at roundrocktexas.gov/solicitations by the close of business on '1l 51 au o-1 . Prior to submitting a bid, the bidder is responsible for determining if any addenda have been issued and for following any instructions in any addenda issued. Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda by listing Addendum "number" and "date". l 11 I 1 XA BASE BID Bid Approx. Item Description Item Quantit Unit and Written Unit Price Unit Price Amount 1 1 LS Construction of the Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements, complete in place � h;v1/42 rper for c� `� hue dollars and ` z3q;�' t Q cents. 1 `_ 00300-9-2015 Page 1 of 2 Bid Form TOTAL 'SASE BID (Items 1 thru1(00 Materials: 7choi5C5: - Aill Other Charges: 3 b3, 739, * Total: 1, /6o, * Note: This total must be the same amount as shown above for "Total tase BEd" If this bid is accepted, the undersigned agrees to execute the Agreement and provide necessary bonds and insurance certification as per the Instructions to Bidders. The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in the bid have been carefully checked and are submitted as correct and final. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and may waive any informalities or technicalities. Respectfully Submitte. Ade.40 4Aajiiff, 15-5 to-ne-kzm C. 16 nre dt(fUi 6th Jve. 0. NH utho "1/1/1353 Print Nane Address v \ha PceNclukl- 35e-3Z(o Title Telephone 'YYG coosAtoc.\-ton Name of Firm i6t 0A ) 11.11,1 Date Secretary, if Biler is a Corporation 00200-9-2015 Page 2 of 2 Bid Form Solicitation Requirements, Contract Forms & Conditions of Contract Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience Section 00410 Bidder must submit a signed Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience form with his Bid; failure to do so will constitute an incomplete Bid that may be rejected. In order to make a responsive Bid, Bidder must provide evidence that it meets minimum OSHA construction safety program requirements, has not been fined by OSHA for any willful safety violations in the past three years, and has a lost time injury rate that doesn't exceed the limits established below. All questions must be answered and data given must be clear and comprehensive. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. Company Name: B 5 @0n6*(\)chor) CO.\ Address: P.o. ‘;14)0)( I nry.top 4 —0 13'hone: 'al— 3 5Z1ot/ ti Completed by: 6 Q,a-t) . Date: f)1(3 'dcQ-( 1. Does the company have a written construction Safety program? tkes Ei No 2. Does the company conduct construction safety inspections? lAYes 11 No 3. Does the company have an active construction safety-training program? Yes ❑No 4. Has the company been fined by OSHA for any willful safety violations in the past OYes tykNo three years? 5. Does the company have a lost time injury rate of 7.8 for SIC 15,or 7.6 for SIC 16, XYes ❑No or less over the past three years? Attach the company's OSHA 200/300 logs for the past three years. 6. Does the company or affected subcontractors have competent persons in the following Areas? A. Scaffolding 54Yes ONo ON/A B. Excavation 0Yes ONo ON/A C. Cranes fitYes ONo ON/A D. Electrical 5glYes ONo ON/A E. Fall Protection 2IYes ONo ON/A F. Confined Spaces Sies ONo ON/A I hereby certify that the above information is true and correct. Signature .,/ e► Title VA., �{61 ktva- Page 1 00410 8-2014 Statement of Bidder's Safety Experience 00090654 Attention: This form contains information relating OSHA's to employee health and must be used in a manner Form 01/2004) that protects the confidentiality ty of employees to theYear 2020 4<t* ri extent possible while the information is being used Log of for occupational U.S. Department of Labor ® oc upa i nal safety and health purposes. Occupational Safety and Health Administration You must record information about every work-related injury or illness that involves loss of consciousness,restricted work activity or job transfer,days away from work,or medical treatment Form _ approved OMB no.1218 0176 beyond first aid.You must also record significant work-related injuries and illnesses that are diagnosed by a physician or licensed health care professional. You must also record work-related injuries and illnesses that meet any of the specific recording criteria listed in 29 CFR 1904.8 through 1904.12. Feel free to use two lines for a single case if you need to.You must complete an . Establishment name B-5 CONSTRUCTION.INC injury and illness incident report(OSHA Form 301)or equivalent form for each injury or illness recorded on this form. If you're not sure whether a case is recordable,call your local OSHA office for help. City MAGNOLIA State TEXAS Identify the person Desaibe the case Classify the case Enter the number of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) CHECK ONLY ONE box for each case based on days the or ill Check the"injury"column or choose onetype y injuredof Case Employee's Name Job Title (e.g., Date of Where the event occurred(e.g. Describe injury or illness,parts of body affected, the most serious outcome for that case: worker was: illness: No. Welder) injury or Loading dock north end) and object/substance that directly injured or made onset of person ill(e.g.Second degree burns on right (M) ill P.. a)illness forearm from acetylene torch) On job Days ay Away ((mo./day) deathRemained at E from woFromt or ? �o ._ restriction o o g m -10, C. Job transfer Other record- Work (days) e' o •E•= .c ca.mo •.c o or restriction able cases (days) BA2 c•o g [a U a I Q (G) (H) , (I) _ (J) (K) (L) (1) (2) (3) r (4) (5) (6) 1 Page totals o 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 o Be sure to transfer these totals to the Summary (Form 300A)beforeyoupost it. .° '2 .2...-. .- 0 c o co g J V)) Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 14 minutes per response,includingtime b`� •15; o z c° c po 9po � o a. .c :-=-_. to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,andcomplete andreviewcollection .c °'v g t eede, co p ete the of information. ce .. a) a 3 Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control cn I o number. If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact: US -' Department of Labor,OSHA Office of Statistics,Room N-3644,200 Constitution Ave,NW,Washington,DC 20210. Do not send the completed forms to this office. Page 1 of 1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) t - : ',.‘s, s,,.„„, ,„s,,-,,L..,,,,,•,,,,,,',,,,,,,„•„,,,,• •.,,,,..'- ,-., ,s-,,:‘,,,,%•:-.,,&-,,',\,',,,„,,,:,,,-,,,,\,\,,s, ,.-‘,,:,\.‘,--,,,,','‘,'.:,,,,,-\',,,,,,-.\''.r,:-.:\t'-,-',,,,,,'-,,n‘s-,,,,:','S ,\."',,,,r k.‘;':g,,%‘-‘,.',:.44,s,,,,i,,,-esiN,1*i,r,,,i'ail,I.',.itAsk.A.:4LII,,\,,:„;,:iW.'i'.,,,,,,,i,,,,,I*,:,Apa*,&,. • Ii OSHA's Form 300A (Rev.01/2004) Year 2020 (*. Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses U.S.Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Form approved OMB no.1218-0176 All establishments covered by Part 1904 must complete this Summary page,even if no injuries or illnesses occurred during the year. Remember to review the Log to verify that the entries are complete Using the Log,count the individual entries you made for each category. Then write the totals below, Establishment information making sure you've added the entries from every page of the log. If you had no cases write"0." Employees former employees,and their representatives have the right to review the OSHA Form 300 in Your establishment name 8-5 Construction,Inc its entirety. They also have limited access to the OSHA Form 301 or its equivalent. See 29 CFR 1904.35,in OSHA's Recordkeeping rule,for further details on the access provisions for these forms. Street 30355 Old Hockley Road City Magnolia State Texas Zip 77355 Number of Cases Industry description(e.g.,Manufacture of motor truck trailers) Total number of Total number of Total number of cases Total number of Waste Water Construction deaths cases with days with job transfer or other recordable away from work restriction cases Standard Industrial Classification(SIC),if known(e.g.,SIC 3715) 0 0 0 0 (G) (H) (I) (.1) OR North American Industrial Classification(NAILS),if known(e.g.,336212) 2 3 7 1 0 0 Number of Days Employment information Total number of Total number of days of days away from job transfer or restriction Annual average number of employees 49 work Total hours worked by all employees last 0 0 year 69753 (K) (L) Injury and Illness Types Sign here Total number of... Knowingly falsifying this document may result in a fine. (M) (1) Injury 0 (4) Poisoning 0 (2) Skin Disorder 0 (5) Hearing Loss 0 I certify that I have examined this document and that to the best of my knowledge the entries are true,accurate,and (3) Respiratory Condition 0 (6)All Other Illnesses 0 complete. Company executive Title Post this Summary page from February 1 to April 30 of the year following the year covered by the form Phone Date Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 58 minutes per response,including time to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information.Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact:US Department of Labor,OSHA Office of Statistics,Room N-3644,200 Constitution Ave,NW,Washington,DC 20210.Do not send the completed forms to this office. Attention: This form contains information relating HA's to employee health and must be used in a manner Form 300 01/2004) at protects the confidentiality of employees to theYear 2019 (*.? Log nj ■ extent possible while the information is being used of Work-Related of Labor es and Illnesses for occupational safety and health purposes. U.S. Department Occupational Safety and Health Administration You must record information about every work-related injury or illness that involves loss of consciousness,restricted work activity or job transfer,days away from work,or medical treatment Form approved OMB no.1218-0176 beyond first aid. You must also record significant work-related injuries and illnesses that are diagnosed by a physician or licensed heath care professional.You must also record work-related injuries and illnesses that meet any of the specific recording criteria listed in 29 CFR 1904.8 through 1904.12. Feel free to use two lines for a single case if you need to.You must complete an Establishment name B-5 Construction,Inc injury and illness incident report(OSHA Form 301)or equivalent form for each injury or illness recorded on this form. If you're not sure whether a case is recordable,call your local OSHA office for help. City Magnolia State Texas Identify the person Describe the case Classify the case Enter the number of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) CHECK ONLY ONE box for each case based on days the or ill Check the"injury"column or choose one type of Y injured Case Employee's Name Job Title (e.g., Date of Where the event occurred(e.g. Describe injury or illness,parts of body affected, the most serious outcome for that case: worker was: illness: No. Welder) injury or Loading dock north end) and object/substance that directly injured or made onset of person ill(e.g.Second de ree burns on r� ht (ICI)9 9 ,,. �. v, illness forearm from acetylene torch) On job �/ �, cu 3 Away it o lda . ea mi(mo Y) fronwork �. � From o o c � —1 -' restriction .�, o•o •_ co sc a, Job transferOther record- Work (days) ° li. •� � o or restriction able cases (days) -2. 5 O o 0 I (G) , (H) (I) (J) (K) i (L) (1) (2) I (3) (4) (5) (6) 1 Natividad Villanueva Laborer 01-19-2019 Sienna Treatment Plant Pain in Lower Back 4 5 1 Page totals o 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Be sure to transfer these totals to the Summarypage(Form 300A)beforeyoupost it. �' e D o•_ .... . gi O E:65 O Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 14 minutes per response,including time .0 .A •o .c Ea.to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information. .G cu Cii Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currentlyvalid OMB control cn I Y o number. If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact: US — a Department of Labor,OSHA Office of Statistics,Room N-3644,200 Constitution Ave,NW,Washington,DC 20210. Do not send the completed forms to this office. Page 1 of 1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) -:\ \ \ ♦ '�' .\ fir:' •\\, \ .\ \\. ,h- ♦: .\ w �ti\ `\. < \ :\•\ \vim:\\,.. \� \ :\ \\ \ \� �\ v v,•`Z \' .\ .\- \cam \ \� �\: •�. •\� \. \ \ \ '� ,.ate.. �• :. tti I„, ,ii._;Ill , OSHA's Form 300A (Rev.01/2004) Year,bI41 Summary of WorkReIated Injuries and Illnesses U.S.Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Form approved OMB no 1218-0176 All establishments covered by Part 1904 must complete this Summary page,even if no injuries or illnesses occurred during the year Remember to review the Log to verify that the entries are complete Using the Log,count the individual entries you made for each category. Then write the totals below, Establishment information making sure you've added the entries from every page of the log. If you had no cases write"0." Employees former employees,and their representatives have the right to review the OSHA Form 300 in Your establishment name B-5 Construction,Inc. its entirety. They also have limited access to the OSHA Form 301 or its equivalent. See 29 CFR 1904.35,in OSHA's Recordkeeping rule,for further details on the access provisions for these forms. Street 30355 Old Hockley Road Number of Cases City Magnolia State Texas Zip 77355 Industry description(e.g.,Manufacture of motor truck trailers) Total number of Total number of Total number of cases Total number of Utility Construction deaths cases with days with job transfer or other recordable away from work restriction cases Standard Industrial Classification(SIC),if known(e.g.,SIC 3715) 0 1 5 1 (G) (H) (I) (J) OR North American Industrial Classification(NAICS),if known(e.g.,336212) 2 3 7 1 0 0 Number of Days Employment information Total number of Total number of days of days away from job transfer or restriction Annual average number of employees 56 work Total hours worked by all employees last _ 4 5 year 87252.75 (K) (L) Injury and Illness Types Sign here Total number of... Knowingly falsifying this document may result in a fine. (M) (1) Injury 1 (4) Poisoning 0 (2) Skin Disorder 0 (5) Hearing Loss 0 (3) Respiratory I certify that I have examined this document and that to the best of my knowledge the entries are true,accurate,and Condition 0 (6)All Other Illnesses 0 complete. Company executive Title Post this Summary page from February 1 to April 30 of the year following the year covered by the form Phone Date Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 58 minutes per response,including time to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information.Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact:US Department of Labor.OSHA Office of Statistics,Room N-3644,200 Constitution Ave,NW,Washington,DC 20210.Do not send the completed forms to this office. Attention: This form contains information relating ® to employee health and must be used in a manner OSHAs Form 300 Rev.01/2004 that protects the confidentiality of employees to theYear 2018 (;)* nj ® extent possible while the information is being used Log of for occupational safetyand health purposes. U.S. Department of Labor ® p p � Occupational Safety and Health Administration You must record information about every work-related injury or illness that involves loss of consciousness,restricted work activity or job transfer,days away from work,or medical treatment _ Form approved OMB no.1218-0176 beyond first aid.You must also record significant work-related injuries and illnesses that are diagnosed by a physician or licensed health care professional. You must also record work-related injuries and illnesses that meet any of the specific recording criteria listed in 29 CFR 1904.8 through 1904.12. Feel free to use two lines for a single case if you need to. You must complete an . Establishment name B-5 CONSTRUCTION.INC injury and illness incident report(OSHA Form 301)or equivalent form for each injury or illness recorded on this form. If you're not sure whether a case is recordable,call your local OSHA office for help. City MAGNOLIA State TEXAS tdentifythe person Describe the case Classify the case Enter the number of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) CHECK ONLY ONE box for each case based on days the injured or illCheck the 'u " y � "injury"column or choose one type of Case Employee's Name Job Title (e.g., Date of Where the event occurred(e.g. Describe injury or illness,parts of body affected, the most serious outcome for that case: worker was: illness: No. Welder) injury or Loading dock north end) and object/substance that directly injured or made onset of person ill(e.g.Second degree bums on right (M) a 2 illness forearm from acetylene torch) On job Days away' Away o c (mo/da a Remained at work transfer or P. o .— , - •. , From restriction o o g cd, ..., Work o .-- g Job transfer Other record- (days) E,o •c o . 3 � � o •or restriction able cases (days) •—, o c to x U a. 2 (G) , (H) (I) (J) (K) (L) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1 JOSE MEXICANO LABORER 7/31/18 SIENNA PLANTATION CEMENT IN EYE 3 3 1 2 GORDON ROHRBACKER SUPERVISOR 12/20/18 SIENNA PLANTATION HIT THUMB WITH HAMMER 5 5 1 Pagetotals 0 8 0 0 8 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 Be sure to transfer these totals to the Summary Form 300A beforeyou ost it. 0 ) p 2 v a._ ._ 'c pE.- o ca .a o � � c Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 14 minutes per response,including time p E •o F--- to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information. • ce 43 Persons are not required torespond the f i i n nl � I eq s�d to o nformat o unless it displays a currently valid OMB controlti number. If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact: US -.Q1 Department of Labor,OSHA Office of Statistics,Room N-3644,200 Constitution Ave,NW,Washington,DC 20210. Do not send the completed forms to this office. Page 1 of 1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) a `11 'rl� J lii OSHA's Form 300A (Rev.01/2004) Year 2018 • Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses U.S.Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Form approved OMB no.1218-0176 All establishments covered by Part 1904 must complete this Summary page,even if no injuries or illnesses occurred during the year. Remember to review the Log to verify that the entries are complete Using the Log,count the individual entries you made for each category. Then write the totals below, Establishment information making sure you've added the entries from every page of the log. If you had no cases write"0." Employees former employees,and their representatives have the right to review the OSHA Form 300 in Your establishment name B-5 Construction,lnc its entirety. They also have limited access to the OSHA Form 301 or its equivalent. See 29 CFR 1904.35,in OSHA's Recordkeeping rule,for further details on the access provisions for these forms. Street 30355 Old Hockley Road Number of Cases City Magnolia State Texas Zip 77355 Industry description(e.g.,Manufacture of motor truck trailers) Total number of Total number of Total number of cases Total number of Waste Water Construction deaths cases with days with job transfer or other recordable away from work restriction cases Standard Industrial Classification(SIC),if known(e.g.,SIC 3715) 0 8 0 0 (G) (H) (I) (.1) OR North American Industrial Classification(NAILS),if known(e.g.,336212) 2 3 7 1 0 0 Number of Days Employment information Total number of Total number of days of days away from job transfer or restriction Annual average number of employees 52 work Total hours worked by all employees last 8 0 year 70793.95 (K) (L) Injury and Illness Types Sign here Total number of... Knowingly falsifying this document may result in a fine. (M) (1) Injury 2 (4) Poisoning 0 (2) Skin Disorder 0 (5) Hearing Loss 0 (3) Respiratory I certify that I have examined this document and that to the best of my knowledge the entries are true,accurate,and Condition 0 (6)All Other Illnesses 0 complete. Company executive Title Post this Summary page from February 1 to April 30 of the year following the year covered by the form Phone Date Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 58 minutes per response,including time to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information.Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact:US Department of Labor,OSHA Office of Statistics.Room N-3644,200 Constitution Ave,NW,Washington,DC 20210.Do not send the completed forms to this office. �yaizS/pV5�fi1�� City of Round Rock,Texas Contract Forms Standard Form of Agreement: Section 00500 City of Round Rock, Texas Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor tJIt'sIt' AGREEMENT made as of the )day of 1511r4A VAL in the year 204. BETWEEN the Owner: City of Round Rock,Texas(hereafter"Owner"or"City") 221 East Main Street Round Rock,Texas 78664 and the Contractor Cor6kO *icc CO, 1 ("Contractor") 0 ZO Y. I Li Ca.(2) The Project is described as: Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements .•�. The Engineer is: John Buser Assoc.Vice President AECOM 512-457-7701 For and in consideration of the mutual terms, conditions and covenants of this Agreement and all accompanying documents between Owner and Contractor, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged,Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE I THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement,other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement;these form the Contract,and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements, either written or oral.An enumeration of the Contract Documents,other than Modifications,appears in Article 7. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents,except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. 00500 4-2020 Page 1 of 5 Standard Form of Agreement 00443647 ? 2D24 .2 ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT;DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION;DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a Notice to Proceed issued by Owner. 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date delineated in the Notice to Proceed. 3.3 Contractor shall commence Work within seven (7 ) calendar days from the date delineated in the Notice to Proceed. 3.4 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the items of Work listed on Attachment A to this Agreement no later than two hundred twenty-six ( 226 )calendar days from issuance by Owner of Notice to Proceed, and Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work no later than two hundred twenty-six (226 )calendar days from issuance by Owner of Notice to Proceed,subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. 3.5 If Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)on or before the date(s)specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement,Contractor shall pay to Owner,as liquidated damages, the sum of one thousand and No/100 Dollars($ 1000.00 )for each calendar day that Substantial Completion is delayed after the date(s) specified for Substantial Completion. It is hereby agreed that the liquidated damages to which Owner is entitled hereunder are a reasonable forecast of just compensation for the harm that would be caused by Contractor's failure to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)on or before the date(s)specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement and is not a penalty. It is agreed that the harm that would be caused by such failure, which includes loss of expected use of the Project areas,provision of alternative storage facilities and rescheduling of moving and occupancy dates,is one that is incapable or very difficult of accurate estimation.It is hereby agreed that if Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)is not achieved on or before thirty(30)days after the date(s) specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement, the Owner shall have the option to either collect liquidated damages as set forth herein or to thereafter rely on its remedies under the Contract Documents and at law and in equity, including without limitation, the recovery of actual damages. The date(s) specified for Substantial Completion of the Work(or any portion thereof)in the Agreement shall be subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents. 3.6 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the entire Work no later than two hundred forty-two (242 )calendar days from issuance by Owner of Notice to Proceed. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for Contractor's full and complete performance of the Work and all of Contractor's obligations under this Agreement. The Contract Sum shall be one-million,one hundred sixty thousand,two hundred and thirty nine dollars ($ 1,160,239.00 ),subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 Does the Contract Sum include alternates which are described in the Bid Form? No X . Yes .Ifyes,please provide details below: 00500 4-2020 Page 2 of 5 Standard Form of Agreement 4 00443647 ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to Engineer and Owner by Contractor,and Certificates for Payment issued by Engineer and not disputed by Owner and/or Owner's lender,Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to Contractor as provided below, in Article 14 of the General Conditions, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month. 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by Engineer and Owner, and Engineer issues a Certificate of Payment not later than the tenth (loth)day of a month, Owner shall make payment to Contractor of amounts approved by the Owner not later than the tenth(10th)day of the next month.If an Application for Payment is received by Engineer and Owner after the application date fixed above,payment shall be made by Owner not later than one month after the Engineer issues a Certificate for Payment. The Owner shall not have any obligation to pay any amount covered by the Engineer's Certificate for Payment that is disputed by the Owner. 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as Engineer and Owner may require.This schedule,unless objected to by Engineer or Owner, shall be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall warrant the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. 5.1.7 Except with Owner's prior written approval, Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by Owner to Contractor when: .1 Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for Contractor's responsibility to correct Work, and to satisfy other requirements,if any,which extend beyond final payment;and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by Engineer and approved by the Owner. 5.2.2 Owner's final payment to Contractor shall be made no later than thirty (30) days after the issuance of Engineer's final Certificate for Payment. In no event shall final payment be required to be made prior to thirty(30) days after all Work on the Contract has been fully performed.Defects in the Work discovered prior to final payment shall be treated as non-conforming Work and shall be corrected by Contractor prior to final payment,and shall not be treated as warranty items. ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by Owner or Contractor as provided in Article 15 of the General Conditions. 00500 4-2020 Page 3 of 5 Standard Form of Agreement 00443647 6.2 The Work may be suspended by Owner as provided in Article 15 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 7 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents,except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,are enumerated as follows: 7.1.1 The Agreement is this executed version of the City of Round Rock, Texas Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor,as modified. 7.1.2 The General Conditions are the "City of Round Rock Contract Forms 00700," General Conditions, as modified. 7.1.3 The Supplementary,Special,and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated July 2021 7.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated July 2021 7.1.5 The Drawings, if any,are those contained in the Project Manual dated July 2021 7.1.6 The Insurance&Construction Bond Forms of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated July 2021 7.1.7 The Notice to Bidders,Instructions to Bidders,Bid Form,and Addenda,if any,are those contained in the Project Manual dated July 2021 7.1.8 If this Agreement covers construction involving federal funds, thereby requiring inclusion of mandated contract clauses, such federally required clauses are those contained in the "City of Round Rock Contract Forms 03000,"Federally Required Contract Clauses,as modified. 7.1.9 Other documents,if any,forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of any document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 8.2 Owner's representative is: Juan Martinez Engineer Associate 3400 Sunrise Rd Round Rock,TX 78665 8.3 Contractor's representative is: it,st ZRA Wc €r ,-- 19, 1135 8.4 Neither Owner's nor Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten(10)days'written notice to the other party. 00500 4-2020 Page 4 of 5 Standard Form of Agreement 00443647 8.5 Waiver of any breach of this Agreement shall not constitute waiver of any subsequent breach. 8.6 Owner agrees to pay Contractor from available funds for satisfactory performance of this Agreement in accordance with the bid or proposal submitted therefor,subject to proper additions and deductions,all as provided in the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, and Special Conditions of this Agreement, and Owner agrees to make payments on account thereof as provided therein. Lack of funds shall render this Agreement null and void to the extent funds are not available. This Agreement is a commitment of City of Round Rock's current revenues only. 8.7 Although this Agreement is drawn by Owner,both parties hereto expressly agree and assert that,in the event of any dispute over its meaning or application,this Agreement shall be interpreted reasonably and fairly,and neither more strongly for nor against either party. 8.8 This Agreement shall be enforceable in Round Rock,Texas,and if legal action is necessary by either party with respect to the enforcement of any or all of the terms or conditions herein, exclusive venue for same shall lie in Williamson County, Texas. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws and court decisions of the State of Texas. 8.9 Both parties hereby expressly agree that no claims or disputes between the parties arising out of or relating to this Agreement or a breach thereof shall be decided by an arbitration proceeding,including without limitation,any proceeding under the Federal Arbitration Act(9 USC Section 1-14)or any applicable state arbitration statute. 8.10 The parties, by execution of this Agreement, bind themselves, their heirs, successors, assigns, and legal representatives for the full and faithful performance of the terms and provisions hereof. This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least two(2) original copies,of which one is to be delivered to Owner. OWNER CONTRACTOR CITY OF !.I UND 'OCK,TEXAS &5 &/-)S-Vr0Ctn ,nc, Are. ' �,�r l J t Printed Na e: , L./ k P inted ame: • Title1\491112* Title: 1 Ct Ws)df ( )24 Date Signed: 1 1 Date Signed: V ci� l ATTEST: ifi* 2Wil/L1 102UL City Clerk FOR C Y APPROVED A'. TO FORM: -.., A IN AMP► i�I City Attorn oak00500 4-2020 Page 5 of 5 Standard Form of Agreement 00443647 00600 INSURANCE AND CONSTRUCTION BOND FORMS BONDS AND INSURANCE INSTRUCTIONS Instruction Sheet 1. Insurance Company must be licensed by State of Texas. 2. Agent signing bonds must be licensed in Texas. 3. Agent signing bonds must have Power of Attorney on behalf of insurance company. 4. If Agent signing bonds has Power of Attorney, but not licensed in Texas, then the bond must be counter-signed by Texas local recording agent. ALL THE ABOVE INFORMATION CAN BE FOUND AT Texas Department of Insurance website—www.tdi.state.tx.us 5. Make sure the dollar amount on both Performance and Payment Bonds match the amount of the Agreement & Bid Form Sheet. 6. Both Performance and Payment Bonds should be signed by Authorized Person. If the contractor is a corporation, then it should be signed by the President or the Vice-President. If the contractor is not incorporated, then it may be signed by the Owner. Please state the title of the authorized person. idol. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ,•-� Instruction Sheet 1. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE FORM The City of Round Rock's Certificate of Liability Insurance form provided herein or a standard ACORD form. 2. PRODUCER and INSURED - Please list name, address,phone number and e-mail. 3. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE — TDI number required. The TDI number can be obtained from the Texas Dept of Insurance Website: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us/.—Company Lookup. Note: Exception to this rule. In certain instances where there is unusual risks involved,Surplus Lines Insurance Carriers can be used. Below are the guidelines: a. Insurance Company does not have to be"licensed in Texas",but they do have to be"elijiible for a Texas license." Please verify with the Texas Dept of Insurance Website:http://www.tdi.state.tx.us/.—Company Lookup b. Policy has to be written by licensed surplus lines Agent. Also verify with the Texas Dept of Insurance Website:http://www.tdi.state.tx.us/-Agent Lookup 4. TYPES OF INSURANCE COVERAGE— CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT: Please double check the General Conditions and the Supplemental General Conditions for the types and amounts of insurance required. The Supplemental General Conditions usually state the following: a. Business Automobile Liability Insurance b. Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance c. Commercial General Liability Insurance d. Builders' Risk Insurance— (Generally required for all "vertical" construction. Check with Project Manager for requirements.) FOR ALL OTHER CONTRACTS, PLEASE REFER TO THE INSURANCE SECTION FOR TYPE OF INSURANCE REQUIRED. (For example Engineering Service Contracts usually require"professional liability insurance".) 5. EFFECTIVE DATE & EXPIRATION DATE Please make sure dates are current. 6. City of Round Rock must be listed on the Certificate of Insurance as an additional insured (except Workers Compensation and Builders Risk). 7. Certificate must indicate that the insurance Company must give the City of Round Rock notice of any changes, cancellation , etc. at least thirty(30) days prior to date of change. 8. Make sure Certificate is signed by an Agent Licensed in the State of Texas, this can also be found on the Texas Department of Insurance website—www.tdi.state.tx.us—Agent Lookup. BOND NO. HSHNSU0806961 PERFORMANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § That B-5 Construction Company, Inc., of the City of Magnolia, County of Montgomery, and State of Texas, as Principal, and Harco National Insurance Company authorized under the law of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS (Owner), in the penal sum of One Million One Hundred Sixty Thousand Two Hundred Thirty Nine and 00/100 Dollars ($1,160,239.00) for the payment whereof, well and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREA§4 the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Owner dated the day of , 2 to which the Agreement is hereby referred to and made a part hereo as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein consisting of: Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Agreement and shall, in all respects, duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in and by said Agreement, agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, including but not limited to, the repair of any and all defects in said work occasioned by and resulting from defects in materials furnished by or workmanship of,the Principal in performing the Work covered by said Agreement and occurring within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of Final Completion and all other covenants and conditions, according to the true intent and meaning of said Agreement and the Plans and Specifications hereto annexed,then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Page 1 00610 4-2020 Performance Bond 00443639 PERFORMANCE BOND (continued) Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the Plans, Specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement, or to the work to be performed thereunder. If Principal fails to faithfully perform said Agreement, Surety, after receipt of written notice of Principal's default,shall perform all of Principal's duties and obligations under the Agreement. If, within ten (10) days after receipt of such notice from Owner, Surety does not commence to complete the obligations of Principal with a contractor acceptable to Owner and diligently complete the performance of the Principal's duties and obligations, Owner shall have the right but not the obligation to have the duties and obligations of Principal performed. In such event, Surety shall pay to Owner, upon demand, all costs, expenses and damages sustained by Owner as a result of Principal's failure to perform its duties and obligations under the Agreement up to the sum of this Performance Bond, plus all costs and expenses, including attorney's fees and expert and consultant fees incurred by Owner to enforce its rights under this Performance Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this Pt- day of h( , 204. B-5 Construction Company, Inc. Harco National Insurance Company Pri cipal Surety V- • Jillian O'Neal Printed Name Printed Name 4110 By: ip By: Title: \ l resI Title: ttorney-in-Fact _ M_ Address: P. O. Drawer 1488 Address: One Newark Center, 20th Floor Magnolia, TX 77353-1488 Newark, NJ 07102 Resident Agent of Surety: AP, Si, •ature Jillian O'Neal c/o Technical Assurace, LLC Printed Name 26623 Oak Ridge Dr. Street Address The Woodlands, TX 77380 City, State & Zip Code Page 2 00610 4-2020 Performance Bond 00443639 BOND NO. HSHNSU0806961 PAYMENT BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § That B-5 Construction Company, Inc. , of the City of Magnolia County of Montgomery , and State of Texas , as Principal, and Harco National Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as Surety on Bonds for Principals, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF ROUND ROCK,TEXAS (OWNER), and all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics and suppliers as their interest may appear, all of whom shall have the right to sue upon this bond, in the penal sum of One Million One Hundred Sixty Thousand Two Hundred Thirty Nine and 00/100 Dollars($ 1,160,239.00 )for the payment whereof,well and truly be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS,the Principal has enter d into a certain written Agreement with the Owner, dated the 111#J. day of Beft., 2021 to which Agreement is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein consisting of: Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall well and truly pay all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics, and suppliers, all monies to them owing by said Principals for subcontracts,work, labor,equipment, supplies and materials done and furnished for the construction of the improvements of said Agreement, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Page 1 00620 04-2020 Payment Bond 00437699 PAYMENT BOND (continued) Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this l 5� day of 7,,,b.0" , 200. B-5 Construction Company, Inc. Harco National Insurance Company Principal Surety e,-Ai ia. Jillian O'Neal _ Printed ► : e Printed Name By. <.; , c By: Titl : (CL ?ics(. ' I- ' Title: Attorney-in-Fact Address:P. O. Drawer 1488 Address: One Newark Center, 20th Floor Magnolia, TX 77353-1488 Newark, NJ 07102 Resident Agent of Surety: Si ature Jillian O'Neal c/o Technical Assurace,LLC Printed Name 26623 Oak Ridge Dr. Street Address The Woodland, TX 77380 City, State & Zip Code Page 2 00620 1-2020 Payment Bond 00090656 POWER OF ATTORNEY Bond# HSHNSU0806961 HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY Member companies of IAT Insurance Group,Headquartered:702 Oberlin Road,Raleigh,North Carolina 27605 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Illinois,and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Jersey,and having their principal offices located respectively in the cities of Rolling Meadows,Illinois and Newark,New Jersey,do hereby constitute and appoint EDWARD ARENS, PHILIP BAKER, JILLIAN O'NEAL, ERICA ANNE COX, REBECCA GARZA, MICHELE BONNIN The Woodlands,TX their true and lawful attorneys)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,which are or may be allowed,required or permitted by law,statute,rule,regulation,contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY,as fully and amply,to all intents and purposes,as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by their regularly elected officers at their principal offices. This Power of Attorney is executed,and may be revoked,pursuant to and by authority of the By-Laws of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY and is granted under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly held on the 13th day of December,2018 and by the Board of Directors of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting held on the 13th day of December,2018. "RESOLVED, that (1) the Chief Executive Officer, President, Executive Vice President, Senior Vice President, Vice President, or Secretary of the Corporation shall have the power to appoint,and to revoke the appointments of,Attorneys-in-Fact or agents with power and authority as defined or limited in their respective powers of attorney, and to execute on behalf of the Corporation and affix the Corporation's seal thereto, bonds, undertakings, recognizances,contracts of indemnity and other written obligations in the nature thereof or related thereto; and(2)any such Officers of the Corporation may appoint and revoke the appointments of joint-control custodians, agents for acceptance of process, and Attorneys-in-fact with authority to execute waivers and consents on behalf of the Corporation;and(3)the signature of any such Officer of the Corporation and the Corporation's seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certification given for the execution of any bond,undertaking,recognizance,contract of indemnity or other written obligation in the nature thereof or related thereto,such signature and seals when so used whether heretofore or hereafter,being hereby adopted by the Corporation as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Corporation,to be valid and binding upon the Corporation with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN WITNESS WHEREOF,HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents on this 31st day of December,2018 %4.0TV/Atre%44iSTATE OF NEW JERSEY STATE OF ILLINOIS *'4,,, + N.'' % it 4111"44"gss County of Essex County of CookSEAL 14:\ I I oeit 4 tk11104.thers 13,\ lt�� Kenneth Chapman if SEAL .0 '44 1�� ` Executive Vice President,Harco National Insurance Company #'��#: ��'". and International Fidelity Insurance Company On this 31St day of December,2018 ,before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument,to me personally known,and, being by me duly sworn,said he is the therein described and authorized officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY;that the seals affixed to said instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies;that the said Corporate Seals and his signature were duly affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies. ‘,.E.A.0 IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand affixed my Official Seal,at the City of Newark, �. .,.•••••••••.�+ . New Jersey the day and year first above written. N. ,' I at- 'it 9 0". +oTitok.1: �• • . AL a ,„ JEc ' � Shirelle A.Outley a Notary Public of New Jersey / i''s i t i•`�� My Commission Expires April 4,2023 CERTIFICATION I,the undersigned officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit,and the copy of the Sections of the By-Laws of said Companies-as�se+"- forth in said Power of Attorney,with the originals on file in the home office of said companies,and that the same are correct transcrApis thereof,ancfa'�e. whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand on this day, A00868 ,, r I ��;�- - - Irene Martins,Assistant Secretary IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para presenter una queja: You may contact Harco National Insurance Company Usted puede comunicarse con su Harco National at: Insurance Company al: 1-800-333-4167 1-800-333-4167 You may also write to: Harco National Insurance Usted tambien puede escribir a Harco National Company c/o IAT Surety at: Insurance Company c/o IAT Surety at: Attn: Claims Department Attn: Claims Department One Newark Center,20th Floor One Newark Center,20th Floor Newark,NJ 07102 Newark,NJ 07102 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de to obtain information on companies,coverages,rights Texas para obtener information acerca de companies, or complaints at: coberturas,derechos o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P.O.Box 149104 P.O.Box 149104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Austin,TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512)490-1007 Fax: (512)490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.20v Web:www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtectiontdi.texas.2ov E-mail: ConsumerProtection( tdi.texas.gov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium Si time una dispute concerniente a su prima o a un or about a claim you should contact the agent or the reclamo,debe comunicarse con el agente o la compania company first.If the dispute is not resolved,you may primero.Si no se resuelve la dispute,puede entonces contact the Texas Department of Insurance. comunicarse con el departamento(TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU FIANZA DE GARANTIA: This notice is for information only and does not Este aviso es solo para proposito de information y no become a part or condition of the attached document. se convierte en parte o condition del documento adjunto. ACØRD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) 8/27/2021 I THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Brady,Chapman, Holland&Assoc. Inc. PHONE Certificate Processor FAX 10055 West Gulf Bank (NC.No.Ext):713-68815O0 (NC,No): Houston TX 77040 E-MAIL ecerts©bch-insurance.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 INSURED INSURER B:BITCO General Ins(BITCO) 20095 B-5 Construction Co., Inc. INSURERC: P.O. Box 1488 Magnolia TX 77353 INSURER D: INSURER E INSURER F COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:1408193481 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. IADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD NND POLICY NUMBER LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY) (MMIDD/YYYY) B X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLP3698603 11/1/2020 11/1/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $300,000 X 500 Pd Ded MED EXP(Any one person) $10,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY X LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CAP3698602 11/1/2020 11/1/2021 C(Ea accidenOMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 t] X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) B X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR CUP2817222 11/1/2020 11/1/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$inpnn $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION WC3698604 11/1/2020 11/1/2021 X AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE OTH- ER ANYPROPRIETORlPARTNERIEXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? N NfA (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 A Leased/Rented Equipment Q16600516B609TLC20 11/1/2020 11/1/2021 Limit Per Item $750,000 BuildeYs Risk Deductible $2,500 Bldrs Risk Limit $1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The policy includes blanket additional insured on the general liability induding ongoing operations and completed operations per form GL3085(10/19), automobile per form AP-0402(1O/17)and umbrella per form CUP00050119 with a waiver of subrogation on the general liability per form GL3085(10/19), automobile per form AP-0402(1O/17),umbrella per form CUP03130107 and workers compensation per form WC420304,when required by written contract. This insurance is primary and non-contributory as respects general liability per form GL3085(10/19)and umbrella per form CUP03160111 when required by written contract. Umbrella follows form underlying per form CUP00050119. Project:Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Round Rock,Texas 221 East Main Street AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Round Rock TX 78664440 I I ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Policy Number: CLP3698603 TI-us ENDOFEIVBsff CHAMES TI-E IJCY. PLEASE READ rr CAREFULLY. UT1LITY COO BND UAU COGE This endorment modifies insurance provided under the foHovving: COMVERAL GENERAL UAUTY COVERAGE FOR1IA It is agreed that the provisions listed below apply only upon the entry of an X in the box next to the caption of such provision. A X Partnership and Jdnt Verdure Extension M. X Construction Project Gervral Aggregate Limits B. I X I Contractors Automatic Additional Irsured Coverage—Ongoing Cerations N. X I Fellow Errployee Coverage C. I X Automatic V\iiver of Subrogation 0. 1 X I care,Custody or Control D. I X I Extended Notice of Cancellation, P. ( X I 8ronic Data Liability Coverage Nonreneval Q. X Consohdated Insurance Program Residual E j X Unintentional Failure to Disclose Hazards Liability Coverage F. X Broadened Mobfle Equipment R X Automatic Additional Insureds—Managers or Lessors of Premises G. I X Personal and Mvertng Injury- Contractual Coverage S. I X I Autorratic Additional Insureds—State or Govemnental Agenc,or Political H. X I Norvrrployment Discrimination Subdivisions—Perrrits or Authorizations I. I X Liquor Liability T. X Contractors Automatic Additional Insured Coverage—Coneted Operatics J. X Broadened Conditions U. X Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects K X Automatic Additional Insureds— or Surveyors Equipment Leases L I X IInsuredContractExtension-Railroad Property and Construction Contracts A PARTNEFHIP AND JOINT VENTURE EXTENSION The following provision is added to SEC11ON II-V*IO IS AN INSURED The last full Paragraph which reads as fellows: No person or organisation is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations. is deleted and replaced with the foHovting: ,- -- With respect to the conduct of any past or present joint venture or partnership not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations and of which you are or were a partner or member, you are an inured, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your wank" on behalf of any partnership or jouit venture not shown as a Named Insured in the Edarations, pro'Aded no other similar liability GL-3085(1O/19) -1- insurance is available to you for "your work" in connection with your interest in such partnership or joint venture. B. COAC AODONAL IN CGE—ONGOING OPONS SECTION II —V*IO IS AN IN&JRED is amended to induce as an addition insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury', "property dange" or "personal and advertising injury' caused, in whole or in part,by: 1. Your acts or onissions;or 2. Theactsoroonsofthcseactingonyourbehaff; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional irsured(s) at the project(s)designated in the written contract. Wth awed to the insurance afforded to these additional insur&Js, the following additional exdusions aPPIY This insurance does not apply to"bodily injury"or"property damage"occurring after: 1. All work, induding materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than serce, mantenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s)at the locaticn of the covered operations has been conpleted;or 2. That portion of "your wrk' out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in perforning operations for a prindI as a part of the same project. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and v.e will not require contnbution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contnbutory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or addition insured, this insurance will be excess. C. AO11CWAJVEROFJBROGA11ON Item S. of SEON W-COL GENERAL. LIABILITY CONOmONS, is deleted and replaced wththefollovting: & Transfer of Fights of Recovery Agaimt Others to Us and Automatic Waiver of abrogation. a If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment v have nude under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us. The insured met do nothing after loss to impair those rights. At our request, the insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. b. If required by a written contract executed prior to loss, we waive any right of recovery we may have aganst any person or organisation because of payrrents we make for injury or darn arising out of"your work"for that passel or organisation. GL-385(1O/19) -2- 1 D. EXTB4DED NO11E of cANcaLA11ON,NONRENEWAL 1 Item A.2.b. of the COMVION POLICY CONOONS ,is deleted and replaced with the following: Alb. 60 days before the effective date of the cancellation if we canc for any other reason. Item 9. of SEON W-COL GL UAEUUTY CONDONS, is deleted and reaced with the folloWng: 'I 9. M-IEN WE DO NOT RB1EW a If ve choose to nonrenew this policy, ve will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If vie do not give notice of our intent to nonrenew as prescribed in a abase, it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a ndniim additional sixty(60) days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwse prohibited by law, the e)dsting terms, conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not otherwse prohibited by law, this one time sixty day extension is the sole remedy and liquidated darmges available to the insured as a result of our failure to give the notice as prescribed in 9.a above. E LNNTEI\fl1ONAL FAILURE TO DILOSE HAZARDS Although we relied on your representations as to e)asting and past hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to disclose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, ve will not dear coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. F. BROADENED MOBiLE E( JIPIVBff Item 1Zb. of SECTION V-DEF1NONS ,is deleted and r-•aced with the followng: 1Zb. Vehicles rmintained for use solely on or next to prenises, sites or lcxBtions you own, rent or cupy. G. PENAL AID ADVER11SING INJURY-CONTRAC1UAL COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e. of SECTION I,COVERAGE B is deleted. K NONENPLOY1VENT DRIMNA11ON Unless"personal and advertisnig injury'is exduded from this policy: Item 14.of SECTION V-DEF1NONS ,is amended to inducts: "Personal and advertising injury" also means embarrassment or humiliation, mental or errotional distress, physical physical inpalrment, loss of earning capacity or monetary loss, which is caused by"discrimination." SECTION V-DEF1NCNS ,is amended to inducts: "Discrimination" means the unlawful treatment of individuals based on race,color,ethnic origin,age, gender or religion. GL-3085(1O/19) -3- Item 2 Exdusior of SECTION I,COVERAGE B ,is amerced to include: "Personal and advertising injury11 arising out of "discrimination" directly or indirectly related to the past employment, ernplorent or prospective enp1oyment of any Person or class of Persons by any insured; "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of "disairrtirration" by or at your, your agents or your "employees"direction or with your,your agents or your"employees"knowledge or consent; "Personal and advertising injury' arising out of "disaiminatiai" directly or indirectly rebated to the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any dwelling, permanent lodging or premises by or at the direction of any insured;or Fines, penalties, spfic performance or injunctions levied or imposed by a governmental entity, or governmental code,law,or statute because of"discrimination." I. UCJOR UABILITY Exdusion Zc. of SECTION I,COVERAGE A ,is deleted. J. BAOADEDCONDONS Items Za and Z SEON IV-COMVAL GAL LIABILITY COONS, e deleted and replaced with the following: 2. Dudes In The Event Of Occurrence,Offense,Clam Or&iit a You rrust see to it that vte are notified of an"occurrence" or an offense whith may result in a claim as soon as practicable after the "occurrence" has been reported to you, one of your officers or an"errployee"designated to give notice to us. Notice should include: (1) How,when and where the"occurrence"or offense took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and wtnesses;and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. b. If a claim is made or"suit"is brought against any insured,you must: (1) Record the specifics of the claim or"suit" and the date received as soon as you, one of your officers,or an"employee"designated to record such inforrmtion is notified of it;and (2) Notify us in writing as soon as practicable after you, one of your officers, your legal department or an"errployee" you designate to give us such notice learns of the claims or"suit." Item 2.e. is added to SECTION N-COM1EACIAL GBSIERAL UABULITY CONDONS 2.a If you report an"occurrence" to your workers corrpensation insurer which develops into a liability claim for which coverage is provided by the Coverage Form,failure to report such "oocurrenoe" to Ls at the time of"occurrence" shall not be deemed in violation of paragraphs 2.a, 2.b., and 2.c. Hovtever, you shall give written notice of this "occurrence" to us as soon as you are made aware of the fact that this "occurrence" rry be a liability claim rather than a workers corrpensation claim. GL-3085(1O/19) -4- K AUTOIM11CADOmONALINJREOS-EJP1VENT LEASES SECTION II -VIA-IO IS AN INWRED is amended to include any person or organization with whom you !, agree in a written equipmt lease or rental agreement to name as an additional insured with respect to liability for"bodily injurf, "property damage" or"personal and advertising injury'caused, at least in part, by Your nntenance, operation, or we by you of the equipment leased to you by such person or organization,subject to the following additional exdusions. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injury's or"property damage"occurring after you cease leasing the equipment. 2 "Bodily injury's or"property damage"arising out of the sole negligence of the additional insured. 3. "Property damage"to: a Properly awned,used or occupied by or rented to the additional insured;or b. Property in the care, custody or control of the additional insured or over which the additional insured is for any purpose exerdswtg physical control. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and ve will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contnbutory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. Y � L IMURED COIYI'RACT BON-RAILROAD PROPERTY AND CONON CONTRAuG`T5 Item 9.of SECTiON V-DEF1NONS ,is deleted and replaced with the folIovAng. 9. "Insured Contract"means: a A contract for a lease of prenises. Hovtever, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indermifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to you or ten'poranly occupied by you with permission of the owner is not an "insured contract"; b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a rrunidity,except in connection with v.orkforarrunidpality, a An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertalning to your buness (including an indemnification of a rruniapality in connection with work performed for a rrunidJity) under which you assume the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury' or "property damage" to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. -„ GL-3085(1O/19) -5- '' Paragraph f.does not indude that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnities an architect,engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Prering, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawngs, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawngs and spedfktions;or (b) Oving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage;or (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insureds rendering or failure to render professional services, induding those listed in (1)above and super'Asory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. IVL CONSTRUCTiON PROJEC1 GENERAL AGGREGATE UMTS This modifies SEC11ON III-UMIS OF INaIRANCE . A For all suns which can be attnbuted only toongang operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as darrges caused by an"occurrence"under SEC11ON I-COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses Bused by accidents under SECTION I -COVERAGE C 1. A separate Corstruction Project Generai Aggregate Unit applies to each construction project, and that limit is equal to the amount of the Generai Aggregate Unit shown in the Declarations. 2. Thee ruction ProjectGeneralgregateLinitisthemostvevvillyforthesumofail damages under COVERAGE A, except darmges because of "bodily injuryH or "property damage" inducted in the "products-carpleted operations hazard," and for medic expenses under COVERAGE C regardless of the number of: a Insureds; b. Claims rrade or"suits"brought;or •��• c. Persons or organizations rrking claims or bringing"suits." 3. My payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical experzm shall reduce the Construction Project General Aggregate Unit for that construction project. Such paynents shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations nor shall they reduce any other Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for any other construction project. 4. The limits shown in the Ldarations for Each Occurrence, Fire Enge and Medical Expense continue to apply. Hovever, instead of bng subject to the General Aggregate Limit shown' in the Declarations, such units will be subjed to the applicable Construction Project General Aggregate Unit. GL-3085(1O/19) -6- B. For all sums which cannot be attributed only to ongang operations at a angle construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an "occurrence" under SEC11ON I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by acadents under SEC11ON I-COVERAGE C 1. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the amount available under the General Aggregate Limit or the Products-Completed Cerations Aggregate Limit,vhchever is applicable;and 2 Such payments shall not reduce any Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. C. Payments for damages because of"bodily injury or"property damage" inducted in the"products- completed operations hazard" will reduce the Products-Conpleted Cerations Aggregate Limit, and not reduce the General Aggregate Limit nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Unit. D. If a construction project has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from{fans, bkieprints, desigrz,spedfkBtions or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. E The prosions of SEC11ON III - UMTS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to be applicable. N. FELLOW EIVPLOYEE COVERAGE Exclusion 2e. En'ployers Liability of SEC11ON I, COVERAGE A, is deleted and replaced with the fdIoAng: 2.e. "Bodily injury'to (1) An"emplgrce"of the insured arising out of and in the course of: (a) Erroyrrent by the insured;or (b) Frtorning duties rebated to the conduct of the insureds business;or (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that"employee"as a consequence of paragraph (1)above. This exclusion applies: (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an employer or in any other capadt and (2) To any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages became of the injury. This exdusion does not apply to: (1) Liability assumed by the insured under an"insured contract";or (2) Liability arising from any action or omission of a co-"emplace" while that co-"employee" is either in the course of his or her enoyment or performing duties related to the conduct of your bisiness. '! Item Za(iXa) of SECTION II-WHO IS AN INSURED ,is deleted and replaced with the following: -- -. 2.a(iXa) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture) or to your members (if you are a limited liability corrpany), or to your 'volunteer workers" while perforning duties related to the conduct of your business. GL-385(1O/19) -7- 1 O. CARE,CUSTODY OR CONTROL Exclusion 2.j.4 of SECTION I,COVERAGE A is deleted and replaced with the f000wing: 2.j.4 Personal property in the care, custody or contrd of the insured. Homver,for personal property in the care, custody or contrd of you or your"employees," this exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of$25,000 per occurrence,subject to the foHowng temps and conditions; (a) The most that ve will pay under this provision as an annual aggregate is $100,000, regardless of the number of occurrences. (b) This provision does not apply to "employee" owed property or any property that is nissing where there is not physical evidence to show what happened to the property. (c) The aggregate limit for this coverage provision is part of the General Aggregate Limit and SECTION III-UNITS OF INSURANCE is changed accordingly. (d) In the event of dange to or destruction of property covered by this exception, you shall, if requested by us, r .ace the property or famish the labor and materials nessary for repairs thereto, at actual cost to you, exdusive of prospective profit or overhead charges of any nature. (e) $2,500 shall be deducted from the total anDunt of all suns you became obhgated to pay as damages on account of damage to or destruction of all property of each person or organization, induding the loss of use of that property, as a result of each "occurrence." Our limit of liability under the endorsement as being applicable to each "occurrence" shall be reduced by the arrount of the deductible indicated abate; however, our aggregate limit of liability under this provision mall not be reduced by the amount of such dedudible. The conditions of the policy induding those with respect to duties in the event of "occurrence," claims or "suit" apply irrespective of the application of the thiuctible amount. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amours to effect settlement of any claim or"suit" and, upon notification of the action taken, you shall prorrptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. P. a.EC11MC DATA UABIUTY COVERAGE A Exclusion 2.p. of COVERAGE A- BODILY IWLJRY AID PROPERTY DAMAGE UABILJTY in SflON I-COVERA( S is replaced by the foHowng: 2 Exclusions This insurance does not apply to: p. Access Or Isdosure Of Confidential Or Personal Intorrmtion And ( ta- Related V�ility [ ngesansuig out of: (1) Any access to or disclosure of any person's or organization's confidential or personal information, induding patents, track secrets, processing methods, customer lists, finanaai inforrrtion, credit card information, health inforntion or any other type of nonpublic inforrmtion;or (2) The loss of, loss of use of, dange to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate"electronic data"that does not result from physical injury to tangible property This exdusion applies even if damages are claimed for notification costs, credit rronitong expenses, forensic experzes, public relations expenses or any other loss, cost or expense GL-3085(10/19) -8- incurred by you or others arising out of that Mich is described in Paragraph (1) or (2) above. Hovever, unless Paragraph (1) above applies, this exduon does not apply to damages because of"bodily injury". a The folIng is added to Paragraph Z BCCLCNS of SEON I—COGE B—PNAL AND ADVER119NG INJURY UABIUTY: ZExdusions This insurance does not apply to Access Or( sdosure Of Confidential Or IrmI IntornBon "Personal and advertising injury" arising out of any access to or disclosure of any person's or organization's confidential or personal inforrration, inducing patents, trade secrets, processing methods, customer lists, finanaal inforntion, credit card inforrmtion, health inforntion or any other type of nonpublic information. This elusion applies even if darrages are claimed for notification casts, credit monitoring expenses, forensic experzes, public relaticns expenses or any other loss, cost or experse incurred by you or others arising out of any access to or disclosure of any person's or organization's confidential or personal inforrrBtion. C. The followng definition is added to Section V—DEAM11ONS : "Electronic data" mans information, fads or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from corrputer software (induding systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks, CAROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices or any other media which are wed with electronically contrdl1 equipment. D. For the purposes of this owerage, the definition of "property damage" in SECTION V — DEFINIT10N5 is replaced by the foHowng: "Property damage"means: a Physical injury to tangite property, induding all resulting loss of use of that properly. All such loss of use shall bedeerredtooccuratthetimeof the physicahnjurythat caused it; b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the 'occurrence"that caused it;or c. Loss of, loss of use of, Barrage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to properiy manipulate "electronic data", resulting from physical injury to tangible property.Al such loss of"electronic data"shall be deemed to occur at the time of the"occurrence"that caused it. For the purposes of this insurance, "electronic data"is not tangible property. O. co UDATED i JRANCE PROGRAM RDUAL.UABIUTY COVERAGE With respect to"bodily injury', `property darmge", or`personal and advertising injury'arising out of your ongong operations; or operations induced within the"produce-completed operations hazard',the pohcy to which this coverage is attached shall apply as excess insurance over coverage available to `yai' under a Consolidated Insurance Program (such as an Oiter Controlled Insurance Program or Contractors Controlled Insurance Program). 1 GL-385(1O/19) -9- 1 Coverage afforded by this endorsement does not apply to any Consolidated Insurance Program -- invdvwg a "residential project" or any deductible or insured retention, specified in the C4onsohdated Insurance Program. The foHovving is added to Section V—If1nftions "Residential project" means any Project where 30% or more of the total square foot area of the structures on the project is used or is intended to be used for hunn residency. This includes but is not united to single or multifamily housing, apartments, condoniniurrE, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments and appurtenant structures (induding pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). A"residential project"does not indude military awned housing, college/university owned housing or dormitories, long term care facilities, halals, motels, hospitals or prisons. All other terms,provisions,exdusions and limitation of this pohcy apply. R AUTOMATIC ADDCL INS-MANAGERS OR LESSORS OR PSES SEC11ON II—VIIFIO IS AN iNSURED is armrxled to include: Any person or organization with whom you agree in a written contract or written agreennt to name as an additional insured but only with respect to liability arisim out of the owiership, maintenance or use of that part of the premises, designated in the written contract or written agreement, that is leased to you and subject to the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: 1. Any"occurrence"which takes place after you cease to be a tenant in that premises. 2 Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of the additional insured listed in the written contract or written agreerrent. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. S. AUTOMATIC ADDONAL INS — STATE OR laNERNMENTAL A OR POUT1CAL SUBOMS1ONS—PERNITS OR ALJ1IIOIIZAT1CNS SEC11ON II — V*IO IS AN INSURED is amerxied to include any state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision with whom you are required by written contract, ordinance, law or building code to name as an additional insured subject to the followng provisions: This insurance applies only with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf for which the state or governmental agency or subdivision or pofitical subdivision has issued a permit or authorization. This insurance does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injur/', "property darrge" or "personal and advertising injury' arising out of operations performed for the federal government,state or unidlity,or 2. "Bodily injur/'or"property damage"inducted within the"products-corrpleted operations hazard'. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be GL- 85(10/19) -1 0- ', primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and v'..e will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contnbutory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. T. COAC ADDITIONAL IUD COVERAGE—CONPLEIID OPONS SEC11ON II —WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy for conieted operations, but only with respect to liability for"bodily injury'or"property damage"caused,in whole or in part, by"your work" at the project designated in the contract, performed for that additional insured and included in the"products-completed operations hazard". This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the[ darations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with mpect to all other insurance under wtiith the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. U ADDmONALINJRED—EtGNEE ,AACHFECTS OR 9JRVEVOIS SEC11ON II — WHO IS AN INJRED is amended to include as an additional insured any architect, engineer or surveyor who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury', "property damage" or "persaial and advertising injur/' cased,in whole or in part,by: 1. Your acts or onissions;or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongang operations performed by you or on your behalf. This includes such architect, engineer or surveyor, who may not be encfiged by you, but is contractually required to be added as an additional insured to your policy. Wth rasped to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the folloMng additional exdusion applies: This insurance does not apply to"bodily injury", "property damage" or"personal and advertising injury' arising out of the rendering of or the failure to render any professional ser'Aces,induding: 1. The prering, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, drawngs, opinions, reports, surveys,change orders,designs or spedfications;or 2 Siper'Asory,inspection or engineering ser'ices. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to irsurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Ldarations and e will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. GL-3085(1O/19) -11- Policy Number: CLP3698603 _ . 11-IS ENDOIEIiENT CI-LANGESNE FOUCY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ACE NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OR COGE REDUCTION OR -, COON PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the fdIoMng: OOMMERAL AUTOMOBILE COVERAGE PART OON9VIERgAL CFIME COVERAGE PART COMMEFOAL GENERAL UAUTY COVERAGE PART OON9VERGAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMEFOAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART COMMEROAL UMBRELLA UABILITY POLICY POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE MinteroflysMvanceNotice: 30 If this pdic is cBncelled for any reason other than nonpayment of premium,or we nke a material change that reducesorrestrictstheinsuranceaffordedbyacoveragepartorpolicy (exceptforanyreductionintheUnitst for any reduction in the Limits of Insurance due to claims payments), vsn will mail advance notice to any person or organization to Man you have agreed in a written contract to provide such notice,but only if: 1. The agent of record sends a written request to us to provide such notice, induding the name and address of such person or organization,and 2. V receive such written request from the agent of record, including name and address, at least 14 days before the beginning of the applicable number of advance notice days shcwi above. All terms and cordtions of this policy apply unless imditied by this endorsement. GU-5059(O1/17) TOO GENERAL INSURANCE OORFORA11ON BITCO rnoi Policy Number: CAP3698602 11-US ENDOFENENT CHANGES11IE POLICY. PLEASE READ if CAREFULLY. BROADENED COVERAGE-AUrOMOBLES The foilowng modifies insurance provided under: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FOR Wth respect to coverage provided by this endorsement,the provons of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by this endorsement. 1 - Brcd Form Named Insured 10- Employee Hired Autos 2- Automatic Waiver of Subrogation 11 - Bodily Injury Extension 3- Automatic Additional Insured 12- Fred Auto Physical Damage 4- Primary and Noncontributory-Other Insurance 13- Enhanced Supplementary Payrrents Condition '. 5- Unintentional Failure to Disclose Hazards 14- Fellow Erroyee Coverage for Designated Positions 6- Extended Notice of Cancellation, Non-Pene 15- Physical Emage—Transportation Expenses 7- \A4ien We Do Not Renew 16- Rental F'eirthurserrent Coverage 8- Notice of Knowledge of Axdent or Loss 17- Loan/Lease Gap Coverage 9- Errpoyees as Insured 18- Axdental Air Bag Discharge Coverage 1. BROAD FORMA NAEDINJRED SEC11ON II.A 1.- IS AN 11 -Paragraph d.is added: d. Any organization you nevAy acquire or form, except for a partnership, joint venture or united liability conny, and over which you maintain majority ownership or interest (51%or more)or for v4iith you have assumed the active management, will qualify as a Named Insured if there is no other similar insurance available to that organisation. Hovever, coverage under this provision is only afforded until the end of the policy period or the 12-rronth anniversary of the policy inception date,whichever is earlier. 2. ALifOMAliC WAIVER OF&JBAOGA11ON Section IV—Business Auto Ccnclitials, Paragraph AS., Tm Aectiuey Against QtrstoL ,isdeletedandrepIacedwththefollowng: a IftheinsuredhasrightstorecoverallorpartofanyyntvehavenadeunderthisCoverageis Caverage Form, those rights are trarsferred to us. The insured must do nothing after loss to impair those rights. At our request, the insured will bring "suit' or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. b. If required by a written contract executed prior to loss, ve waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments vte make for damages under this coverage form. AP-0402(10117) -1- a AUTO1iC ADOONALINJRED SEC11ON II -WHO IS AN INJRED, Paragraph Al, is arrended to include as an "insured" any person or organization Mo is required by written contract or agreement to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability arising out of operations performed by you or on your behalf for the additional insured. 4, PFIMARY AND NONCONTRIBIJrORY-OTHER INSURANCE CONDON The following is added to the Other Insurance Condition in the Business Auto Coverage Form and the Other Insurance - Primary And Excess Insurance Provisions in the Motor Carrier Coverage Form and supersedes any Provision to the contrary: This Coverage Form's Covered Autos Liability Coierage is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other irsurance available to an"insured"under your policy provided that: 1. Such"in,sured"is a Named Insured under such other insurance;and 2. You have agreed in wilting in a contract or agreement that this insurance would be primary and wu1d not seek contnbution from any other insurance available to such"insured". 5. LNNTB111ONAL FAILURE TO I]SCLCSE HAZARDS Although v relied on your representations as to odsting and past hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to disdose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. 6. EXTB1DB)NOTiCE OF CANCELLATiON,NON-RB'1EWAL The COMVION POLICY CONDONS , Item Alb. is deleted and replaced with the foHovAng: Alb. 60 days before the effective date of the cnceIlation if ve camel for any other ram. 7. V*IENWEDONOTRBIEW SEC11ON N-EUSINESS AUTO CONDONS ,is amended to add Item B.9.: a If ve choose to nonrenew this policy, vte will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Edarations written notice of the nonreneeJ[lot less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If vte do not give notice of our intent to nonrenew as prescribed in a above, it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a ndniim additional sixty (60) days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwise prohibited by law, the existing terror, conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not otherwise prohibited by law, this ore-time sixty-day extension is the sole remedy and liquidated damages available to the insured as a result of our failure to give the notice as prescribed in 9.a above. a NOliCE OF KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDB'4T OR LOGS SECTiON N-BUSINESS AUTO CONDONS , Item Ala is deleted and repced with the foHoMng: 2. I1iLiesintheEvddentaam&ftorLoss: a You met see to it that v.e are notified of an "accident", "claim", "suit" or"loss" which may result in a claim as soon as practicable after the "occurrence" has been reported to you, a partner, a member, an officer, or an enoyee designated to give notice to us. Notice should include: (1) How,when and where the"accident"or."loss"occurred; AP-0402(10117) -2- (2) The"irsureds"name and address;and (3) To the extent possible, the names and addressers of any injured person and wtnesses. 9. EFVFLOYEESASINJRED The following is added to the Section II -Covered Autos Uability Coverage, Paragraph Al. VWio is An Irsured provon: Any"payee"of yours is an"insured"while using a covered"auto"you don't own, hire or borrow in your bminess or your personal affairs. 10. EIVI'LOVEE 1-IRED AUTOS A. Changes In Covered Autos Uability Coverage The f000wng is added to the Who Is An Insured Provision: An "errployee" of yours is an"insured" while operating an"auto" hired or rented under a contract or agreement in an "employee's" Harris, with your permission, while perforning duties related to the conduct of your business. B. Changes In General Conditions Paragraph 5.b. of the Other Insurance Condition in the Bness Auto Q)verage Form and Paragraph 5.f.of the Other Insurance-Primary And Excess Insurance Provisions Condition in the Motor Carrier Coverage Form are replaced by the following: For Fired Auto Physical Damage Coverage, the foHowng are deemed to be covered "autos" you ann�n: 1. My covered"auto"you lease,hire,rent or borrow,and Z. My covered "auto" hired or rented by your"errplwe" under a contract in an"employm's" name, with your permission, iiIe perforning duties related to the conduct of your business. Hoever,any"auto"that is leased,hired, rented or borrowed with a driver is not a covered"auto". 11. BODILY INJURY EXTENON SEC11ON V-DEF1NI11ONS , Paragraph G. is deleted and r .aced by the foHowng: G. "Bodily injury' rreans bodily injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including mental anguish or death resulting from any of these, at any time. Mental anguish means any type of mental or emotional illness or disease. 12. I-IREDAIJTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE SECTION IILA14 -Coverage Extensions -Paragraph c. is added: a Fired Auto Physical( nuge If Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss or Collision coverage is provided under this policy, then Hired Auto Physical Damage is provided for that coverage part subject to the foflowng: (1) The most vte will pay for any one "aounderdenY' or "loss" this Fired Auto Physical ._ _.. Damage Coverage is the lesser of: (a) The any one"AoCiCenY"or"Loss"arrount of$100,000; AP-0402(1O/17) -3- (b) The actual cash value;or (c) Cost of repair. Our obligation to pay for a loss in c.(1) above will be reduced by a deductiLe. The deductible will be equal to the largest deductible applicable to any owned "auto" for that coverage. The deductible will be veived for"loss"caused by fire or lightning. (2) Subjed to paragraph c.(1). above, v will provide coverage equal to the broadest physical darrage coverage apbjicableto any covered"auto"shown in the declarations. (3) When you are required by written contract to inderrnify a lessor for actual financial loss because of loss of use of a hired"auto"resulting from a covered"accident"or"loss",v will cover that finanoal loss subject to the limit specified in paragraph c.(1). 13. EMIANCE)SUPPLEIVENTARY PAYIVENTS SEC11ON ILA.2a COVERACE EXTENONS, SJppmentar), Payments (2) and (4) are replaced by the following: (2) Up to$2,500 for the cost of bail bonds(including bonds for related traffic laws Aolations) required because of an"accident" e cover. We do not have to famish these bonds. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the"insured" at our request, including actual loss of earnings up to$350 a day because of time off from work. 14. FELLCM EIVFLOYEE COVERAGE FOR DESIGNATED FSONS The Fellow Employee Exclusion contained in Section ILB.5.does not apply to the foilowng positions '; or job titles: foreman,super.isor, manager,officer,partner or other senior level"employee". Coverage is excess over all other collectible insurance. 15. PHYCAL DAMAGE-TRANSPORTA1ION EXPENSES SECTION IILA.4.a Transportation Expenses is ram.aced by the foHoMng: a TransportaLion Expenses We will pay up to$50 per day to a maximum of$1,500 for temporary transportation expense incurred by you because of the total theft of a cowered "auto". V will pay only for those covered "autos" for vdiich you carry either Corrprehenve or Specified Cause of Loss Coverage. V% will pay for temporary transportation expenses incurred during the period beginning 48 hours after the theft and ending, regardless of the policys exprations,when the covered"auto"is returned to use or we pay for its"loss". For autos provided with temporary transportation expense, the following physical damage coverage will aPPIY (1) The most e will pay for any one"acddent"or"loss"under the temporary transportation expense physical darmge coverage is the lessor of: (a) The any one"Aaj "or"Loss"arrount of$100,000; (b) The actual cash value;or (c) Cost of repair. Our obligation to pay for a loss in a.(1)above will be reduced by a deductible. The deductible will be equal to the largest deductible applicable to any awned "auto" for that coverage. The deductible will be waived for"loss"caused by fire or lightning. AP-0402(10117) -4- '' (2) Subject to paragraph a.(1). above, we will provide coverage equal to the broadest physical damage coverage applicable to any covered"auto"showi in the dedarations. (3) When you are required by written contract to inderrnify a lessor for alual finanaal loss because of loss of use of a hired "auto" resulting from a covered "accident" or "loss", vim will cover that financial loss subject to the Unit specified in paragraph a(1). 16. FENTAL REIIVBJFEIVENT COVERAGE SEC11ON IILA.'t-Coverage Extensions -Paragraph d is added. d. If you carry Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss or Collision coverage for the dana. . covered "auto" as provided under this policy, then Rental Reintursement Coverage is provided for that coverage part subject to the followng: 1. We will pay for rental reimbursement expenses incurred by you for the rental of an "auto" because of "loss" other than theft, to a covered "auto". Payment applies in addition to the otherwise applicable amount of each coverage you have on a covered "auto". No deductibles apply to this coverage. Z We will only pay for those expenses incurred during the policy period beginning 24 hours after the "loss" and ending, regardless of the policys expiration, with the lesser of the foHoMng number of days: (a) The number of days reasonably required to repair or replace the covered"auto";or, 04 daYs- (C) Our payment is limited to the lesser of the f000wng amounts: (1) Necessary and actual expenses incurred;or (2) $50 per day. 17. LOANILEASE Phystl Damage Coverage is amended by the addition of the followng: In the event of a total "loss" to a covered "auto", e will pay your additional legal obligation for any difference betmen the actual cash value of the "auto" at the time of the loss and the "outstanding balance"of the kr/lse, not to exceed$2,500 for any one vehide or$25,000 annually in aggregate. For the purposes of this endorsement, "outstanding bance" means the arrount you owe on the loan/lease at the time of loss less any amounts representing taxes, overdue paients, penalties, interest or charges resulting from overdue payments, additional mileage charges, excess wear and tear charges or lease ternination fees, costs for extended warranties, credit Life Insurance; Hth, Axdent or Disability Insurance purchased with the loan or lease;and carry-air balances from previas loans or leases. i8. ACCIDENTAL AIR BAG D1HAAGE COVERAGE SECTION IILa3.a-Exdwions .This exdusion does not apply to the acadental discharge of an air bag. AP-0402(1&17) -5- Policy Number: CAP3698602 ---- This ENDOFEIVENT HANGESThE PoUcY. PLUM READ if CAREFULLY. ADVANCE NOTICE OF CANCIELUMON OR COCOIERAM REDUCTION 1, OR RESTFIC11ON PFOADED BY U.S !, This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the fdlowng: COMMERCAL AUTOMOBILE COVERAGE PART COMMEFOAL CRIME COVERAGE PART OOMMEFCAL GENERAL UIABIUTY COVERAGE PART COMMEROAL INLAID MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART OOM1ERQAL UMBRELLA UABILITY POLICY FOLLLfl1ON LIAUTY COVERAGE PARE SCHEDULE Number of Days Advance Notice: 30 If this policy is cBncelled for any reason other than nonpayment of premium,or vte make a material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by a coverage part or policy (except for any reduction in the Units of Insurance due to da yments), vte will nI advance notice to any person or organization to whom you have agreed in a written contract to provide such notice,but only if: 1. The agent of record sends a written request to us to provide such notice, inducting name and address of such person or organization,and 2. We receive such written request from the agent of record, inducting nane and address, at least 14 days before the beginning of the applicable number of advance notice days shown above. All terms and cordtions of this policy apy unless rmditied by this endorsenmnt. GU-5059(01/17) WORKERS COON AND EMPLOYERS UA INWRANCE POLICY WC 4203 04 B (Ed.6-14) EXAS WAIVER OF OUR R1GKITO RECOVER FROM O111EI ENDORSEIIENT I! This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A of the Inforntion Pack;. Wye have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury coveri by this policy. VVe will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Sthedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( X) SpedficViver Name of person or organization SEE MAN-WKOO2 ( X) Blanket Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to famish this waiver. 2. Cperations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: Incl . The premium charge for this endorsement mall be VRS percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with vork performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium Inci . This endorserrent changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The information below is required oNy when this endoe is issued subsequent to preparation of the picy) Endorsemern Effective 11/1/2020 PolicyNo. WC3698604 EndorserrentNo. I nsured Premium Insurance Corrpany C4ountergned by W420304B (Ed.6-14) Copyright 2014 National CouncH on Compensation Insurance, Inc.All Fights Reserved. Policy Number: WC3698604 - , nos ENDOFEiVEfff CHANGESTHE Pouch. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADVANCE NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OR COGE REDUCTION OR RESTRICTION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the fdlowng: \MJRKERS COMPENSA11ON AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE RJLJCY SCHEDULE Number of Days Mvance Notice: 30 If this policy is cancelled for any reason other than nonpayment of premium,or ve make a material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by a coverage part or policy (except for any reduction in the Limits of Insurance due to da payments), ve will mail advance notice to any person or organisation to whom you have agreed in a written contract to provide such notice,but only if: 1. The agent of record sends a written request to us to provide such notice, including the name and address of such person or organization,and 2. We receive such written request from the agent of record, induding Hassle and address, at least 14 days before the beginning of the applicable number of advance notice days showi above. All tern and conditions of this policy apply unless rmded by this endorsement. C99O623(O1/17) Policy Number: CUP2817222 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CHANGES -OTHER INSURANCE- ADDITIONAL INSUREDS Item 10. Other Insurance under SECTION V CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 10. OTHER INSURANCE a. This insurance is excess over any other valid and collectable insurance available whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. The other insurance will be deemed valid and collectible regardless of any defense asserted by any insurer because of the insured's failure to comply with the terms of that other insurance. This condition will not apply to make this coverage excess to: 1. Other insurance written specifically to be excess over this insurance; or 2. Other valid and collectable insurance available to any person or organization who qualifies as an insured pursuant to paragraph 4 of SECTION ill — WHO IS AN INSURED of this policy, but only if: (a) That insured is an additional insured on the "underlying insurance" (such insured shall also be considered an additional insured for this policy); and (b) The said additional insured is a Named Insured in the Declarations under such other valid and collectable insurance; and (c) You have agreed in a written contract or written agreement executed prior to any loss that this insurance will be primary. If this insurance is deemed to be primary on this basis, we agree to not seek contribution from such other insurance available to an additional insured only if you have agreed to the same in that written contract or written agreement. b. When this insurance is excess over other insurance we will pay only our share of any amount of"ultimate net loss," if any, that exceeds the sum of: 1. The total amount that all such other insurance would pay for the loss in the absence of this insurance; and 2. The total of all deductible and self insured amounts under this or any other insurance. CUP 03 1601 11 ' . Policy Nu ber: CUP2817222 .......... THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY, PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY, BLANKET W'AIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS To US The Transfer of Riahts of Recovery Aciainst Others to Us Condition 16. Of SECTION V is amended by the addition of the following: If '`.-' . ' written contract executed prior to loss, we waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your work"for that person or organization, CUP 03 13 01 07 ^ ~ Policy Nu ber, CUP2817222 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE P.-IC.' PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADVANCE NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OR COVERAGE REDUCTION OR RESTRICTION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL CRIME COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL UMBRELLA LIABILITY POLICY POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Number of Days Advance Notice: 30 If this policy is cancelled for any reason other than nonpayment of premium, or we make a material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by a coverage part or policy (except for any reduction in the Limits of Insurance due to claims payments), we will mail advance notice to a.. person or organization to whom you have agreed in a written contract to provide such notice, but only if: 1 The agent of record sends a written request to us to provide such notice, including the name and address of such person or organization and ^` We receive such written request from the agent of record, including name and address at least 14 days before the beginning of the applicable number of advance notice days shown above, All terms and conditions of this t)olicv atn)Iv unless modified bv this endorsement. GU-5059 (01/17) 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Round Rock Contract Forms General Conditions Section 00700 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS Article Page Number& Title Number 1. DEFINITIONS 2 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,AMENDING, REUSE 7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 10 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 16 7. OTHER WORK 24 8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 25 9. ENGINEER/ARCHITECT'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 26 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 27 11. CHANGE OFCONTRACTAMOUNT.............................................................................................................28.......................................................... 28 12. CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;AND CO OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32... 32 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35......................................................................... 35 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 17 RIGHT TO AUDIT 42 18. MISCELLANEOUS 43 00700 04-2020 Page 1 General Conditions 00443641 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS Whenever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents,the term printed with initial capital letters or all capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below or as defined in these General Conditions or other Contract Documents: 1.1 Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the receipt of Proposals or the opening of Bids that clarify, correct or change the proposal or bidding requirements or the Contract Documents. 1.2 Agreement-Prescribed form, referenced as Section 00500. 1.3 Alternative Dispute Resolution-The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled if the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot reach an agreement between themselves, as an alternative to litigation. 1.4 Bid - Proposal of bidder on prescribed forms setting forth prices for performing the Work described in the Contract Documents. 1.5 Bid Documents-The advertisement or invitation for bids, instructions to bidders,the bid form,the Contract Documents and Addenda. 1.6 Calendar Day-Any day of the week; no days being excepted. Work on Saturdays, Sundays, and/or Legal Holidays shall only be conducted with prior express written consent of the OWNER. 1.7 Change Directive-A written directive to the CONTRACTOR, signed by the OWNER, ordering a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Amount or Contract Time, or both.A Change Directive may be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. A Change Directive does not change the Contract Amount or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order. 1.8 Change Orders - Written agreements entered into between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER authorizing an addition, deletion,or revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Execution Date of the Agreement and within the Contract term. 1.9 Claim - A written demand seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 1.10 Contract - The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work, as evidenced by the Contract Documents. 1.11 Contract Amount-The amount payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.12 Contract Documents — Includes the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Agreement, General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Project Manual, Drawings, Addenda and Change Orders. 1.13 Contract Time-The number of days allowed for completion of the Work as defined by the Contract. When any period is referred to in days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. A day of twenty-four(24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight will constitute a day. 1.14 CONTRACTOR - The individual, firm, corporation, or other business entity with whom the OWNER has entered into the Contract. 00700 04-2020 Page 2 General Conditions 1.15 Drawings. - Those portions of the Contract Documents which are graphic representations of the scope, extent and character of the Work to be furnished and performed by the CONTRACTOR and which have been approved by the OWNER. Drawings may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. Shop Drawings are not Drawings as so defined. 1.16 Engineer/Architect (E/A) - The OWNER's design professional identified as such in the Agreement. The titles of"Architect/Engineer,""Architect"and"Engineer" used in the Contract Documents shall be read the same as Engineer/Architect (E/A). Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual or agency relationship between E/A and the CONTRACTOR. 1.17 Equal-The terms"equal"or"approved equal"shall have the same meaning. 1.18 Execution Date-Date of last signature of the parties to the Agreement. 1.19 Field Order-A written order issued by Owner's Representative which orders minor changes in the Work and which does not involve a change in the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. 1.20 Final Acceptance—The stage in the Contract process when, in the OWNER's opinion, Final Completion of the Work has been attained and a Certificate of Acceptance approved by the OWNER is issued. 1.21 Final Completion -The stage in the progress of the Work when, in the OWNER's opinion, the entire Work has been completed, the CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, and the OWNER is processing or has made final payment to the CONTRACTOR, as evidenced by a Certificate of Acceptance approved by the OWNER. 1.22 Inspector-The authorized representative of any regulatory agency that has jurisdiction over any portion of the Work. 1.23 Legal Holidays 1.23.1 The following are recognized by the OWNER: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King, Jr.'s Birthday Third Monday in January President's Day Third Monday in February Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Veteran's Day November 11 Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Eve December 24 Christmas Day December 25 00700 04-2020 Page 3 General Conditions 1.23.2 If a Legal Holiday falls on Saturday, it will be observed on the preceding Friday. If a Legal Holiday falls on Sunday, it will be observed on the following Monday. 1.23.3 If Christmas Eve falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, the preceding Friday is observed as the Christmas Eve holiday. 1.23.4 If Christmas Day falls on a Saturday or a Sunday, the following Monday is observed as the Christmas Day holiday. 1.24 Milestones-A significant event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.25 Notice to Proceed - A Written Notice given by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR notifying the CONTRACTOR to commence the Work and which may also fix the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which the CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. 1.26 OWNER—The City of Round Rock,Texas,a municipal corporation, home-rule city and political subdivision organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, acting through the City Manager or his/her designee, officers, agents or employees to administer design and construction of the Project. 1.27 Owner's Representative-The designated representative of the OWNER. 1.28 Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by the OWNER of a partially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.29 Project - The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part, as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.30 Project Manual - That portion of the Contract Documents which may include the following: introductory information; bidding requirements, Contract forms and General and Supplemental General Conditions; General Requirements; Specifications; Drawings; Project Safety Manual; and Addenda. 1.31 Proposal—Proposal of Offeror, on prescribed forms setting forth prices for performing the Work described in the Contract Documents. 1.32 Proposal Documents—The advertisement or invitation for Proposals, Instruction to Offerors, the Proposal form, the Contract Documents and Addenda. 1.33 Resident Project Representative -The authorized representative of E/A who may be assigned to the site or any part thereof. 1.34 Shop Drawings -All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for the CONTRACTOR and submitted by the CONTRACTOR as required by the Contract Documents. 1.35 Specifications -Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions as applied to the Work, which set forth to the CONTRACTOR, in detail, the requirements which must be met by all materials, equipment, construction systems, standards,workmanship, equipment and services in order to render a completed and useful project. 1.36 Substantial Completion - The stage in the progress of the Work when the Work, or designated portions thereof, may still require minor modifications or adjustments but, in the OWNER's opinion,the Work has progressed to the point such that all parts of the Work under consideration are fully operational and the beneficial use and occupancy of which can be assumed by the Owner, as evidenced by a Certificate of Substantial Completion approved by the OWNER. 00700 04-2020 Page 4 General Conditions 1.37 Subcontractor-An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR for the performance of a part of the Work. 1.38 Sub-subcontractor-A person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor or a Sub- subcontractor of any tier to perform a portion of the Work. 1.39 Superintendent - The representative of the CONTRACTOR authorized in writing to receive and fulfill instructions from Owner's Representative, and who shall supervise and direct construction of the Work. 1.40 Supplemental General Conditions-The part of the Contract Documents which either amends or supplements the General Conditions. All General Conditions which are not so amended or so supplemented shall be considered as remaining in full force and effect. 1.41 Supplier-An individual or entity having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 1.42 Time Extension Request-An approved request for time extension on a form acceptable to the OWNER. 1.43 Work -The entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. 1.44 Working Day - Any day of the week, not including Saturdays, Sundays, or Legal Holidays, in which conditions not under the CONTRACTOR's control will permit work for at least seven(7)hours of the Working Times. Upon authorization by the Owner's Representative, work on Saturdays, Sundays and/or Legal Holidays may be allowed and, in that event, a Working Day will be counted for each such day. 1.45 Working Times — Times of day(s) during which work may be performed. Unless authorized by Owner's Representative, all Work shall be performed between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. on weekdays and, if previously authorized as provided for in paragraph 1.44 or paragraph 1.6 herein, as applicable, between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. on Saturdays, Sundays or Legal Holidays. When the CONTRACTOR has been authorized to perform Work during hours outside Working Times, such hours shall be considered time worked on Working Day contracts. Notwithstanding the preceding, emergency work may be done without prior permission only as provided in paragraph 6.11.5 herein. 1.46 Written Notice-Written communication between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to Owner's Representative or to the CONTRACTOR's duly authorized representative, or if such Written Notice is delivered to or sent by registered or certified mail to the attention of Owner's Representative or to the CONTRACTOR's duly authorized representative at the last business address known to the party giving notice. ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 Delivery of Agreement, Bonds, Insurance, and Other Documentation: Within ten (10)Calendar Days after written notification of award of Contract,the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER signed Agreement, Bond(s), Insurance Certificates) and other documentation required for execution of the Contract. 2.2 Copies of Documents: The OWNER shall furnish to the CONTRACTOR two (2) copies of the Contract Documents unless otherwise specified. 00700 04-2020 Page 5 General Conditions 2.3 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed: The Contract Time(s) commence on the date indicated in the Agreement or in the Notice to Proceed. Notice to Proceed will be given at any time within sixty(60)Calendar Days after the Execution Date of the Agreement, unless extended by written agreement of the parties. 2.4 Before Starting Construction: 2.4.1 No Work shall be done at the site prior to the preconstruction conference without the OWNER's approval. Before undertaking each part of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to Owner's Representative any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which the CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents of which the CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known. 2.4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall submit the following to Owner's Representative for review and approval no later than the preconstruction conference: .1 a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (number of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents, identifying when all Subcontractors will be utilized, and taking into consideration any limitations on Working Hours; .2 a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and sample submittals; .3 a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work, subdivided into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. The preliminary schedule of values submitted by the CONTRACTOR should include a reasonable estimation of value of each item included and shall not contain disproportionate values assigned to any item or items; .4 a letter designating CONTRACTOR's Superintendent; .5 a letter from the CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor(s) listing any salaried specialists; .6 if applicable, a letter designating the "Competent Person(s)" on general safety and trench safety measures; .7 if applicable, a trench safety system plan; .8 if applicable, a plan illustrating proposed locations of temporary facilities; .9 if applicable, a traffic control plan; .10 a completed Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit(Prior to Construction); and .11 if applicable, a letter designating the Texas Registered Professional Land Surveyor for layout of the Work. 2.5 Preconstruction Conference: Prior to commencement of Work at the site,a preconstruction conference attended by the CONTRACTOR,Owner's Representative and others will be held. 00700 04-2020 Page 6 General Conditions 2.6 Initially Acceptable Schedules: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval of Owner's Representative on final versions of the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.4.2 before the first progress payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR. The progress schedule must provide for an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and Contract Times. Acceptance of the schedule by Owner's Representative will neither impose on Owner's Representative responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve the CONTRACTOR from the CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. The CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop Drawings and sample submissions must provide an arrangement agreeable to the parties for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 2.7 Electronic Transmittals: 2.7.1 Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the OWNER, E/A, and CONTRACTOR may transmit,and shall except, Project-related correspondence,texts,data,documents, drawings, information,and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format,either directly, or through access to a secure Project website. 2.7.2 When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient's use of software application packages,operating systems,or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items. ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,AMENDING, REUSE 3.1 Intent: 3.1.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all information necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the CONTRACTOR.The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In cases of disagreement, the following order of precedence shall govern (top item receiving priority of interpretation): Change Orders Modifications to the Contract Documents made after the Execution Date Signed Agreement Addenda to the Contract Documents Special Conditions Supplemental General Conditions General Conditions Other Bidding Requirements and Contract Forms Special Provisions to the Standard Technical Specifications Special Specifications Standard Technical Specifications Drawings(figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions) Project Safety manual, if applicable 3.1.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 3.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies: Prior to commencing the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall review the Contract Documents for the purpose of discovering any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents. If, at any time, the CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provisions of any such law or regulation applicable to the performance of the Work 00700 04-2020 Page 7 General Conditions or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or instructions of any Supplier, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately report it to Owner's Representative in writing, and the CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.3.1 or paragraph 3.3.2. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy of which the CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known. 3.3 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents: 3.3.1 The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: .1 Change Order. .2 Change Directive. 3.3.2 In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of the following ways: .1 Field Order. .2 Review of a Shop Drawing or sample. .3 Written interpretation or clarification. 3.4 Reuse of Documents Prohibited: The CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the OWNER: (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of E/A or E/A's consultants, and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents or copies on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of the OWNER and E/A. ARTICLE 4-AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 Availability of Lands: The OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, all required rights to use the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which the CONTRACTOR will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If the OWNER fails to furnish these lands, rights-of-way or easements in a timely manner,the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for adjustments in the Contract Times.The CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: 4.2.1 The CONTRACTOR hereby covenants that it has examined the site of the proposed Work and is familiar with all of the conditions surrounding construction of the Project, having conducted all inquiries, tests and investigations deemed necessary and proper. Unless the CONTRACTOR, prior to the execution of the Agreement, has notified the OWNER in writing of any condition of the site of the proposed Work that would adversely impact 00700 04-2020 Page 8 General Conditions the performance of the Work by the CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR covenants that there are no conditions at the site of the proposed work which would adversely impact the performance of Work by the CONTRACTOR. 4.2.2 If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those normally encountered in the type of work being performed under this Contract, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than seven (7) calendar days after first observance of the conditions. Owner's Representative will promptly investigate such conditions with E/A and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the CONTRACTOR'S cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, OWNER will consider an equitable adjustment in the Contract Amount or Contract Time, or both. If Owner's Representative determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the CONTRACTOR shall be notified in writing, stating the reasons. Any disputes arising from Owner's Representative's determination shall be resolved in accordance with Article 16. 4.2.3 Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract,the CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the location and protection of any and all public lines and utility customer service lines in the Work area. For the purposes of this section, "public lines"means the utility distribution and supply system within public rights-of-way or easements, and "utility customer service lines" (service) means any utility line connecting a utility customer to the utility distribution system. Generally, existing service connections within right-of-way or easements are not shown on the Drawings.The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER and"One Call"and exercise due care to locate and to mark, uncover or otherwise protect all such lines in the construction zone and any of the CONTRACTOR's work or storage areas. The CONTRACTOR's obligation hereunder shall be primary and nondelegable. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify or reimburse the OWNER for such expenses or costs (including fines that may be levied against the OWNER) that may result from unauthorized or accidental damage to all public lines and utility customer service lines in the Work area.The OWNER reserves the right to repair such damage the CONTRACTOR may cause, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 4.2.4 The CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable precaution to avoid disturbing primitive records and antiquities of archaeological, paleontological or historical significance. No objects of this nature shall be disturbed without written permission of the OWNER and the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection. When such objects are uncovered unexpectedly, the CONTRACTOR shall stop all Work in close proximity and notify Owner's Representative and the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection of their presence and shall not disturb them until written permission and permit to do so is granted.All primitive rights and antiquities uncovered on the OWNER'S property shall remain property of the State of Texas, the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection conforming to the Texas Natural Resources Code. If it is determined by the OWNER, in consultation with the Texas Department of Antiquities Protection,that exploration or excavation of primitive records or antiquities on Project site is necessary to avoid loss, the CONTRACTOR shall cooperate in salvage work attendant to preservation. If the Work stoppage or salvage work causes an increase in the CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work, the Contract Amount and/or Contract Time may be equitably adjusted. 4.3 Reference Points: Unless otherwise specified, the OWNER will furnish all reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments, and control points which, in the OWNER's opinion,are suitable for laying out the Work. Such benchmarks and reference points will be placed at intervals not to exceed 1,500 feet. All reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments and control points shall be carefully preserved by the CONTRACTOR by use of flags, laths or other appropriate measures and, in case of destruction or removal by the CONTRACTOR or its employees, such reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments, and control points shall be replaced by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor at the CONTRACTOR's expense. When reference points, benchmarks, survey monuments, or control points are in conflict with the Work, then reestablishment will be the OWNER's responsibility during or upon completion of the Work. 4.4 Hazardous Materials: 00700 04-2020 Page 9 General Conditions 4.4.1 The OWNER shall be responsible for any hazardous material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown, indicated or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the site. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify Owner's Representative of any suspected hazardous materials encountered before or during performance of the Work and shall take all necessary precautions to avoid further disturbance of the materials. 4.4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any hazardous materials brought to the site by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Suppliers or anyone else for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.4.3 No asbestos-containing materials shall be incorporated into the Work or brought on the Project site without prior approval of the OWNER. 4.4.4 TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER,AND ITS COUNCIL MEMBERS, EMPLOYEES,AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS)ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO FAILURE TO CONTROL, CONTAIN OR REMOVE A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL BROUGHT TO THE SITE BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE, OR TO A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED BY CONTRACTOR OR BY ANYONE FOR WHOM CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. ARTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 Surety and Insurance Companies: All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents shall be obtained from solvent surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed by the State of Texas and authorized to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages required by the Contract Documents. The bonds shall be in a form acceptable to the OWNER and shall be issued by a surety which complies with the requirements of Chapter 3503, Texas Insurance Code (2005)and which is otherwise acceptable to the OWNER. OWNER may require the surety to obtain reinsurance for any portion of the risk that exceeds 10% of the surety's capital and surplus. For bonds exceeding $100,000, the surety must also hold a certificate of authority from the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury or have obtained reinsurance from a reinsures that is authorized as a reinsures in Texas and holds a certificate of authority from the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury. 5.2 Workers'Compensation Insurance Coverage: 5.2.1 Definitions: .1 Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. .2 Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the CONTRACTOR's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the OWNER. .3 Persons providing services on the Project ("subcontractor" herein) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the CONTRACTOR has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the CONTRACTOR and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, by way of illustration and not of limitation, 00700 04-2020 Page 10 General Conditions independent contractors, Subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services"does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 5.2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44)for all employees of the CONTRACTOR providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. 5.2.3 The OWNER will not execute the Contract prior to the CONTRACTOR providing all required certificates of coverage. 5.2.4 If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. 5.2.5 The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each person providing services on the Project, and provide to the OWNER: .1 a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and .2 no later than seven(7)days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR,a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. 5.2.6 The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one(1)year thereafter. 5.2.7 The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery within ten (10) days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. 5.2.8 The CONTRACTOR shall post at its office or on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 5.2.9 The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a Project to: .1 provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44)for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; .2 provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; .3 provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 00700 04-2020 Page 11 General Conditions .4 obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; .5 retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one (1) year thereafter; .6 notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and .7 contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs 5.2.9.1 - 5.2.9.7, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 5.2.10 By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers'compensation coverage for the duration of the Project,that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. Y r 5.2.11 The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of Contract by the CONTRACTOR which entitles the OWNER to declare the Contract void if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten (10)days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 5.3 Contractor Insurance Requirements: For specific bond requirements and additional insurance requirements, refer to the Supplemental General Conditions. 5.3.1.1 General Requirements: .1 CONTRACTOR shall carry insurance in the types and amounts indicated below for the duration of the Contract, which shall include items owned by OWNER in the care, custody and control of CONTRACTOR prior to and during construction and warranty period. .2 CONTRACTOR must complete and forward the required Certificates of Insurance to OWNER before the Contract is executed as verification of coverage required below. CONTRACTOR shall not commence Work until the required insurance is obtained and until such insurance has been reviewed by OWNER. Approval of insurance by OWNER shall not relieve or decrease the liability of CONTRACTOR hereunder and shall not be construed to be a limitation of liability on the part of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR must also complete and forward the required Certificates of Insurance to OWNER whenever a previously identified policy period has expired as verification of continuing coverage. .3 CONTRACTOR's insurance coverage is to be written by companies licensed to do business in the State of Texas at the time the policies are issued and shall be written by companies with A.M. Best ratings of B+VII or better, except for hazardous material insurance which shall be written by companies with A.M. Best ratings of A-or better. 00700 04-2020 Page 12 General Conditions .4 All endorsements naming the OWNER as additional insured, waivers, and notices of cancellation endorsements as well as the Certificate of Insurance shall indicate: City of Round Rock, 221 E. Main St., Round Rock, Texas 78664. .5 The "other" insurance clause shall not apply to the OWNER where the OWNER is an additional insured shown on any policy. It is intended that policies required in the Contract, covering both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, shall be considered primary coverage as applicable. .6 If insurance policies are not written for amounts specified below, CONTRACTOR shall carry Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance for any differences in amounts specified. If Excess Liability Insurance is provided, it shall follow the form of the primary coverage. .7 OWNER shall be entitled, upon request and without expense,to receive certified copies of policies and endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions except where policy provisions are established by law or regulations binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter on any such policies. .8 OWNER reserves the right to review the insurance requirements set forth during the effective period of this Contract and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance coverage, limits, and exclusions when deemed necessary and prudent by OWNER based upon changes in statutory law, court decisions, the claims history of the industry or financial condition of the insurance company as well as CONTRACTOR. .9 CONTRACTOR shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any insurance to lapse during the term of the Contract or as required in the Contract. .10 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for premiums, deductibles and self-insured retentions, if any, stated in policies. All deductibles or self-insured retentions shall be disclosed on the Certificate of Insurance. .11 CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER thirty (30) days written notice of erosion of the aggregate limits below occurrence limits for all applicable coverages indicted within the Contract. .12 If OWNER-owned property is being transported or stored off-site by CONTRACTOR, then the appropriate property policy will be endorsed for transit and storage in an amount sufficient to protect OWNER's property. .13 The insurance coverages required under this contract are required minimums and are not intended to limit the responsibility or liability of CONTRACTOR. 5.3.1.2 Business Automobile Liability Insurance. Provide coverage for all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles. The policy shall contain the following endorsements in favor of OWNER: a) Waiver of Subrogation endorsement TE 2046A; b) 30 day Notice of Cancellation endorsement TE 0202A; and c) Additional Insured endorsement TE 9901 B. Provide coverage in the following types and amounts: 00700 04-2020 Page 13 General Conditions .1 A minimum combined single limit of$500,000 per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. Alternate acceptable limits are $250,000 bodily injury per person, $500,000 bodily injury per occurrence and at least$100,000 property damage liability each accident. 5.3.1.3 Workers'Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance: Coverage shall be consistent with statutory benefits outlined in the Texas Workers' Compensation Act (Section 401). CONTRACTOR shall assure compliance with this Statute by submitting two(2)copies of a standard certificate of coverage (e.g. ACCORD form) to Owner's Representative for every person providing services on the Project as acceptable proof of coverage. The required Certificate of Insurance must be presented as evidence of coverage for CONTRACTOR. Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage written by the Texas Workers Compensation Fund is acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR's policy shall apply to the State of Texas and include these endorsements in favor of OWNER: a) Waiver of Subrogation, form WC 420304; and b) 30 day Notice of Cancellation, form WC 420601. The minimum policy limits for Employers' Liability Insurance coverage shall be as follows: .1 $100,000 bodily injury per accident, $500,000 bodily injury by disease policy limit and $100,000 bodily injury by disease each employee. 5.3.1.4 Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Policy shall contain the following provisions: a) Blanket contractual liability coverage for liability assumed under the Contract and all contracts relative to this Project. b) Completed Operations/Products Liability for the duration of the warranty period. c) Explosion, Collapse and Underground (X, C& U)coverage. d) Independent Contractors coverage. e) Aggregate limits of insurance per project, endorsement CG 2503. f) OWNER listed as an additional insured, endorsement CG 2010. g) 30 day notice of cancellation in favor of OWNER, endorsement CG 0205. h) Waiver of Transfer of Recovery Against Others in favor of OWNER, endorsement CG 2404. Provide coverages A&B with minimum limits as follows: .1 A combined bodily injury and property damage limit of$500,000 per occurrence. 5.3.1.5 Builders' Risk Insurance. CONTRACTOR shall maintain Builders' Risk Insurance or Installation Insurance on an all risk physical loss form in the Contract Amount. Coverage shall continue until the Work is accepted by OWNER. OWNER shall be a loss payee on the policy. If off site storage is permitted,coverage shall include transit and storage in an amount sufficient to protect property being transported or stored. 5.4 Bonds: 00700 04-2020 Page 14 General Conditions 5.4.1 General. .1 Bonds, when required, shall be executed on forms furnished by or acceptable to OWNER. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. .2 If the surety on any bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in the State of Texas or it ceases to meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall within ten(10)days thereafter substitute another bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER. .3 When Performance Bonds and/or Payment Bonds are required, each shall be issued in an amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Amount as security for the faithful performance and/or payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. Performance Bonds and Payment Bonds shall be issued by a solvent surety company authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and shall meet any other requirements established by law or by OWNER pursuant to applicable law. Any surety duly authorized to do business in Texas may write Performance and Payment Bonds on a project without reinsurance to the limit of 10 percent of its capital and surplus. Such a surety must reinsure any obligations over 10 percent. .4 If CONTRACTOR has failed to obtain or maintain a required bond, OWNER may exclude the CONTRACTOR from the site of the Project and exercise OWNER's suspension and/or termination rights under the Contract Documents. 5.4.2 Performance Bond. .1 If the Contract Amount exceeds $100,000, CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER with a Performance Bond in the form set out by OWNER. .2 If the Contract Amount exceeds $25,000 but is less than or equal to $100,000, CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER with a Performance Bond in the form set out by OWNER, unless the original Contract Time is 60 Calendar Days/40 Working Days or less, in which case CONTRACTOR can agree to the following terms and conditions for payment in lieu of providing a Performance Bond: no money will be paid to CONTRACTOR until completion and acceptance of the Work by OWNER; CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to receive 95%of the Contract Amount following Final Completion, and the remaining 5%of the Contract Amount following the one year warranty period. .3 If the Contract Amount is less than or equal to $25,000, CONTRACTOR will not be required to furnish a Performance Bond; provided that no money will be paid to CONTRACTOR until completion and acceptance of the Work by OWNER under the following terms and conditions: CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to receive 95%of the Contract Amount following Final Completion, and the remaining 5%of the Contract Amount following the one year warranty period. .4 If a Performance Bond is required to be furnished, it shall extend for the one year warranty period. 5.4.3 Payment Bond. .1 If the Contract Amount exceeds $50,000, CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER with a Payment Bond in the form set out by OWNER. .2 If the Contract Amount is less than or equal to $50,000, CONTRACTOR will not be required to furnish a Payment Bond; provided that no money will be paid to CONTRACTOR until completion and acceptance of the Work by OWNER under the terms and conditions specified in paragraph 5.4.2.3. 00700 04-2020 Page 15 General Conditions ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 Supervision and Superintendence: 6.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently,devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise directed by the OWNER in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall have an English-speaking, competent Superintendent on the Work at all times that work is in progress. Upon request of Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall present the resume of the proposed Superintendent to Owner's Representative showing evidence of experience and successful superintendence and direction of work of a similar scale and complexity. If, in the opinion of Owner's Representative, the proposed Superintendent does not indicate sufficient experience in line with the Work, he/she will not be allowed to be the designated Superintendent for the Work. The Superintendent shall not be replaced without Written Notice to Owner's Representative. If the CONTRACTOR deems it necessary to replace the Superintendent, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary information for approval, as stated above, on the proposed new Superintendent. A qualified substitute Superintendent may be designated in the event that the designated Superintendent is temporarily away from the Work, but not to exceed a time limit acceptable to Owner's Representative. The CONTRACTOR shall replace the Superintendent upon the OWNER's request in the event the Superintendent is unable to perform to the OWNER's satisfaction. The Superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR's representative on the Work and shall have the authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Either the CONTRACTOR or the Superintendent shall provide an emergency and home telephone number at which one or the other may be reached if necessary when work is not in progress. 6.2 Labor, Materials and Equipment: 6.2.1 The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in performance of the type of Work required under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and their employees may not use or possess any firearms, alcoholic or other intoxicating beverages, illegal drugs or controlled substances while on the job or on the OWNER's property, nor may such workers be intoxicated,or under the influence of alcohol or drugs,on the job. If the OWNER or Owner's Representative notifies the CONTRACTOR that any worker is incompetent, disorderly or disobedient, has knowingly or repeatedly violated safety regulations, has possessed any firearms, or has possessed or was under the influence of alcohol or drugs on the job, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately remove such worker from performing Contract Work, and may not employ such worker again on Contract Work without the OWNER's prior written consent. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order on or off the site in all matters pertaining to the Project. The CONTRACTOR shall pay workers no less than the wage rates established in Section 00900, and maintain weekly payroll reports as evidence thereof. 6.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, re-testing of defective work, start-up and completion of the Work. 6.2.3 All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new (including new products made of recycled materials), except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (reports of required tests, manufacturer's certificates of compliance with material requirements, mill reports, etc.) as to the kind, quantity and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 00700 04-2020 Page 16 General Conditions 6.2.4 Substitutes and "Approved Equal" Items: 6.2.4.1 Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type,function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains words reading that no like, equivalent or"approved equal"item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Owner's Representative under the following circumstances: .1 "Approved Equal": If, in the OWNER's sole discretion, an item of material or an item of equipment proposed by the CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by the OWNER as an "approved equal" item, in which case review of the proposed item may, in the OWNER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for evaluation of proposed substitute items. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with the documentation required for the OWNER to make its determination. .2 Substitute Items: If, in the OWNER's sole discretion, an item of material or an item of equipment proposed by the CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "approved equal" item under paragraph 6.2.4.1.1, then it will be considered a proposed substitute item. The CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow the OWNER to determine that the item of material or item of equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and a substitute therefor. 6.2.4.2 Substitute Construction Methods and Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR may with prior approval of the OWNER furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to Owner's Representative to allow the OWNER, in the OWNER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. 6.2.4.3 OWNER's Evaluation: The OWNER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraph 6.2.4.1.1 and paragraph 6.2.4.1.2. The OWNER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No"approved equal"or substitute shall be ordered, installed, or utilized until the OWNER's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or completion of the Shop Drawing review procedure. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish at the CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety bond with respect to any"approved equal"or substitute. The OWNER shall not be responsible for any delay due to review time for any"approved equal"or substitute. 6.2.4.4 CONTRACTOR's Expense: All data to be provided by the CONTRACTOR in support of any proposed "approved equal"or substitute item will be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.2.5 The CONTRACTOR agrees to assign to the OWNER any rights it may have to bring antitrust suits against its Suppliers for overcharges on materials incorporated in the Project growing out of illegal price fixing agreements. The CONTRACTOR further agrees to cooperate with the OWNER should the OWNER wish to prosecute suits against Suppliers for illegal price fixing. 6.3 Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise directed, the CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.6 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below: .1 The CONTRACTOR shall submit to Owner's Representative for acceptance proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the Contract Times or Milestones. Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect. 00700 04-2020 Page 17 General Conditions .2 Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times or Milestones shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Time Extension Request in accordance with Article 12. 6.4 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others: 6.4.1 Assignment: The CONTRACTOR agrees to retain direct control of and give direct attention to the fulfillment of this Contract. The CONTRACTOR agrees not to,by Power of Attorney or otherwise,assign said Contract without the prior written consent of the OWNER. 6.4.2 Award of Subcontracts for Portions of the Work: The CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, whether initially or as a substitute, against whom the OWNER may have reasonable objection. The CONTRACTOR must provide the OWNER with a list of all Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or organizations it will use in the Work, and such list must be provided prior to the preconstruction conference. Should the OWNER have objections,the OWNER will communicate such objections by Written Notice. If the OWNER requires a change without good cause of any Subcontractor, person or organization previously accepted by OWNER,the Contract Amount may be increased or decreased by the difference in the cost occasioned by any such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The CONTRACTOR shall not substitute any Subcontractor, person or organization that has been accepted by the OWNER, unless the substitute has been accepted in writing by the OWNER. No acceptance by the OWNER of any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of the OWNER to reject defective Work. 6.4.3 The CONTRACTOR shall enter into written agreements with all Subcontractors and Suppliers which specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of the OWNER and E/A. The OWNER reserves the right to specify that certain requirements shall be adhered to by all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors as indicated in other portions of the Contract Documents and these requirements shall be made a portion of the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor or Supplier. 6.4.4 The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to the OWNER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the CONTRACTOR just as the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization any contractual relationship between the OWNER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of the OWNER or E/A to pay or to see to the payment of any amounts due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by laws and regulations. 6.4.5 The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Owner's Representative through the CONTRACTOR. 6.4.6 The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control the CONTRACTOR in dividing or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. 6.4.7 The CONTRACTOR shall pay each Subcontractor and Supplier their appropriate share of payments made to the CONTRACTOR not later than ten(10)Days after the CONTRACTOR's receipt of payment from the OWNER. 6.5 Patent Fees and Royalties: 6.5.1 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible at all times for compliance with applicable patents or copyrights encompassing, in whole or in part, any design, device, material, or process utilized, directly or indirectly, in the performance of the Work or the formulation or presentation of its Bid. 00700 04-2020 Page 18 General Conditions 6.5.2 The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide, prior to commencement of Work hereunder and at all times during the performance of same, for lawful use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters, patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the patentee, copyright holder, or their duly authorized representative whether or not a particular design, device, material, or process is specified by the OWNER. 6.5.3 The CONTRACTOR shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyright and shall indemnify and save the OWNER harmless from any and all claims,costs, losses,expenses and damages(including but not limited to attorneys fees and consultant fees),direct or indirect, arising with respect to the CONTRACTOR's process in the formulation of its bid or the performance of the Work or otherwise arising in connection therewith. The OWNER reserves the right to provide its own defense,with counsel of its own choosing,to any suit or claim of infringement of any patent or copyright in which event the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all costs and expenses of such defense as well as satisfaction of all judgments entered against the OWNER. 6.5.4 The OWNER shall have the right to stop the Work and/or terminate this Agreement at any time in the event the CONTRACTOR fails to disclose to the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR's work methodology includes the use of any infringing design, device, material or process. 6.6 Permits, Fees: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplemental General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses and fees required for prosecution of the Work. OWNER will obtain and pay for the following permits, licenses and/or fees, if required: .1 Site Development Permit. .2 Building Permit(s). .3 Texas Department of Transportation permit for work in State rights-of-way. .4 Railroad Utility License Agreement. 6.7 Laws and Regulations: 6.7.1 The CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws and regulations applicable to furnishing and performing the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable laws and regulations, neither the OWNER nor E/A shall be responsible for monitoring the CONTRACTOR'S compliance with any laws and regulations. 6.7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall plan and execute its operations in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations, including those concerning control and abatement of water pollution and prevention and control of air pollution. 6.7.3 If the CONTRACTOR performs any Work that it is contrary to laws or regulations,then the CONTRACTOR shall bear and shall indemnify, defend and hold OWNER harmless from all claims, costs, losses and damages arising therefrom; however, it shall not be the CONTRACTOR's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with laws and regulations, but this does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the CONTRACTOR's obligations under Article 3. 6.8 Taxes: 6.8.1 The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the laws and regulations of the State of Texas. 00700 04-2020 Page 19 General Conditions 6.8.2 The OWNER is an exempt organization as defined by Chapter 11 of the Property Tax Code of Texas and is thereby exempt from payment of Sales Tax under Chapter 151, Limited Use Sales, Excise and Use Tax, Texas Tax Code, and Chapter 321, Texas Tax Code. 6.9 Use of Premises: 6.9.1 The CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment,the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workers to the site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by laws and regulations, rights-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by dispute resolution proceeding or at law. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the OWNER, E/A, E/A's consultants and anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees) arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against the OWNER, E/A or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon performance of the Work or failure to perform the Work. 6.9.2 During the progress of the Work and on a daily basis, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. The CONTRACTOR shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by the OWNER at Substantial Completion of the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall, at a minimum, restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contact Documents. 6.9.3 The CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall the CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.10 Record Documents: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site, or other location acceptable to the OWNER, one(1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,Addenda, Change Orders, Change Directives, Field Orders and written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.5) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all final samples and all final Shop Drawings,will be available to the OWNER and E/A for reference during performance of the Work. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, these record documents, samples and Shop Drawings showing the final "as built' construction of the Project shall be promptly delivered to Owner's Representative. 6.11 Safety and Protection: 6.11.1 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Upon request,and prior to installation of measures,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a site security and safety plan for approval by the OWNER. By reviewing the plan or making recommendations or comments, the OWNER will not assume liability nor will the CONTRACTOR be relieved of liability for damage, injury or loss. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 all persons on the Work site or who may be affected by the Work; .2 all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 00700 04-2020 Page 20 General Conditions .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including but not limited to, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and underground facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 6.11.2 The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. The CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of underground facilities, and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.11.1.2 and paragraph 6.11.1.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Supplier or any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be responsible, shall be remedied by the CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of the OWNER, or E/A, or EtA's consultant or anyone employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be responsible, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the faults or negligence of the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them). The CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Owner's Representative has issued a notice to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 14 that the Work is acceptable(except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.11.3 Safety Representative: The CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. Upon request of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall provide certifications or other documentation of the safety representative's qualifications. At a minimum,the safety representative shall have received the OSHA thirty (30) hour training and a certificate evidencing that the safety representative has received such training within the last five (5) years shall be provided to the OWNER's representative. 6.11.4 Hazard Communication Programs: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in accordance with laws and regulations. 6.11.5 Emergencies: 6.11.5.1 In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work at the site or adjacent thereto, the CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from the OWNER or EtA, is obligated to act reasonably to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and to mitigate damage or loss to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall give Owner's Representative prompt written notice if the CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by the CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency,a Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action; otherwise the OWNER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's emergency action. 6.11.5.2 Authorized agents of the CONTRACTOR shall respond immediately to call-out at any time of any day or night when circumstances warrant the presence on Project site of the CONTRACTOR or its agent to protect the Work or adjacent property from damage, restriction or limitation or to take such action or measures pertaining to the Work as may be necessary to provide for the safety of the public. Should the CONTRACTOR and/or its agent fail to respond and take action to alleviate such an emergency situation, the OWNER may direct other forces to take action as necessary to remedy the emergency condition,and the OWNER will deduct any cost of such remedial action from the funds due to the CONTRACTOR under this Contract. 6.11.5.3 In the event there is an accident involving injury to any individual on or near the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify Owner's Representative within twenty-four (24) hours of the event and shall be responsible for recording the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding the event through 00700 04-2020 Page 21 General Conditions photographs, interviewing witnesses, obtaining medical reports and other documentation that describes the event. Copies of such documentation shall be provided to Owner's Representative, for the OWNER's and E/A's records, within forty-eight(48) hours of the event. 6.12 Continuing the Work: The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR may agree in writing. 6.13 CONTRACTOR'S General Warranty and Guarantee: 6.13.1 The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the OWNER that all Work will be performed in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. The CONTRACTOR'S warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: .1 abuse, modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or Suppliers; or .2 normal wear and tear under normal usage. 6.13.2 The CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of the CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: .1 observations by Owner's Representative and/or E/A; .2 recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative; .3 the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents; .4 use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by the OWNER; .5 any acceptance by the OWNER or any failure to do so; .6 any review of a Shop Drawing or sample submittal; .7 any inspection, test or approval by others; or .8 any correction of defective Work by the OWNER. .9 the failure of the OWNER, E/A or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the OWNER or E/A to observe, detect or discover any defect in the Work or any non-conformance of the Work with any requirement of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claim or defense to any claim by the OWNER that any failure by the OWNER, E/A, or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the OWNER or E/A to observe, detect or discover any defect in the Work relieves or releases, in whole or in part, CONTRACTOR from any obligations or responsibility for the correction of such defects or any other obligation of CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. 6.14 Indemnification: 00700 04-2020 Page 22 General Conditions 6.14.1 TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW,AND IN ADDITION TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR UNDER THE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE,CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS OWNER, ITS COUNCIL MEMBERS , EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AND CONSULTANTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE E/A (THE "INDEMNIFIED PARTIES" OR INDEMNIFIED PARTY", FROM AND AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, CONSULTANTS, EXPERTS AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH CLAIMS, COSTS, LOSSES, AND DAMAGES ARE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PARTY BY THE ACTS, ACTIONS, ERRORS OR OMISSIONS OF AN INDEMNIFIED PARTY. BECAUSE OWNER IS A MUNICIPALITY,THE TERMS AND PROVISIONS OF SUBCHAPTER C OF CHAPTER 151 OF THE TEXAS INSURANCE CODE ("CHAPTER 151") DOES NOT APPLY TO THE OWNER. IF, HOWEVER, ANY PROVISION OF CHAPTER 151 APPLIES TO THE OWNER, IT IS THE INTENT OF THE OWNER THAT IF THE PROVISIONS OF CHAPTER 151 DO APPLY, NOTHING HEREIN SHALL IMPOSE ANY REQUIREMENTS ON CONTRACTOR THAT ARE PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151 AND THAT ANY OF THE PROVISIONS HEREOF THAT ARE NOT PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151 SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. ACCORDINGLY, IN THE EVENT THAT IN CONSTRUING AND INTERPRETING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION OR, IF APPLICABLE, AN ARBITRATOR, DETERMINES THAT CHAPTER 151 APPLIES TO THE OWNER, THEN THE COURT OR ARBITRATOR SHALL REFORM THE PROVISIONS HEREOF SO AS TO COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 151 AND SUCH REFORMATION SHALL NOT AFFECT THE VALIDITY OF ANY PROVISIONS HEREOF THAT ARE NOT PROHIBITED BY CHAPTER 151. 6.14.2 The indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.14.1 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, or compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers'compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 6.14.3 The obligations of the CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.14.1 shall not extend to the liability of the OWNER, E/A, E/A's consultants, and their officers, directors, partners, employees or agents caused primarily by negligent preparation of maps, drawings, surveys, designs or specifications upon which is placed the applicable state-authorized design professional seal of the OWNER's, E/A's or E/A's consultant's officers, directors, partners, employees or agents. 6.14.4 In the event the CONTRACTOR fails to follow the OWNER's directives concerning use of the site, scheduling or course of construction, or engages in other conduct which proximately causes damage to property based on inverse condemnation or otherwise, then and in that event, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify the OWNER against all costs resulting from such claims. 6.14.5 In the event the CONTRACTOR unreasonably delays progress of the work being done by others on the site so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 6.15 Survival of Obligations: All representations, indemnifications, warranties and guarantees made in, required by or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents,will survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the Work and termination or completion of the Agreement. 6.16 Losses from Natural Causes: Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from action of the elements,floods or from unforeseeable circumstances in prosecution of the Work or from 00700 04-2020 Page 23 General Conditions unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at its own cost and expense. 6.17 Notice of Claim: Should the CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the OWNER or of any of the OWNER's employees or agents or others for whose acts the OWNER is liable,a Claim will be made to the other party within thirty (30) calendar days of the event giving rise to such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 6.17 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations, statute of repose, or any other provision of the Contract Documents. 6.18 Liquidated Damages: At set forth in the Agreement,paragraph 1 2,the CONTRACTOR or its Surety shall be liable for Liquidated Damages for the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely complete the Work or any portion thereof within the Contract Time. See Supplemental Conditions for amount of Liquidated Damages. ARTICLE 7-OTHER WORK 7.1 The OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by the OWNER's own forces, or let other contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the CONTRACTOR believes that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall afford other contractors who are in a contract with the OWNER and each utility owner (and the OWNER, if the OWNER is performing the additional work with the OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Owner's Representative and the other contractors whose work will be affected. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy damage caused by the CONTRACTOR to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the OWNER or separate contractors. 7.3 If the proper execution or results of any part of the CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Owner's Representative in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of the CONTRACTOR's Work. The CONTRACTOR's failure to report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with the CONTRACTOR'S Work except for latent or non-apparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.4 The OWNER shall provide for coordination of the activities of the OWNER's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the CONTRACTOR, who shall cooperate with them. The CONTRACTOR shall participate with other separate contractors and Owner's Representative in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The CONTRACTOR shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the CONTRACTOR, separate contractors and the OWNER until subsequently revised. 7.5 Unless otherwise stated herein, costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 7.6 If CONTRACTOR damages,delays,disrupts or interferes with the work of any other contractor,or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the site of the Project, through CONTRACTOR's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's actions, 00700 04-2020 Page 24 General Conditions inactions or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the site of the Project is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or E/A, then CONTRACTOR shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law,and(2)INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE INDEMNIFIED PARTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE E/A FROM AND AGAINST ANY SUCH CLAIMS,AND AGAINST ALL COSTS,LOSSES,AND DAMAGES(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ALL FEES AND CHARGES OF ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, ATTORNEYS, AND OTHER PROFESSIONALS AND ALL COURT OR ARBITRATION OR OTHER DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO SUCH DAMAGE, DELAY, DISRUPTION, OR INTERFERENCE. ARTICLE 8-OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.1 Prior to the start of construction, the OWNER will designate in writing a person or entity to act as Owner's Representative during construction. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the OWNER shall issue all communications to the CONTRACTOR through Owner's Representative. 8.2 The OWNER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. The OWNER is not responsible for any failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with laws and regulations applicable to furnishing or performing the Work. The OWNER is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Failure or omission of the OWNER to discover, or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to properly and fully perform the Contract. 8.3 The OWNER is not responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. _N 8.4 Information or services under the OWNER's control shall be furnished by the OWNER with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 8.5 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the OWNER enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 4 (Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Reference Points), Article 7 (Other Work)and Article 14(Payments to the CONTRACTOR and Completion). 8.6 Notice of Claim: Should the OWNER suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the CONTRACTOR or of any of the CONTRACTOR's employees or agents or others for whose acts the CONTRACTOR is liable, a notice of such injury or damage will be sent to the CONTRACTOR within thirty (30) calendar days of the event giving rise to such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 8.6 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or statute of repose. 8.7 The OWNER is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The failure or omission of the OWNER, E/A or any other person or entity acting on behalf of the OWNER or the E/A to observe, detect,discover, or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR'S obligation to properly and fully perform the Work pursuant to the Contract Documents. The OWNER shall not be responsible for the acts, errors or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 9-ENGINEER/ARCHITECT'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 EIA's Authority and Responsibilities: 9.1.1 The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of E/A during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of the OWNER and E/A. The assignment 00700 04-2020 Page 25 General Conditions -` of any authority, duties or responsibilities to E/A under the Contract Documents, or under any agreement between the OWNER and E/A, or any undertaking, exercise or performance thereof by E/A, is intended to be for the sole and exclusive benefit of the OWNER and is not for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor, Supplier, or any other person or organization,or for any surety or employee or agent of any of them. 9.1.2 E/A will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E/A is not responsible for any failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the furnishing or performing the Work. E/A is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Failure or omission of E/A to discover, or object to or condemn any defective Work or material shall not release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to properly and fully perform the Work. 9.1.3 E/A is not responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. 9.1.4 If the OWNER so directs, E/A will review the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection,tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by Article 14, but only to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. 9.1.5 The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9.1 shall also apply to E/A's Consultants, Resident Project Representative and assistants. 9.2 E/A as Owner's Representative: 9.2.1 E/A may be designated as Owner's Representative under paragraph 8.1. 9.3 Visits to Site: If the OWNER so directs, E/A will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as is necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of the CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, E/A will endeavor for the benefit of the OWNER to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. E/A will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. E/A's efforts will be directed toward providing for the OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site observations, E/A will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defective Work. E/A's visits and on-site observations are subject to all the limitations on EtA's authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9.1. 9.4 Project Representative: If the OWNER and E/A agree, E/A will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist E/A in providing more continuous observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.1 and in the Supplemental General Conditions. The OWNER may designate another representative or agent to represent the OWNER at the site who is not E/A, EtA's consultant, agent or employee. 9.5 Clarifications and Interpretations: E/A may determine that written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of drawings or otherwise) are necessary. Such written clarifications or interpretations will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents,will be issued with reasonable promptness by Owner's Representative and will be binding on the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER or the 00700 04-2020 Page 26 General Conditions CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Times, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 9.6 Rejecting Defective Work: E/A may recommend that the OWNER disapprove or reject Work which E/A believes to be defective, or believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 10 -CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1 Changes: 10.1.1 Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety,the OWNER, at any time or from time to time, may order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such changes in the Work will be authorized by Change Order, Change Directive or Field Order. 10.1.2 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Change Directive or Field Order. 10.1.3 The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.3.1 and paragraph 3.3.2, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.11.5 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.4. 10.1.4 Except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.11.5, a Change Order or Change Directive is required before the CONTRACTOR commences any activities associated with a change in the Work which, in the CONTRACTOR's opinion, will result in a change in the Contract Amount and/or Contract Times. 10.1.5 If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Amount or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 10.2 Change Orders: 10.2.1 The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate written Change Orders covering: .1 a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Amount, if any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 10.2.2 An executed Change Order shall represent the complete, equitable, and final amount of adjustment in the Contract Amount and/or Contract Time owed to the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER as a result of the occurrence or event causing the change in the Work encompassed by the Change Order. 10.3 Change Directives: 10.3.1 The OWNER may by written Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Amount 00700 04-2020 Page 27 General Conditions and Contract Time being adjusted as necessary. A Change Directive shall be used in the absence of complete and prompt agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 10.3.2 If the Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Amount, the adjustment shall be based on the method provided for in paragraph 11.5. 10.3.3 A Change Directive shall be recorded later by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 10.3.4 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved. 10.4 Field Order: 10.4.1 Owner's Representative may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These shall be accomplished by written Field Order and shall be binding on the OWNER and on the CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved promptly. 10.4.2 If the CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order would require an adjustment in the Contract Amount and/or Contract Times, the CONTRACTOR shall make written request to Owner's Representative for a Change Order. Any request by the CONTRACTOR for an adjustment in Contract Amount and/or Contract Times shall be made in writing prior to beginning the work covered by the Field Order. 10.5 No Damages for Delay: Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work. If delay is caused by specific orders given by the OWNER to stop Work for reasons for which the CONTRACTOR is not responsible, or such delay is not caused by active interference in the Work by OWNER for reasons for which the CONTRACTOR is not responsible, then such delay will entitle the CONTRACTOR only to an equivalent extension of time,the CONTRACTOR's application for which shall, however, be subject to approval of the OWNER. No such extension of time shall release the CONTRACTOR or surety on its performance bond from all the CONTRACTOR's obligations hereunder which shall remain in full force until discharge of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -CHANGE OF CONTRACT AMOUNT 11.1 The Contract Amount is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 11.2 The original Contract Amount may not be increased by more than twenty-five percent(25%)and it may not be decreased more than twenty-five percent(25%)without the consent of the CONTRACTOR to such decrease. 11.3 The Contract Amount shall only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Amount shall be made by Written Notice delivered by the party making the Claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than thirty(30)calendar days)after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the Claim and stating the general nature of the Claim. Notice of the amount of the Claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty (30)calendar days after Written Notice of Claim is delivered by claimant, and shall represent that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree, all Claims for adjustment in the Contract Amount shall be determined as set out in Article 16. 11.4 Determination of Value of Work: 00700 04-2020 Page 28 General Conditions 11.4.1 The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Amount will be determined by one or more of the following methods: .1 by application of unit prices contained in the Contract Documents to the quantities of the items involved. .2 by a mutually agreed lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. .3 by cost of Work plus the CONTRACTOR's fee for all overhead costs and profit(determined as provided in paragraph 11.5). 11.4.2 Before using the method described in paragraph 11.4.1.3, the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR agree to negotiate a Change Order using the methods identified in paragraph 11.4.1.1 and paragraph 11.4.1.2, as appropriate,to determine the adjustment in the Contract Amount. 11.5 Cost of Work: If neither of the methods defined in paragraph 11.4.1.1 or paragraph 11.4.1.2 can be agreed upon before a change in the Work is commenced which will result in an adjustment in the Contract Amount, the OWNER may issue a Change Directive to the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER elects to issue a Change Directive, CONTRACTOR shall perform the Changed Work and payment will be made as follows: .1 For all personnel, the CONTRACTOR will receive the rate or wage specified in the prevailing wage rates established in Section 00900 for each hour that said personnel are actually engaged in such Work, to which will be added an amount equal to twenty-five percent (25%) of the sum thereof as compensation for the CONTRACTOR's and any affected Subcontractor's total overhead and profit. No separate charge will be made by the CONTRACTOR for organization or overhead expenses. For the cost of premiums on public liability insurance, workers' compensation insurance, social security and unemployment insurance, an amount equal to fifty-five percent (55%) of the wages paid personnel, excluding the twenty-five(25%)compensation provided above,will be paid to the CONTRACTOR. The actual cost of the CONTRACTOR's bond(s) on the extra Work will be paid based on invoices from surety. No charge for superintendence will be made unless considered necessary and ordered by the OWNER. .2 The CONTRACTOR will receive the actual cost, including freight charges, of the materials used on such Work, to which costs will be added a sum equal to twenty-five percent (25%) thereof as compensation for the CONTRACTOR's and any affected Subcontractor's total overhead and profit. In case material invoices indicate a discount may be taken, the actual cost will be the invoice price minus the discount. .3 For machinery,trucks, power tools, or other similar equipment agreed to be necessary by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER will allow the CONTRACTOR the rate as given in the latest edition of the Associated General Contractors of America "Contractor's Equipment Cost Guide" as published by Dataquest for each hour that said tools or equipment are in use on such work,which rate includes the cost of fuel, lubricants and repairs. No additional compensation will be allowed on the equipment for the CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit. .4 The compensation, as herein provided for, shall be received by the CONTRACTOR and any affected Subcontractor as payment in full for work done by Change Directive and will include use of small tools, and total overhead expense and profit. The CONTRACTOR and the Owner's Representative shall compare records of work done by Change Directive at the end of each day. Copies of these records will be made upon forms provided for this purpose by the OWNER and signed by both Owner's Representative and the CONTRACTOR,with one (1) copy being retained by the OWNER and one(1) by the CONTRACTOR. Refusal by the CONTRACTOR to sign these records within two (2) working days of presentation does not invalidate the accuracy of the record. 00700 04-2020 Page 29 General Conditions 11.6 Unit Price Work: 11.6.1 Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be unit price Work, initially the Contract Amount will be deemed to include for all unit price work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Bid. The estimated quantities of items of unit price work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Amount. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of unit price work performed by the CONTRACTOR will be made by Owner's Representative. Owner's Representative will review with the CONTRACTOR the preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). 11.6.2 When "plan quantity" is indicated for a bid item, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the amount specified in the Contract Documents without any measurements. 11.6.3 Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by the CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover the CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. 11.6.4 A Major Item is any individual bid item in the Bid that has a total cost equal to or greater than five percent (5%) of the original Contract Amount or $50,000, whichever is greater, computed on the basis of bid quantities and Contract unit prices. 11.6.5 The OWNER or the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Amount in accordance with Article 11 if: .1 the actual quantity of any Major Item should become as much as twenty percent (20%) more than or twenty percent(20%) less than in the Bid; or .2 The CONTRACTOR presents proper documentation contesting the accuracy of"plan quantity," and Owner's Representative verifies quantity and determines original quantity is in error by five percent (5%)or more. 11.6.E Right to Verify Information: The CONTRACTOR agrees that any designated representative of the OWNER shall have the right to examine the CONTRACTOR'S records to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price change proposals. Even after a Change Order Proposal has been approved, the CONTRACTOR agrees that if the OWNER later determines the cost and pricing data submitted was inaccurate, incomplete, not current or not in compliance with the terms of this Agreement regarding pricing of change orders, then an appropriate contract price reduction will be made. 11.6.7 Pricing Information Requirements: The CONTRACTOR agrees to provide and require all subcontractors to provide a breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost information as outlined herein. This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden related to change order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate estimate of the CONTRACTOR's actual labor and labor burden cost components. This information is not intended to establish fixed billing or change order pricing labor rates. However, at the time change orders are priced the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such agreed-upon labor cost components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit. Approved change order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost components if the agreed-upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate. ARTICLE 12 -CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.1 Working Day and Calendar Day Contracts: 12.1.1 The Contract Times (or Milestones) shall only be changed by Change Order or Time Extension Request duly executed by both the CONTRACTOR and Owner's Representative. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Times(or Milestones)shall be made by Written Notice delivered by the party making the Claim to the other 00700 04-2020 Page 30 General Conditions party promptly (but in no event later than thirty (30)calendar days)after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the delay and stating the general nature of the delay. Notice of the extent of the delay with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty (30) calendar days after Written Notice of Claim is delivered by claimant, and shall represent that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree, all Claims for adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be determined as set out in Article 16. No Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times(or Milestones)will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. 12.1.2 When the CONTRACTOR is at fault and the OWNER stops the Work so that corrections in the Work can be made by the CONTRACTOR, then no extension in time will be allowed. 12.1.3 When the CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times(or Milestones) due to delay for which the CONTRACTOR is not responsible, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones)in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay will be considered by OWNER. Any extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. However, adverse weather shall not be considered justification for extension of Contract Times on Calendar Day contracts, except as provided for in paragraph 12.2. 12.1.4 The OWNER will consider time extension requests and may grant the CONTRACTOR an extension of time because of: .1 Changes ordered in the Work which justify additional time. .2 Failure of materials or products being at the Project site due to delays in transportation or failures of Suppliers,for which the CONTRACTOR,a Subcontractor or a Supplier is not responsible. The request for an extension of time shall be supported by a recitation of acts demonstrating that such delays were beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor or a Supplier including but not limited to, the CONTRACTOR's, the Subcontractor's or the Supplier's efforts to overcome such delays documented as follows: a) Copy of purchase order for delayed item(s) indicating date ordered by the CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor and date purchase order received by Supplier. b) If item(s) require Shop Drawings or other submittal information in accordance with the Contract Documents, provide record of date submittal(s) forwarded to Owner's Representative, date submittal(s) returned to the CONTRACTOR, and date submittal(s)forwarded to Supplier. c) Copy of document(s) from Supplier, on Supplier's letterhead, indicating date(s) item(s) would be ready for shipment and/or actual shipment date(s). d) Copies of all correspondence between the CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor and Supplier indicating the CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor's efforts to expedite item(s). e) If item(s) are being purchased by a Subcontractor, provision of meeting notes, correspondence, and the like which reflect the CONTRACTOR's efforts with the Subcontractor to expedite delivery of the item(s). .3 When acts of the OWNER, E/A, utility owners or other contractors employed by the OWNER delay progress of work through no fault of the CONTRACTOR. .4 When the CONTRACTOR is delayed by strikes, lockouts, fires, losses from natural causes, or other unavoidable cause or causes beyond the CONTRACTOR's control. 12.2 Calendar Day Contracts: 00700 04-2020 Page 31 General Conditions Under a Calendar Day Contract,the CONTRACTOR may also be granted an extension of time because of unusual inclement weather that is beyond the normal weather expected for the Williamson and Travis Counties,Texas area. Normal weather which prevents the CONTRACTOR from performing Work is expected during a Calendar Day Contract, and is not a justification for an extension of time. The following delineates the number of days per month for which, for purposes of Calendar Day Contracts, expected normal weather will prevent performance of Work: January 7 days February 7 days March 7 days April 7 days May 8 days June 6 days July 6 days August 5 days September 7 days October 7 days November 7 days December 7 days Days per month exceeding the number shown above may be credited as Rain Days if a Claim is made in accordance with paragraph 12.1.1 and meets the following definition: a"Rain Day" is any day in which a weather event occurs at the site and is sufficient to prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing units of Work critical to maintaining the project schedule during the entire day. ARTICLE 13 -TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; AND CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which the OWNER or E/A has actual knowledge will be given to the CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected or corrected as provided for in Article 13. 13.2 Access to Work: The OWNER, E/A, E/A's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of the OWNER, independent testing laboratories and governmental agencies having jurisdiction will have unrestricted physical access to the Work site for observing, inspecting and testing. The CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access, and advise them of the CONTRACTOR's site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.3 Tests and Inspections: 13.3.1 The CONTRACTOR shall give timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 13.3.2 The OWNER shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections,tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: .1 for inspections,tests or approvals covered by paragraph 13.3.3 below; .2 for reinspecting or retesting defective Work; and .3 as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. All testing laboratories shall be those selected by the OWNER. 00700 04-2020 Page 32 General Conditions 13.3.3 If laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work(or part thereof)specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, the CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for the OWNER's and E/A's review of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs or equipment submitted for review prior to the CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. 13.4 Uncovering Work: 13.4.1 If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered by the CONTRACTOR without concurrence of Owner's Representative, or if any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered and recovered at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 13.4.2 If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed, inspected or tested, the CONTRACTOR shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,the CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Amount, and may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective,the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and the CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 11 and Article 12. 13.5 OWNER May Stop the Work: 13.5.1 If the Work is defective, or the CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however,this right of the OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR or any surety or other party. 13.5.2 If the CONTRACTOR fails to correct defective Work or submit a satisfactory plan to take corrective action, with procedure and time schedule, the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until cause for such order has been eliminated,or take any other action permitted by this Contract. A notice to stop the Work, based on defects, shall not stop calendar or working days charged to the Project. 00700 04-2020 Page 33 General Conditions 13.6 Correction or Removal of Defective Work: If required by the OWNER,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly,as directed,either correct all defective Work,whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. The CONTRACTOR shall correct or remove and replace defective Work, or submit a plan of action detailing how the deficiency will be corrected, within the time frame identified in the notice of defective Work. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others), including but not limited to all consultant, engineering, expert and attorney's fees incurred by the OWNER as a result of such defective work or as necessary for OWNER to investigate such defective Work and/or to determine the appropriate means or methods to address or correct such defective Work. The OWNER shall have the right, in OWNER's sole discretion, to have the E/A or other consultant specify the means and methods that will be followed to correct or address any defective Work. If the OWNER specifies a means or method by which the defective Work will be addressed or corrected, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the specified work necessary to address or correct the defective Work at CONTRACTOR's sole cost and expense. 13.7 Warranty period: 13.7.1 If, at any time after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by laws or regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly,without cost to the OWNER and in accordance with the OWNER's written instructions: (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If the CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others and all consultant, expert and attorney's fees incurred by OWNER)will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. 13.7.2 In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the warranty period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Contract Documents and agreed to by OWNER. 13.8 OWNER May Correct Defective Work: If the CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after Written Notice of the OWNER to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the OWNER may, after seven (7) calendar days' Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. If, in the opinion of Owner's Representative, significant progress has not been made during this seven(7)calendar day period to correct the deficiency,the OWNER may exercise any actions necessary to remedy the deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph,the OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the OWNER may exclude the CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend the CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the OWNER has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. The CONTRACTOR shall allow the OWNER, its agents and employees,the OWNER's other contractors,E/A and EtA's consultants access to the site to enable the OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against the CONTRACTOR and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the 00700 04-2020 Page 34 General Conditions Work. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of the CONTRACTOR's defective Work and any and all consultant, expert and attorneys fees incurred by OWNER as a result of OWNER's correction of defective WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times(or Milestones), or claims of damage because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the OWNER of the OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. 13.9 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work, including but not limited to any expert, engineering or other consultant's fees incurred by the OWNER to investigate such defective Work and/or to determine the appropriate means or methods and work necessary to allow OWNER to accept the defective Work and CONTRACTOR shall pay for all work required to be performed to allow OWNER to accept the defective Work and any estimated costs, expenses and damages OWNER may sustain in the future as a result of accepting the defective Work, including any diminution in value of the Project as a result of accepting the defective Work. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, then OWNER may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under the Contract Documents. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, CONTRACTOR shall pay to OWNER the above described costs, expenses and damages incurred by OWNER as a result of OWNER's acceptance of defective Work. ARTICLE 14-PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.1 Application for Progress Payment: 14.1.1 Not more than once per month, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment, in a form acceptable to the OWNER,filled out and signed by the CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents or as required by OWNER. 14.1.2 Such applications shall not include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 14.1.3 Such applications shall not include requests for payment of amounts the CONTRACTOR does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or Supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 14.1.4 Owner will not pay for materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location. Payment will be made by Owner only for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.1.5 Where the original Contract Amount is less than$400,000, the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR the total amount of approved Application for Payment, less ten percent(10%)of the amount thereof, which ten percent (10%)will be retained until final payment, less all previous payments and less all sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. Where the original Contract Amount is$400,000 or more,the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR the total amount of approved Application for Payment, less five percent (5%)of the amount thereof, which five percent(5%)will be retained until final payment, less all previous payments and less all sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. In either case, if the Work is near completion and delay occurs due to no fault or neglect of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may pay a portion of the retained amount to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due under the Contract subject to the conditions stated under paragraph 15.2. 00700 04-2020 Page 35 General Conditions 14.1.E Applications for Payment shall include the following documentation: .1 updated progress schedule; .2 monthly subcontractor report; and .3 any other documentation required under the Supplemental General Conditions. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title: The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment,whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the OWNER not later than the time of payment to the CONTRACTOR free and clear of all liens. 14.3 Review of Applications for Progress Payment: 14.3.1 Owner's Representative will, within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate a recommendation for payment and forward the Application for processing by the OWNER, or return the Application to the CONTRACTOR indicating Owner's Representative's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case,the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 14.3.2 Owner's Representative's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Owner's Representative, based upon Owner's Representative's on-site observations of the executed Work and on Owner's Representative's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules,that to the best of Owner's Representative's knowledge, information and belief: .1 the Work has progressed to the point indicated; and .2 the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for unit price Work, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation). 14.3.3 By recommending any such payment, Owner's Representative will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: .1 inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work or that the Work has been performed in accordance with the Contract Documents; .2 examination has been made to ascertain how or for what purpose the CONTRACTOR has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Amount; .3 the CONTRACTOR'S construction means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures have been reviewed; or .4 that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle the CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by the OWNER or entitle the OWNER to withhold payment to the CONTRACTOR. 14.4 Decisions to Withhold Payment: 14.4.1 The OWNER may withhold or nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary on account of: .1 defective Work not remedied; 00700 04-2020 Page 36 General Conditions .2 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Amount; .3 damage to the OWNER or another contractor; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; .5 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit a schedule of values in accordance with the Contract Documents; .6 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit a submittal schedule in accordance with the Contract Documents; .7 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit or update construction schedules in accordance with the Contract Documents; .8 failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain a record of changes on drawings and documents; .9 failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain weekly payroll reports; .10 failure of the CONTRACTOR to submit monthly subcontractor reports; .11 the CONTRACTOR's neglect or unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work, including failure to clean up; or .12 failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with any provision of the Contract Documents. .13 OWNER's disagreement with the recommendation of the Owner's Representative, provided the OWNER has provided a Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR specifying the reasons why OWNER does not agree with such recommendation. 14.4.2 When the above reasons for withholding payment are removed, the CONTRACTOR shall resubmit a statement for the value of Work performed. Payment will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of approved Application for Payment. 14.5 Delayed Payments: Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR of a sum named in any Application for Payment with which OWNER agrees and has approved for payment within thirty (30) calendar days after the day on which the OWNER received the mutually acceptable Application for Payment, then the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR, in addition to the sum shown as due by such Application for Payment, interest thereon at the rate of one percent (1%) per month from date due until fully paid, which shall fully liquidate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. 14.6 Arrears: No money shall be paid by the OWNER upon any claim, debt, demand or account whatsoever, to any person, firm or corporation who is in arrears to the OWNER;and the OWNER shall be entitled to counterclaim and offset against any such debt, claim, demand or account so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand or account, shall affect the right of the OWNER to so offset said amounts, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 00700 04-2020 Page 37 General Conditions 14.7 Substantial Completion: 14.7.1 If a Certificate of Occupancy is required by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, said certificate shall be issued before the Work or any portion thereof is considered substantially complete. When the CONTRACTOR considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the OWNER agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the CONTRACTOR shall notify Owner's Representative and request a determination as to whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If Owner's Representative does not consider the Work substantially complete, Owner's Representative will notify the CONTRACTOR giving reasons therefor. Failure on the OWNER's part to list a reason does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. After satisfactorily completing items identified by Owner's Representative, the CONTRACTOR shall then submit another request for Owner's Representative to determine substantial completion. If Owner's Representative considers the Work substantially complete, Owner's Representative will prepare and deliver a certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall include a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment, shall establish the time within which the CONTRACTOR shall finish the punch list, and shall establish responsibilities of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, warranty and insurance. Failure to include an item on the punch list does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The certificate of Substantial Completion shall be signed by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR to evidence acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such certificate. 14.7.2 The OWNER shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, but the OWNER will allow the CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the punch list. 14.8 Partial Utilization: The OWNER, at the OWNER's sole option, shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work regardless of the time for completing the entire Work. The OWNER's exercise of such use and possession shall not be construed to mean that the OWNER acknowledges that any part of the Work so possessed and used is substantially complete or that it is accepted by OWNER, and the OWNER's exercise of such use and possession shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of its responsibility to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.9 Final Inspection: Upon Written Notice from the CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with the CONTRACTOR and provide Written Notice of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.10 Final Application for Payment: The CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments after the CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and delivered the following documents: .1 Three (3) complete operating and maintenance manuals, each containing maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, and other documentation required by the Contract Documents; .2 Record documents(as provided in paragraph 6.10); .3 Consent of surety, if any, to final payment. If surety is not provided, complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the OWNER) of all claims arising out of or filed in connection with the Work; 00700 04-2020 Page 38 General Conditions .4 Certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Supplemental General Conditions will remain in force after final payment and through any warranty period; .5 Non-Use of Asbestos Affidavit(After Construction); and .6 Any other documentation called for in the Contract Documents. 14.11 Final Payment and Acceptance: 14.11.1 If, on the basis of observation of the Work during construction, final inspection, and review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and the CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will recommend the final Application for Payment and thereby notify the OWNER. If the OWNER agrees with the recommendation of the Owner's Representative, the OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR the balance due the CONTRACTOR under the terms of the Contract. 14.11.2 As Contract Time is measured to Final Completion, Owner's Representative will issue a letter of final acceptance to the CONTRACTOR which establishes the Final Completion date and initiates any warranty period. 14.11.3 Final payment is considered to have taken place when the CONTRACTOR or any of its representatives negotiates the OWNER's final payment check, whether labeled final or not, for cash or deposits check in any financial institution for its monetary return. 14.12 Waiver of Claims: The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: .1 a waiver of claims by the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled claims, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any warranty specified therein, or from the CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and .2 a waiver of all claims by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. ARTICLE 15-SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER May Suspend Work Without Cause and for Convenience: At any time and without cause and for convenience, the OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety(90)calendar days by written agreement or by Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR which will fix the date on which the Work will be resumed. The CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. The CONTRACTOR may be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Times,or both,directly attributable to any such suspension if the CONTRACTOR makes an approved Claim therefor as provided in Article 11 and Article 12. 15.2 OWNER May Terminate Without Cause: Upon seven(7) calendar days'Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may,without cause and without prejudice to any right or remedy of the OWNER, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): .1 for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 00700 04-2020 Page 39 General Conditions .2 for all claims incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Suppliers, Subcontractors, and others. The CONTRACTOR agrees to negotiate in good faith with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others to mitigate the OWNER's cost CONTRACTOR shall include in any subcontract or purchase order language that provides that if the Agreement is terminated without cause, the Subcontractor and Suppliers will only be paid for work performed or materials and equipment supplied and shall not have any other claims against CONTRACTOR or OWNER; CONTRACTOR shall not be paid for any profit or overhead for Work not completed. 15.3 OWNER May Terminate With Cause: 15.3.1 Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: .1 if the CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; .2 if the CONTRACTOR disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; .3 if the CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; .4 if the CONTRACTOR makes fraudulent statements; .5 if the CONTRACTOR fails to maintain a work force adequate to accomplish the Work within the Contract Time; .6 if the CONTRACTOR fails to make adequate progress and endangers successful completion of the Contract; or .7 if the CONTRACTOR otherwise violates any provisions of the Contract Documents; The OWNER may, after giving the CONTRACTOR(and the surety, if any) seven (7)calendar days'Written Notice terminate the services of the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER, at its option, may proceed with negotiation with surety for completion of the Work. Alternatively,the OWNER may under these circumstances exclude the CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work (without liability to the CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the OWNER has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the OWNER may deem expedient. In such case the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Amount exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the OWNER arising out of or resulting from completing the Work, such excess will be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such claims,costs, losses and damage exceed such unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR or surety shall pay the difference to the OWNER. 15.3.2 Where the CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by the OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR and surety then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of amounts due the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER will not release the CONTRACTOR from liability. In the event the OWNER terminates the Contract with cause, the OWNER may reject any and all bids submitted by the CONTRACTOR for up to three(3)years. 00700 04-2020 Page 40 General Conditions 15.4 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate: If through no act or fault of the CONTRACTOR,the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety(90)calendar days by the OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or (except during disputes) Owner's Representative fails to forward for processing any mutually acceptable Application for Payment within thirty (30) calendar days after it is submitted, or(except during disputes)the OWNER fails for sixty (60)calendar days after it is submitted to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined by the OWNER to be due, then the CONTRACTOR may, upon seven(7)calendar days'Written Notice to the OWNER,and provided the OWNER does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.2. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if(except during disputes) Owner's Representative has failed to forward for processing any mutually acceptable Application for Payment within thirty(30)calendar days after it is submitted, or (except during disputes) the OWNER has failed for sixty (60) calendar days after it is submitted to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined by the OWNER to be due, the CONTRACTOR may upon seven (7) calendar days' Written Notice to the OWNER stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due the CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.4 are not intended to preclude the CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under Article 11 and Article 12 for an increase in Contract Amount or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to the CONTRACTOR's stopping Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16 -DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.1 Filing of Claims: 16.1.1 Claims arising from the circumstances identified in paragraphs 3.2, 4.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.4, 6.4.2, 6.11.5.2, 6.17, 7.5, 8.6, 9.5, 10.4.2, 13.8, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3, or 15.4,or other occurrences or events, shall be made by Written Notice delivered by the party making the Claim to the other party within thirty (30) calendar days after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the Claim and stating the general nature of the Claim. Notice of the amount of the Claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty (30) calendar days after Written Notice of Claim is delivered by claimant and shall represent that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which claimant is entitled. 16.1.2 Within thirty(30)calendar days of receipt of notice of the amount of the Claim with supporting data, Owner's Representative and the CONTRACTOR shall meet to discuss the Claim, after which an offer of settlement or notification of no settlement offer will be made to claimant. If claimant is not satisfied with the proposal presented, claimant shall have thirty(30)calendar days in which to: .1 submit additional supporting data requested by the other party; .2 modify the initial Claim; or .3 request Alternative Dispute Resolution. 16.2 Alternative Dispute Resolution: 16.2.1 If a dispute exists concerning a Claim, the parties agree to use the following procedure prior to pursuing any other available remedies. The OWNER reserves the right to include E/A as a party. 16.2.2 Negotiating with Previously Uninvolved Personnel: Either party may make a written request for a meeting to be held between representatives of each party within fourteen (14) calendar days of the request or such later period that the parties may agree to. Each party shall endeavor to include, at a minimum, one (1) previously uninvolved senior level decision maker empowered to negotiate on behalf of their organization. The purpose of this and subsequent meetings will be good faith negotiations of the matters constituting the dispute. Negotiations shall be concluded within thirty(30)calendar days of the first meeting, unless mutually agreed otherwise. This step may 00700 04-2020 Page 41 General Conditions be waived by written agreement of both parties, in which event the parties may proceed directly to mediation as described below. 16.2.3 Mediation: 16.2.3.1 If the procedure described in paragraph 16.2.2 proves unsuccessful or is waived pursuant to its terms, the parties shall initiate the mediation process. The parties agree to select within thirty (30) calendar days one (1) mediator trained in mediation skills, to assist with resolution of the dispute. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR agree to act in good faith in the selection of the mediator and to give consideration to qualified individuals nominated to act as mediator. Nothing in this agreement prevents the parties from relying on the skills of a person who also is trained in the subject matter of the dispute and/or a contract interpretation expert. 16.2.3.2 Mediation is a forum in which an impartial person, the mediator, facilitates communication between parties to promote reconciliation, settlement, or understanding among them. The parties hereby agree that mediation, at a minimum, shall provide for 1)conducting an on-site investigation, if appropriate, by the mediator for fact-gathering purposes, 2) a meeting of all parties for the exchange of points of view and 3) separate meetings between the mediator and each party to the dispute for the formulation of resolution alternatives. The parties agree to participate in mediation in good faith for up to thirty(30)calendar days from the date of the first mediation session, unless mutually agreed otherwise. Should the parties fail to reach a resolution of the dispute through mediation, then each party is released to pursue other remedies available to them. ARTICLE 17-RIGHT TO AUDIT 17.1 Right to Audit: Whenever the OWNER enters into any type of contractual arrangement with the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR's "records" shall upon reasonable notice be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction during normal business working hours. The OWNER's representative, or an outside representative engaged by the OWNER, may perform such audits. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain all records relating to this Agreement for four (4) years from the date of final payment under this Agreement, or until pending litigation has been completely and fully resolved,whichever occurs later. 17.1.1 The OWNER shall have the exclusive right to examine the records of the CONTRACTOR. The term "records"as referred to herein shall include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character, including without limitation records, books, papers,documents, contracts, schedules,commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in the OWNER's judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any contract document. Such records shall include(hard copy, as well as computer-readable data if it can be made available), written policies and procedures, time sheets, payroll registers, cancelled checks, personnel file data, correspondence, general ledger entries, and any other record in the CONTRACTOR'S possession which may have a bearing on matters of interest to the OWNER in connection with the CONTRACTOR's dealings with the OWNER(all of the foregoing are hereinafter referred to as "records"). In addition,the CONTRACTOR shall permit interviews of employees as well as agents, representatives, vendors, subcontractors and other third parties paid by the CONTRACTOR to the extent necessary to adequately permit evaluation and verification of the following: a) The CONTRACTOR's compliance with contract requirements; b) The CONTRACTOR's compliance with the OWNER'S business ethics policies; and c) If necessary, the extent of the Work performed by the CONTRACTOR at the time of contract termination. 17.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall require all payees(examples of payees include subcontractors, insurance agents, material suppliers, etc.) to comply with the provisions of this Article 17 by securing the requirements hereof in a 00700 04-2020 Page 42 General Conditions written agreement between the CONTRACTOR and payee. Such requirements include a flow-down right of audit provision in contracts with payees that also apply to subcontractors and sub-subcontractors, material suppliers,etc. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully and shall require Related Parties and all of the CONTRACTOR's subcontractors to cooperate fully in furnishing or in making available to the OWNER from time to time whenever requested, in an expeditious manner, any and all such information, materials, and data. 17.1.3 The OWNER's authorized representative or designee shall have reasonable access to the CONTRACTOR's facilities, shall be allowed to interview all current or former employees to discuss matters pertinent to the performance of this Agreement, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with this Article 17. 17.1.4 If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Article 17 discloses overpricing or overcharges of any nature by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER in excess of one-half of one percent(.5%)of the total contract billings, then the reasonable actual cost of the OWNER's audit shall be reimbursed to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR. Any adjustments and/or payments,which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of the CONTRACTOR's invoices and/or records, shall be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed 90 days)from presentation of the OWNER's findings to the CONTRACTOR. 17.1.5 The CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable actions to prevent any actions or conditions which could result in a conflict with the OWNER's best interests. These obligations shall apply to the activities of the CONTRACTOR's employees, agents, subcontractors, etc. in their dealings and relations with the OWNER's current and former employees and their relatives. For example,the CONTRACTOR's employees,agents or subcontractors should not make or provide to be made any employment, gifts, extravagant entertainment, payments, loans or other considerations to the OWNER's representatives, employees or their relatives. 17.1.E It is also understood and agreed by the CONTRACTOR that any solicitation of gifts or any other item of value by anyone representing the OWNER is to be reported within two (2) business working days to the OWNER at the following telephone number: 512-218-5401. Failure to report any such solicitations or offers shall be deemed a material breach of contract entitling the OWNER to pursue damages resulting from the failure to comply with this provision. ARTICLE 18-MISCELLANEOUS 18.1 Venue: In the event of any suit at law or in equity involving the Contract, venue shall be in Williamson County, Texas and the laws of the state of Texas shall apply to Contract interpretation and enforcement. 18.2 Extent of Agreement: This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. 18.3 Cumulative Remedies: The rights and remedies available to the parties are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by laws or regulations, by special warranty or guarantees or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 00700 04-2020 Page 43 General Conditions 18.4 Severability: If any word, phrase, clause, sentence or provision of the Contract, or the application of same to any person or set of circumstances is for any reason held to be unconstitutional, invalid or unenforceable,that finding shall only effect such word, phrase, clause, sentence or provision, and such finding shall not effect the remaining portions of this Contract; this being the intent of the parties in entering into the Contract; and all provisions of the Contract are declared to be severable for this purpose. 18.5 Independent Contractor The Contract shall not be construed as creating an employer/employee relationship,a partnership,or a joint venture. The CONTRACTOR's services shall be those of an independent contractor. The CONTRACTOR agrees and understands that the Contract does not grant any rights or privileges established for employees of the OWNER. 18.6 Prohibition of Gratuities The OWNER may, by Written Notice to the CONTRACTOR, terminate the Contract without liability if is determined by the OWNER that gratuities were offered or given by the CONTRACTOR or any agent or representative of the CONTRACTOR to any officer or employee of the OWNER with a view toward securing the Contract or securing favorable treatment with respect to the awarding or amending or the making of any determinations with respect to the performing of such Contract. In the event the Contract is terminated by the OWNER pursuant to this provision, the OWNER shall be entitled, in addition to any other rights and remedies, to recover or withhold the amount of the cost incurred by the CONTRACTOR in providing such gratuities. 18.7 Prohibition Against Personal Interest in Contracts No officer,employee, independent consultant,or elected official of the OWNER who is involved in the development, evaluation, or decision-making process of the performance of any solicitation shall have a financial interest, direct or indirect, in the Contract resulting from that solicitation. Any violation of this provision, with the knowledge, expressed or implied, of the CONTRACTOR shall render the Contract voidable by the OWNER. End of General Conditions 00700 04-2020 Page 44 General Conditions 00800 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Round Rock Contract Forms Supplemental General Conditions Section 00800 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES The Supplemental General Conditions contained herein shall amend or supplement the General Conditions, Section 00700. ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS 1.16 Enciineer/Architect(E/A): Add the following: Name(Representative): John Buser Firm: AECOM Address: 9400 Amberglen Blvd, Bldg E City, State, Zip: Austin, TX 78729 Telephone: 512-457-7701 Facsimile: Email: john.buser( aecom.com 1.27 Owner's Representative: Add the following: Name: Juan Martinez Title: Engineer Associate Address: 3400 Sunrise Rd City, State,Zip: Round Roc, TX 78665 Telephone: 512-341-3332 Facsimile: Email: jmartinez( roundrocktexas.gov ARTICLE 6-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.18 Liquidated Damages Add the following: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY LIQUIDATED DAMAGES IN THE AMOUNT OF one thousand AND NO/I 00 DOLLARS $ 1000.00 PER DAY FOR EACH DAY BEYOND THE DATE ESTABLISHED THEREFOR THAT THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO ACHIEVE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, AND FOR WHICH OWNER IS UNABLE TO UTILIZE THE IMPROVEMENTS AND FACILITIES DUE TO THE FAILURE OF CONTRACTOR TO HAVE ACHIEVED SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT. END OF SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 00800 10-2015 Supplemental General Conditions 00090669 00900 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SECTION 01-INFORMATION 01-01 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED The Agreement will be prepared in not less than two (2) (original signed) sets. The OWNER will furnish to the CONTRACTOR one (1) copy of conforming Contract Documents and Specifications unless otherwise requested. 01-02 GOVERNING CODES All construction as provided for under the Contract Documents shall be governed by any existing Resolutions, Codes and Ordinances, and any subsequent amendments or revisions thereto as set forth by the OWNER. 01-03 LOCATION The location of work shall be as set forth in the Notice to Bidders and as indicated in the Contract Documents. 01-04 USAGE OF WATER All water used during construction shall be provided by the OWNER and shall be metered. The OWNER shall specify the location from which the CONTRACTOR is to procure water. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining a bulk water permit from the OWNER and providing all apparatus necessary for procuring,storing, transporting and using water during construction. The CONTRACTOR shall strive to use no more water than reasonable to perform the work associated with this Contract and shall avoid waste.The CONTRACTOR will be required to pay for all water used if it is found that waste is occurring during construction. SECTION 02-SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS 02-01 CROSSING UTILITIES Prior to commencing the Work associated with this Contract, it shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to make arrangements with the owners of utility companies to uncover their particular utility lines or otherwise confirm their location. Certain utility companies perform such services at their own expense,however,where such is not the case, the CONTRACTOR will cause such work to be done at his own expense. 02-02 UTILITY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for providing its own utility services while performing the Work associated with this Contract. Provision of said utility services shall be subsidiary to the various bid items and no additional payment will be made for this item. OO9OO-42O2O Page 1 Special Conditions 00443643 02-03 WAGE RATES Wage Rates(Information From Chapter 2258,Texas Government Code Title 10) 2288.021.Duty of Government Entity to Pay Prevailing Wage Rates a. The State or any political subdivision of the State shall pay a worker employed by it or on behalf of it: (1) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed; and (2) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. b. Subsection(a)does not apply to maintenance work. c. A worker is employed on a public work for the purposes of this section if a Contractor or Subcontractor in the execution of a contract for the public work with the State, a political subdivision of the State or any officer or public body of the State or a political subdivision of the State, employs the worker. 2258.023. Prevailing Wage Rates to be Paid by Contractor and Subcontractor; Penalty a. The contractor who is awarded a contract by a public body, or a Subcontractor of the Contractor, shall pay not less than the rates determined under Section 2258.022 to a worker employed by it in the execution of the contract. b. A Contractor or Subcontractor who violates this section shall pay to the state or a political subdivision of the state on whose behalf the contract is made,$60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract.A public body awarding a contract shall specify this penalty in the contract. c. A contractor or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates, and specify the rates in the contract as provided by Section 2258.022. d. The public body shall use any money collected under this section to offset the costs incurred in the administration of this chapter. e. A municipality is entitled to collect a penalty under this section only if the municipality has a population of more than 10,000. 00900-4-2020 Page 2 Special Conditions 00443643 2258.051. Duty of Public Body to Hear Complaints and Withhold Payment A public body awarding a contract, and an agent or officer of the public body, shall: 1. take cognizance of complaints of all violations of this chapter committed in the execution of the contract; and 2. withhold money forfeited or required to be withheld under this Chapter from the payments to the Contractor under the contract, except that the public body may not withhold money from other than the final payment without determination by the public body that there is good cause to believe that the Contractor has violated this chapter. Applicable wage rates to be used in Williamson and/or Travis County may be obtained from the U.S. Department of Labor website at the following web addresses: Construction Types: Heavy (Sewer/Water Treating Plant and Sewer/Incidental to Highway) http://www.wdol.gov/wdoliscafiles/davisbacon/TX33.dvb?v=0 Construction Types: Heavy and Highway http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/TX 1 6.dvb?v=0 Construction. Type: Building http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/TX76.dvb?v=1 02-04 LIMIT OF FINANCIAL RESOURCES The OWNER has a limited amount of financial resources committed to this Project; therefore, it shall be understood by all bidders that the OWNER may be required to change and/or delete any items which it may feel is necessary to accomplish all or part of the scope of work within its limit of financial resources. CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no claim for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of work that may be omitted. At any time during the duration of this contract, the OWNER reserves the right to omit any work from this contract. Unit prices for all items previously approved in this contract shall be used to delete or add work per change order. 02-05 LIMITS OF WORK AND PAYMENT It shall be the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to complete all work included in this Contract, so authorized by the OWNER, as described in the contract documents and technical specifications. All items of work not specifically paid for in the bid proposal shall be included in the unit price bids. Any question arising as to the limits of work shall be left up to the interpretation of the E/A. 00900-4-2020 Page 3 Special Conditions 00443643 02-06 LAND FOR WORK OWNER provides, as indicated on Drawings, land upon which work is to be done, right-of-way for access to same and such other lands that are designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR.CONTRACTOR provides,at his expense and without liability of OWNER, any additional land and access thereto that may be required for his construction operations,temporary construction facilities, or for storage of materials. 02-07 DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY UTILITY STRUCTURES Whenever existing utilities, not indicated on the Drawings, present obstructions to grade and alignment of proposed improvements immediately notify engineer, who without delay, will determine if existing utilities are to be relocated, or grade and alignment of proposed improvements changed. Where necessary to move existing utilities and appurtenances as determined by the E/A, the E/A and CONTRACTOR will make relocation arrangements with the utility owner. The OWNER will not be liable for delay costs or damages due to relocations of utilities which hinder progress of the work. 02-08 CONSTRUCTION STAKING All construction staking required to complete the work associated with this contract shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining the layout and extent of staking necessary to construct the improvements to the lines and grades shown in the Drawings and such staking shall be satisfactory to the E/A. The CONTRACTOR shall consult with the E/A and Owners Representative in the field for assistance as necessary. Sufficient staking materials and equipment shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR including but not limited to:paint, flagging,laths,hubs,blue tops,nails,hammers,measuring chains or tapes,transits and levels. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for setting and marking control and off-set points for measuring distances and angles,for shooting levels,and for any other items pertaining to construction staking. This item shall not be paid for separately and shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 00900-4-2020 Page 4 Special Conditions 00443643 SECTION 03-ACCESS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL Access shall be provided for the public and emergency vehicles at all possible times. When it becomes necessary to restrict access, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER and coordinate with the OWNER, all applicable agencies (i.e. Fire Department,E.M.S.,Public Works,etc.),residents,and affected parties.If emergency access is required during the work and such access is being hindered by the work,the CONTRACTOR will suspend the work if necessary, and otherwise endeavor to assist emergency personnel in accessing a location restricted by the work. Unless otherwise approved by the E/A, at the end of each day all lanes of traffic shall be opened to the public. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure compliance at all times with the accepted Traffic Control Plan for the project and shall be responsible for all maintenance, signing and safety precautions necessary for traffic control. These items shall be included in the bid item Traffic Control. OO9OO-42O2O Page 5 Special Conditions 00443643 01000 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ITEM 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Work covered by these Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations in connection with the inspection and testing, complete in accordance with the Plans, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 1.02 GOVERNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS STREET, WATER, SEWER AND DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS The Round Rock Standard Specification Criteria Manual is hereby referred to and included in this contract as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein, and shall be applied to this project unless modified elsewhere as discussed below. The aforementioned Criteria Manual is the"Standard Specifications" section of the City of Round Rock Design and Construction Standards. The Standard Specifications may be accessed from the City of Round Rock website (www.roundrocktexas.gov) at the following web address: www.roundrocktexas.gov/dacs. Any adjustments, alterations,or additional information regarding Governing Technical Specifications are contained in the Plans (Drawings), Details and Notes described in Section 02000 of the Project Manual or are included in Attachment A at the end of this Technical Specifications Section. ITEM 2 CONTROL OF WORK 2.01 CLEAN-UP 2.01.1 CONSTRUCTION SITE During construction, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the site free and clean from all rubbish and debris and shall clean-up the site promptly when notified to do so by the E/A. The CONTRACTOR shall,at its own expense,maintain the streets and roads free from dust, mud, excess earth or debris which constitutes a nuisance or danger to the public using the thoroughfare, or the occupants of adjacent properties. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets and roads over which hauling is done, and any such spillage or debris deposited on streets, due to the CONTRACTOR's operations, shall be immediately removed. Page 1 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 2.01.2 BACKWORK The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his operations in such a manner as to prevent the amount of clean-up and completion of back works from becoming excessive. Should such a condition exist,the E/A may order all or portions of the work to cease and refuse to allow any work to commence until the back work is done to the E/A's satisfaction. 2.02 GRADING The CONTRACTOR shall do such grading in and adjacent to the construction area associated with this contract as may be necessary to leave such areas in a neat and satisfactory condition approved by the E/A. ITEM 3 EXAMINATION AND REVIEW 3.01 EXAMINATION OF WORK The work covered under this Contract shall be examined and reviewed by the E/A, representatives of all governmental entities which have jurisdiction, and the Owner's Representative. The quality of material and the quality of installation of the improvements shall be to the satisfaction of the E/A. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for the construction methods and safety precautions in the undertaking of this Contract. 3.02 NOTIFICATION The E/A and the OWNER must be notified a minimum of 24-hours in advance of beginning construction,testing, or requiring presence of the E/A,Owner's or Owner's Representative. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKING The E/A shall furnish the CONTRACTOR reference points and benchmarks that, in the E/A's opinion, provide sufficient information for the CONTRACTOR to perform construction staking. 3.04 PROTECTION OF STAKES,MARKS.ETC. All engineering and surveyor's stakes, marks, property comers, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the CONTRACTOR, and in case of destruction or removal during the course of this project, such stakes, marks, property comers, etc., shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. Page 2 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 ITEM 4 PROTECTION AND PRECAUTION 4.01 WORK IN FREEZING WEATHER Portions of the work may continue as directed by the E/A. 4.02 PROTECTION OF TREES, PLANTS AND SHRUBS The CONTRACTOR shall take necessary precautions to preserve all existing trees, plants and shrubs but where it is justifiable and necessary the CONTRACTOR may remove trees and plants for construction right-of-way but only with approval of the E/A. 4.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES AND BARRICADES Traffic control measures and barricades shall be installed in accordance with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and in other locations deemed necessary by the E/A, for the protection life and property. Under no circumstances will any existing road be permitted to remain closed over a weekend. No separate pay will be made for this item. Costs for this item shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 4.04 PROPERTY LINES AND MONUMENTS The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection,reference and resetting of property comer monuments if disturbed. 4.05 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL The CONTRACTOR shall at his own expense, make arrangement for the disposal of surplus material, such as rock,trees,brush and other unwanted backfill materials. 4.06 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES The Contractor shall,at his own expense,provide additional space as necessary for his operations and storage of materials. ITEM 5 MATERIALS 5.01 TRADE NAMES Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the specifications an article or class of material is designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog number of any maker, patentee,manufacturer,or dealer,such designations shall be taken as intending to mean and specify the articles described or another equal thereto in quality, finish, and serviceability for the purpose intended, as may be determined and judged by the E/A in his sole discretion. 5.02 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP No material which has been used by the CONTRACTOR for any temporary purpose whatever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without the written consent of the E/A. Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is not the intention of the OWNER to discriminate against an equal product of another Page 3 O1OOO4-2O2O Technical Specifications 00443645 manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of quality for performance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of bids. Where the words "equivalent", "proper" or"equal to" are used, they shall be understood to mean that the item referred to shall be "proper", the "equivalent" of, or"equal to" some other item, in the opinion or judgment of the E/A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully equal to approved samples. Notwithstanding that the words "or equal to" or other such expressions may be used in the specifications in connection with a material, manufactured article or process, the material, article or process specifically designated shall be used, unless a substitute is approved in writing by the E/A, and the E/A will have the right to require the use of such specifically designated material,article or process. Page 4 01000-4-2020 Technical Specifications 00443645 CITY OF ROUND ROCK UTILITIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES , ,:,. .„. , . / '', ROUND ROCK TEXAS Project Manual For: Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvements Project Prepared By: AECOMImagine it. Delivered. AECOM Technical Services Inc. 13630 Briarwick Drive Austin, TX 78729 TXPE Reg. No. F-3580 _,,soao\440 4 4*(E �F T44itt° I c,'�P..• " �� ?/ June 2021 _i, s o N *1010 a..._ e JOHN N. BUSER �o-o•-. 90881 ck-; °>0o�;.(iCENS��-��e ` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ~ ' Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract Table of Contents Document Title Number SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 - General Requirements 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01040 COORDINATION 01045 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION 01050 GRADES LINES & LEVELS 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01310 PROJECT SCHEDULES 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHY &VIDEOS 01400 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING 01445 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA CITY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Series 100 - Earthwork RR 101 PREPARING RIGHT OF WAY RR 102 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Series 200 - Subgrade and Base Construction RR 201 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Series 500 - Pipe and Appurtenances RR 503 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS RR 504 ADJUSTING STRUCTURES RR 505 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT AND ENCASEMENT PIPE RR 506 MANHOLES RR 509 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS RR 510 PIPE RR 511 WATER VALVES Series 600 - Environmental Enhancement RR 601 SALVAGING AND PLACING TOPSOIL RR 604 SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL RR 606 FERTILIZER RR 610 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND OTHER VEGETATION RR 620 FILTER FABRIC RR 641 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE RR 642 SILT FENCE Series 700 - Incidental Construction RR 700 MOBILIZATION Series 800 - Urban Transportation Rev. Date 06/01/2021 Table of Contents Page 1 of 3 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract Table of Contents RR 802 PROJECT SIGNS Special Provisions SP 1 Measurement And Payment TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02071 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE OF OLD STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT 02224 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02242 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BACKFILL 02505 FLEXIBLE BASE, CRUSHED STONE DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03001 CONCRETE 03112 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03210 REINFORCING STEEL DIVISION 4- MASONRY 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 05010 METALS FOR STRUCTURES 05015 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATIONS 05020 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05100 METAL STRUCTURES DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07610 STANDING SEAM ROOF AND SOFFIT SYSTEM 07631 SHEET METAL GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS, AND SCUPPERS 07841 FIRE STOPPING 07902 SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08130 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES 08710 FINISH HARDWARE DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09902 PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES NOT USED DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11260 CHLORINATION SYSTEM 11266 DRY EMERGENCY CHLORINE GAS SCRUBBER SYSTEM Rev. Date 06/01/2021 Table of Contents Page 2 of 3 Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract `- Table of Contents DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15063 INSTALLATION OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEM 15141 PROCESS PIPING SUPPORTS 15332 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15402 PLUMBING 15500 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 15892 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16110 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16120 ELECTRIC WIRES AND CABLES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16160 PANELBOARDS 16400 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 16402 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS NOT USED END Rev. Date 06/01/2021 Table of Contents Page 3 of 3 �"`' THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section describes the Project in general and provides an overview of the extent of the Work to be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Detailed requirements and extent of Work is stated in the applicable Specification Sections and shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall, except as otherwise specifically stated herein or in any applicable part of these Contract Documents, provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution, testing,and completion of the Work. B. Any part or item of the Work which is reasonably implied or normally required to make the installation satisfactorily operable shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR and the expense thereof shall be included in the applicable unit prices or lump sum prices bid for the Work. It is the intent of these Specifications to provide the OWNER with the complete system. All miscellaneous appurtenances and other items of Work that are incidental to meeting the intent of the Specifications shall be considered as having been included in the applicable unit prices or lump sum prices bid for the Work even though these appurtenances and items may not be specifically called for in the Bid Documents. --. C. The WORK consists of demolition of the existing chlorine feed system, chlorine building, and select salvaging of existing equipment; the construction of a new chlorine feed system, chlorine building, and reinstallation of salvaged equipment; installation of a new fire water line and building sprinkler system; associated mechanical appurtenances; civil related site preparation; electrical and instrumentation and control construction; and all appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. D. All work done under this Contract shall conform to all governing local or state ordinances and laws. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange and pay all cost of permits and fees and shall confine his operations to the limits set by law. E. It is the intent of OWNER to award this project to one CONTRACTOR. F. Portions of this project may be subject to review and acceptance by various agencies or entities. The CONTRACTOR will be required to coordinate with these agencies for such items as issuance of permits, inspections during construction, and final acceptance. The agencies or entities for this project that may require coordination include but are not limited to the following: 1. City of Round Rock 2. Round Rock Fire Department 1.02 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct work in stages to provide proper coordination with work by Others. Coordinate the construction schedule and operations with the ENGINEER. April 30,2021 01010- Page 1 of 4 Summary of Work Job No.60633796 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall limit his use of the premises for work and for storage to the areas noted on the plans, to allow for work by other contractors. No work is permitted outside of the designated areas.The CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER if additional work area or storage area is needed. B. Arrange for the necessary temporary water and electric service and pay for these services and all water and electricity consumed during the construction Work. Service charges for electricity during construction are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. At final completion the electrical temporary service shall be disconnected and removed by CONTRACTOR. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract, stored on the site. D. Move any stored products, under CONTRACTOR's control, which interfere with operations of OWNER or separate contractor. E. Security: It shall be understood that the responsibility for protection and safekeeping of equipment and materials on or near the site will be entirely that of the CONTRACTOR and that no claim shall be made against the OWNER by reason of any act of an employee or trespassers. It shall be further understood that should any occasion arise necessitating access to the site occupied by these stored materials and equipment, the CONTRACTOR owning or responsible for the stored materials or equipment shall immediately move same. No materials or equipment may be placed upon the property of the OWNER other than as designated on the PLANS unless the OWNER has agreed to the location contemplated by the CONTRACTOR to be used for storage. 1.04 NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES A. The CONTRACTOR shall, as provided in the General Conditions, coordinate with OWNER and notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access to property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, CONTRACTOR shall give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected persons to provide for their needs. B. Notices shall conform to any applicable local ordinance and, whether delivered orally or in writing, shall include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenience caused thereby. C. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and all roadway and state highway rights-of-way, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the respective authorities representing the owners or agencies responsible for such facilities not less than 3 days nor more than 7 days prior to excavation so that a representative of said owners or agencies can be present during such work if they so desire. April 30,2021 01010- Page 2 of 4 Summary of Work Job No.60633796 1.05 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS A. During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable construction conditions, CONTRACTOR shall confine its operations to work which will not be affected adversely by such conditions. No portion of the Work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work in a proper and satisfactory manner. 1.06 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION REQUIREMENTS A. Mobilization requirements shall include, but not be limited to, the items described in RR Item 701. B. Demobilization: 1. All temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, controls, or materials shall be removed from the site prior to final payment, except as noted on the plans. 2. All underground installations shall be removed to a depth of 2 feet or as approved by the ENGINEER. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall clean and repair damage caused by installation or removal of temporary facilities and equipment. 1.07 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS OF WAY A. CONTRACTOR shall confine his construction operations within the limits indicated on the Drawings, and shall use due care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies so as to cause the least possible damage to property and interference with existing operations. If the CONTRACTOR requires additional easements for his operations, the CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for acquisition and maintenance of the easement. No additional compensation will be provided by the OWNER. 1. Easements: Easements across private property are indicated on the PLANS. CONTRACTOR shall set stakes to mark the boundaries of construction easement across private property. The stakes shall be protected and maintained until completion of construction and cleanup. 2. Rights-of-Way: Permits for Work in rights-of-way shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. All Work performed and all operations of CONTRACTOR, his employees, or subcontractors, within the limits of rights-of-way, shall be in conformity with the requirements and be under the control (through OWNER) of the authority owning, or having jurisdiction over and control of,the right-of- way in each case. 1.08 SITE MAINTENANCE AND CLEANUP A. The CONTRACTOR shall fill any holes or washouts caused by water discharge to the existing surrounding grade level immediately following each pumping test. B. CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free at all times from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate trash receptacles about the site and shall properly empty the containers when filled. C. Construction materials shall be neatly stacked by CONTRACTOR when not in use. CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or other damage. April 30,2021 01010- Page 3 of 4 Summary of work Job No.60633796 D. Volatile wastes shall be properly stored in covered metal containers and removed daily. E. Wastes shall not be buried or burned on site or disposed of into storm drains, sanitary sewers, steams, or waterways. All wastes shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a manner complying with local ordinances and antipollution laws.Waste from spilled oils and material from maintenance activities are specifically prohibited from being disposed of onsite. F. Adequate site maintenance and cleanup will be a condition for recommendation of progress payment applications. PART 2—PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3—EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION April 30,2021 01010- Page 4 of 4 Summary of work Job No.60633796 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Values: Submit schedule on CONTRACTOR's standard form. B. Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments 1. Submit with initially acceptable schedule of values. 2. Submit adjustments thereto with Application for Payment. C. Application for Payment: In accordance with the General Conditions and any modifications thereto as specified herein. D. Final Application for Payment: As specified herein. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Reference the General Conditions. B. Format 1. Prepare a separate schedule of values for each schedule of Work under the Agreement. 2. Lump Sum Work a. Provide separate value for each item or task on the progress schedule. b. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. c. Items in the schedule of values are to accurately reflect the cost of work. d. List separately such items as Bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization and contract closeout, facility startup, and other appropriate Division 1 activities. 3. Summation of the complete schedule of values representing all Work under the Agreement to equal the Contract Price. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Show estimated payment requests throughout Contract Times aggregating initial Contract Price. B. Base estimated progress payments on initially acceptable progress schedule. Adjust to reflect subsequent adjustments in progress schedule and Contract Price as reflected by modifications to the Contract Documents. 1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Reference the General Conditions. B. Transmittal Summary Form: Provided by OWNER. Attach one Summary Form with each Application for Payment for each schedule, include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized Officer of CONTRACTOR. C. Use Application for Payment Form acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. 1. Provide separate form for each schedule as applicable. April 30,2021 01025-Page 1 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 2. Include accepted schedule of values for each schedule or portion of Work, the price breakdown for Work, a listing of OWNER-selected equipment, if applicable, and allowances, as appropriate. 3. Form(s)to conform to the examples furnished by ENGINEER for Lump Sum Work and materials on hand. D. Preparation 1. Round values to nearest dollar. 2. List each Change Order and Written Amendment executed prior to date of submission as separate line item. Totals to equal those shown on the Summary Sheet for each schedule as applicable. 3. Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary Form and detailed Application for Payment Form for each schedule as applicable, a listing of materials on hand for each schedule as applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by ENGINEER. 4. Include"Contractor Affidavit for Partial Payment'(Attachment A to this Section). 1.05 MEASUREMENT-GENERAL A. Reference the General Conditions for additional requirements on Unit Price Work. B. Units of measure shown on the Bid Form to be as follows unless specified otherwise. Item Method of Measurement AC Acre-Field Measure by ENGINEER CY Cubic Yard - Field Measure by ENGINEER within the limits specified or shown CY-VM Cubic Yard-Measured in the Vehicle by Volume EA Each-Field Count by ENGINEER GAL Gallon-Field Measure by ENGINEER HR Hour LB Pound(s) -Weight Measure by Scale LF Linear Foot-Field Measure by ENGINEER LS Lump Sum-Unit is one; no measurement will be made MFBM Thousand Foot Board Measure-Delivery Invoice SF Square Foot SY Square Yard T Ton-Weight Measure by Scale 1.06 PAYMENT A. General: Progress payments will be made monthly on the date established at the Pre-Construction Meeting. B. Payment for all Work shown or specified in the Contract Documents is included in the Contract Price. C Payment for Mobilization: Reference RR Item 701 "Mobilization". Partial payments for mobilization will be as specified. Project Mobilization shall not exceed 5%of the Total Contract Amount. Payments for mobilization will be based on the earned value of work completed, excluding bonds and insurance, and will be as follows. The adjusted contract amount for construction items as used below is defined as the Total Contract Amount less the amount for mobilization, Bonds and Insurance. April 30,2021 01025-Page 2 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS A. Payment will not be made for following: 1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material. 2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under Contract Documents. 3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by reason of failure of CONTRACTOR to conform to provisions of Contract Documents. 4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle. 5. Defective Work not accepted by OWNER. 6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work. 1.08 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Partial Payment: Reference the General Conditions. No partial payments will be made for materials and equipment delivered or stored on site unless Shop Drawings are acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Final Payment: Will be made only for materials incorporated in Work; remaining materials, for which partial payments have been made,to revert to CONTRACTOR unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those items will be deducted from final payment. 1.09 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Reference the General Conditions. B. Prior to submitting final application, make acceptable delivery of required documents. 1. Affidavit of Bills Paid(Attachment B to this Section). 2. Certification of Completion (By CONTRACTOR)(Attachment C to this Section). 3. Certification of Completion (By Subcontractor)(Attachment D to this Section). Provide a certification for all subcontractors who provided labor and materials incorporated into the Work. 4. Other documentation that may be required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT USED) April 30,2021 01025-Page 3 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 ATTACHMENT A CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT FOR PARTIAL PAYMENT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the ("Contractor"). Contractor has performed labor and furnished materials pursuant to that certain Contract entered into on the day of _, by and between Contractor and the CITY OF ROUND ROCK for the erection, construction, and completion of certain improvements and/or additions upon the following described premises, to wit: LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION-CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS The undersigned, being by me duly sworn, states upon oath that the materials supplied in connection with Contractor's Application for Partial Payment No. , dated (the "Application Date"), represents the actual cost of sound materials that have been or will be fabricated into the work in compliance with the agreed to Plans and Specifications(and all authorized changes thereto). The undersigned further states that as of the Application Date Contractor has paid all bills and claims for materials and labor supplied in connection with the aforesaid Partial Payment. This affidavit is being made by the undersigned realizing that it is in reliance upon the truthfulness of the statements contained herein that a partial payment under said Contract is being made, and in consideration of the disbursement of said partial payment CONTRACTOR HEREBY AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD OWNER SAFE AND HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, COSTS, AND EXPENSES OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER SPECIFICALLY INCLUDING COURT COSTS, BONDING FEES, AND ATTORNEY FEES ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATING TO CLAIMS FOR UNPAID LABOR OR MATERIALS FURNISHED AS OF THE APPLICATION DATE. Executed this day of , _ By: Name Printed: Title: STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § Subscribed and sworn to before me, the undersigned authority, on this the day of _,to certify which,witness my hand and seal of office. Notary Public, State of Texas Notary's Name Printed: My commission expires: Attachment A April 30,2021 01025-Page 4 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 ATTACHMENT B AFFIDAVIT OF BILLS PAID STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared party to that certain Contract entered into on the day of , between and the CITY OF ROUND ROCK for the erection, construction, and completion of certain improvements and/or additions upon the following described premises, to wit: LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION-CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS Said party being by me duly sworn states upon oath that the said improvements have been erected and completed in full compliance with the above referred to Contract and the agreed Plans and Specifications therefor. Deponent further states that he has paid all bills and claims for materials furnished and labor performed on said Contract and that there are no outstanding unpaid bills or legal claims for labor performed or materials furnished upon said job. THIS AFFIDAVIT IS BEING MADE BY THE UNDERSIGNED REALIZING THAT IT IS IN RELIANCE UPON THE TRUTHFULNESS OF THE STATEMENTS CONTAINED HEREIN THAT FINAL AND FULL SETTLEMENT OF THE BALANCE DUE ON SAID CONTRACT IS BEING MADE, AND IN CONSIDERATION OF THE DISBURSEMENT OF FUNDS, DEPONENT EXPRESSLY WAIVES AND RELEASES LIENS, CLAIMS, AND RIGHTS TO ASSERT A LIEN ON SAID PREMISES AND AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD OWNER SAFE AND HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, COSTS, AND EXPENSES OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER SPECIFICALLY INCLUDING COURT COSTS, BONDING FEES, AND ATTORNEY FEES, ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATING TO CLAIMS FOR UNPAID LABOR OR MATERIAL USED OR ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION OF IMPROVEMENTS ON THE ABOVE-DESCRIBED PREMISES. By: Subscribed and sworn to before me, the undersigned authority, on this the day of _,to certify which, witness my hand and seal of office. Notary Public, in and for County, Texas Attachment B April 30,2021 01025-Page 5 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 ATTACHMENT C CERTIFICATION OF FINAL COMPLETION (By Contractor) We hereby certify that the work on the LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION - CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS for the CITY OF ROUND ROCK has been completed in compliance with the PLANS and SPECIFICATIONS. CONTRACTOR's Company Name By: Title: Date: Attachment C April 30,2021 01025-Page 6 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 ATTACHMENT D CERTIFICATION OF FINAL COMPLETION (By Subcontractor) We hereby certify that the (Description of Work Performed) work performed by us on the LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION -CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS for the CITY OF ROUND ROCK has been completed in compliance with the PLANS and SPECIFICATIONS. SUBCONTRACTOR's Company Name By: Title: Date: END OF SECTION Attachment D April 30,2021 01025-Page 7 of 7 Measurement and Payment Job No.60633796 '" `� THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART I -GENERAL 1.01 COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. Coordination of OWNER's Work by Others: Reference Contract General Conditions for coordination of OWNER's Work by others, if any, and coordinate CONTRACTOR's Work with OWNER or Owner's Representative. B. Other work may be performed at site by others during scheduled performance of Work under these Contract Documents. C. Other Contractors/ Landowners: OWNER will provide contact names and information for other on-site contractors and landowners as necessary and / or requested. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate directly with other contractors and landowners, as necessary. D. Contractor shall submit formal notifications, 48 hours in advance, for extended daily work hours outside of the 6 a.m. to 6 p.m. specified normal work hours and shall submit a request for Owner approval by noon on the Thursday prior for any Work on Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays. 1.02 COORDINATION OF THE WORK A. General: 1. This section is intended to provide general project overview. 2. Drawing Numbering System for AECOM Drawings: a. The drawing numbering system applied to the PLANS consists of three components, the first component identifies project area. The entire numbering system is depicted on the Sheet Index of the PLANS. b. The PLANS are generally organized by project area. Within each project area, the drawings are organized by discipline and the second component of the drawing numbering system identifies the associated discipline. The disciplines used on this project are depicted on the Sheet Index of the PLANS. c. The last component of a drawing number is numeric. The numeric system is sequential as dictated by the numbering system applied. 3. Coordinate work activities with other contractors and the landowners to achieve resolution to conflicts that are mutually agreeable and minimize impact to all parties. For the CONTRACTOR'S information, the temporary laydown location area specified for this project is identified on the PLANS. CONTRACTOR shall include in its bid price any costs that it anticipates for conflicts and coordination impacts due to the separate contractor's parallel work activities as defined herein and shown on the PLANS. 1.03 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Specific sequences of construction are defined in Section 01045, "Sequence of Construction",when required. B. The Work will be conducted within the City of Round Rock's Lake Creek Pump Station. While the Lake Creek Pump Station will be offline for a portion of the Contract Time, construct Work that potentially interferes with owner's operations in stages to allow for Apnl 30,2021 01040-Page 1 of 3 Coordination Job No.60633796 owner's continuous occupancy and for uninterrupted, unimpeded operation during construction. Coordinate construction schedule and operation with the OWNER. 1.04 UTILITIES A. Coordinate Work with various utilities within Project limits in accordance with the General Conditions, as applicable. Notify applicable utilities prior to commencing Work, and if damage occurs, or if conflicts or emergencies arise during Work. 1.05 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Reference Section 01200, "Project Meetings". 1.06 OTHER CONTRACTS A. Limits of construction and project work area for this project are indicated on the PLANS. Afford utility companies and other contractors' reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and execution of their work. Work under this contract connecting to work in other contracts must be carefully coordinated with that construction by others. 1.07 ACCESS FOR OTHERS A. Access to all roads is to be maintained throughout construction period. Under no circumstances will access to roads be blocked or denied to traffic during construction of this Contract, unless noted on the PLANS. 1.08 OPERATION OF AND CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES A. Existing water facilities shall be kept in continuous, unimpeded operation throughout the construction period, expect as coordinated by the OWNER. B. The OWNER has taken the Lake Creek Pump Station existing facilities out of service for a portion of the Contract period. CONTRACTOR shall not begin on-site work until OWNER confirms the availability of the pump station site. C. Schedule of construction, interconnecting details, and other revisions necessary for proper interfacing of the Work to be subsequently developed based on the results of the coordination effort between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. The ENGINEER and OWNER are to be notified 24 hours proper to any interruptions and/or connections being made. Begin no work prior to securing OWNER's approval of respective connection plan and work schedule. 1.09 OWNER'S FACILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and cooperate with OWNER in all construction operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate OWNER usage of property. B. Relocation of Existing Facilities: 1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work may be necessary. 2. Provide complete relocation of existing utilities and structures when required. 3. Use only new materials for relocated utilities and structures. Match materials of existing facility, unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Perform relocations to minimize disruption of properly usage. 5. Install new portions of existing facilities in their relocated position prior to removal of existing facilities, unless otherwise accepted by ENGINEER. April 30,2021 01040-Page 2 of 3 Coordination Job No.60633796 1.10 PARTIAL UTILIZATION BY THE OWNER (NOT USED) 1.11 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to verify locations of existing subsurface structures and underground facilities. B. Before initiating any excavations, CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly check immediate and adjacent areas subject to excavation by visual examination (and by electronic metal and pipe detection equipment, as necessary) for indications of subsurface structures and underground facilities. C. CONTRACTOR shall make exploratory excavations where existing underground facilities or structures may potentially conflict with proposed underground facilities or structures. Conduct exploratory excavations in presence of ENGINEER and sufficiently ahead of construction to avoid possible delays to CONTRACTOR's Work. Notify ENGINEER at least 24-hours prior to excavation. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING, FITTING AND PATCHING A. General: Reference the General Conditions. 1. Cut, fit, adjust, or patch Work, including excavation and backfill as required, to make Work complete. 2. Obtain prior written authorization of ENGINEER before commencing Work to cut or otherwise alter: a. Structural or reinforcing steel, structural columns or beams, elevated slabs, trusses, or any other structural member. b. Weather-or moisture-resistant elements. c. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. d. Work of others. 3. Refinish surfaces to provide an even finish. a. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. b. Refinish entire assemblies. c. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no transition between existing work and proposed Work is evident in finished surfaces. 4. Restore existing work, underground facilities, and surfaces that are to remain. 5. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified; if not specified, use best recommended practice of manufacturer or appropriate trade association. 6. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces and fill voids. 3.02-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for Work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for Work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 01040-Page 3 of 3 Coordination Job No.60633796 " `� THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01045 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This document is a supplement to the PLANS and Specifications. It establishes a proposed sequence of construction activities and defines constraints that are to be accommodated and specific time restraints associated with the construction activities. CONTRACTOR to review this proposed sequence of Construction and thoroughly familiarize himself with all constraints for maintaining operations of the plant. CONTRACTOR to propose a Sequence of construction incorporating these constraints and secure concurrence of OWNER prior to starting work. Should the CONTRACTOR decide to adopt this proposed Sequence of Construction as his proposed Sequence of Construction, he does so with the understanding that this in no way relieves him from his obligations for preparation of a workable Sequence of Construction and assuming full responsibility for same. B. This project consists of the demolition of the existing chlorine gas feed system, the chlorine building, the construction of a new chlorine building and gas feed system on the existing foundation, and the construction of a new chlorine gas scrubber. The existing pump station and chlorine feed system can be taken out of service for an extended period of time, beginning in October. But it must be operational again before April. All construction activities impacting operation of the pump station facilities must be coordinated in advance with the operations manager. C. This sequence of construction only mentions components of work that are sequence- sensitive, not all work required by contract. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. B. All electrical power transfers to be performed under unloaded condition. 1.03 (NOT USED) 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. "Partial Utilization", "Substantial Completion", and "Warranty Period for Items in continuous service": Refer to CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for definition. B. The terms"open, close, start, stop,operate, verify, energize, de-energize, transfer, Switch-over, etc"when used in conjunction with the facilities that are in-service or about to be placed in-service are understood to mean: CONTRACTOR is to perform the operation under the direct supervision of the OWNER's operation or maintenance staff. CONTRACTOR is to not abuse OWNER's equipment during these operations. However, it is understood that equipment failure may occur during operation. CONTRACTOR will not be held responsible, provided it was not due to abuse or improper means or method. June 1,2021 01045-Page 1 of 4 Sequence of Construction Job No.60633796 C. The term"operational test"refers to the period of specified duration that the installed system is tested to verify operational integrity of a system prior to the system being placed in service. Operational testing requires that representatives of major components for systems be on-site for timely identification and resolution of system issues. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. Installation of the proposed facilities includes demolition of the existing chlorine gas feed system within the existing chlorine building; salvage of the existing chlorinators, chlorine gas sensor, two chlorine residual analyzers, and the monochloramine analyzer; demolition of the existing chlorine building down to the existing foundation; construction of a new foundation beam that expands the square footage of the existing foundation; construction of a new chlorine building on top of the existing, expanded foundation; construction of a new chlorine gas feed system; re-installation of the salvaged chlorine gas sensor and chemical analyzers; installation of a fire protection sprinkler system; construction of a new bathroom and lab room within the chlorine building; all associated civil improvements to serve the new chlorine building; and all other facilities as indicated on the PLANS and in the Specifications. B. Electrical: New electrical facilities are to be installed to provide the specified electrical requirements for the proposed chlorine building. The work includes extending a new power feed from the existing MCC within the existing electrical building; routing of power cables to the new chlorine building; and installation of electrical facilities as indicated on the PLANS and in the Specifications. C. Instrumentation and Control: Instrumentation and control system improvements are proposed to provide specified monitoring and control of the proposed chlorine feed system facilities. The proposed monitoring and alarm system capabilities will connect to the existing PLC cabinet within the existing electrical room. The existing SCADA system connection capabilities will be maintained, and all existing and new signals transmitted to the remote, central operations facility. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". 1. CONTRACTOR's Sequence of Construction defining work to be performed, including the following items: a. Definition of the start date, duration and end date for the work defined in Paragraph 1.05. Definition of activities to be performed by or witnessed by OWNER and date on which these activities are to be performed. ii. Scheduling/timing of manufacturers field services, as specified. 2. Provide complete list of equipment and material that is required to perform work. 1.07-1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT USED) 3.01 GENERAL A. The proposed chlorine building will be constructed on the site of the existing chlorine building. The project consists of construction of this new building and the chlorine feed system, and includes connections to the existing system piping, electrical, and June 1,2021 01045-Page 2 of 4 Sequence of Construction Job No.60633796 instrumentation. The existing pump station can be taken out of service for no more than six(6)months. All equipment need for re-construction of the chemical feed system shall have an approved shop drawing within 60 days of the NTP and be in production before the pump station is taken out of service. B. The new facilities are to be installed, tested, and substantially complete and operational before April. Check out and test the proposed facilities per contract requirements. The project is substantially complete when all chlorine feed system components are operating as intended and can supply chlorine to the pump station allowing the station to be placed back in service. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Submit proposed construction sequence for approval and install temporary erosion and sedimentation controls prior to beginning construction. B. All material and equipment required to install a specific component of the project, per the PLANS, is to be on-site before installation can begin. This implies that all shop drawings have been submitted to the ENGINEER and OWNER for review and have been approved for installation. C. Notify the OWNER at least two weeks prior to the start of a work segment. Construction may occur only after CONTRACTOR has complied with preparation requirements defined in this Section. D. Verify location of existing facilities prior to construction of facilities proposed in this contract. E. All electrical switching, de-energization of loads, energization of loads, etc.,to be performed in the presence of, and with the consent of, the OWNER. F. CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for verifying that all circuits are dead and tagged out before performing any work under this Section. Comply with OSHA requirements and all applicable codes before throwing the switches to ensure the safety of all employees. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PROPOSED FACILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall submit all required shop drawings and submittals for new chemical feed equipment and emergency chlorine scrubber as soon after the NTP as possible, with approved shop drawings completed within 60 days of NTP. Minimal work within the pump station is permitted prior to the OWNER taking the station out of service. Work permitted includes exploratory excavations to identify underground obstructions; location of existing utility connections; and condition assessment of the existing chlorine building, chlorine sensor, chlorine residual analyzer, and monochloramine analyzer. B. After the pump station has been taken out of service CONTRACTOR shall mobilize to the site, install erosion and sedimentation controls,and begin demolition of the existing chlorine feed system and building in accordance with the PLANS. CONTRACTOR shall confirm that all chlorine gas cylinders have been removed from the building prior to beginning demolition. C. Demolish the existing chlorine building and remove all components down to the existing foundation, expect those designated by the OWNER for re-use. The existing foundation shall remain and shall be undamaged. June 1,2021 01045-Page 3 of 4 Sequence of Construction Job No.60633796 D. Construct the foundation addition as shown on the PLANS. After foundation is complete, construct the new chlorine building as required. E. Connect all new underground facilities as shown to the existing facilities as shown on the PLANS, including connections for the fire protection system, the electrical system, and the instrumentation system. F. Install new chlorine gas feed system, emergency scrubber, and all associated appurtenances. Coordinate with the fire department to receive approval for the new fire protection system. G. Perform required testing of new and re-installed equipment to confirm operation. All testing to be completed prior to the OWNER placing the pump station back into service (April). 3.04-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END SECTION June 1,2021 01045-Page 4 of 4 Sequence of Construction Job No.60633796 SECTION 01050 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. All Work is to be done to the lines, grades and elevations indicated on the PLANS. Information concerning basic horizontal and vertical control points has been provided on the Construction PLANS. These points to be used as datum under this Contract. All work to transfer all controls for grades, lines, levels, layout and measurements to be performed by the CONTRACTOR and require the approval of the OWNER. B. CONTRACTOR to provide a registered surveyor,an experienced instrument man, competent assistants, and such instruments, tools, stakes and other materials as required to stake out work and establish elevations from bench marks and horizontal control references established by ENGINEER and assume responsibility for correctness of installation as to location and grade. All survey work performed by CONTRACTOR to conform to the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors Manual of Practice for Land Surveying in the State of Texas, Category 5, Sections 1-9 inclusive, and in a format to be established by the OWNER. C. OWNER's and/or ENGINEER's survey crews will not stake for construction and will not be on site, except to perform quality control checks. D. The CONTRACTOR to keep the OWNER and ENGINEER informed, a reasonable time in advance of the times and places at which he wishes to do Work, so that any checking deemed necessary by the OWNER or ENGINEER may be done with minimum inconvenience to the OWNER or ENGINEER and minimum delay to the CONTRACTOR. Surveying will be coordinated between the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR in a manner convenient to both. E. Any Work done without being properly located may be ordered removed and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense. F. CONTRACTOR to use benchmarks and horizontal control data shown on Construction PLANS. The CONTRACTOR to carefully preserve all monuments, benchmarks, reference points, and stakes. In case of the destruction thereof, the CONTRACTOR to be charged with the expense of replacement and to be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or benchmarks which must be removed or disturbed to be protected until properly referenced for relocation. The CONTRACTOR to furnish materials and assistance for the proper replacement of such monuments or benchmarks. G. The CONTRACTOR to satisfy himself before commencing Work as to the meaning and correctness of all control stakes, marks, etc., and no claim will be entertained by the OWNER for or on account of any alleged inaccuracies, unless the CONTRACTOR notifies the OWNER thereof in writing before commencing work thereon. H. ENGINEER has established benchmarks and references for horizontal control for the Project as shown on Construction PLANS. I. CONTRACTOR shall use a qualification based selection process consistent with the Professional Services Procurement Act, Chapter 2254 of the Texas Government Code, when securing the services of a Professional Engineer or Registered Professional Land y - Surveyor. April 30,2021 01050- Page 1 of 2 Grades,Lines and Levels Job No.60633796 ' PART 2—PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 -3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 01050 - Page 2 of 2 Grades,Lines and Levels Job No.60633796 SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS DEFINITIONS General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions, Section 00700 included herein. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with the Owner's Representative's action on the CONTRACTOR'S submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Owner's Representative's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. A stamp reading "No Exceptions Taken" shall have the same intent as"Approved". Furnish: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. ` - Installer: An Installer is the CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by the CONTRACTOR, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in operations they are engaged to perform. Project Site: The space available to the CONTRACTOR for performing construction activities either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades persons of the corresponding generic name. INDUSTRY STANDARDS Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. April 30,2021 01095- Page 1 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer to the Owner's Representative for a decision before proceeding. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names, titles of general standards, and names and titles of government agencies are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the"Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association AAN American Association of Nurserymen. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ACI American Concrete Institute ACI American Council of Independent Laboratories ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association ADC Air Diffusion Council AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction April 30,2021 01095- Page 2 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction. ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America ALI Associated Laboratories, Inc. ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute. AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute. AREA American Railroad Engineers Association ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASA Acoustical Society of America ASA American Standards Association. ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating &Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association AWG American Wire Gage AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau April 30,2021 01095- Page 3 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AW\NA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute CAUS Color Association of the United States CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CE Corps of Engineers CFR Code of Federal Regulations CGA Compressed Gas Association CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission CRI Carpet and Rug Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) CTI Ceramic Tile Institute DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association DHI Door and Hardware Institute DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association DOC U.S. Department of Commerce DOT Department of Transportation ECSA Exchange Carriers Standards Association EIA Electronic Industries Association April 30,2021 01095- Page 4 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FHA Federal Housing Administration FM Factory Mutual Research Organization FS Federal Specifications FSC Forest Stewardship Council FTI Facing Tile Institute GA Gypsum Association GSA General Services Administration HEI Heat Exchange Institute HI Hydronics Institute H.I. Hydraulic Institute HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association IBD Institute of Business Designers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North American IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America IMSA International Municipal Signal Association IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISA Instrument Society of America ITE Institute of Transportation Engineers April 30,2021 01095- Page 5 Of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 LEEDTM Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design LIA Lead Industries Association, Inc. LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers'Association MIA Marble Institute of America MUSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry MUTCD Texas Department of Transportation Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association NBS National Bureau of Standards(U.S. Dept. of Commerce) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association NEC National Electrical Code(Published by NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA International Electrical Testing Association N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology April 30,2021 01095- Page 6 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association NPA National Particleboard Association NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute PE Professional Engineer REA Rural Electrification Administration RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RMA Rubber Manufacturing Association RPLS Registered Professional Land Surveyor SDI Steel Deck Institute S.D.I. Steel Door Institute SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SSPMA Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Association SWI Steel Window Institute r - SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association April 30,2021 01095- Page 7 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 TCA Tile Council of America TEX TEST TxDOT Laboratory Test TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association TPI Truss Plate Institute TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation UL Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. USDA U. S. Department of Agriculture USGBC U. S. Green Building Council USPS U. S. Postal Service WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Wallcovering Manufacturers Association WIC Woodwork Institute of California WLPDIA Western Lath, Plaster, Drywall Industries Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WSC Water Systems Council WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association END OF SECTION April 30,2021 01095-Page 8 of 8 Reference Standards and Definitions Job No.60633796 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Documents related to this section will include the construction drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the "General Conditions", "Supplemental General Conditions", and other Division 1 requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section describes the preconstruction conference and other Project related meetings which may be held on a routine schedule throughout the duration of the Project. B. The CONTRACTOR, or his authorized representative(s), shall attend all Project related meetings as indicated herein. The CONTRACTOR's representatives, as a minimum, shall include his Project Manager and Superintendent. Other CONTRACTOR's representatives may attend Project related meetings; however, there shall be a maximum of four (4) CONTRACTOR's representatives at any one meeting unless the ENGINEER approves a larger number. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all pertinent reports, copies of reports, etc., for each meeting as may be required by this or other sections of the Contract. 1.3 (NOT USED) 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A preconstruction conference shall be held as soon after the award and execution of the Contract as possible and before any Work at the site is started. The conference will be held at a location selected by the OWNER. The OWNER shall prepare and distribute the meeting agenda, preside over the conference, and may distribute meeting minutes. The conference shall be attended by: 1. CONTRACTOR's Project Manager. 2. CONTRACTOR's Superintendent. 3. Any Subcontractors' and/or Suppliers' representatives whom the CONTRACTOR may desire to invite or whom the ENGINEER or OWNER may request to attend. 4. ENGINEER representative. 5. OWNER's Project Manager. 6. OWNER's REPRESENTATIVE B. The topics to be discussed may include, but will not be limited to, the following items: 1. Introduction of persons attending the meeting. 2. General project description, including length of contract and liquidated damages. 3. Key personnel associated with the construction (may include, but is not limited to the following): • CONTRACTOR's Project Manager • CONTRACTOR's Superintendent • OWNER's Project Manager • ENGINEER representative • OWNER's Representatives --- • Representatives of the various utilities. 4. Lines of communication and chains of command. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01200-Page 1 of 3 Project Meetings 5. Wage and personnel records and reporting requirements. 6. Subcontractors and suppliers. 7. Submittal review and approval procedure. Submittals may include, but are not limited to the following: • Letter stating the name and qualifications of the CONTRACTOR's Superintendent • Letter(s)from the Subcontractor(s)listing their salaried specialists • If applicable, a letter designating the Registered Professional Land Surveyor • If applicable, a letter designating the Safety Representative (for general project safety)and the"Competent Person"for trench safety • Trench Safety Plan • Schedule of Values • Schedule for submittals • Shop drawings • Construction schedule(The schedule shall indicate the phases of work in which subcontractors will be participating. Subcontractors shall be indicated by name.) • Payroll reports • Appropriate safety training certificates for workers that will initially be on site 8. Job and traffic safety. 9. Permits. 10. Utility coordination report. 11. Notification of property owners and other affected by the project 12. Job meetings. ---... 13. Use of the site for construction, storage, staging, etc., and interrelationship with other contracts. 14. Laboratory testing of material requirements. 15. Inventory of materials stored on site provisions. 16. Progress estimate and payment procedure. 17. Posting of signs. 18. Project safety. 19. Review of contract - addenda, supplementary general conditions, special provisions, special specifications, and other unique project items. 20. Other 1.5 JOB MEETINGS A. General: Job meetings shall be held as deemed necessary by the ENGINEER or OWNER or as requested by the CONTRACTOR throughout the duration of the Project. The meetings shall be held at a location selected by or approved by the Owner's Representative. The OWNER"s REPRESENTATIVE shall preside over the meeting and issue meeting minutes. B. Attendees: Job meetings will be attended by the following: 1. Contractor's Project Manager 2. Contractor's Construction Superintendent. 3. Any subcontractors' and/or suppliers' representatives whom the CONTRACTOR may desire to invite or whom the ENGINEER or OWNER request to attend. 4. OWNER's REPRESENTATIVE 5. Engineers representative(s). 6. OWNER's PROJECT MANAGER April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01200-Page 2 of 3 Project Meetings C. Meeting topics: The topics will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following subjects: 1. Review of previous meetings' notes and update of pertinent information and Project status. 2. Identification and discussion of new job related construction problems. Such discussion will be toward resolving identified problems. 3. Review work accomplished to date and establish proposed construction activities for the upcoming week(s). 4. Discuss the status of or need for change orders. 5. Check of required bonds and insurance certificates (including Workers' Compensation Insurance verification for CONTRACTOR's, Subcontractor's, and Sub-Subcontractor's employees). 6. Status of pay requests. 7. Work in progress. 8. Review and update construction schedule. 9. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 10. Other. 1.6 OTHER MEETINGS A. Other meetings shall be held from time to time as may be requested by the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER, or the OWNER. The time and place of the meetings shall be as mutually agreed upon. The attendance at the meetings shall be as requested by the party requesting the meeting. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. End April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01200-Page 3 of 3 Project Meetings '�"` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Submittals are prepared by the CONTRACTOR. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the "General Conditions"; the"Supplemental Conditions"; Division 1 requirements and Technical Specifications, should be used as the related documents for this requirement. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including the following: 1. CONTRACTOR's construction schedule(preliminary and updates). 2. Submittal schedule(preliminary and updates). 3. CONTRACOTR's Health and Safety Plan 4. Shop drawings. 5. Product data. 6. Samples. 7. Technical submittals, including a trench safety plan. 8. Quality assurance and quality control submittals, including calculations, mix designs and substantiating test results. 9. Record drawings. 10. Other. This Section does not address requirements for submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Reference Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data" for detailed submittal -• requirements and individual Technical Specifications. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for Payment. 3. Performance and Payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. Monthly Subcontractors expense report. 6. CONTRACTOR's affidavits. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. "General Conditions"; "Supplemental Conditions"; and/or Division 1, Section 01025, "Measurement and Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1, Section 01200, "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and distribution of meeting and conference minutes. 3. The "General Conditions" specifies requirements for submission of a Construction Plan with interconnection details for integration of Work and proposed construction sequencing. 4. The "General Conditions"; Division 1, Section 01310, "Progress Schedules" specifies requirements for submittal of Progress Schedules. 5. The "General Conditions"; the "Supplemental Conditions"; specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project close-out. April 30,2021 01300 - Page 1 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the following: A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals or resubmittals concurrently. a. The E/A reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow twenty-one (21) calendar days for initial review. Allow additional time if the ENGINEER (E/A) must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow twenty-one(21)calendar days for processing each resubmittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the E/A sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. 4. The CONTRACTOR is to review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission to determine and verify the following: ---- a. Field measurements. b. Field construction criteria. c. Conformance with the Specifications. Each shop drawing, working drawing sample and catalog data submitted by the CONTRACTOR to have affixed to it the following Certification Statement, signed by the CONTRACTOR: "By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements." All Submittals without the Certification Statement will not be reviewed and will be returned to the CONTRACTOR for proper submission. 5. Dimensions, elevations, and coordination with other submittals are the contractor's responsibility. 6. The review and approval of submittals by the E/A does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the CONTRACTOR and the E/A shall have no responsibility therefore. 7. No portion of the Work requiring a shop drawing, sample or catalog data is to be started nor any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the approval of qualified approval of such item. Fabrication performed, materials purchased, or on-site construction accomplished which does not conform to the approved shop drawings and data to be at CONTRACTOR's risk. The OWNER shall not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity. 8. Notify the E/A in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittal(s)from the requirements as specified with in the Contract Documents. April 30,2021 01300 - Page 2 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4 inches by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the CONTRACTOR's review and approval markings and the action taken. Allow adequate space for E/A's review stamp. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name and project number. b. Date of submission and dates of all previous submissions. c. Name and address of the CONTRACTOR's E/A. d. Name and address of the CONTRACTOR. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. f. Name and address of the supplier. g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Field dimensions. k. Relationship to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. Applicable standards. 3. Use clouds, boxes, arrows, etc., to clearly mark all proposed options and part numbers. 4. List any proposed deviations on the submittal cover sheet. Any deviations that are not listed accordingly will not be reviewed and shall not be considered approved. C. Number of Copies: 1. One (1) electronic copy of the proposed Construction schedule and subsequent revision are required. 2. One (1) electronic copy of the proposed Submittal schedule and subsequent revision are required. 3. One(1)electronic copy of all required Shop Drawings, Product, Product Samples, Quality Assurance and Quality Control submittals are required. 4. For submittals which cannot be transmitted electronically, the CONTRACTOR shall submit ---t eight(8)copies to the ENGINEER. D. Electronic Submittal Procedure: Copies of each construction submittal (shop drawings, product data, etc.) shall be provided via email for ENGINEER and OWNER review and approval prior to fabrication. Provide only one submittal per email. Submittals must be grouped and numbered logically. Title emails accordingly. Transmit each submittal from the CONTRACTOR to the E/A using a transmittal form. (An example Transmittal Form is provided at the end of this Section.) The E/A will not accept submittals received from sources other than the CONTRACTOR. 1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include CONTRACTOR's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 2. All files submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall be in Portable Document Format(PDF)as generated by Adobe Acrobat Professional Version 7.0 or higher, Microsoft Excel 2003 (XLSX)or higher, or comma-delineated text(csv). 3. It is the CONTRACTORS responsibility to scan all necessary documents or convert previously received electronic files from vendors into the PDF format before submitting the files. Scanned images must be at a readable resolution. For most documents, scan at 300 dots per inch(dpi). Optical Character Recognition(OCR)capture must be performed on these images so that text can be searched, selected and copied from the generated PDF file. 4. Each submittal shall be exclusively identified with its own number, which references the specification section (CSI Number) in which it is specified. Number transmittals in sequence. Resubmittals will be identified with their original number followed be a sequential letter(A, B, C, etc). For example, submittal 10C_02634 is the third resubmittal of the tenth submittal of the project covering Specification Section 02634. April 30,2021 01300- Page 3 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 E. Resubmission Requirements 1. Make any corrections or changes to the submittals as required by the E/A and resubmit until approved. 2. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the E/A. 3. Samples: Submit new samples if required. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Submit Construction Schedule in accordance with Section 01310, "Progress Schedules". 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Provide Submittal Schedule in accordance with Section 01310, "Progress Schedules". 3.4 (NOT USED) 3.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by drawing or sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8% inches by 11 inches but no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches. 7. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate stamp indicating action taken. C. CONTRACTOR to review all shop drawings submitted by subcontractors for compliance with Contract Documents. Drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error by CONTRACTOR to be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission thereof. 3.6 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, applicable certifications, test reports, and performance curves, recommended spare parts list, and printed product warranties. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. April 30,2021 01300- Page 4 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 3. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. -- � Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of the final submission of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit descriptive information and evidence that the materials and equipment the CONTRACTOR proposes for incorporation into the Work is of the kind and quality that satisfies the specified functions and quality. 3.7 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size,fully fabricated Samples cured and finished when specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, swatches showing color, texture, and pattern, graphic symbols, and units of work to be used by the E/A for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the work. 1. Mount or display Samples in a manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. --- a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the CONTRACTOR for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the OWNER's property, are the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion. 3. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used by OWNER for final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 3.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality assurance and quality control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, materials test results, field testing and April 30,2021 01300 - Page 5 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 inspection reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a certification from the manufacturer or responsible E/A certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the corporation or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. C. Calculations: When required in the Technical Specifications, calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. D. Certificates of Successful Testing or Inspection: Submit when testing or inspection is required by Laws and Regulations or governing agency or specified in the individual Specification Sections. E. Statements of Qualifications: Evidence of qualification, certification, or registration. As required in these Contract Documents to verify qualifications of professional land surveyors, engineers, materials testing laboratories, specialty subcontractors, trade specialists, consultants, installers, and other professionals. F. Written Test Reports of Each Test and Inspection: Submit upon availability. As a minimum,include the following: 1. Date of test and date issued, Project Title, and number, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and name and signature of laboratory inspector. 2. Date and time of sampling or inspection and record of temperature and weather conditions. 3. Identification of product and Specification Section, location of sample, test or inspection in the Project, type of inspection or test with referenced standard or code, certified results of test. 4. Compliance with Contract Documents and identifying corrective action necessary to bring materials and equipment into compliance. 5. Provide an interpretation of test results,when requested by the ENGINEER. 3.9 TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. The CONTRACTOR shall refer to the Technical Specifications for technical submittals required for this Project. 3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 ENGINEER/ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals,for the record, or for information where action and return is not required,the E/A will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return within the time frame specified in Paragraph 3.1.A.3. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 2. OWNER and/or ENGINEERs review, approval, or other appropriate action regarding CONTRACTOR's submissions will be only to check conformity with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information contained in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate component item will not indicate approval of the assembly into which the item is functionally integrated. B. Action Stamp: The E/A will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The E/A will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: April 30,2021 01300- Page 6 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 1. "Reviewed" authorizes the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the work covered by the submittal provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. "Reviewed with Comments": The Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. "Revise and Resubmit"or"Rejected": Do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations and resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit' or "Rejected"at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information, or for record purposes, or for special processing, or for other activity, the E/A will return the submittal marked "Record Copy", "Action Not Required"or"No Action Taken". C. Unsolicited Submittals: The E/A will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action. 3.12 PREPARATION AND SUBMITTAL OF CONSTRUCTION RECORD DRAWINGS The OWNER's Representative and the CONTRACTOR's Superintendent will each maintain a set of redlines noting any changes in ink during construction of the Project. The OWNER's Representative and the CONTRACTOR's Superintendent will compare redlines at least weekly(at a time mutually acceptable to both)to exchange information and compare notes to ensure all items installed and changes are documented. Any information noted which could be used for future maintenance, location and construction projects is encouraged to be noted on the redlines. 3.13 CONSTRUCTION DIARIES The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a daily construction diary recording, at a minimum, the following information concerning events at the site, and submit duplicate copies to the OWNER's Representative at weekly intervals. - - The copies are to be signed by the Project Superintendent as defined in the"General Conditions". 1. Work performed. 2. Approximate count of CONTRACTOR's personnel, by classification, on the site. 3. List of subcontractors and personnel, by classification, on the site. 4. List of all equipment on the site by make and model. 5. High and low temperatures together with general weather conditions. 6. Start time and finish time of days work. 7. Accidents and/or unusual events. 8. Meetings and significant decisions made. 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages and/or losses. 10. Meter readings and/or similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures that may have been needed. 12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Services connected and/or disconnected. 15. Installed equipment and/or system tests and/or start-ups and results. 16. Partial completions and/or occupancies. 17. Date completion certified. April 30,2021 01300- Page 7 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 Shop Drawing Transmittal January 4, 2020 Transmittal No. {See Specifications} Previous Transmittal No. Previous Submittal Date AECOM 13630 Briarwick Dr. Austin, TX 78729 ATTN: ENGINEER Project Name: Lake Creek Pump Station—Chlorine System Improvements Enclosed are copies of the following items for your review: Item Specification No. Description Submittal Type A Section Subcontractor/Supplier 1. 6" DI Pipe Product Data m RR 510 ABC Company NOTE: Item 1 above contains a deviation from the Sp fications as indicated on the item. Submitted by: XYZ Company 101 Ranch Road 2974 Austin, Texas 78759 END April 30,2021 01300 - Page 8 of 8 Submittals Job No.60633796 SECTION 01310 PROJECT SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Submit no later than Pre-Construction Conference. B. Submit the initial Submittal Schedule along with the Progress Schedule, at, or prior to, the Pre-Construction Conference. C. Progress Schedule: Submit adjusted Progress Schedule or confirm validity of current schedule with each monthly Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions, and at such other times as necessary to reflect: 1. Progress of Work to within 5 working days prior to submission; 2. Changes in Work scope and activities modified since submission; 3. Delays in Submittals or resubmittals, deliveries, or Work; 4. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work; 5. Other identifiable changes; and 6. Revised projections of progress and completion. D. Narrative Progress Report: Submit with each monthly submission of progress schedule. E. Precedent to final payment, provide four copies of any Critical Path Method (CPM) type schedule utilized with certification that said schedule represents correctly the way the Work was performed. F. Progress quantity chart(s). G. Distribution: Following response to the initial schedule submittal, print and distribute copies to the ENGINEER, subcontractors, suppliers, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Keep a copy at the Project Site at all times. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. 1.02 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Prepare a complete Submittal Schedule concurrently with the development of the Progress Schedule. 1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of products as well as the Progress Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: a. Listing of all submittals with each assigned a number. b. Scheduled date for the first submittal. c. Related Section number or Specification number. d. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, Calculations, Test Results, or Samples). e. Name of the subcontractor. f. Description of the part of the Work covered. g. Scheduled date for resubmittal. h. Scheduled date for completion of the ENGINEER's review. Estimated procurement time for each item, as applicable. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01310- Page 1 of 4 Project Schedules B. Distribution: Following OWNER's response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the ENGINEER, OWNER, subcontractors, suppliers, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Keep copies at the Project Site at all times. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. General 1. Schedule(s) shall reflect Work logic sequences, restraints, delivery windows, review times,Contract Times,and Milestones set forth in the Agreement, and shall begin with the date of Notice to Proceed and conclude with the date of Final Completion. 2. The schedule requirement herein is the minimum required. CONTRACTOR may prepare a more sophisticated schedule if such will aid CONTRACTOR in execution and timely completion of Work. 3. Base schedule on standard 5-day work week. 4. Coordinate the Progress Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules. 5. Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including submittal review, testing, and installation. 6. When the OWNER requests a specific sequence of work, that sequence of work is to be identified as a separate time line with its own critical path and schedule constraints. 7. Shop drawing submittals, including float for review time, are to be shown as specific activities on critical path items. 8. O&M Manual submissions are to be clearly shown as a separate task item on the schedule. 9. Indicate substantial completion in advance of the date established for Final Completion to allow time for the ENGINEER's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial and Final Completion. 10. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of applications for payment. Refer to the"General Conditions"for cost reporting and payment procedures. 11. Use Microsoft Project latest version or a compatible and approved software. 12. Provide a MSP electronic file of the baseline schedule. B. Format 1. Critical Path Method(CPM)Schedule, on maximum 24-inch by 36-inch sheet size to include at least: a. Schedule to have critical path clearly shown on a calendar and the rela- tionship between each task and calendar day indicated. The earliest time at which an activity may be started,the latest time at which an activity may be started, the earliest time which an activity may be finished, and the latest time at which an activity may be finished are to be clearly shown on the schedule. Format the schedule such that there is a one to one correspondence between schedule items and the Schedule of Values items. In addition, submit an arrow diagram or precedence diagram for the initial schedule and each revision. b. Schedule to include those activities reasonably required to complete Work, --� including, but not limited to, subcontract Work, major equipment design, fabrication, factory testing, and delivery dates including required lead April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01310 - Page 2 of 4 Project Schedules times for OWNER-furnished products, move-in and other preliminary activities, equipment and equipment system test and startup activities, Project closeout and cleanup, and specified Work sequences, constraints, and Milestones, including Substantial Completion date(s). Listings to be identified by Specification Section number. c. Identify: (i) horizontal time frame by year, month and week; (ii)duration, early-start, and completion for each activity and sub-activity; and (iii)critical activities and Project float. d. Sub-schedules to further define critical portions of the Work. e. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". f. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. g. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the critical path items and the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. h. Indicate the phases of work in which subcontractors will be participating. Indicate Subcontractors by name. 2. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, with data for the entire construction period. Schedule is to be submitted as both a"hard"copy and an electronic copy. C. If CONTRACTOR provides an accepted schedule with an early completion date, OWNER reserves the right to reduce Contract Times to match the early completion date by issuing a deductive Change Order at no change in Contract Price. D. No partial payment requests will be processed unless the progress schedule has been submitted and/or updated and approved by the OWNER. No partial payments will be made unless the schedule has been approved by the OWNER. E. Updating Progress Schedule: Adjust or confirm the Progress Schedule on a monthly basis. Revise the Progress Schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated Progress Schedule at maximum intervals of 90 days, to reflect as nearly as possible the actual construction operations, show overall percent complete, projected and actual,and completion progress by listed activity and sub- activity. 1.04 NARRATIVE PROGRESS REPORT A. Include, as a minimum: 1. Summary of Work completed during the past period between Narrative Progress Reports. 2. Work planned during the next period. 3. Explanation of differences between summary of Work completed and Work planned in previously submitted Narrative Progress Report. 4. Current and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on other activities and completion Milestones. 5. Corrective action taken or proposed. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01310- Page 3 of 4 Project Schedules 1.05 PROGRESS OF THE WORK A. If CONTRACTOR fails to complete activity by its latest scheduled completion date and this failure may extend Contract Times(or Milestones),CONTRACTOR shall,within 7 calendar days of such failure, submit a written statement as to how CONTRACTOR intends to correct nonperformance and return to the acceptable current progress schedule. Actions by CONTRACTOR to complete Work within Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be justification for adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.06- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01310 - Page 4 of 4 Project Schedules SECTION 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHY AND VIDEO SURVEYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the production of pre-construction, construction progress and post-construction photographs as provided herein. Owner's Representative may also designate additional subjects for photographs in addition to the general guidelines identified below. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. From time to time, during the progress of the Work, photographs of the Work will be taken by the ENGINEER,the OWNER, or other authorized representatives, at no expense to the CONTRACTOR. Furnish access to the WORK at all times for this purpose and furnish such assistance as may be required. The photographs thus taken shall be the property of the OWNER. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit photographer's qualifications and experience record for review and approval of OWNER. B. Submit examples of photographer's work, similar to that required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photos shall be taken by a qualified commercial photographer, engaged as a professional in business for a period of not less than three years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All photographs must be produced by a competent photographer and shall be digital (7 Mega-Pixel) date-stamped color photography of commercial quality. All CONTRACTOR- generated photographs must be stored in a .jpeg file format. Each photograph shall also be submitted as a 3x5 print with no more than 3 photos per page of professional quality enclosed in clear plastic sleeve within 3-tab folders. The prints shall be accompanied by digital date-stamped photographs in CD format or other format acceptable to the OWNER. Each print shall be marked with the Project Name, name of CONTRACTOR, description and location of view and identity of photographer. B. Each photograph submittal must include a Photo Log that includes the Project Name,nam of CONTRACTOR, the name of the photographer and company, photograph number, th date of the photograph and the filename that the camera assigns to the photo(e.g. MVC- 001.j In addition, appropriate descriptive information to properly identify the location of view must be entered into the Photo Log that includes a project drawing or sketch to assist in maintaining a concise project record. C. All video surveys shall be performed with a digital video camera, minimum 7-megapixel resolution. The date, time, and location of the survey shall be included in the video metadata. April 30,2021 01380 - Page 1 of 3 Construction Photography and Video Surveys Job No.60633796 2.02 VIEWS AND QUANTITIES A. PRE-CONSTRUCTION VIDEO: 1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the production and delivery of a pre- construction video condition survey for the existing pump station. The survey shall include the entire length of the entrance road, the perimeter pump station fencing, and all buildings and structures that will be impacted by the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall document by video all pre-existing site conditions/elements as listed for the Pre-construction Photographs below. The video documentation shall provide a clear and continuous view of the facility showing all visible utilities and features. The pre-construction video shall be in a format acceptable to the OWNER and shall be shot prior to the occurrence of any site disturbance after Notice to Proceed. The pre-construction video shall be submitted within ten (10) calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. B. PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. All pre-construction photographs must be submitted within ten (10)calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. Pre-construction photographs must be taken at sufficient intervals to be able to carefully document the pre-construction conditions of the Work. Each photograph location shall be taken from a minimum of two (2)views within the limits of construction. Particular attention shall be devoted to pre- existing damage to structures; landscape features, streets, driveways, etc. shall be documented. An identifier shall be included in each view for ease of later identification. At a minimum, Pre-construction photographs must be taken of the following views: • The entrance driveway and perimeter fence and access gate to the Pump Station. • All curb lines-all pre-existing curb damage not called for replacement within the Work and shall include major cracks • Trees, ornamental shrubs, plantings/planter boxes and evidence of irrigation features • The existing Electrical Building • The existing Chlorine Building foundation • Other features or facilities that might be disturbed by the construction • Prominent utility features, such as: guy wires, poles, signs, valves, fire hydrants, meters, pull boxes, etc. • Streams and stream banks within the limits of construction • Other significant or prominent features in order to protect the OWNER and CONTRACTOR following construction (e.g. close up photographs of pre- existing damage) • Other views as requested by the OWNER C. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS 1. Construction Progress photos must be taken at least monthly showing the progress of the work for the month. Each month an average of 25 exposures shall be taken. Construction photographs of the same views taken during pre- construction photography must be taken during the progress of the Work and shall be submitted monthly with the Contractor's monthly progress payment application. D. POST CONSTRUCTION VIDEO 1. A single post-construction video shall be performed along the access corridors to document the final condition. Post-construction video shall be taken after cleanup and site restoration and shall be submitted with the final payment. April 30,2021 01380 - Page 2 of 3 Construction Photography and Video Surveys Job No.60633796 _.,. E. POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. Post-construction photographs shall be taken of the same views taken during pre- construction photography to fully document the completed project. Post- construction photographs shall be taken after cleanup and site restoration and must be submitted with the final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Technique is to present factual details with high resolution, minimum distortion, maximum depth-of-field and sharpness. B. Views to adequately illustrate project status or condition of construction. C. Photographs shall be submitted with the CONTRACTOR's monthly application for progress payment. 3.02-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. End April 30,2021 01380- Page 3 of 3 Construction Photography and Video Surveys Job No.60633796 '-`` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01400 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Testing Laboratory Services and CONTRACTOR's responsibilities related to those services. 1.02 (NOT USED) 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections and testing identified in individual Specification Sections to assure quality of work. Testing procedures to be carried out in a professional manner, conforming to ASTM E329. B. OWNER reserves the right to monitor materials incorporated into project and their placement through its own forces or through contracts with materials testing laboratories. Testing activities of the OWNER in no way relieves the CONTRACTOR of the obligation to perform work and furnish products, materials, and constructed work conforming to the Contract Documents. C. Retesting for work rejected on basis of initial test results will be at expense of CONTRACTOR and extent of retesting to be determined by OWNER. OWNER may require additional testing for failing tests and may require two passing retests before acceptance by OWNER. D. Inspection, sampling and testing requirements are set forth in, but not necessarily limited to, the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Sections. E. Employment of testing laboratory does not relieve CONTRACTOR of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. CONTRACTOR to schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results to avoid delay to the Work. 1.04 LABORATORY REPORTS A. The OWNER will receive 3 copies, and the CONTRACTOR will receive 2 copies of laboratory reports from the testing laboratory. One of the CONTRACTOR's copies to remain at site field office for duration of project. B. Reports of observations and tests to include, but not be limited to: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name and address. 4. Name and signature of technician and testing engineer. 5. Date of sampling. 6. Record of temperature and weather. ----- 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and Specification Section. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01400-Page 1 Of 3 Construction Materials Testing 9. Location of product. 10. Type of test. 11. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents. C. Test reports which indicate non-conformance to be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the CONTRACTOR and OWNER. 1.05 LIMITS ON OWNER's TESTING LABORATORY'S AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of CONTRACTOR. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing materials which meet requirements indicated. For manufactured materials such as reinforcing steel, expansion joint materials, concrete pipe, cement, miscellaneous steel, cast iron materials, etc., CONTRACTOR is required to furnish a manufacturer's certificate that material meets requirements specified for this project. B. Furnish product mix design together with applicable design work sheets and data to meet or exceed contract requirements. C. Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. D. Notify OWNER, and laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify ENGINEER if Specification Section requires the presence of the ENGINEER. E. CONTRACTOR to schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. F. Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on site. G. Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. H. Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested; to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. I. Correct work which is defective or which fails to conform to Contract. Corrective work is not to delay project or work of other contractors. J. Patch all surfaces and areas disturbed by testing operations. K. Arrange with laboratory and pay for. 1. All required materials tests, as noted in the PLANS and Specifications. -- 2. Retesting required for failed tests. 3. Retesting for nonconforming Work. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01400-Page 2 of 3 Construction Materials Testing 4. Additional sampling and tests requested by CONTRACTOR beyond specified requirements. 1.07- 1.11 (NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide quality control observation and testing as required in each Section of these Specifications. 3.02-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01400-Page 3 of 3 Construction Materials Testing • THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY . • SECTION 01445 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for services to be provided by manufacturer's field representative, including training of OWNER's personnel and preparation of equipment installation reports. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Person-Day: One person for 8 hours within regular CONTRACTOR working hours. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Training Schedule: Submit not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment installation and revise as necessary for acceptance. B. Preliminary Training Plan: Submit within 180 days after Notice to Proceed. C. Final Training Plan: Submit after 60 days prior to first training session. D. Training Materials: 1. Submit written outlines of proposed training sessions not less than 21 days prior to scheduled training. 2. Furnish complete training materials,to include operation and maintenance data as required in this Section not less than 7 days prior to training session. E. Quality Control Submittals: When specified in the individual Specifications, submit "Equipment Installation Report". 1.04 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, and experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system. Representative subject to acceptance by OWNER. No substitute representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by OWNER has been given. 1.05 FULFILLMENT OF SPECIFIED MINIMUM SERVICES A. Where manufacturers' services are specified, furnish manufacturer's qualified represen- tative for a sufficient period of time to perform all specified functions at no additional cost to OWNER. B. Schedule manufacturer's onsite services to avoid conflicting with other onsite testing or other manufacturer's onsite services. Determine that all conditions necessary to allow successful testing have been met before scheduling services. C. Only those days of service approved by ENGINEER will be credited to fulfill the specified minimum services. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01445-Page 1 of 3 Manufacturers Field Services D. If specified, manufacturer's onsite services to include at a minimum: 1. Assistance during installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of CONTRACTOR's assembly, erection, installation or application procedures. 2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for equipment to function as warranted by manufacturer and necessary to furnish written approval of installation. 3. Revisiting the site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to OWNER. 4. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to, or associated with, respective manufacturer's products and systems. 5. Assistance during functional and performance testing and startup demonstration and until product acceptance by the OWNER. 6. Training of OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as required herein. 7. Completion of equipment installation report with applicable certificates for proper installation and initial, interim, and final test or service. 1.06 TRAINING SCHEDULE A. List specified equipment and systems with respective manufacturers that require training services of manufacturers' representatives and show: 1. Estimated dates for installation completion. 2. Estimated training dates to allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved. B. Adjust training schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary by OWNER, and to allow full participation by manufacturers' representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment. 1.07 TRAINING PLAN A. Training Plan: submit for each proposed course: 1. Title and objectives. 2. Training schedule. 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, operators, maintenance). 5. Course description and outline of course content. 6. Duration. 7. Location (e.g.,training center or site). 8. Format(e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on). 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 1.08 TRAINING OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with OWNER, and familiar with operation and maintenance manual information specified in Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". B. Furnish manufacturers' representatives for detailed classroom and onsite hands-on training for OWNER's personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product (system, subsystem, component)and as may be required in applicable Specifications. 1. Manufacturer's Representative: Familiar with facility operation and maintenance .., requirements as well as with specified equipment. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01445-Page 2 of 3 Manufacturers Field Services 2. Manufacturer's representative for training must be approved by the OWNER. Qualifications of manufacturer's representative must be submitted with the training schedule. 3. Training services must include some form of testing procedures to evaluate OWNER's personnel's understanding of the detailed training. 4. Training services must include a course and instructor evaluation questionnaire that must be completed by the trainees and submitted to the OWNER and the manufacturer. C. Pre-Startup Training: 1. Coordinate training sessions with OWNER's operating personnel and manu- facturers' representatives, and with submission of operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". 2. Complete at least 14 days prior to actual startup. D. Post-Startup Training: If required in Specifications, furnish and coordinate training of OWNER's operating personnel by respective manufacturer's representatives. E. Taping of Training Sessions: Furnish audio and color video taping of pre-startup and post- startup instruction sessions, including manufacturer's representatives' hands-on equipment instruction and classroom sessions. 1. Use electronic format, suitable for playback on standard equipment available commercially in the United States. 2. Include only one manufacturer's training session on each electronic file. 3. Produced by a qualified, professional video production company, unless CONTRACTOR demonstrates satisfactory skill of other personnel as acceptable to OWNER. 4. Furnish OWNER with two complete sets of files, including the original file, fully indexed and cataloged with printed labels stating sessions and dates taped. 5. OWNER will furnish playback equipment. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 -3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01445—Page 3 of 3 Manufacturers Field Services THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. This Section includes temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the project, including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, storage sheds and buildings, first aid equipment,fire protection,security measures, protection of the Work and property,parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash, debris, and excavated material, pest and rodent control, water runoff and erosion control. 1.2 Contractor's Responsibility A. The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Project. The CONTRACTOR may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet CONTRACTOR's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Specificaiton Sections. 1. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. 2. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. 3. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.3 Related Documents: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the "General Conditions", the "Supplemental Conditions", and Division 1 requirements. 1.4 Protection of Work and Property A. Keep OWNER informed of serious accidents on the site and related claims. B. During the performance of the Work,CONTRACTOR is responsible for adapting its means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to all EXISTING UTILITIES to maintain operation as described in Section 01010, "Summary of Work", at the existing level of facility production and consistent with applicable permit requirements, and Laws and Regulations. In performing such Work and in cooperating with the EXISTING UTILITES to maintain operations, it may be necessary for the CONTRACTOR to plan, design, and provide various temporary services, utilities, connections, temporary piping and heating, access, and similar items which will be included within the Contract Price. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Office at the Work Site(Job Shack) A. During the performance of this Contract, CONTRACTOR shall maintain a suitable office at or near the site of the Work which shall be the headquarters of his superintendent. Any communication given to the superintendent or delivered to CONTRACTOR's office at the site of the Work in his absence shall be deemed to have been delivered to CONTRACTOR. Security of this office shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Contractor shall pay all electricity, heating and other bills required of maintaining the trailer and shall provide telephone services with a telephone as specified hereinafter. April 30,2021 01500- Page 1 of 6 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Job No.60633796 B. The OWNER has allocated space on the project property for use by the CONTRACTOR for the purpose of a "staging area". The designated staging area is noted on the PLANS. If additional space is required,the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for storage of material and equipment in locations off the construction site. 1. CONTACTOR shall provide working drawings that show the proposed location and size of offices,sanitary facilities, storage areas, staging areas, fencing, temporary stationary equipment, temporary power service and distribution, and other similar facilities. 2. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the location of any temporary facility does not impede existing operations on the project property. 3. At the conclusion of the project, CONTRACTOR shall restore the site as noted on the PLANS to as good or better condition than existed prior to occupation by the CONTRACTOR. 3.2 Temporary Electrical A. The CONTRACTOR will provide connections sized to provide service for power and lighting. Feeder and branch wiring with area distribution boxes(if deemed necessary)shall be located so that power is available throughout the staging area. Terminations shall be provided for each voltage supply complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches, and other electrical devices as required to protect the electrical power supply system. B. CONTRACTOR shall obtain temporary power at the staging area. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain lighting and construction power throughout the project, whether available or not. C. Temporary electrical power installations shall meet construction safety requirements of OSHA, State, and other governing agencies. -, 3.3 Water for Construction A. All water required for and in connection with the Work to be performed shall be furnished by and at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall supply all necessary tools, hose and pipe, and shall make necessary arrangements for securing and transporting such water.Temporary lines shall be removed when no longer required. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide water service for all temporary office facilities. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for all production and transport costs associated with obtaining the water for both office and WORK use. C. CONTRACTOR shall submit a written plan for the disinfection process for review and approval by OWNER prior to commencing Work. The written plan shall include the CONTRACTOR's plan for final flushing and discharge of chlorinated water, and shall specify the quantities of potable water that will be required for the procedure and dosage plan proposed by the CONTRACTOR. 3.4 Telephone Service A. CONTRACTOR to make all necessary arrangements and pay all installation charges for telephone lines in his offices at the site and to provide all telephone instruments. The telephone service to be available to the OWNER and ENGINEER for local and/or toll free calls. 3.5 Sanitary Facilities A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others performing Work or furnishing services on the Project. B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the construction period,and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. At least April 30,2021 01500- Page 2 of 6 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Job No.60633796 one chemically treated toilet shall be furnished for each 20 employees. CONTRACTOR shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. 3.6 Protection of Public and Private Property A. CONTRACTOR shall protect, shore, brace, support and maintain all underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by the CONTRACTOR's operations. All pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations shall be restored to their original condition, whether within or outside the easement/right-of-way. All replacements shall be made with new materials. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, curbs, sidewalks, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property, which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or men to or from the Work, whether by him or his Subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the owner of,or the agency having jurisdiction over,the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement or payment of costs incurred in connection with the damage. 3.7 Tree and Plant Protection A. All trees and other vegetation which must be removed to perform the Work shall be removed and disposed of by the CONTRACTOR;however, no trees shall be unnecessarily removed unless their removal is indicated on the Drawings. All trees and plants not removed shall be protected against injury from construction operations. B. No tree shall be removed that is not identified for removal on the PLANS, except where authorized by the E/A. Hand excavations shall be employed as necessary to prevent injury to trees. Care shall be taken with exposed roots, unearthed during construction, so that roots do not dehydrate causing tree damage. C. Trees considered by the E/A to have any significant effect on construction operations are indicated on the PLANS and those which are to be preserved are so indicated. 3.8 Security A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for protection of the site, and all Work, materials, equipment, and existing facilities hereon, against vandals and other unauthorized persons. CONTRACTOR shall keep construction entrances closed and locked at all times, except for vehicle passage. B. No claim shall be made against OWNER by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser, and CONTRACTOR shall make good all damage to the OWNER's property resulting from CONTRACTOR's failure to provide security measures as specified. C. Security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by OWNER to protect existing facilities during normal operations, and shall also include such additional security fencing, barricades, lighting, and other measures as required to protect the site. When required, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a security plan to the OWNER for review as to appropriateness of the security measures proposed. 3.9 Fire Protection A. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel and property during construction. Debris and flammable material shall be removed weekly to minimize potential hazards. 3.10 Access Roads A. Prevent interference with traffic and OWNER's operations on existing roads. Access to all =--, roads is to be maintained throughout the construction period. Under no circumstances is access to be blocked or denied to traffic or OWNER unless specifically noted otherwise on April 30,2021 01500- Page 3 of 6 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Job No.60633796 the PLANS. Reference Specification Section "01040 — Coordination" for additional requirements. 3.11 Parking A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all construction workers and others performing Work or furnishing services in connection with the Project, as required, to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with the OWNER's operations, or construction activities. When on-site space is not available, the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for satisfactory space off site. 3.12 Dust Control A. Execute work by method that minimizes the creation of dust. Provide positive means, appropriate amounts of water or other appropriate substances, to prevent dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. Implement dust control operations within 24 hours of receipt of written notice from ENGINEER or OWNER. 3.13 Temporary Drainage Provisions A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing for the drainage of stormwater and such water as may be applied or discharged on the site in performance of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall obtain E/A approval for temporary drainage facilities which will handle, carry through, or divert around his Work all drainage flow, including storm flow and flows created by construction activity, to prevent silting of waterways or flooding damage to the property and adjacent property. 3.14 Erosion Control A. CONTRACTOR shall prevent erosion of soil on the site and adjacent property resulting from his construction activities. Effective measures shall be initiated prior to the commencement of clearing, grading, excavation,or other operations which will disturb the natural protection. Additional erosion and sedimentation controls are shown on the PLANS. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and necessary to complete the work required for compliance with the erosions and sedimentation control plan shown on the PLANS. 3.15 Pollution Control A. CONTRACTOR shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris and the substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse. No sediment, debris or other substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures shall be taken by CONTRACTOR to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse. B. CONTRACTOR shall observe the rules and regulations of the State of Texas and agencies of the U.S. Government prohibiting the pollution of any lake, stream, river, or wetland by the dumping of any refuse, rubbish, dredge material, or debris therein. C. CONTRACTOR is specifically cautioned that disposal of materials into any water of the State must conform to the requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ), and any applicable permit from the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. D. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measure required to contain any spillage, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. 3.16 Hazardous Material Identification and Material Safety Data A. Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) (Department of Labor Form OSHA-20), as prescribed in 29 CFR 1926, OSHA 2079, Construction Standards and Interpretations, for April 30,2021 01500- Page 4 of 6 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Job No.60633796 hazardous materials 5 days before delivery of the material, whether or not listed in Appendix A of the Standard. This obligation applies to materials delivered under this Contract that will involve exposure to hazardous materials or items containing these materials. MSDS shall also be available at each job site. 3.17 Noise Control A. CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound level in the area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound-muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the Work. 3.18 Project Sign A. CONTRACTOR shall provide a project sign as specified. Erect sign on site, at a location established by OWNER. No other signs are permitted without OWNERs permission, except those required by law. OWNER will provide color photograph to establish color scheme for project identification. 3.19 Fences A. All existing fences affected by the Work shall be maintained by the CONTRACTOR until completion of the Work. Fences which interfere with construction operations shall be dismantled and replaced as shown on the PLANS. B. Upon completion of the Work across any tract of land, CONTRACTOR shall restore all fences to preconstruction, or to a better, condition and to their preconstruction location. 3.20 Emergency Facilities ---� A. Free access shall be maintained at all times to fire lanes and emergency and utility control facilities such as fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, police call boxes, and utility valves, manholes, junction boxes, etc. In the event that it is necessary to make one of these facilities temporarily inaccessible,CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval of such action and schedule of Work from the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall also provide at least 24 hours prior notice to the Fire Department, Police Department,and City Department governing the affected utility. The same Department(s)shall be promptly notified by the CONTRACTOR when such facilities are placed back in unobstructed service. 3.21 Notification of Owners A. Unless otherwise indicated, the OWNER will notify property owners abutting the right-of- way of impending construction. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise diplomacy and tact with individual property owners. 3.22 Maintenance of Traffic A. CONTRACTOR shall conduct his Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks whether public or private, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain suitable safe bridges, detours or other temporary measures to accommodate public and private travel, and shall provide reasonable notice to owners of private drives before interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be required when CONTRACTOR has obtained written permission from the owner and the tenant of the private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point. A copy of the initial written permission shall be provided to the Owner's Representative. B. Safety and conveyance of traffic shall be regarded as prime importance. Unless otherwise directed,all portions of streets associated with this Project shall be kept open and provided •- - a smooth and comfortable ride to traffic. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to ensure that two-way traffic may safely bypass the construction site and that access is April 30,2021 01500 - Page 5 of 6 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Job No.60633796 provided to abutting private property. In making open cut street crossings, the CONTRACTOR shall not block more than one-half of the street at one time without approval of the OWNER. C. Prior to beginning Work, CONTRACTOR shall designate, in writing, a competent person who will be responsible and available on the Project site, or in the immediate area, to ensure compliance with the traffic control plan. CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation to demonstrate the sufficient training in Traffic Control for his competent person. D. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the necessary cleanup and finishing immediately after all or a portion of the Work is completed. 3.23 Removal of Utilities, Facilities, and Controls A. Remove temporary above grade or buried facilities, equipment, materials, etc. prior to final payment. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or removal of temporary facilities. C. Restore any washouts to grade. Eliminate erosion and sedimentation controls and tree protection installed under this Contract. 3.24 Measurement and Payment A. Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END SECTION April 30,2021 01500- Page 6 of 6 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Job No.60633796 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK This section describes the requirements for material and equipment that are necessary for the execution of this contract. Requirements within the following subject areas are included: A. Products; B. Preparation for shipment; C. Packaging and delivery of spare parts and tools; D. Shipment and handling; E. Inspection; F. Storage and protection; G. Hazardous Material Identification and Material Safety Data H. Inventory control; I. Product options; J. Substitutions 1.02 PRODUCTS A. The term "products" means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. It does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment salvaged from this project, except as specifically permitted by the Plans. C. Materials and equipment to be provided under this contract shall be standard catalogue products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and shall duplicate material and equipment in satisfactory service for at least two years. D. Material and equipment shall meet the requirements of the Contract and shall be suitable for the installation for which they are planned. Where two or more of the same equipment class are furnished, the equipment shall be from the same manufacturer and shall be interchangeable. Materials and equipment shall new and free from defects. E. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Plans and approved recommendations of the manufacturer. F. All details of the equipment shall be coordinated with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Perform all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or Specifications. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the working drawings. April 30,2021 01600 - Page 1 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 G. Provide the services of a technical representative for furnished equipment, for a sufficient period to assist in start-up and initial adjustment of all equipment, and to train, advise and consult with OWNER's operating personnel. H. All items of equipment required under this Contract to include literature explaining "Operation and Maintenance" of that item of equipment. If a manufacturer does not print such a standard O&M manual, CONTRACTOR to provide OWNER with a manual, approved in writing by the manufacturer. All equipment shall be guaranteed against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage or other failure. Materials to be suitable for service conditions. J. All equipment to be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best modern engineering and shop practice. Individual parts to be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable. Equipment is not to have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. K. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment to conform to AISC standards. All structural members to be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment to be at least 1/4-inch thick. L. Equipment manufacturers to have maintenance and repair facilities established and in operation in the continental United States for a period of not less than three years. Such facilities to be fully equipped and staffed with qualified personnel for making repairs to equipment provided under this contract. The facilities to carry a full line of normal maintenance spare parts. 1.03 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. When practical, equipment shall be factory assembled. The equipment parts and assemblies that are shipped unassembled shall be furnished with an assembly plan and instructions. The separate parts and assemblies will be match-marked or tagged in a manner to facilitate field assembly. B. Generally, machined and unpainted parts subject to damage by the elements shall be protected with an application of a strippable protective coating. C. Equipment shall be packaged or crated in a manner that will provide protection from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. D. The outside of the package or crate shall be adequately marked or tagged to indicate its contents by name and equipment number, if applicable, approximate weight, special handling precautions, and recommended storage procedures. April 30,2021 01600- Page 2 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 1.04 PACKAGING AND DELIVERY OF SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS Spare parts and special tools shall be properly marked to identify the associated equipment by name, equipment type, and part number. Parts shall be packaged in a manner for protection against damage from the elements during shipping, handling, and storage. Spare parts and special tools shall be shipped in boxes that shall be marked to indicate the contents. Delivery of spare parts and special tools shall be made prior to the time the associated equipment is scheduled for its initial test run. 1.05 SHIPMENT AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in accordance with the accepted current progress schedule and coordinate to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the site. Deliver anchor bolts and templates sufficiently early to permit setting prior to placement of structural concrete. B. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. Include on label date or manufacture and shelf life, where applicable. Include UL labels on products so specified. C. Shipments shall be addressed to the CONTRACTOR who will be responsible for their receipt, unloading, handling, and storage at the site. The OWNER will not accept deliveries on behalf of the CONTRACTOR or his subcontractors or assume responsibility for the security of the materials, equipment, or supplies delivered to the site. r � D. The CONTRACTOR will transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Unload products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for unloading, or as specified. Record the receipt of products at the site. Inspect for completeness and evidence of damage during shipment. 1.06 INSPECTION A. Immediately upon receipt of equipment and materials at the job site, the CONTRACTOR will inspect for completeness and any evidence of damage. Should there appear to be any damage, the CONTRACTOR will immediately notify the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR will then be responsible for notifying the manufacturers and the transportation company of the extent of the damage. If the item or items require replacing, the CONTRACTOR will take the necessary measures for replacement. B. Remove noncompliant and/or damaged products from the site and expedite delivery of identical new undamaged products and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that specified, so as not to delay the progress of the Work. April 30,2021 01600- Page 3 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The CONTRACTOR will store products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Sensitive items will be stored in weather-tight enclosures; with the humidity and temperature maintained within the ranges recommended by the manufacturer. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, the CONTRACTOR will place on sloped supports above ground. Products that are subject to deterioration will be covered with an impervious sheet and will be supplied with adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. C. The CONTRACTOR will store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well- drained area in such a manner as to prevent mixing. D. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange to provide access for inspection. He will also periodically inspect to ensure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. E. Store electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and equipment with bearings, in weather-tight structures maintained above 60°F. Protect electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and insulation against moisture, water, and dust damage. Connect and operate continuously all space heaters furnished in electrical equipment. F. Store fabricated products aboveground, on blocking or skids, and prevent soiling or staining. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to ..-_ prevent mixing with foreign matter. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. G. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well-ventilated areas. Do not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity. Protect shafts and couplings of motors with rust-preventive compound and store under cover. 1.08 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA A. Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet(MSDS)(Department of Labor Form OSHA-20), as prescribed in 29CFR 1926, OSHA 2079, Construction Standards and Interpretations,for hazardous material 5 days before delivery of the material, whether or not listed in Appendix A of the Standard. This obligation applies to materials delivered under this Contract which will involve exposure to hazardous materials or items containing these materials. B. "Hazardous Material", as used in this clause, is as defined in 29CFR 1926, in effect on the date of this Contract. C. The Contractor shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations including the acquisition of licenses and permits in connection with hazardous materials. 1.09 INVENTORY CONTROL Equipment and materials shall be stored in a manner to provide easy access for inspection and inventory control. The CONTRACTOR shall keep a running account of all materials in storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for materials delivered but not installed in the Work. April 30,2021 01600- Page 4 Of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. General 1. Materials and equipment as specified under separate Sections of the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS or as shown on PLANS. 2. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment. Like items of products furnished and installed in the Work to be end products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts and replacement, and manufacturer's services. 3. All materials of construction to be as regularly furnished by the equipment manufacturer for the subject item, unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification Sections. 4. Where product specifications include a named manufacturer, with or without model number, and also include performance requirements, named manufacturer's products must meet the performance specifications. 5. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. 6. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components, unless otherwise specified. 7. Equipment, Components, Systems, Subsystems: Design and manufacture with due regard for health and safety of operation, maintenance, and accessibility, durability of parts, and comply with applicable OSHA, state, and local health and safety regulations. 8. Provide materials and equipment listed by UL wherever standards have been established by that agency. 9. Lubricant: Furnish three months' supply of lubricants in 5-gallon, or smaller, containers. Lubricant to be "name" brand available from local sources, and subject to approval of OWNER. B. Drive Units: The nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer to be at least equal to the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Drive units to be designed for 24-hour continuous service. 1. Gearmotors: Gearmotors to be rated AGMA Class II and to bear an AGMA nameplate. 2. Gear Reducers: Each gear reducer to be totally enclosed, oil lubricated, with antifriction bearings throughout. Worm gear reducers to have a service factor of at least 1.20. Shaft mounted gear reducers to be rated AGMA Class II. Other helical, spiral bevel and combination bevel-helical gear reducers to have a service factor of at least 1.50. Each gear reducer to bear an AGMA nameplate. 3. Variable Speed Drives: Each variable speed drive to have a service factor of at least 1.75 at maximum speed. Provide a spare belt with each variable speed drive unit employing a belt for speed change. Unless specifically permitted by the detailed equipment specifications, bracket type mounting is not acceptable for variable speed drives. 4. V-Belt Drives: Each V-belt drive to include a sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment. V-belt drives to have a service factor of at least 1.6 at maximum speed. April 30,2021 01600 - Page 5 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 C. Safety Guards: All belt or chain drives,fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts to be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Unless otherwise noted in individual Specification Sections, safety guards to be fabricated from 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or galvanized expanded metal. Design guards for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories to be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, to be galvanized. Safety guards in outdoor locations to be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. D. Anchor Bolts 1. Equipment suppliers to furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, to be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts to have a minimum diameter of 3/-inch. 2. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates to be long enough to permit 11/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. E. Equipment Bases: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment to be installed on concrete bases at least 6 inches high. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates to be provided for pumps,compressors, and other equipment. Each unit and its drive assembly to be supported on a single baseplate of neat design. Baseplates to have pads for anchoring all components and adequate grout holes. Baseplates for pumps to have a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates to be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout. F. Special Tools and Accessories: Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment to be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling to be furnished complete with those devices. G. Shop Painting 1. General: All steel and iron surfaces to be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces, which will be inaccessible after assembly to be protected for the life of the equipment. Exposed surfaces to be finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, and other self-contained or enclosed components to be shop primed or finished with a high-grade oil-resistant enamel suitable for coating in the field with an alkyd enamel. Coatings to be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. 2. Equipment Finish: a. Provide manufacturer's standard finish and color, except where specific finish or color is indicated. b. If manufacturer has no standard color, provide equipment with ANSI No. 61, light gray color. H. Pressure Gauges 1. General: Furnish and install pressure gauges on the suction and discharge of all pumps, on each side of pressure reducing valves, and where shown on PLANS. Provide vacuum gauges on vacuum lines where shown. Exceptions: a. None. 2. Type: General service industrial grade pressure gauge for measuring process operating conditions for all services except chlorine. 3. Construction: a. Size: 2%z"nominal dial size; April 30,2021 01600- Page 6 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 b. Movement: Bourdon tube, 316 S.S.,with overload and underload stops; c. Case & Ring: Polished stainless steel; d. Window: Glass; e. Connection: '/"NPT, S.S.; f. Pointer: Black, adjustable needle; g. Filling: Liquid filled. 4. Accuracy: ASME grade IA(1% of full scale) 5. Scale Range: a. General: As noted on PLANS or such that normal operating pressure lies between 50 and 80 percent of scale range. b. Vacuum Service: 0-30"Hg. c. Pump Suction Service: Compound, 0-30" Hg/0- 15 psi. 6. Manufacturer: Dresser-Ashcroft Type 1009, or equal. 7. Accessories: Unless otherwise shown on PLANS, furnish, each pressure gauge with a diaphragm seal and isolation valve. a. Diaphragm Seal: Silicone oil filled, 316E S.S. mini diaphragm seal, direct connected to gauge. Dresser/Ashcroft Model 25-3IOSSL-02T-CG or equal. b. Isolation Valve: '/ turn, solid body, 316 S.S. ball valve, Apollo Valve or equal. c. Isolation valve to be connected to parent pipe at 1" threaded tap and reducing bushing. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General 1. Manufacture parts to U.S.A. standard sizes and gauges. 2. Two or more items of the same type to be identical, by the same manufacturer, and interchangeable. 3 Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads. 4. Modify standard products as necessary to meet performance Specifications. B. Lubrication System 1. Require no more than weekly attention during continuous operation. 2. Convenient and accessible. Oil drains with bronze or stainless steel valves and fill plugs easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Locate drains to allow convenient collection of oil during oil changes without removing equipment from its installed position. 3. Provide constant-level oilers or oil level indicators for oil lubrication systems. 4. For grease type bearings, which are not easily accessible, provide and install stainless steel tubing; protect and extend tubing to convenient location. Provide "Alemite"grease fittings. Provide one grease line per fitting. One line for multiple fittings is not acceptable. 5. Install oil fill tubes and drain plugs where such are not provided on equipment. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Where Specifications call for factory testing to be witnessed by ENGINEER, notify ENGINEER not less than 14 calendar days prior to scheduled test date unless otherwise specified. B. Calibration Instruments: Bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying that instrument has been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST). C. Factory Tests: Perform in accordance with accepted test procedures and document successful completion. April 30,2021 01600 - Page 7 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Concrete for Equipment: Set anchor bolts to certified and approved shop drawings only, unless otherwise directed. Where necessary, provide wood or steel templates. Survey all concrete layouts before pouring and make certain that all required or necessary sleeves, inserts, and conduit are in place and secured. B. Lubrication: Completely lubricate all equipment prior to operation. Use only manufac- turer's recommended lubricant for each application. Fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by OWNER. 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Equipment Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. B. Equipment is not to be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper installation and/or operation. When employees of CONTRACTOR or his Subcontractors are not qualified, such personnel to be field representatives of the manufacturer of the equipment or materials being installed. C. Installation: Install each type of equipment in strict accordance with good practice and in compliance with approved printed instructions of manufacturer. CONTRACTOR to provide, and have available at all times, copies of such printed instructions. D. Grouting Equipment: Materials and general procedures for grouting equipment are found in applicable concrete sections. Follow approved manufacturer's recommendations for equipment requiring special procedure. E. Repaint painted surfaces that are damaged prior to equipment acceptance. F. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as may be specified. Retain a copy of manufacturers' instruction at site, available for review at all times. G. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work: 1. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to assure proper function in the completed Work. 2. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products that require offsite storage, restoration, or renovation. Include costs for such Work In the Contract Price. 3.04 EQUIPMENT CHECK-OUT A. As soon as equipment is erected and lubricated, perform initial check-out and adjustments to ensure that everything is in working order. Protect all parts as necessary to prevent corrosion or deterioration until final painting. April 30,2021 01600 - Page 8 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Qualified manufacturers' field representatives to be provided by the equipment manufacturers to perform all manufacturers'field services called for in the Specifications. At a minimum, manufacturers'field representatives to perform the following: 1. Observe the installation; 2. Instruct, guide, and direct CONTRACTOR's erection or installation procedures; 3. Perform an installation check and prepare"Equipment Installation Report"; and 4. Instruct the OWNER's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures for the equipment. Field representative to revisit the site as often as necessary to complete installation and services satisfactory to OWNER/ENGINEER. B. Each manufacturer's representative to furnish written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated;is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. C. Performance Testing: When the Specifications require the presence of ENGINEER, initial tests to be observed or witnessed by ENGINEER. OWNER to be reimbursed by CONTRACTOR for all costs of subsequent visits by ENGINEER to witness or observe incomplete tests, retesting, or subsequent tests. 3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Perform required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activities. 3.07 FIELD FINISHING A. In accordance with individual Specification Sections. 3.08 TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE A. All equipment installed under this Contract to be placed into successful operation according to the written instructions of the manufacturer or the instructions of the manufacturer's field representative. All required adjustments,tests,operation checks,and other startup activity to be provided. B. Testing and Adjustments: Complete all preliminary check-out and testing operations. Make necessary adjustments. C. Initial Operation: Perform initial operation of process equipment with water. Make final adjustments. 3.09-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 01600- Page 9 of 9 Materials and Equipment Job No.60633796 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. When required by individual Specification Sections, submit Operation and Maintenance(O&M)data, which is specifically applicable to the scope of work and is a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment or product. Data containing extraneous information that has to be sorted through to find applicable instructions will not be accepted. Present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain user O&M requirements at the system, equipment, and component level. Include an index preceding each submittal. 2. Package Content: For each product, system, or piece of equipment requiring submission of O&M data, submit the package required in the individual Specification Section. Package content to be as required in Paragraph 1.03, "Schedule of Operations and Maintenance Data Packages"of this Section. 3. Furnish draft Operations and Maintenance Manuals explaining the proper installation, operation, and maintenance for each piece of equipment supplied. Draft O&M Manuals will be reviewed by the ENGINEER for compliance with this Section. One(1) draft O&M Manual will be returned to CONTRACTOR noted as either"Revise& Resubmit"or"No Exception Taken". 4. CONTRACTOR to check and approve O&M Manuals for compliance with requirements of Contract and will so certify by placing CONTRACTOR stamp of approval on each manual prior to submitting to ENGINEER. Any manual submitted without CONTRACTOR's stamp will not be reviewed and will be promptly returned for proper submission. OWNER may assess CONTRACTOR a charge for reviews of same items in excess of three(3)times. 5. After all O&M Manuals are in acceptable form, CONTRACTOR to furnish to the ENGINEER four(4)bound, complete sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals consisting of printed material previously accepted by the ENGINEER for this purpose. Manuals are to be bound in a heavy duty, fabric reinforced fiberboard, three post,expandable binder with a maximum binding width of 5".Three-ring vinyl reinforced binders will not be acceptable. Manual to have information listed in Paragraph 1.01 B.1 printed on the front cover as well as the binder spine. Each binder to have an index outlining all information in the set of volumes. 6. Final retainage will not be released until the Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been submitted and recommended by the ENGINEER. B. Format 1. Provide each manual with a project name, volume number, number of volumes in the set, project number, and date. 2. Furnish each volume with a complete index for all volumes in the set. The index is to indicate the volume and section for each piece of equipment. 3. Manuals to be limited to page sizes of 81/2" x 11"or drawings folded into such size. 4. Materials in manuals to be suitable for photographic reproduction. Where copies of identical material are included, clarity and quality of copies to be equal to the original, square to the page. Faxed copies will not be accepted. 5. Manuals to be customized to describe the equipment actually furnished. Manufacturer's pre-printed literature may be accepted provided it has been modi- fied by underlining the specific model used. 6. Divide manuals into sections paralleling the equipment specifications. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01730-Page 1 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Data 7. The front of each section to have a cover sheet indicating the CONTRACTOR performing the installation, local suppliers name, address and phone number of each piece of equipment in the section. 8. Binders: All draft O&M Manuals are to be in an electronic format and follow the procedures outlined in Section 01300"Submittals". 1.02 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES A. Maintenance Summary Form 1. General: All Operations and Maintenance Manuals are to include a Maintenance Summary Form in the format and style of the example form attached to this Section as Attachment A. Manuals will not be accepted for review without this form. The Maintenance Summary Form is to be a typed document prepared specifically for the equipment furnished. Title and subheadings are to be as shown on Attachment A-they are not to be modified. If a subheading is not applicable to the specific piece of equipment, it is to be noted by the words "Not Applicable" after the heading. Additional notes and comments may be added to the end of the form at the manufacturer's discretion. 2. Format: a. Size: 8I/2" x 11"(portrait orientation only). b. Margins: Top- 1", Left-0.75", Right-0.75", Bottom-0.75". c. Font: 1) Title: Arial - 16 point-bold. 2) Subheadings: Arial - 12 point-bold. 3) Text: Arial - 12 point-regular. 4) Tables: As shown in Attachment A - minimum text size Arial - 10 point-regular. 3. Specific Instructions: a. Equipment Item: Include generic name for equipment along with service and specification reference. b. Manufacturer: List manufacturer's physical address for shipping and receiving and mailing address(if different from physical address). Include telephone number and facsimile telephone number. c. Equipment Identification Number(s): Provide list of equipment serial numbers cross-referenced to equipment tag numbers in tabular form. When multiple items are provided, list each item separately. d. Total Weight: Note the assembled weight of the equipment. e. Nameplate Data: Reproduce the nameplate data exactly as it appears on the equipment. For driven equipment, include the driver nameplate data. f. Manufacturer's Local Representative: Provide the name, address, and phone numbers of the local representative. g. Maintenance Requirements: 1) Maintenance Operation: List briefly each maintenance operation required to maintain warranty in effect and refer to specific information in manufacturer's standard maintenance manual. 2) List required frequency of each maintenance operation. 3) Refer by symbol to lubricant list. h. Lubricant List: List each recommended lubricant by symbol, noting generic type of lubricant, and a minimum of two manufacturers. Spare Parts: Include recommendations regarding what spare parts,if any, should be maintained on site for routine maintenance. j. CONTRACTOR's Job Order: Identify CONTRACTOR's purchase order number. k. Closest Service Technician: Identify the closest, factory trained, and authorized, service technician by name, address and telephone number. Include pager number if applicable. -{ I. Closest Parts and Service Center: List closest factory authorized parts and service center, the physical address for shipping and receiving and April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01730-Page 2 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Data mailing address (if different from physical address). Include telephone number and facsimile telephone number. B. Operating Instructions: Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation. C. Safety Precautions: List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions. D. Normal Operations: Include control diagrams with data to explain operation and control of equipment. E. Service Requirements: Include instructions for services to be performed such as adjustments and inspection. F. Environmental Conditions: Include a list of environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data)for each product or piece of equipment under which it is best suited to operate. G. Preventative Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Plan and Schedule to include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventative maintenance and inspections required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance and repair. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventative maintenance man-hours on an annual basis. H. Corrective Maintenance: 1. Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques: Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or requires replacement. 2. Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams: Wiring diagrams and control diagrams to be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation numbering. Furnish control schematics reproduced from control schematics shown on PLANS with modifications as required, but not redrawn or redesigned in another format. 3. Maintenance and Repair Procedures: Include instructions and list tools required to restore product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards. 4. Removal and Replacement Instructions: Include step-by-step procedures and list required tools and supplies for removal and replacement of components, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions to include a combination of text and illustrations. 5. Spare Parts and Supply Lists: Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. 6. Corrective Maintenance Man-Hours: Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance man-hours. Corrective maintenance that requires participation of the equipment manufacturer to be identified and tabulated separately. 7. List of all protective relays, breaker types,cable and fuse sizes and settings(where applicable). a. Protective Relays: Provide information on the relay type used and time current curves. b. Breakers: Provide catalog numbers and breaker trip curves. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01730-Page 3 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Data c. Cables: Provide cable size, cable type and length of each cable installed. d. Power Fuses: Provide fuse catalogue number, rating and fuse curve. 8. Documentation of field functional tests and performance test described in the specifications. Include the test results and calibration reports of all equipment. 9. Renewal Parts Bulletin: Include parts lists pertinent to the components used in the installation. 10. Calibration data sheet including set points: Include all calibration data sheets. Appendices: Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following: 1. Parts Identification: Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without any further identification required. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations and separate listing to show the index, reference, or key number which will cross-reference the illustrated part to be the listed part. Parts shown in the listings to be grouped by components. a. Manufacturer's Standard Commercial Practice (MSCP): The parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, attachments, or accessories, such as a master parts catalog, in accordance with the manufacturer's standard commercial practice. b. Other than Manufacturer's Standard Commercial Practice (MSCP): Final assembly manufacturer may add a cross-reference to implement components' assemblies and parts requirements when implementation in manual form varies significantly from the style, format, and method of manufacturer's standard commercial practice. Use the format in the following example: Final Assembly Manufacturer's Actual Alphanumeric Actual Manufacturer's Manufacturer Sequence Name and MSCP Part No. 100001 John Doe&Co. 00000 2000002 2. Warranty Information: List and explain the various warranties and include the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or Contract Documents to keep warranties in force. 3. Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information: Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES A. Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The required information for each O&M data package is as follows: 1. Maintenance Summary Form; 2. Safety precautions; 3. Normal operations; 4. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule; 5. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques; 6. Maintenance and repair procedures; 7. Removal and replacement instructions; April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01730-Page 4 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Data 8. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams; 9. Spare parts and supply list; 10. Parts identification; 11. Warranty information; 12. Testing equipment and special tool information; and 13. Approved and corrected shop drawings showing"as-built"conditions. 1.04 SPECIAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. All Operation and Maintenance-Maintenance Instruction Manuals,catalog sheets,product and component data sheets, and factory and on-site (field) test reports/data shall be submitted in bound hard-copies and electronic copies. Electronic copies shall be in Adobe Acrobat®(*.pdf files)latest edition, and shall be submitted on USB Drive or SD Card. B. Binders and File Organization of the Electronic Copies: Clearly label each copy of the electronic version of the O&M Manuals. The electronic volume numbers, organization of the electronic files contained within, and labeling formats shall match and be identical to those of the hard-copies. Additionally, in each electronic volume, a navigation tool shall be installed that shall guide and navigate the user to open and/or close a desired section and/or subsection (within each volume)simply by clicking on the section/subsection name and number. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 O&M DATA PACKAGES Furnish a draft O&M data package for equipment a minimum of four(4)weeks prior to conducting operator training on the equipment. Draft O&M data packages to include, at a minimum, the information defined in Paragraphs 1.03 A.1 through 1.03 A.15. 3.02- 3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 01730—Page 5 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Data ATTACHMENT A MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM 1. EQUIPMENT ITEM: 2. MANUFACTURER INFORMATION: 3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S): Equipment Tag Number Equipment Serial Number Driver Serial Number 4. TOTAL WEIGHT: 5. NAMEPLATE DATA(HP,Voltage, Speed, etc.): 6. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE: 7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS: Lubricant ---- Maintenance Operation Frequency (if applicable) Comments 8. LUBRICANT LIST: 9. SPARE PARTS: Part Description Quantity Part Number 10. CONTRACTOR'S JOB ORDER: 11. CLOSEST SERVICE TECHNICIAN: 12. CLOSEST PARTS AND SERVICE CENTER: Attachment A April 30,2021 01730-Page 6 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Data Page 3 ITEM NO. RR 101 PREPARING RIGHT OF WAY 101.1 Description Prepare the right-of-way and designated easements for construction operations by removing and disposing of all obstructions when removal of such obstructions is not shown on plans to be paid for by other items. 101.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this Item include: A. A Street Cut Permit and Utility Construction Permit when utility adjustments are made in the right-of-way; B. A burn permit when materials are disposed of by burning; and, C. A plan for removing and disposing of all non-salvageable materials and debris. 101.3 Construction Methods Prior to commencement of this work, place all required Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SW3P) / erosion control and tree protection measures. Locate and protect existing utilities. Protect designated features in the right-of-way and prune trees and shrubs as directed. Do not operate equipment, park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer or City Forestry Manager. Carefully trim trees and shrubs, which are scheduled for preservation, as directed. Protect trees from scarring, debarking or other injuries during construction operations in accordance with Item No. RR 610, "Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation." Treat all exposed cuts, exposed ends of pruned limbs or scarred bark in accordance with the current Tree Technical Manual: Standards and Specifications approved by the City Council. Clear areas shown on the plans of all obstructions, except those landscape features that are to be preserved. Such obstructions include remains of houses and other structures, foundations, floor stabs, concrete, brick, lumber, plaster, septic tanks and drain fields, abandoned utility pipes or conduits, equipment, fences, retaining walls and other items as specified on the drawings. Remove vegetation and other landscape features not designated for preservation, curb and gutter, driveways, paved parking areas, miscellaneous stone, sidewalks, drainage structures, manholes, inlets, abandoned railroad tracks, scrap iron, and debris whether above or below ground. Removal of live utility facilities is not included in this item. Remove culverts, storm sewers, manholes and inlets in proper sequence to maintain traffic and drainage. Notify the Engineer in writing when items not shown on the drawings and not reasonably detectable (buried with no obvious indication of presence) are encountered and required to be removed. These items will be handled in accordance with Article 10, Changes in the Work. Remove obstructions and foundations not designated for preservation to 3 ft. below natural ground in areas receiving embankment. Remove obstructions to 3 ft. below the May-18 1 RR 101 Page 4 excavation level in areas to be excavated. Remove obstructions to 1 ft. below natural ground in all other areas. Cut trees and stumps off to ground level when allowed by the plans or directed. Plug the remaining ends of abandoned underground structures over 3 in. in diameter with concrete to form a tight closure. Backfill, compact and restore areas where obstructions have been removed unless otherwise directed. Use approved material for backfilling in accordance with Item 132 "Embankment". Dispose of wells in accordance with Item 103, "Disposal of Wells." Accept ownership, unless otherwise directed, and dispose of removed materials and debris at a permitted disposal site in accordance with local, state, and federal requirements. Blasting is not allowed. Burning is not allowed unless otherwise approved. If approved, obtain a burning permit from the City of Round Rock Fire Marshal's office. Pile and burn brush at approved locations as directed. Where an abandoned underground utility pipe is found, cut and plug the pipe with: • Concrete, installed in accordance with Item No. 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete"; install plug at end of lines prior to placing concrete. Plug shall be adequate to seal line until concrete is set. • A precast stopper grouted in place, or • A mechanical plug as approved by the Engineer. 101.4 Measurement When included in the contract as a pay item, preparing right of way for new construction will be measured by the acre, 100-foot station, or lump sum, regardless of the width of the right of way. Measurement for payment will be made only on areas specified as "Preparing Right of Way,. 101.5 Payment Payment for this Item will be considered subsidiary to Item No. 110, "Excavation", and Item No. 132, "Embankment" unless included as a separate pay item in the contract. When included as a pay item, it will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Preparing Right of Way." This price is full compensation for pruning of trees and shrubs; removal and disposal of structures and obstructions; backfilling of holes; furnishing and placing concrete for plugs; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When included as a pay item, payment will be made under one of the following: Preparing Right of Way- Per Acre. Preparing Right of Way- Per 100 foot Station. Preparing Right of Way- Per Lump Sum. End May-18 2 RR 101 Page 5 SPECIFICC ROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification Item No. RR 101, "PREPARING RIGHT-OF-WAY" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 506 Manholes Item No. 610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation Texas Department of Transportation: Current edition of Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 103 Disposal of Wells Item No. 110 Excavation Item No. 132 Embankment Item No. 421 Hydraulic Cement Concrete May-18 3 RR 101 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY Page 6 ITEM NO. RR 102 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 102.1 Description Remove and dispose of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, shrubs, vegetation, logs, rubbish and other objectionable material, unless designated for protection, within the construction limits. 102.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this Item include: A. A utility permit when utility adjustments are made in the right-of-way B. A burn permit when materials are disposed of by burning, and C. A plan for removing and disposing of all clearing and grubbing materials and debris. 102.3 Construction Methods Prior to commencement of this work, place all required Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SW3P) /erosion control and tree protection measures. Locate and protect existing utilities as indicated on the plans. Protect designated features on the site and prune trees and shrubs as directed. Do not operate equipment, park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer or City Forestry Manager. Carefully trim trees and shrubs, which are scheduled for preservation, as directed. Protect trees from scarring, debarking or other injuries during construction operations in accordance with Item No. RR 610, "Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation." Treat all exposed cuts, exposed ends of pruned limbs or scarred bark in accordance with the current Tree Technical Manual: Standards and Specifications approved by the City Council. Clear all areas shown on drawings of trees, stumps, brush, etc., as defined in Section 102.1, except those landscape features that are scheduled to be preserved. Remove objectionable material not designated for preservation to 3 ft. below natural ground in areas receiving embankment. Remove objectionable material to 3 ft. below the excavation level in areas to be excavated. Remove objectionable material to 1 ft. below natural ground in all other areas. Cut trees and stumps off to ground level when allowed by the plans or directed. Plug the remaining ends of abandoned underground structures. Plug ends of structures over 3 in. in diameter in accordance with Item RR 101, "Preparing Right of Way". Backfill, compact and restore areas where obstructions have been removed unless otherwise directed. Use approved material, proof-rolled and density controlled, for backfilling in accordance with Item 132 "Embankment". Dispose of wells in accordance with Item 103, "Disposal of Wells." Accept ownership, unless otherwise directed, and dispose of removed materials and debris at a permitted disposal site in accordance with local state and federal requirements. Blasting is not allowed. Burning is not allowed unless otherwise May-18 1 RR 102 Page 7 approved. If approved, obtain a burning permit from the City of Round Rock Fire Marshal's office. Pile and burn brush at approved locations as directed. 102.4 Measurement When included in the contract as a pay item, "Clearing and Grubbing" will be measured by the acre, by each tree removed, or lump sum, regardless of the width of the right of way. 102.5 Payment Payment for this Item will be considered subsidiary to Item No. 110, "Excavation", and Item No. 132, "Embankment" unless included as a separate pay item in the contract. When included as a pay item, it will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Clearing and Grubbing". This price is full compensation for pruning of trees and shrubs; removal and disposal of objectionable material; backfilling of holes; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When included as a pay item, payment will be made under one of the following: Clearing and Grubbing Per Acre. Clearing and Grubbing, Tree (of diameter specified) Per Each Clearing and Grubbing Per Lump Sum. End SEECIELC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification Item RR 102, "CLEARING AND GRUBBING" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. RR 610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation Texas Department of Transportation: Current edition of Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 110 Excavation Item No. 132 Embankment May-18 2 RR 102 City of Round Rock DACS Update Standard Specifications Manual Change Control Record SERIES 100- EARTHWORK Item Title Revision Status TxDOTt Title -r RRI 01 Preparing Right of Way 5/21/2018 Revised None RR102 Clearing and Grubbing 5/21/2018 Revised None - 104 Removing Portland Cement 5/21/2018 Replaced ' Item 104 Removing Concrete Concrete 11 110 Street Excavation 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 110 Excavation 111 Excavation 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 110 Excavation 120 Channel Excavation 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 110 Excavation 130 Borrow 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 132 Embankment 132 Embankment 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 132 Embankment Change Control List.docx Page 1 Standard Specifications Chan.eControl Los THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY Page 8 ITEM NO. RR 201 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 201.1 Description Scarify, blade, roll, and compact the subgrade to provide a uniform moisture content and density for the top 8 inches of the subgrade. Repeat grading and compaction until the specified lines, grades, and cross-sections are obtained and the materials are compacted to the specified depth and density. 201.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this Item include: A. A plan identifying classification and characteristics (P.I., optimum moisture- density, etc.) of in-situ subgrade soils, as well as the source, classification and characteristics of any proposed borrow material; B. Type and size of equipment proposed to achieve the required compaction; and C. All test results for in-situ subgrade soils and/or borrow materials. Approval of borrow material is required prior to placement. 201.3 Construction Methods Complete all operations involving Item No. RR 101, "Preparing Right of Way" and/or Item No. RR 102, "Clearing and Grubbing", prior to initiation of subgrade preparation. Scarify and shape the surface of the subgrade in conformity with the typical sections and the lines and grades shown on the drawings. Correct any deviation in the grade greater than 1/2 inch in a length of 10 feet, measured longitudinally, by loosening, adding or removing material. Reshape and re-compact by sprinkling and rolling. Remove and replace all unsuitable material, as directed by Engineer, with approved material. Remove all foundations, walls or other objectionable material in accordance with Item No. RR 100, "Preparing Right of Way" to a minimum depth of 24 inches under all structures and 12 inches under areas to be vegetated. Fill all holes, ruts and depressions with approved material and compact. Prepare subgrade sufficiently in advance to insure satisfactory prosecution of the work. Set blue tops for the subgrade on the centerline, at the quarter points and along the curb lines or edge of pavement at maximum intervals of 50 feet. Proof roll and use density control in accordance with Item No. 216, "Proof Rolling" prior to placement of any embankment, borrow, or base material. Correct any unstable or spongy subgrade areas by additional re-working, drying and compaction, or by removal and replacement with approved material. When directed by the Engineer, re-work the subgrade as follows (the re-work process will not be allowed for unstable organic subgrade soils. Remove unstable organic soils and replace with material approved by the Engineer): A. Remove the unstable subgrade to the full depth of the unstable in-situ material or to a minimum depth of 8 inches, whichever is greater; B. Spread the material over a sufficient area to allow reworking of the excavated May-18 1 RR 201 Page 9 material; C. Disc, scarify or otherwise breakup the excavated material and allow to dry (Note: If approved by the Engineer, lime or other additive may be used to aid in the drying process or to stabilize the material); D. Fill the excavated area with the re-worked material and compact to specified densities; and E. Proof-roll the re-worked area. All suitable material removed in accordance with Item No. 110, "Excavation", may be utilized in the subgrade with the approval of the Engineer. All other material required for completion of the subgrade, including material defined in accordance with Item No. 132, "Embankment", will be subject to approval of the Engineer. Provide the required density and moisture control for the subgrade based on the plasticity characteristics of the approved material. Sprinkle the subgrade material and compact to the extent necessary to provide the density specified below, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The Engineer will use TxDOT Tex-1 14-E to determine the maximum dry density (Da) and optimum moisture content (Wopt). Meet the requirements for field density and moisture content in Table 1 unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Table 1 - Field Density Control Requirements Soil Description Density, Percent Moisture Content Tex-115-E P1<15 �98% Da* and 5 105% Da N/A 15 <_ PI <_ 35 �98% Da and 5102% Da ? Wopt +' 3% PI > 35 �95% Da and �100% Da ? Wopt +3% * Where subgrade material is not conducive to laboratory testing (e.g. solid rock), approval of subgrade shall be based on proof rolling or other information as approved by the Engineer. May-18 2 RR 201 Page 10 Compact subgrade materials, on which planting or turf will be established, to a minimum of 85 percent of the density in accordance with TxDOT Tex-1 14-E. Conduct field tests for density in accordance with TxDOT Tex-1 I 5-E as soon as possible after compaction operations are completed. Rework material that fails to meet the density specified, to obtain the density required. Check the in-place density and moisture content of the top 8 inches of compacted subgrade prior to placement of any base material. If the tests indicate that the relative density and moisture do not meet the requirements specified in Table 1 above, rework the subgrade, from the closest passing test at one end of the failed area to the closest passing test at the other end of the failed area, to achieve the requirements. The Contractor, at his own expense, may have more tests performed to narrow the limits of the failed area. Unless otherwise accepted by the City of Round Rock, at least two tests shall be taken on each street being worked and at intervals not to exceed 1,000 square yards. If subgrade material changes within the 1,000 square yard interval, two tests shall be taken on each such change in material. Testing locations will be subject to the Engineer's discretion. All initial testing shall be paid by the Owner/Developer. Any retesting of failed areas shall be paid by the Contractor. 201.4 Measurement When included in the Contract as a pay item, subgrade preparation will be measured by the square yard. The measured area includes the entire width of the roadway for the entire length as indicated on the drawings. 201.5 Payment Payment for this Item will be considered subsidiary to Item No. 110, "Excavation" unless included as a separate pay item in the contract. When included as a pay item, it will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Subgrade Preparation". This price is full compensation for furnishing all material; hauling; placing, compacting, finishing, and reworking; disposal of waste material; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When included as a pay item, payment will be made under: Subgrade Preparation Per Square Yard All sprinkling and proof rolling will not be paid for directly but will be considered subsidiary to this Item, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Where subgrade is constructed under this contract, correction of soft spots will be at the Contractor's expense. Where subgrade is not constructed under this contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade will be paid in accordance with RR Article 10. End May-18 3 RR 201 Page 11 SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification Item RR 201, "SUBGRADE PREPARATION" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. RR 101 Preparing Right of Way Texas Department of Transportation: Current edition of Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Hiqhways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 110 Excavation Item No. 132 Embankment Item No. 204 Sprinkling Item No. 210 Rolling Item No. 216 Proof Rolling Texas Department of Transportation: Current edition of Testing Procedures Designation Description Tex-1 03-E Determination of Moisture Content of Soil Materials Tex-1 04-E Determination of Liquid Limit of Soils Tex-1 05-E Determination of Plastic limit of Soils Tex-1 06-E Method of Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils Tex-1 14-E Laboratory Compaction Characteristics &Moisture Density Relationship of Subgrade & Embankment Soil Tex-115-E Field Method for Determination of In-Place Density of Soils & Base Materials May-18 4 RR 201 City of Round Rock DACS Update Standard Specifications Manual Change Control Record SERIES 200 - SUBGRADE AND BASE CONSTRUCTION te ImCoR Title Revision Status TxDOT Title RR 201 Subgrade Preparation 5/21/2018 (Suirynotapayitem,) Revised None 202 Hydrated Lime and Lime 5/21/2018 R ep _� .0 Lime Treatment(Road Item 2 SlurryMixed) 203 LTreatment for Materials 5/21/2Yks1E ReplacedItem : eatment(Road d) Portland Cement Trea Cement Treatment (Road 204 for rltment ace 1Y '1E 8 ReplacedItemMixed) 206 Asphalt Stabilized Base 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 292 Asphalt Treatment(Plant Mixed) 210 Flexible Base 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 247 Flexible Base 211 Recycling Existing Aggregate 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 251 Reworking Base Courses 220 Sprinkling for Dust Control 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 204 Sprinkling 230 Rolling (Flat Wheel) 5/21/2018 IjtU Item 210 Rolling 232 Rolling (Pneumatic Tire) 5/21/2018 R-. . -.0 Item 210 Rolling_.. 234 Rolling(Tamping) 5/21/2018 R Item 210 Rolling 236 Proof Rolling t.1MFMEI Item 216 Proof Rolling 281 Termite Control 5/21/2018 Deleted None - Change Control List.docx page 2 ' Standard Specifications Change Control Log �"" `` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 503 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS 503.1 Description This item shall govern furnishing and installation of frames, grates, rings and covers for inlets, manholes and other structures indicated on the Drawings. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 503.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this specification item include manufacturer, model number, description, painting requirements and characteristics of frames, grates, rings, covers, height adjustment insert and nuts and bolts required for completion of the work. 503.3 Materials The Contractor shall submit descriptive information and evidence that the materials and equipment the Contractor proposes for incorporation in the Work is the kind and quality that satisfies the specified functions and quality. Items shall conform to the items shown on the Drawings, called for in the specifications, or specified in the Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of Contract, unless approved by the Engineer or designated representative. A. Welded Steel Welded steel grates and frames shall conform to the number; size, dimensions and details indicated on the Drawings and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36/A 36M, "Specification for Structural Steel". B. Castings Castings, whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron shall conform to the shape and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall be clean substantial castings, free from sand or blowholes or other defects. Surfaces of the castings shall be free from burnt on sand and shall be reasonably smooth. Runners, risers, fins and other cast on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grates and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the perimeter area of contact. Pairs of machined castings shall be matchmarked to facilitate subsequent identification at installation with the exception of water and wastewater manhole and valve castings. These manhole and valve castings shall be fabricated with such draft, tolerances, bolt hole spacing, etc., that all rings and covers of a particular type or class are interchangeable and match-marking will not be required. Steel castings shall conform to ASTM A 27/27M, "Specifications for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application". Grade 70-36 (480-250) shall be 29 Underground Piped Utilities furnished unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Cast iron castings shall conform to ASTM A 48, "Specification for Gray Iron Castings", Class 30. Ductile Iron castings shall conform to ASTM A 536, "Specification for Ductile Iron Castings". Grade 60-40-18 (415-275-125) shall be used unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Manhole Cover Riser Rings Height-adjustment inserts for wastewater manhole rings, which are used for raising standard manhole covers, shall be as shown on the Drawings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or designated representative. D. Nuts and Bolts Nuts and bolts shall be hex head 5/8" x 2.5" (16 mm x 63.5 mm) #11 National Coarse Thread, Type 316 stainless steel. For bolted manhole covers, a thin film of an approved "Anti-freeze" compound, approved by the Engineer or designated representative, shall be applied to all bolts. E. Mortar Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer or designated representative, the mortar for bedding castings shall consist of one (1) part Portland cement and three (3) parts sand and sufficient water to provide the desired consistency. The gradation of the fine aggregate shall meet the requirements for Grade No. 1, Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". 503.4 Construction Methods Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be constructed of the specified materials in accordance with the details indicated on the Drawings. The Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be placed carefully to the lines or grades indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1. Welded frames, grates, rings and covers shall be given 1 coat of a commercial grade red lead oil paint and 2 coats of commercial grade aluminum paint. All coats shall be a minimum of 1.5 mils (0.4 mm), dry. Painting of gray iron castings will not be required, except when used in conjunction with structural steel shapes. 503.5 Measurement and Payment Frames, grates, rings and covers will not be measured and payment for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals to complete the Work will be included in the Bid Items which constitute the complete structures. End 30 Underground Piped Utilities SPECIFIED Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item Number 503, "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 403 Concrete for Structures American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Designation Description A36/A36M Specification for Structural Steel A27/A27M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings A536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ANSI/AWS Designation Description Code D 1.1 Structural Welding Code RELATED Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item Number 503, "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 504 Adjusting Structures Item No. 510 Pipe TxDOT Specifications Designation Description Item 421 Portland Cement Concrete 31 Underground Piped Utilities "'`` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 504 ADJUSTING STRUCTURES 504.1 Description This item shall govern the removal and replacement of surfacing, furnishing of materials, adjusting and/or repositioning existing structures, valve boxes, pull boxes, survey monument boxes and water meters in accordance with these specifications to the locations or elevations indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. This item shall also govern any pumping, bailing and drainage required to complete the Work and Standard Specification Item No. 509, "Trench Safety Systems" for trench walls when indicated on the Drawings. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses 504.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this specification item include: A. Aggregate type, gradations and physical characteristics for the Portland cement concrete mix. B. Proposed proportioning of materials for the mortar mix. C. Type of structures and proposed adjustment technique (lowering, raising, lateral displacement). D. Type of structure, repair technique and materials to be furnished (new replacement or reuse of existing). Type of mixing plant and associated equipage including chart indicating the calibration of each cold bin. 504.3 Materials Precast reinforced concrete rings and castings in good condition, which are removed from the structures to be adjusted, may be reused with the written approval of the Engineer or designated representative. Additional materials required shall conform to the details indicated on the Drawings. A. Portland Cement Concrete The Portland cement concrete shall be Class A conforming to Standard Specification Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". B. Mortar Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer or designated representative, the mortar for bedding castings shall consist of one (1) part Portland cement and three (3) parts sand, by volume based on dry materials. Sufficient water will be added to provide the desired consistency. The gradation of the fine aggregate shall meet the requirements for "Fine Aggregate" as given in Standard Specification Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". 504.4 Construction Methods All adjustments shall be completed prior to the placement of the final surface. 32 Underground Piped Utilities Pull box and valve box components scheduled for reuse shall be carefully removed and the contact areas shall be cleaned of all mortar, concrete, grease and sealing compounds. Any items broken in the process of removal and cleaning shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at his own expense. If the adjustment involves slight lowering or raising a valve box or survey monument box, the outside shell of a slip or screw casing shall be excavated to its full length and adjusted to the proposed grade. Pipe castings shall be excavated to the depth required to cut from or weld a section to the casing as may be needed to adjust the ring to the proposed elevation. The ring shall be welded to the casing prior to pouring concrete around the casing. If the adjustment involves a vertical (lowering or raising) or a horizontal reassignment of a water meter and the property owner's cut off valve, this work shall be completed in accordance with the Drawings. After the adjustments have been completed and cured, structures within the paved area shall be paved as indicated on the Drawings. 504.5 Measurement The work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item as indicated shall be measured per each. 504.E Payment The work performed, materials furnished and measures as provided above, will be paid by the unit bid price per each. The price shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials, handling, placing, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under one of the following: Adjusting Water Meters - Per Each Repositioning &Adjusting Water Meters - Per Each Adjusting Gas Valve Boxes to Grade - Per Each Adjusting Survey Monument Boxes to Grade - Per Each Adjusting Water Valve Boxes to Grade - Per Each Adjusting Pull Boxes to Grade - Per Each End 33 Underground Piped Utilities SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 504, "Adjusting Structures" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 403 Concrete for Structures Item No. 509 Trench Safety Systems RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 504, "Adjusting Structures" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 501 Jacking or Boring Item No. 502 Tunneling Item No. 503 Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers Item No. 505 Concrete Encasement and Encasement Pipe Item No. 507 Bulkheads Item No. 508 Miscellaneous Structures and Appurtenances Item No. 511 Water Valves ---_ Texas Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No.421 Portland Cement Concrete 34 Underground Piped Utilities '" `` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 505 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT AND ENCASEMENT PIPE 505.1 Description This item shall govern the furnishing of materials and the methods of constructing a Portland cement concrete encasement or encasement pipe. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text and accompanying tables, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 505.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this specification item include: A. Type of pipe, construction methods and sequence, B. Aggregate types, gradations and physical characteristics for the Portland cement concrete mix, C. Proposed proportioning of materials for the mortar mix. 505.3 Materials A. Portland Cement Concrete The Portland cement concrete shall conform to Class B Concrete, Item No. 403, --- "Concrete for Structures". B. Pipe Portland Cement concrete pipe shall conform to ASTM C-76, Class III or better. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) shall conform to Section 510. 2 (8)(o) of the City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 510, "Pipe". Steel Pipe shall conform to ASTM A134 with a minimum thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)for pipe with a diameter of 16 inches (400 mm) and greater. C. Grout Grout shall consist of not less than 6 sacks Portland cement per cubic yard (335 kilograms Portland cement per cubic meter) and clean washed sand mixed with water. The grout shall have a consistency such that the grout will flow into and completely fill all voids. If allowed by the Engineer or designated representative, an air entraining admixture may be added to facilitate placement. 505.4 Construction Methods When indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to Engineer or designated representative, concrete encasement or encasement pipe shall be placed to protect the pipe. Unless approved by the Engineer or designated representative (a) the top of the pipe would have less than 30 inches (60 mm) of cover, (b) ground water invades the trench, or (c) the trench bottom is of unstable material. 35 Underground Piped Utilities If any of these conditions is encountered, the Engineer or designated representative shall be notified and may direct the Contractor to: (a) encase the pipe with concrete, (b) change pipe material, (c) use a higher strength class of pipe, or (d) provide an encasement pipe. Concrete encasement shall extend from 6 inches (150 mm) below to 6 inches (150 mm) above the outer projections of the pipe over the entire width of the trench. The ends of encasement pipe shall be bulkheaded (Standard Specification Item No. 507) with manufactured boots or, concrete blocks, bricks or stones, dry-stacked without mortar, sufficient to prevent the intrusion of trench backfill material into the encasement, but fitted loosely enough to facilitate the escape of water from the encasement should carrier pipe leakage or failure occur. 505.5 Measurement and Payment Concrete encasement will be measured by the lineal foot (meter: 1 meter equals 3.281 feet), for size of pipe being encased, complete in place. The measurement will be made between ends of the encasement, along the central axis as installed. Encasement pipe will be measured by size of encasement installed, complete in place. The measurement will be made between the ends of the pipe, along the central axis as installed. 505.E Payment Work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item will be subsidiary to Item No. 510, "Pipe" unless included as a separate pay item in the contract. When included for payment, it shall be measured as provided under "Measurement" and will be paid at the unit bid price per lineal foot for "Concrete Encasement" or "Encasement Pipe" of the size indicated on the Drawings. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials, pipe for all preparation, hauling, installation and for all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, including bench excavation and disposal of surplus material. Payment, when included as a contract Pay Item, will be made under one of the following: Concrete Encasement for Dia. Pipe- Per Lineal Foot Encasement Pipe Dia., Type , - Per Lineal Foot. End 36 Underground Piped Utilities SPECIFIC Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item No. 505, "Encasement and Encasement Pipe" City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Item 403 Concrete For Structures Item 510 Pipe Section 510.2(8)(o) Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) City of Round Rock Standard Details Designation Description Detail 501-1 Encasement Detail w/ Casing Spacers American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Designation Description A-134 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over) C-76/C-76M Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe RELATED Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item No. 505, "Encasement and Encasement Pipe" y � TxDOT Specifications Designation Description Item 421 Portland Cement Concrete Section 421.9 Quality of Concrete Section 421.2(8) Mortar and Grout Item No. 501 Jacking or Boring Pipe Item No. 502 Tunneling Item No. 506 Manholes Item No. 507 Bulkheads Item No. 593 Concrete Retards City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Section 510.2(8)(c) Concrete pipe Section 510.2(8)(m) Steel Pipe 37 Underground Piped Utilities THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 506 MANHOLES 506.1 Description This item shall govern construction of manholes, complete in place, and the materials used therein, including excavation, installation, backfilling and surface restoration. It shall also include furnishing and installing rings, covers, and appurtenances, as well as any pumping and drainage necessary to complete the work. Wastewater manholes shall be 'acceptance tested' by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit descriptive information and evidence that the materials and equipment the Contractor proposes for incorporation in the Work are of the kind and quality that satisfies the specified functions and quality as specified or presented in the Drawings. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either SI or inch-pound units. Within the text and accompanying tables, the SI units are given preference followed by inch-pound units shown within parentheses. 506.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this specification item include: A. Type, size and manufacturer of manhole (diameter of water or wastewater manhole), structure (precast, cast in place; Standard, Tee, etc), and materials and equipment to be furnished (brick, concrete, seals, rings, covers, etc.) B. Aggregate types, gradations and physical characteristics for the Portland cement concrete mix. C. Proposed proportioning of materials for the mortar mix. D. Proposed Acceptance testing procedure and associated test equipment and materials. Type of structures and proposed adjustment technique (lowering, raising, lateral displacement). E. Proposed product for coating the interior surface of new and/or existing wastewater manholes. Submittal of test Records is required and shall include as a minimum the following items. The test records shall also be included as part of the Project records turned in with the acceptance package. Name of the manhole manufacturer Interior surface coating type and application method for Wastewater Manholes Model and manufacturer of vacuum tester Date tested/date re-tested Passed/failed and state what was done to correct the problem Test Method Used Location/station of manhole Precast/cast-in- place bottom - , Any repairs made to the joints. 38 Underground Piped Utilities 506.3 Materials and Components A. Concrete and Cement Stabilized Sand All concrete shall conform to Standard Specification Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". Cast in place concrete shall be Class A, and precast concrete manhole base sections, riser sections and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C478/C478M, "Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole" with Class I concrete. All interior surfaces of wastewater manholes shall receive a coating by an application method acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative or shall be otherwise acceptably protected from the acidic effects of municipal wastewater. Concrete for backfill of over-excavated areas shall be Class A or Class J as indicated on the Drawings. Cement stabilized sand for bedding or backfilling, when indicated or required on the Drawings, shall contain 2 bags of Portland Cement per cubic yard (112 kilograms of Portland cement per cubic meter). The sand shall meet the requirements for "Fine Aggregate" in Standard Specification Item No. 403, "Concrete For Structures". B. Mortar The mortar shall be composed of one part Portland cement, one part masonry cement (or 1/4 part hydrated lime), and sand equal to 2-1/2 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of the cements and lime used. The sand shall meet the requirements for "Fine Aggregate" as given in Standard Specification Item No. 403 "Concrete For Structures". C. Reinforcement The reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Standard Specification Item No. 406, "Reinforcing Steel". D. Brick The brick for ring adjustment courses and for stormwater manholes shall be of first quality, sound, hard burned, perfectly shaped brick conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 62, Grade SW, or concrete brick meeting the requirements of ASTM C 55, Grade N-I. E. Rings and Covers Rings and covers shall conform to the requirements of City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 503 "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers". 1. Replacement Rings and Covers, 24 in. (610 mm) Diameter Lids. This ring and cover shall be used for the replacement of broken rings and covers, minor manhole adjustment, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer or designated representative. 2. Rings and Covers, 32 in. (813 mm) Diameter Lids. This ring and cover shall be used for all new manhole construction, except as otherwise directed by the Engineer or designated representative. 39 Underground Piped Utilities F. Bulkheads. Bulkheads shall meet the requirements of City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 507 "Bulkheads". G. Precast Base Sections, Riser Sections, and Cones. Precast concrete base sections, riser sections, and cones shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 478. The width of the invert shall be specifically sized for the connecting pipes. Inverts shall be "U" shaped with a minimum depth of three fourths of the largest pipe diameter. The invert shall have a minimum difference of 0.10 feet (30 mm) between the inlet and outlet. Where lines enter the manhole up to 24 inches (610 mm)) above the flowline of the outlet, the invert shall be filleted to prevent splashing and solids deposition. A drop pipe shall be provided for a sewer entering a manhole at more than 24 inches (610 mm) above the flowline of the outlet. Joints for wastewater base sections, riser sections, and cones shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 443. Additionally, joint dimensions for 48-inch (1.22 meters) inside diameter wastewater manhole sections and cones shall comply with City of Round Rock Standard Details. Precast bases for 48 inch (1.22 meters) inside diameter manholes shall have preformed inverts. Inserts acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative shall be embedded in the concrete wall of the manhole sections to facilitate handling; however, through-wall holes for lifting will not be permitted. Any voids between the pipe and invert shall be filled to the springline with a product recommended by the manhole manufacturer to prevent solids collection. H. Precast Junction Boxes. Precast junction boxes shall be allowed only where indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative. Joints for wastewater junction boxes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 443. Pipe-to-Manhole/Junction Box Assemblies Precast bases and precast junction boxes shall have flexible, resilient and non- corrosive boot connectors or ring waterstops acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 923 on all wastewater pipe connections. J. Precast Flat-Slab Transition/Junction Box Lids. Unless more stringent requirements are specified on the Drawings, precast slab transitions and lids shall be designed to safely resist pressures resulting from loads which might result from any combination of forces imposed by an HS-20 loading as defined by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). The joints of precast slab transitions and of lids for wastewater applications shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443. 40 Underground Piped Utilities K. Precast-Prefabricated Tee Manholes. Tee manholes shall be allowed only where indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. The main pipe section shall conform to the requirements of City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 510, "Pipe". The vertical manhole portion (tee) above the main pipe shall conform to the requirements of the precast components. The manhole tee shall have a minimum inside diameter of 48 inches (1.22 meters) and shall rise vertically centered or tangent to the main pipe, as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. An access hole less than 48-inches (1.22 meters) in diameter shall be cut into the main pipe to allow a ledge for support of access ladders. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, the main pipe portion of the tee manhole shall be paid subsidiary to the unit tee manhole price. L. Grade Rings Rings shall be reinforced Class A or I concrete, or as indicated on City of Round Rock Standard Details. 1. Grade Rings, 24-1/2 inches (622 mm) Inside Diameter: This adjustment ring shall be used only for adjusting existing manholes with 24 inch (610 mm) lids and for Wastewater Access Device. Inside to outside diameter dimension of ring shall be 6 inches (152 mm) with a thickness of 3 inches to 6 inches (76 mm to 152 mm). 2. Grade Rings, 35 inches (889 mm) Inside Diameter: This adjustment ring shall be used for all new manhole construction with 32 inches (813 mm) lids. Inside to outside diameter dimension of ring shall be 6 inches (152 mm)) with a thickness of 4 inches to 6 inches (102 mm to 152 mm). M. New Manhole Construction and Minor Manhole Adjustment: New manhole construction and minor manhole adjustments shall be performed as indicated on City of Round Rock Standard Details, and shall consist of adding grade rings to adjust the manhole to final grade. For new manhole construction, the maximum vertical allowable ring adjustment, including the depth of the ring casting, shall be limited to 18 inches (450 mm). For adjustments of existing manholes that fall within the limits of overlay and street reconstruction projects, the maximum vertical allowable, including the depth of the ring casting, shall be limited to two feet (600 mm). All other existing manholes shall have a maximum allowable ring adjustment, including the depth of the ring casting, of one foot (300 mm). Any adjustment that will exceed these requirements shall be accomplished as described below in subsection (N). All manholes not located in paved areas shall have bolted covers. 41 Underground Piped Utilities N. Major Manhole Adjustment: Any adjustment that exceeds the requirements of subsection (M) Minor Manhole Adjustments, shall be accomplished as indicated and shall consist of any combination of removing the concrete rings, and/or the manhole cone section, and/or the straight riser section of the manhole in order to bring the manhole to final grade. All manholes not located in paved areas shall have bolted covers. O. Waterproofing Joint Materials. 0-rings and wedge seals for the joints of all wastewater manholes, and for stormwater manholes when indicated on the Drawings, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443. Cold applied preformed plastic gaskets for stormwater manholes shall be as specified in City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 510, "Pipe". The connections between reinforced concrete wastewater manhole structures and pipes shall meet the requirements of ASTM C923. P. Interior Surface Coatings for Wastewater Manholes The interior surfaces of all wastewater manholes shall be coated with a product as specified on City of Round Rock Standard Details. Q. Abandonment of Existing Manholes When designated on the Drawings for abandonment, existing manholes shall be removed to a level not less than four feet (1.2 meters) below grade. The inlets and outlets shall be securely plugged and the structure filled with material in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. 506.4 Construction All manholes shall have a minimum inside diameter of 48 inches (1.22 meters). Manhole base section or junction box dimension shall be appropriately increased to accommodate all converging pipe. A minimum horizontal clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) shall be maintained between adjacent pipes. Pipe ends within the base section or junction box walls shall not be relied upon to support overlying manhole dead and live load weights. All wastewater branch connections to new or existing mains shall be made at manholes with the influent pipe crown installed at the elevation of the effluent pipe crown. Where lines enter the manhole up to 24 inches (600 mm) above the flowline of the outlet, the invert shall be sloped upward to receive the flow, thus preventing splashing or solids deposition. Where the springline of an influent pipe is 24 inches (600 mm) or more above the springline of the effluent pipe, a drop manhole shall be used. Construction of extensions to existing systems shall require placement of bulkheads at locations indicated or directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, stormwater manholes shall have eccentric cones; wastewater manholes shall have concentric cones, except on manholes over large mains where an eccentric cone shall be situated to provide access to an invert ledge. Eccentric cones may be used where conflicts with other utilities dictate. Flat-slab tops may be used where clearance problems exist [see 42 Underground Piped Utilities 506.3(J) above]. Manholes shall be founded at the established elevations on uniformly stable subgrade. Unstable subgrade shall be over-excavated a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) and replaced with a material acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative. Precast base units shall be founded and leveled on a 6 inch (150 mm) coarse aggregate bedding. A pipe section with a prefabricated tee manhole and half the length of the adjoining pipe sections on each side shall be founded on a minimum of 6 inch (150 mm) unreinforced Class A concrete (City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 403, "Concrete For Structures). The cast-in-place concrete cradle shall be placed against undisturbed trench walls up to the pipe's springline. All adjustments shall be completed prior to the placement of the final surface. Manhole components to be reused shall be carefully removed and the contact areas shall be cleaned of all mortar, concrete, grease and sealing compounds. Any items broken in the process of removal and cleaning shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at his expense. If the adjustment involves lowering the top of a manhole, a sufficient depth of grade rings shall be removed to permit reconstruction. The mortar shall be cleaned from the top surface remaining in place and from all brick or concrete rings to be reused and the manhole rebuilt to the required elevation. The manhole ring and cover shall then be installed with the top surface conforming to the proposed grade. .-�. If the adjustment involves raising the elevation of the top of the manhole in accordance with 506.3 (M), "New Manhole Construction and Minor Manhole Adjustment", the top shall be cleaned and built up vertically to the new elevation, using new grade rings and the ring and cover installed with the top surface conforming to the proposed grade. Cast-in-place foundations shall have a minimum depth of 12 inches (300 mm) at the invert flowline. The widths of all manhole inverts shall be specifically sized for the connecting pipes. Inverts shall be "U" shaped with a minimum depth of three fourths of the largest pipe diameter. The invert shall have a minimum fall of 0.10 of a foot (30 mm) between the inlet and outlet. The lowermost riser section may be set in the Portland cement concrete, while still green, after which the foundation shall be cured a minimum of 24 hours prior to proceeding with construction of the manhole up to 12 feet (3 2/3 meters) in depth. The foundation shall be cured an additional 24 hours prior to continuing construction above the 12 foot (3 2/3 meters) level. Manhole depth shall be measured from the invert flowline to the finish surface elevation. Wastewater manholes having cast in place foundations may be constructed over existing wastewater pipes, and the top of the pipe removed to facilitate invert construction. Existing pipes shall be anchored sufficiently so that they are not displaced during manhole construction. The manhole bottom shall rise from the springline elevation of the pipe, approximately one inch for each 12 inches (80 mm per meter) of run (8%). Wastewater manholes with lines larger than 18 inches (450 mm) shall require precast bases; manholes constructed over in-service mains however, may be built on cast-in-place foundations if the flow cannot be interrupted. Precast and cast-in-place ,.--- wastewater junction boxes shall be allowed only where indicated on the Drawings or 43 Underground Piped Utilities acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative. The floors of stormwater manholes also, shall rise outwardly from the springline on a slope of 1:12 or 80 mm per meter(8%). Wastewater lines, except reinforced concrete pipe, set in cast-in-place foundations, shall require a waterstop seal or gasket acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative around the outside perimeter of the pipe. It shall be approximately centered under the manhole section wall. Cast-in-place stormwater manholes, junction boxes and flat-slab transitions shall be reinforced, Class A concrete (Standard Specification Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures"). All structural concrete work shall conform to Standard Specification Item No. 410, "Concrete Structures". Forms will be required for all cast-in-place walls and foundation. Where the surrounding material can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face, outside forms may be omitted. Backfihling for manholes shall conform to the density requirements of City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 510, "Pipe". Manhole construction in roadways may be staged to facilitate base construction. Manholes constructed to interim elevations shall be covered with steel plates of sufficient thickness to support vehicular traffic. Steel plates on wastewater manholes shall be set in mortar or other provisions, acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative, shall be made to minimize inflow. Manholes shall be completed to finish elevation prior to placement of the roadways finish surface. The excavation for completion of manhole construction shall be backfilled with cement stabilized sand with 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard (112 kilograms of cement per cubic meter) up to the bottom of Portland Cement pavement slabs or to within 2 inches (50 mm) of finish elevation of asphaltic concrete pavements. The cement stabilized sand shall be a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) thick. After rings and covers are set to grade, the inside and outside of the concrete rings shall be wiped with mortar so placed as to form a durable water-tight joint, smooth and even with the manhole cone section. No grouting shall be performed when the atmospheric temperature is at or below 40°F (5oC), and when necessary, because of a sudden drop in temperature,joints shall be protected against freezing for at least 24 hours. 506.5 Acceptance Testing of Wastewater Manholes Manholes shall be tested separately and independently of the wastewater lines. A. Test by the Vacuum Method: A vacuum test shall be performed by the Contractor prior to backfilling manholes where detouring of vehicular traffic is required. A second vacuum test will not be required after backfilling and compaction is complete unless there is evidence that the manhole has been damaged or disturbed subsequent to the initial vacuum test. For manhole installations which do not require detouring of vehicular traffic, the vacuum method is recommended and may be used by the Contractor prior to backfilling the manhole to insure proper installation so that defects may be located and repaired; however, a vacuum test shall be performed after 44 Underground Piped Utilities backfihling, and compaction are complete. Testing after backfill and compaction are complete will be the basis for acceptance of the manhole. 1. Equipment: a) The manhole vacuum tester shall be a device approved for use by the Engineer or designated representative. b) Pipe sealing plugs shall have a load resisting capacity equal to or greater than that required for the size of the connected pipe to be sealed. 2. Procedures - applicable to new 4'-O" (1.22 meter) diameter manholes. a) Manhole section interiors shall be carefully inspected; units found to have through-wall lift holes, or any penetration of the interior surface by inserts provided to facilitate handling, will not be accepted. Coating shall be applied after the testing unless coating is applied before installation or unless it is applied at the factory. All lift holes and exterior joints shall be plugged with an acceptable non-shrink grout. No grout shall be placed in horizontal joints. b) After cleaning the interior surfaces of the manhole, the Contractor shall place and inflate pneumatic plugs in all of the connecting .__ pipes to isolate the manhole; sealing pressure within the plugs shall be as recommended by the plug manufacturer. Plugs and the ends of pipes connected by flexible boots-shall be blocked to prevent their movement during the vacuum test. c) The vacuum test head shall be placed on the top of the cone section or, inside of the top of the manhole cone section, and the compression seal band inflated to the pressure recommended by its manufacturer. The vacuum pump shall be connected to the outlet port with the valve open. When a vacuum of 10 inches (254 mm) of mercury [(-5 psig) {-35 kPa}] has been attained, the valve shall be closed and the time noted. Tampering with the test equipment will not be allowed. d) The manhole shall have passed the test if the vacuum does not drop below 9 inches (229 mm) of mercury [(-4.5 psig){-31 kPa}] within three (3) minutes of the time the valve was closed. The actual vacuum shall be recorded at the end of the three (3) minutes during which the valve was closed. e). When the standard vacuum test cannot be performed because of design or material constraints (examples: T-Type manholes, T-Lock Liners, or other reasons acceptable to the Engineer or designated representative), testing of individual joints shall be performed as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. 45 Underground Piped Utilities B. Test by the Exfiltration Method: At the discretion of the Engineer or designated representative, the Contractor may substitute the Exfiltration Method of testing for the Vacuum test described in Section 506.5. A above. This method may only be used when ground water is not present. If ground water is present a Vacuum Test shall be used unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or designated representative. All backfihling and compaction shall be completed prior to the commencement of testing. The procedures for the test shall include the following: 1. Manhole section interiors shall be carefully inspected; units found to have through-wall lift holes, or any penetration of the interior surface by inserts provided to facilitate handling, will not be accepted. Coating shall be applied after the testing unless coating is applied before field assembly, or at the factory. All lift holes and exterior joints shall be plugged with an acceptable non-shrink grout. No grout shall be placed in horizontal joints. 2. After cleaning the interior surface of the manhole, the Contractor shall place and inflate pneumatic plugs in all of the connecting pipes to isolate the manhole; sealing pressure within the plugs shall be as recommended by the plug manufacturer. 3. Concrete manholes shall be filled with water or otherwise thoroughly wetted for a period of 24 hours prior to testing. 4. At the start of the test, the manhole shall be filled to the top with water. The test time shall be 1 hour (60 minutes). The Construction Inspector must be present for observation during the entire time of the test. Permissible loss of water in the 1 hour test time is 0.025 gallons per diameter foot, per foot of manhole depth (1.0 liter per diameter in meters, per meter of manhole depth). For a 4 foot (1.22 meter) diameter manhole, this quantity converts to a maximum permissible drop in the water level (from the top of the manhole cone) of 0.05 inches per foot (4 mm per meter) of manhole depth or 0.5 inches for a 10 foot (12.5 mm for a 3 meter) deep manhole. C. Failure to Pass the Test- Records of Tests. If the manhole fails to pass the initial test method as described in (A) Test by the Vacuum Method and, if allowed, (B) Test by the Exfiltration Method, or if visible groundwater leakage into the manhole is observed, the Contractor shall locate the leak, if necessary by disassembly of the manhole. The Contractor shall check the gaskets and replace them if necessary. The Contractor may re- lubricate the joints and re-assemble the manhole, or the Contractor may install an acceptable exterior joint sealing product on all joints and then retest the manhole. If any manhole fails the vacuum and/or exfiltration test twice, the Contractor shall consider replacing that manhole. If the Contractor chooses to attempt to repair that manhole, the manhole must be retested until it passes. In no case shall cold applied preformed plastic gaskets be used for repair. Records of all manhole testing shall be made available to the Engineer or designated 46 Underground Piped Utilities representative at the close of each working day, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Any damaged or visually defective products, or any products out of acceptable tolerance shall be removed from the site. D. Inspection. The Engineer or designated representative shall make a visual inspection of each manhole after it has passed the testing requirements and is considered to be in its final condition. The inspection shall determine the completeness of the manhole; any defects shall be corrected to the satisfaction of Engineer or designated representative. 506.E Measurement All junction boxes and manholes of the type indicated shall be measured as units complete in place. New manholes constructed to interim elevations to facilitate stage construction shall be measured as one unit regardless of the number of interim elevations constructed. All labor, materials and other expenses necessary for the stage construction shall be considered subsidiary to the completed unit. Abandonment of existing manholes shall be considered subsidiary to the completed unit, unless a specific pay item is indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Bid Form. ----� 506.7 Payment Payment for completed junction boxes and manholes of the type indicated shall be made at the unit bid price for each. The unit bid price shall include all labor, equipment, materials, time and incidentals necessary to complete the work. When indicated in the Drawings, abandonment of existing manholes shall be made at the unit price for abandonment. The intended use of each item shall be designated by a two-letter code (Wastewater = WW; Stormwater =SW) in the spaces provided after the pay item number: New Manhole Construction, Dia. Per Each Special Manhole, Dia. Per Each Drop Manhole, Dia. Per Each Centered Tee Manhole, Dia. x Dia. Per Each Tangent Tee Manhole, Dia. x Dia. Per Each Junction Box, Ft x Ft Per Each Major Manhole Adjustment, Dia. Per Each Minor Manhole Adjustment, Dia. Per Each Abandonment of existing Manholes: Per Each End 47 Underground Piped Utilities SPECIFIC Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item No. 506, "Manholes" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item 403 Concrete For Structures Item 410 Concrete Structures Item 406 Reinforcing Steel Item 503 Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers Item 504 Adjusting Structures Item 507 Bulkheads Item 510 Pipe American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Designation Description ASTM C 55 Specification for Concrete Building Brick ASTM C478/C478M Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Manhole ASTM C443/C443M Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets ASTM C923/C923M Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures Pipes RELATED Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item No. 506, "Manholes" American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Designation Description ASTM C 62 Specification for Building Brick (Solid Units Made from Clay or Shale) ASTM C478/C478M Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Designation Description M306 Standard Specifications for Drainage Structure Castings 48 Underground Piped Utilities THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 509 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 509.1 Description This item shall govern the following: A. Designing, furnishing, and installing a Trench Safety System for trench excavation; B. Dewatering the area as specified on the Drawings and/or required; and C. Maintenance and removal of the trench safety systems as determined by Contractor's Trench Safety Engineer and/or Contractor's Competent Person(s). This Item also includes special clearing, excavation and backfihling for safety systems. At a minimum, this work shall conform to United States Department of Labor Rules 29 CFR, Part 1926 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). The Competent Person(s) shall be on the project whenever workers are in an excavation trench. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 509.2 Trench Safety System Plan Submittal Prior to, or at the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner/Developer a Trench Safety System Plan sealed by a registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. Notice to Proceed with construction will not be issued by the Owner until the Contractor has submitted a Trench Safety System Plan to the Owner/Developer. The Trench Safety System Plan at a minimum shall conform to OSHA standards for sloping of sides, utilization of trench boxes, and/or utilization of shoring, sheeting and bracing methods. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the geotechnical information necessary for the design of the Trench Safety System Plan [normally acquired from borings taken at 500 foot (150 meter) intervals along the proposed centerline to a minimum depth of five feet (1.5 meters) below proposed flowline]. If the geotechnical information for the design of the improvements is acquired by the Owner/Developer or designated representative, it shall be provided to the Contractor for information purposes subject to the provisions of the Contract. The Trench Safety System Plan submittal shall include: A. A Drawing or plan indicating specific designation of areas in which each type of system will be used, including the length of trench to be opened, the length of time that the trench will remain open, the means of egress, the storage of materials, allowable loads on trench walls, the methods for placing/compacting bedding/backfill within the safety system, any equipment restrictions and the subsequent removal of system, B. Drawings or manufacturer's data, as applicable, that describe the various elements of the Trench Safety System in sufficient detail that the workers can properly install the Trench Safety System, 56 Underground Piped Utilities C. Recommendations and limitations for using systems. D. Sealed engineering calculations and/or equipment manufacturer's certifications, as applicable, that confirm that the system is designed to withstand the anticipated loadings and that it can be fully installed/implemented in the designated space easement provided. E. A Certificate of Insurance of the Trench Safety Engineer's Professional Liability Insurance coverage meeting the requirements of the Contact. F. Certificate of Completion of an OSHA-approved program indicating that the Contractor's Competent Person(s) has received training in "Excavation Safety". 509.3 Trench Safety System Plan Review The review of the Trench Safety System Plan that will be conducted by the Owner/Developer or designated representative shall only relate to general conformance with OSHA standards and regulations. The Owner's/Developer's failure to note exception(s) to the submittal shall not relieve the Contractor of any or all responsibility or liability for the Trench Safety System Plan. The Contractor shall remain solely and completely responsible for all trench safety systems and for the associated means, methods, procedures, and materials. 509.4 Construction Methods The Contractor's Competent Person(s) shall be responsible for the maintenance of a copy of appropriate OSHA regulations onsite and the implementation of OSHA trenching safety regulations at the work site. Trenching shall be completed to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings or as specified in various technical standard specification items requiring excavation and trenching and/or backfilling. The Contractor shall perform all trenching in a safe manner and shall maintain safety systems to prevent death or injury to personnel or damage to structures, utilities or property in or near the excavation. If evidence of possible cave-ins or earthen slides is apparent or an installed trench safety system is damaged, the work in the trench shall immediately cease, personnel evacuated from hazardous area and the Owner/Developer notified. Personnel shall not be allowed to re-enter the excavation until necessary repairs or replacements are completed and are inspected and approved by the Contractor's Competent Person(s). Repair and replacement of damaged safety system shall be at the Contractor's sole expense. 509.5 Changed Conditions When changed conditions require modifications to the Trench Safety System, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner/Developer or designated representative a new design or an alternate Trench Safety System that is proposed by the Contractor's Trench Safety Engineer to address the changed conditions encountered. Copies of the new design or alternate system shall be provided to the Owner/Developer or designated representative in accordance with the requirements of section 509.2, "Trench Safety 57 Underground Piped Utilities System Plan Submittal". A copy of the most current Trench Safety System shall be maintained on site and made available to inspection and enforcement officials at all times. Any changes to the Trench Safety System Plan that are initiated by the Contractor for operational efficiency or as a result of changed conditions, that could be reasonably anticipated, will not be cause for contract time extension or cost adjustment. When changes to the Trench Safety System Plan are necessitated by severe and uncharacteristic natural conditions or other conditions totally out of the control of the Contractor, the Contractor may make a written request to the Owner/Developer for a Change Order to address the anticipated work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner/Developer in writing within 24 hours of the occurrence of changed conditions that the Contractor anticipates the submittal of a claim for additional compensation. Under 'Changed Conditions" the work deemed immediately necessary by the Contractor to protect the safety of workers and public, equipment or materials may only be accomplished until the Owner/Developer or designated representative has a reasonable opportunity to investigate the Contractor's written request for a Change Order and respond in writing to the request. 509.E Measurement Trench Safety Systems shall be measured by lineal foot (meter: 1 meter equals 3.281 feet) through manholes and other appurtenances along the centerline of trench conforming to the Drawings and specifications. 509.7 Payment Payment for Trench Safety Systems, measured as prescribed above, will be made at unit bid price per centerline lineal foot of trench per the Drawings and specifications. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for designing, furnishing, installing the system; for dewatering, maintenance, replacement and removal of the Trench Safety Systems and for sloping, special clearing, and excavation necessary to safely implement the Trench Safety System Plan. Payment will be made under the following: Trench Safety Systems (all depths) Per Lineal Foot. END 58 Underground Piped Utilities RELATED Cross Reference Materials Standard Specification Item No. 509, "Trench Safety Systems Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications For Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item 104 Removing Concrete Item 110 Excavation Item 402 Trench Excavation Protection City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Item No. 101 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 102 Clearing and Grubbing Item No. 110 Street Excavation Item No. 111 Excavation Item No. 130 Borrow Item No. 132 Embankment Item No. 201 Subgrade Preparation Item No. 402 Controlled Low Strength Material Item No. 501 Jacking or Boring Pipe Item No. 502 Tunneling Item No. 503 Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers Item No. 504 Adjusting Structures Item No. 505 Concrete Encasement and Encasement Pipe Item No. 506 Manholes Item No. 507 Bulkheads Item No. 510 Pipe Item No. 511 Water Valves Item No. 593 Concrete Retards Item No. 594 Gabions and Revet Mattresses 59 Underground Piped Utilities ITEM NO. 510 PIPE 510.1 Description This item shall consist of furnishing and installing all pipe and/or materials for constructing pipe mains, sewers, laterals, stubs, inlet leads, service connections and culverts, including all applicable Work such as excavating, bedding, jointing, backfilling materials, tests, concrete trench cap, concrete cap and encasement, etc., prescribed under this item and in accordance with the provisions of the Edwards Aquifer Protection Ordinance, when applicable. The pipe shall be of the sizes, types, class and dimensions indicated or as designated by the Engineer or designated representative and shall include all joints or connections to new or existing mains, pipes, sewers, manholes, inlets, structures, etc., as may be required to complete the Work in accordance with specifications and published standard practices of the trade associations for the material specified and to the lines and grades indicated. This item shall include any pumping, bailing, drainage and Item No. 509, "Trench Safety Systems" for trench walls, when indicated or applicable. Unless otherwise provided, this item shall consist of the removal and disposition of trees, stumps and other obstructions, old structures or portions thereof such as house foundations, old sewers, masonry or concrete walls, the plugging of the ends of abandoned piped utilities cut and left in place and the restoration of existing utilities damaged in the process of excavation, cutting and restoration of pavement and base courses, the furnishing and placing of select - - bedding, backfilling and cement or lime stabilized backfill, the hauling and disposition of surplus materials, bridging of trenches and other provisions for maintenance of traffic or access as indicated. 510.2 Materials The Contractor shall submit descriptive information and evidence that the materials and equipment the Contractor proposes for incorporation into the Work is of the kind and quality that satisfies the specified functions and quality. (1) Concrete Concrete shall conform to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". (2) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall conform to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures" or one of the following: (a) Pipe Bedding Stone Pipe bedding stone shall be clean gravel, crushed gravel or crushed limestone, free of mud, clay, vegetation or other debris, conforming to ASTM C 33 for stone quality. Size gradation shall conform to ASTM C-33 No. 57 or No. 67 or the following Table: 60 Underground Piped Utilities SIEVE SIZE % RETAINED BY WEIGHT 1-1/2" 0 1" 0-10 1/2" 40-85 #4 90-100 #8 95-100 (b) Foundation Rock Foundation rock shall be well graded coarse aggregate ranging in size from 2 to 8 inches. (c) Flexible Base Flexible base shall conform to Item No. 210, "Flexible Base". (3) Fine Aggregate (a) Concrete and Mortar Sand Fine aggregate shall conform to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". (b) Bedding Sand Sand for use as pipe bedding shall be clean, granular and homogeneous material composed mainly of mineral matter, free of mud, silt, clay lumps or clods, vegetation or debris. The material removed by decantation TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A, plus the weight of any clay lumps, shall not exceed 4.5 percent by weight. The resistivity shall not be less than 3000 ohms-cm as determined by TxDOT Test Method Tex-129-E. Size gradation of sand for bedding shall be as follows: GRADATION TABLE SIEVE SIZE % RETAINED BY WEIGHT 1/4" 0 #60 75-100 #100 95-100 (c) Stone Screenings Stone screenings shall be free of mud, clay, vegetation or other debris, and shall conform to the following Table: 61 Underground Piped Utilities SIEVE SIZE % PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 All screenings shall be the result of a rock crushing operation. (4) Controlled Low Strength Material Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) shall conform to Item No. 402, "Controlled Low Strength Material. (5) Pea Gravel Pea gravel bedding shall be clean washed material, hard and insoluble in water, free of mud, clay, silt, vegetation or other debris. Stone quality shall meet ASTM C 33. Size gradation shall be as follows: SIEVE SIZE % RETAINED BY WEIGHT 3/4" 0 1/2" 0-25 1/4" 90-100 (6) Select Backfill or Borrow This material shall consist of borrow or suitable material excavated from the trench. It shall be free of stones or rocks over 8 inches and shall have a plasticity index of less than 20. The moisture content at the time of compaction shall be within 2 percent of optimum as determined by TxDOT Test Method Tex-1 I 4-E. Sandy loam borrow will not be allowed unless shown on the Drawings or authorized by the Engineer or designated representative. All suitable materials from excavation operations not required for backfilling the trench may be placed in embankments, if applicable. All unsuitable materials that cannot be made suitable shall be considered surplus excavated materials as described in 510.3(13). The Contractor may, if approved by the engineer, modify unsuitable materials to make them suitable for use. Modification may include drying, removal or crushing of over-size material, and lime or cement treatment. 62 Underground Piped Utilities (7) Cement Stabilized Backfill When indicated or directed by the Engineer or designated representative, backfill shall be with cement-stabilized backfill rather than the usual materials. Unless otherwise indicated, cement stabilized backfill material shall consist of a mixture of the dry constituents described for Class J Concrete. The cement and aggregates shall be thoroughly dry mixed with no water added to the mixture except as may be directed by the Engineer or designated representative. (8) Pipe General Fire line leads and fire hydrant leads shall be ductile iron. Domestic water services shall not be supplied from fire service leads, unless the domestic and fire connections are on separately valved branches with an approved backflow prevention device in the fire service branch. All wastewater force mains shall be constructed of ductile iron pipe Pressure Class 250 minimum for pipe greater than 12-inch size and Pressure Class 350 for pipe 12-inch size and smaller. Wastewater pipe shall have a corrosion resistant interior lining acceptable to the Owner/Developer. For pipes 16" and larger all pipe manufacturers and suppliers shall be certified by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for ISO 9000 compliance. It is the intent of this certification that all appropriate tests be documented with sampling criteria, frequency of testing, date of testing and date in which every piece was manufactured. A copy of the testing data to include results shall be sent with the shipment with appropriate identification as it relates to the specific shipment. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer or designated representative at the pipe manufacturing plant and at the project site prior to and during installation. Plant inspections shall be conducted at the discretion of the Owner/Developer and shall require only 48 hours of advance notice to the manufacturer. Only manufacturers and suppliers meeting this certification will be considered as approved providers of products. All water distribution pipe and fittings shall be listed in the Fire Protection Equipment Directory published by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or shall be Factory Mutual approved for fire service. (a) Reserved (b) Iron Pipe Iron pipe shall be ductile iron pipe meeting all requirements of standards as follows: -For push-on and mechanical joint pipe: AWWA 0-151 -For flanged pipe: AWWA 0-115 63 Underground Piped Utilities Barrels shall have a nominal thickness required by Table 1 of AWWA C-I15, which thickness corresponds to Special Class 53 in sizes through 54 inch, and Class 350 in 60 and 64-inch sizes. Flanges shall be ductile iron (gray iron is not acceptable); they shall be as shown in ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 and shall conform to dimensions shown in Table 2 and Figure 1 of AWWA C115. These flanges are the same in all respects as flanges shown in ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 for fittings and are standard for all flanges used with pipe, valve, and equipment units in the City of Round Rock water distribution and wastewater force main systems. Flanges shall be fabricated and attached to the pipe barrels by U.S. fabricators using flanges and pipe barrels of U.S. manufacture. If fabrication is to be by other than the pipe barrel manufacturer, a complete product submittal and approval by the City of Round Rock will be required. Additionally, such fabricator shall furnish certification that each fabricated joint has been satisfactorily tested hydrostatically at a minimum pressure of 300 psi. -Linings and Coating: Interior surfaces of all iron water pipe shall be cement-mortar lined and seal coated as required by AWWA C104. Interior surfaces of all iron wastewater line and force main pipe shall be coated with a non-corrosive lining material as approved by the City of Round Rock. Pipe exteriors shall be coated as required by the applicable pipe specification. The type and brand of interior lining shall be clearly marked on the outside of the pipe and fittings. Except as authorized by the Engineer or designated representative, only one type and brand of pipe lining shall be used on a given project. Except as described above for flanged pipe (Thickness Class 53) and where not otherwise indicated, ductile iron pipe shall be minimum Class 250 as defined by ANSI/AWWA Cl 50/A21.50-current; all ductile iron pipe and flanges shall meet the following minimum physical requirements: Grade 60-42-10: -Minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi (414 mPa). -Minimum yield strength: 42,000 psi (290 mPa). -Minimum elongation: 10 percent. The flanges for AWWA C115 pipe may be also be made from: Grade 70-50-05: -Minimum tensile strength: 70,000 psi (483 mPa). -Minimum yield strength: 50,000 psi (345 mPa). -Minimum elongation: 5 percent. 64 Underground Piped Utilities 1. Ductile Iron Fittings: Fittings shall be push-on, flanged or mechanical joint as indicated or approved and shall meet all requirements of standards as follows: -Sizes 4 inch through 24 inch: AWWA C-I 10 or AWWA C-I 53 -Sizes larger than 24 inch: AWWA C-I 10. -Lining and Coating: Interior surfaces or all iron water pipe fittings shall be lined with cement- mortar and seal coated as required by AWWA C104. Interior surfaces of all iron wastewater and force main fittings shall be coated with a non-corrosive lining material acceptable to the City of Round Rock. Fitting exteriors shall be coated as required by the applicable pipe specification. 2. Joint Materials Gaskets for mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA A21.I1/C- III. Joining of slip joint iron pipe shall, without exception, be accomplished with the natural or synthetic rubber gaskets of the manufacturer of that particular pipe being used. A joint lubricant shall be used and applicable recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be continuous full face gaskets, of 1/8 inch minimum thickness of natural or synthetic rubber, cloth-reinforced rubber or neoprene material, preferably of deformed cross section design and shall meet all applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C-I11 for gaskets. They shall be manufactured by, or satisfy all recommendations of, the manufacturer of the pipe/fittings being used and be fabricated for use with Class 125 ANSI B16.1 flanges. Tee-head bolts, nuts and washers for mechanical joints shall be high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel stock equal to "COR-TEN A" having UNC Class 2 rolled threads or alloyed ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536; either shall be fabricated in accordance with ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C-111. Hex head bolts and nuts shall satisfy the chemical and mechanical requirements of ASTM A449 SAE Grade 5 plain, and shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM B 18.2 with UNC Class 2 rolled threads. Either Tee-Head or Hex-Head bolts, nuts and washers as required, shall be protected with bonded fluoro-polymer corrosion resistant coating where specifically required by the Engineer or designated representative. All threaded fasteners shall be marked with a readily visible symbol cast, forged or stamped on each nut and bolt, which will identify the fastener material and grade. The producer and the supplier shall provide adequate literature to facilitate such identification; painted markings are not acceptable. 65 Underground Piped Utilities 3 Polyethylene Film Wrap All iron pipe, fittings and accessories shall be wrapped with standard 8 mil (minimum) low density polyethylene film or 4-mil (minimum) cross laminated high-density polyethylene conforming to AWWA C-I 05, with all edges overlapped and taped securely with duct tape to provide a continuous wrap to prevent contact between the piping and the surrounding backfill. All punctures of the polyethylene, including those caused by the placement of bedding aggregates, shall be repaired with duct tape to restore the continuous protective wrap before backfilling. 4. Marking Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked as required by the applicable AWWA specification. This includes in all cases: Manufacturer's identification, Country where cast, year of casting, and "DUCTILE" or "DI". Barrels of flanged pipe shall show thickness class; others shall show pressure class. The flanges of pipe sections shall be stamped with the fabricators identification; fittings shall show pressure rating, the nominal diameter of openings and the number of degrees for bends. Painted markings are not acceptable. (c) Concrete 1. General Pipe shall conform to ASTM C 76 for Circular Pipe. Concrete pipe smaller than 12 inches in diameter shall conform to ASTM C 14, Extra Strength. All pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process which will provide uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices, which will assure a dense concrete. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit mixed concrete shall not be acceptable for use in precast pipe. The pipe shall be Class III or the class indicated. Storm sewer pipe shall be of the tongue and groove or 0-ring joint design. Wastewater pipe shall be of the 0-ring joint design; it shall be acceptably lined for corrosion protection. 2. Marking Each joint of pipe shall be marked with the pipe class, the date of manufacture, the manufacturer's name or trade mark, diameter of pipe and orientation, if required. Pipe marking shall be waterproof and conform to ASTM C 76. 3. Minimum Age for Shipment Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the tests specified in ASTM C 76. 66 Underground Piped Utilities 4. Joint Materials When constructing storm sewers, the Contractor shall have the option of making joints with either of the following materials: a. Mortar Mortar for joints shall meet the requirements set forth below in "Mortar". b. Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets Cold Applied Plastic Gaskets shall be suitable for sealing joints of tongue and groove concrete pipe. The gasket sealing the joint shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes or obnoxious odors. The gasket joint sealer shall not depend on oxidizing, evaporating or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength and shall be supplied in extruded rope form of suitable cross section. The size of the plastic gasket joint sealer shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and sufficient to obtain squeeze-out around the joint. The gasket joint sealer shall be protected by a suitable removable wrapper that may be removed longitudinally without disturbing the joint sealer to facilitate application. The chemical composition of the gasket joint sealing compound as shipped shall meet the following requirements: Composition (% by weight) Test Method Typical Analysis Bitumen (petroleum plastic content) ASTM D 4 50-70 Ash-inert Mineral Water Tex-526-C 30-50 Volatile Matter(at 325° F) Tex-506-C 2.0 Maximum The gasket joint sealing compound when immersed for 30 days at ambient room temperature separately in 5 percent solution of caustic potash, a mixture of 5 percent hydrochloric acid, a 5 percent solution of sulfuric acid and a saturated H2S solution shall show no visible deterioration. The physical properties of the gasket joint sealing compound as shipped shall meet the following requirements: 67 Underground Piped Utilities Test Method Typical Analysis Property Minimum Maximum Specific Gravity at 77°F ASTM D 71 1.20 1.35 Ductility at 770 F (cm) Minimum Tex-503-C 5.0 Softening point Tex-505-C 275° F Penetration: 32° F (300 g) 60 sec Tex-502-C 75 77° F (150 g) 5 sec Tex-502-C 50 120 115° F (150 g) 5 sec Tex-502-C 150 Flashpoint C.O.C. F Tex-504-C 600° F Fire Point C.O.C. F Tex-504-C 625° F When constructing wastewater lines, the Contractor shall use 0-ring gasket joints conforming to ASTM C 443. Just before making a joint, the ends of the pipe shall be clean, dry, free of blisters or -_, foreign matter and shall be wire brushed. For 0-ring joints, the gasket and the inside surface of the bell shall be lubricated with a light film of soft vegetable soap compound to facilitate assembly of the joint. The rubber 0-ring gasket shall be stretched uniformly in the joint. Wedge seal type ("Forsheda" pre-lubricated) gaskets may be used if joint details submitted are approved; installation of such gaskets shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be the sole element depended upon to make the joint flexible and watertight. In wastewater lines no horizontal or vertical angles in the alignment of pipes shall be permitted unless indicated. The spigot shall be centered in the bell, the pipe pushed uniformly home and brought into true alignment. Bedding material shall be placed and tamped against pipe to secure the joint. 5. Bends When horizontal or vertical angles in the alignment of storm sewers are indicated, the bend or angle shall be constructed by use of prefabricated bends meeting the specification requirements. All bends shall be watertight, have a smooth flow line and be equal or greater in strength to the adjacent pipe. Horizontal or vertical changes in alignment in wastewater lines shall be _ .. accomplished by use of manholes. With the Engineer's or designated representative's approval, horizontal changes in alignment may be made 68 Underground Piped Utilities by the "Joint Deflection" method. Joint deflection is limited by regulations of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) to 80 percent of the maximum recommended by the manufacturer; such deflection may not exceed 5 degrees at any joint. Changes in alignment using pipe flexure shall not be allowed. 6. Sulfide and Corrosion Control All concrete pipe used for wastewater installations shall be protected from sulfide and corrosion damage by using limestone aggregate. (d) Concrete Steel Cylinder(CSC) Pipe 1. General Requirements The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer or designated representative for approval along with other required data a tabulated layout schedule with reference to the stationing and grade lines to be used. The manufacturer shall furnish all fittings and special pieces required for closures, bends, branches, manholes, air valves, blow offs and connections to main line valves and other fittings as indicated. Each pipe length, fitting and special joint shall have plainly marked on the bell end of the pipe the head condition for which it is designed. In addition, marking shall be required to indicate the location of each pipe length or special joint in the line and such markings will be referenced to the layout schedules and drawings submitted for approval. Concrete steel cylinder fittings shall be tested as required by the applicable AWWA Standards. 2. Design and Inspection Where not otherwise indicated, concrete steel cylinder pipe shall be Class 200, designed to withstand a vacuum of not less than 28 feet of water. Valve reducers, tees and outlets from a pipe run shall be designed and fabricated so that all stresses are carried by the steel forming the fitting or outlet. Concrete steel cylinder pipe shall meet one of the following specifications: AWWA C-301 - Any Size AWWA C-303 - 24-inch maximum size All pipe flanges shall conform to AWWA C-207, requirements for standard steel flanges of pressure classes corresponding to the pipe class. Pipe to be installed in a tunnel or encasement shall be manufactured with 1 inch thick by 24-inch wide skid bands of mechanically impacted mortar in addition to the normal coating. All concrete steel cylinder fittings shall be constructed of steel plate of --_ adequate strength to withstand both internal pressure and external loading. Rod reinforcing shall not be used to figure the required steel area. 69 Underground Piped Utilities The fittings shall have a concrete lining and 1 inch minimum coating of cement mortar, except that centrifugally spun lining need not be reinforced. Minimum lining thickness shall be 1/2 inch for 16-inch pipe and 3/4 inch for sizes larger than 16-inch pipe. Where it is impractical to place such concrete protection on interior surfaces of small outlets, 2 coats of "Bitumastic Tank Solution" shall be applied. No fitting shall be made by cutting of standard pipe, except that outlets of less than 75 percent of the pipe diameter may be placed in a standard pipe. Beveled spigots may be placed on standard pipe. 3. Joint Materials Joints shall be of the rubber gasket type conforming to the applicable standards. The inside and outside recesses between the bell and spigot shall be completely filled with Cement Grout in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Grout materials for jointing such pipe, unless otherwise indicated, shall be as described herein. (e) In Place Pipe Rehabilitation 1. In Place Sliplining With or Without Pipe Destruction /Replacement. This item shall consist of installing a high-density polyethylene pipe, by use of a pipe insertion machine into an existing line. a. Material Requirements The polyethylene pipe shall meet the following specifications: ASTM F 714 Plastic Pipe Institute PE3408 Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish the polyethylene pipe in accordance with the following table: Depth of Cover in Feet SDR of Pipe 0 — 16 17 Greater than 16 11 b. Functional Requirements The polyethylene pipe shall be assembled and joined at the site using the thermal butt fusion method. All equipment and procedures shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Fusing shall be accomplished by personnel certified as fusion technicians by a manufacturer of polyethylene pipe and/or fusing equipment. The complete joint shall be in true alignment and have a uniform double roll back bead resulting from the use of proper temperature and pressure. The joint shall be allowed adequate cooling time 70 Underground Piped Utilities before removal of pressure. Joints shall be made smooth on the inside by removal of the projecting weld bead using appropriate equipment; maximum projection of the weld bead on the exterior of the pipe shall be approximately 3/16 inch. The fused joint shall be watertight and shall have a tensile strength equal to that of the pipe. All joints shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer or his/her representative prior to placement. All defective joints shall be cut out and replaced. Any section of the pipe with a gash, abrasion, nick or scar greater in depth than 10 percent of the wall thickness, or containing concentrated ridges, discolorization, excessive spot roughness, pitting, variable wall thickness, or any other defect of manufacturing or handling as determined by the Engineer or his/her representative, shall be discarded and removed from the site. Terminal sections of pipe that are joined within the insertion pit shall be connected with a full circle pipe repair clamp with a minimum length of one and one half times the nominal inside pipe diameter. The butt gap between pipe ends shall not exceed 1/10 of the nominal inside diameter of the pipe. c. Installation Procedure The Contractor shall carry out his operations in strict accordance with all OSHA and manufacturer's safety requirements. The Contractor shall provide for the flow of water and wastewater around the section or sections of pipe designated for rehabilitation including active services in the rehabilitation section. The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an existing upstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent flooding of any private property and shall be liable for damages incurred by the flooding. No sewage or water shall be allowed to drain into earthen sump pits. New polyethylene pipe shall be inserted immediately behind the expansion and insertion equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's procedures. The expansion and insertion equipment shall be equipped with all controls necessary to place the pipe on proper line and grade according to the Drawings. The Contractor shall install all pulleys, rollers, bumpers, alignment control devices and other equipment required to protect existing manholes and to protect the pipe from damage during installation. Lubrication may be used as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall the pipe be stressed beyond its elastic limit. 71 Underground Piped Utilities All active service connections shall be identified by video inspection or other means and connected to the new main in accordance with the plan details. Upon commencement, insertion, from manhole to manhole, shall be continuous without interruption except as approved by the Engineer or designated representative. The installed pipe shall be allowed the manufacturer's recommended amount of time to provide for complete shrinkage or relaxation of the pipe prior to any connection of service lines, sealing of the annular space where the pipe enters the manhole, or backfilling of the insertion pit. Sufficient excess length of pipe shall be allowed to provide for this shrinkage. The pipe bedding in the insertion pit shall be either pea gravel or pipe bedding stone. Bedding and backfill shall conform to the specification requirements of Section 510.3(14) contained herein. All street repairs and pavement replacement shall conform to City of Round Rock Criteria. The relaxed pipe shall be cut so that it projects 4 inches inside of the manhole and any annular space shall be sealed. Sealing shall be with material approved by the Engineer or designated representative. The sealant shall completely fill the void between the pipe and the manhole wall and shall extend 3 inches beyond the annulus on the inside wall of the manhole. The sealant shall form a smooth transition from the pipe onto the manhole. The complete joint shall be uniform and watertight. A concrete invert shall be poured in place and shaped to form a smooth flow channel through the manhole. 2. Cured Resin Pipe Lining This method of rehabilitation shall consist of the insertion of a resin- impregnated flexible tube into an existing pipe by the inversion method given in ASTM F 1216 or by a comparable approved method. a. Material Requirements Certified copies of all test reports on the properties of the selected resin and on the initial structural properties of the Cured in Place Pipe (CIPP) system-and later, on the field samples from designated inversion lengths as required by Section 8 of ASTM F 1216-shall be submitted to the Owner's/Developer's Engineer or designated representative. All testing costs are incidental to, and shall be included in, the unit price bid for CIPP. 72 Underground Piped Utilities The CIPP system shall have minimum initial structural properties as follows: Flexural Strength (ASTM D 790) 4,500 psi Tensile Strength (ASTM D 638) 2,500 psi Flexural Modulus (ASTM D790) 250,000 psi The results of tests by an independent laboratory of specimens taken by the Contractor as required by Section 8 of ASTM F 1216 and to demonstrate compliance with the above minimum values, shall be made available to the Owner's/Developer's Engineer or designated representative at the completion of testing. b. Installation Procedure Insertion of a resin-impregnated flexible tube into an existing pipe shall be by an inversion method as given in ASTM F 1216 and the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall carry out his operations in strict accordance with all OSHA and manufacturer's safety requirements. Measures shall be taken to reduce atmospheric styrene concentration to an acceptable level at all times during the CIPP installation procedure. The percent lower explosive limit, temperature and styrene concentration shall be measured and - - recorded for each inversion taken to ensure the following conditions are met: Percent Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) shall not exceed 2% using an atmospheric monitor calibrated within at least six (6) months of the day reading is taken. The LEL shall be measured at the top of the downstream manhole adjacent to the section of pipe being lined. No process water shall be discharged until cooled to below 100 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with Section 7.1 of ASTM F 1216. Atmospheric styrene levels shall not exceed 50 ppm as measured by a Drager Tube 67 23 301 Styrene 10/a five feet above and within 3 feet downwind of the downstream manhole adjacent to the section of pipe being lined. Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactorily resolving customer complaints involving styrene odors. Any necessary repairs to the pipeline shall be performed by the Contractor. Inspection of pipeline by the Contractor shall be performed by experienced personnel trained in locating breaks, obstacles and service connections by closed circuit television. The interior of the pipe shall be carefully inspected to determine the location of any conditions which may prevent proper installation into the pipe and these conditions shall be corrected. A videotape and 73 Underground Piped Utilities log shall be made by the Contractor and provided to the Owner/Developer upon completion of the project. The Contractor shall provide for the flow of water and wastewater around the section or sections of pipe designated for rehabilitation, including active services in the rehabilitation section. The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an existing upstream manhole and pumping the flow into a downstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent flooding of any private property and shall be liable for any damages incurred by the flooding. No sewage or water shall be allowed to drain into earthen sump pits. The Contractor shall designate a location where the uncured resin in the original containers and the unimpregnated fiber-felt tube shall be vacuum impregnated prior to installation. The Contractor shall allow the Engineer or designated representative to inspect the materials and "wet out" procedure. The quantities of the liquid thermosetting materials shall be per manufacturer's standards to provide the wall thickness specified. Water for the Work shall be metered and furnished by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The wet out fiber-felt tube shall be inserted through an existing manhole or other approved access by means of an inversion process and the application of a hydrostatic head sufficient to fully extend it to the next designated manhole. Any defect which will affect, in the foreseeable future, or warranty period, the integrity or strength of the pipe liner shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer or designated representative. If, due to broken or misaligned pipe at a manhole wall, the pipe liner fails to make a tight seal, the Contractor shall apply a seal at that point. The seal shall be of a resin mixture compatible with pipe liner. After the pipe liner has been cured in place, and allowed to cool down and normalize to ambient temperature, the Contractor shall connect new services or reconnect existing service piping as designated and identified in the proposal. After the Work is completed, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer or designated representative with a videotape showing both the before and after conditions including the restored connections. (f) Polyethylene Tubing 1. General All polyethylene (PE) tubing shall be high density, high molecular weight 74 Underground Piped Utilities plastic tubing meeting ASTM D2737; it shall be pressure rated at 200 psi working pressure and must bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval for potable water service. When tested for Environmental Stress Cracking, the PE tubing shall not show any loss of pressure in the 6 specimens tested for 3 hours in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2737 using the test pressure of 400 psi at 73.4° F. The minimum burst pressure shall be 630 psi at 73.4° F determined in accordance with ASTM D 1599, latest revision. The time of testing of each specimen shall be between 60 and 70 seconds. The tubing shall not fail, balloon, burst or weep as defined in ASTM D 1598, latest revision, when tested in accordance with the Sustained Pressure Test Method of ASTM D 2737 but under the following test conditions: Temperature Time Pressure 73.4° F 1,000 hours 400 psi 100° F 1,000 hours 330 psi 2. Markings Permanent marking on the tubing shall include the following at intervals of not more than 5 feet: Nominal tubing size. Type of plastic material, i.e., PE 3408. Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) and pressure rating in psi for water at 73.4° F (e.g., SDR-9, 200 psi). ASTM D 2737 designation. Manufacturer's name or trademark, code and seal of approval (NSF mark) of the National Sanitation Foundation. 3. Tube Size PE tubing shall be standard copper tube size outside diameter, with Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 9. Standard sizes, dimensions and tolerances shall be as follows: Nominal Tube Outside Diameter, inches Wall Thickness, inches Size (inches) Average Tolerance Minimum Tolerance 3/4 0.875 ±0.004 0.097 +0.010 1 1.125 ±0.005 0.125 +0.012 1 1/4 1.375 ±0.005 0.153 +0.015 1 1/2 1.625 ±0.006 0.181 +0.018 2 2.125 ±0.006 0.236 +0.024 75 Underground Piped Utilities (g) Copper Tubing All copper service tubing shall be annealed seamless Type K water tube meeting ASTM B88 and rated at 150 psi working pressure. The tubing shall be homogenous throughout and free from cracks, holes, crimping, foreign inclusions or other defects. It shall be uniform in density and other physical properties. Nominal Tube Outside Diameter, inches Wall Thickness, inches Size, inches Average Tolerance Average Tolerance 3/4 0.875 ± 0.003 0.065 ± 0.0045 1 1.125 ± 0.0035 0.065 ± 0.0045 1 1/4 1.375 ± 0.004 0.065 ± 0.0045 11/2 1.625 ± 0.0045 0.072 ± 0.005 2 2.125 ± 0.005 0.083 ± 0.007 (h) Service Connection Fittings All fittings used in customer service connection - tapping mains, connecting • meters, etc. - must be approved by the City of Round Rock. (i) Brass Goods .--... All brass valves, couplings, bends, connections, nipples and miscellaneous brass pipe fittings and accessories used in meter connections, service lines, air release piping assemblies, and wherever needed in the water distribution system, shall conform to the City of Round Rock Standards Details, and AWWA C-800, and, shall be approved by the City of Round Rock Unless otherwise noted, the goods described herein shall be fabricated of standard Red Brass (Waterworks Brass) meeting ASTM B62 or B584, alloy 83600, consisting of 85 percent copper and 5 percent each of tin, lead and zinc. Exposed threads shall be covered with plastic caps or sheeting to protect the threads. Brass goods of each type and class shall be compatible with other fittings in common usage for similar purposes. Where not otherwise indicated, all such materials shall meet the following requirements: Inlet threads of corporation valves shall be AWWA iron pipe (IP) thread (male); outlets of service saddles shall be tapped with AWWA IP thread (female). AWWA IP threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 as required by AWWA C800 for"General Purpose (Inch) Pipe Threads". For 3/4" and 1" sizes only, corporation valve inlet threads, and the internal threads of saddles may be the AWWA taper thread conforming to AWWA C800 Figure 1 and Table 6. External threads of corporation valve inlet must be compatible with internal threads of the service saddle. 76 Underground Piped Utilities Connections of all new tubing, and of tubing repairs wherever possible, shall be by flared fittings. Flare connections - and compression connections when permitted - shall be designed to provide a seal and to retain the tubing, without slippage, at a working water pressure of 150 psig. Flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, as to dimensions, drillings, etc. Copper tubing, when used, shall be Type K tubing having dimensions and weights given in Table A.1 of AWWA C800. Brass pipe shall conform to the weights and dimensions for Extra Strong pipe given in Table A.2 of AWWA C800. All fittings shall be suitable for use at hydrostatic working pressures up to 150 psig (hydrostatic testing of installed systems is at 200 psig). (j) Reserved (k) Polyvinyl Chloride Water Pipe 1. General All polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pipe shall be of the rigid (UNPLASTICIZED) type and must bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval for potable water pipe. Each joint of pipe shall consist of single continuous extrusion; bells or other components attached by solvent welding are not acceptable. Pipe shall be pressure rated at 200 psi (SDR-14). Pipe shall have push-on, rubber gasket joints of the bell and spigot type with thickened integral bells with rubber gasket joints. The wall thickness of each pipe bell and joint coupling must be greater than the standard pipe barrel thickness. Clearance must be provided in every gasket joint for both lateral pipe deflection and for linear expansion and contraction. Concrete thrust blocking shall be placed behind bends and tees. Concrete support cradles or blocking shall be required for support of all fire hydrants, valves and AWWA C110 fittings; such support shall be provided for AWWA C153 fittings when required by the Engineer or designated representative. 2. Applicable Specifications Except as modified or supplemented herein, PVC pipe shall meet the following standards: AWWA C-900, SDR 14 for PVC Pressure Pipe, in 4, 6, 8 and 12 inch nominal sizes, having Cast Iron Pipe size outside diameters. Fittings used with PVC Pressure pipe shall be AWWA C-I 10 or AWWA C- 153 compact ductile iron fittings. Standard sizes, dimensions and tolerances shall be as follows: 77 Underground Piped Utilities SDR-14 Nominal Size Outside Diameter, inches Wall Thickness, inches (inches) Avg. Tolerance Min. Tolerance 4 4.800 + 0.009 0.343 + 0.041 6 6.900 + 0.011 0.493 + 0.059 8 9.050 + 0.015 0.646 + 0.078 12 13.200 + 0.015 0.943 + 0.113 All pipe 4 inches and larger must be approved by Underwriter's Laboratories for use in buried water supply and fire protection systems. 3. Material Requirements All pipe and fittings shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved, Class 12454B PVC. Clean reworked materials generated from the manufacturers own production may be used within the current limits of the referenced AWWA C-900. 4. Marking Permanent marking on each joint of pipe shall include the following at intervals of not more than 5 feet: Nominal pipe size and OD base (e.g., 4 CIPS). Type of plastic material (e.g., PVC 12454B). Standard Dimension Ratio and the pressure rating in psi for water at 73° F (e.g., SDR 14, 200 psi). AWWA designation with which the pipe complies (e.g., AWWA C- 900). Manufacturer's name or code and the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) mark. 5. Tracer Tape For all non-metallic pipe, directly above the centerline of the pipe and a minimum of 12 inches below the subgrade, or a minimum of 18 Inches below finished grade on areas outside the limits of pavement, shall be placed Inductive Tracer Detection Tape in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. The tape shall be encased in a protective, inert, plastic jacket and color-coded in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code. 78 Underground Piped Utilities (I) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Nonpressure) and Fittings 1. General Where PVC sewer or wastewater pipe is indicated, it shall conform to ASTM D 3034. Cell Class shall be as required by applicable ASTM pipe specification; pipe stiffness shall be 115 psi minimum for pipe to 15" size, or 72 psi minimum for larger pipe. 2. Joint Material PVC pipe and fitting shall have elastomeric gasket joints conforming to ASTM D 3212; gaskets to ASTM F 477. 3. Pipe Markings Permanent marking on the pipe shall include the following at intervals of not more than 5 feet: Manufacturer's name and/or trademark. Nominal pipe size. PVC cell classification per ASTM D 1784. ASTM designation and legend: For pipe 6 inch to 15-inch size: ASTM D 3034, type PSM, SDR-26 PVC Sewer Pipe. For pipe 18 inches and larger: ASTM F 679. 1-1 wall PVC sewer pipe. 4. Fitting Markings Fittings shall be clearly marked as follows: Manufacturer's name or trademark, Nominal size, The material designation "PVC", PSM, and The designation, "Specification D3034". 5. Tracer Tape For all non-metallic pipe, directly above the centerline of the pipe and a minimum of 12 inches below the subgrade, or a minimum of 18 Inches below finished grade on areas outside the limits of pavement, shall be placed Inductive Tracer Detection Tape in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. The tape shall be encased in a protective, inert, plastic jacket and color-coded in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code. 79 Underground Piped Utilities (m) Steel Pipe 1. Standard Weight ASTM A 53, Schedule 40. 2. Extra Heavy Weight Seamless ASTM A 53, Schedule 80. 3. Encasement Pipe Welded or Seamless pipepiles ASTM A-252, Grade 2. 4. Fittings Nipples and fittings extra strong Federal Specification WW-N 351 or WW- P 521. 5. Coatings Black or galvanized as indicated. (n) Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings for Water Pipe 1. General Reference Standards Specification. Specifications of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) listed below shall apply to this Section. ---� C-200 Steel Water Pipe 6 inches and larger. C-205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe, 4 inches and larger, Shop Applied. C-206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. C-207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services, Sizes 4 inches through 144 inches. C-208 Dimensions for Steel Water Pipe Fittings. C-602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines, 4 inches and larger in Place. 2. Submittals Furnish Shop Drawings, product data, design calculations and test reports as described below: a. Certified copies of mill tests confirming the type of materials used in steel plates, mill pipe flanges and bolts and nuts to show compliance with the requirements of the applicable standards. b. Complete and dimensional working drawings of all pipe layouts. Shop Drawings shall include the grade of material, size, wall thickness of the pipe and fittings, type and location of fittings and the type and limits of the lining and coating systems of the pipe and fittings. 80 Underground Piped Utilities c. Product data to show compliance of all couplings, supports, fittings, coatings and related items. 3. Job Conditions a. The internal design pressure of all steel pipe and fittings shall be as indicated. b. The interior of all steel pipe for potable water, 4 inches and larger, shall be cement-mortar lined. 4. Manufacturing a. Description Pipe shall comply with AWWA C-200. (1) Circumferential deflection of all pipe in-place shall not exceed 2.0 percent of pipe diameter. (2) Diameter Nominal pipe diameter shall be the inside diameter of lining or pipe barrel, unless otherwise designated in Job Conditions. b. Wall Thickness (1) Steel pipe wall thickness shall be designed for the internal and external loads specified in this section. The cylinder thickness needed to resist internal pressure shall be based on an allowable stress in the steel equal to 1/2 the minimum yield stress of the material used. 5. Fittings a. Welded Fabricated steel fittings shall be of the same material as pipe and shall comply with AWWA C-208. 6. Flanges a. Flanges shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C-207, Class D or Class E. The class shall be based on operating conditions and mating flanges of valves and equipment. b. Gaskets shall be cloth-inserted rubber, 1/8 inch thick. c. Flanges shall be flat faced with a serrated finish. 7. Pipe Joints a. Lap Joints for Field Welding (1) Lap joints for field welding shall conform to AWWA C-206. This item applies only to pipes 72 inches in diameter and larger. 81 Underground Piped Utilities (2) The bell ends shall be formed by pressing on a hydraulic expander or a plug die. After forming, the minimum radius of curvature of the bell end at any point shall not be less than 15 times the thickness of the steel shell. Bell ends shall be formed in a manner to avoid impairment of the physical properties of the steel shell. Joints shall permit a lap at least 1 1/2 inches when assembled. The longitudinal or spiral weld on the inside of the bell end and the outside of the spigot end on each section of pipe shall be ground flush with the plate surface. The inside edge of the bell and the outside edge of the spigot shall be scarfed or lightly ground to remove the sharp edges or burrs. b. Bell and Spigot Joints with 0-Ring Gasket (1) Bell and spigot joints with rubber gasket shall conform to AWWA C-200. (2) The bell and spigot ends shall be so designed that when the joint is assembled, it will be self-centered and the gasket will be confined to an annular space in such manner that movement of the pipe or hydrostatic pressure cannot displace it. Compression of the gasket when the joint is completed shall not be dependent upon water pressure in the pipe and shall be adequate to ensure a watertight seal when subjected to the specified conditions of service. Bell and spigot ends shall be welded on preformed shapes. The bell and spigot ends shall conform to the reviewed Shop Drawings. 8. Interior and Exterior Protective Surface Coatings a. Exterior Surface to be mortar coated shall conform to AWWA C-205 for shop application and AWWA C-602 for field application. Pipe materials shall be the product of an organization, which has had not less than 5 years successful experience manufacturing pipe materials, and the design and manufacture of the pipe, including all materials, shall be the product of one company. b. All surfaces except as noted in c and d below shall receive shop application of mortar lining and coating. c. Field Welded Joints. After installation, clean, line and coat unlined or uncoated ends adjacent to welded field joints, including the weld proper, as specified for pipe adjacent to the weld. d. Machined Surfaces. Shop coat machined surfaces with a rust preventative compound. After jointing surfaces, remaining exposed surfaces shall be coated per a) and b) above. 82 Underground Piped Utilities (0) Corrugated Metal Pipe 1. General Pipe shall be corrugated continuous lock or welded seam helically corrugated pipe. Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel, aluminized steel or aluminum conforming to the following: Galvanized Steel AASHTO M 218 Aluminized Steel AASHTO M 274 Aluminum AASHTO M 197 Where reference is made herein to gage of metal, the reference is to U.S. Standard Gage for uncoated sheets. Tables in AASHTO M 218 and AASHTO M 274 list thickness for coated sheets in inches. The Tables in AASHTO M 197 list thickness in inches for clad aluminum sheets. Sampling and testing of metal sheets and coils used for corrugated metal pipe shall be in accordance with TXDOT Test Method Tex-708-l. Damaged spelter coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged area and removing all loose, cracked or weld-burned spelter coating. The cleaned area shall be painted with a zinc dust-zinc oxide paint conforming to Federal Specifications TI-P 641 b. Damaged pipe shall be rejected and removed from the project. Damaged aluminized coating shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: Thickness and corrugations Trade Mark of the manufacturer Specification compliance 2. Fabrication a. Steel Pipe Galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 36, Type I or Type II as indicated. It may be fabricated with circumferential corrugations; lap joint construction with riveted or spot welded seams or it may be fabricated with helical corrugations with continuous helical lock seam or ultra high frequency resistance butt-welded seams. b. Aluminum Pipe Pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 196, Type I, circular pipe or Type II, pipe arch as indicated. It may be fabricated with circumferential corrugations; lap joint construction with riveted or spot welded seams or it may be fabricated with helical corrugations with a continuous helical lock seam. 83 Underground Piped Utilities Portions of aluminum pipe that are to be in contact with high chloride concrete or metal other than aluminum, shall be insulated from these materials by a coating of bituminous material. The coating applied to the pipe or pipe arch to provide insulation between the aluminum and other material shall extend a minimum distance of 1 foot beyond the area of contact. 3. Selection of Gages The pipe diameter, permissible corrugations and required gages for circular pipe shall be as indicated on the drawings. For pipe arch, the span, rise, gage, corrugation size and coating thickness shall be as shown on the drawings. A tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch or 2 percent of equivalent circular diameter, whichever is greater, will be permissible in span and rise, with all dimensions measured from the inside crests of the corrugations. 4. Joint Material Except as otherwise indicated, coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 36 for steel pipe and AASHTO M 196 for aluminum pipe. Field joints for each type of corrugated metal pipe shall maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent infiltration of soil material during the life of the installation. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thickness lighter than the thickness of the pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum. Coupling bands shall be made of the same base metal and coating (metallic or otherwise) as the pipe. Coupling bands shall lap equally on each of the pipes being connected to form a tightly closed joint after installation. Pipes furnished with circumferential corrugations shall be field jointed with corrugated locking bands. This includes pipe with helical corrugations, which has reformed circumferential corrugations on the ends. The locking bands shall securely fit into at least one full circumferential corrugation on each of the pipe ends being coupled. The minimum width of the corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for the corrugation which corresponds to the end circumferential corrugations on the pipes being joined: 10 1/2 inches wide for 2 2/3 inches x 1/2-inch corrugations. 12 inches wide for 3 inches x 1 inch or 5 inches x 1-inch corrugations. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only when it is necessary to join a new pipe to an existing pipe, which was 84 Underground Piped Utilities installed with no circumferential end corrugations. In this event, pipe furnished with helical corrugations at the ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated bands or with bands with projections or dimples. The minimum width of helically corrugated bands shall conform to the following: 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. 14 inches wide for 1 inch deep helical end corrugations. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows of projections with one projection for each corrugation. The width of bands with projections shall be not less than the following: 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. The bands shall have 2 circumferential rows of projections. 16 1/4 inches wide for pipe diameters of 78 inches and greater. The bands shall have 4 circumferential rows of projections. Unless otherwise indicated, all bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2-inch diameter. Bands 12 inches wide or less shall have a minimum of 2 bolts and bands greater than 12 inches wide shall have a minimum of 3 bolts. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized conforming to AASHTO M 232, mechanically galvanized to provide the same requirements as AASHTO M 232 or electro-galvanized per ASTM A 164 Type RS. 5. Additional Coatings or Linings a. Bituminous Coated Bituminous Coated pipe or pipe arch shall be as indicated both as to base metal and fabrication and in addition shall be coated inside and out with a bituminous coating which shall meet the performance requirements set forth herein. The bituminous coating shall be 99.5 percent soluble in carbon bisulphide. The pipe shall be uniformly coated inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch, measured on the crests of the corrugations. The bituminous coating shall adhere to the metal tenaciously, shall not chip off in handling and shall protect the pipe from deterioration as evidenced by samples prepared from the coating material successfully meeting the Shock Test and Flow Test in accordance with Test Method Tex-522-C. b. Paved Invert Where a Paved Invert is indicated, the pipe or pipe arch, in addition to the fully coated treatment described above, shall receive additional bituminous material of the same specification as above, applied to the bottom quarter of the circumference to form a smooth pavement with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above the crests of the corrugations. 85 Underground Piped Utilities c. Cement Lined (1) General Except as modified herein, pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 36 for lock seam or welded helically corrugated steel pipe. Pipe shall be of full circle and shall be fabricated with two annular corrugations for purposes of joining pipes together with band couplers. Lock seams shall develop the seam strength as required in Table 3 of AASHTO M 36. Concrete lining shall conform to the following: Composition Concrete for the lining shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate and water that are well mixed and of such consistency as to produce a dense, homogeneous, non- segregated lining. Cement Portland Cement shall conform to AASHTO M 85. Aggregate Aggregates shall conform to AASHTO M 6 except that the requirements for gradation and uniformity of gradation shall not apply. Mixture The aggregates shall be sized, graded, proportioned and thoroughly mixed with such proportions of cement and water as will produce a homogenous concrete mixture of such quality that the pipe will conform to the design requirements indicated. In no case, however, shall the proportions of Portland Cement, blended cement or Portland Cement plus pozzolanic admixture be less than 470 lb/cu. yd of concrete. Thickness The lining shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above the crest of the corrugations. Lining Procedures The lining shall be plant applied by a machine traveling through a stationary pipe. The rate of travel of the machine and the rate of concrete placement shall be mechanically regulated so as to produce a homogenous nonsegregated lining throughout. Surface Finish The lining machine shall also mechanically trowel the 86 Underground Piped Utilities concrete lining as the unit moves through the pipe. Certification Furnish manufacturer's standard certification of compliance upon request of the Owner/Developer. Joints Pipe shall be joined together with coupling bands made from steel sheets to an indicated thickness of 0.064 inch (12 ga.). Coupling bands shall be formed with two corrugations that are spaced to provide seating in the third corrugation of each pipe end without creating more than 1/2 inch ± annular space between pipe ends when joined together. Bands shall be drawn together by two 1/2 inch galvanized bolts through the use of a bar and strap suitably welded to the band. When 0-ring gaskets are indicated they shall be placed in the first corrugation of each pipe and shall be compressed by tightening the coupling band. Rubber 0-ring gaskets shall conform to Section 5.9, ASTM C 361. (2) Causes for Rejection Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making satisfactory joint. Defects that indicate poor workmanship and could not be easily repaired in the field. Severe dents or bends in the metal itself. If concrete lining is broken out, pipe may be rejected or at the discretion of the Engineer or designated representative, repaired in the field in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Hairline cracks or contraction cracks in the concrete lining are to be expected and does not constitute cause for rejection. d. Fiber Bonded Where fiber bonded pipe is indicated, the pipe or pipe arch shall be formed from sheets whose base metal shall be as indicated. In addition, the sheets shall have been coated with a layer of fibers, applied in sheet form by pressing them into a molten metallic 87 Underground Piped Utilities bonding. If a paved invert is indicated it shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined above. The test for spelter coating above is waived for fiber bonded pipe. 6. Slotted Drain Storm Sewers The pipes for the slotted drain and slotted drain outfall shall be helically corrugated, lock seam or welded seam pipe. Materials and fabrication shall be in accordance with the above. The metal thickness shall be a minimum 16 gage. The chimney assemblies shall be constructed of 3/16 inch welded plate or machine formed 14 gage galvanized steel sheets. The height of the chimney required shall be as indicated. Metal for the welded plate slot shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 36 and the completed plate slot shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. Weld areas and the heat affected zones where the slot is welded to the corrugated pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a good quality asphalt base aluminum paint. 7. Mortar Mortar shall be composed of 1 part Type I Portland Cement and 2 parts clean, sharp mortar sand suitably graded for the purpose and conforming in other respects to the provisions for fine aggregate of Item No. 403, --� "Concrete for Structures". Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix, but in no case shall it exceed 10 percent by weight of the total dry mix. 510.3 Construction Methods (1) General Prior to commencing this Work, all erosion control and tree protection measures required shall be in place and all utilities located and protected. Clearing the site shall conform to Item No. 102, "Clearing and Grubbing". Maintenance of environmental quality protection shall comply with all requirements of the Contract and Item No. 601, "Salvaging and Placing Topsoil". The Contractor shall conduct his Work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of all existing utilities. If at any time the Contractor damages the utilities in place through his operations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the owner of the utility to make the necessary repairs. When active wastewater sewer lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open and the lines shall be restored when the backfihling has progressed to the original bedding lines of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the 88 Underground Piped Utilities Contractor may proceed with his Work with a minimum of delay and expense. The Contractor shall cooperate with all utility owners concerned in effecting any utility adjustments necessary and shall not hold the Owner/Developer liable for any expense due to delay or additional Work because of conflicts arising from existing utilities. The Contractor shall do all trenching in accordance with the provisions and the directions of the Engineer or designated representative as to the amount of trench left unfilled at any time. All excavation and backfilling shall be accomplished as indicated and in compliance with State Statutes. Where excavation for a pipeline is required in an existing City street, a street cut permit is required and control of traffic shall be as indicated in accordance with the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Wherever existing utility branch connections, sewers, drains, conduits, ducts, pipes or structures present obstructions to the grade and alignment of the pipe, they shall be permanently supported, removed, relocated or reconstructed by the Contractor through cooperation with the owner of the utility, structure or obstruction involved. In those instances where their relocation or reconstruction is impractical, a deviation from line and grade will be ordered by the Engineer or designated representative and the change shall be made in the manner directed. Adequate temporary support, protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures, drains, sewers and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the Work shall be furnished by the Contractor, at his expense and as approved by the Engineer or designated representative. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges. For trenches less than 2 feet in width, sheet steel plates having a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch shall be used. For trenches up to 4 feet in width, sheet steel plates having a minimum thickness of 3/4 inches shall be used. In all cases, the plates shall overlay the top of the trench a minimum of 18 inches on both sides and be secured by asphalt. Adequate provisions shall be made for the flow of sewers; drains and watercourses encountered during construction and any structures, which may have been disturbed, shall be satisfactorily restored upon completion of Work. When rainfall or runoff is occurring or is forecast by the U.S. Weather Service, the Contractor shall not perform or attempt any excavation or other earth moving Work in or near the flood plain of any stream or watercourse or on slopes subject to erosion or runoff, unless given specific approval by the Engineer or designated representative. When such conditions delay the Work, an extension of time will be allowed in accordance with conditions contained in the Contract. (2) Water Line/New Wastewater Line Separation Installation of new water or wastewater lines shall conform to the following: Where feasible, water and wastewater lines shall be no closer to each other than 9 feet between outside diameters in all directions and shall be in separate trenches. 89 Underground Piped Utilities If the 9 foot separation cannot be achieved, any portion of a new gravity wastewater line within 9 feet in any direction (between OD's) of a potable water line, shall be in a separate trench and constructed of material (pipe and joints) with a rating of 150 psi minimum. If the lines are parallel, they shall not be closer than 4 feet horizontally or 2 feet vertically between OD's with the wastewater lower than the water line. If the lines cross, they may be no closer than 6 inches vertically between OD's with the sewer below the water line and one standard 20 foot joint of 150 psi rated wastewater pipe shall be centered at the point of crossing the water line. Unless wastewater manholes and the connection to the sewer can be made completely watertight and tested for no leakage, they must be installed so as to provide a minimum of 9 feet of horizontal clearance from an existing or proposed water line. (3) Utility and Storm Sewer Crossings When the Contractor installs a pipe that crosses under a utility structure or storm sewer and the top of the pipe is within 18 inches of the bottom of the utility structure, the pipe shall be encased as specified in Item No. 505, "Concrete Encasement and Encasement Pipe", for a distance of at least 1 foot on either side of the ditch line of the utility structure or the storm sewer. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer or designated representative, concrete encasement will not be required for ductile iron, AWWA C-900 (SDR-18) 150 psi rated PVC in sizes to 12 inch, or AWWA C-905 (SDR-25) 165 psi rated PVC in sizes larger than 12 inches. When the Contractor installs a pipe that crosses over a utility structure or storm sewer and the top of the utility structure or storm sewer is within 18 inches of the bottom of the pipe, the pipe shall be either ductile iron, AWWA C-900 (SDR-1 8) 150 psi rated PVC in sizes to 12 inch, or AWWA C-905 (SDR-25) 165 psi rated PVC in sizes larger than 12 inches, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer or designated representative.. Where trenches wider than 12 inches cross under existing wastewater lines, the sewer lines shall be replaced with one 20 foot joint of ductile iron, AWWA C-900 (SDR-18) 150 psi rated PVC in sizes to 12 inch, or AWWA C-905 (SDR-25) 165 psi rated PVC in sizes larger than 12 inches, centered over the trench. (4) Trench Excavation Underground piped utilities shall be constructed in an open cut in accordance with Federal regulations, applicable State Statutes and conforming to Item No. 509, "Trench Safety Systems" and with a trench width and depth described below. When pipe is to be constructed in fill above the natural ground, Contractor shall construct embankment to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe, after which trench is to be excavated. Required vertical sides shall be sheeted and braced as indicated to maintain the sides of the required vertical excavation throughout the construction period. Adequacy of the design of sheeting and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor's design �- -- professional. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation as indicated. 90 Underground Piped Utilities After the pipe has been laid and the backfill placed and compacted to 12 inches above the top of the pipe, any sheeting, shoring and bracing required may be removed with special care to insure that the pipe is not disturbed. As each piece of sheeting is removed, the space left by its removal must be thoroughly filled and compacted with suitable material and provisions made to prevent the sides of the trench from caving until the backfill has been completed. Any sheeting left in place will not be paid for and shall be considered subsidiary to the pipe item bid. (5) Trench Width Trenches for water and wastewater lines shall have a clear width on each side beyond the outside surfaces of the pipe bell or coupling of not less than 6 inches nor more than 12 inches. Trenches for Storm Sewers up to 42 inches shall have a width of 1 foot on each side beyond the outside surfaces of the pipe. Pipes more than 42 inches shall have a trench width of 18 inches on each side beyond the outside surfaces of the pipe. If the trench width within the pipe zone exceeds widths above, the entire pipe zone shall be refilled with approved backfill material, thoroughly compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density as determined by TxDOT Test Method Tex-1 14-E and then re-excavated to the proper grade and dimensions. Excavation along curves and bends shall be so oriented that the trench and pipe are approximately centered on the centerline of the curve, using short lengths of pipe and/or bend fittings if necessary. For all utilities to be constructed in areas to be filled above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than 1 foot above the top of the utility after which excavation for the utility shall be made. (6) Trench Depth and Depth of Cover All pipe and in-line appurtenances shall be laid to the grades indicated. The depth of cover shall be measured from the established finish grade, natural ground surface (if natural grade is to remain), subgrade for staged construction, street or other permanent surface to the top or uppermost projection of the pipe. (a) Where not otherwise indicated, all water piping shall be laid to the following minimum depths: 1. Water piping installed in unpaved areas shall be laid with at least 42 inches of cover. 2. Water piping installed in existing streets, roads or other traffic areas shall be laid with at least 48 inches of cover below finish grade. 3. Unless approved by the Engineer or designated representative, installation of water piping in proposed new streets or traffic areas will not be permitted until paving and drainage plans have been approved and the roadway traffic areas excavated to the specified or standard paving subgrade, with all parkways and sidewalk areas 91 Underground Piped Utilities graded according to any applicable provisions of the drainage plans or sloped upward from the curb line to the right of way line at a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot. Piping and appurtenances installed in such proposed streets shall be laid with at least 30 inches of cover below the actual subgrade. (b) Where not otherwise indicated, all wastewater piping shall be laid to the following minimum depths: 1. Wastewater piping installed in unpaved areas shall be laid with at least 48 inches of cover. 2. Wastewater piping installed in existing streets, roads or other traffic areas shall be laid with at least 66 inches of cover. 3. Wastewater piping installed in proposed streets or traffic areas shall be laid with at least 48 inches of cover below the actual subgrade. (7) Classification of Excavation Excavation will not be considered or paid for as a separate item of Work, therefore excavated material will not be classified as to type or measured as to quantity. Full payment for all excavation required for the construction shall be included in the various unit or lump sum Contract prices for the various items of Work installed, complete in place. No extra compensation, special treatment or other consideration will be allowed due to rock, pavement, caving, sheeting and bracing, falling or rising water, working under and in the proximity of trees or any other handicaps to excavation. (8) Dewatering Excavation Underground piped utilities shall not be constructed or the pipe laid in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the excavation prior to the pipe placing operation to insure a dry firm granular bed on which to place the underground piped utilities and shall be maintained in such unwatered condition until all concrete and mortar is set. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping or by a well-point installation as conditions warrant. In the event that the excavation cannot be dewatered to the point where the pipe bedding is free of mud, a seal shall be used in the bottom of the excavation. Such seal shall consist of Class B concrete, conforming to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures", with a minimum depth of 3 inches. (9) Trench Conditions Before attempting to lay pipe, all water, slush, debris, loose material, etc., encountered in the trench must be pumped or bailed out and the trench must be kept clean and dry while the pipe is laid and backfihled. Where needed, sump pits shall be dug adjoining the trench and pumped as necessary to keep the excavation dewatered. Backfilling shall closely follow pipe laying so that no pipe is left exposed and unattended after initial assembly. All open ends, outlets or other openings in the 92 Underground Piped Utilities pipe shall be protected from damage and shall be properly plugged and blocked watertight to prevent the entrance of trench water, dirt, etc. The interior of the pipeline shall at all times be kept clean, dry and unobstructed. Where the soil encountered at established footing grade is a quicksand, saturated or unstable material, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are indicated: All unstable soils shall be removed to a depth of a minimum 2 feet below bottom of piped utility or as required to stabilize the trench foundation. Such excavation shall be carried out for the entire trench width. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with a concrete seal, foundation rock or coarse aggregate materials placed across the entire trench width in uniform layers not to exceed 6 inches, loose measure and compacted by mechanical tamping or other means which shall provide a stable foundation for the utility. Forms, sheathing and bracing, pumping, additional excavation and backfill required in unstable trench conditions shall be subsidiary to pipe bid. (10) Blasting All blasting shall conform to the provisions of the Contract and applicable local and state codes. (11) Removing Old Structures When out of service masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 1 foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new sewers, such manholes and inlets within the construction limits shall be removed completely to a depth 1 foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom of the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided above. Where the trench cuts through storm or wastewater sewers which are known to be abandoned, these sewers shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer or designated representative. When old structures are encountered, which are not visible from the existing surface and are still in service, they shall be protected and adjusted as required to the finished grade. (12) Lines and Grades Grades, lines and levels shall conform to the Drawings. Any damage to the above by the Contractor shall be re-established at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall furnish copies of all field notes and "cut sheets" to the City. The location of the lines and grades indicated may be changed only by direction of the Engineer or designated representative and it is understood that the -_ Contractor will be paid on the basis of his unit Contract prices bid for such Work 93 Underground Piped Utilities actually performed and shall make no claim for damages or loss of anticipated profits due to the change of location or grade. The Contractor shall furnish, at his expense, all necessary batter boards or electronic devices for controlling the Work. Batter boards shall be of adequate size and material and shall be supported substantially. The boards and all location stakes must be protected from possible damage or change of location. The Contractor shall furnish good, sound twilled lines for use in achieving lines and grades and the necessary plummets and graduated poles. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer or designated representative at least 6 copies of any layout Drawings from the pipe manufacturer for review and approval. The Contractor shall submit the layout Drawings at least 30 days in advance of any actual construction of the project. The Engineer or designated representative will forward all comments of the review to the Contractor for revision. Revisions shall be made and forwarded to the Engineer or designated representative for his acceptance. Prior to commencement of the Project, reviewed layout Drawings will be sent to the Contractor marked for construction. Should the Contractor's procedures not produce a finished pipe placed to grade and alignment, the pipe shall be removed and relayed and the Contractors procedures modified to the satisfaction of the Engineer or designated representative. No additional compensation shall be paid for the removal and relaying of pipe required above. f � (13) Surplus Excavated Materials Excess material or material which cannot be made suitable for use in embankments will be declared surplus by the Engineer or designated representative and shall become the property of the Contractor to dispose of off site at a permitted fill site, without liability to the City or any individual. Such surplus material shall be removed from the Work site promptly following the completion of the portion of the utility involved. (14) Pipe Bedding Envelope Pipe shall be installed in a continuous bedding envelope of the type shown on the drawings or as described herein. The envelope shall extend the full trench width, to a depth of 6 inches below the pipe and shall rise at least to the top of storm water pipe and to 12 inches above water and wastewater pipe. (a) Standard Bedding Materials 94 Underground Piped Utilities USE/ PIPE Cement Natural or Pea Gravel PIPE BEDDING STONE MATERIAL Stabilized Mfd Sand Uncrushed Crushed Crushed Stone Backfill Gravel Gravel Stone Screenings WATER Welded Steel X X Service Tubing X X X 3/4"to 2-1/2" WATER and WASTEWATER Up to 15 Inch ID X X X X X X Larger Than 15 X X X X Inch ID STORMWATER Concrete X X X X X X Metal X X X X (b) General requirements and limitations governing bedding selection. (1) Crushed gravel or crushed stone shall not be used with polyethylene tubing or polyethylene film wrap. (2) Uncrushed gravel may be used with polyethylene film wrap in trenches up to 6 feet deep and in deeper trenches where ample trench width, a tremmie, or conditions will allow controlled placement of the gravel without damaging the polyethylene wrap. (3) Bedding shall be placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness and compacted thoroughly to provide uniform support for the pipe barrel and to fill all voids around the pipe. (4) Pea Gravel or bedding stone shall be used in blasted trenches. (c) Requirements to prevent particle migration. Bedding material shall be compatible with the materials in the trench bottom, walls and backfill so that particle migration from, into or through the bedding is minimized. The Engineer or Designated representative may require one or more of the following measures to minimize particle migration: use of impervious cut-off collars; selected bedding materials, such as pea gravel or bedding stone mixed with sand; filter fabric envelopment of the bedding; cement stabilized backfill; or other approved materials or methods. Measures to minimize particle migration will be shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer or designated representative, and, unless provisions for payment are provided in the contract documents, the cost of these measures shall be agreed by change order. The following limitations shall apply. 95 Underground Piped Utilities (1) Sand, alone, shall not be used in watercourses, in trenches where groundwater is present, or in trenches with grades greater than 5 percent. (2) Pea gravel or bedding stone, alone, shall not be used in the street right-of-way within 5 feet of subgrade elevation in trenches that are 3 feet or wider. (3) Pea gravel or bedding stone, alone, shall not be used where the trench bottom, sides, or backfill is composed of non-cementitious, silty or sandy soils having plasticity indices less than 20, as determined by the Engineer or designated representative. (15) Laying Pipe No pipe shall be installed in the trench until excavation has been completed, the bottom of the trench graded and the trench completed as indicated. Laying of corrugated metal pipes on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet end with the separate sections firmly joined together, with outside laps of circumferential joints pointing upstream and with longitudinal laps on the sides. Any metal in joints, which is not protected by galvanizing, shall be coated with suitable asphaltum paint. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without damaging the pipe or disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. Any pipe which is not in alignment or which shows any undue settlement after laying or damage, shall be taken up and re-laid without extra compensation. Multiple installations of corrugated pipe or arches shall be laid with the centerlines of individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated, clear distances of 2 feet between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes shall be maintained. No debris shall remain in the drainways or drainage structures. All recommendations of the manufacturer shall be carefully observed during handling and installation of each material. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials shall be delivered to the project by the manufacturer or agent and unloaded as directed by the Contractor. Each piece shall be placed facing the proper direction near to where it will be installed. The interior of all pipe, fittings and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage. Stockpiled materials shall be stacked so as to minimize entrance of foreign matter. The interior of all pipeline components shall be clean, dry and unobstructed when installed. Piping materials shall not be skidded or rolled against other pipe, etc. and under no circumstances shall pipe, fittings or other accessories be dropped or jolted. During handling and placement, materials shall be carefully observed and inspected and any damaged, defective or unsound materials shall be marked, 96 Underground Piped Utilities rejected and removed from the job site. Minor damage shall be marked and repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineering or designated representative. Joints, which have been placed, but not joined, backfilled, etc., shall be protected in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer or designated representative. (16) Assembling of Pipe Angular spacing of all joints shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations for the pipe and accessories being used. Side outlets shall be rotated so that the operating stems of valves shall be vertical when the valves are installed. Pressure pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing the direction of pipe installation. Pipe end bells shall be placed upgrade for all wastewater lines. Orientation marks, when applicable, shall be in their proper position before pipe is seated. Before joining any pipe, all foreign matter, lumps, blisters, excess coal tar coating, oil or grease shall be removed from the ends of each pipe and the pipe ends shall then be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry. Pipe ends shall be kept clean until joints are made. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. No debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. (17) Joints (a) Mortar (Storm Drain joints only) Pipe ends shall be clean, free of asphalt or other contaminants, which will inhibit the bond of the mortar to the pipe. The pipe ends shall be moistened immediately prior to placing the mortar in the joint. b) Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets (Storm Drain joints only) The pipe ends shall be clean and the joint material applied to the dry pipe. In cold weather, the joint material shall be heated to facilitate the seal of the joint. (c) 0-Ring and Push-on Joints Just before making a joint the ends of the pipe shall be clean, dry, free of any foreign matter, lump blisters, excessive coal tar coating and grease or oil and shall be wire brushed. The gasket and the inside surface of the bell shall be lubricated with a light film of soft vegetable soap compound (Flax Soap) to facilitate telescoping the joints. The rubber gasket if not factory installed shall be stretched uniformly as it is placed in the spigot groove to insure a uniform volume of rubber around the circumference of the groove. The spigot shall be centered in the bell, the pipe pushed home uniformly and brought into true alignment. Bedding material shall be placed and tamped against pipe to secure the joint. Care should be taken to prevent -- � dirt or foreign matter from entering the joint space. 97 Underground Piped Utilities (d) Bolted Joints All flanged, mechanical or other bolted joints shall be joined with nuts and bolts and be coated as indicated above in Iron Pipe. (18) Pressure Pipe Laying (a) Grout for Concrete Steel Cylinder Pipe (CSC) and Welded Steel Pipe Aggregate, cement, etc., shall be as indicated in "Mortar" herein. Grout shall be poured into the recess between the bell and spigot on the outside of the pipe and contained by a joint wrapper ("diaper") recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The wrapper shall have a minimum width of 7 inches for 30 inch and smaller and 9 inches for larger pipe, secured to the pipe by "Band Iron" steel straps. The grout shall be poured in one continuous operation in such manner that after shrinkage and curing the joint recess shall be completely filled. Mortar for the inside recess shall be of the consistency of plaster. The inside recess between the bell and spigot shall be filled with mortar after the pipe joint on either side of the recess has been backfilled and well tamped with no less than one pipe joint installed ahead of the pipe forming the recess. The mortar shall completely fill the recess and shall be trowelled and packed into place and finished off smooth with the inside of the pipe. The Contractor shall inspect the joint after the mortar has set and make repairs of any pockets, cracks or other defects caused by shrinkage to the satisfaction of the Engineer or designated representative. The inside surface shall be cleared of any mortar droppings, cement, water, slurry, etc., before they have become set and shall be cleared of any other foreign matter. The inside surface of the pipe shall be left clean and smooth. Pipe shall be handled at all times with wide non abrasive slings, belts or other equipment designed to prevent damage to the coating and all such equipment shall be kept in such repair that its continued use is not injurious to the coating. The use of tongs, bare pinch-bars, chain slings, rope slings without canvas covers, canvas or composition belt slings with protruding rivets, pipe hooks without proper padding or any other handling equipment, which the Engineer or designated representative deems to be injurious to the coating, shall not be permitted. The spacing of pipe supports required to handle the pipe shall be adequate to prevent cracking or damage to the cement mortar lining. (19) Placing Pipe in Tunnels and Encasements Piping installed as a carrier pipe in a tunnel, encasement pipe, etc., shall have uniform alignment, grade, bearing and conform to the reviewed Shop Drawings. All necessary casing spacers, bedding material, grout cradle or paving, bracing, blocking, etc., as stipulated by the Contract or as may be required to provide and 98 Underground Piped Utilities maintain the required pipe alignment and grade, shall be provided by the Contractor at no cost except as provided by the Bid Items. This shall include casing spacers acceptable to the City Round Rock attached to the carrier pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The insertion pushing forces shall not exceed the pipe manufacturer's recommendation. Such carrier piping shall have flexible bolted or gasketed push-on joints or Concrete Steel Cylinder pipe installed as follows: (a) 21 Inch Pipe and Smaller Prior to placing the pipe in the tunnel, the inside joint recess at the bell shall be buttered with cement mortar. After the joint is engaged, the excess mortar shall be smoothed by pulling a tight fitting swab through the joint. Cement mortar protection shall then be placed in the normal manner to the exterior of the joint and allowed to harden sufficiently to avoid dislodgment during installation. If time is of the essence, a quick setting compound may be used. (b) 24 Inch Pipe and Larger Each length of pipe shall be pushed into the tunnel as single units. A flexible mastic sealer shall be applied to the exterior of the joint prior to joint engagement. The surfaces receiving the mastic sealer shall be cleaned and primed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Sufficient quantities of the mastic sealer shall be applied to assure complete protection of all steel in the joint area. The interior of the joint shall be filled with cement mortar in the normal manner after the pipe is in its final position within the tunnel. (20) Temporary Pipe Plugs, Caps, Bulkheads and Trench Caps Temporary plugs, caps or plywood bulkheads shall be installed to close all openings of the pipe and fittings when pipeline construction is not in progress. All temporary end plugs or caps shall be secured to the pipe as provided under Item No. 507, "Bulkheads". Trench caps shall be reinforced Class D concrete as indicated. (21) Corrosion Control (a) Protective Covering Unless otherwise indicated, all flanges, nuts, bolts, threaded outlets and all other iron or steel components buried and in contact with earth or backfill shall be wrapped with 8-mil (minimum) polyethylene film meeting ANSI/AWWA C-105 to provide a continuous wrap. (22) Pipe Anchorage, Support and Protection Pressure pipeline tees, plugs, caps and bends 22-1/2 degrees and more and other bends as directed shall be securely anchored by suitable concrete thrust blocking or by approved metal harness. Unless otherwise indicated, on 24 inch or 99 Underground Piped Utilities larger piping, all bends greater than 11 1/4 degrees shall be anchored as described herein. Storm sewers on steep grades shall be lugged as indicated. (a) Concrete Thrust Blocking Concrete for use as reaction or thrust blocking shall be Class B conforming to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". Concrete blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. The area of bearing on the pipe and on the ground shall be as indicated or directed by the Engineer or designated representative. The blocking shall, unless otherwise indicated, be so placed that the pipe, fittings and joints will be accessible for repair. The trench shall be excavated at least 6 inches outside the outermost projections of the pipe or appurtenance and the trench walls shaped or undercut according to the detail Drawings or as required to provide adequate space and bearing area for the concrete. The pipe and fittings shall be adequately weighted and laterally braced to prevent floating, shifting or straining of the pipeline while the concrete is being placed and taking initial set. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sufficiency of such restraints. (b) Metal Thrust Restraint Fabricated thrust restraint systems such as those described below may be approved for use instead of concrete blocking. To obtain approval, the project Drawings must include sufficient drawings, notes, schedules, etc., to assure that the proposed restraints as installed will be adequate to prevent undesirable movement of the piping components. Such restraint systems may only be used where and as specifically detailed and scheduled on approved Project Drawings. 1. Thrust Harness A metal thrust harness of tie rods, pipe clamps or lugs, turnbuckles, etc., may be approved. All carbon steel components of such systems, including nuts and washers, shall be hot-dip galvanized; all other members shall be cast ductile iron. After installation, the entire assembly shall be wrapped with 8-mil polyethylene film, overlapped and taped in place with duct tape to form a continuous protective wrap. 2. Restrained Joints Piping or fitting systems utilizing integral mechanically restrained joints may be approved. All components of such systems shall be standard manufactured products fabricated from cast ductile iron, hot-dip galvanized steel, brass or other corrosion resistant materials and the entire assembly shall be protected with a continuous film wrap as described for 1. above. 100 Underground Piped Utilities Location, configuration and description of such products shall be specifically detailed on the Drawings. (Add-on attachments such as retainer glands, all-thread rods, etc., are not acceptable.) (c) Concrete Encasement, Cradles, Caps and Seals When trench foundation is excessively wet or unstable or installation of water or wastewater pipe will result in less than 30 inches of cover, Contractor shall notify the Engineer or designated representative. The Engineer or designated representative may require Contractor to install a concrete seal, cradle, cap, encasement or other appropriate action. All concrete cap, etc., shall be continuous and begin and end as specified. Concrete cap, cradle and encasement shall conform to the Drawings. The pipe shall be well secured to prevent shifting or flotation while the concrete is being placed. (d) Anchorage Bulkheads Concrete bulkheads keyed into the undisturbed earth shall be placed as indicated to support and anchor the pipe and/or backfill against end thrust, slippage on slopes, etc. Concrete material and placement shall be Class A, Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". (e) Trench Caps, Concrete Rip-Rap and Shaped Retards Where called for by the Contract or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative, concrete trench caps, concrete rip-rap and/or shaped retards shall be placed as detailed by the Drawings as protection against erosion. Concrete material and placement shall be Class B, Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures". (23) Wastewater Connections (a) Connections to Mains 12 Inches and Smaller All branch connections of new main lines shall be made by use of manholes. Service stubs shall be installed as indicated. Minimum grade shall be 1 percent downward to main and minimum cover shall be 4 1/2 feet at the curb. Standard plugs shall be installed in the dead end before backfilling. Where a service connection to a main 12 inches or smaller is indicated, a sanitary tee or double wye shall be installed. Where a service connection to a main 15 inches or larger is indicated, a field tap may be made with the pipes installed crown to crown. The tap should be made conforming to the pipe manufacturer's recommendations with the Engineer or designated representative's approval. Where not otherwise indicated, (wastewater) service connections shall be installed so that the outlet is at an angle of not more than 45 degrees .- above horizontal at the main line. ioi Underground Piped Utilities (b) Connections to the Existing System Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer or designated representative, all connections made to existing mains shall be made at manholes with the crown of the inlet pipe installed at the same elevation as the crown of the existing pipe. Service stubs installed on the existing system shall be installed by use of tapping saddles unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or designated representative. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent material from depositing in the existing pipe as the taps are being made. When connections to existing mains are made, a temporary plug approved by the Engineer or designated representative must be installed downstream in the manhole to prevent water and debris from entering the existing system before Final Completion. These plugs shall be removed after the castings are adjusted to finish grade or prior to Final Completion. (24) Water System Connections The Contractor shall, at his expense, make all necessary connections of new piping or accessories to the existing water system. To minimize any inconvenience from outages, the Contractor shall schedule all such connections in advance and such schedule must be approved by the Engineer or designated representative before beginning any Work. .- . (a) Shutoffs The City will make all shutoffs on existing water mains. The Contractor shall be required to notify the Engineer or designated representative on the job at least 72 hours prior to the desired time for any shutoff. The Engineer or designated representative will notify any affected utility customers at least 24 hours prior to the shutoff. The Water Utility will make the shutoff after ensuring that all appropriate measures have been taken to protect the water system, customers and employees. The City will operate all valves to fill existing mains. Where a newly constructed main has not been placed in service and has only one connection to the public water supply, the Contractor may operate one valve to fill the main after approval has been obtained from the Water Utility. The operation of the valve is to be conducted under the immediate supervision of the Engineer or designated representative. Water for the Work shall be metered and furnished by the Contractor in accordance with Section 01500 of the Standard Contract Documents. (b) Wet Connections to Existing Water System The Contractor shall make all wet connections called for by the Contract or required to complete the Work. Two connections to an existing line performed during the same shutout, at the same time and at a distance less than 50 linear feet apart, will be considered one wet connection. Two connections to an existing line performed during the same shutout, at the 102 Underground Piped Utilities same time and at a distance equal to, or greater than 50 linear feet will be considered two wet connections. A wet connection shall include draining and cutting into existing piping and connecting a new pipeline or other extension into the existing pressure piping, forming an addition to the water transmission and distribution network. The Contract price for wet connections shall be full payment for all necessary shutoffs, excavation, removing plugs and fittings, pumping water to drain the lines, cutting in new fittings, blocking and anchoring piping, bedding and backfihling, placing the lines and service and all site cleanup. No water containing detectable amounts of chlorine may be drained, released or discharged until specific planning and appropriate preparations to handle, dilute and dispose of such chlorinated water are approved in advance by the City and the disposal operations will be witnessed by an authorized representative from the City. (c) Pressure Taps to Existing Water System The Contractor shall make all pressure taps called for by the Contract Documents or required to complete the Work. A pressure tap shall consist of connecting new piping to the existing water system by drilling into the existing pipe while it is carrying water under normal pressure without taking the existing piping out of service. Unless otherwise provided by the Contract, the Contractor shall, at his expense, perform all necessary excavation, furnish and install the tapping sleeve, valve and accessories, provide the tapping machine, drill the tap and shall block, anchor and backfill the piping, valve and all accessories, place the new piping in service and perform all site cleanup. When the City makes the tap, City forces are not obligated or expected to perform any Work except to provide tapping machine and drill the actual hole. If City crews are to make the tap, fiscal arrangements must be made in advance at the Taps Office, Waller Creek Center, 625 East 10th Street. If a private Contractor makes the tap, a W-WW Inspector must be present. "Size on size" taps will not be permitted, unless made by use of an approved full circle gasket tapping sleeve. Concrete blocking shall be placed behind and under all tap sleeves 24 hours prior to making the wet tap. (d) Service Connections Service connection taps into PVC or AC pipe or into CI or DI pipe 12 inches or smaller shall be made using either a service clamp or saddle or a tapping sleeve as recommended by the pipe manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer or designated representative. Direct tapping of these pipes will not be permitted. All water service connections shall be installed so that the outlet is at an angle of not more than 45 degrees above horizontal at the main line. 103 Underground Piped Utilities Precautions should be taken to ensure that the tapping saddle or sleeve is placed on the pipe straight to prevent any binding or deformation of the PVC pipe. The mounting chain or U-bolt strap must be tight. Tapping shall be performed with a sharp shell type cutter so designed that it will smoothly penetrate heavy walled PVC DR14 and 200 psi AC and will retain and extract the coupon from the pipe. (25) Backfihling (a) General Special emphasis is placed upon the need to obtain uniform density throughout the backfill material. The maximum lift of backfill shall be determined by the compaction equipment selected and in no case shall it exceed 18 inches, loose measurement. No heavy equipment, which might damage pipe, will be allowed over the pipe until sufficient cover has been placed and compacted. All internal pipe bracing installed or recommended by the manufacturer shall be kept in place until the pipe bedding and trench backfill have been completed over the braced pipe section. Testing of the completed backfill in streets and under and around structures shall meet the specified density requirements. Initial testing shall not be at Contractor's expense and shall conform to the "General Conditions." (b) General Corrugated Metal Pipe After the corrugated metal pipe structure has been completely assembled on the proper line and grade and headwalls constructed where indicated; selected material free from rocks over 8 inches in size from excavation or borrow, as approved by the Engineer or designated representative, shall be placed along both sides of the completed structures equally, in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth (loose measurement), sprinkled if required and thoroughly compacted between adjacent structures and between the structures and the sides of the trench. Backfill material shall be compacted to the same density requirements as indicated for the adjoining sections of embankment in accordance with the governing specifications thereof. Above the 3/4 point of the structure, the fill shall be placed uniformly on each side of the pipe in layers not to exceed 12 inches, loose measure. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material, until a minimum of 12 inches of cover is obtained over the crown of the pipe, an inspection will be made of the inside periphery of the corrugated metal structure to determine if any floating, local or unequal deformation has occurred as a result of improper construction methods. (c) Backfill Materials The Engineer or designated representative may approve any of the following well graded materials: 104 Underground Piped Utilities 1. Select trench material 2. Sand 3. Crushed rock cuttings 4. Rock cuttings 5. Foundation Rock 6. Blasted material with fines and rock 7. Cement stabilized material 8. Borrow Within the 100-year flood plain, sand will not be permitted for backfilling. The Engineer or designated representative will approve the topsoil for areas to be seeded or sodded. (d) Backfill in Street Right of Way Placement of backfill under existing or future pavement structures and within 2 feet of any structures shall be compacted to the required density using any method, type and size of equipment, which will give the required compaction without damaging the pipe or bedding. Placement of backfill greater than 2 feet beyond structures in Right of Way shall be conform to (g) below. The depth of layers, prior to compaction, shall depend upon the type of sprinkling and compacting equipment used and the test results thereby obtained. Prior to and in conjunction with the compaction operation, each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the required density and shall be kept level to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. Testing for density shall be in accordance with Test Method Tex-1 I 4-E and Test Method Tex-1 I 5-E. Each layer of backfill must provide the density as required herein. Swelling soils (soils with plasticity index of 20 or more) shall be sprinkled as required to provide not less than optimum moisture nor more than 2 percent over optimum moisture content and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than 95 percent nor more than 102 percent of the density as determined in accordance with Test Method Tex-1 I 4-E. Non-swelling soils (soils with plasticity index less than 20) shall be sprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than 95 percent of the density as determined in accordance with Test Method Tex-1 I 4-E. After each layer of backfill is complete, tests may be made by the Engineer or designated representative. If the material fails to meet the density indicated, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the indicated compaction and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent Work to obtain indicated density. At any time, the Engineer or designated representative may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the backfill layers. All irregularities, depressions, weak or soft spots that develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. 105 Underground Piped Utilities Should the backfill, due to any reason, lose the required stability, density or finish before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent backfill layer or granular material. Excessive loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the subgrade soil moisture content is more than 4 percent below the optimum of compaction ratio density. Backfill shall be placed from the top of the bedding material to the existing grade, base course, subgrade or as indicated. The remainder of the street backfill shall be Flexible Base, Concrete or Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete as indicated or to replaced in kind to the surface removed to construct the pipe. (e) Backfill in County Street or State Highway Right of Way All Work within the right of way shall meet the requirements of (d) above, as a minimum and shall meet the requirements of the permit issued by the County when their requirements are more stringent. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the appropriate TxDOT office or County Commissioner's Precinct Office and for coordinating his activities with the operating procedures in effect for utility cut permits and pavement repair under their jurisdiction. Approval for all completed Work in the State or County right of way shall be obtained from the appropriate Official prior to final payment by the Owner. (f) Backfillin Railroad Right of Way All Work within the railroad right of way shall meet the requirements of (d) above, as a minimum and shall meet the requirements of the permit issued by the Railroad Owner when their requirements are more stringent. Approval for all completed Work in the railroad right of way shall be obtained from the Railroad prior to Final Completion. (g) Backfill in Easements Where not otherwise indicated, Contractor may select whatever methods and procedures may be necessary to restore entire Work area to a safe, useful and geologically stable condition with a minimum density of 85 percent or a density superior to that prior to construction. In and near flood plain of all streams and watercourses, under or adjacent to utilities, structures, etc. all backfill shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent conforming to TxDOT Test Method Tex-114-E, unless otherwise directed by Engineer or designated representative. All soil areas disturbed by construction shall be covered with top soil and seeded conforming to Item No. 604, "Seeding for Erosion Control". All turf, drainways and drainage structures shall be constructed or replaced to their original condition or better. No debris shall remain in the drainways or drainage structures. 106 Underground Piped Utilities (26) Quality Testing for Installed Pipe (a) Wastewater Pipe Acceptance Testing After construction is complete, Engineer or designated representative will determine whether the pipeline is to be tested for infiltration, exfiltration or by the low-pressure air test method. In addition, plastic pipe 18 inches and larger in diameter shall be deflection tested. Wastewater pipe installed in the City of Round Rock and its ETJ areas shall be tested for exfiltration or infiltration as described below in "Exfiltration Test" and "Infiltration Test" or by acceptable low pressure air test, as described below. At the conclusion of either test series, the Work shall be further tested for pipeline settlement and also for deflection as described below. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making proper repairs to those elements, which do not pass these test requirements. (b) Exfiltration Test Water for the Work shall be metered and furnished by the Contractor in accordance with Section 01500 of the Standard Contract Documents. The pipeline shall be completely filled with water for its complete length or by sections as determined by the Engineer or designated representative. If tested for its complete length, the maximum head at any point shall not exceed 25 feet unless otherwise indicated. If tested in sections, the manholes in the test section shall be completely filled with water. After the pipeline has been filled and allowed to stand for 24 hours, the amount of exfiltration shall be calculated. Any amount in excess of 200 gallons per inch of inside pipe diameter per mile per day shall be cause for rejection. For portions of lines located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone or within any recharge area or recharge feature within the Edwards Aquifer Transition Zone, the minimum head during testing shall not be less than 2 feet and the leakage rate shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch of inside pipe diameter per mile per day. This rate shall apply for the entire portion of the line extending up to the first manhole located outside the recharge zone, recharge area, or recharge features indicated on Drawings and shall also be applicable for any recharge areas or recharge features which may be identified during construction. For construction within the 25-year flood plain, the exfiltration rate shall not exceed 10 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at the same minimum test head. (c) Infiltration Test When the pipe placed in easements is completed, the upper portion of the trench backfill shall be removed to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the finished surface and width equal to the original trench width. The trench shall then be flooded with water until it is completely saturated and water stands in the ditch a minimum of 12 inches deep. In cases of steep terrain, earthen dikes shall be used to assure that water will stand 107 Underground Piped Utilities over the trench. After it is apparent that the trench is completely saturated, the main shall then be inspected with closed-circuit television for infiltration. Any section of the main or any service stub that indicates infiltration above the maximum quantity specified shall be cause for rejection. This procedure shall not be used for pipes installed in areas where the Plasticity Index (P.I.) of the surrounding material is 20 or higher or where the backfill material has a P.I. of 20 or more. For portions of lines located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone or within any recharge area or recharge feature within the Edwards Aquifer Transition Zone, the total infiltration as determined by water test, must be at a rate not greater than 50 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of two feet. This rate shall apply for the entire portion of the line extending up to the first manhole located outside the recharge zone, recharge area, or recharge features indicated on Drawings and shall also be applicable for any recharge areas or recharge features which may be identified during construction. For construction within the 25-year flood plain, the infiltration rate shall not exceed 10 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at the same minimum test head. If the quantity of infiltration exceeds the maximum quantity specified, �- - remedial action must be undertaken in order to reduce the infiltration to an amount within the limits specified. (d) Pipeline Settlement Test During the infiltration test or after the exfiltration test, the pipe will be TV inspected for possible settlement. When air testing has been used, water shall be flowed into the pipe to permit meaningful observations. Any pipe settlement which causes excessive ponding of water in the pipe shall be cause for rejection. Excessive ponding shall be defined as a golf ball (1- 5/8" dia.) submerged at any point along the line. (e) Low Pressure Air Test of Plastic Gravity Flow Wastewater Lines (1) General Wastewater lines, at the discretion of the Engineer or designated representative, shall be air tested between manholes. Backfilling to grade shall be completed before the test and all laterals and stubs shall be capped or plugged by the Contractor so as not to allow air losses, which could cause an erroneous, test result. Manholes shall be plugged so they are isolated from the pipe and cannot be included in the test. All plugs used to close the sewer for the air test shall be capable of resisting the internal pressures and must be securely braced. Place all air testing equipment above ground and allow no one to enter a manhole or trench where a plugged sewer is under pressure. 108 Underground Piped Utilities Release all pressure before the plugs are removed. The testing equipment used must include a pressure relief device designed to relieve pressure in the sewer under test at 10 psi or less and must allow continuous monitoring of the test pressures in order to avoid excessive pressure. Use care to avoid the flooding of the air inlet by infiltrated ground water. (Inject the air at the upper plug if possible.) Use only qualified personnel to conduct the test. (2) Ground Water Since the presence of ground water will affect the test results, test holes shall be dug to the pipe zone at intervals of not more than 100 feet and the average height of ground water above the pipe (if any) shall be determined before starting the test. (3) Test Procedure The Engineer or designated representative may, at any time, require a calibration check of the instrumentation used. Use a pressure gauge having minimum divisions of 0.10 psi and an accuracy of 0.0625 psi. (One ounce per square inch.) All air used shall pass through a single control panel. Clean the sewer to be tested and remove all debris where indicated. Wet the sewer prior to testing. The average back pressure of any groundwater shall be determined (0.433 psi)for each foot of average water depth (if any) above the sewer. Add air slowly to the section of sewer being tested until the internal air pressure is raised to 4.0 psig greater than the average back pressure of any ground water that may submerge the pipe. After the internal test pressure is reached, allow at least 2 minutes for the air temperature to stabilize, adding only the amount of air required to maintain pressure. After the temperature stabilization period, disconnect the air supply. Determine and record the time in seconds that is required for the internal air pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig greater than the average backpressure of any ground water that may submerge the pipe. Compare the time recorded with the specification time for the size and length of pipe as given in the following table: 109 Underground Piped Utilities Table For Low Pressure Air Testing of Plastic Pipe: Minimum Specified Time Required For 1.0 psig Pressure Drop For Size and Length of Pipe Indicated Diameter of Specification Time (min: sec)for length shown Pipe, (in.) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 4 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 6 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:24 8 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 10 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48 12 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38 15 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04 18 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41 21 19:50 26:10 34:54 43:37 52:21 61:00 69:48 78:31 24 22:47 34:11 45:34 56:58 68:22 79:46 91:10 102:33 27 28:51 43:16 57:41 72:07 86:32 100:57 115:22 129:48 30 35:37 53:25 71:13 89:02 106:50 124:38 142:26 160:15 33 43:05 64:38 86:10 107:43 129:16 150:43 172:21 193:53 36 51:17 76:55 102:34 128:12 153:50 179:29 205:07 230:46 NOTES: 1. Specification times are as given in UNI-B-6 RECOMMENDED .- - . PRACTICE FOR LOW-PRESSURE TESTING OF INSTALLED PIPE -- by Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association, 2655 Villa Creek Dr., Ste. 155, Dallas Texas 75234. 2. Pipe Sizes acceptable by City of Round Rock are as given in the Water and Wastewater Utility's Standard Products List (SPL's) VVW-227 and WW-227A. Any drop in pressure, from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig (adjusted for groundwater level), in a time less than that required by the above table shall be cause for rejection. When the line tested includes more than one size pipe, the minimum time shall be that given for the largest size pipe included. Test procedure for wastewater pipe located in the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone or identified recharge areas or recharge features within the Edwards Aquifer Transition Zone: Low-pressure air tests must conform to the procedure described in ASTM C-924 or other equivalent procedures. For safety reasons, air testing of pipe sections will be limited to line sizes of 36 inches inside diameter or less. Lines that are 36 inches or larger inside diameter may be air tested at each joint. The minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge during a joint test, regardless of pipe size, shall be twenty (20) seconds. For sections of pipe less than 36-inch inside diameter, the minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge must be computed by the following equation: 110 Underground Piped Utilities T = 0.0850 (D)(K)/(Q), where T = time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch gauge in seconds; K = 0.000419(D)(L), but not less than 1.0 D = nominal inside diameter in inches; L = length of line of same pipe size in feet; and Q = rate of loss, assume 0.0015 cubic feet per minute per square foot (ft3/min/ft sq) of internal surface area. Any drop in pressure, from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, in a time less than that required by the above formula shall be cause for rejection. When the line tested includes more than one size of pipe, the minimum time shall be that calculated for the largest size pipe included. Manholes must be tested separately and independently. All manholes must be hydrostatically tested with a maximum loss allowance of 0.025 gallon per foot diameter per foot of head per hour. When lines are air tested, manholes are to be tested separately by exfiltration or vacuum method (see Standard Specification Item No,, 506, "Manholes"). (f) Deflection Test Deflection tests shall be performed by the Contractor on all flexible and semi-rigid wastewater pipes. The tests shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. Testing for in-place deflection shall be with a pipe mandrel or rigid ball sized at 95% of the inside diameter of the pipe. A second test of flexible and semi-rigid wastewater pipes 18 inch size and larger, also with a pipe mandrel or ball sized at 95% of the inside diameter of the pipe, shall be conducted by the Contractor 30 days prior to expiration of his warranty on the Work. Contractor shall submit his proposed pipe mandrels or testing balls to the Engineer or his designated representative for concurrence prior to testing the line. Test(s) must be performed without mechanical pulling devices and must be witnessed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Any deficiencies noted shall be corrected by the Contractor and the test(s) shall be redone. (27) Pressure Pipe Hydrostatic Testing After the pipe has been installed and backfihled and all service laterals, fire hydrants and other appurtenances installed and connected, a pressure test, followed by a leakage test, will be conducted by the City. The City will furnish the pump and gauges for the tests. The Contractor shall be present and shall furnish all necessary assistance for conducting the tests. The specified test pressures will be based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test. Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. 111 Underground Piped Utilities If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall install corporation cocks at such points. All drain hydrant and fire hydrant leads, with the main 6-inch gate valve open, the hydrant valve seats closed and nozzle caps open, shall be included in the test. (a) Pressure Test The entire project or each valved section shall be tested, at a pressure of 200 psi for a sufficient period (approximately 10 minutes) to discover all leaking or defective materials. Repairs shall be made by the Contractor to correct any leaking or defective materials. (b) Pressure Pipe Leakage Test A leakage test will follow the pressure test and be conducted on the entire project or each valved section. The leakage test shall be at 150 psi for at least 1 hour. (1) Allowable Leakage Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into any test section of pipe to maintain the specified leakage test pressure (see above, "Pressure Pipe Leakage Test") after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has been filled with water. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage exceeds 25 gallons/24 hours/mile of pipe/inch nominal pipe diameter. ( 25 gDd ) (in. - mi.) (2) Location and Correction of Leakage If such testing discloses leakage in excess of this specified allowable, the Contractor, at his expense, shall locate and correct all defects in the pipeline until the leakage is within the indicated allowance. All visible leakage in pipe shall also be corrected by Contractor at his own expense. (28) Service Charges for Testing Initial testing performed by City forces for the Contractor will be at the City's expense. Retesting, by City forces, of Contractor's work that fails initial testing will be at the Contractor's expense. The City's charge for retests will be $265.00, plus $50.00 for each hour over four hours. On City-funded projects, the charges incurred by the City for retesting will be deducted from funds due the Contractor. On non-City-funded projects, the charges incurred by the City for retesting will be billed to the Contractor. The City will withhold acceptance of the Contractor's work until the Contractor has paid the City for the retesting costs. 112 Underground Piped Utilities (29) Disinfection of Potable Water Lines (a) Preventing Contamination The Contractor shall protect all piping materials from contamination during storage, handling and installation. Prior to disinfection, the pipeline interior shall be clean, dry and unobstructed. All openings in the pipeline shall be closed with watertight plugs when pipe laying is stopped at the close of the days work. (b) Cleaning Prior to disinfection the Contractor shall clean the pipeline to remove foreign matter. For pipelines 16" in diameter or smaller, cleaning shall consist of flushing the pipeline. For pipelines greater than 16" in diameter, cleaning shall be performed by operating hydrants and blow-offs located at low points in the pipeline, or by mechanical means (sweeping or pigging. Water for the Work shall be metered and furnished by the Contractor in accordance with Section 01500 of the Standard Contract Documents. (c) Procedure and Dosage The Contractor, at its expense, will supply the test gauges and the Sodium Hypochlorite conforming to ANSI/AWWA B300, which contains approximately 5 percent to fifteen percent available chlorine, and will submit for approval a written plan for the disinfection process. Calcium Hypochlorite conforming to ANSI/AWWA B300, which contains approximately 65 percent available chlorine by weight, may be used in granular form or in 5 g tablets for 16" diameter or smaller lines, if it is included as part of the written plan of disinfection that is approved by the City of Round Rock. The Contractor, at its expense, shall provide all other equipment, supplies and the necessary labor to perform the disinfection under the general supervision of the City. One connection to the existing system will be allowed with a valve arranged to prevent the strong disinfecting dosage from flowing back into the existing water supply piping. The valve shall be kept closed and locked in a valve box with the lid painted red. No other connection shall be made until the disinfection of the new line is complete and the water samples have met the established criteria. The valve shall remain closed at all times except when filling or flushing the line and must be manned during these operations. Backflow prevention in the form of a reduced pressure backflow assembly must be provided if the valve is left unattended. The new pipeline shall be filled completely with disinfecting solution by feeding the concentrated chlorine and approved water from the existing system uniformly into the new piping in such proportions that every part of the line has a minimum concentration of 50 mg/liter available chlorine. The disinfecting solution shall be retained in the piping for at least 24 hours and all valves, hydrants, services, stubs, etc. shall be operated so 113 Underground Piped Utilities as to disinfect all their parts. After this retention period, the water shall contain no less than 25 mg/liter chlorine throughout the treated section of the pipeline. For pipelines larger than 16" in diameter, the Contractor may use the AWWA C-651 "Slug Method" for disinfecting the pipeline. Chlorine shall be fed at a constant rate and at a sufficient concentration at one end of the pipeline to develop a slug of chlorinated water having not less than 100 mg/liter of free chlorine. The Contractor shall move the slug through the main so that all interior surfaces are exposed to the slug for at least three (3) hours. The chlorine concentration in the slug shall be measured as it moves through the pipeline. If the chlorine concentration drops below 50 mg/liter, the Contractor shall stop the slug and feed additional chlorine to the head of the slug to restore the chlorine concentration to at least 100 mg/liter before proceeding. As the slug flows past fittings and valves, related valves and hydrants shall be operated so as to disinfect appurtenances and pipe branches. Unless otherwise indicated, all quantities specified herein refer to measurements required by the testing procedures included in the current edition of"Standard Methods". The chlorine concentration at each step in the disinfection procedure shall be verified by chlorine residual determinations. (d) Final Flushing The heavily chlorinated water shall then be carefully flushed from the potable water line until the chlorine concentration is no higher than the residual generally prevailing in the existing distribution system. Proper planning and appropriate preparations in handling, diluting, if necessary, and disposing of this strong chlorine solution is necessary to insure that there is no injury or damage to the public, the water system or the environment. The plans and preparations of the Contractor must be approved by the City before flushing of the line may begin. Additionally the flushing must be witnessed by an authorized representative of the City. Approval for discharge of the diluted chlorine water or heavily chlorinated water into the wastewater system must be obtained from the Water and Wastewater Utility Department. The line flushing operations shall be regulated by the Contractor so as not to overload the wastewater system or cause damage to the odor feed systems at the lift stations. The City shall designate its own representative to oversee the work. Daily notice of line discharging must be reported to the Water and Wastewater Utility Dispatch office. (e) Bacteriological Testing After final flushing of the strong disinfecting solution, two (2) sets of water samples from the line, that are taken at least twenty-four (24) hours apart, will be tested for bacteriological quality by the City and must be found free 114 Underground Piped Utilities of coliform organisms before the pipeline may be placed in service. Each set shall consist of one (1) sample that is drawn from the end of the main and additional samples that are collected at intervals of not more than 1000 feet along the pipeline. All stubs shall be tested before connections are made to existing systems. The Contractor, at its expense, shall install sufficient sampling taps at proper locations along the pipeline. Each sampling tap shall consist of a standard corporation cock installed in the line and extended with a copper tubing gooseneck assembly. After samples have been collected, the gooseneck assembly may be removed and retained for future use. Samples for bacteriological analysis will only be collected from suitable sampling taps in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulfate. Samples shall not be drawn from hoses or unregulated sources. The City, at its expense, will furnish the sterile sample bottles and may, at its discretion, collect the test samples with City personnel. If the initial disinfection fails to produce acceptable sample test results, the disinfection procedure shall be repeated at the Contractor's expense. Before the piping may be placed in service, two (2) consecutive sets of acceptable test results must be obtained. An acceptable test sample is one in which: (1) the chlorine level is similar to the level of the existing distribution system; (2) there is no free chlorine and (3) total coliform organisms are absent. An invalid sample is one, which has excessive free chlorine, silt or non-coliform growth as defined in the current issue of the "Standards Methods." If unacceptable sample results are obtained for any pipe, the Contractor may, with the concurrence of the Inspector, for one time only flush the lines and then collect a second series of test samples for testing by the City. After this flushing sequence is completed, any pipe with one or more failed samples must be disinfected again in accordance with the approved disinfection procedure followed by appropriate sampling and testing of the water. The City of Round Rock Water Quality Laboratory will notify the assigned City of Round Rock Inspector in writing of all test results. The Inspector will subsequently notify the Contractor of all test results. The Water Quality Laboratory will not release test results directly to the Contractor. (30) Cleanup and Restoration It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to keep the construction site neat, clean and orderly at all times. Cleanup shall be vigorous and continuous to minimize traffic hazards or obstructions along the streets and to driveways. Trenching, backfill, pavement repair (as necessary), and cleanup shall be coordinated as directed by the City. The Engineer or designated representative will regulate the amount of open ditch and may halt additional trenching if cleanup is not adequate to allow for orderly traffic flow and access. Materials at the site shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner so as not to 115 Underground Piped Utilities obstruct pedestrian or vehicular traffic. All damaged material shall be removed from the construction site immediately and disposed of in a proper manner. All surplus excavated materials become the property of the Contractor for disposal at his expense. After trenching, the Contractor shall immediately remove all excavated materials unsuitable for or in excess of, backfill requirements. Immediately following the pipe laying Work as it progresses, the Contractor shall backfill, grade and compact all excavations as provided elsewhere and shall immediately clean up and remove all unused soil, waste and debris and restore all surfaces and improvements to a condition equal or superior to that before construction began and to an appearance which complements the surroundings. The Contractor shall grade and dress the top 6 inches of earth surfaces with soil or other material similar and equal to the surrounding, fill and smooth any visible tracks or ruts, replace and re-establish all damaged or disturbed turf or other vegetation and otherwise make every effort to encourage the return of the entire surface and all improvements to a pleasant appearance and useful condition appropriate and complementary to the surroundings and equal or similar to that before construction began. Permanent pavement replacement, if necessary, shall begin immediately after all testing of each segment of piping is satisfactorily completed. 510.4 Measurement Pipe will be measured by the linear foot for the various types, sizes and classes. Parallel lines will be measured individually. Where a line ties into an existing system, the length of the new line will be measured from the visible end of the existing system at the completed joint. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of water and wastewater lines will be measured along pipe horizontal centerline stationing through fittings, valves, manholes, and other appurtenances. Unless otherwise provided, ductile fitting 24-inch and smaller will be measured by the ton and paid for in accordance with the schedule in Standard Product List WW-27C. Unless otherwise provided, fittings larger than 24 inch sizes will be subsidiary to the pipe. Steel cylinder concrete pipe fittings and welded steel pipe fittings will not be measured separately. These will be subsidiary to the bid item Pipe. Stormwater pipe will be measured along the slope of the pipe. Where drainage pipe ties into inlets, headwalls, catch basins, manholes, junction boxes or other structures that length of pipe tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement but no other portion of the structure length or width will be so included. Excavation and backfill, when included as pipe installation will not be measured as such but shall be included in the unit price bid for constructing pipe and measured as pipe complete in place including excavation and backfill. When pay items are provided for the other components of the system, measurement will be made as addressed hereunder. 116 Underground Piped Utilities 510.5 Payment Payment for pipe, measured as prescribed above, will be made at the unit price bid per linear foot for the various sizes of pipe, of the materials and type indicated, unless unstable material is encountered or trench excavation and backfill is bid as a separate item. The concrete seal, foundation rock or coarse aggregate when used as directed in unstable material will be paid for at the unit price bid per cubic yard, which shall be full payment for all excavation and removal of unsuitable material and furnishing, placing and compacting the foundation rock, coarse aggregate or other approved material all complete in place. Excavation and backfill, when included as a separate pay item, will be paid for by Pay Item No. 510-E or 510-F. (1) Pipe Payment for pipe, measured as prescribed above, will be made at the unit price bid per linear foot complete-in-place as designed and represented in the Drawings and other Contract documents. Unless otherwise provided herein, as separate pay item(s), subsidiary items to the bid price per linear foot of pipe shall include the following: a. clearing b. constructing any necessary embankment c. excavation d. disposal of surplus or unusable excavated material e. furnishing, hauling and placing pipe f. fittings larger than 24 inch g. field constructed joints, collars, temporary plugs, caps or bulkheads h. all necessary lugs, rods or braces i. pipe coatings and protection j. connections to existing systems or structures, concrete blocking and thrust blocks and restrained joints k. preparing, shaping, pumping for dewatering, and shoring of trenches I. bedding materials m. backfill materials n. hauling, placing and preparing bedding materials o. particle migration measures P. hauling, moving, placing and compacting backfill materials q. temporary and permanent pavement repairs and maintenance r. temporary and permanent removal and replacement of pavement, curb, drainage structures, driveways, sidewalks and any other improvements damaged or removed during construction s. cleanup t. vertical stack on deep wastewater services u. all other incidentals necessary to complete the pipe installation as indicated. 117 Underground Piped Utilities No separate payment will be made for thrust restraint measures. Steel cylinder concrete pipe fittings and welded steel pipe fittings will not be paid for separately. These will be subsidiary to the bid item Pipe. (2) Concrete Cradles and Seals When called for in the Bid, concrete cradles and seals will be paid for at the unit Contract price bid per linear foot for the size of pipe specified, complete in place. (3) Concrete Retards When called for in the Bid, Concrete retards will be paid under Item No. 593, Concrete Retards." (4) Boring, Jacking and Tunneling When called for in the Bid, boring, jacking and tunneling will be paid under Item 501, "Jacking or Boring Pipe" or Item 502, "Tunneling". (5) Wet Connections to Water Mains When called for in the bid, wet connections will be paid at the unit price bid per each, complete in place, according to the size of the main that is in service and shall be full compensation for all Work required to make the connection and place the pipe in service. (See subsection 510.3 `Construction Methods part (24) (b) 'Wet Connections to Existing Water System'). (6) Fittings Cast iron and ductile iron fittings of the class indicated, furnished in accordance with these specifications will be paid for at the unit price bid per ton, complete in place, according to scheduled weights for mechanical joint fittings furnished, including glands, bolts and gaskets, as published in the following standards: AWWA C-153 for all fittings 4-inch through-24 inch sizes, regardless of whether AWWA C-I 10 or AWWA C-I 53 fittings are furnished or the type of end connections supplied. AWWA C-I 10 for all fittings larger than 24-inch size. Steel cylinder concrete pipe fittings and welded steel pipe fittings will not be paid for separately. The Contractor shall include these in his bid for pipe. (7) Concrete Trench Cap and Encasement Where the distance between the top of the concrete encasement and the top of the trench cap is less than 36 inches, the concrete cap and encasement shall be poured as one unit and paid for under this bid item at the Contract price bid per linear foot. When the distance above is greater than 36 inches or when the trench cap is placed separately, the trench cap shall be paid for as a separate item, per linear foot, complete in place. 118 Underground Piped Utilities (8) Cement-Stabilized Backfill Cement-stabilized backfill will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot and shall be full payment to the Contractor for furnishing and installing the required material, mixed, placed and cured complete in place. (9) Concrete Encasement When called for in the Bid, Concrete Pipe Encasement will be paid under Item No. 505, "Encasement and Encasement Pipe". (10) Pressure Taps Pressure taps will be paid for at the unit price bid, complete in place, according to the size tap made and the size main tapped and shall be full payment for furnishing all necessary materials, including tapping sleeve and valve, making the tap, testing and placing the connection in service. (11) Trench Safety Systems When called for in Bid, Trench Safety Systems shall conform to Item No. 509, "Trench Safety Systems". (12) In-Place Slip lining with or without In-Place Pipe Destruction/Replacement As called for in the corresponding bid items, pipe slip lining with or without in- place pipe destruction/replacement will be paid for at the Contract price per linear _--� foot for the specified liner and pipe size and type pipe, at all depths, complete in place. Installation of new services, or reconnection of existing services, to the liner will be paid for at the Contract price per each for the specified size and type of service, at all depths, complete in place. (13) Cured Resin Pipe Lining When called for in the bid, cured resin pipe lining will be paid for per linear foot, for the size and type of pipe lined, at all depths, complete in place including all equipment set-ups, video inspection and cleaning of existing pipe. Installation of new services or reconnection of existing services to the relined pipe will be paid for per each, for the specified size and type of service, at all depths, complete in place. Payment, when included as a Contract pay item, will be made under one of the following: Pipe, Dia. (all depths), including Excavation and Backfill Per Linear Foot. In-Place Sliplining without In-Place Pipe Destruction/Replacement ( Dia. Pipe Lining in. Dia. Existing Pipe) Per Linear Foot. In-Place Sliplining with Pipe Destruction/Replacement ( Dia. Replacement Pipe in. Dia. Existing Pipe) Per Linear Foot. 119 Underground Piped Utilities Installing or Reconnecting Lateral Service to Existing, Relined or Replaced Pipe ( Dia. Service) in. ( Dia. Pipe) Per Each. Pipe Excavation, Ft. Width Per Linear Foot. Pipe Trench Backfill, Ft. Width Per Linear Foot. Concrete Seal or Cradle, Dia. Pipe Per Linear Foot. Concrete Trench Cap, Ft. Width Per Linear Foot. Concrete Cap and Encasement, Dia. Pipe Per Linear Foot. Cement Stabilized Backfill, Dia. Pipe Per Linear Foot. Cured Resin Pipe Lining (for Dia. Pipe) Per Linear Foot. Installing or Reconnecting Lateral Service to Cured Resin Lined Pipe, ( Dia. Service (for Dia. Main) Per Each. Pressure Taps, Dia. X Dia. Per Each. Wet Connections, Dia. x Dia. Per Each. Ductile Iron Fittings 4 inch through 24 inch Per Ton. A "W" after the pay item indicates the use for water. A "WW" after the pay item indicates the use for wastewater. End Applicable References: Standard Specifications Manual: Item Nos. Ref: 102, 210, 402, 403, 501, 502, 505, 506, 507, 509, 593, 601, 604 Standards Manual: Standard Detail Nos. 510-1, (520 - series). Design Criteria Manuals: Utilities Criteria Manual, Section 5. 120 Underground Piped Utilities �'"-` THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 511 WATER VALVES 511.1 Description This item shall govern the valves furnished and installed as indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all valves 4 inches (102 mm) and larger shall be AWWA-type valves of suitable design and fully equipped for service buried in the earth, without need for further modification and shall be wrapped with 8-mil (0.2 mm) polyethylene film with all edges and laps securely taped to provide a continuous wrap. Where not indicated, the Contractor may use valves with any type end-joint allowed for fittings of the pipe class being used. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all valve stems shall be adjusted to situate the operating nut not more than 24 inches (0.6 meters) below the proposed ground or paving surface of the finished project. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pounds or SI units. Within the text, inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 511.2 Materials The Contractor shall submit descriptive information and evidence that the materials and equipment the Contractor proposes for incorporation in the Work is of the kind and quality that satisfies the specified functions and quality. The City of Round Rock Water and Wastewater Utility Standard Products Lists (SPL) are considered to form a part of these Specifications. Contractors may, when appropriate, elect to use products from the SPL; however, submittal to the Engineer/Architect (E/A) is still required. If the Contractor elects to use any materials from these lists, each product shall be completely and clearly identified by its corresponding SPL number when making the product submittal. This will expedite the review process in which the E/A, and, if necessary, the Water and Wastewater Utility Standard Products Committee, decide whether the products meet the Contract requirements and the specific use foreseen by the E/A in the design of this engineered Project. The SPL's should not be interpreted as being a pre-approved list of products necessarily meeting the requirements for a given construction Project. Items contained in the SPL cannot be substituted for items shown on the Drawings, or called for in the specifications, or specified in the Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of Contract, unless approved by the Engineer or designated represetative in conjunction with the Water and Wastewater Utility Standard Products Committee. The Standard Product List current at the time of plan approval will govern. (A) Samples, Inspection and Testing Requirements: All tests and inspections called for by the applicable standards shall be performed by the manufacturer. Upon request, results of these tests shall be made available to the purchaser. (B) Other Requirements: Each submittal shall be accompanied by: 121 Underground Piped Utilities (1) Complete data covering: a) the operator, including type and size, model number, etc., b) the manufacturer's name and address of his nearest service facility, c) the number of turns to fully open or close the valve. (2) detailed instructions for calibrating the limit stops for open and closed positions, and (3) any other information, that may be necessary to operate and maintain the operator. (4) Complete dimensional data and installation instructions for the valve assembly as it is to be installed, including the operator. (5) Complete replacement parts lists and drawings, identifying every part for both the valve and operator. 511.3 Valves (A) Iron-Body Gate Valves Unless otherwise indicated, Iron Body Gate Valves, 4" to 12" (102 mm to 305 mm), including Tapping Valves, shall conform to AWWA C509, "Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems". Iron Body Gate Valves larger than 12" (305 mm), including Tapping Valves, shall be double disc, parallel seat valves meeting the requirements of AWWA C500. 16 (406 mm) Iron Body Resilient Seated Gate valves may be used if called for in the design and if indicated in the Standard Product List WW-282. (1) Stem Seals: All valves shall have approved 0-ring type stem seals. At least two 0-rings shall be in contact with the valve stem where it penetrates the valve body. (2) Operation: All valves shall have non-rising stems with a 2" (50 mm) square operating nut, or with a spoke type handwheel when so ordered, turning clockwise to close. (3) Gearing: Double disc gate valves in 16 inch (406 mm) and larger sizes shall be geared and, when necessary for proper bury depth and cover, shall be the horizontal bevel-geared type enclosed in a lubricated gear case. (4) Bypass: Unless otherwise indicated, 16 inch (406 mm) and larger gate valves shall be equipped with a bypass of the non-rising stem type which meets the same AWWA standard required for the main valve. (5) Valve Ends: Valve ends shall be push-on, flanged or mechanical joint, as indicated or approved. Tapping valves shall have inlet flanges conforming to MSS SP-60, with boltholes drilled per ANSI B16.1 Class 125. Seat rings and body casting 122 Underground Piped Utilities shall be over-sized as required to accommodate full size cutters; the outlet end shall be constructed and drilled to allow the drilling machine adapter to be attached directly to the valve. (6) Gear Case: All geared valves shall have enclosed gear cases of the extended type, attached to the valve bonnet in a manner that makes it possible to replace the stem seal without disassembly and without disturbing the gears, bearing or gear lubricant. Gear cases shall be designed and fabricated with an opening to atmosphere so that water leakage past the stem seal does not enter the gear case. (7) Valve Body: Double disc gate valves in 16 inch (406 mm) and larger sizes installed in the horizontal position shall have bronze rollers, tracks, scrapers, etc. (B) Butterfly Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, all valves shall conform to the current "AWWA" Standard C-504, "Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves", Class 150B, except as modified or supplemented herein. (1) Functional Requirements a) Valves shall be the short body design and shall have flanged connections on both ends unless otherwise called for. b) Valves shall be of such design that the valve discs will not vibrate or flutter when operated in a throttled position. Valve discs shall be secured to the shafts by means of keys or pins so arranged that the valve discs can be readily removed without damage thereto. All keys and pins used in securing valve discs to shafts shall be stainless steel or monel. Valve discs shall be stainless steel or ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 (448-310-12); seating edge shall be stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material. c) Valve shafts shall be constructed of wrought stainless steel or monel. The ends of the shaft shall be permanently marked to indicate the position of the disc on the shaft. d) All buried valves shall have approved manufacturer's 0-ring type or split V type "Chevron" shaft seals. When 0-ring seals are used, there shall be at least two 0-rings in contact with the valve shaft where it penetrates the valve body. On 24 inch (635 mm) and larger valves, the seat shall be completely replaceable and/or adjustable with common hand tools without disassembling the valve from the pipeline. Rubber seats located on the valve disc shall be mechanically secured with stainless steel retainer rings and fasteners. e) Unless otherwise indicated, valves shall be provided with manual operators with vertical stems and 2 inches (50 mm) square 123 Underground Piped Utilities operating nut turning clockwise to close and equipped with a valve disc position indicator. All keys or pins shall be stainless steel or monel. Buried valves shall have the valve stems extended or adjusted to locate the top of the operating nut no more than 24 inches (0.6 meter) below finish grade. f) Unless otherwise indicated, motorized butterfly valves shall be equipped with 230/460 volt, 3-phase reversing motor operators, extended as required to locate the center line of the operator shaft approximately 4 feet to 4 feet, 6 inches (1.2 to 1.4 meters) above finish grade. Operators shall be equipped with cast iron or malleable iron manual override hand wheel with a valve position indicator, local push button controls, lighted status/position indicator, torque and travel limit switches and all switches, relays and controls (except external power and signal wiring) necessary for both local and remote operation. (2) Performance Requirements a) Unless otherwise indicated, valve operators shall be sized to seat, unseat, open and close the valve with 150 psi (1 megapascal) shutoff pressure differential across the disk and allow a flow velocity of 16 feet (4.9 meters) per second past the disc in either direction. b) Motorized valve motors shall be capable of producing at least 140 percent of the torque required to operate the valves under conditions of maximum non-shock shutoff pressure without exceeding a permissible temperature rise of 1310F over 1040F ambient (55 degrees Celsius over 40 degrees Celsius ambient); they shall have a duty rating of not less than 15 minutes and shall be capable of operating the valve through 4 1/2 cycles against full unbalanced pressure without exceeding the permissible temperature rise. Motors shall be suitable for operating the valve under maximum differential pressure when voltage to motor terminals is 80 percent of nominal voltage. Motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated and sealed. (C) Ball Valves: Ball valves shall be brass, bronze, stainless steel or PVC as indicated on the Drawings or Details or as approved by the Engineer or designated representative. (D) Air-Vacuum Release Valves (1) Valves shall be combination air-release, air-vacuum units having small and large orifice units contained and operating within a single body or assembled unit. .. _. The small orifice system shall automatically release small volumes of air while the pipe is operating under normal conditions. The large air-vacuum 124 Underground Piped Utilities orifice system shall automatically exhaust large volumes of air while the pipe is being filled and shall permit immediate re-entry of air while being drained. Valves shall be rated for at least 150 psi (1 megapascal) {maximum} normal service pressure. (2) Material Requirements Valve exterior bodies and covers shall be cast iron. Internal bushings, hinge pins, float guide and retaining screws, pins, etc., shall be stainless steel or bronze. Orifice seats shall be Buna-N rubber. Floats shall be stainless steel, rated at 1000 psi (6.9 megapascals). Unless otherwise indicated, these valves shall be as included in the Standard Products List (SPL WW-367 for water, WW-462 for wastewater force mains). E) Fire Hydrants All fire hydrants shall be Dry Barrel, Traffic Model (break-away), Post Type having Compression Type Main Valves with 5 1/4" (133 mm) opening, closing with line pressure. Approved models are listed on SPL WW-3 of the Water and Wastewater Utility Standard Products List. (1) Applicable Specifications AWWA C-502 current: "AWWA Standard for Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants". NFPA 1963: "National (American) Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Thread" and City of Round Rock 4 inch (102 mm) Fire Hose Connection Standard (Available upon request from Standards Committee Secretary at 322-2806). ANSI A-21.11 current: "American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings". (2) Functional Requirements Design Working Pressure shall be 200 psi (1.38 megapascals) and a test pressure of 400 psi (2.76 megapascals). Inlet shall be side connection hub end for mechanical joint (ANSI A-21.11- current). Shoe shall be rigidly designed to prevent breakage. Lower Barrel shall be rigid to assure above ground break at traffic feature. Bury length of hydrant shall be four (4) feet (1.2 meters) minimum, five (5) feet (1.5 meters) maximum (hydrant lead pipe may be elbowed up from main using restrained joints; flanged joints in lead pipes are not allowed). Flange type connections between hydrant shoe, barrel sections and bonnet shall have minimum of 6 corrosion resistant bolts. 125 Underground Piped Utilities Hydrant Main Valve shall be 5 1/4 inch (133 mm) I.D. Valve stem design shall meet requirements of AWWA 0502, with Operating Nut turning clockwise to close. Operating Nut shall be pentagonal, 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) point to flat at base, and 1 7/16 inches (36.5 mm) at top and 1 inch (25 mm) minimum height. Seat ring shall be bronze (bronze to bronze threading), and shall be removable with light weight stem wrench. Valve mechanisms shall be flushed with each operation of valve; there shall be a minimum of two (2) drain ports. Traffic Feature shall have replaceable breakaway ferrous metal stem coupling held to stem by readily removable type 302 or 304 stainless steel fastenings. Breakaway flange or frangible lugs shall be designed to assure aboveground break. Breakaway or frangible bolts will not be acceptable. Outlet Nozzles shall be located approximately 18 inches (450 mm) above ground. Each hydrant shall have two (2) 2 1/2 inch (63.5 mm) nozzles 180 degrees apart with National (American) Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Thread NFPA 1963 and one (1) 4 inch (102 mm) pumper nozzle with City of Round Rock standard thread—six (6) threads per inch (25 mm) "Higbee" cut, 4.8590 inch (123.4 mm) O.D., 4.6425 inch (117.9 mm) root diameter. Nozzles shall be threaded or cam-locked, 0-ring sealed, and shall have type 302 or 304 stainless steel locking devices. Nozzle caps (without chains) and cap gaskets shall be furnished on the hydrant. The cap nut shall have the same configuration as the operating nut. Hydrants shall be Dry-Top Construction, factory lubricated oil or grease with the lubricant plug readily accessible. The system shall be described for City approval. A blue reflective delineator of a type approved by the Engineer shall be placed 2 to 3 feet (0.6 to 0.9 meters) offset from the centerline of paved streets, on the side of and in line with, all newly installed fire hydrants. Hydrant shall have double 0-ring seals in a bronze stem sheath housing to assure separation of lubricant from water and shall have a weather cap or seal, or both, as approved by the Owner, to provide complete weather protection. (3) Material Requirements All below ground bolts shall be corrosion resistant. The hydrant valve shall be Neoprene, 90 durometer minimum. The seat ring, drain ring, operating nut and nozzles shall be bronze, AWWA 0-502 current, containing not over 16 percent zinc. Break-away stem coupling shall be of ferrous material; its retaining pins, bolts, nuts, etc. of type 302 or 304 stainless steel. Coatings shall be durable and applied to clean surfaces. Exterior surfaces above ground shall receive a coating of the type and color specified in the applicable version of City of Round Rock SPL WW-3. The coating shall 126 Underground Piped Utilities be applied according to coating manufacturer's specifications. Other exposed ferrous metal shall receive asphalt-based varnish, or approved equal, applied according to the coating manufacturer's specifications. (F) Pressure/Flow Control Valves: All control valves to regulate pressure, flow, etc., in City lines shall be models listed in the City of Round Rock Water and Wastewater Standard Products List (SPL). (G) Drain Valves: Drain valve materials and installation shall conform to City of Round Rock Standard Detail No. 511-9. 511.4 Construction Methods (A) Setting Valves, Drains and Air Releases Unless otherwise indicated, main line valves, drain valves and piping, air and vacuum release assemblies and other miscellaneous accessories shall be set and jointed in the manner described for cleaning, laying, and jointing pipe. Unless otherwise indicated, valves shall be set at the locations shown on the Drawings and such that their location does not confect with other appurtenances such as curb ramps. Valves shall be installed so that the tops of operating stems will be at the proper elevation required for the piping at the location indicated above. Valve boxes and valve stem casings shall be firmly supported and maintained, centered and aligned plumb over the valve or operating stem, with the top of the box or casing installed flush with the finished ground or pavement in existing streets, and installed with the top of the box or casing approximately 6 inches (150 mm) below the standard street subgrade in streets which are excavated for paving construction or where such excavation is scheduled or elsewhere as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Drainage branches or air blowoffs shall not be connected to any sanitary sewer or submerged in any stream or be installed in any other manner that will permit back siphonage into the distribution system (see City of Round Rock "Standard Detail Drawings- Series 500/500"). Every drain line and every air release line shall have a full sized independent gate valve flanged directly to the main. Flap- valves, shear gates, etc., will not be accepted. (B) Setting Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrants shall be located in a manner to provide accessibility and in such a manner that the possibility of damage from vehicles or conflict with pedestrian travel will be minimized. Unless otherwise directed, the setting of any hydrant shall conform to the following: Hydrants between curb and sidewalk on public streets, shall be installed as shown on Standard 511-17, with outermost point of large nozzle cap 6" to 18" (150 mm to 450 mm) behind back of curb. Where walk abuts curb, and in other public areas or in commercial areas, dimension from gutter face of curb to 127 Underground Piped Utilities outermost part of any nozzle cap shall be not less than 3 feet (0.9 meters), nor more than 6 feet (1.8 meters), except that no part of a hydrant or its nozzle caps shall be within 6 inches (150 mm) of any sidewalk or pedestrian ramp. Any fire hydrant placed near a street corner shall be no less than 20 feet (6 meters) from the curb line point of tangency. Fire hydrants shall not be installed within nine feet (2.75 meters) vertically or horizontally of any sanitary sewer line regardless of construction. All hydrants shall stand plumb; those near curbs shall have the 4 inch (102 mm) nozzle facing the curb and perpendicular to it. The hydrant bury mark shall be located at ground or other finish grade; nozzles of all new hydrants shall be approximately 18 inches (450 mm) above grade. Lower barrel length shall not exceed 5 feet (1.5 meters). Barrel extensions are not permitted unless approved by the Engineer or designated representative. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main by 6 inch (152 mm) ductile iron pipe; a 6 inch (152 mm) gate valve shall be installed in the line for individual shutoff of each new hydrant. Below each hydrant, a drainage pit 2 feet (0.6 meter) in diameter and 2 feet (0.6 meter) deep shall be excavated and filled with compacted coarse gravel or broken stone mixed with coarse sand under and around the bowl of the hydrant, except where thrust blocking is located (City of Round Rock Specification Item 510 and Standard Detail 510-6 and to a level 6 inches (150 mm) above the hydrant drain opening. The hydrant drainage pit shall not be connected to a sanitary sewer. The drain gravel shall be covered with filter fabric to prevent blockage of voids in the gravel by migration of backfill material. The bowl of each hydrant shall be well braced against unexcavated earth at the end of the trench with concrete thrust blocking (taking care not to obstruct the hydrant drain holes), or the hydrant shall be tied to the pipe with approved metal harness rods and clamps. The fire line shall be provided with joint restraint from the main line to the fire hydrant. Hydrants shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt or foreign matter before setting. Fire hydrants on mains under construction shall be securely wrapped with a poly wrap bag or envelope taped into place. When the mains are accepted and placed in service the bag shall be removed. (C) Pressure Taps: Refer to Section 510.3 (24) of Standard Specification Item Number 510, "Pipe". (D) Plugging Dead Ends: Standard plugs shall be inserted into the bells of all dead ends of pipes, tees or crosses and spigot ends shall be capped. All end plugs or caps shall be secured to the pipe conforming to Section 510.3 (22) of Standard Specification Item Number 510, "Pipe". (E) Protective Covering: Unless otherwise indicated, all flanges, nuts, bolts, threaded outlets and all other steel component shall be coal tar coated and shall be wrapped with standard minimum 8-mil (0.2 mm) low density polyethylene film or a minimum 4-mil (0.1 128 Underground Piped Utilities mm) cross laminated high-density polyethylene meeting ANSI/AWWA Specification C-I 05-current, with all edges and laps taped securely to provide a continuous and watertight wrap. Repair all punctures of the polyethylene, including those caused in the placement of bedding aggregates, with duct tape to restore the continuous protective wrap before backfihling. (F) Valve Box, Casing and Cover: Stems of all buried valves shall be protected by valve box assemblies. Valve box castings shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30B. Testing shall be verified by the manufacturer at the time of shipment. Each casting shall have cast upon it a distinct mark identifying the manufacturer and the country of origin. (G) Drain Valve Installations: Refer to City of Round Rock Standards 511-9. (H) Air Release Assemblies: Refer to City of Round Rock Standards Details. (I) Pressure/Flow Control Valves: Assemblies shall be installed as indicated. (J) Connections to Existing System: Refer to Item No. 510, "Pipe" for connections to the existing system. (K) Shutoffs: Refer to Item No. 510, "Pipe"for shutoffs. 511.5 Measurement All types of valves will be measured per each. Fire hydrants and drain valves will be measured per each. Fire Hydrant and Drain Valve barrel extensions will be measured per vertical foot (meter: 1 meter equals 3.28 feet). Pressure/Flow control valve assemblies and both manual and automatic air release assemblies will be measured per each. The blue reflective delineator for identifying the location of newly installed fire hydrants shall be measured per each. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings, bury depths that exceed 5.5 feet (1.68 meters) shall be considered subsidiary to the completed unit. 511.E Payment Payment shall include full compensation, in accordance with the pay item established in the bid, for excavation, furnishing, hauling and placing valves and barrel extensions including anchorage and all incidental and subsidiary materials and work; preparing, shaping, dewatering, shoring of trenches, bedding, placing and compacting backfill materials and for all other incidentals necessary to complete the installation, as indicated in the Drawings, complete in place. The blue reflective delineator for identifying the location of newly installed fire hydrants shall be measured per each. 129 Underground Piped Utilities When indicated in the Drawings, bury depths that exceed 5.5 feet (1.68 meters) payment shall be made at the unit bid price for additional bury depth. Payment for iron fittings and for wet connections are covered in Section 510.E of Standard Specification Item 510, "Pipe". (A) Valves: Valves will be paid for at the unit bid price for the size and type valve installed, including valve stem casing and cover, excavation and backfill, setting, adjusting to grade, anchoring in place, and other appurtenances necessary for proper operation. (B) Fire Hydrants: Fire Hydrants installation shall be paid for at the unit bid price, including fittings, between the main line and the fire hydrant, setting, adjusting to grade, anchoring in place, and other appurtenances necessary for proper operation; but shall not include pipe and valve between the main line and fire hydrant. (C) Pressure/Flow Control Assemblies: Pressure control and flow control valve assemblies will be paid for at the unit bid price, including box or vault, setting, adjusting to grade, anchoring in place, adjusting the control device to the required conditions, providing other appurtenances necessary for proper operation, and placing in operation. (D) Drain Valve Assemblies: Drain valve installation shall be paid for at the unit bid price, including fittings between the main line and the drain valve, setting, adjusting to grade, anchoring in place, and other appurtenances necessary for proper operation; but shall not include pipe and valve between the main line and drain hydrant. (E) Manual Air Release: Manual air release installations will be paid for at the unit bid price and shall include valves, fittings, pipe, tapping the main, box and cover, and other appurtenances necessary for proper operation. (F) Automatic Air-Vacuum Valves: Automatic air-vacuum release assemblies will be paid for at the unit bid price and will include the main line tap or outlet, all pipe, valves, fittings, box or vault and cover, and other appurtenances necessary for proper operation. Payment, when included as a contract pay item, will be made under one of the following: Valves, Type, Diameter Per Each. Fire Hydrants Per Each. Reflectorized Pavement Markers (Type Il-B-B) Per Each. Pressure or Flow Control Valve Assemblies Per Each. Drain Valve Assemblies Per Each. Manual Air Release Assemblies, Diameter Per Each. Automatic Combination Air/Vacuum Release Valve Assembly, Diameter Per Each. Iron Body Resilient Seated Gate Valve, 16" (406 mm) Diameter Per Each. Additional Bury depth Per Vertical Foot. 130 Underground Piped Utilities END SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 511, "Water Valves" City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Item No. 510 Pipe Section510.3 (22) Pipe Anchorage, Support and Protection Section510.3(24) Water System Connections ANSI/AWWA Standards Designation Description A-21.11 American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings C-105 American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe C-500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service C-502 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants C-504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems ASTM Standards Designation Description ASTM A48/A48M Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National (American) Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Thread RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 511, "Water Valves" City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Item No. 501 Jacking or Boring Pipe Item No. 502 Tunneling Item No. 503 Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers Item No. 505 Concrete Encasement and Encasement Pipe Item No. 506 Manholes Item No. 507 Bulkheads Item No. 508 Miscellaneous Structures and Appurtenances Item No. 509 Trench Safety Systems 131 Underground Piped Utilities THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 601 SALVAGING AND PLACING TOPSOIL 601.1 Description This item shall govern the removal, storage and placement of approved topsoil to the depths and area shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text and accompanying tables, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 601.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this specification item shall include the test results and soil classification necessary for approval of material as suitable topsoil. 601.3 Materials A. Topsoil The topsoil shall be a clean, friable, fertile soil with a relatively high erosion resistance, free of objectionable materials including roots and rocks larger than 1 1/2 inches (37.5 millimeters) and readily able to support the growth of planting (Standard Specification Item No. 608), seeding (Standard Specification Item No. 604) and sodding (Standard Specification Item No. 602). B. Water Water shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be clean and free from industrial wastes and other objectionable matter. 601.4 Sources The topsoil may be obtained from the right-of-way at sites of proposed excavation or embankment when shown on the Drawings or identified by the Engineer or designated representative. The topsoil may also be obtained from approved sources, which are located outside the right-of-way and have been secured by the Contractor. 601.5 Construction Methods Precautions will be maintained at all times to protect all trees in the area of construction. Where removal of trees is indicated on the Drawings, they shall be marked as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Construction equipment shall not be operated nor construction materials stockpiled under the canopies of trees, unless otherwise approved by the City's Forestry Manager. Topsoil materials shall not be placed within the drip line of trees until tree wells are constructed that conform to Item No. 610, "Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation" and approved by the City's Forestry Manager. The source and stockpile areas shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, during the period of topsoil removal. 2 Environmental Enhancement The existing topsoil to be salvaged shall be removed from areas approved by the Engineer or designated representative, stockpiled in a windrow along the right of way or spread over an area that is ready for topsoil application in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Trash, wood, brush, stumps, rocks over 1 1/2 inches (37.5 mm) in size and other objectionable material encountered shall be removed and disposed of properly prior to beginning of work required by this item. Grass and other herbaceous plant materials may remain. Large clumps shall be broken up. After the grading has been completed to the required alignment, grades and cross- sections and prior to the spreading of the salvaged topsoil, any clay or tight soil surfaces shall be scarified by plowing furrows approximately 4 inches (100 mm) deep along horizontal slope lines at 2 foot (600 mm) intervals. The spreading of the salvaged topsoil shall be undertaken as soon as the grading has been completed. The topsoil shall be spread so as to form a cover of uniform thickness indicated. After the topsoil has been placed and shaped, it shall be sprinkled and rolled to provide a suitable seed bed. 601.E Measurement and Payment Salvaging, removal and/or placing topsoil materials will not be measured for payment, but shall be considered subsidiary to other items of work. End 3 Environmental Enhancement SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 601, "SALVAGING AND PLACING TOPSOIL" City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Item No. 602 Sodding for Erosion Control Item No. 604 Seeding for Erosion Control Item No. 608 Planting Item No. 610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 601, "SALVAGING AND PLACING TOPSOIL" City of Round Rock Standard Specification Items Designation Description Item No. 102 Clearing and Grubbing Item No. 104 Removing Concrete Item No. 110 Street Excavation Item No. 111 Excavation Item No. 120 Channel Excavation Item No. 132 Embankment Item No. 606 Fertilizer Texas Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 100 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 110 Excavation Item No. 160 Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Item No. 164 Seeding for Erosion Control Item No. 204 Sprinkling Texas Department of Transportation: Manual of Testing Procedures Designation Description Tex-1 03-E Determination of Moisture Content of Soil Materials Tex-1 04-E Determination of Liquid Limit of Soils Tex-1 05-E Determination of Plastic Limit of Soils Tex-1 06-E Method of Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils 4 Environmental Enhancement THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ITEM NO. 604 SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL 604.1 Description This item shall govern the preparation of a seed bed to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings, sowing of seeds, fertilizing, mulching with straw, cellulose fiber wood chips, recycled paper mulch and other management practices along and across such areas as indicated in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, inch-pound units are given preference with SI units shown within parentheses. 604.2 Submittals The submittal requirements for this specification item shall include: A. Identification of the type, source, mixture, PLS and rate of application of the seed. B. type of mulch. C. type of tacking agent. D. type and rate of application of fertilizer. 604.3 Materials A. Seed. All seed must meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law including the labeling requirements for showing pure live seed (PLS), name and type of seed. The seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within nine months of the time of delivery to the project. Each variety of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate bags or containers. A sample of each variety of seed shall be furnished for analysis and testing when directed by the Engineer or designated representative. The amount of seed planted per acre (hectare) shall be of the type specified in sections 604.5 and 604.6. B. Water. Water shall be clean and free of industrial wastes and other substances harmful to the growth of grass or the area irrigated. C. Top soil. Top soil shall conform to Standard Specification Item No. 130, "Borrow". D. Fertilizer. r--, The fertilizer shall conform to Standard Specification Item No. 606, "Fertilizer". 10 Environmental Enhancement E. Straw Mulch or Hay Mulch. Straw Mulch shall be oat, wheat or rice straw. Hay mulch shall be prairie grass, Bermuda grass, or other hay approved by the Engineer or designated representative. The straw or hay shall be free of Johnson grass or other noxious weeds and foreign materials. It shall be kept in a dry condition and shall not be molded or rotted. F. Tacking Agents. The tacking agent shall be a biodegradable tacking agent, approved by the Engineer or designated representative. G. Cellulose Fiber Mulch (Natural Wood). Cellulose Fiber Mulch shall be natural cellulose fiber mulch produced from grinding clean whole wood chips. The mulch shall be designed for use in conventional mechanical planting, hydraulic planting of seed or hydraulic mulching of grass seed, either alone or with fertilizers and other additives. The mulch shall be such, that when applied, the material shall form a strong, moisture-retaining mat without the need of an asphalt binder. H. Recycled Paper Mulch. Recycled paper mulch shall be specifically manufactured from post-consumer paper and shall contain a minimum of 85% recycled paper content by weight, shall contain no more than 15% moisture and 1.6% ash, and shall contain no growth inhibiting material or weed seeds. The recycled paper mulch shall be mixed with grass seed and fertilizer for hydro-seeding/mulching, erosion control, and a binder over straw mulch. The mulch, when applied, shall form a strong, moisture-retaining mat of a green color without the need of an asphalt binder. 604.4 Construction Methods A. Preparing Seed Bed. After the designated areas have been rough graded to the lines, grades and typical sections indicated in the Drawings or as provided for in other items of this contract and for any other soil area disturbed by the construction, a suitable seedbed shall be prepared. The seedbed shall consist of a minimum of either 4 inches (100 millimeters) of approved topsoil or 4 inches (100 millimeters) of approved salvaged topsoil, cultivated and rolled sufficiently to reduce the soil to a state of good tilth, when the soil particles on the surface are small enough and lie closely enough together to prevent the seed from being covered too deeply for optimum germination. The optimum depth for seeding shall be 1/4 inch (6 millimeters). Water shall be gently applied as required to prepare the seedbed prior to the planting operation either by broadcast seeding or hydraulic planting. Seeding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements hereinafter described. 11 Environmental Enhancement B. Watering. All watering shall comply with City Ordinances. Broadcast seeded areas shall immediately be watered with a minimum of 5 gallons of water per square yard (22.5 liters of water per square meter) or as needed and in the manner and quantity as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Hydraulic seeded areas and native grass seeded areas shall be watered commencing after the tackifier has dried with a minimum of 5 gallons of water per square yard (22.5 liters of water per square meter) or as needed to keep the seedbed in a wet condition favorable for the growth of grass. Watering applications shall constantly maintain the seedbed in a wet condition favorable for the growth of grass. Watering shall continue until the grass is uniformly 1 1/2 inches (40 mm) in height and accepted by the Engineer or designated representative. Watering can be postponed immediately after a 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) or greater rainfall on the site but shall be resumed before the soil dries out. 604.5 Non-Native Seeding A. Method A- Broadcast Seeding. The seed or seed mixture in the quantity specified shall be uniformly distributed over the prepared seed bed areas indicated on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer or designated representative. If the sowing of seed is by hand, rather than by mechanical methods, the seed shall be sown in two directions at right angles to each other. If mechanical equipment is used, all varieties of seed, as well as fertilizer, may be distributed at the same time, provided that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate. After planting, the planted area shall be rolled with a corrugated roller of the "Cultipacker" type. All rolling of the slope areas shall be on the contour. Seed Mixture and Rate of Application for Broadcast Seeding: From September 15 to March 1, seeding shall be with a combination of unhulled Bermuda Grass at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000 square feet (1.0 kilograms per 100 square meters) and winter rye or cool season cover crop (see Table 4) at a rate of 5 pounds per 1000 square feet (16.6 kilograms per 100 square meters) From March 1 to September 15, seeding shall be with hulled Bermuda Grass at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000 square feet (1.0 kilograms per 100 square meters) with a PLS = 0.83. Fertilizer shall be applied and shall conform to Item No. 606, "Fertilizer". B. Method B - Hydraulic Planting. The seedbed shall be prepared as specified above and hydraulic planting equipment, which is capable of placing all materials in a single operation, shall be used. March 1 to September 15 Hydraulic planting mixture and minimum rate of application pounds per 1000 square feet(kilograms per 100 square meters): 12 Environmental Enhancement Hulled Bermuda Fiber Mulch Soil Tackifier Seed (PLS=O.83) Cellulose Wood 1 Lbs/I 000 ft2 45.9 Lbs/I 000 ft2 1.4 Lbs/I 000 ft2 (0.5kgs/100 m2) (22.5kgs/100 m2) (0.7kgs/100 m2) 57.4 Lbs/I 000 ft2 1.5 Lbs/I 000 ft2 (28.0kgs/I00 m2) (0.75kgs/100 m2) September 15 to March 1 Add 5 pounds per 1000 square feet (2.5 kilograms per 100 square meters) of winter rye or cool season cover crop (see Table 4) to above mixture. The fertilizer shall conform to City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 606, "Fertilizer". 604.E Native Grass Seeding The seedbed shall be prepared as specified above. The seed mixture and the rate of application shall be as follows: Table 2: Native Grasses Common Name Botanical Name Application rates Lbs/I 000 feet2 kg/ 100 meter2 Indiangrass Sorghastrum nutans 0.15 0.075 Sideoats grama Bouteloua curtipendula 0.2 0.10 Green sprangletop Leptochloa dubia 0.15 0.075 Buffalo Grass Buchloe dactyloides 0.25 0.125 Little Bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium 0.2 0.10 Blue Grama Grass Bouteloua gracilis 0.15 0.075 Canada Wild Rye Elymus canadensis 0.2 0.10 Eastern gamagrass Tripsacum dactyloides 0.25 0.125 Purple Three-Awn Aristida purpurea 0.15 0.075 Switchgrass Panicum virgatum 0.1 0.05 Bushy Bluestem Andropogon glomeratus 0.1 0.05 Big Bluestem Andropogon gerardii 0.1 0.05 Total Grass Seeding 2.0 1.0 Rate 13 Environmental Enhancement Table 3: Native Wildflowers Application rates Common Name Botanical Name Lbs/I 000 feet2 kg/ 100 meter2 Black-Eyed Susan Rudbeckia hirta 0.05 0.025 Bundleflower Desmanthus 0.05 0.025 illinoensis Scarlet Sage Salvia coccinea 0.10 0.05 Pink Evening Oenethera speciosa 0.05 0.025 Primrose Phlox Phlox Drummondii 0.05 0.025 Coreopsis Coreopsis tinctoria 0.05 0.025 Greenthread Thelesperma filifolium 0.05 0.025 Purple Prairie Clover Petalostemum 0.05 0.025 purpurea Cutleaf Daisy Engelmannia 0.05 0.025 pinnatifida Partridge Pea Cassia fasciculata 0.1 0.05 Indian Blanket Gaillardia pulchella 0.1 0.05 Mexican Hat Ratibida columnaris 0.05 0.025 Maximilian Sunflower Helianthus 0.1 0.05 maximiliani Total Wildflower 1.0 0.5 Seeding Rate Total Warm Season 3.0 1.5 Seeding Rate (Grass & Wildflowers) 14 Environmental Enhancement Table 4: Cool Season Cover Crop Common Name Botanical Name Application rates Lbs/I 000 feet2 kg/ 100 meter2 Wheat Triticum aestivum 1 0.5 Oats Avena sativa 1 0.5 Cereal Rye Grain Secale cereale 3 1.5 Total Cool Season 5 2.5 Cover Crop Seeding Rate Total Cool Season 8 4 Seeding Rate (Grass, Wildflowers, & Cover Crop) Species substitution as necessary due to availability shall be approved by the Engineer or designated representative. Watering and fertilizer application shall follow procedures outlined above or as otherwise specified on the Drawings. Seed shall be applied by broadcast or drill method and shall be distributed evenly over the topsoil areas. Mulching shall immediately follow seed application. September 15 to March 1 Add 5 pounds per 1000 square feet (2.5 kilograms per 100 square meters) of winter rye or cool season cover crop to grass and wildflower mixture. The fertilizer shall conform to City of Round Rock Standard Specification Item No. 606, "Fertilizer". 604.7 Mulch A. Straw Mulch. Straw mulch shall be spread uniformly over the area indicated or as designated by the Engineer or designated representative at the rate of 2 to 2 1/2 tons of straw per acre (4.5 to 5.6 megagrams of straw per hectare). The actual rate of application will be designated by the Engineer or designated representative. Straw may be hand or machine placed and adequately secured. B. Fiber Mulch. Cellulose and wood fiber mulch shall be spread uniformly over the area indicated or as designated by the Engineer or designated representative at the rate of 45 to 80 lbs. per 1000 square feet (22.5 to 40 kilograms per 100 square meters). 15 Environmental Enhancement C. Recycled Paper Mulch. Recycled paper mulch shall be spread over the area indicated on the Drawings or as designated by the Engineer or designated representative at a rate that will provide 100% coverage. D. Shredded Brush Mulch. Small brush or tree limbs except Juniper, which have been shredded, may be used for mulching Native Grass seeding. 604.8 Measurement Work and acceptable material for "Seeding for Erosion Control" will be measured by the square yard (meter: 1 meter equals 1.196 square yards) or by the acre (hectare: 1 hectare equals 2.471 acres), complete in place, with a minimum of 95 percent coverage for the non-native mix, and 75 percent coverage for the native mix. Bare areas shall not exceed16 square feet (1.5 square meters), and the height of vegetation shall stand at a minimum of 1 1/2 inch (40 millimeters). Bare areas shall be re-prepared and reseeded as required to develop an acceptable stand of grass. 604.9 Payment The work performed and materials furnished and measured will be paid for at the unit bid price for "Seeding for Erosion Control" of the method specified on the Drawings and type of mulch. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials, including all topsoil, water, seed, tackifier, fertilizer or mulch and for performing all operations necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under one of the following: Non-Native Seeding for Erosion Control Method, Mulch Per Square Yard. Non-Native Seeding for Erosion Control Method, Mulch Per Acre. Native Seeding for Erosion Control Method, Mulch Per Square Yard. Native Seeding for Erosion Control Method, Mulch Per Acre. Mulch, Per Square Yard. Mulch, Per Acre. End 16 Environmental Enhancement SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 604, "SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL" City of Round Rock Technical Specifications Designation Description Item No.130 Borrow Item No. 606 Fertilizer RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 604, "SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL" City of Round Rock Technical Specifications Designation Description Item No. 601 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil Item No. 602 Sodding for Erosion Control Item No. 605 Soil Retention Blanket Item No. 607 Slope Stabilization Item No. 608 Planting Texas Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 160 Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Item No. 162 Sodding for Erosion Control Item No. 164 Seeding for Erosion Control Item No. 166 Fertilizer Item No. 168 Vegetative Watering Item No. 169 Soil Retention Blanket Item No. 180 Wildflower Seeding Item No. 192 Roadside Planting and Establishment 17 Environmental Enhancement ITEM NO. 606 FERTILIZER 606.1 Description This item shall govern the provision and distribution of fertilizer over the areas indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with these specifications. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, inch-pound units are given preference with SI units shown within parentheses. 606.2 Submittals The submittal requirements for this specification item shall include: A. Type of soil(s) at the site. B. Type(s) of re-vegetation (seeding, sodding, etc). C. Type(s) of fertilizer. D. Rate(s) of application of fertilizer. E. Chemical analysis of the fertilizer(s). 606.3 Materials All fertilizer used on site shall be delivered in bags or containers, which are clearly labeled and show the analysis. The figures in the analysis shall represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash nutrients, respectively, as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. The fertilizer may be subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas Fertilizer Law. A pelleted or granulated fertilizer shall be used.. Fifty percent or greater of the Nitrogen required shall be in the form of Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3). The remaining Nitrogen required may be in the form of Urea Nitrogen [CO(NH2)2]. The total amount of nutrients furnished and applied per acre (hectare: 1 hectare equals 2.471 acres) shall equal or exceed that specified for each nutrient. 606.4 Construction Methods Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining appropriate fertilizer for any planting/revegetation required under the Contract. Such determination shall be based on recommendations of a reputable nursery or other qualified source and the determination shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer or designated representative. Pelleted or granulated fertilizer shall be applied uniformly over the area specified on the Drawings to be fertilized and in the manner determined for the particular item of work. The fertilizer shall be dry and in good physical condition. Fertilizer that is powdered or caked will be rejected. Distribution of the fertilizer for the particular item of work shall meet the approval of the Engineer or Designated Representative. 21 Environmental Enhancement Maintenance fertilizing shall be applied every 6 months after the new sod or grass is placed or until the work is accepted by the City. The fertilizer may also be applied with the hydromulch. 606.5 Measurement Work and acceptable material for "Fertilizer" will be measured by the normal ton of 2,000 pounds (megagrams: 1 megagram equals 1.1023 tons) or by the 100 pounds (50 kilograms: 1 kilogram equals 2.205 pounds) as determined by approved scales or guaranteed weight of sacks shown by the manufacturer. 606.E Payment The work performed and materials furnished and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be considered subsidiary to other bid items in the contract unless specified as a Pay Item. When fertilizer is specified as a pay item, the work performed and materials furnished and measured as provided under"Measurement" will be paid for at the unit bid price for "Fertilizer". The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials and performing all operations necessary to complete the work. Payment, when specified, will be made under one of the following: Fertilizer- Per Ton. Fertilizer- Per 100 Pounds. End 22 Environmental Enhancement ITEM NO. RR 610 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND OTHER VEGETATION 610.1 - Description and Definitions Description This item shall govern the proper care, protection and treatment of trees and other vegetation within the construction area or, in the vicinity of the construction. All work shall be performed in accordance with the City approved drawings and specifications or as approved by the Engineer. Tree pruning and/or treatments shall be performed under the direct supervision of a qualified arborist (as defined below) or as allowed by the Engineer. The City of Round Rock Parks and Recreation Department, Forestry Division, Forestry Manager shall be consulted, in conjunction with the Engineer and Transportation Director for the performance of the Work when preservation of trees and other vegetation is required under the Contract. Definitions Forestry Manager - City official designated by the Parks and Recreation Department as the manager responsible for monitoring construction activities where trees and other vegetation are to preserved, or otherwise impacted by construction activities. The Forestry Manager oversees the urban forestry program and all aspects of public tree planting, public tree care, and other duties provided in the City Ordinance. Oak wilt - a tree disease caused by a fungus "Ceratocystis fagacearum" that infects the vascular system of Oak "genus Quercus" trees and prevents water transport through the trunk and canopy of the tree. This usually fatal tree disease can be spread by certain insects that come into contact with tree wounds or by interconnected tree roots. February through June is a high risk period due to the stage of the fungus and insect activity. See section 610.4(H) for additional requirements for preventing Oak wilt infection. Certified Arborist/Qualified Arborist - an individual engaged in the profession of arboriculture or closely related field who, through experience, education, and related training, possesses the competence to provide for, or supervise, the management of trees and other woody plants (as defined in the most current version of ANSI A300 (Part 1)-2001, section 4.1). Engineer — The Transportation Director for transportation projects, the City's Project Manager, the City's Forestry Manager, City's Inspector, Project Arborist/Landscape Architect, or other designated person, as determined by the City of Round Rock. Protected Trees — Trees of all species that are at least eight (8) inches in diameter, except for Chinaberry, Hackberry, Ashe Juniper, Chinese Tallow, Horse Apple, and exceptions listed in the City Ordinance. May-18 1 RR 610 Protective Tree Fencing - a temporary enclosure erected around a tree to be protected at the boundary of the tree protection zone. The fence serves three primary functions 1) to keep the foliage crown, branch structure and trunk clear from direct contact and damage by equipment, materials or disturbances; 2) to preserve roots and soil in an intact and non-compacted state; and 3) to identify the tree protection zone in which no soil disturbance is permitted and activities are restricted. Critical Root Zone (CRZ) - a radius equal in feet to the number of inches of the tree's trunk diameter, with a minimum of eight (8) feet. References City of Round Rock, "Tree Technical Manual: Standards and Specifications" City of Round Rock, Code of Ordinances, Chapter 43 - Tree Protection and Preservation. 610.2 - Submittals The following is a list of the minimum submittal requirements for this specification item shall include: A. Identification of the location, type of protective fencing (i.e. A, B or C), materials of construction and installation details; B. Qualified Arborist credentials (i.e. proof of certification from the International Society of Arboriculture, licenses, resume and/or references); C. Type, location and construction details for proposed tree wells; D. Location, type, materials of construction and installation details for permeable paving; E. Proposed nutrient mix specifications and when required by the Engineer or Forestry Manager, soil and/or foliar analysis for fertilizer applications. 610.3 - Materials A. Protective Fencing and Signage Protective fencing is designated as the materials used to protect the root zones of trees as illustrated in the plans and Standard Details. Three basic types of protective fencing materials are allowed by the City. Type A and Type B are typical applications and shall be installed where damage potential to a tree root system is high, while Type C shall be installed where damage potential is minimal. The specific type of protective fencing for the work shall be as indicated on the drawings. Type C fence materials shall be subject to approval by the Engineer or Forestry Manager. Type C fencing shall be replaced by Type A or Type B fencing as directed if it fails to perform the necessary function. 1. Type A Chain Link fence (Typical Application-high potential damage) May-18 2 RR 610 Type A protective fencing shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and shall consist of a minimum five-foot high chain link fencing with tubular steel support poles or "T" posts. 2. Type B Wood Fence (Typical Application-high potential damage) Type B protective fencing shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and shall consist of any vertical planking attached to 2x4-inch horizontal stringers which are supported by 2x4-inch intermediate vertical supports and a 4x4-inch vertical support at every fourth vertical support . 3. Type C Other Materials (Limited Application-minimal potential damage) The following materials may be permitted as alternates for limited or temporary applications (3 days or less) where tree damage potential is minimal (as determined by the Engineer): (a) High visibility plastic construction fencing. The fabric shall be 4 feet in width and made of high density polyethylene resin, extruded and stretched to provide a highly visible international orange, non-fading fence. The fabric shall remain flexible from -60°F to 200°F and shall be inert to most chemicals and acid. The fabric pattern may vary from diamond to circular with a minimum unit weight of 0.4 lbs.IFt.. The fabric shall have a 4 foot width minimum tensile yield strength (Horizontal) of 2000 psi, ultimate tensile strength of 2680 psi (Horizontal) and a maximum opening no greater than 2 inches. (b) Other approved equivalent restraining material. The fencing materials, identified in (a) and (b) above, shall be supported by steel pipe, tee posts, U posts or 2" X 4" timber posts that are a minimum of 5% feet in height and spaced no more than 8 feet on centers. The fabric shall be secured to post by bands or wire ties. 4. Signage A laminated sign, no smaller than 16 X 24 inches, shall be posted on each tree protective device, identifying the following information: WARNING — CRITICAL ROOT ZONE— ENCROACHMENT MAY RESULT IN PERMANENT TREE DAMAGE RESULTING IN TREE REPLACEMENT. B. Trunk Protection (Limited Application) When indicated on the drawings or directed by the Engineer or Forestry Manager tree trunk protection shall be provided in accordance with Standard Details. Tree trunk protection shall consist of any 2 x 4-inch or 2 x 6-inch planking by 8 foot length and plastic strapping and shall be attached in a manner that does not damage the tree. May-18 3 RR 610 C. Tree Dressing Wound treatments should not be used to cover wounds or pruning cuts, except when recommended for disease (see section 610.4 (H)), insect, mistletoe, or sprout control (from ANSI A300 (Part 1)-2001, section 5.4.1). D. Tree Wells for Raised Grades When existing grades are raised by more than six (6) inches, the tree root system shall be protected by the installation of tree wells in accordance with the plans and Standard Details. Native stone or non-toxic timber shall be used for the separator wall of the well and PVC conforming to ASTM D-2729, SDR-35 shall be used for the aeration systems in fill areas. E. Permeable Paving Permeable segmented pavers in conjunction with PVC pipe aeration system or concrete on gravel base with cored holes shall be used to protect existing tree root zones when indicated on the drawings or directed. F. Fertilizer Humate/nutrient solutions with mycorrhizae components or soil injection at recommended rates are to be used when appropriate. Construction which will be completed in less than 90 days may use materials at half the recommended rates. Alternative organic fertilizer materials are acceptable when approved by the Engineer. 610.4 - Construction Methods Notify the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours in advance of any activity within the CRZ. A. Protective Fencing All trees and shrubs in the proximity of the construction site shall be carefully checked for damage prior to initiation of the construction project or permitted development activity. All individual or groups of trees, shrubs, and natural areas shown to be protected on the drawings or identified to be protected by the Engineer, shall be protected during construction with temporary fencing as indicated on the drawings or as directed. Protective fences (section 610.4.A) shall be installed prior to the start of any site preparation work (clearing, grubbing, or grading), and shall be maintained in functioning condition throughout all phases of the construction project. For Development projects, the fencing shall remain until a certificate of occupancy has been granted. Remove fencing only when approved by the Engineer. Protective fence locations in close proximity to intersecting streets or drives shall adhere to the sight distance and sight triangle found in the City of Round Rock Transportation Criteria Manual. May-18 4 RR 610 1. Protective fences shall be constructed at the locations (typically the outer limits of the critical root zone) and with materials indicated on the drawings to prevent the following: (a) Soil compaction in the root zone area resulting from vehicular traffic or storage of equipment or materials; (b) Critical root zone disturbances due to grade changes [greater than 6" cut or fill] or trenching not reviewed and authorized by the Engineer; (c) Damage to exposed roots, trunks or limbs by mechanical equipment; and, (d) Other activities detrimental to trees such as chemical storage, concrete truck cleaning, and fires. 2. Exceptions to the installation of protective fences at the tree drip lines may be permitted in the following cases: (a) Where there is to be an approved grade change, impermeable paving surface, tree well, or other such site development, the fence shall be erected no more than 2 feet beyond the area of disturbance unless approved by the Engineer; (b) When permeable paving is to be installed within a tree's critical root zone, the fence shall be erected at the outer limits of the permeable paving area (prior to any site grading so that this enclosed area is graded separately to minimize root damage); (c) When trees are located close to a proposed building or other construction activity, the fence shall be erected up to 10 feet to allow work space between the fence and the structure. Apply organic mulch to a depth of eight (8) inches in the unprotected root zone area; (d) When there are street-side pedestrian walkways, fences shall be constructed in a manner that does not obstruct safe passage; and, (e) When there are severe space constraints due to tract size or other special requirements, the Engineer will approve alternative placement locations of the protective fences. When any of the exceptions listed above will result in a fence being located closer than five (5) feet to a tree trunk, the Contractor shall also protect the trunk with strapped-on planking to a height of 8 feet (or to the limits of lower branching) in addition to the fencing requirement. B. Pruning and Repair of Damage Tree pruning, to provide clearance for the work and/or to remove hazards, shall be performed under the direct supervision of a qualified arborist and shall follow standards identified in ANSI A300 (Part 1), "Pruning". A minimum clearance height of eight (8) feet above the street level must be provided and maintained for all existing trees if adjacent to a sidewalk. However, if the limbs of trees overhang the curb line or edge of travel lane of any street, a minimum clearance height of fourteen (14) feet is required. Pruning shall provide the minimum clearance needed May-18 5 RR 610 to perform the work or remove a hazard unless otherwise directed to comply with transportation criteria or to mitigate for damage. If tree damage compromises a tree's structural integrity then the area shall be adequately secured until a qualified arborist makes an assessment of the tree and corrective actions are completed with approval from the Engineer. Damage to oak trees shall be treated immediately, with consideration for site safety, to reduce the risk of Oak Wilt infection (See 610.4.H, "Oak Wilt Prevention"). Tree root wounds shall be treated to remove loose, damaged tissue from in and around the wound or if necessary the root shall be cut cleanly and covered with topsoil, or other material approved by the Engineer, to prevent drying of root tissue and to create a favorable environment for root sprouting. Trunk wounds shall also be treated to remove loose, damaged tissue around the wound. Tree canopy repairs shall be performed in accordance with the most current version of ANSI A300 (Part 1), "Pruning", to prevent further damage to the tree and to promote recovery of the tree to sound condition. The ANSI standard describes proper pruning methods for limb removal and for making finish pruning cuts. All trees damaged during construction shall receive an application of fertilizer within the drip line at the rate of 4 pounds per caliper inch. C. Cutting and Filling Around Trees When the depth of an excavation or embankment exceeds 6 inches within the critical root zone of any tree with a trunk diameter greater than 8 inches, a tree well shall be constructed to protect the tree as shown in the plans. D. Paving Around Trees Where new paving within the dripline of any tree greater than six (6) inches in diameter is necessary, a permeable pavement and aeration system mst be installed as indicated in the plans, except for street construction. E. Tree Removal When a tree or shrub is scheduled for removal, cut to a depth of twelve (12) inches below the surrounding ground line. After removal, place soil to a depth matching the existing grade. An approved permit, or an approved site plan is required for removal of trees 8" and larger (see Code of Ordinances Sec. 43-21 and 43-24). All trees to be removed shall be performed in a manner that does not damage the canopies, trunks or root systems of remaining trees and that protects all existing facilities, improvements and vegetation. Removal of oak trees shall follow the Oak Wilt Prevention procedures (Section 610.4,(H)). All tree material shall be removed from the site unless directed otherwise, or if it will be used as wood chips or mulch. All damage resulting from tree removal or pruning shall be repaired at the Contractor's own expense and shall follow guidelines in this specification. May48 6 RR 610 Removal of any other protected trees not scheduled for removal, or trees damaged beyond repair, shall be replaced in accordance with City Ordinance Section 43-25. F. Final Cleanup All temporary tree and shrub preservation and protection measures shall be removed when the construction has been completed and any mulch applications shall be removed or reduced to no more than three (3) inches depth. G. Root Zone Aeration and Fertilization As a component of an effective remedial tree care program, preserved trees within the limits of construction may require soil aeration and supplemental nutrients. Soil and/or foliar analysis should be used to determine the need for supplemental nutrients. The Engineer may require these analyses as part of a comprehensive tree care plan. Soil pH shall be considered when determining the fertilization composition as soil pH influences the tree's ability to uptake nutrients from the soil. If analyses indicate the need for supplemental nutrients, then humate/nutrient solutions with mycorrhizae components are highly recommended. In addition, soil analysis may be needed to determine if organic material or beneficial microorganisms are needed to improve soil health. Materials and methods are to be approved by the Engineer prior to application. The owner or general contractor shall select a fertilization contractor and ensure coordination with the Engineer. Pre-construction treatment should be applied in the appropriate season; ideally the season preceding the proposed construction. Minimally, areas to be treated include the entire critical root zone of trees as depicted on the City approved plans. Treatment should include, but not be limited to, fertilization, aeration, soil treatment, mulching, and proper pruning. Post-construction treatment should occur during final revegetation or as determined by a qualified arborist after construction. Construction activities often result in a reduction in soil macro and micro pores and an increase in soil bulk density. To ameliorate the degraded soil conditions, aeration via water and/or air injected into the soil is needed or by other methods as approved. The proposed nutrient mix specifications and soil and/or foliar analysis results need to be provided to and approved by the Engineer prior to application. Construction which will be completed in less than 90 days may use materials at '/2 the recommended rates. Alternative organic fertilizer materials are acceptable when approved by the Engineer. Within seven (7) days after fertilization is performed, the contractor shall provide documentation of the work performed to the Engineer. This note should be referenced as item #1 in the Sequence of Construction. H. Oak Wilt Prevention Policy 1. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this Oak Wilt Prevention Policy is to identify measures that city staff and city-hired contractors and their sub-contractors, who perform the May-18 7 RR 610 services of removing or trimming trees, will take to prevent the spread of oak wilt. 2. Definitions Oak Wilt Disease: A tree disease caused by the fungus, Ceratocystis fagacearum. The fungus infects the vascular system of a tree. The vascular system contains vessels which transport moisture throughout the tree. The vessels of an infected tree effectively become blocked by the infection of the fungus, and cannot transport adequate moisture to sustain a healthy or living tree. In most cases, the end result is tree mortality. 3. Prevention Policy (a) Prior to beginning field work, all city staff associated with projects involving potential contact with oak trees shall be made aware of this specification. (b) When possible, city staff and contractors should avoid trimming, pruning, or wounding Live Oaks and Red Oaks (Spanish, Shumard, Texas Red, and Blackjack oaks) from February through June. (c) At all times and irrespective of limb size, all cuts and wounds to oak trees shall be dressed immediately using a non-phytotoxic tree wound dressing. Stump cuts and damaged roots (both above and below ground) shall also be dressed. (d) Disinfection of pruning tools, saws, and related equipment is mandatory during the trimming or pruning of oak trees. Disinfection of tree removal and trimming equipment shall occur before work begins in a project area, between work in individual oak trees, and again prior to leaving a project area. Acceptable disinfectants include either aerosol disinfectant or a 10 percent bleach-water solution. *NOTE: Although this policy would require the disinfection of pruning equipment before and between oak trees as a precaution, research does not substantiate disinfection as a means of preventing the transmission of the oak wilt disease. 4. Disposal Policy (a) Chipping or shredding the wood from infected trees to use as mulch is an acceptable means of recycling the wood. Chipping or shredding allows the wood to dry out quickly, thereby killing the fungus. (b) Burning diseased wood is an acceptable means of disposal. Burning diseased logs will kill the fungus, and the fungus will not spread with the smoke. (c) Logs from diseased Red Oaks, that are not chipped, shredded, or burned shall be disposed of at a landfill. (d) Firewood from diseased Red Oak trees shall not be stored near healthy trees where fungal spores or insects that carry the spores have the potential to spread the fungus to healthy trees. It is recommended to store May-18 8 RR 610 oak firewood under a sheet of clear plastic, tightly sealing the edges of plastic with soil or bricks. Doing so will prevent any spore carrying beetles from escaping and will solarize and heat the stored firewood to speed the drying process. It is also recommended to use clear plastic, as black plastic will reveal any escape holes to the beetles. (e) In situations where diseased Red Oak trees are identified and are not accessible for chipping, shredding, or removal, the trunk of the diseased tree should be girdled, and the stem treated with an appropriate herbicide to deaden the tree and hasten the desiccation and drying of the wood below the minimum moisture content that could support the development of fungal spores. 610.5 - Measurement Tree and shrub pruning, fencing, drains, fertilization, etc. will not be measured for payment unless included as a contract pay item. Tree wells for tree protection will be measured by the units, complete in place, conforming to the Drawings and Standard Details. Removal of existing trees will be measured per each tree. 610.E - Payment The work and materials prescribed herein with the exception of the Protective Fencing ,._._ and Tree Well (Tree Protection) will not be paid for directly but shall be included in the unit price bid for the item of construction in which this activity is used, unless a payment item is included as a contract pay item. Payment will be made under: Protective Fencing Type A Chain Link Fence Per Lineal Foot Protective Fencing Type_B Wood Fence Per Lineal Foot Protective Fencing Type C Other Materials Per Lineal Foot Tree Protection Per Each Tree Well (Tree Protection) Per Each Tree Removal ( " - " DIA) Per Each End May48 9 RR 610 SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Speciflcation "Preservation of T and Oth Vegetaflon .4. ,__ City of R Designation Description ��.......�.__.�a..,r....�..��.. �.....�.�......�.....�..Y�v......�......_..__-_...aa,......�....._.....__...�..�..��......_..._....................uu...............y......aL.......��..g.a,�a��...o...a_�.��..a.....p.� .�r.�.....�..a. .�...........�...�.....�....�..r..µ.....w..�...�.��4...�r.�r....r..�..W..r......y.n�Y.��.��na�..��..._�v.....�r..v�....r..r..r.r..�.��.�...��..... a.�._........�...r..w...Y W............r....�...�... ��Y..�......w. _. �..a...........a�.._.,..r...�......�......r.�..... RR 101 Preparing T of W ...., _. .. .... _ .. .. s... 32w .y:...s._u..,.... ...•,.... ,a,.c•, .vs:+rua..s.w:.«.:w..:s_ay.>,-�..v...:.y:.,...,., .,,,y, r _.4,x,• - _ _ ,...n.....,.,,. RR 102 Clearingand G ^`.•."•^�..«JI........_r_...,.... .�_._.... ..._�..r....,.-.�.--__.,.-.:uJ........_�.-...w.s.__.___..v.,._...a+:.u�..aa+.+.:.... -..w.n�•..r...:.......a..:u^�^___'^-^-="-"..S^a".r^-._-.^'^••'^-•"�_'...a.r4.��'Z"..SS�.^..."�:� "'•1'7"^rTC ..'�CSS?IrL"•'.'^..-......,C.G.LS�""�"".,:•a...-^""�^....�..5:'•".,...4�^,^.1"+.iu/f.'^iu%•+"J.....,..._ ....�.;'T..^.._w.rw•^.:rS.u.'^�_"'^u"...u..u.^'^•^su^..SS.w.a.w�. �+r^ir�u...i:.:sr.i,....+.......,.r.r""'Y""."....... a........._,...._.0 P.Y...u.^^!^^-' ...J. w.. w..^.w..+r•• I JCtt'•�nfw+d^L.' .._.w.+.w._-. ._.. •..- ._..w.._.w.... ^•w••..r ,. W �. ...m......._.........,...,., .... ,.r,....,..... .. .........TM.wn.,..�- _ ..•._ raC._... _ �_.-»a._.:,...... ....>s.�._.w�:.�er_�-.�....=w•_�:...;. �.•.c.i..'aa...-W�.i.�..,. ,.s .,n. �, ,....- i.......,,._.,...,.� .. ,,. s..r--ter.. ,,._,.�-_�-+..mow.. ....,,,,.._._._.,,.r:..v-c..ad_+.u.�rawv..swa.-avavaa+u-v+L. a.a�__-wr.. w...�....�...........r...,.,wr1..u.....S.a,..w_+uau.-.0 mss�.._,Jr1�3�Sv.,.�3t:A.w.r.....a�__ _ra.-:aw•r..:r...us+z.•_1.:s1.w,... sy ._u._s_� •�:..i.a__La..:iy...iic,_L_..___.�r.�u...mwr.-a:+s...-ra-u:r.�a�•._.s_•:��..s_.`L .:y_;�,..-....., Specification Item 102, "CLEARING Texas Dep artment of T Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of High Streets, and _. .C.rw.....r.-.�+e.�x<:,.ww.u�-�.�.,auu.++x��Tavvrvw,.a�aysu�.uw..Tree.:..._,rw,:r_..u.,_.:ee....rrr..nv.wx•.ra•:arraw.�wuun..a_:_,.-`.i.:s..a.w-.:.:,.w-+�.rwuu:.C�ra+.uv�_,:��G':A:,ud_�.+:.m._.s,>..:..-�......•......:^s+u...._.�..•az:elsu.:•u=�..�..x:uenr�re�.i,rS�•�-„r,.•.�..u'z......r.......�v.w.r-nT r.... o..a,y._.ri�.s�1 Designation Description _ •. ;:ti•..a.�.,W•[+J"- --Wit..:..�_.I'�y.'.Ae.a,�.....�a,.........GuuL+�2.,'H'MSYC'..1W"!L2^'...7"«�'."^"".....^.. LSfi.'.S7Sb7 .+'^'7u^ffi�.:.'.Yd.,^f.7SSWT.•w7•Cu'S^.CS.^".�i. ^"�L-.�+Y".^''.'�"r+'3.S'GYaSS,^.Gx'. w. 7'Y7LA57bTGC�..6:rS.^7A••�('� .T CT.^L^,. ^.^.,�GCr^..._..T.•w.?IlMui^.iC:�:rS21^ a Sr9'A•�".^5�.7:3.^,.t+,.^�'•7S^Y.frr• awa.,a..Ld•AOTrf..Sly"'t.«+.p..+.•s•�..:--.-�a~_x.ew_-_ Rem No. 100 Preparingof W yam.,...r Rl�...vim...,a..-...n„-�.�.,.,.,11.,..r•1>>.�.i......A.i.,,•.,..r IVT....•••A.. .,...i,i.......�.r-..r,.. . .. r..a.....�..,.,.,...,w.,.,Y�J...............�.,....,,...�i.....,.i,..........a............., ��•..,� ...,.,...,,. - - .ua� r...l_y�c._eJJ._b..:�•' Lw1.Gl:..v3..!-J ..�....�.. ,..,.........tne..Tr-�.._,....,...�.., ..��.,,ia.i�r.�,.,�,r 4 a Item No. 110 Excavation .,,_ ...,• 'mr•�. z•�..,.........................nr....,_...,,._...� _.._•_---__.._..�_...._...^-�...., ,......._ .....�ar�•�++,••....:«•,.»r - ..r+r==:•r:.,,.....�._�:rs•••�zoaa:•r.-s•^.._xx c�cz.:nm:_iw.,"rn��oriavu•+.*^'•^.^^n.�.a�Aur�•vzsnax^xi�r.�:s•_s:�•�....«.....�,�..».�.. a��•,.o.•.,e..»ram^•nst�s...�.,,..�.........•,�.s�^...�,.....•.,-...-,........-�zm;.es�; Rem No. 132 Embankment .. .,..... ..,,..... -..__ �._,.,.......,�,.-..e...,...s•........�_••••.�••,arrc:�a:•srrzrs:��.�:�•crz<west*n�rr.�.�.srt�^esnaatc.�c�.cm .. 'ari^�'vm�ar�•••le e..,•�trr�ca�srr�'•+•^-,�•..^•••••., =.rzrrmrc�:•r�••.-••re.�.rrr��rat�cue�^;a��:�r�•rtz:��c'�e..K-•••-+^••rt:•r.•yrzua^..•^s�sairrrrrrrz.•^TM��s�r�....•r;w•m�Wr.:srn...:a.e,::•r�s^.ass:'r.�n�..•-^.�asrrwr.:rtrtra:a^. :��•�+:�:r.�:w:..sa.:.arsarxxzra�a�m�xrrr.�2�:•trr.:z�rr.•^a•: .. �a»«za,..a...... Item No. opsl of 4 -.-�7..'..-] �'�' ....e++�+.'��rT-vw" �-�T__ 1LL�"aY'sr-1�..,...........�..i,.......,,•..,, � ..-..........,,.�rn n ...............�,..v, _..e.....s.a..-_��.y< Item No. 166 Fertilizer .,'�y'�.••�••�, (�...•i'.•,.•ara_n...�d.....,w...�..,..........rrsv.....n.a:...�.:.5_r........_...,.^^�:.S..sn----��..a....+........ _...a r�"4.:�1:34rn'R.'F'�'�"a,�utS7aY�7nvrtzr.�^.rr.�a..rrxrrn rlsa:Rsms.97v�37•3•rt�•tCc.•,•�•..••. ... r••«•••••,••••••,,+�Gcsc••�asrc^�:1Ca.....-._..�,•.••••,.,,•,•. ��J�b�•aarsr:erg•rrar-rraa.:�e�Jrsrax•�•scrt•:�i!.::rx:•�•_•max•+.+_+_�mtt:�^•,s^�.^eeivsvvrr-:uv.•caz•�!.rr�Ah7^s=•:.r.�.•srx.:�c�.�••-am.7s'•••n^s^^^^••_- `' - -^~^^�'sxv=..•^••••^_•�cs;�.LTM-��^Yaz� G i Item No. 168 1Vegetative Watering >, +_.._ <_..a..�..:..�s^^^*� sa• .�tr..^u�sse>w•*s..ta�rr^_. .. r�•�rrn.•nc�xtaar.-s�srr^�a^.!�=e^.^iv.••ausrsw.•�a.�nvueu:_x.:-^��zeuai�s.�-arc!••^.,m.�.g�xaa+�az�•��.=nm�•,^-••+'^TM s�-r2ry-rm.�•'+++^•..��.�..,.�r.:�..z.,......-_-.-,__.w...._..._�. - May48 10 RR 610 ITEM NO. 620 FILTER FABRIC 620.1 Description This item shall govern the furnishing of materials and for placement of filter fabric as indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Filter Fabric shall have the capability for allowing the passage of ground water through it without transporting the soil placed around the filter fabric. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 620.2 Submittals The submittal requirements of this specification item include: A. catalog cuts, B. samples of material selected, C. testing results, D. manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and E. manufacturer certification of compliance with this specification. 620.3 Materials A. General The fabric shall be constructed exclusively of synthetic thermoplastic fibers and may be either woven or non-woven to form a mat of uniform quality. Fabric fibers may be either continuous or discontinuous and oriented in either a random or an aligned pattern throughout the fabric. The fabric shall be mildew resistant, rot proof and shall be satisfactory for use in a wet soil and aggregate environment. The fabric shall contain ultraviolet stabilizers and shall have non-raveling edges. B. Physical Requirements The fabric shall meet the requirements of table 1, when sampled and tested in accordance with the methods indicated in the table below. All material shall be shipped with suitable wrapping to protect the fabric during shipping and storage at the job site. 620.4 Construction Methods The submittal requirements shall be completed before any materials are ordered. The "Filter Fabric" shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. When lapping is required, it shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Backfilling around the Filter Fabric shall be done in such a manner that the Filter Fabric material will not be damaged during the placement. 65 Environmental Enhancement TABLE 1: FILTER FABRIC REQUIREMENTS Original Physical Properties Test Method Requirements Fabric weight (mass), on an TxDoT Underdrains/Slope ambient temperature air- Tex-61 6J* Stabilization dried tension free sample, 4.0 (135) minimum expressed in oz/ sq. yd (grams/ square meter) Gabions and Revet Mattresses 6.0 (200) minimum Water flow rate by falling TxDoT 80 (3,260) minimum head method, 7.9 inches Tex616J* (20 cm) to 3.9 inches (10 cm) on 2 inch (50 mm) ID cylinder with 1 inch (25 mm) diameter orifice, with flow rate expressed in gal/sq.ft/minute (liters/square meter/minute). Breaking load in either ASTM D-1682 grab method 100 (445) minimum machine or cross-machine G** direction, expressed in pounds (newtons) Equivalent opening size for CW-0221 5 70 to 100 US Standard (SI) sieves. (212 to 150pm) "Apparent elongation" at ASTM D-1682 grab method 100 maximum breaking load in either G** machine or cross-machine direction, expressed as percent TxDoT Tex-616-J, "Testing of Construction Fibers" ** ASTM D 1682 grab method G, "Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics"* as modified by TxDoT Test Method Tex-61 6-J '`** CW-02215, US Army Corps of Engineers, Civil Works Construction Guide Specification "Plastic Filter Fabric". 620.5 Measurement Work and acceptable material for "Filter Fabric" will be measured by the square yard (square meter: 1 square meter equals 1.196 square yards), complete in place. 66 Environmental Enhancement 620.6 Payment The work performed and the materials furnished and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid at the unit bid price for "Filter Fabric". The unit bid price, when included in the contract as a pay item, shall include full compensation for all materials, excavation and backfilling and all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under: Filter Fabric Per Square Yard. End SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 620, "FILTER FABRIC" American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTMS Designation Description D 1682 Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics Texas Department of Transportation Manual of Testing Procedures Designation Description Tex61 6-J Testing of Construction Fabrics RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 620, "FILTER FABRIC" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 101 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 102 Clearing and Grubbing Item No. 111 Excavation Item No. 120 Channel Excavation Item No. 401 Structural Excavation and Backfill Item No. 602 Sodding for Erosion Control Item No. 604 Seeding for Erosion Control Item No. 605 Soil Retention Blanket Item No. 606 Fertilizer Item No. 608 Planting Item No. 610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation 67 Environmental Enhancement RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS - continued Specification 620, "FILTER FABRIC" Texas Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 100 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 110 Excavation Item No. 132 Embankment Item No. 158 Specialized Excavation Work Item No. 166 Fertilizer Item No. 168 Vegetative Watering Item No. 169 Soil Retention Blanket Item No. 204 Sprinkling 68 Environmental Enhancement ITEM NO. 641 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE 641.1 Description This item governs the construction of a stabilized pad of crushed stone located at any point where traffic will be entering or leaving a construction site to or from a public right of way, street, alley, sidewalk or parking area. The purpose of a stabilized construction entrance is to reduce or eliminate the tracking or deposition of sediment onto public right of way or paved areas. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 641.2 Submittals The submittal requirements for this specification item shall include: A. Source, type and gradation of rock B. Drainage technique (i.e. drainage swale or entrance grading) proposed to prevent runoff from exiting the construction site. 641.3 Materials --- Aggregate for construction shall conform to the following gradation: Table 1: Aggregate Gradation Chart (TEX 401-A, % Retained per sieve) US 5 inch (SI 125 mm) US 2 inch (SI 50 mm) 0 100 641.4 Construction Methods All trees, brush, stumps, obstructions and other objectionable material shall be removed and disposed of in a manner that will not interfere with the excavation and construction of the entrance as indicated on the Drawings. The entrance shall not drain onto public right of way or shall not allow surface water runoff to exit the construction site. When necessary, vehicle wheels shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto paved areas or public right of way. When vehicle washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with crushed stone, which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin. All sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or watercourse through use of sand bags, gravel, boards, silt fence (Standard Specification Item No 642) or other methods approved by the Engineer or designated representative. The entrance shall be maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or disposition of sediment onto paved areas or public right of way. This restriction may require 126 Environmental Enhancement periodic top dressing with additional stone as conditions demand, as well as the repair and/or cleanout of any measures used to trap sediment. All sediment that is spilled, dropped, washed or tracked onto paved areas or public right of way must be removed immediately. 641.5 Measurement Acceptable work performed as prescribed in this item will be measured by unit of each stabilized construction entrance installed. 641.E Payment Work performed and materials furnished under this item shall be paid for at the unit bid price per each. Payment, when included as a contract pay item, will be made under: Stabilized Construction Entrance Per Each. End SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 641, "STABILIZATION CONTRUCTION ENTRANCE (SCE)" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 642 Silt Fence (SF) RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 641, "STABILIZATION CONTRUCTION ENTRANCE (SCE)" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 101 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 102 Clearing and Grubbing Item No. 111 Excavation Item No. 120 Channel Excavation Item No. 401 Structural Excavation and Backfill Item No. 610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation Texas Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Designation Description Item No. 100 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 110 Excavation Item No. 132 Embankment Item No. 158 Specialized Excavation Work Item No. 168 Vegetative Watering 127 Environmental Enhancement ITEM NO. 642 SILT FENCE 642.1 Description This item shall govern the provision and placement of a filter fabric fence including maintenance of the fence, removal of accumulated silt and removal of the silt fence upon completion of the project. This specification is applicable for projects or work involving either inch-pound or SI units. Within the text, the inch-pound units are given preference followed by SI units shown within parentheses. 642.2 Submittals The submittal requirements for this specification item shall include: A. Source, manufacturer, characteristics and test data for the filter fabric, B. Manufacturer, characteristics and test data for the posts and wire fence. 642.3 Materials A. Fabric 1. General: The filter fabric shall be of nonwoven polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide thermoplastic fibers with non-raveling edges. The fabric shall be non-biodegradable, inert to most soil chemicals, ultraviolet resistant, unaffected by moisture or other weather conditions, and permeable to water while retaining sediment. The filter fabric shall be supplied in rolls a minimum of 36 inches (0.9 meter)wide. 2. Physical Requirements: The fabric shall meet the requirements presented in Table 1, when sampled and tested in accordance with the methods indicated herein, and/or on the Drawings. B. Posts: Posts shall be painted or galvanized steel Tee or Y-posts with anchor plates, not less than 5 feet (1.5 meters) in length with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot (1.9 kilograms per meter) with a minimum Brinell Hardness of 143. Hangers shall be adequate to secure fence and fabric to posts. Posts and anchor plates shall conform to ASTM A-702. C. Wire Fence: Wire fence shall be welded wire fabric 2 x 4 - W1.0 x W1.0 (50 x 100 - MW7 x MW7) and shall conform to Standard Specification Item No. 406, "Reinforcing Steel". 128 Environmental Enhancement TABLE 1. Filter Fabric Requirements Physical Properties Method Requirements Fabric Weight in ounces per square yard TEX-616-J1 4.5 minimum (grams/square meter) (150 minimum) Water Flow Rate in gallons/sq. foot/ TEX-616-J1 40 maximum minute (1630 maximum) (liters/square meter/minute) Equivalent Sieve Opening Size: US CW-0221 52 40 to 100 Standard (425 to 150 mm) (SI Standard sieve size) Mullen Burst Strength: lbs. per sq. inch ASTM D-37863 300 minimum (psi) (2 minimum) megaPascal (mPa) Ultraviolet Resistance; % Strength ASTM D-1 682 70 minimum Retention � TxDoT Test Method Tex-61 6-J, "Testing of Construction Fabrics". 2 US Army Corps of Engineers Civil Works Construction Guide Specification CW- 02215, "Plastic Filter Fabric". 3 ASTM D-3786, "Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitting Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method". 4 ASTM D-1682, "Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics ". 642.4 Construction Methods The silt fence fabric shall be securely attached to the posts and the wire support fence with the bottom 12 inches (300 mm) of the filter material buried in a trench a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 6 inches (150 mm) wide to prevent sediment from passing under the fence. When the silt fence is constructed on impervious material, a 12-inch (300-mm)flap of fabric shall be extended upstream from the bottom of the silt fence and weighted to limit particulate loss. No horizontal joints will be allowed in the filter fabric. Vertical joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) with the ends sewn or otherwise securely tied. The silt fence shall be a minimum of 24 inches (0.6 meter) high. Posts shall be embedded a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) in the ground, placed a maximum of 8 feet (2.4 meters) apart and set on a slight angle toward the anticipated runoff source. When directed by the Engineer or designated representative, posts shall be set at specified intervals to support concentrated loads. The silt fence shall be repaired, replaced, and/or relocated when necessary or as " directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Accumulated silt shall be 129 Environmental Enhancement removed when it reaches a depth of 6 inches (150 mm), or lesser depth if the integrity of the silt fence has been jeopardized. 642. 5 Measurement The work performed and the materials furnished under this item will be measured by the lineal foot of"Silt Fence", complete in place. 642.E Payment The work performed and materials furnished and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit bid price per lineal foot of "Silt Fence". The price shall include full compensation for furnishing, hauling and placing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work including inspecting, repairing, replacing and relocating the fence, removal of silt and removal and disposal of all materials at the completion of construction and re-vegetation of disturbed areas. Payment will be made under: Silt Fence for Erosion Control Per Lineal Foot. END SPECIFIC CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS ry Specification 642 "SILT FENCE" City of Round Rock Technical Specifications Designation Description Item No. 406 Reinforcing Steel American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM) Designation Description A-702 Specification for Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought D-1 682 Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics D-3786 Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitting Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method Texas Department of Transportation Manual of Testing Procedures Designation Description Tex-61 6-J Testing of Construction Fabrics U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Designation Description CW-02215 Civil Works Construction Guide Specification "Plastic Filter Fabric" 130 Environmental Enhancement RELATED CROSS REFERENCE MATERIALS Specification 642 "SILT FENCE" City of Round Rock Standard Specifications Designation Description Item No. 101 Preparing Right of Way Item No. 102 Clearing and Grubbing Item No. 111 Excavation Item No. 120 Channel Excavation Item No. 40 Structural Excavation and Backfill Item No. 610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation 131 Environmental Enhancement Page 33 ITEM NO. RR 700 MOBILIZATION 700.1 - Description Establish and remove offices, plants, and facilities. Move personnel, equipment and supplies to and from the work site or vicinity of the work site to begin work or complete work on contract items. Bonds and insurance are required for performing mobilization. 700.2 - Measurement This Item will be measured by the lump sum as the Work progresses. Mobilization is calculated on the base bid only and will not be paid for separately on any additive alternate items added to the Contract. 700.3 - Payment For this Item, the adjusted Contract amount will be calculated as the total Contract amount less the lump sum for mobilization. Mobilization will be paid in partial payments as follows: • Payment will be made upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment bond, performance bond, and required insurance; • Payment will be made upon verification of documented expenditures for necessary plant and facility setup. The combined amount for all these facilities will be no more than 10% of the mobilization lump sum or 1% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less; • When 1% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 50% of the mobilization lump sum bid or 5% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less, will be paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount; • When 5')/0 of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 100% of the mobilization lump sum bid or 10% of the total Contract amount, whichever is less, will be paid. Previous payments under the Item will be deducted from this amount; • Payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for "Mobilization", if any, will be made after all submittals and record drawings/as-builts are received, final quantities have been determined and when any separate vegetative establishment and maintenance, test, and performance periods provided for in the Contract have been successfully completed. For projects with extended maintenance or performance periods, payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for "Mobilization" will be made 6 months after final acceptance. For Contracts with callout or emergency work, "Mobilization" will be paid as follows: • Payment will be made upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment of performance bonds and required insurance, May-18 1 RR 700 Page 34 • Mobilization for callout work will be paid for each callout work request, and • Mobilization for emergency work will be paid for each emergency work request. Payment will be made under: Mobilization - Per Lump Sum End May-18 2 RR 700 Page 59 ITEM NO. RR 802 PROJECT SIGNS 802.1 - Description Fabricate, furnish, erect, maintain and remove project signs on Capital Improvement Projects (C.I.P.), Bond Program Projects and for project identification at other construction sites, when shown on the drawings. Project Signs shall be in accordance with the City's Standard Details for Project Signs (ST-09, ST-b , ST-11.1 and ST 11.2). 802.2 - Materials A. Sign Face Manufacture the sign face on standard exterior waterproof plywood sheets or other suitable material approved by the Engineer. Unless indicated otherwise on the Standard Details or drawings, the thickness of the plywood sheet shall be a minimum of 3/ inches. B. Posts Provide lumber posts, of the size shown on the Standard Details or drawings that are pressure treated with pentachlorophenol. C. Paint Apply exterior oil base paint, with colors as shown on the Standard Details or Drawings. D. Decals for Capital Improvement Projects and Bond Program Projects. Provide City seal in color using the 4-color process. Electronic images, in EPS format, are available from the City. 802.3 - Installation Erect signs at each major entrance to the project for maximum public identification and exposure. At locations where construction is confined to a specific area, provide a sign size of 4 foot high x 8 foot wide. At locations where C.I.P. roadway construction is in progress, such as a street paving or construction of a sidewalk, provide a sign size of 2 foot high x 3 foot wide. Provide movable project signs on portable wood frames or stanchions located in the proximity of the work area as construction progresses. Provide non-movable project signs supported by two 4" x 4" posts embedded into the ground 2'-6" minimum. Paint all lumber with two coats of paint as shown on the Standard Details or drawings. In special cases, the size of the sign may be changed to meet special requirements, but general proportions shall be maintained. May-18 1 RR 802 Page 60 Maintain and relocate signs if necessary during the progression of the project. Exercise care to assure that placement of the signs does not interfere with or cause sight obstruction to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. For projects located on a street with curb and gutter, install signs no closer than 2 feet from the face of curb on the street. For projects located on a street without curb and gutter, install signs no closer than 6 feet from the edge of street pavement. Stake the locations of project signs prior to installation for approval by the Engineer. The Contractor may install, at the Contractor's own expense, company signs or logos to identify the contractor, architectural firm, etc. Securely attach such signs to the posts at locations shown on the drawings and do not exceed 18 x 36 inches in size. 802.4 - Measurement This Item will be measured by the each. 802.5 - Payment The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid for "Project Signs" of the type specified. This price is full compensation for all sign construction, transportation, maintenance, relocation, and removal as necessary, and equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. Payment will be made under the following: Project Signs (Type) ,Per Each. End May-18 2 RR 802 City of Round Rock DACS Update Standard Specifications Manual Change Control Record i SERlES8OO — UrbanTransportation ., CoRR '' Title RevisionT Status - TxDOT ' Title 1 Item Item ' , 801 Constructiu Detours 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 508 Constructing Detours RR 802 Project Signs 5/21/2018 Revised 1 803 Barricades, Signs and 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 502 l Barricades, Signs, and Traffic �1 Traffic Handling Handling - _ , 824 Traffic Signs 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 636& Signs Item 644 Small Roadside Sign Assemblies , , ', 825 Street Names Signs 5/21/2018 . Deleted - - 827 i Designated Bicycle Lane � 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 644 Small Roadside Sign Assemblies 'i Signing , _ 829 Designated Bicycle Lane 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 666 Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings Markings 830 Traffic Signal Controller 4 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 656 Foundations for Traffic Control _ Foundation Devices 831 Traffic Signal Drilled Shaft 5/21/2018 Replaced 4 Drilled Shaft Foundations Foundations 832 Vehicular Traffic Signal 5/21/2018 1j1 Item 680 Highway Traffic Signals Installation 833 Pedestrian Push Button 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 688 Pedestrian Detectors and Vehicle Assembly Loop Detectors 834 Traffic§Vnal Pull Boxes , 5/21/2018 , Replaced Item 624 Ground Boxes 835 Traffic Signal Conduit . 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 618 Conduit _.--_ 836 Traffic Signal Risers 5/21/2018 Deleted - - 837 Traffic Signal Loop 5/21/2018 Replaced Item SS Video Imaging Vehicle Detection Detectors 6002 System 838 Pedestrian Signal 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 682 Vehicle and Pedestrian Signal Installation Heads 839 Traffic Signal Poles 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 686 Traffic Signal Pole Assemblies 840 Installation of Traffic Signals 5/21/2018 Reptqced Item 680 , Highway Traffic Signals 842 Pull Boxes 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 624 i Ground Boxes 844 Trench Excavation and 5/21/2018 Deleted , - Refer to Item 618 Conduit Backfill for Traffic Signal Conduit * i 860 Pavement Marking Paint 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 666 Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings_ _ 861 Thermoplastic Pavement 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 666 Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings l I Markings 862 I Temporary Removable 5/21/2018 Replaced ��Item 662 Work Zone Pavement Markings Pavement Markings 863 1 Reflectorized Pavement 1 5/21/2018 Replaced I Item 672 Raised Pavement Markers Markers - - Change Control List.docxPage 9 Standard Specifications I Chan•e Control Lo. City of Round Rock DACS Update 864 Abbreviated Pavement Replace Replaced Item 662 Work Zone Pavement Markings Markings 865 1 Non-Reflectorized Traffic 5/21/2018 Replaced ( Item 672 Raised Pavement Markers Buttons I 866 Jiggle Bar Tile 5/21/2018 Deleted - _867 Epoxy Adhesive 5/21/2018 Deleted -870 Work Zone Pavement 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 662 Work Zone Pavement Markings Markings 871 ' Reflectorized Pavement 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 666 Retroreflectorized Pavement Markings Markings 872 Prefabricated Pavement 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 668 Prefabricated Pavement Markings Markings 873 I Raised Pavement Markings 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 672 Raised Pavement Markers 874 Eliminating Existing 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 677 Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Pavement Markings and Markers Markers 875 Pavement Surface 5/21/2018 Replaced Item 678 Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings Preparation for Markings 5/21/2018 Pending Item SS Radar Vehicle Sensing 6029 Device Change Control List.docx Page 10 Standard Specifications Change Control Log _____ SPECIAL PROVISION SP-1 SPECIAL PROVISION To the Measurement and Payment Section of the Following City of Round Rock Standard Technical Specifications For this Project all adopted and/or referenced City of Round Rock Standard Technical Specification Items are hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below. No other clauses or requirements of these Items are waived or changed hereby. In all adopted and/or referenced City of Round Rock Standard Specifications, in the sections titled "Measurement and Payment", delete all text in its entirety and replace with the following paragraph: "All work items installed, provided, constructed, etc. under this specification shall not be paid for separately but shall be considered subsidiary to the lump sum bid price for the project. No separate pay will be provided for any work governed by this specification. The cost of all work materials, labor, overhead, insurance, equipment, etc. necessary to finish the work complete in place shall be included in the lump sum bid price for the project." City of Round Rock Standard Technical Specification Section RR101 Preparing Right of Way RR102 Clearing and Grubbing RR201 Subgrade Preparation RR503 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers RR504 Adjusting Structures RR505 Concrete Encasement and Encasement Pipe RR506 Manholes RR509 Excavation Safety Systems RR510 Pipe RR511 Water Valves RR601 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil RR604 Seeding for Erosion Control RR606 Fertilizer RR610 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation RR620 Filter Fabric RR641 Stabilized Construction Entrance RR642 Silt Fence RR700 Mobilization RR802 Project Signs End SP-1 06/01/21 Page 1 Measurement and Payment THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 02071 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE OF OLD STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, supplies and tools, and performing all operations in connection with the demolition of old structures, portions of old structures, or old equipment, as shown on PLANS, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. Demolition work includes all excavation and backfill to complete the removal hereinafter described. B. Work includes: 1. Demolition of existing structures,facilities, and equipment; 2. Salvage of equipment and/or appurtenances; 3. Disposal of excess material and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage; 4. Restoration. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show equipment and structures designated to be demolished, salvaged, or reused. • B. Related work as called for on PLANS, or in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 1.03- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals". A. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off and/or transfer of utility services and details for dust and noise control. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE Prior to demolition, a joint inspection by the OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR will be made to determine condition of existing structures adjacent to items being demolished. Adjacent structures damaged by demolition operations must be restored to at least pre-existing conditions, at no expense to the OWNER. 1.08- 1.09 (NOT USED) 1.10 SEQUENCING When a specific sequence of operations or events is required by project or site conditions, the sequence is shown on the PLANS. If no sequence is called for on the PLANS, CONTRACTOR may sequence work under this Section to his greatest advantage. 1.11 SCHEDULING Specific scheduling requirements are shown on the PLANS or listed elsewhere in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. If no specific scheduling is listed, then CONTRACTOR may April 30,2021 02071 - Page 1 of 5 Demolition and Salvage of Old Structures Job No.60633796 and Equipment schedule the work under this Section to his greatest advantage provided the work is coordinated with the OWNER's operation and maintenance activities of the existing facilities. PART 2—PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Operational procedures are at the CONTRACTOR's option but must not interfere with the execution of other work. Materials or equipment designated for reuse or salvage to be carefully removed, transported and stored in approved storage areas as designated by OWNER. B. Ownership of Material and Equipment. Certain materials and equipment may be designated for reuse or salvage and are to remain the OWNER's property. If the designated items are damaged during demolition, handling, or storage, the items must be restored to at least pre-existing conditions, at no expense to the OWNER. Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the CONTRACTOR'S property. C. Reuse. Certain items are designated for reuse. Materials and equipment designated for reuse are to be stored and protected until time of installation. D. All material such as pipe, timbers, structural steel, railings, etc., which have been designated as salvable for reuse, to be carefully placed in neat piles in approved storage locations as designated by the OWNER. E. Dismantle structural steel and equipment without damage; matchmark all pieces prior to disassembly; store on blocks, off the ground, in an upright position to protect against damage. F. Where a temporary structure is necessary for a detour adjacent to an existing structure, CONTRACTOR will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he is to dismantle and stack or dispose of material as required above, as soon as new structure is complete. G. Disposal. All materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage to be legally disposed of off-site by the CONTRACTOR. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate hazards to persons and property; to minimize interference with use of adjacent areas, utilities and structures or interruption of use of such utilities; and to provide free passage to and from such adjacent areas of structures. CONTRACTOR is responsible for protection of persons and property, including safe working conditions throughout work progress. B. Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, temporary fences, warning lights, and other similar items that are required for protection of all personnel during demolition and removal operations. C. Erect fences, barricades, guardrails, lights, and other similar items around exposed excavations; maintain safeguards until excavations have been completely filled. April 30,2021 02071 - Page 2 of 5 Demolition and Salvage of Old Structures Job No.60633796 and Equipment D. Protect from damage, all parts of structures and equipment to remain during all phases of demolition. Execute demolition in a manner to prevent damage from falling debris to OWNER's property or adjacent property. E. CONTRACTOR is responsible for safety and maintaining integrity of adjacent structures and, consequently, is liable for any movement or settlement and any resulting injuries or damage. Provide proper bracing and shoring necessary for support. Do not overload floors with equipment and debris. F. Do not interfere with use of adjacent facilities; maintain free and safe access at all times. Coordinate work with the OWNER to avoid interference with operation of existing facilities. G. Provide enclosed dust chutes with control gates from each floor or elevated area to carry debris to truck beds and govern flow of material into truck. Prevent spread of flying particles and dust. Sprinkle rubbish and debris with water daily to keep dust to a minimum. H. Protection of Openings: As equipment and piping is removed from exterior walls and floors, install closures over the openings. Closures in exterior walls to be of solid wood or exterior grade plywood, C-C grade, minimum 3/4-inch thick, cut to fit the opening and installed in a manner to shed rain toward the exterior. Anchor wood to the wall in a manner which will not damage the remaining masonry. In addition to previously listed fire and safety rules to be observed in performance of work, include following: 1. No debris to be permitted to fall or be thrown from buildings; use chutes or remove through interior of buildings to ground level. Do not throw debris down stairwells or down shafts. 2. Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that might cause a fire is used, provide and maintain fire extinguishers nearby ready for immediate use. All possible users to be instructed in the use of fire extinguishers. 3. Hydrants to remain accessible at all times. No debris to be permitted to accumulate within a radius of 15 feet of fire hydrants. 4. Fire lines to remain in operation and are to be protected from damage by CONTRACTOR's operations. 5. At least one stairway to be maintained in usable condition to all floors. Keep stairways free of obstructions and debris. 6. Blasting is not permitted. 7. Fires are not permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the OWNER, ENGINEER, and local Fire Marshall. 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION,AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS A. Removing and Replacing Concrete. Use these procedures where existing concrete is to be removed to facilitate operations and is to be subsequently replaced. 1. Make initial cut with a concrete saw exercising care to avoid cutting reinforcement. 2. After removing concrete, cut cross bars at center of breakout and bend back. 3. Before replacing concrete, bend bars to the original position. Cut the bars so that they will extend into the new concrete by a minimum 20 bar diameters. 4. Immediately before placing new concrete, thoroughly clean old concrete and apply a heavy coat of bonding agent. 5. Replace concrete in accordance with Division 3-Concrete. B. Concrete Structures: Remove concrete structures or concrete portions of structures in sizes not larger than 2 cubic feet. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent April 30,2021 02071 - Page 3 of 5 Demolition and Salvage of Old Structures Job No.60633796 and Equipment ground line which will not interfere in any manner with the proposed construction may be left in place, but removal to be carried at least 2 feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Cut off reinforcement close to the concrete. C. Brick or Stone Structures: Remove brick or stone structures, or stone portions of structures, in sizes not larger than 2 cubic feet. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction may be left in place, but removal to be carried at least 2 feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. D. Steel Structures: Dismantle steel structures, or steel portions of structures, in sections of such weight and dimensions as to permit convenient handling, hauling, and storing if material is to be reused or salvaged. Remove rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans, and steel stringers of truss spans by cutting the heads with a "cold cut" and punching or drilling from the hole or by such other method as will not injure members for reuse if material is to be reused or salvaged. Removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure is not required unless specifically called for on the PLANS. CONTRACTOR to have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame-cutting is not permitted, however, when the structural unit is to be salvaged to permit re-erection. In such case, carefully match-mark all members with paint prior to dismantling and remove all rivets and bolts from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph. E. Timber Structures: Remove timber structures, or timber portions of structures, in such a manner to minimize damage to the timber. Remove all bolts and nails from such lumber. Unless otherwise shown on PLANS, CONTRACTOR may remove entirely or cut off timber piles at a point not less than 2 feet below ground line. F. Culverts or Sewers: Unless otherwise shown on PLANS, remove pipe and appurtenances by careful excavation of all dirt on top and sides in such a manner that pipe will not be damaged. G. Mechanical or Electrical Equipment: 1. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect mechanical and electrical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or reused. 2. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage. 3. Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items: a. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls,fixtures,and insulation. 1) Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove materials above accessible ceilings. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to remain. b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with applicable Section. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Patch, repair, and/or fire stop holes through walls, ceilings, and floors as necessary to maintain fire rating of area. April 30,2021 02071 - Page 4 of 5 Demolition and Salvage of Old Structures Job No.60633796 and Equipment B. All portions of below grade hydraulic structures that remain after demolition activities are to have minimum 6-inch diameter holes on a 6 foot grid (center-to-center) placed in the floor slab prior to backfihling operations to allow water to drain from structures. Holes may be cored or removed with impact methods. C. Backfill all excavations made in connection with this Section and all openings below natural ground line caused by removal of old structures, or portions thereof, to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise shown on PLANS. Place that portion of the backfill which will support any portion of a structure, roadbed, or embankment as required for placing structural backfill and embankment. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, use mechanical or hand tamps or yammers to obtain the required density comparable with adjacent undisturbed material. D. Backfihling with rubbish or burying rubbish on the site is not permitted. E. Anchor bolts exposed after demolition in concrete walls or floors to be cut back at least one inch below the surface and patched with cement grout to provide a smooth surface. F. Pipe supports to be removed includes removal of existing anchor bolts, and concrete- based anchor bolts to be cut back one inch below the surface and patched smooth with cement grout. 3.05-3.06 (NOT USED) 3.07 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Keep the work areas free of accumulated debris. Materials and equipment that are not designated for reuse or salvage to be removed from the site weekly, unless otherwise approved. B. Disposal and Cleanup: Debris, including concrete, non-reusable brick and stone, metals and similar materials and non-salvaged equipment to become property of CONTRACTOR. Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and equipment which are not to be salvaged. C. Upon completion of work of this Section and after removal of all debris, structure to be broom clean and site to be left in clean condition satisfactory to OWNER. 3.08-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 02071 - Page 5 of 5 Demolition and Salvage of Old Structures Job No.60633796 and Equipment r-, THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 02224 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes providing the following structural excavation and backfill requirements: A. Excavation for general requirements, structures, and/or pipe, including disposal offsite of excavated material, and backfilling around completed structures to the level of original ground or finished grade. B. Necessary pumping or bailing, sheeting, drainage, construction, and installation and removal of any required cofferdam(s). C. Unless otherwise shown on PLANS, work includes removal of old structures (or portions thereof)trees, and all other obstructions necessary to complete construction. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS(NOT USED) 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort 12,400 ft-lbs/ft. ASTM D2487 Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes(Unified Soil Classification System) 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Cofferdam(s) is a temporary or removable structure to keep surrounding earth, water, or both, out of the excavation and may be constructed of earth, timber, steel, concrete, or a combination thereof. B. Caisson(s) is a permanent part of the substructure which sinks gradually into place as material is excavated within the area protected by its sidewalls. It may be either open well type or pneumatic type caisson(s). C. Width and Length: From vertical plane outside structure line equal to thickness of footing or slab. D. Depth: From bottom of footing or slab to finished ground line or natural ground line, whichever is lower in elevation. 1.05- 1.07 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 02224—Page 1 of 4 Excavation and Backfill Job No.60633796 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store excavated materials used for future backfill in piles at locations convenient for re- handling and locate so as not to interfere with other work. Locate edge of stockpile no closer to excavation than 1%z times the excavation depth. B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position. C. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed WORK, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement. 1.09 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide site drainage and/or groundwater control to protect excavations. Use site grading, cofferdam(s), ditches, and/or other means to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations or ponding on areas where foundations or pavement will be located. Use pumps, bailing, well points or other means to lower groundwater elevation below bottom elevation of excavation. Maintain continuous ground water and surface water control until structure is complete and ground surface has been brought to final grade. B. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32° F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material has completely thawed. C. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. 1.10- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2—PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The work as hereinafter specified is incidental to other work being performed under this Contract and no separate payment is provided for work performed. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General Excavation 1. Excavate to the lines and depths shown on PLANS, or as noted herein. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1ft, except where dimensions or grades are shown, or specified as maximum or minimum. Remove and dispose of any loose material, native soil, and any deleterious materials. 2. Furnish supports for piping and structures within excavated area at no additional cost to OWNER. B. Dewatering 1. Provide dry excavation by pumping or bailing from interior of excavation or by installing well points around perimeter of excavation. Discharge water from dewatering operations outside of excavation a sufficient distance to prevent water from flowing back into excavation. Avoid movement of water through or ----� along concrete being placed. 2. Do not pump or bail during concrete placement, or for a minimum of 24 hours thereafter, unless from suitable sump separated from concrete by watertight wall. April 30,2021 02224—Page 2 of 4 Excavation and Backfill Job No.60633796 C. General Site Grading 1. Excavate to the lines and depths shown on PLANS, or as designated by the ENGINEER. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1ft, except where dimensions or grades are shown, or specified as maximum or minimum. 2. In areas that require the placement of soils to raise the grade to the proposed elevations, properly compacted general fill soils shall be placed. General fill soils shall consist of cohesive soils free of organics or other deleterious materials, and shall have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent, a plasticity index not less than five (5) nor more than 20, and a maximum particle size of three (3) inches. The general fill shall have no more than 20 percent of the material greater than or equal to 2½-inch particle size. The general fill shall be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick horizontal lifts and shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor (ASTM D1557). The moisture content of the general fill at the time of compaction shall be between minus one (-1)and plus three (+3) percent above the optimum moisture content. D. Preparation of Foundation Pad 1. Within the structure footprint, remove and dispose of any loose material, native soil, and any deleterious materials to the selected removal and replacement depth as show in the table below. At that time, the geotechnical engineer shall observe the exposed subgrade to assess whether further excavation is needed. 2. Where necessary to increase or decrease footing depths, obtain prior approval by the ENGINEER providing information in the form of drawings or details of the proposed changes prior to initiating. 3. After excavation, scarify at least 6 inches of the exposed clay subgrade and compact to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined using TEX- 114-E. Hold water content within optimum and+3%of optimum water content. 4. Bring the pad to grade using imported select fill consisting of crushed limestone derivative material generally conforming to the following: Retained on 2-1/2"screen: 0% Retained on 7/8"screen: 5% -50% Retained on 3/8"screen: 25%-65% Retained on No. 4 mesh: 35%-75% Retained on No. 40 mesh sieve: 60%-90% Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall meet the following plasticity requirements: Passing No. 40 Maximum Minimum Plasticity Sieve Plasticity Index Index 25%to40% 15 3 10% -25% 20 4 5. Compact the select fill material to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined using TxDOT Test Method TEX-1 13-E. Hold water contents within ±2%of optimum and maintain compacted lift thickness to 6 inches or less. E. Utility Trenches Beneath Foundations 1. Utility trenches to conform to the requirements of the adjacent material and vary by depth accordingly(i.e.: Select fill or lean clay depending on depth). 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Unless otherwise authorized, perform all backfill requirements in the presence of the ENGINEER. April 30,2021 02224—Page 3 of 4 Excavation and Backfill Job No.60633796 3.06-3.08 (NOT USED) 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect excavations from rainfall and surface water. If supporting soil is exposed to adverse wet or dry conditions, excavate deeper and/or wider to sound materials at no additional cost to OWNER. Prior to such activity, notify ENGINEER. 3.10 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 02224-Page 4 of 4 Excavation and Backfill Job No.60633796 SECTION 02242 CEMENT-STABILIZED SAND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. General: Under this Contract, CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, appliances, tools, equipment, transportation, services, and all labor and superintenence necessary for the construction of the Work as described in these Technical Specifications and as shown on the PLANS. The completed installation shall not lack any part which can be reasonably implied as necessary to its proper functioning nor any subsidiary item which is customarily furnished, and the CONTRACTOR shall deliver the installation to the OWNER in condition for operation. B. Work, in general, includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of cement-stabilized sand backfill as shown on PLANS and as indicated in other Sections of the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 2. Work Specified Elsewhere: Related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Work specified elsewhere: Related WORK as called for on the PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 1.03- 1.17 (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S)(NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Aggregate: 1. Deleterious materials in sand not to exceed the following limits, by weight: Materials removed by decantation 5.0 °A Clay lumps 0.5 Other deleterious substances (e.g. coal, shale, coated grains of soft flaky particles) 2.0 2. Gradation Requirements: Sieve Size %Retained 1/4" 0-5 No. 40 0-40 No. 100 70-100 No. 200 95-100 3. Color test ASTM C40. Color is not to be darker than standard color. April 30,2021 02242 —Page 1 of 2 Cement-Stabilized Sand Backfill Job No.60633796 B. Plasticity Index: 10 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. C. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. D. Water: Fresh and clean. 2.03—2.13(NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION(NOT USED) 3.01 —3.04 (NOT USED) 3.05 ERECTION INSTALLATION APPLICATION CONSTRUCTION A. Mixing: Use not less than 114 sacks of cement per cubic yard of mixture. Use amount of water required to provide mix suitable for mechanical hand tamping and mix in mixer to obtain specified results. Material not in place within 1 %z hours after mixing or that has obtained an initial set will be rejected and removed from the site. B. Placing: Place at locations indicated on PLANS and in TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. Place in maximum 8"lifts and compact each lift with power-driven machnical tampers. Compact to a minimum dry density of 102 pounds per cubic foot. Place around cost- inplace concrete structures only after they have cured for at least four days. 3.06—3.15 (NOT USED) 3.16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 02242 —Page 2 of 2 Cement-Stabilized Sand Backfill Job No.60633796 SECTION 02505 FLEXIBLE BASE CRUSHED STONE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This item governs furnishing and placing a crushed stone base course for surfacing, pavement, or other base courses applications. "Flexible Base" shall be constructed on an approved, prepared surface in one or more courses conforming to the typical sections and to the lines and grades, indicated on the PLANS or establishing by the ENGINEER or designated representative. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Related Requirements: Other related requirements as shown on the PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE(ANSI) 1.04—1.05(NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals": 1. Source, gradation and test results for the crushed limestone material. 2. Samples of Flexible Base material for testing per requirements as specified under Paragraph 2.02 B. 3. Field density test results for in-place compacted flexible base. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Material to be delivered to the job site in uniform capacity. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Unfavorable construction conditions: No portion of the Work shall be constructed under conditions which adversely affect the quality or efficiency of thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work in a proper and satisfactory manner. 1.10-1.11 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 02505 —Page 1 of 4 Flexible Base Crushed Stone Job No.60633796 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Mineral Aggregate The material shall be crushed argillaceous limestone meeting the requirements specified herein. The material shall consist of durable crushed stone that has been screened to the required gradation. Flexible base materials shall be tested according to the following TxDoT standard test methods: Preparation for Soil Constants and Sieve Tex-1O1-E Analysis Liquid Limit Tex-104-E Plastic Limit(1) Tex-105-E Plasticity Index Tex-106-E Sieve Analysis Tex-1 1O-E Wet Ball Mill (2) Tex-1 16-E Triaxial Test Tex-117-E, Part II 1.) Plasticity Index shall be determined in accordance with Tex-107-E (linear shrinkage) when liquid limit is unattainable as defined in Tex-104-E. 2.)When a soundness value is required on the drawings, the material shall be tested in accordance with Tex-41 1-A. B. The material shall be well graded and shall meet the following requirements: Sieve Desi.nation Other Re.uirements % Retained US SI 1 3/4" 45 mm 0 7/8" 22.4 mm 10-35 3/8" 9.5 mm 30-50 #4 4.75 mm 45-65 #40 425 m 70-85 Maximum Plasticity 10 Index Maximum Wet Ball 40 Mill Maximum Increase in 20 passing#40 sieve from Wet Ball Mill Test C. Minimum compressive strength when subjected to the triaxial test shall be 35 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi at 15 psi lateral pressure. D. Stockpiling, Storage and Management 1. Managing Material:Stockpiles shall be constructed on a relatively smooth area that has been cleared of debris,weeds, brush, trees and grass. Stockpiles shall contain between 25,000 and 50,000 cubic yards. The stockpile shall be constructed using April 30,2021 02505 -Page 2 of 4 Flexible Base Crushed Stone Job No.60633796 scrapers, bottom dumps or other similar equipment that allows dumping and spreading without rehandling. The stockpile shall be constructed to allow dumping and spreading in one direction only. The height of the stockpile shall not exceed the capabilities of available equipment to make a full cut(bottom to top)on any of the four sides. 2. Material shall be loaded from the stockpile by making successive vertical cuts through its entire depth 2.03—2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION(NOT USED) 3.01 GENERAL(NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Finish subgrade preparation in conformance with typical sections shown on the PLANS and other applicable items of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION sections prior to delivery of base course. 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Methods 1. Preparation of Subgrade: Flexible base shall not be placed until the CONTRACTOR has verified by proof rolling that the subgrade has been prepared and compacted in conformity with the typical sections, lines and grades indicated on the PLANS.Any deviation shall be corrected and proof rolled prior to placement of the flexible base material. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall not place flexible base until the subgrade has cured to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER or designated representativ. As a minimum, this will be after the surface displays no damp spots and there is no evidence of "sponginess" in the subgrade. 3. First Lift: Immediately before placing the flexible base material, the subgrade shall be checked for conformity with grade and section. The thickness of each lift of flexible base shall be equal increments of the total base depth. No single lift shall be more than six inches or less than three inches compacted thickness. a. The material shall be delivered in approve vehicles. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to deliver the required amount of material. If it becomes evident that insufficient material was placed, additional material as necessary shall be delivered and the entire course scarified, mixed and compacted. b. Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER or designated representative. In the event inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances render spreading the material impractical, the materials shall be spread as soon as conditions allow. c. Additionally, if the material cannot be spread and worked the same day it is deposited, the CONTRACTOR shall "close up"the dump piles before leaving the job site."Closed up"shall be defined as the use of a motor grader to blade all dump piles together, leaving no open spaces between piles. d. The material shall be spread, sprinkled, if required, then thoroughly mixed; bladed, dragged and shaped to conform to the typical sections indicated on the drawings. April 30,2021 02505 —Page 3 of 4 Flexible Base Crushed Stone Job No.60633796 e. All areas and"nests"of segregated coarse or fine material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well graded material. f. Each lift shall be sprinkled as required to bring the material to optimum moisture content,then compacted to the extent necessary to provide 95 percent maximum dry density per TxDoT Test Method Tex-113-E. In addition to the requirements specified for density,the full depth of flexible base material shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. After each section of flexible base material is completed, tests, as necessary,will be made by the designated representative. As a minimum,three in-place density tests per day will be taken. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements.All initial testing will be paid for by the OWNER.All retesting shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. 4. Succeeding Lifts: Construction methods for succeeding lifts shall be the same as prescribed for the first lift. 5. Density: The flexible base shall be compacted to not less than 100 percent density as determined by TxDoT Test Method Tex-1 I 3-E. 6. Field density determination shall be made in accordance with TxDoT Test Method Tex-115-E unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER or designated representative. Each lift of the flexible base shall also be tested by proof rolling. 3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION 3.04 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing to be completed as directed by the ENGINEER during material placement as specified in Paragraph 3.02. 3.05—3.15 (NOT USED) 3.16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment for work performed under this Section except as indicated below. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 02505 —Page 4 of 4 Flexible Base Crushed Stone Job No.60633796 SECTION 03001 CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the furnishing of materials, storing, mixing, handling and the placement of concrete for concrete pavement, precast concrete, cast-in-place structures or as identified for placement within other Specification Sections or as shown on PLANS. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE(ACI) ACI 304R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete ACI 3.04.4R Placing Concrete With Belt Conveyors ACI 3.04.5R Batching, Mixing, and Job Control of Lightweight Concrete ACI 3.04.6R Guide for the Use of Volumetric Measuring and Continuous-Mixing Concrete Equipment ACI 318/318R Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C143/C143A Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method April 30,2021 03001 -Page 1 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 ASTM C232 Standard Test Methods for Bleeding of Concrete ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C293 Standard Test Method For Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading) ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. HRWR—High Range Water Reducing Admixture B. ppm—parts per million 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish laboratory reports showing proportions and materials selected will produce laboratory-mixed concrete of specified quality and having strengths 20 percent higher than 28-day strength specified, at maximum slump and maximum air content specified. B. Samples 1. Furnish material samples to approved testing laboratory for review and testing. 2. Provide sufficient material quantities for testing and determining mixes to produce concrete classes specified. C. Mix Designs 1. Submit mix designs for each different concrete mix proposed for the project. 2. Secure confirmation of laboratory tests on proposed mix designs prior to submittal. 3. Use only approved mix designs. 4. Make required tests of mix as called for elsewhere in this Specification Section under Paragraph 1.06 E. D. Reports: Provide certified mill test reports on cement and sieve analysis on aggregates. When fly ash is used, provide documentation to confirm fly ash source is approved by the Texas Department of Transportation for use in concrete for bridges. E. Tests 1. Make moisture tests of aggregate to ensure proper hatching and proportioning. 2. Provide and maintain curing facilities for test specimens conforming to ASTM C31. 3. For Structural Concrete a. Perform sufficient number of tests to maintain check on quality. April 30,2021 03001 —Page 2 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 b. Conduct tests as per test procedures ASTM C31 and C39 for , Compression Test. c. When Portland cement concrete(other than high-early-strength concrete) is used, test minimum of two standard 6-inch by 12-inch cylinders at 7 days and minimum of two 6-inch by 12-inch cylinders at 28 days for each 50 yards of concrete placed, for each day's placement, or for each structure,whichever results in more cylinders. d. When high-early-strength concrete is used, test a minimum of two standard 6-inch by 12-inch cylinders at 3 days and minimum of two 6-inch by 12-inch cylinders at 7 days for each 50 cubic yards of concrete placed, for each day's placement, or for each structure, whichever results in more cylinders. Minimum strengths normally required at 7 and 28 days will be required at 3 and 7 days, respectively. 4. For paving concrete, test pavement work as required by PLANS and/or as follows: a. Make one beam for each 1,000 square yards of pavement, or part thereof, for each day's placement, and/or one beam on each street. b. Size of beams as required by ASTM C31. c. Core sampling in accordance with requirements as indicated on PLANS. If the requirements are not shown on PLANS, make one core for each 1,000 square yards of pavement or at least one core for each street, whichever is least in area. Core samples to be in accordance with ASTM C42. d. Fill core hole with nonshrinking grout per ASTM C1107 at no additional cost to OWNER. e. Test core for compressive strength and for thickness in accordance with ASTM C42. f. Test for flexural strength in accordance with ASTM C293, "Flexural Strength of Concrete(using simple beam with center-point loading)." 5. For air entrainment, make two tests, in accordance with ASTM C231 or C173, for each day's placing. 6. Measure slump, in accordance with ASTM C143, periodically, but not less than one measurement for each batch of concrete from which specimens are made. F. Specimen Handling 1. Mark test specimens clearly in a definite sequence. 2. Transport and store specimens to prevent damage. 3. Provide insulated shed for storage of cylinders and beams. 4. Provide records identifying each cylinder with locations from which specimens are taken. 5. Cure specimens under laboratory conditions. When there is a possibility of surrounding air temperature falling below 40°F; additional specimens shall be made and cured under job conditions. G. Failure to Meet Specifications 1. Concrete failing to meet specifications will be rejected. 2. Should a 3-day (high-early cement) or 7-day (normal cement) test fail to meet established strength requirements, extended curing, or resumed curing, may be required. 3. CONTRACTOR to strengthen structures, or replace portions thereof, which fail to meet established strength requirements, at CONTRACTOR's expense. 4. Test cores, when required, to be in accordance with procedures of ASTM C42, at no additional cost to OWNER. The OWNER is to select a testing laboratory, conforming to ASTM E329, to make tests throughout the concrete operations. When requested by the OWNER, ENGINEER will monitor tests and review results. April 30,2021 03001 -Page 3 of 8 concrete Job No.60633796 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cement 1. Store in weather tight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination, and warehouse set. 2. Store off ground in a well-ventilated building. B. Aggregates 1. Stockpile to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. 2. Use only one supply source for each aggregate stockpile. C. Admixtures 1. Store to prevent contamination, evaporation, or damage. 2. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing or harmful temperature ranges. 3. Agitate emulsions prior to use. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Concrete: Ready-mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94. 1. Cement a. ASTM C150,Type I or Type I/Il. b. Allowable weight variations and length of storage to be in accordance with ASTM C150. c. Use no caked cement. d. Deliver in bags for site-mixed concrete. e. Use only one brand of cement in any one structure. 2. Admixtures a. Air-entraining admixtures in accordance with ASTM C260. b. Water-reducing and retarding admixtures in accordance with ASTM C494,Type A or Type D admixture, modified as follows: 1) Bleeding water no greater than bleeding water of ASTM C494 reference concrete when tested as per ASTM C232. 2) Increase durability, decrease permeability, and increase resistance to surface scaling, when compared to ASTM C494 reference concrete. 3) No chlorides or alkalies added during manufacture of admixture. c. High-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in accordance with ASTM C494, Type F or Type G, modified as follows: 1) Superplasticized concrete to be nonsegregating, have little bleeding, and have physical properties similar to low water- cement ratio concrete. 2) Admixture composed of a synthesized sulfonated polymer to be added to the concrete mixer with gauge water at the central batch plant. 3) Use only one liquid admixture to achieve the superplasticized concrete, except where air entrainment is desired, in which case, air entraining admixture to be compatible with superplasticizer admixture. April 30,2021 03001 -Page 4 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 4) Treated concrete must be capable of maintaining superplastic state in excess of 2 hours. 5) Dosage as recommended by the manufacturer. d. Additional Requirements 1) Manufacturer to provide proof of successful field use of water- reducing and retarding admixture from recognized laboratories and other authorities. 2) Manufacturer to provide local representative and warehouse facilities, when requested by OWNER. 3) Provide qualified concrete technician to assist in concrete mix design, if required. 4) If required, CONTRACTOR to acquire approved commercial laboratory testing, at no cost to OWNER, to furnish certification of compliance with this specification. 5) Water-reducing and retarding admixtures used in Class A and Class K concrete only, unless otherwise specified. 6) Use manufacturer's published recommended dosage for optimum results as minimum requirements. Dosage may be varied by ENGINEER after analysis of results of local commercial laboratory tests using materials from sources assigned by CONTRACTOR. 7) Dispensing and mixing equipment and procedures at batch plant are subject to approval. 3. Coarse Aggregate a. Durable particles of crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combi- nation thereof, conforming to ASTM C33. b. Use clean, durable particles, free from frozen materials, clay, salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other coating which would adversely affect strength of concrete or bonding of aggregate to cement paste. 1) Nonprestressed concrete aggregate: ASTM Size No. 467 (1-1/2 In. to No. 4) for liquid containing structural elements 10 inches and thicker, and ASTM Size No. 57 (1 In. to No.4) for all other concrete. 2) Prestressed concrete aggregate: ASTM Size No. 57(1 In. to No. 4). c. The maximum size coarse aggregate to be as indicated above or no greater than three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between parallel reinforcing bars or prestressing tendons, whichever is smaller. 4. Fine Aggregate a. Natural sand as per ASTM C33. b. Fineness modulus between 2.4 and 2.9. 5. Water a. Free from oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, or other deleterious substances and not containing more than 1,000 parts per million of sulphates. b. Testing not required from municipal supplies approved by Texas Department of Health, but from other sources water will be sampled and tested, at no additional cost to OWNER, before use. 6. Slump a. Test method as per ASTM C143. b. As indicated in Classification Table. 7. Mix Proportioning a. Per CLASSIFICATION TABLE, based on maximum water-cement ratio and minimum strength requirements, with limits set on minimum cement content. b. Increase cement content above minimum or use approved admixtures, without additional cost to OWNER, if type, gradation, or sizes of April 30,2021 03001 -Page 5 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 aggregate being supplied gives concrete mixture not meeting strength and workability requirements. 8. Coring Materials: Per Section"Concrete Structures". B. Nonshrink Grout: Grout to have moderate fluidity and to conform to CRD-C621. C. Fly Ash 1. ASTM C618, Class F. 2. Compatible with other concrete ingredients. 3. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the Texas Department of Transportation for use in concrete for bridges. 4. When fly ash is used, it shall make up from 20% to 25% of the total cementitious material, by weight. Min. Comp. Lbs.Water/ Min. Cement Slump Strength (psi) Lbs. Cement per C.Y.(2)(10) Range Total Air Class-Type 7-Day 28-Day (WIC) (Lbs.) (in.)* Content(%) A-Structural 2,000 3,000 0.55 494 2'/2 to 4'/2 21/2 to 41/2 Asp-Structural3 2,000 3,000 0.50 423 7 to 10(4) 3 to 5 B-Slope Protection 1,200 2,000 0.75 400 2Y2 to 4 2'/2 C-Pipe Blocking - 1,500 0.97 282 3 to 5 3 to 6 D-Seal Slab - - - 376 6 to 8 as needed E - Monolithic 2,000 3,000 0.55 564 4 to 6 3 to 5 Sewer K-Structural6 2,800 4,000 0.45 564 3½to5 2½to4% Ksp-Structural3 2,800 4,000 0.40 517 7 to 10(4) 3 to 5 Kw-Structural9 2,800 4,000 0.40 517 7 to 10(4 3 to 5 P-Paving 7-lnch8 2,000 3,000 0.66 470 3 to 5 21,6 to 4% 500(') All Slump Ranges+'/2-Inch Tolerance (1) Include in maximum water, free water in aggregate minus absorption of aggregate based on a 30-minute absorption period. (2) For concrete placed under water, minimum cement per cubic yard shall be 611 pounds (6.5 bags). (3) Asp, Ksp,, and KW shall contain approved HRWR Admixture. (4) Maximum 2-inch slump before addition of HRWR Admixture. (5) (NOT USED) (6) Use approved water-reducing and retarding admixture. (7) Minimum flexural strength at 7 days. (8) Slump range'/z- 1'/2 inches when slip form method of construction used. (9) Use Class F Fly Ash in Class KW concrete. (10) Total combined weight of Portland cement and fly ash, if any is used. APPLICATIONS OF VARIOUS CONCRETE MIX CLASSES A AND K: Class K Concrete or Class Ksp Concrete: At Contractor's option, use either Class K or Ksp for any concrete uses not noted otherwise. Class KW Concrete: Use for all concrete elements of environmental (liquid containing)structures, 2.03 FABRICATION (NOT USED) April 30,2021 03001 -Page 6 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. To be in accordance with those requirements as specified within Paragraphs 1.08 and 2.02 of this Specification Section. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Mixing Concrete 1. Ready-mixed and in accordance within the requirements of ACI 304, 304.4, 304.5 and 304.6, measuring, mixing, and transporting of concrete as applicable to type methods used. 2. Postpone or delay work during adverse weather conditions. 3. Protect dry batch material so it reaches mixer in a dry condition. 4. Use batch mixer having approved and positive water control and measuring device for all materials. 5. Continue mixing to ensure uniform distribution of materials, but not less than 11/2 minutes after all materials have been introduced into mixer drum. 6. Rotate drum at peripheral speed recommended by mixer manufacturer. 7. Mix and deliver as per ASTM C94. a. Add mixing water at plant. b. Mix concrete in quantities required for immediate use, and discharge at jobsite within 1 hour after introduction of cement to aggregate. If CONTRACTOR can prove that concrete consistency measured by slump will not be reduced by more than 2 inches when superplasticized concrete is used, time interval between mixing and placing may be extended to a maximum of 90 minutes or to a period in which slump loss will not exceed 2 inches. c. Begin mixing operation within 30 minutes after cement and aggregates intermingle. d. Ready-mixed concrete producer to furnish delivery tickets indicating: 1) Delivery date and time dispatched. 2) Name and location of project. 3) Name of CONTRACTOR. 4) Name of ready-mixed concrete producer. 5) Truck number. 6) Number of cubic yards of concrete in load. 7) Class of concrete. 8) Cement content in bags per cubic yard of concrete. 9) Amount of admixture in concrete, if any. 10) Number of gallons of water in mixture. 11) Air content. 8. Job mix concrete in approved type mixer and do not load beyond manufacturer's rated capacity. a. Normal Weight Concrete 1) Mix batches of 1 cubic yard or less for minimum of 11/2 minutes after materials are placed in mixer. 2) Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each cubic yard increase over one cubic yard batch. b. Maintain positive batch control equipment to within 1 percent accuracy. c. Clean, maintain, and operate equipment so as to thoroughly mix material as required. d. Hand-mixing permitted for small placements only as authorized. April 30,2021 03001 —Page 7 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 e. Hand-mixed batches not to exceed a two-bag batch in volume. 9. Do not mix when air temperature is at or below 40°F (taken in the shade away from artificial heat)and falling, or if likely to fall below 40°F in next 24 hours. 10. To produce concrete with minimum temperature of 50°F, heat aggregate and/or water uniformly as follows: a. Water temperature not to exceed 180°F and/or aggregate temperature not to exceed 150°F. b. Heat mass of aggregate uniformly. c. Temperature of aggregates and water to be between 50°F and 85°F before introduction of cement. B. Installation 1. In accordance with other Specification Sections which are included within these Contract Documents. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified under Paragraphs 2.02 and 3.03 of this Specification Section. 3.06-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 03001 -Page 8 of 8 Concrete Job No.60633796 SECTION 03112 CONCRETE STRUCTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes the construction procedures for all concrete structures which includes the methods required for the forming, placing, and curing of concrete as shown on PLANS and as specified elsewhere within the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show sizes, shapes, thickness, reinforcing requirements, and location of expan- sion and construction joints for concrete structures. B. Related work as called for on PLANS, or in this or other Specification Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C579 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension ASTM D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ASTM D2628 Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements ASTM E488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS(FS) FS-TT-S-0277E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component(For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building and other Structures)Amendment 3 April 30,2021 03112—Page 1 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 U.S.ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS(CRD) CRD-C621 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. "Curing Day" is any calendar day during which the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50°F for at least 19 hours (on colder days, if satisfactory provisions are made, maintain the temperature at all surfaces of the concrete above 40°F for the entire 24-hour day). Required curing period begins when all concrete therein has attained initial set. B. "Nonshrink" is defined as no plastic or vertical shrinkage at any time when measured in accordance with ASTM C827. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". 1. Shop drawings and Product Data. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals",furnish the following: a. Concrete mix designs, samples and test reports in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 03001, "Concrete". b. Drawings showing placement, sizes and materials for reinforcing in accordance with Specification Section 03210, "Reinforcing Steel". c. Prior to any construction activities, submit the following information in full or part as directed by the ENGINEER. 1. Concrete placement schedule. 2. Tabulation of concrete surfaces indicating types of finish to be provided on each surface. 1.07- 1.10 (NOT USED) 1.11 SCHEDULING Time sequence requirements for construction operations are as specified under Paragraph 3.01 of this Specification Section. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Concrete: In accordance with Specification Section 03001, "Concrete" with class of concrete as noted on PLANS. B. Reinforcing Steel: In accordance with Specification Section 03210, "Reinforcing Steep' with size and type of reinforcing noted on PLANS. C. Expansion Joint Filler Material: In accordance with ASTM D1752. April 30,2021 03112—Page 2 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 D. Waterstop: Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride plastic compound and containing no scrap or reclaimed material. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish "Wirestop" waterstops as manufactured by Paul Murphy Plastics, Roseville, Michigan or equal of the following types. 1. Expansion Joints: Center-bulb, ribbed, minimum of 0.375-inch thick, 6-inch width (unless otherwise shown on PLANS) with integral wire loops for attachment to reinforcing steel. "Wirestop"Model CR-6380 or equal. 2. Construction Joints: Flat, ribbed, minimum of 0.375-inch thick, 6-inch width (unless otherwise shown on PLANS) with integral wire loops for attachment to reinforcing steel. "Wirestop"Model FR-6380 or equal. 3. When called for on the PLANS furnish flat, dumbbell type, a minimum of 0.375- inch thick, 6-inch width (unless otherwise shown on PLANS) with integral wire loops for attachment to reinforcing steel. "Wirestop" Model FD-6380 or equal. E. Curing Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, use one of the following. 1. Potable Water. 2. Liquid Membrane- Forming compounds in accordance with ASTM C309. F. Forms and Falsework 1. Timber: a. Seasoned, good quality timber free from loose or unsound knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, and other imperfections which would affect its strength or impair finished surface of concrete. b. Wedges, when required, to be hardwood. 2. Metal: a. Thickness of metal forms as required to maintain true shape without warping or bulging. b. Keep metal forms free from rust, grease, or other foreign materials, and use only those which present a smooth surface and form to alignment. c. Aluminum is not permitted. 3. All screeds to be made of metal pipe. Plastic or hardened concrete sills not allowed in work. Maximum screed spacing 8-feet-0-inches. G. Grout 1. Nonshrink Grout: Premixed grout which is nonmetallic, noncorrosive, and non- staining; containing specially selected silicon sands, cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents. a. Conform to requirements of CRD-C621. b. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C109. c. Maintain grout temperature during placement between 50°F and 90°F. d. Prepare and place grout according to grout manufacturer's specifications and the requirements of Paragraph 3.03 of this Specification Section. 2. Nonshrink Epoxy Grout: a. Minimum 7-day compressive strength of 16,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C579. b. Five Star epoxy grout as manufactured by Five Star Products or equal. H. Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene film minimum thickness of 0.010-inch (10 mils) with high- impact strength rating. Concrete Bonding Agent-Acceptable manufacturers: 1. "Duraweld-C"as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Company. 2. "Acrylic Bond Crete"as manufactured by Burke Concrete Accessories. April 30,2021 03112—Page 3 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 J. Waterproofing: 1. General: Where waterproofing is required on PLANS: a. Under Slabs: Provide self-adhering polyethylene-waterproofing. b. Walls: Use the product specified in Section 07160, "Bituminous Dampproofing". 2. Self-adhering polyethylene with a rubberized asphalt mastic material. a. Minimum 4 mil thickness polyethylene coated on one side with a layer of adhesive rubberized asphalt with protective membrane. b. Designed for tensile strength of 250 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. c. Thickness to be 60 mils excluding the protective release membrane. d. Furnish in rolls 36 inches minimal width and 50 feet minimal length. K. Expansion Bolts and/or Anchors: Expansion bolts and/or anchors are to be of the type, sizes, shapes, dimensions and/or manufacturer as shown on PLANS. L. Exterior Concrete Coatings: If exterior concrete coatings are required and are shown on PLANS, coating to be in accordance with the applicable Painting and Coating Specification Section. M. Joint Sealant: Unless otherwise shown on PLANS, liquid joint sealant to be in accor- dance with FS-TT-S-0227E and preformed compression seals to be in accordance with ASTM D2628. N. Concrete Floor Sealant: SON-NO-MAR as manufactured by Sonneborn or equal. 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Time Sequence of Construction Operations 1. Do not place superstructure members, forms, falsework, or erection equipment on substructure before concrete has cured for minimum 4 days. 2. Erect forms on footings supported by piling or drilled shafts after concrete has cured for minimum 4 days. Work may begin on spread footings after concrete has aged at least 2 curing days. 3. Support of tie beam and/or cap forms by falsework placed on previously placed tie beams is permissible, provided curing requirements are completed and tie beams are properly supported to eliminate stresses not provided for in design. 4. Sequence of Pouring Operations: When construction requires the placement of concrete in successive pours, CONTRACTOR is to submit sketch and schedule for pouring sequence. Schedule and sequence is to allow a minimum of two (2) days curing of adjacent concrete on all sides prior to placing new concrete in contact with previously placed concrete. Schedule to be submitted in accordance with the requirements as specified within Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General Design Requirements- Falsework and Forms 1. Design and construct to carry maximum anticipated loads including wind load, and provide rigidity to prevent settlement or deformation. April 30,2021 03112—Page 4 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 2. Use 150 pounds per cubic foot for concrete and minimum live load of 50 pounds per square foot of horizontal surface of form work. The maximum unit stresses not to exceed 125 percent of allowable stresses used for design of structures. B. Falsework 1. Make timber sills and grillages large enough to support superimposed load without settlement. 2. Place falsework which cannot be founded on a satisfactory spread footing on piling or drilled shafts. 3. Cap each falsework bent transversely by a member of proper size, and fasten caps securely to each pile or column in bent and set at proper elevation, allowing for a construction camber. 4. Use wedges, if required, in pairs and arrange so as to ensure uniform bearing. 5. Use of wedges to compensate for incorrectly cut bearing surfaces are not permitted. C. Forms-General Requirements 1. Provide mortar-tight forms sufficient in strength to prevent bulging or sagging. 2. Maintain to proper line and grade, and prevent warping and shrinkage. 3. Clean areas of extraneous material before concrete placement. 4. If bulging or sagging occurs, remove concrete causing such condition and reset forms. 5. Construct forms to permit their removal without damage to concrete. 6. Use metal form ties of a type that permits their easy removal and which will not require removal of excessive concrete. 7. Remove metal alignment appliances from forms to a depth of at least 2 inches from concrete surface without undue chipping or spalling, leaving a smooth opening in the concrete surface. 8. Burning off of rods, bolts, or ties not permitted. 9. Cut wire ties back at least 2 inches from face of concrete. 10. Metal tie-holding devices to develop strength of ties and to be adjustable for alignment. 11. Remove spreaders, which are separate from the forms, as concrete is placed. 12. Provide clean-out openings for walls and other locations where access to bottom of forms is not readily attainable. 13. Prior to erection, treat facing of forms with oil or other bond-breaking coating which will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect concrete surface. 14. Wet surface of forms to be in contact with concrete immediately before placing concrete. 15. Before concrete placement, align edges and faces of form panels and tape or fill joints with patching plaster or cold-water putty to prevent leakage; sand lightly with No. 0 sandpaper to make joints smooth. 16. Forms of any kind are not permitted under permanent structures. D. Timber Forms 1. Timber for facing or sheathing surfaced on at least one side and two edges. 2. Use nominal 2-inch lumber minimum thickness for forms for bottoms of beams. 3. Use lumber of nominal 1-inch minimum thickness elsewhere, generally, and back by sufficient number of studs and wales. 4. Provide form linings free of irregularities for concrete surfaces to be given rubbed finish. 5. Lining not required with plywood forms. 6. Plywood form lining made with waterproof adhesive to be 1/4-inch minimum thickness, oiled at mill, and re-oiled or lacquered on job before using. 7. Use tempered Masonite Concrete Form Board, 3/16-inch minimum thickness, as alternate form lining. Keep moist at least 12 hours before applying to sheathing April 30,2021 03112—Page 5 Of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 by moistening screen side of board and stacking boards screen side to screen side. Use smooth, hard face as concrete contact surface of form. 8. Plywood forms to be minimum 3/4-inch thickness and made with waterproof adhesive backed by adequate studs and wales, with form lining not required. 9. Molding for chamfer strips, to be Redwood, cypress, or pine. Material is not split when nailed and will hold true lines. All faces to be mill cut and dressed. Fillet sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips, 3/4 inch on sides. E. Metal Forms: Linings are not required. Countersink bolt and rivet heads on facing sides of metal forms. Design clamps, pins, or other connecting devices to hold forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Straight metal panel forms may be used for all structures with straight walls and for those structures with curved walls only below ground level. Curved metal panels may be used for all structures with curved walls. F. Expansion Joints: Remove form from formed joints as soon as possible to permit free expansion of concrete. Anchor expansion joint fillers to concrete on side of joint by means of copper wire not lighter than No. 12 B&S gage or copper nails of approved size. Ensure complete separation of concrete sections by joint material. G. Construction Joints: Other than those indicated, joints are not permitted without written authorization by the ENGINEER. Roughen previously placed concrete surface so as to expose aggregate particles. Remove all loose materials, and wash and scrub surface clean with stiff brooms. Keep all concrete surfaces moist for 12 hours prior to placing adjacent concrete. Immediately prior to placing concrete, wet surface of joint with clean water. H. Placing Reinforcement: Concrete reinforcement to be placed as shown on PLANS and in accordance with approved shop drawing. Materials to be in accordance with Specifica- tion Section 03210, "Reinforcing Steel"and/or as shown on PLANS. I. Concrete Placement 1. Seal Slabs: a. Use in all excavations for structures requiring reinforcing steel in base slab. For retaining wall footings and bridge footings, use seal slab only if shown on PLANS. b. Excavate 2 inches minimum or to the depth as shown on PLANS below bottom of structural slab and pour seal slab concrete to structural slab bottom elevation. Surfaces to have a rough float finish. c. Concrete for seal slabs to be Class D per applicable concrete specifica- tion Section unless otherwise noted. No cylinders or testing is required for seal slab concrete. No direct payment will be made for seal slab concrete. 2. General Requirements: a. ENGINEER is to be given 48 hours advanced notice before placing concrete. Place concrete only after forms and reinforcing placement have been checked. Pile driving and other causes of vibration are to be discontinued until concrete has attained an age of at least 18 hours. b. Mix, place, and finish concrete in daylight hours. If necessary to continue after daylight hours, light entire working area. Do not place concrete when impending weather conditions, such as rain, sleet, or snow, threaten to impair quality of finished work. If rainfall occurs during concrete placement, provide covering to protect work. c. Place concrete in forms or excavations with no apparent moisture therein. Standing water is not permitted in forms or excavations during concrete placement. April 30,2021 03112—Page 6 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 3. Handling and Transporting of Concrete: a. Use method and equipment to maintain rate of placement as required to prevent cold joints. Place concrete by buckets, chutes, buggies, pipes, or troughs, which prevent separation of concrete ingredients. b. With prior written approval by the ENGINEER, use belt conveyors or pumps, and test samples at discharge end. Protect concrete transported by conveyors from sun and wind to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes used to pump concrete to be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap to prevent loss of slump and workability. Do not transport concrete through aluminum pipes, tubes, or other aluminum equipment. Use of chutes in excess of 35 feet total length prohibited. 4. Concrete Placement: a. CONTRACTOR is to provide thermometer to measure temperature of concrete during placement for the ENGINEER's usage. b. Equip chutes with baffles for depositing concrete on steep slopes, or make chutes in short lengths that reverse lateral direction of movement. Provide downpipe at the end of chute. Use no slope steeper than one vertical to two horizontal. c. Discharge concrete from chutes and troughs either vertically down the inside of forms or into pockets outside of forms from which it may flow through holes left in forms. Keep chutes, troughs, and pipes clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete. Deposit concrete in continuous horizontal layers maximum 12 inches in thickness. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working of the concrete along forms not permitted. Limit free-fall of concrete to 5 feet, except in walls 10-inches or less in thickness, if segregation can be prevented. d. Use tremies for placing concrete in walls over 10 inches thick. Remove hardened concrete spatter ahead of plastic concrete. Do not jar forms after concrete has taken initial set or place any strain on projecting reinforcement. Make tremies in sections, or provide in several lengths, so outlet may be adjusted to proper heights during placing operations. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, but do not allow more than one hour to elapse between placement of successive layers. e. Apply vibrators to concrete immediately after depositing and move throughout mass, through layer of concrete just placed, and several inches into plastic layer below. Consolidate concrete and flush mortar to form surfaces by continuous working with immersion-type vibrators. Do not attach vibrators to forms or reinforcement. Provide one standby vibrator for emergency use. f. If excessive bleeding causes water to form on surface of concrete in tall forms, use stiffer mix. In walls and deep beams, place concrete to a point approximately 1 foot below finished elevation of bottom of slab or beam to be poured monolithically with wall, and allow to settle; but to avoid a cold joint, resume placement of concrete before initial set occurs. Overfill forms and screed off excess concrete after partial stiffening. 5. Concrete Placement in Cold Weather Conditions: a. The minimum temperature of all concrete at time of placement to be not less than 50°F. Maintain slab temperatures at 50°F or above for period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40°F for additional 72 hours. b. Maintain temperature of all other structural elements at 40°F or above for period of 72 hours from time of placement. Maintain temperature of concrete placed on or in the ground above 40°F for period of 72 hours from time of placement. c. Protect concrete against freezing during curing period in accordance with Portland Cement Association "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures". Protect concrete from temperatures below 40°F until it has cured for a April 30,2021 03112—Page 7 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 minimum of 3 days at 70°F or 5 days at 50°F. Remove and replace, at CONTRACTOR's expense, all concrete deemed unsatisfactory by ENGINEER. Protection may consist of additional covering, insulated forms, artificial heating, or other means approved by ENGINEER. 6. Concrete Placement in Hot Weather Conditions: a. When air temperature is above 90°F use approved retarding agent in all exposed concrete and in all cased drilled shafts regardless of temperature. b. Reinforcing steel, steel beam flanges, and other surfaces in contact with concrete to be cooled to below 90°F by means of water spray or other approved methods. c. Concrete temperature prior to placement not to exceed 90°F. Reduce concrete temperature at time of placement to satisfy maximum allowable temperature by one or more of the following: 1) Addition of cold water with a subsequent addition of cement to maintain proper water-cement ratio. Tanks or trucks used for storing or transporting water to be insulated or painted white. Mechanical refrigeration may be used to reduce water temperatures. 2) Addition of crushed, shaved, or chipped ice directly into the mixer with a subsequent addition of cement to maintain proper water-cement ratio. Continue mixing until ice is completely melted. 3) Any other methods that may be incorporated into the work to be approved in writing by the ENGINEER. 7. Concrete Placement in Water Conditions: a. Only when approved by the ENGINEER, use concrete mix with minimum 6.5 sacks cement per cubic yard of concrete. Forms, cofferdams, or caissons to be sufficiently tight to prevent water current passing through space in which concrete is being deposited. Pumping water not permitted during placing, nor until concrete has set for at least 36 hours. b. Place concrete with tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method to avoid free-fall through water. Do not disturb concrete after depositing, and maintain horizontal layers at all times. Use watertight tube 10 inches or less in diameter for tremie and constructed so that bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. c. Support tremie to allow easy movement horizontally to cover work area and vertically to control concrete flow. Stop flow by lowering the tremie. d. Capacity of bottom-dump buckets to be not less than 2 cubic yards. Lower bucket or tremie gradually and carefully to rest upon concrete already placed and raise very slowly during upward travel, intent being to maintain still water at point of discharge and to avoid agitating mixture. Pour concrete continuously until work is completed. 8. Concrete Placement on Ground or Seal Slabs: a. Place concrete in footings after depth and character of foundation is observed. Place footing concrete upon seal slabs after caissons, cofferdams, excavations, forms, etc. are free from water and seal surface cleaned. b. Locate pumps or bailing equipment in sump outside of forms. Immediately before placing concrete, moisten subgrade to decrease absorption of moisture, if seal slab or waterproofing not required. c. With ENGINEER's approval, side forms in dry excavation may be omitted. Place column concrete monolithically unless otherwise provided. April 30,2021 03112—Page 8 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 J. Curing Concrete: Keep forms tight against concrete, or remove with the approval of the ENGINEER and start curing operations. 1. Length of Curing: Cure concrete for 6 consecutive curing days. Cure high-early- strength concrete for 3 consecutive curing days. Cure bridge slabs and top slabs of direct traffic culverts for 10 consecutive curing days. 2. Curing Methods: CONTRACTOR to select curing method that is compatible with protective coatings, sealants, and/or waterproofing materials(if any): a. Water Curing: Keep all exposed concrete surfaces wet continuously for the required curing time. 1) Place wet cotton mats as soon as practical after surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to concrete. 2) Weight down mats to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces. 3) Use over lapping water sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. 4) Use minimum of 2 inches of clean, granular material, kept wet at all times or minimum 1-inch depth of water. 5) Provide a dam or similar procedure to retain water or saturated sand. b. Membrane Curing: 1) Flat Concrete: Apply curing material as specified at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 200 square feet per gallon using a pump type spray. Apply after concrete is set sufficient to bear full weight of applicator. 2) Formed Concrete: Apply curing material as specified as soon as practical after removing forms, at the rate of coverage recom- mended by the manufacturer but not greater than 200 square feet per gallon. 3) Formed concrete that is to be rub-finished: Apply curing material as specified as soon as rubbing is finished. 4) Formed or flat concrete that is to be painted or waterproofed should be treated with curing material as specified as soon as possible after finishing and prior to application of paint or waterproofing material. K. Removal of Forms and Falsework: 1. Remove forms from surface to receive rubbed finish when concrete has attained adequate strength to prevent damage, and remove only as rapidly as rubbing operation progresses. 2. Re-wet wood forms or form lining left in place longer than 24 hours as required to keep them moist. 3. Remove forms and falsework from portions of structures that do not require rubbed finish, after the following number of curing days. a. Forms for falsework under slabs, beams, or girders-7 days. b. Forms for walls, columns and piers-2 days. 4. If cold weather continues below 40°F, form and falsework may be removed at the end of a period of calendar days equal to twice the number of curing days specified. L. Defective Work: Any defective work discovered after form removal to be repaired or replaced immediately at CONTRACTOR's expense. M. Concrete Surface Finish: For concrete having no special finish indicated, remove ties, fill holes, and remove fins and rough edges. Exposed concrete surfaces, other than floors, to have a rubbed finish except where noted on PLANS. 1. Monolithic Finish: Finish slabs, platforms, and steps monolithically between joints. Set screeds prior to concrete placement, and make sufficiently rigid to April 30,2021 03112—Page 9 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 withstand impact of concrete being placed. Tamp concrete thoroughly to force coarse aggregate away from surface of slab, then float to secure hard surface. 2. Provide light broom finish, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. 3. "Dusting" floor surfaces with dry material not permitted. Round edges at all expansion joints with suitable jointing or edging tools. 4. Unless otherwise noted, all interior concrete floor slabs are to be sealed with a concrete floor sealant. N. Exposed Aggregate Panels: 1. Forms for raised panels to be sandblasted may be removed on the day following concrete placement (about 18 hours). Continue curing after sandblasting. Immediately after form removal, sandblast to a depth of from 3/8-inch to 5/8-inch. Protect smooth surfaces adjacent to sandblasted panels during sandblasting. Coarse aggregate for raised panels range from Standard No. 4 to 1114-inch gradation. 2. Exposed aggregate sandblasted surfaces are to receive a coat of curing material as specified. Preparatory work, application, and precautions in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. O. Rub-Finished Surfaces: 1. All vertical surfaces of concrete that are exposed to view after all backfill and embankments are in place shall receive a painted finish. This includes all piers, columns, headwalls and retaining walls. 2. Fill all depressions and holes 1/16-inch deep or larger with mortar. 3. Prior to filling depressions and holes, expose all holes at the surface of the concrete. To do this, brush, sandblast, or water blast surfaces with a 3000 psi pressure washer. 4. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and depressions while the surfaces are still damp. 5. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over the entire area with clean burlap, sponges, rubber floats, or trowels. 6. Do not let any of the new material remain on the wall surface, except that filling the pits, holes, and depressions. 7. Wipe the surfaces clean and moist cure. 8. Top coat concrete with a spray color coating made from the following ingredients: a) 1 quart Portland cement b) 1 quart white Portland cement(proportion as needed to match concrete color) c) 1 pint lime d) 2 quarts liquid latex or white casing glue e) 6 quarts water 9. First, mix the water and the latex. Add lime and cement and mix again. Let stand for 5 to 10 minutes and re-mix. Strain through a paint screen into the sprayer and coat the entire surface in two light coats, letting the first dry before applying the second coat. P. Patching and Filling Holes: 1. Tie and Bolt Holes: a. Fill holes with cement mortar to which has been added white cement so that patches will not appear darker than adjacent concrete surface. Use mortar as dry as possible and pack into holes. b. Fill holes, entirely through concrete, with nonshrink grout from inside structure with a pressure gun or other device that will force mortar through to outside face. Strike off excess mortar flush and finish surface to make filled holes as inconspicuous as possible. April 30,2021 03112—Page 10 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 2. Honeycomb and Minor Defects: a. Patch slight honeycomb and minor defects in concrete with cement mortar mixed one part cement to two parts fine aggregate. Match color of adjacent concrete. b. Repair area by cutting out unsatisfactory material by chipping or other approved methods and replace with new concrete, securely keyed and bonded to old concrete, and finish so as to make joints as inconspicuous as possible. Use stiff mixture and thoroughly tamp into place. c. Use nonshrink grout for large honeycomb and for hydraulic structures with honeycomb sufficient to cause leakage through concrete. Q. Waterstops and Waterproofing: 1. Waterstops: a. Secure each edge of waterstop by tying with clean steel wire to reinforcing steel at intervals not to exceed one foot. b. Make waterstops continuous by heat sealing at splices as recommended by manufacturer. Minimum requirements are: 1) Only splicing of straight runs allowed in forms. Butt weld straight splices. 2) Fabricate all other waterstop joints at central location on jobsite or by waterstop manufacturer. 3) Miter and weld splices in expansion joint waterstops at directional changes bulb to bulb. Puncturing waterstops not allowed. 2. Waterproofing: a. Apply approved primer, as recommended by manufacturer of membrane, to clean, dry surface at rate of not more than 250 square feet per gallon, and allow to dry to tack-free condition before applying membrane. b. Apply membrane within 12 hours of priming, or re-prime surface. Apply membrane vertically or horizontally, wrinkle free, with a minimum of 21/2W overlaps and staggered. For horizontal application, upper course to lap over lower course. c. Repair accidental damage to membrane by spot application of material to damaged areas with minimum of 6-inch overlap in all directions. Exercise special care to ensure protection of waterproofing membrane from damage during backfill operations. R. Grouting: 1. General Grouting: a. For general purposes, use mixture of one part Portland cement and two parts sand by weight. If space to be grouted is 1 inch or less in thickness and cannot be tamp grouted, use a mixture of one part Portland cement and one part sand by weight. If space to be grouted is large, use original concrete mixture. For grout to be tamped, use stiff mixture produced by prolonged mixing. b. To obtain stiff grout, mix mortar using amount of water required to thoroughly mix ingredients, then continue mixing without additional water until grout is stiff enough to be compacted by tamping when placed. c. For grouting blockouts for embedded pipes and similar items, use nonshrink grout as per Paragraph 2.02 G of this Specification Section. d. Prior to grout application remove curing material from concrete surface to assure bonding of grout to concrete. Apply curing material as specified to the grout after application. April 30,2021 03112—Page 11 of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 2. Setting New Equipment: Use nonshrink epoxy grout as specified in Paragraph J -- 2.02 G of this Specification Section. a. Clean surface to receive grout of laitance, grease, oil, organic matter, curing compound, and loose particles. Blow out bolt holes. Chip concrete to obtain a firm bond. b. Set grout forms true, level, tight, and well braced. Assemble equipment to be grouted before grouting. Clean baseplates and all items to be embedded and set in final position. Shim equipment bases for easy removal of shims. Moisten area to receive grout. Do not mix more grout than can be placed in 20 minutes. c. Place grout from one end or side only to avoid excessive air entrapment and to ensure good compaction. Work and rod grout continuously while it is being placed. d. After grout has attained full strength, remove shims. Replace grout damaged by shim removal with like material. e. Steel trowel exposed grout, and protect exposed area from drying out rapidly. Do not stress items embedded in grout, and do not operate equipment for 36 hours after grout is placed. 3.04-3.06 (NOT USED) 3.07 CLEANING Clean up area and remove excess material, dismantled forms and falsework, and debris during construction, and clean area completely and thoroughly after completion of the work herein described. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION (NOT USED) 3.09 PROTECTION For bridges and direct traffic culverts, construction traffic and traveling public permitted in accordance with the following. A. Authorization for light construction traffic not to exceed a three-quarter ton truck may be given after last slab of concrete has been in place at least 14 days. B. Authorization for normal construction traffic, when necessary, and to traveling public may be given after last slab of concrete has been in place 30 days. 3.10 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 03112—Page 12 Of 12 Concrete Structures Job No.60633796 SECTION 03210 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes the furnishing and subsequent placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, chairs, ties, splicing devices, and other reinforcing accessory items required to complete work as shown on PLANS and specified in other Specification Sections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE(ACI) ACI 315 ACI Detailing Manual Publication SP-66 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". A. Product data for all materials used. B. Shop drawings indicating location, placement, sizes, and bending. C. Certificate of Compliance: Submit certified copy of mill certificates of compliance with requirements herein specified. D. Special Equipment: Submit information on mechanical splicing devices, couplers, and all other reinforcing accessories. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE Reinforcement and placement to be in accordance with the requirements and guidelines as specified within ACI 315. April 30,2021 03210—Page 1 of 4 Reinforcing Steel Job No.60633796 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver to jobsite free from dirt, loose scale and rust, paint, oil, or other foreign material. B. Store above surface of ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports, and protect from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust or other damage. C. Handle so as not to sustain crimping, bending, or warping before and during placement. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. General Requirements 1. Nominal size, area, and theoretical weight in accordance with ASTM A615/615M Table(s) la/lb. 2. Bending: Bends to be completed in shop, cold, true to shapes shown on PLANS. Any irregularities in bending are cause for rejection. Bars to be detailed in accordance with ACI 315. The inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of nominal bar diameter(d)of bar which is bent, to be in accordance with ACI 315. 3. Fabrication tolerances in accordance with ACI 315 except as necessary to satisfy clearance requirements indicated within Paragraph 3.03 A.2 of this Specification Section. 4. Splices a. Except where shown on PLANS, splices are not permitted without ENGINEER's prior written approval. b. Not permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress, unless shown otherwise on PLANS. c. When not indicated on PLANS, but permitted with prior ENGINEER's written approval, subject to the following: 1) Not larger than No. 8 bars. 2) Not permitted in bars 30 feet or less in length,except vertical. 3) Splices center to center not less than 30 feet. 4) Maintain specified concrete cover. 5) Stagger main bar splices in adjacent bars a minimum of two splice lengths. d. Lap Splices 1) Lap bars in accordance with table shown on PLANS. 2) Lap bars so that both bars will be in the same plane parallel with the nearest concrete surface. e. All splices, whether mechanical, or coupler, to develop full strength of bar. B. Reinforcing Steel 1. Deformed, conforming to ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60. 2. Welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A185. 3. Cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82. 4. Spiral reinforcement to be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615/A615M, or smooth bars or wire conforming to ASTM A82. 5. Smooth dowels for expansion joints, conforming to ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60. April 30,2021 03210-Page 2 of 4 Reinforcing Steel Job No.60633796 C. Epoxy: Unless otherwise specified or shown, the epoxy for grouting reinforcement into existing concrete to conform to the materials as specified in the Concrete Specification Section within these Contract Documents or as shown on PLANS. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Place reinforcing steel in positions indicated on PLANS and approved shop drawings. 1. Dimensions shown on PLANS are to centers of bars, unless otherwise noted. 2. Hold bars securely in place with tie wires and other approved means during placement of concrete. a. In plane of steel parallel to nearest surface of concrete, bars not to vary from placement shown on PLANS, by more than one-twelfth of spacing between bars. b. In plane of steel perpendicular to nearest surface of concrete, bars not to vary from placement shown on PLANS, by more than 3-inch. 3. Looped wire bar ties ("pig tails") will be permitted for concrete pavement only. Do not use looped wire bar ties("pig tails")for structural concrete. 4. Do not tack weld reinforcing. 5. Space steel required distance from forms or earth by galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or precast mortar or concrete blocks. Prior to installation receive approval from the ENGINEER of spacers or precast mortar concrete blocks. a. For approval of plastic spacers, provide samples of plastic which show no indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. b. Cast precast block, maximum 3 inches square, to thickness required for proper reinforcement clearance from forms, or soil. 6. Use galvanized metal chairs to support all reinforcing steel. For pavement use plastic chairs as manufactured by Sheplers (or approved equal) or metal chairs to support all reinforcing steel. Metal chairs for pavement need not be galvanized. Spacing for plastic or metal chairs to be 24-inch, center-to-center each way to support reinforcing in concrete pavement. Metal chairs to be secured with wire to the reinforcing steel. 7. Use heavy bolster to support bottom layer of reinforcing in abutment caps, bent caps, and other beams. 8. In bridge deck slab, use two rows of supports for bottom layer of reinforcing parallel to beams for each bay between beams. Use high chairs to support top layer. 9. Clean all mortar, mud,dirt, etc.from reinforcement before placing concrete. 10. Protect exposed steel from corrosion or other damage. 11. Correct placement of steel to be verified by CONTRACTOR before concrete is placed. 12. Provide adequate support for reinforcement extending out of formwork to ensure proper alignment. 13. Tie reinforcing steel for all structural slabs at all intersections, except where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need to be tied. Tie reinforcing steel in concrete pavement at a minimum of alternate intersections. 14. For reinforcing steel cages for other structural members, tie steel at enough intersections to provide a rigid cage of steel. April 30,2021 03210—Page 3 of 4 Reinforcing Steel Job No.60633796 B. Grout reinforcing steel into existing concrete when shown on PLANS. --~ 1. Holes to receive reinforcement may be wet or dry drilled using rotating machines only. 2. Drill holes within 3 inch of the location shown on PLANS. 3. Flush wet drilled holes with clean water to remove residue and blow out using oil- free compressed air. 4. Blow out dry drilled holes with oil-free compressed air. 5. Clean oil-contaminated hole using appropriate solvents and bottle brush. Solvents to be flushed and hole blown out with oil-free compressed air. 6. Backfill over-drilled holes with epoxy grout. 7. Reinforcement grouted in place to be free of contaminants. Use the appropriate solvents and wire brushing to remove contaminants. 8. Provide adequate support for reinforcement to ensure alignment and maintain reinforcement in the center of the drilled hole. 3.04-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 03210—Page 4 of 4 Reinforcing Steel Job No.60633796 SECTION 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide unit masonry and accessories as indicated and specified. B. The work under this Section includes the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU),solid and hollow core units. 2. Fire-rated concrete masonry units. 3. Split face and ground face concrete masonry units, solid and hollow core, and thermally insulated units. 4. Reinforced concrete masonry lintels. 5. Back-up CMU. 6. CMU bond beams. 7. Cavity wall insulation. 8. Cavity wall dampproofing. 9. Grouting as indicated and as specified herein. 10. Installing miscellaneous metal items built into masonry. 11. Premolded masonry joint fillers. 12. Installation of loose steel lintels,steel plates, and masonry anchors. 13. Door and window frames built into masonry are furnished by the Contractor in Division 8 and installed under the work of this Section. 14. Masonry joint reinforcing, ties, anchors, miscellaneous reinforcing provided and installed under the work of this Section. 15. Deformed steel bars for wall reinforcing and CMU lintel reinforcing are furnished by the Contractor under Division 3, installed under the work of this Section. 16. Installation of beams, sills and structural items to be embedded in masonry. 17. Installation of anchor bolts embedded in masonry. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. PLANS show general arrangement, location, and basic dimensions. B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A82 Specification for Steel Wire, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A153 Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C55 Specification for Concrete Building Brick ASTM C90 Specification for Load bearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C129 Specification for Non-load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C140 Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units April 30,2021 04220- Page 1 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 ASTM C144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C207 Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM C331 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C404 Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout ASTM C476 Specification for Grout for Masonry ASTM C836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course ASTM C1019 Method of Sampling and Testing Grout ASTM D187 Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives(T-Peel Test) ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics ASTM D1056 Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer-Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection ASTM D3767 Standard Practice for Rubber-Measurement of Dimensions ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM El 54 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs,on Walls, or as Ground Cover ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E447 Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE(ACI) ACI 530/ASCE 5/ Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures &Commentary TMS 402 ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/ Specification for Masonry Structures&Commentary TMS 602 April 30,2021 04220-Page 2 Of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 INTERNATIONAL MASONRY INDUSTRY ALL WEATHER COUNCIL(IMIAWC) IMIAWC Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: In addition to the items specified in Section 01300,"Submittals",furnish the following: 1. Manufacturer's product data for: a. Concrete masonry units of all types b. Mortar and grout c. Joint reinforcement d. Anchors and ties e. Membrane flashing £ Control joint key g. Weephole inserts h. Cavity wall insulation i. Cavity wall dampproofing. 2. Manufacturer's full range of colors and textures of split-face and ground-face masonry for Engineer's initial selection. 3. Testing: a. Provide from testing laboratory,the chemical analysis of water-soluble alkali content(%)of cement for mortar. 4. Samples: a. Samples of each type of anchor, tie and joint reinforcement, including location of installation. b. Two sample channels of colored mortar. 5. Drawings including plans, elevations, and details of wall reinforcement; details of reinforcing bars at corners and wall intersections, control, expansion joints and wall openings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Visual Appearance: 1. Provide concrete masonry units conforming to ASTM tolerances for visual appearance at time of delivery,and maintain original appearance to conform to tolerances immediately prior to construction. B. Remove masonry work damaged as a result of failure to comply with specifications, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, and reconstruct as directed by the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry units in an air-dry condition. B. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms that will permit circulation of air and prevent moisture adsorption. C. Concrete masonry units shall be covered or protected from inclement weather and shall conform to the moisture content as specified in ASTM C90, when delivered to job site. D. Handle masonry units, either individually or in groups,to keep units whole. Handle masonry units in a manner to maintain sharp edges and undamaged faces. E. Do not stack masonry units more than two(2)pallets high when stacking on frozen ground. Store masonry units on wooden planks. April 30,2021 04220-Page 3 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 - � F. Steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement shall be stored above ground. Steel reinforcing bars and uncoated ties shall be free of loose mill scale and rust. G. Cementitious and other package material shall be delivered in unopened containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturer's names and brands. Cementitious material shall be stored in dry,weather tight enclosures or be completely covered. Cement shall be handled in a manner that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Sand and aggregates shall be stored in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. B. Stain Prevention: 1. Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar,and soil that come in contact with such masonry. a. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. b. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. c. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. d. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 IASCE 6/TMS 602. a. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperatures is 40 deg. F(4 deg. C)and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: 1. Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg. F(38 deg.C), or 90 deg. F(32 deg. C)with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph(13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches(1200 mm)ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. E. Prevent damage due to wind and wind-blown particles. 1.08-1.11 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 04220-Page 4 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide masonry units with dimensions listed in ANSI A62.3 except where otherwise specified or indicated. Provide additional masonry units to complete masonry work as indicated. B. Furnish special coves, corners, bullnoses, and other special shapes as indicated. C. Provide open cell neoprene or expanded polyethylene filler for top of nonload bearing masonry unit walls. D. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be Featherlite Corp. or equal. E. Colors: Exterior color and style to match existing on-site buildings. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT A. General: 1. Provide mortar conforming to ASTM C270, Type S, composed of Portland cement, hydrated lime, and sand. 2. The damp, loose volume of sand is not to exceed three times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. 3. Proportion of lime to Portland cement, by volume: 1/4 to 1/2. 4. Portland cement: ASTM C150,Type I or Type II. a. Use of pre-packaged lime/cement blend from Blue Circle will be permitted. Masonry cement is not permitted. 5. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S 6. Sand for Mortar: ASTM C144,from single acceptable source. 7. Sand for Grout: ASTM C404. 8. Water: Clean potable from single source and free from acids, alkalies, organic material, minerals and salts. 9. Do not use accelerators or other admixtures in mortar or grout without written approval of Engineer. 10. Retemper mortar only to replace water lost through evaporation and use mortar within 2 hours after mixing. B. Colored Mortar: 1. Manufacturers: a. Glen-fiery Color Mortar Blend. b. Riverton Corp. c. Colorbond, Centurion R.D. d. Or acceptable equivalent product. 2. Provide colored mortar composed of one part mill-mixed, custom color, Type S, mortar cement and three parts, by volume,well-graded damp sand. 3. Pigments shall meet the requirements of ASTM C979. Do not use carbon black. 4. Color of mortar shall be selected by the engineer from the manufacturer's full range of colors. Provide different color mortar for each color of masonry. C. Grout Mix: ASTM C476,2,500 psi minimum compressive strength. Do not use air entraining admixtures. Provide fine or coarse grout to suit work being grouted. 2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Unit Designations: 1. Hollow load-bearing units: ASTM C90 April 30,2021 04220-Page 5 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 2. Solid load-bearing units: ASTM C90 3. Concrete building brick: ASTM C55 B. General: 1. Damaged units not permitted. 2. Provide concrete masonry unit Type I, moisture-controlled units. 3. Provide units free from iron and other substances that will stain plaster, paint, corrode metal or cause popouts. Aggregates not to contain more than 1.5 mg. of ferric oxide per 200 grams when tested in accordance with ASTM C331. 4. Units shall be modular in size and shall include closer,jamb, header, lintel, and bond beam units and special shapes and sizes to complete the work indicated. C. Hollow Load Bearing Units: 1. ASTM C90 medium weight, Grade N,Type I. 2. Sand and aggregates: ASTM C33 for normal weight aggregate. ASTM C331 for lightweight aggregate. 3. Moisture content when laid not to exceed 35 percent of total adsorption. 4. Wet-steam cured for a minimum of 12 hours followed by covered yard storage for not less than four weeks. 5. Nominal size: 8-in. by 16 in. unless indicated otherwise and bed thicknesses indicated or permitted. 6. Texture: Smooth for application of paint. 7. Provide external corner units: bullnosed. 8. Prism Strength: The average strength of 3 constructed masonry prisms shall be a minimum of 1,900 psi with no individual prism less than 1,700 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM E 447. D. Solid Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Provide solid concrete masonry units conforming to fire-rated wall requirements of Hollow Load Bearing Units. a. Net cross-sectional area of unit in every plane parallel to bearing surface at least 75 percent of gross cross-section area measured in sample plane. 2. Fire Rated Concrete Masonry Units: Provide concrete masonry units in fire rated assemblies and partitions which are listed by UL for the application indicated and provide construction which matches UL tested fire rated assemblies. a. Prism Strength: The average strength of 3 constructed masonry prisms shall be a minimum of 1,900 psi with no individual prism less than 1,700 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM E 447. 2.04 ARCHITECTURAL UNITS A. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 3. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description: a. Normal-weight aggregate, ground surface with factory applied acrylic finish. b. Normal-weight aggregate, split-face finish. 4. Units for exterior veneer shall be solid with no cores. 5. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent,when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours,show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. April 30,2021 04220-Page 6 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Block Plus W-1 0; Addiment Inc. 2) Dry-Block; W.R. Grace &Co. Construction Products Division. 3) Rheopel; Master Builders. 2.05 LINTELS A. General: 1. Provide lintels to extend at least eight inches beyond each jamb of the masonry opening. 2. Provide lintels with all surfaces free of cracks, chips, and broken edges. 3. Provide lintels sized for wall thickness and masonry opening and with 3/8-in. allowance in height,width, and length for mortar joints. B. Block Lintels: 1. Provide block lintels fabricated from standard lintel-type concrete masonry units of same material and texture as units in adjoining work, reinforced as indicated, and filled with grout having a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 2,500 psi as specified. C. Steel Lintels: 1. Install galvanized steel lintels as specified under applicable Sections. 2.06 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Reinforcing Corporation of America. 2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. Or acceptable equivalent product. B. General: 1. Prefabricated, formed of ASTM A82 cold-drawn steel. 2. Hot-dip galvanized,ASTM A153, Class B-2. 3. Provide reinforcement fabricated of 9 gage deformed side and 9 gage smooth cross wires flush welded together on 16-in. centers. 4. Provide prefabricated special pieces for corners and intersections of walls and partitions. 5. Provide joint reinforcing width according to width and type of wall indicated on drawings. C. Exterior Cavity Walls: 1. Provide continuous truss type reinforcement with adjustable eye-wire tie system at inside wythe and one longitudinal wire at exterior veneer. 2. Provide 3/16-in. hot-dipped rectangular pintles and 9 gage clip to engage pintle and longitudinal wire in exterior veneer. D. Single Wythe Walls: 1. Provide truss type reinforcement with two longitudinal wires. 2.07 CORRUGATED DOVETAIL ANCHORS A. Bond unit masonry veneer to concrete with corrugated dovetail anchors. B. Provide anchors fabricated from 16-gage steel. April 30,2021 04220-Page 7 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 C. Provide anchors hot-dip galvanized, ASTM N53, Class B-2. D. Anchor size: 1-in. wide by the length required. 1. No. AA-201 by AA Wire Products Co. 2. No. 303 by Hohmann& Barnard, Inc. 3. No. 106 by Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 4. Or acceptable equivalent product. 2.08 FLEXIBLE TIES A. Provide flexible ties to tie masonry to steel framing members. B. Wire Ties: 3/16 in. diameter galvanized, ASTM A153, Class B-2 wire, length to suit job conditions. C. Weld-On Rods: 1. 1/4 in. diameter steel wire. 2. 9 in.overall with a 3/8 in. offset and 4 in. adjustment. D. Manufacturers: 1. Vee Wall Tie No. VWT and No. 359 Weld-on rod by Hohmann &Barnard, Inc. 2. Triangle Wire Tie No. 316 and No. 315 weld-on rod by Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 3. Flex-O-Lok with Type A Weld-on rod by AA Wire Products Co. 4. Or acceptable equivalent product. 2.09 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT A. Contractor shall furnish vertical reinforcement and dowels as specified under Section 03210. 2.10 PLASTIC WEEP HOLES A. Preformed, 3/8 in. x 1-1/2 in.x 3-1/2 in. long rectangular, clear plastic tube weep holes. 2.11 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Extruded, closed cell, polystyrene. B. ASTM C578, Type IV. Factory Mutual approved for a Class I,fire rating. C. R-Value: 5.0 deg. F/ft2lhlBtu per inch min. at 75 deg. Mean temperature in accordance with ASTM C518. D. Compressive Strength:25 lb/in.2 minimum in accordance with ASTM D1621. E. Provide in thickness as indicated. 2.12 CAVITY WALL DAMPPROOFING A. Provide asbestos free dampproofing. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Emulsified Asphalt Mastic by Euclid Chemical Corp. 2. Hydrocide 700 Mastic by Chem Rex, Inc; Sonneborn, Building Products Div. 3. 920 Fibrater Dampproofing by Karnak Chemical Corp. ,- - 4. Or acceptable equivalent product. April 30,2021 04220-Page 8 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 2.13 MEMBRANE FLASHING A. Provide 40 mil thick thru-wall flashing consisting of a 36 mil self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane laminated to an 4 mil high density polyethylene film with silicone treated release sheet. B. Products: 1. CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing by Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Inc. 2. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing by Grace Construction Products. 3. Blueskin SA Air/Vapor Barrier Membrane by Monsey Bakor. 4. Or acceptable equivalent product. 2.14 METAL DRIP EDGES A. Fabricate metal drip edges from 0.0156-in, thick stainless steel. B. Extend drip edge at least 3-in. into wall and YZ-in.out from wall,with a hemmed outer edge bend down 30 degrees. 2.15 CONTROL JOINT KEYS A. Control joint keys shall be factory fabricated solid section of extruded rubber material conforming to ASTM D-2000 with a durometer hardness of 80(+ or-5)when tested in conformance with ASTM D-2240. B. The control joint key shall be provided with a solid shear section not less than 5/8-in. thick and 3/8-in. thick flanges. 2.16 MORTAR NET A. Mortar net shall be high density polyethylene, 90% open plastic mesh with dove tail shape. 2.17 COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER A. Closed cell neoprene conforming to ASTM D1056, Class RE41. B. Manufacturers: 1. D/A 2010 Rapid Soft Joint by Duro-O-Wal, Inc. 2. #NS-Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge by Hohmann &Barnard, Inc. 3. 3330 Horizontal Expansion Joint by Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 4. 030 Soft Joint by National Wire Products Industries. 5. Or acceptable equivalent product. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean laitance,dust, dirt, debris, oil, grease, and other foreign substances which would affect bond of mortar, from surfaces to receive mortar. B. Lay out walls to establish accurate spacing of bond pattern,for uniform joint widths, and to locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Arrange units in manner which will result in less than two units being cut between each joint or wall opening. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect the walls, including window sills, with non-staining waterproof coverings when work not in process. April 30,2021 04220-Page 9 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 B. Provide minimum 24-in, overhang of protective covering on each side of wall and anchor securely. C. Protect facing materials from staining. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Provide temporary bracing of all walls until walls have been completely erected. B. Lay masonry plumb and square,true to dimensions,and with full, tightly bonded joints. C. Do not lay masonry overhand. D. Horizontal joints of cavity and composite walls, which are to contain wall ties and joint reinforcement shall be level with each other. E. Install products, indicated to be built into wall, as masonry work progresses. Fill spaces around built-in products with mortar,rake mortar joint, and allow space for sealant. F. Fill backs of pressed-metal door frames solid with mortar. G. Make joint width equal to difference between actual and nominal dimensions of unit being installed. H. Tool exterior joints concave with hard glassy surface free from drying cracks.Tool interior joints flush in similar manner. Provide level and solid mortar bearing in masonry walls directly under precast concrete slabs, beams, and sills, and under structural steel beams to sizes and thickness indicated. J. Provide 1/2 in. minimum clearance between top of nonload bearing masonry walls and bottom of overhead construction. K. Lay masonry units in a running bond with vertical joints breaking not less than 8 in. over units in course below. L. Lay vertical cored units with full beds on shells only. Fully butter vertical edges. M. Cut masonry units with either dry or wet masonry saws. N. Keep chases, wall cavities, air spaces, expansion joints and spaces to be grouted free from debris and mortar. O. Lay concrete masonry units dry. P. Lay masonry units in full mortar bed. Q. When resuming masonry work, clean exposed surface of set or partially set masonry and remove loose mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. R. Install continuous wall reinforcement in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions,and place in alternate horizontal masonry joints. Lap reinforcement not less than six inches and, at corners and intersections, connect to prefabricated reinforcement. Make splices in manner, and at those points,which will not reduce structural strength of wall. Make welded and mechanical connections to develop strength of reinforcement. April 30,2021 04220-Page 10 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 1. Install continuous wall reinforcement in block veneer, starting at the first course, and then installing every other course. S. Install vertical reinforcement where indicated and in poured grout studs formed by vertically aligned cells of unit masonry. Secure reinforcement at top and bottom, and at intervals not more than 192 diameters of reinforcement. Use two-cell masonry units for vertical reinforcement. T. Install control joint key in concrete masonry unit walls where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. U. Set metalwork into masonry and build around metalwork. V. Follow recommended practices and guide specifications for cold weather masonry work as set forth in lMlAWC-75. W. Using a bristle brush, brush loose mortar from the faces of the walls whenever the scaffolding is moved or raised and at the end of each shift. X. Install mortar net at the bottom of each air space. Mortar net thickness to match depth of air space. Y. Construct faces of walls, and inside and outside corners, plumb, and courses level,within following tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb of lines and surfaces of columns,walls, and arises: 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 3/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch in 40 feet, and 1/2 inch total. 2. Variation from plumb of external corners,expansion joints, and other conspicuous vertical lines: 1/4 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch in 40 feet, and 1/2 inch total. 3. Variation from level of exposed lintels, sills, , horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous horizontal lines: 1/4 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch in 40 feet, and 1/2 inch total. 4. Variation of linear building lines from established position in plan and related portion of columns,walls,and partitions: 1/4 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch in 40 feet, and 2 inch total. 5. Variations of cross sectional dimensions of columns and in the thicknesses of walls: Minus 1/4 inch, plus 1/2 inch. 6. Variations from plumb in masonry control joints: 0-in. 3.04 MORTAR A. General: 1. Machine mix mortar, except small batches by hand mixing, mixed for at least five minutes after materials are in mixer. Where hand mixing is permitted, mix mortar in tight mortar box until required plasticity is obtained. Mix mortar with maximum amount of water. 2. Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing. B. Beds: 1. Place full mortar beds on masonry unit bearing surfaces bonded to bearing surface of unit below, and to surface of previously installed unit in same course as unit being installed;furrowing of mortar not permitted. Pack mortar under and around joint reinforcement before masonry unit is installed. 2. Make mortar bed of such thickness that cured mortar joint is equal to difference between actual and nominal dimensions of unit being installed. 3. Do not allow mortar fins to protrude into cores for masonry units which are to be vertically reinforced. April 30,2021 04220-Page 11 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 C. Colored: Proportion for each batch and mix in drum-type mechanical mixer shall be mixed between 3 and 5 minutes after materials have been deposited in mixer. D. Provide cured mortar joints free from efflorescence. 3.05 GROUTING A. Provide clean out units in bottom course at every dowel where height of grout placement exceeds four feet. Remove overhanging mortar, mortar droppings, and obstructions from grout spaces. Seal clean out holes only after masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning of grout spaces have been approved by Resident Engineer, and before grouting. Seal to match surrounding masonry. B. Place grout within two hours after mixing. C. For vertically reinforced concrete unit masonry, place grout in all cells containing reinforcement, and in lifts of not more than four feet. Consolidate grout at time of placing by either puddling or vibrating; reconsolidate grout by puddling before plasticity is lost. When grouting is stopped for one hour and longer,form horizontal construction joints by stopping grout placement 1-1/2 inches below top of uppermost grouted unit. Use coarse grout in grout spaces which are four inches and larger in all horizontal directions; place fine grout in grout spaces which are smaller than four inches in any horizontal direction. D. Hollow masonry units in walls or partitions supporting plumbing, heating, or other mechanical fixtures, voids at door and window jambs, shall be filled solid with grout. For purposes other than vertically reinforced concrete unit masonry, place grout where indicated, and only after mortar joints and other cementitious materials have cured. Place coarse grout in grout spaces which are two inches and larger in all horizontal directions; place fine grout in grout spaces which are smaller than two inches in any horizontal direction. Place grout at rate which allows consolidation of successive layers while preceding layer is plastic. Placement height not to exceed four feet. Consolidate grout and puddle when grouting stopped for two hours and longer; form horizontal construction joints by stopping grout placement 1/2 course height below top of uppermost grouted unit. Grouting accomplished from back-up face of masonry units. E. Prevent grout from coming into contact with finish surfaces which are exposed to view, and with those surfaces which are to receive other finishes. F. Place grout where indicated at all stair connection locations as indicated on drawings. 3.06 LAYING BLOCK VENEER A. Lay each unit in full bed and joint of mortar as each course is laid, and use enough mortar so that all joints are full and solid. Lay horizontal beds,for units and without trowel marks with shoved joints. Lay units in running bond without headers except where other patterns are indicated or specified. To assure full head joints, butter one head of each block before shoving it in place. B. Lay up facing separated by continuous air space from backup masonry walls in exterior masonry faced insulated cavity walls as indicated. Install rigid board insulation above and below wall ties or horizontal joint reinforcement in air space between facing block and backup. Provide weep holes in vertical mortar joints on 32-in,centers just above lintel angles and at bottom of cavity and form by placing preformed plastic weep holes in vertical joints. C. Install galvanized steel lintels as indicated. D. Provide 3/8-in.wide control joints in facing brick where indicated. April 30,2021 04220— Page 12 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 E. Provide backer rod and sealant at all control joints. 3.07 LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Lay approved units with moisture absorption ratio of less than 35 percent. B. Do not wet units before laying except in hot weather. Lightly moisten contact surfaces with water using soft brush just prior to laying units. C. Install reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels in concrete masonry unit walls and partitions as indicated. Extend lintels at least 8 in. beyond each jamb of masonry opening. Install only completely cured lintels. D. Jamb units shall be of the shape and sizes to conform with wall units. 3.08 BONDING AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Place joint reinforcement, for interior concrete masonry unit walls and partitions, continuously in horizontal joint on 16-in.centers. Interrupt at control joints. Place special pieces, for reinforcing corners, around columns and intersections, in every joint where reinforcement occurs. B. Bond intersecting masonry walls and partitions with box wall ties spaced vertically at 16- in. on centers. 3.09 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT A. Place steel reinforcement bars vertically in all masonry walls as indicated. B. Locate vertical reinforcement and dowels in first cells of CMU at jambs of all masonry openings and then space horizontally as indicated. C. Embed dowels l'-6" into reinforced concrete at top and bottom of CMU walls and partitions. Overlap reinforcing 2'-O" using 6-0" maximum length bars. D. Grout cells as specified. 3.10 CUTTING AND JOBBING A. Leave slots and openings for inserts,wires, conduits, and similar items of construction, open or cut. B. Provide recesses or openings at junction boxes, or other locations as indicated. C. Provide openings in exterior walls and interior partitions at duct, conduit, exhaust and other wall penetrations. Bridge above openings using concrete masonry units. Reinforced masonry lintels shall be provided at openings greater than 1 -4". Install membrane wall flashing at exterior wall openings. D. Masonry units to be dried to 35 percent moisture content from prior cutting or grinding before installation of mechanical and electrical services. 3.11 PARTITIONS A. Openings in fire walls around joists or other structural members shall be filled as indicated. An isolation joint shall be placed in the intersection between partitions and structural members. Continuous sealants shall be provided at all isolation joints as specified in Section 07902. April 30,2021 04220-Page 13 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 3.12 BOND BEAMS A. Bond beams shall be filled with grout and reinforced as indicated. 3.13 CONTROL JOINTS A. Control joints keys shall be provided as indicated and shall be constructed by using special control joint units and in accordance with the drawings. The vertical mortar joint at control joint locations shall be continuous. The control joint key shall be interrupted in courses containing continuous bond beam reinforcing. Provide backer rod and sealant at all exterior control joints as specified in Section 07902. 3.14 COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLERS A. Compressible joint fillers shall be provided as indicated and where directed by the Engineer. 3.15 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Install insulation to cavity wall dampproofing with mastic as recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation at 1 ft. both horizontally and vertically on the inside face. Mastic to be compatible with dampproofing. Fit the courses of insulation between wall ties or horizontal joint reinforcement and other confining obstructions in the cavity. Tightly butt edges of insulation in both directions. Press insulation units firmly into place against the inside wythe of masonry or against other construction including structural members to form a continuous thermal barrier. B. Seal joints between insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic or sealant, recommended by the insulation manufacturer, to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill the voids in the completed installation with adhesive, mastic or sealant recommended by the insulation manufacturer. C. Complete installation and concealment of insulation to avoid prolonged exposure of insulation to direct sunlight by covering exposed insulation. 3.16 CAVITY WALL DAMPPROOFING A. Provide the specified material for cavity wall dampproofing. B. Trowel apply one coat of mastic emulsion dampproofing onto substrate at a minimum rate of 5 gal./100 sq.ft. [2L/sq. in.]. C. Coordinate application of cavity wall dampproofing with the installation of cavity wall insulation in cavity masonry backup walls. 3.17 MEMBRANE FLASHING INSTALLATION AND COORDINATION A. Self-Adhered, Composite Flexible Membrane Flashing: Prepare masonry surfaces to receive flashings smooth and free of projections. Install flashing to dry surfaces at air and surface temperatures of 25 deg. F. and above in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at locations indicated. 1. Precut pieces of flashing to easily handled lengths for each location. 2. Remove release paper and position flashing carefully before placing it against the surface. 3. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand roller or a blunt object. Fully adhere flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing. 4. Overlap adjacent pieces 2 inches and roll all reams with a steel hand roller or a blunt object. April 30,2021 04220-Page 14 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 5. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing '/2- �- in. back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge. 6. At heads, sills and all flashing terminations, turn up ends a minimum of 2 inches and make careful folds to form an end dam,with the seams sealed. 7. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the flashing membrane to come in contact with polysulfide sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products or EPDM. 8. Do not expose flashing membrane to sunlight for more than thirty days prior to enclosure. B. Accessories: 1. Apply surface conditioner at rate recommended by the manufacturer, prior to flashing installation. Allow surface conditioner to dry completely before flashing application. 2. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along flashing top edge, seams, cuts and penetrations. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair joints that are unsound, not full of mortar,or which have hairline cracks due to shrinkage or poor adhesion, as follows: 1. Cut or rake affected mortar to a depth of 3/4 in. 2. Brush out debris. 3. Thoroughly moisten remaining mortar and adjoining masonry and paint with neat cement. 4. Point joint full of mortar. 5. Tool joint to a hard,glassy surface. 6. After first day,wet down walls having repaired joints, at least five times daily, for a minimum of three days. B. Remove and reconstruct work injured by climatic conditions, or because of insufficient protection as directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Pointing consists of raking out defective joints, and running bond pattern joints; repairing defective joints; and working joint after mortar has initially set. 1. Joints except control joints,joints in running bond pattern and joints to be sealed: Tool concave in a manner that will compact and press the mortar against the units. Strike flush joints covered with plaster,drywall, or waterproofing membrane. 2. Control joints, expansion joints and joints to be sealed shall not contain mortar. 3. Defective joints: Rake out the full depth of the joint, patch with mortar, and tool to match adjacent joints. D. Apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 sq. ft. in location acceptable to Engineer if cleaning by water does not produce satisfactory results to the Engineer. 1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is acceptable to Engineer. 2. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. 3. Scrub with approved cleaning agent. 4. Immediately rinse with clear water. 5. Work small sections at a time. 6. Work from top to bottom. 7. Protect sash, metal lintels, and other materials which may corrode when masonry is cleaned with acid solution. E. When left overnight, cover tops of wythes of masonry walls with a by waterproof membrane extending at least 24 inches down both sides. Protect masonry left for greater length of time. When work is resumed, clean all top surfaces of loose mortar. April 30,2021 04220-Page 15 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 3.19 FIELD TESTING A. Test concrete masonry units in accordance with ASTM C140. B. A minimum of two specimens of mortar shall be taken each day. A layer of mortar 1/2 to 5/8 in. thick shall be spread on the masonry units and allowed to stand one minute. The specimens shall then be prepared and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 140. C. Test grout compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C1019. A minimum of two specimens of grout per day shall be sampled and tested. Each specimen shall have a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days. D. Prism Tests: At least on prism test sample shall be made for each 5,000 square feet of wall but not less than three such samples shall be made for any building. Three prisms shall be used in each sample. Prisms shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 447. 3.20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 04220-Page 16 of 16 Concrete Unit Masonry Job No.60633796 SECTION 05010 METALS FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes the furnishing and fabrication of various metals for various types of structures shown on PLANS. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A27/A27M Standard Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold-Finished ASTM A36/A36M Standard Specification for Structural Steel ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip ASTM A193/A193M Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A384 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing or Steel Assemblies ASTM A525 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A992/ Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for use in Building A992M-00 Framing -- � ASTM B29 Standard Specification for Refined Lead April 30,2021 05010—Page 1 of 3 Metals for Structures Job No.60633796 ASTM BI 331B1 33M Standard Specification for Copper Rod, Bar, and Shapes ASTM BI 52/BI 52M Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes ASTM B308/B308M Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes 1.04- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Structural Steel: 1. Rolled Wide Flange Shapes: Per ASTM A992/A992M. 2. All other Rolled Shapes: Per ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise noted. B. Carbon Steel Castings: Per ASTM A27/A27M, Grade 60-30M(Minimum). C. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Per ASTM A525, for zinc-coated (galvanized) iron or steel sheets. D. Threaded Fasteners 1. Standard Bolts: Per ASTM A307. 2. High-Strength Bolts: Per ASTM A325. E. Corrosion-Resisting (Stainless)Steel 1. Plate, Sheet, Strip, Fasteners Where No Welding Required: Per ASTM A167, Type 316 unless noted otherwise. 2. Plate, Sheet, Strip, Fasteners Where Welding Required: Per ASTM A167, Type 316E or unless noted otherwise. 3. Bolts: Type 316 conforming to ASTM A193 with suitable stainless steel nuts and washers. F. Copper 1. Sheet, Strip, Plate: Per ASTM BI 52/BI 52M, No. 110. 2. Rod, Bar, Shapes: Per ASTM B133/BI 33M, No. 110. G. Lead: Pig lead per ASTM B29. H. Aluminum 1. Structural Shapes, Extrusions, Bars, Grating, Stair Treads: Per ASTM B221 and ASTM B308/B308M,Alloy 6061-T6. 2. Gravel Stops: Per ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T42. 3. Other Items: Per recognized standards. I. Galvanizing: Per ASTM A123, ASTM A153, and ASTM A384 as applicable. 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 05010—Page 2 Of 3 Metals for Structures Job No.60633796 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 -3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 05010-Page 3 of 3 Metals for Structures Job No.60633796 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 05015 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: Applies to all stainless steel fabrications as shown on the PLANS. Furnish all plant, labor, supervision, materials, equipment, supplies, tools, and all operations in connection with furnishing, installing, and placing in service stainless steel fabrications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specification Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS(ASME) ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code-Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures,Welders,Grazers,and Welding and Brazing Operators AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 1.04-1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish large-scale, dimensioned shop drawings showing plan,elevation, and appropriate cross sections. Show piece marks, sizes, drilling, thickness,joint details, and materials. Furnish chemical and physical material certificates for each heat used during manufacture. B. Submit welder qualification certificates. C. Submit shop testing certificates. April 30,2021 05015- Page 1 of 3 Stainless Steel Fabrications Job No.60633796 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabrication dimensions and accuracy of fabrication are Contractor's responsibility. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Shipping 1. Ship factory fabricated assemblies in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulations, properly match-marked for ease of field erection. 2. Loose parts(nuts and bolts,etc.)are to be shipped in crates that are clearly marked as to contents. B. Handling and Unloading 1. Unload and handle equipment in accordance with fabricator's instructions. 2. Transfer of unprotected stainless steel to be accomplished utilizing nylon straps or stainless steel cables to avoid contact with carbon steel components. C. Storage 1. Store in an area that will avoid damage due to traffic. 2. Exposure to normal weather conditions is acceptable; however, avoid contact with other materials like carbon steel, aluminum, concrete,and corrosive chemicals. 1.09-1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S): Use materials of domestic manufacture. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. General: Materials used in manufacture to be 316E stainless steel unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Minimum Material Requirements 1. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276 2. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666, ASTM A240, or ASTM A167 3. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM 193 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. All fabrication to be performed in a fully equipped fabrication shop. 2. Each piece to be marked with an identification mark that corresponds to the shop drawing to facilitate job site assembly. B. Welding 1. All welding is to be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of ANSI/AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel"published by the American Welding Society. 2. Fabricate utilizing inert argon gas, shielded arc plasma, MIG or TIG welding procedures. 3. Add filler wire to all welds to provide a cross sectional area of weld and metal thickness equal to or greater than the parent metal. Filler wire to be at least one grade higher than the parent metal and of the extra low carbon grade. 4. Rigid jigs and fixtures are to be utilized for holding parts together in proper alignment while welding. April 30,2021 05015- Page 2 of 3 Stainless Steel Fabrications Job No.60633796 5. All joints are to be accurately fitted,aligned,and cleaned of foreign material prior to welding. 6. Grind flush all welds on gasketed surfaces. C. Pickle and passivate all welded stainless steel fabrications by using the following procedure. 1. Wire-brush all outside weld area to remove weld splatter. Brushes are to be stainless steel and are to have been used only on stainless steel. 2. Remove all carbon deposits,greases, and oils by pickling and neutralization to aid the regeneration of a uniform corrosion-resistant chromium oxide film. a. After welding and brushing the weld clean,completely immerse all stainless steel assemblies and parts in a pickling solution of 6% nitric acid and 3% hydrofluoric acid at a temperature of 140°F for a minimum of 15 minutes or until a mild etch is achieved. In lieu of passivation, a glass bead blast will be acceptable. b. Neutralize the pickling solution after cleaning by immersing the assemblies and parts into a solution of tn-sodium phosphate and then rinsing with clean water. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Nuts and Bolts: Per ANSI B 18.2,stainless steel, type and grade to prevent galling. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General Requirements 1. PLANS show sizes, elevations, and general arrangement. 3.04-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement and payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 05015- Page 3 of 3 Stainless Steel Fabrications Job No.60633796 <--'-�, THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 05020 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes the furnishing, fabricating, and erection of structural steel and miscellaneous metals at location(s)shown on PLANS. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Shop painting in accordance with Specification Section 09902"Painting and Protective Coatings." 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION(AISC) Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A36/A36M 1997 Standard Specification for Structural Steel } ASTM A48/A48M 1994 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A123/A123M 1997 Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings for Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153/A153M 1998 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A384 1976 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies (R1996) ASTM A385 1998 Standard Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings ASTM A653/A653M 1998 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A924/A924M 1997 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM BI 52/BI 52M 1997 Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar ASTM B187/B187M 1997 Standard Specification for Copper Bar, Bus Bar, Rod and Shapes ASTM B221/B221M 1996 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extended Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes,and Tubes ASTM B308/B308M 1996 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes April 30,2021 05020—Page 1 of 3 Miscellaneous Metals Job Number:60633796 1.04- 1.07 (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metals to the jobsite free from dirt, scale and rust, oil,or other foreign material. B. Store materials above the surface of ground on platforms, skids, or other supports to prevent sagging, and protect from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust and corrosion. C. Handle metals to not allow sustain bending or warping before and during placement. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Structural Steel: Per ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise noted. B. Steel Grating: As shown on PLANS. C. Cast Iron: Per ASTM A48/A48M gray iron, Class 20. D. Copper 1. Soft Copper Sheets: Per ASTM B152/B152M, No. 110. 2. Rod, Bar, and Shapes: Per ASTM B187, No. 110. E. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Per ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A924/A924M coating G90. F. Aluminum 1. Structural Shapes, Extrusions, Bars, Grating, Stair Treads: Per ASTM B221/B221M and ASTM B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6. 2. Gravel Stop: Per ASTM B221/B221 M,Alloy 6063-T42. 3. Other Items: Per recognized standards. G. Other Metals: Per applicable ASTM specification or recognized standard, as approved. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop Painting 1. In accordance with Specification Section 09902"Painting and Protective Coatings." 2. Do not paint metal surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, or on which will have plates welded in the field, or within 2 inches of field welds. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Structural and Miscellaneous Steel: Per AISC"Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, Alloyable Stress Design and Plastic Design." April 30,2021 05020—Page 2 of 3 Miscellaneous Metals Job Number:60633796 B. Aluminum: Weld structural frames in accordance with current recommended practice. C. Grating: Fabricate required openings in gratings and band openings of 5-inch-diameter and larger with ½-inch clearance. Furnish all clips. D. Galvanizing 1. Hot-dip galvanize structural and miscellaneous steel after fabrication, as specified. 2. Galvanize anchor bolts. 3. Galvanize per ASTM A123,ASTM Al 53/Al 53M, ASTM A384 and A385 as applicable. E. Regalvanizing: Repair chipped or otherwise damaged galvanized areas by application of galvanizing repair compounds meeting Federal Specification O-G-93(stick only)in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 05020—Page 3 of 3 Miscellaneous Metals Job Number:60633796 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 05100 METAL STRUCTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes the fabrication and erection of structural steel and other metals structures as shown on PLANS. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot Dipped Galvanized)Coating on Iron and Steel Products ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Non- Shrink) AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY(AWS) AWS A5.1 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding AWS A5.5 Specification for Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes AWS A5.18 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding AWS A5.20 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL(SSPC) SSPC-SP3 No. 3 Power Tool Cleaning 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". A. Shop Drawings 1. Required for structural steel, forgings,wrought iron, castings, or bearings. 2. Required for camber and erection diagrams. 3. Shop drawings to reflect use of submerged arc welding, gas metal arc welding, or cored arc welding. April 30,2021 05100—Page 1 of 4 Metal Structures Job No.60633796 4. Submit preliminary erection drawings showing sequence of erection, location of falsework, and location of ground and air splices. 5. Provide the following information for members fabricated by welding or bolting. a. Fabricating procedures. b. Calculated stresses. c. List of equipment used for fabrication. d. Sequence of assembly. e. Details of connections. f. Special processes such as planing,facing, etc. B. Certificates 1. Submit certified copy of mill certificates of compliance with requirements herein specified for structural steel and other metals. 2. Submit certified copy of shop welding tests in compliance with requirements herein specified. 3. Welder certifications for all Field Welders when requested. 4. Mill tests not required for miscellaneous hardware, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, etc. C. Welding: Equipment, procedures, operations, workmanship, qualification of welders, and inspection to conform with AISC and AWS. 1. Shop welding to be at no additional cost to OWNER. a. Make random radiographic inspections of 35 percent of primary welds. b. Welds requiring repairs to be retested by radiography after repairs are made. c. If defective work is found, make additional radiographs on sections welded by same equipment and/or operator just prior to and just after the section containing the defect. d. Radiography required because of unacceptable welding to be performed by approved commercial laboratory at no additional cost to OWNER. 2. Field Welding a. Make random radiographic inspections of all full penetration welds of beam flanges. b. Ultrasonic testing of all other full penetration welds. c. Visual inspection of all welds not specified to receive radiographic or Ultrasonic Testing. d. Radiograph defective weld repairs. e. Radiography required because of unacceptable welding to be performed by approved commercial laboratory at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle material so as to prevent damage. B. Store material on skids above ground and keep clean, properly drained, and protected from elements which cause corrosion or damage. C. Store girders and beams upright and prevent excessive deflection. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) April 30,2021 05100—Page 2 of 4 Metal Structures Job No.60633796 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Structural Steel and Other Metals: Per Section 05010, "Metals for Structures". B. Electrodes for welding to conform to the following. 1. For Manual Shielded Metal-Arc Welding: Per AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5. 2. For Gas Metal-Arc Welding: Per AWS A5.18 or AWS A5.20. 3. For stainless steel use 309-CB stabilized welding rods. 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Methods and Equipment 1. Spot welding to eliminate erection bolts not permitted. 2. Securely tie and/or brace beams or girders over roadway or railroad. Protect traffic below from falling objects during construction. B. Falsework: Properly designed, constructed, and maintained. C. Straightening Bent Material 1. Straighten plates, angles, built-up members, and other shapes by methods that will not produce fracture or other injury to material. 2. Straighten individual pieces before assembly. 3. Straighten distorted built-up members by mechanical means, or by carefully supervised application of localized heat in limited amounts. a. Do not apply heat directly on weld metal. b. Temperature of heated area not to exceed 1,200°F(dull red). 4. After straightening bend or buckle, inspect surface of metal for evidence of fracture. 5. Replace materials damaged by straightening at no additional cost to OWNER. D. Galvanizing 1. Galvanize rolled, pressed, or forged steel shapes, plates, pipe, and bars as per ASTM A123, after completion of welded fabrication. Provide a minimum thickness of 4.2 mils of zinc. 2. Galvanize steel or iron castings as per ASTM A153, Class A. 3. Galvanize bolts, nuts, screws, washers, and other miscellaneous hardware as per ASTM A153, Class C or D. 4. As specified on PLANS. E. Paint and Painting 1. Shop Painting a. Conform to requirements of SSPC-SP3 except clean steel by buffing. b. Apply paint at minimum rate of one gallon to 450 square feet. c. Do not paint metal surfaces in contact with concrete or on which plates will be applied in field or within 2 inches of field welds or surfaces to be galvanized. d. Thoroughly clean surfaces of other metals of dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter before transporting to jobsite, and shop paint only if specified on PLANS or by TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 2. Field Painting: Per Section 09902, "Painting and Protective Coatings". April 30,2021 05100—Page 3 of 4 Metal Structures Job No.60633796 F. Bearing and Anchorage 1. Place castings, bearing plates, or shoes on full and even bearing on concrete. 2. Place castings, bearing plates, or shoes on preformed fabric pads as specified. 3. Adjust grade with non-shrink grout conforming to ASTM C1107, Grade C. a. Minimum thickness of mortar bed 1/8 inch. b. Maximum thickness of mortar bed 3/8 inch. c. Provide adequate curing. 4. Use approved latex-based grout and galvanized steel shims for grade adjustments over 3/8 inch. 5. Use graphite spring lubricant for sliding movement surfaces. 6. Paint rolling surface of rocker shoes. 7. Anchor Bolt Setting a. Cast in Place. Clean holes before grout placement. b. With written approval, by drilling and grouting with non-shrinking grout. c. With written approval, by formed holes and grouted with non-shrinking grout. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION Regalvanizing: Repair chipped or otherwise damaged galvanized areas by application of zinc dust-zinc oxide paint conforming to requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-641b or by application of repair compounds conforming to requirements of Federal Specification O-G-93 (stick only)in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Misfits 1. Correct minor misfits by reasonable amount of reaming and cutting. 2. Report any error in shop work. 3. Correct misfits in presence of ENGINEER. 4. Burning bolt holes not permitted. 3.06 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.07 CLEANING Cleanup: Clean up area and remove excess material, dismantled forms and falsework, and debris during construction, and clean up area completely and thoroughly after completion of the work herein described. 3.08-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 05100—Page 4 of 4 Metal Structures Job No.60633796 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Wood Hailers and blocking. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show general arrangement, location, and basic dimensions. B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE(ALSC) Softwood Lumber Standards AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM Al 53-82 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM D2559-84 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior(Wet Use) Exposure Conditions ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS ASSOCIATION (AWPA) AWPA Cl All Timber Products—Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process NEW ENGLAND LUMBER MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION(NELMA) SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU(SPIB) WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU(WCLIB) WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA) 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 06100—Page 1 of 4 Rough Carpentry Job No.60633796 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals." 1. Product Data: Material specifications for lumber, plywood, treated wood members including grade and species and all required fasteners. 2. Wood Treatment Data as follows including Chemical Treatment Manufacturer's Instructions for Handling, Storing, Installation, and Finishing of Treated Material: a. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. b. For water-borne treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1. For lumber pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. 1.09-1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER,GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC)Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. NELMA—Northeaster Lumber Manufacturers Association 2. SPIB—Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 3. WCLIB—West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 4. WWPA—Western Wood Products Association C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece; or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20,for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. April 30,2021 06100—Page 2 of 4 Rough Carpentry Job No.60633796 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, bucks, Hailers, blocking, furring, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or"Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules of "No. 2 Boards"per SPIB rules. 2.03 FIRE RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber). Identify fire-retardant- treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures,when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Interior Type A High Temperature(HT), unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws:ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. April 30,2021 06100—Page 3 of 4 Rough Carpentry Job No.60633796 B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, Hailers, blocking, grounds,and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.02 WOOD NAILERS, BLOCKING,AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood Hailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.04-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 06100—Page 4 of 4 Rough Carpentry Job No.60633796 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials and installation of flashing and sheet metal. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA Conform to the recommendations of SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300. B. Provide details to show sizes, installation, anchorage, and interface with adjacent work of each metal configuration. C. Indicate gauge, composition of sheet metal, and compliance with ASTM standards. PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.01 GALVANIZED STEEL Comply with ASTM A653 with Coating Designation G-90. Provide minimum 24-gauge thickness unless noted otherwise. 2.02 ALUMINUM Comply with ASTM B209,Alloy 3003, Temper H14, 0.032-inch minimum thickness. 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET Sheeting shall be Type Type 316 or 316E per ASTM A666, 24-gauge minimum thickness. Finish shall be No. 4 per ASTM A480. 2.04 WELDING RODS AND WIRE FOR STAINLESS STEEL SHEET Electrodes shall be Type E316. Welding electrodes shall comply with AWS A5.4. Bare wire shall comply with AWS A5.9. April 30,2021 07600-Page 1 of 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal Job No.60633796 2.05 NAILS Use flathead, wire, barbed, slating type, galvanized steel nails, conforming to ASTM F1667, with steel components and sheet. Use flathead, wire, barbed, slating type, aluminum nails, conforming to ASTM F1667 with aluminum components and sheet. 2.06 SCREWS Use self-tapping sheet-metal type, conforming to ASME B18.6.4. Screw material shall be aluminum or stainless steel for use with aluminum flashing and galvanized steel for use with steel flashing. 2.07 SOLDER FOR GALVANIZED STEEL Comply with ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sn50. 2.08 SEALANT Comply with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 (minimum) for horizontal joints and Grade NS, Class 25(minimum)for vertical joints. 2.09 CLEATS Provide with minimum width of 2 inches. Use the same material and thickness as the sheet metal. 2.10 REGLETS Use same material as sheet metal. Provide shop-formed corners and joint connectors. 2.11 FABRICATION Fabricate sheet metal with lines, breaks, and angles sharp and true with surfaces free from objectionable wave, warp, or buckle. Fold exposed edges of sheet metal back to form 1/2-inch- wide hem on side concealed from view. Finish work free from water leakage under all weather conditions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for sheet metalwork. Verify that reglets, cants, and blocking to receive sheet metal are installed and free of concrete and soil. Verify shapes and dimensions of surface to be covered. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. Hem exposed edges. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drips. Clean and flux metals prior to soldering. B. Common Lock Seams: 5/8-inch finished width. Four-ply loose lock. C. Flat-Lock Seams: 3/4-inch finished width. Four-ply flat lock, malleted tight. Sweat full with solder. April 30,2021 07600—Page 2 of 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal Job No.60633796 D. Single-Corner Seams: 5/8-inch finished width. Three-ply loose lock. Corners lapped and soldered. E. Lap Seams: 7/8-inch finished width. F. Spaced Cleats: 2 feet on center. Secure to substrate with fasteners and cover heads with cleat tabs. G. Continuous Cleats: Secure to substrate with fasteners spaced 1 foot on center. H. Reglets: Install straight, in line, and with leakproof joints. I. Roof Counterflashing: Overlap base flashing 4 inches minimum. Install bottom edge tight against base flashing. Lap seam vertical joints 3 inches minimum and apply sealant. Miter, lap seam, and close corner joints with solder or sealant. Overlap base flashing with counterflashing 1 inch minimum. Slope storm collar away from penetration. J. Roof Penetration Flashing: Extend base flashing flange onto roof 6 inches minimum away from penetration. Extend flange upward around penetration to at least 8 inches above roofing felts. Solder lap joints. K. Fabricate coping to the shapes and dimensions shown in the drawings. Install with continuous cleats and butt-type joints, 10 feet on center joints to allow for expansion and contraction. Miter, seam, and seal all corners. 3.03 CLEANING As work progresses, neutralize excess flux with 5%to 10%washing soda solution and thoroughly rinse. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap, and debris. 3.04 PAINTING AND COATING A. Coat aluminum in contact with ferrous metal, concrete,or masonry per Section 09902. B. Exposed galvanized steel flashing shall have a coating per Section 09902. Color shall be selected by Owner. C. Exposed aluminum flashing shall have a Kynar finish. Color shall be selected by Owner. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 07600—Page 3 of 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal Job No.60633796 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 07610 STANDING SEAM ROOF AND SOFFIT SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes manufactured roof panels of the following type: 1. Standing seam roof panels and underlayment. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Roof underlayment. B. Exposed Surfaces: It is a requirement that the exposed surfaces of the Work of "Standing Seam Roof and Soffit System, and"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" be consistent. Coordinate the finishes of this section with the other two sections to assure minimal differences between the appearance of various elements. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 NOT USED 1.04 NOT USED 1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods for each system. B. Air Infiltration: Provide roof panel systems with no air leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure differential of 1.57 psf. C. Water Penetration: Provide panel systems with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward static air pressure differential of not less than 6.24 psf and not more than 12.0 psf. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals"and Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". 1. Product data including manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel system. 2. Samples for verification purposes of roof panels. Provide sample panels 12 inches long by actual panel width, in the profile, style,color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories. 3. Shop Drawings showing layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim,flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. April 30,2021 07610—Page 1 of 6 Standing Seam Roof And Soffit System Job No.60633796 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wind Uplift: Provide roof panel system including supports meeting requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.for Class 30 wind uplift resistance. B. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of prefabricated panels,take field measurements of structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication. C. Design roof system to conform to applicable requirements of ANSI A 58.1. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package roof panels for protection against transportation damage. B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels so that they will not accumulate water. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.09 NOT USED 1.10 WARRANTY A. Finish Warranty 1. Submit a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer,for a period of twenty(20) years. This warranty states that the paint finish will not peel, check, crack in excess of a numerical rating of 8, or fade/change colors in excess of 5 E units (Hunter Color Units). 2. Galvalume steel sheet will not be subject to substrate failure or coating, cracking, peeling, or flaking and will not erode through or become perforated within a period of twenty(20)years after shipment from the manufacturer's plant. B. Weather-tightness Warranty 1. Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, guarantying installer's performance for a period of twenty years. The manufacturer endures that the installer will correct any roof leaks identified within the building beyond normal wear and tear. Liability is limited to the actual cost of the repair. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. April 30,2021 07610—Page 2 of 6 Standing Seam Roof And Soffit System Job No.60633796 2. Provide roof panels in continuous lengths from ridge to eave or factory formed to 40'max. Seam spacing shall be 16"when used for Batten Seam on center, Rib height 1-1/2". 3. Attachment shall be through the flat area adjacent to the overlapping rib with#8 x 3/4" color-matched fasteners, including a combination washer of metal and neoprene. B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels : Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide"SLZ-150, 1.5"snap lock Z"Standing Seam Roof System as manufactured by Quality Metals Roof and Wall System, or equal standing seam metal roof system by one of the following: 2. Manufacturers: a. Quality Metals Roof and Wall System b. Berridge Manufacturing Company. c. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. d. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems. 3. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick. a. Color: Match existing building roof color. 4. Clips: Fixed. a. Material: 0.0625-inch-thick, stainless-steel sheet. 5. Panel Height: 1.5 inches. 6. Uplift Rating: UL 90. 2.02 SOFFIT PANELS A. A. Basis-of-Design Soffit Panel: QM Soffit Panel as manufactured by Quality Metals Roof and Wall Systems or equal metal soffit panel system. 1. Panels shall be factory formed to 40'max and shall have no exposed fasteners. 2. Panel shall have 12-3/4"exposure, two 3/8"deep vee grooves at 4-1/4"on center, with concealed fasteners and interlocking sidelap. 3. Attachment to metal supports with#8 x 1/2"TEKS screws at maximum spacing of 2'-O"on center per local code requirement. 4. Panels shall have a smooth surface texture. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Structural Quality Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip aluminum-zinc- coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792 with class AZ-50 coating; Grade 40 or to suit manufacturer's standards. 2.04 METAL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. April 30,2021 07610—Page 3 Of 6 Standing Seam Roof And Soffit System Job No.60633796 C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.05 ROOF PANELS A. Panel Face Sheets: Fabricate to the profile or configuration indicated from 24-gage (0.0239-inch)aluminum-zinc-coated steel sheets. B. Standing Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed, standing-seam roof panel system with striations designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlin using a concealed clip. Form panels of 24-gage(0.0239-inch)aluminum-zinc- coated steel sheets. 1. Clips: Provide 16-gage (0.0598-inch) panel clips designed to meet negative load requirements. Provide space at purlins. 2. Cleats: Factory-calked, mechanically seamed cleats formed from 24-gage (0.0239-inch), Grade C,zinc-coated steel sheets. 2.06 SELF ADHERING MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT A. Self Adhering Membrane: A flexible high temperature, skid resistant sheet flashing specially formulated from plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed application and approved by the metal roofing system manufacturer. 1. Grace Ultra as manufactured by W.R grace&Co. 2. Other pre-approved products. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 2. Configurations: Special shapes, including curved components, as indicated on the drawings. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation—Two layers with maximum board size of 4' x4', faced on both sides. 2.01b./cu.ft. density when measured in accordance ASTM D 1621, as manufactured by the approved roofing materials manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end- welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Use aluminum, corrosion-resistant steel, or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium-plated fasteners for interior applications. 2. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. a. Atomseal by Fry, 7/8"diameter, Neoprene-stainless steel. b. Sealing washers by Rawl, 1 1/8"diameter, type 304 stainless, cat. no. 2896. April 30,2021 07610—Page 4 of 6 Standing Seam Roof And Soffit System Job No.60633796 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. C. Accessories: Provide components required for a complete roof panel system, including trim,fascias, corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets,fillers, closure strips and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels. 1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded cellular rubber or cross- linked polyolefin foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roof panels. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 2. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. 3. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the panel manufacturer. 4. Separation Tape: Closed cell neoprene tape¼-inch thick in width matching framing member. Use to eliminate"flutter" between panels and supporting members(purlins). D. Soffit Panel Installation Accessories: 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches deep, 475 lb/1000 feet. 2. Furring Channels: 7/8 inch deep, 300 lb/1000 feet. 3. Non-Load-Bearing Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base(uncoated)metal and other characteristics: Depth: 1 5/8 inches,2 1/2 inches, 3-5/8 inches, 4 inches. 2.09 PANEL FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, and as required to fulfill indicated performance requirements which have been demonstrated by factory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements. B. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials which are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finishes. C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips,which provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact in a manner which will minimize noise from movements within panel system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PANEL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Purlin, angles, channels, and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage shall be installed in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction "Code of Standard Practice." B. Secure all clip angles to purlins only. Use stainless steel self-tapping screws and center on purlins to ensure that no fastener will be exposed to view from the underside of the - - panels. April 30,2021 07610—Page 5 of 6 Standing Seam Roof And Soffit System Job No.60633796 3.02 PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturers'instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates.Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Install panels with concealed fasteners. B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel system, including trim, fascias, corner units, clips, seam covers, battens,flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets, sealants, and fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Refer to other sections of these specifications for product and installation requirements applicable to indicated joint sealers. D. Standing Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to supports with concealed clip in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install separation tape on purlins and other supporting framing members with adhesive to eliminate"flutter"between panels and supporting framing. 3. At end laps of panels, install tape caulk between panels. 4. Install factory-calked cleats at standing-seam joints.Apply snap-on batten to the panels to provide a weathertight joint. E. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of inch in 20-0"on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films(if any)as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. 3.04—3.10(NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 07610—Page 6 of 6 Standing Seam Roof And Soffit System Job No.60633796 SECTION 07631 SHEET METAL GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS, AND SCUPPERS PART 1 GENERAL A. Description 1. Furnish materials and installation of aluminum gutters, downspouts, and scuppers for buildings as shown on PLANS. Where not shown on PLANS, gutter sections having a minimum width of at least doorway width pus one foot on each side of door to be furnished at all building doorways. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. C. Submittals 1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Section 01300. 2. Submit fabrication and installation drawings. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show dimensions, slopes, and installation requirements. D. Design Criteria 1. Design gutters, downspouts, and scuppers as shown in the drawings and in accordance with the IBC. 2. Fabricate per the recommendations of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. PART 2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet 1. Sheeting shall comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 5086, 0-temper, minimum 0.032-inch thick. B. Bituminous Plastic Cement 1. Cement shall conform to ASTM D2822, Type I or ASTM D4022. C. Precast Concrete Splash Blocks 1. To be furnished at all unpaved locations below downspouts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/INSTRUCTION A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1. Store materials off of ground or deck. Identify materials subjected to improper storage, conspicuously mark as rejected, and permanently remove from the jobsite. June 1,2021 07631 —Page 1 of 3 Sheet Metal Gutters,Downspouts,and Scuppers Job No.60633796 B. Gutter Fabrication 1. Provide hung type supported on the underside by brackets that permit free thermal movement of the gutter. Provide gutters in sizes indicated or 4 inches by 4 inches if not indicated, with mitered corners, end caps, outlets, brackets, and other accessories necessary for installation. Bead or reinforce the outer edge of gutter with a stiffening bar not less than 3/4 inch by 3/16 inch of the same material as the gutter. Fabricate gutters in sections not less than 8 feet. Lap the sections a minimum of 1 inch in the direction of flow or provide with concealed splice plate 6 inches minimum. 2. Join aluminum gutters with riveted sealed joints. 3. Provide expansion-type slip joints midway between outlets. Support gutters on adjustable hangers spaced not more than 30 inches on centers or as recommended by the manufacturer. Adjust gutters to slope uniformly to outlets, with high points occurring midway between outlets. Fabricate hangers and fastenings from same material as the gutters. C. Downspout Fabrication 1. Provide downspouts complete, including elbows and offsets. Provide 4-inch- square downspouts in approximately 10-foot lengths. Provide end joints to telescope not less than 1/2 inch and lock longitudinal joints. Provide gutter outlets with wire ball strainers for each outlet. Provide strainers to fit tightly into outlets and be of the same material used for gutters. Keep downspouts not less than 1 inch away from walls. Fasten to the walls at top, bottom, and at an intermediate point not to exceed 5 feet on centers with leader straps. Provide straps and fasteners of the same materials as the downspouts. D. Scupper Fabrication 1. Line interior of scupper openings with sheet aluminum. Extend the lining through and project outside of the wall to form a drip on the bottom edge and form to return not less than 1 inch against the face of the outside wall at the top and sides. Fold outside edges under 1/2 inch on all sides. Provide the perimeter of the lining approximately 1/2 inch less than the perimeter of the scupper. Join the top and sides of the lining on the roof deck side to a closure flange by a locked and soldered joint. Join the bottom edge by a locked and soldered joint to the closure flange, where required, form with a ridge to act as a gravel stop around the scupper inlet. Provide surfaces to receive the scupper lining and coat with bituminous plastic cement. Mechanically fasten joints and seal. E. Conductor Fabrication 1. Fabricate of the same material as the downspouts. Set the depth of top opening equal to two-thirds of the width. Provide outlet tubes not less than 4 inches long. Flat-lock solder galvanized seams. Fill mechanically fastened aluminum joints with a bituminous plastic cement. Where conductor heads are used in conjunction with scuppers, set the conductor a minimum of 2 inches wider than the scupper. Attach conductor heads to the wall with masonry fasteners and loose-lock to provide conductor heads with screens of the same material. Securely fasten screens to the heads. F. Terminations 1. Neatly fit into the drainage connection the downspouts terminating in drainage lines and fill the joints with a Portland cement mortar seal sloped away from the downspout. Provide downspouts terminating in splash blocks with 45-degree elbow-type fittings. G. Installation 1. Install downspouts plumb and vertical within 1/4 inch in 10 feet. June 1,2021 07631 —Page 2 of 3 Sheet Metal Gutters,Downspouts,and Scuppers Job No.60633796 H. Painting and Coating 1. Coat aluminum items in contact with ferrous metal or concrete with a Bituminous paint. a. Type: Bituminous paint having a minimum volume solids of 68% coal-tar pitch based. b. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam cleaning per SSPC SP-1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast. c. Prime Coat: Apply synthetic resin or epoxy primer to metal surface before finish coats. Products: International Intervinux VTA528/529, or equal. No primer required for Carboline or Tnemec. d. Finish Coat: Carboline Bitumastic 50, Tnemec 46-465, International Intertuf 100, or equal. Apply two coats to a minimum dry-film thickness of 12 mils each. 2. Aluminum items shall have a Kynar finish. Color shall be by Owner. 3.04—3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise stated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 07631 —Page 3 of 3 Sheet Metal Gutters,Downspouts,and Scuppers Job No.60633796 r-- -� THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 07841 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install firestopping and firesafing, including: 1. Through-penetration firestops and smokestops for fire-rated partition and floor assemblies, both blank(empty)and those accommodating penetrating items, such as, but not necessarily limited to cable trays, electrical signal cables, conduit, pipes, and ducts. 2. Membrane penetration protection for fire-rated partitions. 3. Construction Gap Firestops: a. Construction joint firestops with partitions,floors, or the intersection of floors to exterior walls, or the intersection of top of partitions to ceilings. b. Top of partition firestopping in fire-rated partitions. c. Top of partition and construction joint smokestopping in smoke partitions. 4. Intumescent compressible joint filler, designed to prevent the spread of fire through openings between building components. 5. Accessories as required to provide a complete firestopping system. 6. Specific conditions requiring firestopping may not be fully detailed on the Drawings. Where a specific firestop system is not indicated on Drawings, the subcontractor shall include proposed system designs in submittals. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 NOT USED 1.04 NOT USED 1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide complete through-penetration firestopping systems which have been tested and approved by UL or FM, or third-party testing agency approved by the ENGINEER, and are listed under their label service. B. Firestopping Materials and Systems: 1. Shall be capable of closing or filling through-penetrations created by the following: a. The burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials. b. Deflection of sheet metal electrical and mechanical ductwork due to thermal expansion. 2. Shall be asbestos free and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents. 3. Shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces. 4. Shall be moisture resistant and may not dissolve in water after curing. n _ C. Construction Gap Firestops: Where movement across gap is anticipated, firestopping system shall comply with ASTM E119 or UL 2079. April 30,2021 07841 -Page 1 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 D. Through-Penetration Firestop Ratings: 1. Comply with F-and T-ratings as required by local building codes, code official, and as tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of project conditions. 2. The F-rating shall not apply to all through-penetration firestops and shall not be less than the required fire-resistive rating of the assembly penetrated, except as specified. 3. The T-rating shall apply to through-penetration firestop locations as specified and shall not be less than the required fire-resistance rating of the assembly penetrated. a. R-rating shall apply to floor penetration firestops that protect larger than 4-in nominal pipe or 15 square inches in overall cross-sectional areas that are not contained within a wall at the point where they penetrate the floor. b. T-rating shall apply to wall penetration firestops that protect larger than 4-in nominal pipe or 15 square inches in overall cross-sectional area, and are below any ceiling. T-rating shall also apply to penetration firestops above corridor ceilings where penetrations are larger than the size indicated herein. 4. The F-rating and T-rating for penetrations through 4-hour fire-resistance rated walls shall be not less than 3 hours. E. Surface Burning: Firestop materials shall be classified as Class A tested in accordance with ASTM E84, flamespread maximum 25, and smoke developed maximum 450. F. Construction Gap Firestops: Gaps that may experience movement shall comply with ASTM E119 or UL 2079. G. Membrane Penetrations: Comply with applicable Building Code. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300"Submittals"and Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". B. Submit a schedule of through-penetrations which indicates the firestop system to be utilized for each different firestopping applications. 1. Submit a sample of the schedule format for the Owner's representative's approval, prior to submitting the actual schedule. 2. Schedule shall indicate construction of the wall or floor assembly; size, number, and material of penetrating items;firestop system designation; required F-rating and T-rating; UL-listed system number; remarks where applicable. C. Submit complete list of all firestop systems to be utilized, corresponding to system designations(FSM-1...)specified herein. 1. Include all of the individual materials required for each complete system. 2. Approved Installer: Provide document from manufacturer that recognizes the installer as qualified and approved to install the manufacturer's firestopping materials. 3. Submit a sample of the firestopping schedule format. a. Schedule shall indicate construction of the wall or floor assembly; size, number, and material of penetrating items;firestop system designation; required F-rating and T-rating; UL-listed system number; remarks where applicable. b. Approved testing agency's standard details of manufacturer's tested firestopping systems in format acceptable to code official. D. Provide the following within 2 weeks of contract award: 1. Submit a firestopping schedule which indicates the firestop system to be utilized for each different firestopping application. April 30,2021 07841 -Page 2 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 2. Submit documentation of UL or FM classification for each material and system to be utilized. Include certification that such listings are current and subject to follow-up service inspection by listing body. 3. Submit copies of manufacturer's product data,material safety data sheets, standard details, and installation instructions for fire-rated firestop assemblies. E. Submit documentation of UL classification or approved third party testing for each material and system to be utilized. Include certification that such listings are current and subject to follow-up service inspection by listing body. F. Submit copies of manufacturer's product data, specifications, recommendations, standard details and installation instructions for fire-rated firestop assemblies. G. Shop Drawings: Submit detail drawings of any firestopping application for which there is no tested and rated system. Shop drawings shall give all pertinent information of installation method proposed, together with all required dimensions for the proper fitting around other work and materials, together with all special conditions as may be required to complete installation. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in installing of fire rated and classified firestopping systems with minimum of 3 years documented experience and approved by material manufacturer. B. All materials and components shall be the approved products of one manufacturer. C. Mockup: Provide mockup representative of finished work. Replace unsatisfactory work as directed. Approved mockup will be used as standard for judging acceptability of work on project. Mockup, if approved, may be incorporated as part of final construction. 1. Provide mockup for each firestop system. 2. Install sample installation in the presence of the materials manufacturer and Owner's representative, not less than one week in advance of start of work. 3. Mockup shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and shall be representative of installations to be achieved throughout the project. Mockup not meeting the performance requirements shall be removed and replaced with one that does. 4. Installations not comparable to the mockup will be subject to rejection and shall be replaced at CONTRACTORs expense. D. Pre-installation Meeting: Prior to start of work that involves cutting penetrations, conduct a meeting with installers of such work to identify fire and smoke barriers and required configurations of penetrations. Discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and sealing penetrations in such assemblies, with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary cutting and patching. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Conspicuously mark"REJECTED"on materials which have been damaged and remove from site. B. Store in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install firestop materials before expiration of material shelf life. 1.09 DEFINITIONS A. "Through-Penetration Firestop"is a material, device, or construction installed to resist,for a prescribed time period, the passage of flame, heat, and hot gases through openings April 30,2021 07841 —Page 3 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 which penetrate the entire fire-resistive assembly in order to accommodate cables, cable trays, conduit, tubing, pipes, or similar items. B. "F Rating"is the time period that a through-penetration fire block limits the spread of fire, flame, and hot gases through the fire-block assembly, including penetrating elements, when tested in accordance with the time-temperature curve defined in ASTM E119, fire tests of building construction and materials. C. "T Rating" is the time period that a through-penetration fire block limits temperature rise through the fire-block assembly, including penetrating elements, when tested in accordance with the time-temperature curve defined in ASTM E119,fire tests of building construction and materials. D. Membrane Penetration: Penetrations in a fire-rated partition or floor that breaches only one side of the barrier. E. Construction Gaps: Continuous joint or opening, whether static or dynamic, such as where the top of a wall meets underside of a floor, wall-to-wall joints, floor-edge-to-floor- edge joints, floor-edge-to-exterior-wall joints, or other linear breach in a rated barrier. 1.10 (NOT USED) 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with local codes and regulations, where such codes and regulations are more stringent than requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified in these specifications. B. The firestopping subcontractor shall provide firestopping and smokestopping design documentation for fire-resistance tested assemblies, as well as for nonstandard conditions for which no approved tests exist for code official review. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Apply firestopping materials only when the temperature of surfaces to be filled and surrounding air temperatures comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 3M Corporation, St. Paul, MN, USA. B. Grace Construction Products. C. Isolatek International. D. Owens-Corning. E. United States Gypsum. F. Hilti. G. Specified Technologies, Inc. H. Tremco. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestop Material Type 1: Mortar type seal. 1. Water-based mortar capable of expanding a minimum of 3 percent by volume. a. Density: 35 to 38 pounds per cubic foot. b. Thickness: Minimum of 4-in, or as indicated on the Drawings, or if not indicated, as required for specified fire rating. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. April 30,2021 07841 -Page 4 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 and 3 hours as required tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Product Standard: KBS Mortar Seal MS 50; International Protective Coatings Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: a. Wall Penetration: One-side shuttered using styrofoam panel flush with damming material to be removed after drying. b. Floor Penetration-Retainers: Galvanized steel securing clips, holding damming board as recommended by manufacturer. B. Firestop Material Type 2: 1. Mineral wool safing insulation. 2. Regular color unfaced with galvanized steel safing clips. 3. FS HH-l-521 F,Type I. 4. Manufacturers: a. Certainteed. b. Manville. c. Owens-Corning. d. United States Gypsum. C. Firestop Material Type 3: Firestop compound. 1. Water-based compound, pourable, trowelable, fusible ceramic fire break materials. a. Thickness: 4-in minimum, or if not indicated, as required for specified fire rating. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread and smoke developed less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 and 3 hours as required tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: Flamesafe FS500 and FS600; International Protective Coatings Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: a. Damming Panel: Use damming board as recommended by manufacturer or Type X gypsum board. b. Retainers: Galvanized steel securing clips, holding damming board as recommended by manufacturer. c. Bulk Ceramic Fiber: Ceramic fiber to dam smaller openings; resists fire and heat up to 3,000 degrees F. D. Firestop Material Type 4: Intumescent bands or wrap. 1. Wrap strip nominal 1/4-in thick intumescent material faced on one side with aluminum foil supplied in 2-1/2-in wide strips. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 to 4 hours, as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: FS 195; 3M fire protection products. 6. Accessory Materials: Aluminum tape, 28-gauge galvanized steel restricting collar. E. Firestop Material Type 5: Firestop putty. 1. Moldable putty with one part, intumescent elastomer. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Meets time and temperature exposure of ASTM E119. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 3 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. r-- -� 5. Products: April 30,2021 07841 -Page 5 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 a. Fire barrier moldable putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Flamesafe FSP1000 putty, International Protective Coatings Corporation. F. Firestopping Material Type 6: Firestop caulking. 1. Water-based, single-component, endothermic caulk. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 3 hours as required. 5. Products: Fire Dam 150 Caulk; 3M Fire Protection Products. G. Firestop Material Type 7: Heat expanding pillows: 1. Tightly woven dusifree fiberglass cloth bags,filled with a combination of mineral fiber incombustible components, water insoluble expansion agents, and special fire retardant activities. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread less than or equal to 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 to 3 hours as required, tested in accordance with UL 1479. 5. Products: KBS sealbags; International Protective Coatings Corporation. 6. Accessory Materials: Wall and floor penetrations use wire mesh bolted to one side of wall or under side of floor. H. Firestop Material Type 8: 1. Fire-resistant penetration seal. 2. Medium density, fire-resistant foam retaining stability of high temperatures. 3. ASTM E814, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., test No. R8196, series as appropriate for wall or floor fire rating indicated. 4. Products: a. Firestop Foam 2001, Dow Corning Corporation. b. CP 25WB, Fire Barrier Caulk. c. FS 195 wrap strips and putty 303, 3M Corporation. d. Metacaulk 950 Firestopping Penetration Sealant,The Rectorseal Company. Firestop Material Type 9: Firestop sealant: 1. Silicon-based, single-component sealant. 2. Noncombustible to ASTM E814. 3. Flame spread 5 per ASTM E84. 4. Fire-resistant rating 1 to 3 hours as required. 5. Products: CLK N/S and CLK S/L, Nelson Firestop Products. J. Firestop Material Type 10: Pipe Choke System: 1. Heavy gauge metal collar,with highly intumescent material. 2. Tested: UL 1429, ASTM E814, ASTM El 99. 3. Products: PCS, Nelson Firestopping Products. K. Fire Block for through penetration, multi penetrations,CMU and Concrete. 1. Ready-to-use, intumescent flexible block based on two-component polyurethane foam. Dimensions(2 in.x 5 in. x 8 in.) 2. Completely free from dust and fibers, Halogen, asbestos and solvent free. 3. Expansion Temperature- 149 degrees C 4. Surface Burning Flame Spread Index-0 (ASTM E 84-96) 5. Surface Burning Smoke Development Index-25(ASTM E 84-96) 6. Products: Hilti FS 657 Fire Block April 30,2021 07841 -Page 6 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify adjacent materials are clean, dry and ready to receive installation. B. Verify that openings and items passing through them are ready to receive the Work of this Section. C. Verify that field dimensions are as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Remove incompatible materials which may affect installation. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. F. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestopping materials with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove smears. Remove tape immediately after installation without disturbing firestopping system. 3.03 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Apply firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with UL listing. B. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve fire rating required. 3.04 THROUGH-PENETRATING A. Inspect installation including firestopping materials and any damming or support materials to verify integrity of installation. B. Where system design permits, remove damming or support materials only after it has been determined that firestopping materials have fully cured or dried. C. Install any covering materials or finish as per design requirements and manufacturer's instructions. D. All firestopping shall be inspected for proper installation, drying, curing, adhesion as appropriate for the materials and systems being used. Where necessary, repairs shall be made and repaired installations shall be reinspected. 3.05 FIRESAFING INSULATION A. Size insulation strips to be 1/2-in to 3/4-in greater than the measured width of the void or cavity. B. Impale steel securing clips in insulation approximately midway between top and bottom surface, approximately 8-in in from each end. C. Push insulation strips into the void or cavity until the securing clips are in contact with the top of floor slab. Top of insulation shall be flush with the floor level. D. Overlap and butt closely all end joints. E. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. April 30,2021 07841 -Page 7 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 3.06 REPAIRS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Identify damaged, improperly installed or reentered seals for repair or modification. B. Modifications to penetrations shall be accomplished as per the firestop manufacturer's recommendations. C. Only materials used in the original seal and designated by the manufacturer as suitable for a specific repair shall be used for this purpose. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. B. Protect firestopping material throughout the construction period in a clean and properly protected condition so that each assembly will be without any indication of damage at the time of Substantial Completion. 3.09—3.10(NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 07841 —Page 8 of 8 Firestopping Job No.60633796 SECTION 07902 SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section describes the installation and material requirements for sealants at joints and around doors,windows,floor and wall penetrations that leave an open joint. B. The work included in this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the execution of caulking and sealant work. The work includes the following type of sealants: 1. Single-component non-sag polyurethane 2. Two-component self-leveling polyurethane 3. Two-component, non-sag polyurethane 4. Silicone joint sealers a. Single component, non-acid curing, silicone b. Single component, mildew resistant, silicone 5. Acrylic-emulsion sealants 6. Fire resistant joint sealer is not included. Reference Section 07841, "Firestopping." 7. Backer rod 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Surface preparation, painting and coating requirements are specified in Section 09902, "Painting and Protective Coatings". B. Related work as called for on PLANS, or in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C790 Standard Guide for the Use of Latex Sealants ASTM C834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C962 Standard Guide for the Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS(FS) TT-S-00230C Federal Specification for Single-Component Joint Sealants TT-S-00227E Federal Specification for Two-Component Joint Sealants April 30,2021 07902—Page 1 of 6 Sealants Job No.60633796 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals". 1. Shop Drawings: In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals," furnish the following: a. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of sealant used. b. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product. 2. Manufacturer's color charts indicating manufacturer's full range of colors for Engineer's initial selection. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use only qualified workmen thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the techniques of caulking, who can demonstrate their ability to fill joints solidly and neatly. B. Mixing and application of sealing compounds is to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original, unopened, unbroken, sealed containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers' recommen- dations to prevent their deterioration and damage. C. Store in original containers in a cool and dry location on level supports and protect materials from damage and exposure to the elements until installed. Do not keep in storage for over 90 days. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, provide one of the following. A. Single-Component Non-Sag Polyurethane 1. "Sonolastic NP I", by Sonneborn Contech 2. "Sikaflex-la", by Sika Chemical Corporation 3. "Dymonic", by Tremco B. Two-Component Self-Leveling Polyurethane 1. "Sonolastic SL II", by Sonneborn Contech 2. "Sikaflex-2C SL", by Sika Chemical Corporation 3. "Tremco THC-900", by Tremco C. Two-Component Non-Sag Polyurethane 1. "Sonolastic NP II", by Sonneborn Contech 2. "Sikaflex-2C NS", by Sika Chemical Corporation April 30,2021 07902—Page 2 of 6 Sealants Job No.60633796 3. "Dymeric", by Tremco D. Silicone Joint Sealers 1. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant a. "Dow Corning 790", Dow Corning Corp. b. "Dow Corning 795", Dow Corning Corp. c. "Silglaze N SCS 2501", General Electric Co. d. "Silpruf SCS 2000", General Electric Co. e. "Spectrum 1", Tremco, Inc. f. "Spectrum 2", Tremco, Inc. g. "Omniseal", Sonneborn Building Products Div. h. "Gesil N SCS 2600", General Electric Co. 2. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant a. "Dow Corning 786", Dow Corning Corp. b. "SCS 1702 Sanitary", General Electric Co. c. "Proglaze White",Tremco Corp. d. "OmniPlus", Sonneborn Building Products Div. E. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants 1. "Chem-Calk 600", Bostik Construction Products Div. 2. "Sonolac", Sonneborn Building Products Div. 3. "Tremflex 834", Tremco, Inc. F. Foam Backer Rod 1. "Sonofoam", by Sonneborn Contech 2. "Ethafoam SB", by Dow Chemical 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. B. Colors: As selected by the OWNER from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Single-Component Non-Sag Polyurethane: Single-component, self-priming, gun-grade, fast skinning, fast curing, 100% urethane base sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type II, and ASTM C920, Class 25, Type S, Grade NS. D. Two-Component Self-Leveling Polyurethane: Two-component, self-leveling, abrasion and puncture resistant urethane sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00227E and ASTM C920. E. Two-Component Non-Sag Polyurethane: Multi-component epoxidized polyurethane designed for adhesion, long service life, and durability of dynamically moving building joints and horizontal joints conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A, and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. Movement capability of 40% in extension and 25% in compression for joints up to 2 inches wide and 0.5 inch deep. F. Silicone Joint Sealers: Provide the following types. 1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates;formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior April 30,2021 07902—Page 3 of 6 Sealants Job No.60633796 joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. G. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, non-sag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. H. Backer Rod: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding, closed-cell, polyethylene foam rods. Minimum 1/8-inch diameter greater than joint width for joints less than 3/4-inch wide. Use 1-inch diameter rod for joints 3/4-inch wide. 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require- ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Condition: Joint surfaces to receive sealant are to be sound, smooth, clean, dry, and free of all visible contaminants. B. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. C. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. D. Joint Backing: In joints where the depth of the joint exceeds the recommended sealant depth, install joint backing to provide support and uniform depth of sealant. Push applicable size backer rod into joint to depth required. Joint backing to be installed with approximately 30% compression. Do not twist, stretch, puncture, or tear backing material. Backing material to butt together at intersections. 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants. B. Sealant Depth 1. Joint widths less than 1/4-inch: Provide 1/4-inch sealant depth. 2. Joint widths over 1/4-inch to 1/2-inch: Provide sealant depth equal to joint width. 3. Joint widths greater than 1/2-inch: Provide sealant depth equivalent to 1/2 of joint depth. April 30,2021 07902—Page 4 of 6 Sealants Job No.60633796 C. Application: Apply sealant in continuous line using hand guns or pressurized equipment, with proper nozzle size in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Force sealant into joint and against sides of joint to make a uniform bead. Fill sealant spaces completely and avoid pulling sealant from the sides of the joint. Use opened containers the same day. D. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. E. Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates. 3.04-3.06 (NOT USED) 3.07 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean doors, windows, and surrounding structure of excess sealant com- pounds or smears upon completion of work with cleaning solvents recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Clean up and remove, periodically, all sealant work debris. C. Clean up area completely and thoroughly after completion of work. 3.08-3.09 (NOT USED) 3.10 SCHEDULES A. General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated,joints around the perimeter of frames shall be sealed using sealer specified below for the substrate adjacent to the frame. B. Expansion and control joints in exterior and interior surfaces of masonry walls: 1. Single-component non-sag polyurethane; concave joint configuration 2. Backer rod or bond-breaker tape C. Expansion and control joints in exterior and interior surfaces of cast-in-place concrete walls: 1. Two-component, non-sag polyurethane; concave joint configuration 2. Backer rod or bond-breaker tape D. Expansion and control joints in exterior and interior surfaces of cast-in-place concrete slabs: 1. Two-component self-leveling polyurethane sealant 2. Backer rod or bond-breaker tape E. Interior joints at wet areas (including perimeter of bath fixtures, counter tops, glazed ceramic tile areas): 1. Single component mildew-resistant silicone sealant; concave joint configuration 2. Bond-breaker tape where appropriate F. Preparation for interior painted surfaces: 1. Acrylic-emulsion sealant April 30,2021 07902-Page 5 of 6 Sealants Job No.60633796 G. Interior or exterior joints for which no other sealer is indicated: 1. Single component, non-acid curing silicone sealant; concave joint configuration 2. Backer rod or bond-breaker tape 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 07902-Page 6 of 6 Sealants Job No.60633796 SECTION 08130 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Furnish and install fiberglass reinforced plastic doors, frames, and windows and related accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS define locations, sizes, and special features or accessories. B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish in accordance with Specifications Section 01300, "Submittals". 1. Shop Drawings. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Product Data. Manufacturer's specifications describing features, colors, options, and accessories. b. Drawings with pertinent dimensions, hardware locations, transom and lite sizes, door elevations. Submit complete shop drawings for fabrication and erection, including plans, elevations, and large scale details of typical sections and connections. c. Location and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or fastened to other construction. Furnish templates if required for accurate placement. d. Schedule of openings coordinated with numbering system used in Contract Documents. e. Selection Samples: For initial selection of colors and textures, submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual product pieces, showing full range of colors and textures available. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special Project Warranty: Guarantee doors, windows and frames for 10 years against April 30,2021 08130-Page 1 of 4 Fiberglass Doors and Frames Project No.60633796 delamination, discoloration, or warping. Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, the contractor, and the installer, guaranteeing to correct failures in materials and workmanship which occur within the warranty period, including those attributable to abnormal aging, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. 1. The warranty shall include responsibility for removing and replacing other work as necessary to accomplish repairs or replacement of materials covered by the warranty. 2. Warranty period: 10 years after date of substantial completion. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in crates or cartons suitable for storage at the site. B. Store in original cartons on end in a manner to prevent falling and protect to prevent damage until erected and accepted. C. Store products under cover and raised above ground level. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, the following manufacturers have the capability of performing the work in this Section: 1. CHEM-PRUF Door Company. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Doors: 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic(FRP) using polymers selected for specific corrosive environment and containing a glass content of 25%by weight. 2. Construction to be flush panel with no seams or cracks and all mortises molded in by manufacturer. Mortises for hardware must be molded in at the factory as the door is built. Mortises shall not be routed or cut out of the stile structure or the jambs. 3. Thickness: 1%". 4. Color gel coat 15 to 18 mil thick. 5. Insulating R-factor: R12 minimum. 6. Stiles, and rails to have color gel coat followed by 3 layers of 1.5 ounce per square foot random mat. Mold style and rail structure in a continuous piece to a "U" configuration to exact door dimensions. Compression member inside the "U" to fit tightly with no voids. Pultrusions are not acceptable for stiles and rails. 7. Mold plates in one continuous piece with two layers of 1.5-ounce glass mat and with 16 ounces unidirectional roving. 8. Fill area between door plates completely with 4 to 6-pound density polyurethane foam,flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E84. 9. Reinforcing resins to be of fire retardant formulation with antimony tn-oxide and have a flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E84 and be self-extinguishing per ASTM D635. 10. Provide reinforcement and compression members to receive half-surface hinges, closers, locks, latchsets, kick plates, pull handles, or panic devices as scheduled. April 30,2021 08130-Page 2 of 4 Fiberglass Doors and Frames Project No.60633796 11. Ledge for window openings to be one-piece structure molded integrally with both door plates to prohibit penetration of moisture into door cavity. Window lights to be structurally retained by 4 fiberglass glazing pins and positively sealed. 12. Windows: '/"polished safety glass. B. Door Frames: 1. Door frames to be similar to the doors in construction and materials except the frames to be solid fiberglass, %" x 5%", unless noted otherwise on the PLANS. Mold stop and frame in one piece. Frame to be integrally gelcoated to the color specified or selected. Mortises to be molded in. It is not permitted to rout in mortises or remove any material from the head orjambs, to provide mortises. 2. Reinforcement for mounting hinges, closers, etc., to be mild steel plates strategically located and buried in the resin-glass matrix so they are not exposed to the elements. 2. The jamb to be flat on the backside (against the opening) and uniform in thickness so as to provide a solid, uniform surface against the wall opening. No wood blocks or spacers are permitted. C. Transoms: Transoms to be identical to the doors in construction, materials, thickness and reinforcement. D. Windows: All parts,jambs, header, sill, shall be made of gelcoated fiberglass reinforced plastic(FRP) using resins tailored to a specific corrosive environment, flush construction. FRP shall have at least a 25:75 ratio of glass to resin. The color of the window shall be as selected by the architect and shall be integrally molded as the part is made. Glass shall be¼" clear tempered safety glass. E Louvers: All parts,jambs, header, sill, slats, or vanes to be made of gelcoated fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) using resins tailored to a specific corrosive environment, flush construction. Ratio of glass to resin to be at least 25:75. The color of the louver to match door and to be integrally molded as the part is made. Provide each louver with a bug screen and FRP rain drip. F. Hardware: 1. Finish hardware for fiberglass doors to be furnished by door manufacturer who will also machine doors and frames to receive hardware at job site. 2. Furnish door hardware per applicable specification section. 3. Doors supplied with closers, to have a 4"x 8" stainless steel Type 316 anchor plate attached to each side of the door at the closer thru-bolt locations. Plate to be same thickness as manufacturer's standard kickplate. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Inspect substrates and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed, and verify that installation properly may commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved fully. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION,AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. April 30,2021 08130-Page 3 of 4 Fiberglass Doors and Frames Project No.60633796 B. Frames: Erect plumb and square in the opening. Bond frame to wall per installation kit and instructions supplied with frames. Secondary attachment to be accomplished with anchors and stainless steel bolts to suit concrete wall panels or masonry as required and furnished with installation kit. C. Doors: 1. Doors to be hung and all scheduled hardware applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Job site installation to be accomplished using manufacturer's plant preparation with no cutting or drilling at job site except for weatherstripping. 2. Space between door and frame to be uniform. Hardware to operate smoothly and hold door snugly in closed and hold open position. D. Protection: Institute protective procedures and install protective materials as required to ensure that work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at substantial completion. 3.04—3.05 (NOT USED) 3.06 ADJUSTING Final Adjustments: Upon achieving substantial completion of the work, adjust all operable components to ensure that they are properly installed and functioning smoothly. Replace any component which cannot be adjusted for proper operation. 3.07 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean all surfaces which have become soiled or coated as a result of work of this Section, using proper methods which will not scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 1. For cleaning, use only products and techniques acceptable to manufacturer of products being cleaned. 3.08-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 08130-Page 4 of 4 Fiberglass Doors and Frames Project No.60633796 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and deliver to the project site all finish hardware as listed in the Hardware Schedule, as specified herein, and as required by actual conditions. B. The schedule included herein designates the type and quality of the hardware desired. The brand of hardware furnished shall be equivalent to the brand scheduled. C. Furnish and deliver to the door manufacturers all templates and schedules required by the manufacturers of the doors and frames to enable the manufacturers to make proper provision in their work to receive the finish hardware. All locks, lock strikes and flush bolts shall be made to ANSI standard dimensions. D. Furnish padlocks as scheduled in the quantity specified. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES American National Standards Institute(ANSI) Underwriters Laboratories(UL) A. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 —1.05 NOT USED 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals": 1. Complete shop drawings and product data for all items furnished under this Section. Shop drawings shall include a detailed hardware schedule identifying for each door item of hardware the item name, manufacturer's name, product number and the location to be installed in the work. Hardware templates shall not be distributed until the hardware schedule has been reviewed and approved in accordance with Section 01300. 2. Provide illustrations from manufacturers catalogs and data in brochure form for all products, including model, function, design, finishes, and options. 3. Samples of hardware items proposed for use may be requested prior to approval to confirm standards of quality, including materials and finishes. If requested, two representative samples of each hardware item shall be submitted for review within ten days after the request is made. 4. No hardware items for which samples have been requested may be installed until the samples are approved. April 30,2021 08710-Page 1 of 6 Door Hardware Job Ni.6033796 B. Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. 2. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect"As installed." 3. Copy of final keying schedule. 4. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. 5. Copy of all warrantees; including all appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify the project. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware(ie. latch and locksets, hinges,closers)from single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. The hardware supplier shall have in his employ one or more members of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for the selection of hardware items; preparation and submittal of shop drawings, product data and samples and coordinating delivery of approved hardware items to the site of the work or to the door manufacturers as appropriate. C. Handicapped Requirements: Doors to stairs(other than exit stairs), loading platforms, boiler rooms, stages and doors serving other hazardous locations shall have knurled or other similar approved marking of door lever handles or cross bars in accordance with local building codes. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaging 1. All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts and fastenings and instructions necessary for proper installation, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. 2. Each package shall be legibly labeled, indicating that portion of the work for which it is intended. 1.09 NOT USED 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish 10 year manufacturer warranty against defects in material and workmanship from date of occupancy of Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All hardware shall be entirely free from imperfections. Qualities,weights and sizes specified herein are the minimum that will be accepted. Provide hardware listed by UL for fire at labeled doors, except that hinges which are not UL approved shall have a melting point of greater than 2000 degrees F. Provide exit devices UL listed for panic situations. B. Hardware Items 1. Hinges a. Hager BBI 191-NRP 4 1/2-inch by 4 1/2-inch, 32D. April 30,2021 08710-Page 2 of 6 Door Hardware Job Ni.6033796 2. Locksets a. Sargents as approved by Owner's representative, stainless steel, with Cast I lever handle, six pin cylinders (operation as scheduled.). 3. Closers a. (Door Closers)-Provide with cushion arm. LCN 4040 Series CUSH -TB stainless steel arms with aluminum polyurethane finish on all closer components by LCN or equal. 4. Stops—Trimco 1214ES (as required by floor condition). 5. Sweep—National Guard 102V or equal. 6. Heads and Jambs Sound/Weather Seals-Series 3000, by Pemko or 5050-BN or equal. 7. Silencers-Glynn-Johnson GJ 64, similar by Baldwin or equal. 8. Threshold- National Guard 425A 9. Core: Sargent 7300 B interchangeable core compatible with the Pump Station operator's existing key sets. Coordinate with operators for specification for key/lock systems. 10. Exit Devices-Stainless steel, by Sargent with outside trim at doors as required, provide devices with center support brackets for crossbars. Brackets shall be designed as an integral part of the device. For single doors, exit devices shall be 8700 series typical. 11. Coordinators with carry bar strike, 900 Series by Ives Inc. or equal. Finish to be chrome plated ANSI 626. 12. Rain drip—4"- 16A, National Guard C. Closers and overhead stop and holders shall be sized as recommended by manufacturer and as approved for size and location of door served. The mounting of the closer and overhead stop and holder shall be coordinated for the operation of both items. D. On exterior doors, provide hinges with pins not removable when door is closed. Provide 1/2 pair hinges for each 2-foot-6-inch or part thereof of door height. Provide thresholds as scheduled and full perimeter sound/weather seal system for threshold, head and jambs. E. Provide type of threshold required by the Door Schedule for particular doors. F. Provide silencers in lock side jamb of single doors and additional silencers in head of double doors. Silencers are not required at doors with sound/weather seals. G. Closers shall be designed to clear weatherstripping. Brackets to hold closers are to be located inside the frame door stops where the weatherstripping is mounted. (Drop plate installation.) H. Exit devices shall have stainless steel springs, and main arm pivots in addition to the stainless steel finish. Crossbars and arms shall be counter balanced. Crossbars shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.62-inch or be reinforced. 2.02 FINISHES A. Base metal for hardware shall be stainless steel for all items unless it is not available. Finish shall be ANSI 630. All hardware not available in stainless steel shall be bronze or brass with chrome finish ANSI 626. B. For those items of hardware which are not able to be fabricated from stainless steel,the base metal shall be bronze or brass[steel]. Finish shall be ANSI 626, chrome plated. C. Provide tactile warning on the door handles of hazardous locations. Door locations are as scheduled. April 30,2021 08710-Page 3 of 6 Door Hardware Job Ni.6033796 2.03 KEYING A. All cylinder locks including padlocks shall be grand masterkeyed in one new set that is coordinated with the Owner's system. All cylinders shall be Construction Keyed for Contractor's use during construction period. Install permanent cylinders when directed. Keys and locks on any existing facilities shall remain as existing. B. Provide one Grand Master and two Sub-masters(Administration and Plant Operations). C. Furnish 1. Two Grand Master keys 2. Three master keys 3. Two Change keys with each lock 4. Three Construction day keys PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. B. Field verify existing doors,frames, hardware, and conditions prior to scheduling hardware. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install finish hardware in accordance with reviewed hardware schedule and manufacturer's printed instructions. Prefit hardware before finish is applied. Remove and reinstall after finish is completed. Install hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly and do not rattle. B. Installation of hardware shall comply with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 requirements. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant, forming tight seal between threshold and surface to which set. Securely and permanently anchor thresholds, using countersunk non-ferrous screws to match color of thresholds(stainless steel screws at aluminum thresholds). 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation has been completed, a qualified person from the hardware supplier is to check the Project to determine proper application of finish hardware according to schedule. Also check operation and adjustment of all hardware items. B. Installer shall deliver to owner, upon completion, one set of installation and maintenance instructions and specialty tools for all hardware items. April 30,2021 08710-Page 4 of 6 Door Hardware Job Ni.6033796 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make adjustment to door closers and other items of hardware.Where hardware is found defective repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed. B. Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. C. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make/check adjustments of hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. E. Final Adjustment: Installer shall return six months after substantial completion to make final adjustments of all hardware items. F. Installer shall instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. G. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide for proper protection of items of hardware until Owner accepts Project as complete. 3.06 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE SETS A. The following general hardware sets represent hardware for one opening (single or pair of doors). Refer to Materials paragraphs above for additional items required under specified conditions. Quantities of each set supplied shall be sufficient to complete the work. Refer to Door Schedule for locations. The actual content of each set shall be determined by approved hardware sets. 1. HW-1 (Exterior Single Leaf Doors-3x) 1-PR Hinges BBI191-NRP-4'/2 x 41/2, 32D HA 1- Lockset/Exit Device 8700 Series Sargent 1-Closer P4041 SCHUSH—TB LCN 1-Threshold 425A NGP 1-Sweep 102V NGP 1-Seal 5050BN NGP 1-Stop 1214ES Trimco 1-Rain Drip 16A+4" NGP 2. HW-2 (Exterior Double Leaf Doors) 3 PR Butt Hinges BBII9I-NRP-4116x4Y2 HA 2-Lockset/Exit Device 8700Series Sargent 2-Closer P4041 SCUSH-TB LCN 1-Threshold 425A NGP April 30,2021 08710—Page 5 of 6 Door Hardware Job Ni.6033796 2-Sweep 102V NGP 2-Seal 5050BN NGP 1-Astragal By Door Suplier 2-Stops 1214ES Timco 3. HW-3(Interior Doors) 1-1/2 PR Hinges BBI191-NRP-4'/2 x 41/2 HA 1-Lockset 7 Line Sargent 1-Closer P4041 SCUSH-TB LCN 1-Stop 1214ES Trimco 3.07 -3.10(NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 08710—Page 6 of 6 Door Hardware Job Ni.6033796 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Moisture resistant fire rated gypsum board. 2. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Panels 3. Metal stud wall framing. 4. Metal channel ceiling framing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Other related work as called for on PLANS or as specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS sections 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. A. ASTM International: 1. A 123-Zinc(Hot-dip galvanized)coatings on iron and steel products. 2. A 525-General requirements of sheet steel, zinc-coated (Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process. Sheet steel, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated. 3. C 475-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 4. C 514-Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. 5. C 645-Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners(Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 6. C 754-Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board. 7. C 840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 8. C 1002- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. 9. C 1177-Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing 10. C1280-Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing 11. C 1396 -Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 12. C 1658-Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels 13. E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 14. E 119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. Gypsum Association: 1. GA 201 -Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings 2. GA-203- Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to receive Gypsum B oa rd 3. GA 214-Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 4. GA 216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 5. GA 600-Fire Resistance Design Manual Sound Control. April 30,2021 09260—Page 1 of 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job No.60633796 C. Intertek Testing Services(Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WHI -Certification Listings. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255-Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. NFPA 265-Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls, Method B. 3. NFPA 286-Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish. E. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168-Adhesive and Sealant Applications. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL- Fire Resistance Directory. 2. UL 723-Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. Metal Framing Manufacturer's Association (MFMA)-Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing. 1.04 (NOT USED) 1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Systems Description 1. Interior Partition, Ceiling &Metal Framing 2. Interior Fire Rated Gypsum board 3. Select stud thickness to resist minimum 5 psf uniform load and maximum 1/240 deflection. µ � 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01300-Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board,joint tape,joint compound and acoustical insulation. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, GA-201, GA-214, GA-216 GA-600 and ASTM C754. Maintain one copy on site. B. Fire Rated Wall Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings. 1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119. 2. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL No.U411. 3. Fire Rated Ceiling and Soffits: Listed assembly by UL No. 556. C. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacturing of Product with minimum five years documented experience. 2. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. D. Coordination 1. Coordinate with the placement of components within the stud framing systems. See Related Sections. E. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to 2009 IBC code for fire rated assemblies. April 30,2021 09260—Page 2 of 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job No.60633796 1.08 - 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Board: One of the following or equal: 1. Temple Inland 2. Georgia-Pacific. 3. United States Gypsum. B. Metal Stud Framing: One of the following or equal: 1. Dietrich—Ultra steel 2. USG Building Systems. 3. National Gypsum Corporation. 4. Fire Trak deflection track and firestop system. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board System 1. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: a. Temple Inland Fire-Resistant GreenGlass Interior Board, ASTM C1396 and ASTM C1658; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available size in place; ends square cut and tapered. 1) Recycled Content: 50 percent Pre-Consumer Minimum 2) Regional materials: McQueeny, TX Plant. b. Georgia Pacific, equivalent product. c. USG, equivalent product 2. Moisture Resistant Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C630/C 1396; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut and tapered. a. Temple Inland Fire-Resistant GreenGlass Interior Board, ASTM C1396 and ASTM C1658; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available size in place; ends square cut and tapered. 1) Recycled Content: 50 percent Pre-Consumer Minimum 2) Regional materials: McQueeny, TX Plant. b. Georgia Pacific, equivalent product. c. USG,equivalent product. 3. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board:ASTM C1629/C1629M; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut. a. USG, Fiberrock Abuse-Resistant Interior Panels 1) Recycled Content: highest percentage available from manufacturer. b. Temple Inland, equivalent product. c. Georgia Pacific, equivalent product. B. Gypsum Board Accessories 1. For each type of wallboard material, use joint materials and accessories recommended by manufacturer for that product. 2. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; Section 07213, preformed glass fiber,friction fit type, unfaced, thickness as required by specific wall application. 3. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning,for use in conjunction with gypsum board; #808 Acoustical Sealants manufactured by Protective Treatments, or equal. a. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 4. Uni-strut supports adequately sized where necessary between structural bar joist, beams, or trusses to support suspended gypsum board systems. � -- 5. Corner Beads: April 30,2021 09260—Page 3 of 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job No.60633796 a. External Corners-Metal; Dur-A-Bead No. 103 by USG, or equal. b. Internal Corners-Metal reinforced tape. 6. Edge Trim: GA-201 and GA-216; Type 200-A and 200-B by USG or equal. 7. W Reveal for gypsum board to CMU transition: "W"Reveal by Fry Reglet. 8. Drywall control joints: USG expansion joint type ASTM C1047 No. 093. 9. Joint Materials: GA-201 and GA-216; reinforcing tape,joint compound, adhesive, and water. a. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 10. Powder Texture Product: USG Sheetrock Brand Wall and Ceiling Texture Tuf- Tex. 11. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 W and GA-21 6. C. Metal Stud Framing 1. Framing System Components: ASTM C645. 2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ASTM A525, ASTM A591: non-load bearing rolled steel, channel-shaped, punched for utility access. a. 1/2 inch -25 ga., standard duty. b. 7/8 inch-25 ga., standard duty. c. 1 5/8 inch-25 ga., standard duty. d. 2 inch -25 ga., standard duty. e. 3 5/8 inch -25 ga., standard duty f. 4 inch -25 ga., standard duty. g. 6 inch-22 ga., heavy duty. h. 8 inch-25 ga., standard duty. 3. Door jambs and headers: 20 ga. 4. Storage&Closets with Wall attached shelf brackets: 20 ga. 5. Runners: Of same material and thickness of studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs. 6. Fire track at rated partitions susceptible to imposed load movement: Of same material and thickness of studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs. 7. Bracing Members: Of same materials as studs;thickness to suit purpose. 8. Fasteners: GA 203; Self-drilling, self-tapping screws. 9. Anchorage Devices: Type best suited to specific application. 10. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich coating, "ZRC". 11. Finish for Studs, Tracks, Headers and Accessories: Galvanize to G60 coating class. 12. Adhesive: Type best suited to specific application. a. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.03 - 2.04(NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in place. April 30,2021 09260—Page 4 of 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job No.60633796 3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION A. Metal Stud Framing System 1. Plumb and secure top and bottom runners at locations indicated on plan. Place two beads of acoustical sealant between runners and substrate to achieve an acoustic seal. 2. Extend stud framing to above ceiling. Attach ceiling runner securely to framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated per drawings. 3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. 4. Install studs vertically at 16 inches on center unless otherwise directed. 5. Align stud web openings horizontally. 6. Secure studs to tracks using fastener method. Do not weld. 7. Stud splicing is not permissible. 8. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. 9. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window frame jambs not more than two inches from each side openings. 10. Brace stud framing systems rigid. 11. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames,window frames and blocking for surface mounted items. Install supports and attachments. 12. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. 13. Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs. Secure steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures,toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, chemical analyzers, multimedia boards, tack boards and signage. 14. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection. B. Gypsum Furring System 1. Install gypsum furring system in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Main beams shall be suspended from the overhead construction with not less than 12 ga. galvanized steel hanger wires, spaced 48 inches on center. Cross tees shall be spaced no more than 16 inches on center. 3. Gypsum board shall be screw attached 8 inches on center to all furring runners, furring tees,cross tees and wall tracks. C. Gypsum Board Installation 1. Install all gypsum board materials in accordance with GA-201, GA-216 and GA- 600 and in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 5. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 6. Place control joints consistent with lines of building. Space at maximum of 30 feet both horizontally and vertically. 7. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 8. Install"W" Reveal at all conditions where drywall meets CMU. 9. Install backing board over metal studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. April 30,2021 09260-Page 5 of 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job No.60633796 D. Installation Schedule 1. Install gypsum sheathing board on exterior of cavity walls of cold-formed metal- framed construction. 2. Install paperless interior gypsum board on interior face of building perimeter. 3. Install fire rated gypsum board at all conditions requiring gypsum board except in toilet rooms,where moisture resistant fire rated gypsum board shall be used. E. Joint Treatment 1. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. 2. A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire gypsum board surface to achieve smooth finish. 3. Finish surfaces of fur-downs and ceilings shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 4. Fill and finish joints and corners of backing board. 5. All other gypsum wall and ceiling finishes shall be smooth. 3.04 (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances 1. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.06 - 3.09(NOT USED) 3.10 SCHEDULE A. Interior 5/8 inch standard fire code: General Partitions 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 09260—Page 6 of 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Job No.60633796 SECTION 09902 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and apply, as specified herein, paint and protective coatings to all surfaces,except steel water storage tanks, unless specifically excluded by this Section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS define special coating requirements. B. Related work as called for on PLANS, or in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL(SSPC) SSPC SP-1 Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 -Solvent Cleaning SSPC SP-2 Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 -Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC SP-3 Surface Preparation Specification No. 3-Power Tool Cleaning SSPC SP-5 Surface Preparation Specification No. 5-White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC SP-6 Surface Preparation Specification No.6-Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC SP-7 Surface Preparation Specification No. 7 -Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SSPC SP-8 Surface Preparation Specification No. 8 -Pickling SSPC SP-10 Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CORROSION ENGINEERS(NACE) NACE No. 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning NACE No. 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning NACE No. 4 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning 1.04 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Surfaces receiving coatings include: 1. Equipment, machinery, and metal surfaces. 2. Interior surfaces, as noted in room finish schedule. . .. 3. Concrete surfaces, including concrete blocks(when noted on PLANS). 4. Threads on field-threaded galvanized pipe and conduit. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 1 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings 5. All cabinet and woodwork. (Stain finish unless otherwise noted.) 6. Paint concealed structural steel and steel joists, after erection of deck and before steel is enclosed. 7. Procedures and coating systems specified herein are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. B. Unless otherwise noted or shown, the following areas or items do not require coating: 1. Non-ferrous and corrosion-resistant ferrous alloys such as copper, bronze, monel, aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, and atmospherically exposed weathering steel, except where: a. Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals; b. Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry; c. Color coding of equipment and piping is required. 2. Non-metallic materials such as glass, PVC, porcelain, and fiberglass, except as required for architectural painting or color coding. 3. Pre-finished electrical and architectural items such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, panelboards, acoustical tile, cabinets, elevators, building louvers, etc., except when color coding of equipment is required. 4. Non-submerged electrical conduits attached to unpainted concrete surfaces. 5. Items specified to be galvanized after fabrication unless specified elsewhere or subject to immersion. 6. Insulated piping except as required for architectural painting or color coding. 1.06 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". A. Painting Schedule: Submit list indicating major items to be painted, preparation, paint manufacturer, product designation, and dry mil thickness. B. Panels 1. Submit panels containing samples of proposed paints and coatings. Include three displays of each kind and color of paint used. Panel to be representative of material to be coated. 2. Mark panels to indicate respective types of surfaces to which several kinds and colors of paint, stain, and coating are applied. C. Samples: If requested by OWNER, submit 1/4 pint of each kind of paint or stain proposed for use. Do not deliver materials to site until representative samples (if requested) have been approved. D. For all materials, furnish ENGINEER with two sets of manufacturer's printed instructions describing surface preparation procedures and application procedures including environmental limits(temperature and humidity). E. List of five similar projects in accordance with Paragraph 1.07 B.1. F. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all coatings, solvents, sealers, and paints to be utilized. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: All paints, sealers, and coatings to be manufactured by those firms listed in Table 2. Products of equal quality by other manufacturers will be considered, subject to review of written submittal that includes product data and a detailed paint and coating schedule. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 2 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings B. Workmanship 1. Furnish workers who perform quality work and who are experienced and knowledgeable in the surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. Submit list of five similar projects which have been prepared and coated by the personnel which the CONTRACTOR proposes to employ for this project. 2. Submit manufacturer's written instructions on cleaning and coating prior to any surface preparation or coating. C. Whenever possible, all coatings should be from single manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified, coating materials for a specific surface or piece of equipment are to be from a single manufacturer. D. All coatings provided for use on this project in the field or from equipment suppliers will be in compliance with Federal, State, and local laws, regulations and ordinances related to items such as lead, chromate, carcinogens and volatile organic compounds. For potable water systems, all coatings and products used on surfaces 1)in contact with the water, 2) within 1 foot above the high water level and below the high water level, or 3)in contact with materials to be introduced into the water, to be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved for potable water service. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver to site in original, sealed containers with manufacturer's label attached. B. Store in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperature range recommended by manufacturer. Protect all materials from weathering and extreme temperatures. C. Waste and any hazardous material remaining at the end of the day to be discarded in accordance with national, state, and local regulations. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Coating manufacturers are listed by generic type and service in Table 2 attached to this Section. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Tables 1 and 2 in this Section include the paint, protective coatings, and sealers for this project. Furnish all such special materials required for the manufacturer's coating systems whether or not included in the Tables. B. Products to comply with Federal, State, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. The maximum volatile organic content of the combination of coating and thinner is not to exceed the following limits(whichever is less): 1. 3.5 pounds per gallon; or 2. The Federal, State or local limit. C. Colors 1. OWNER reserves the right to select colors. 2. Submit list of items to be painted and color charts for each type of surface. 3. Formulate with colorants free of lead or lead compounds. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 3 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings 4. Proprietary color identification is for selection purposes only. Any authorized manufacturer may supply matches. D. Safety Color Codes: Follow OSHA requirements of 29 CFR, Part 1910.144 for "Safety Color Codes for Marking Physical Hazards". The following general requirements are set forth as a guide. 1. Red: Fire protection equipment, danger signs, and fire exit signs. Portable containers of flammable material to be red with yellow band or name of contents stenciled in yellow. 2. Orange: Moving or rotating parts of equipment protected by guards, including shafts and couplings, pulleys, and sprockets. (Do not paint wearing surfaces.) 3. Yellow: Caution signs and all physical hazards, including outside levers and weights on check valves, lower pulley blocks and hooks, sprockets and chains on valve operators, inside of openings adjacent to step or ladders, platforms provided for vertical ladders at transition levels, exposed unguarded edges of pits, platforms and walls subject to being struck, and any piping or equipment extending into normal operating areas. 4. Green: To designate "Safety" and location of first-aid equipment such as gas masks,first-aid kits, and safety deluge showers. 5. Black and White: To indicate areas that must remain clear, such as areas around first-aid, fire-fighting, and other emergency equipment. E. Piping Color Coding: The identification of process piping and chemical feed lines is to be accomplished by various colors of paint. Color coding to be by solid color and labels. Provide pipe color coding in accordance with applicable Specification Section. 1. Piping containing gas, chlorine or other hazardous materials are to be color coded when exposed, located out of view, or buried. 2. Non-potable water lines are to be painted white and marked with black lettering at maximum 5-foot intervals. 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Use one convenient location for storing and mixing of materials and keep fire extinguisher available in this area as long as location is used for such purpose. B. Thinners and Solvents: Use only those thinners and solvents specified in paint formulas of paint being used and mix in proportions recommended by paint manufacturer. C. Coverage: As recommended by paint manufacturer and sufficient to obtain minimum mil thickness specified. Do not exceed maximum thickness specified by manufacturer, if applicable. After final coat is applied,check with elecometer or Mikrotest dry film thickness gauge. D. Drying Time: Between successive coats, allow drying time as specified by paint manufacturer. Do not apply additional coats until previous coat is completed. E. Provide adequate ventilation for proper curing. Keep materials sealed when not in use. F. Environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity to be within the ranges recommended by the coating manufacturer. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902-Page 4 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings G. Finish coats to be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas. Finished metal surfaces to be free of voids or pinholes in any coat when tested with a low voltage detector. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General 1. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for each substrate. B. Concrete Surfaces 1. Prior to painting, surfaces to be free of all latent matter, burrs, and fins, using one or more of the following methods. a. Remove oil and grease with detergent and thoroughly rinse with fresh water. b. Abrasive blasting may be used only if machinery or other equipment in vicinity of work is adequately protected. Also, avoid settling of dust or grit on freshly painted surfaces. c. Wash concrete surfaces with 10 percent solution of muriatic acid, then wash clean and free of scale, mortar, dust, moisture, and other foreign matter. d. Repair all honeycomb surface defects by coating cleaned honeycombed area with epoxy bonding agent and filling voids with non-shrink grout leaving a smooth uniform concrete surface. 2. If curing compound is used, it must be removed prior to coating. C. Metal Surfaces 1. Clean metal surfaces by abrasive blasting in shop as required by Table I and leave clean, dry, and ready to receive prime coat. Provide moisture separators to effectively remove all oil and free moisture from air supply. Cleanliness of air to be tested by impinging an abrasive-free air stream onto a white cloth for one minute. If oil or moisture is detected,air source to be shut down and corrected. 2. Remove all dust and abrasives from surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. Remove abrasive grit around and between joints of connecting members. 3. Perform field abrasive blasting only if required to correct unsatisfactorily cleaned and shop-primed metal and when approved by ENGINEER. 4. Removal of Oil and Grease: Remove oil and grease with a solvent approved by coating manufacturer, or by steam combined with detergent (in accordance with SSPC SP-1). Use of gasoline, kerosene, naphtha, or carbon tetrachloride not permitted. 5. Brushing, Scraping, Grinding, and Chipping: In field work, if abrasive blasting is not possible, scrapers, wire brushes, and other suitable grinding or chipping tools may be used (in accordance with SSPC SP-2 or SP-3)for removal of existing paint coatings prior to repainting, or for cleaning, before applying second coats. 6. Surface to be coated on same day as cleaned and before rust bloom occurs. Surfaces which have been cleaned but which have started to show signs of rust or dirt are to be cleaned again prior to coating at no additional expense to OWNER. 7. All surfaces to be at least 5°F or higher above the dew point and remain this way when blasting, priming, or coating. D. Galvanized Surfaces 1. Clean surface with mineral spirits to remove oil residue. 2. Dry with a clean cloth. E. Wood Surfaces 1. Clean soiled surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 5 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings 2. Sand to a smooth even surface and then dust off. 3. Apply shellac to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before priming coat is applied. 4. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty after priming coat has dried. Tint putty to match finish color. Sand smooth after putty dries. 5. Apply priming coats to woodwork as soon as practical after woodwork is delivered. 6. Top and bottom edges of all wood doors to be primed and sealed after fitting and before final hanging. F. Gypsum Wallboard 1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound. 2. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes. a. Dampen with clean water. b. Fill with thin layers of drywall joint compound 3. Allow repairs to dry. 4. Sand smooth. Do not raise nap of paper on wallboard. G. Plastic Surfaces: 1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with a medium grit sandpaper to provide tooth for coating system. 2. For surfaces with existing coatings, completely remove any existing coating and prepare surface as mentioned above. 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS A. General 1. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer. Test with moisture meter. 2. Slightly vary the color of successive coats. 3. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet. 4. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping. 5. Change colors at corner of stop where colors differ between adjoining spaces or rooms and where door frames match wall colors. 6. Do not proceed with field applied painting of shop-coated items until any defective work has been cleaned by sandblasting. B. Brush Application 1. Brushes: Use first-quality hog hair or suitable synthetic bristle brushes. Use of horsehair bristle brushes not permitted. Keep brushes clean and free from accumulation of dried paint or dirt, and when brushes for oil or varnish base paints are not in use, keep them suspended in raw linseed oil bath. Clean brushes with proper solvent before reuse. 2. Application: Apply in uniform thickness consistent with specified coverage and with sufficient cross-brushing to ensure filling of surface irregularities. Exercise particular care in painting around bolt heads and nuts and in corners and other restricted spaces. C. Conventional Spray Application: Apply with adjustable air gun equipped with suitable water trap to remove moisture from compressed air, and with paint pot having air driven or mechanical agitator. Adjust width of spray to meet the requirements of the surface being coated with suitable air pressure for the particular type of paint being used. Make frequent checks to ensure correct spreading rate and coating and apply without sags, runs, or "orange peel" effect. Correct all such imperfections. Take special care to cover edges, corners, and bolt heads, without bridging over of paint film. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902-Page 6 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings D. Airless Spray Application: Equipment used for airless spray to be designed for, and capable of handling, the volume and pressures necessary to ensure smooth and proper application. Hoses to be specifically designed for the viscosity of the material being sprayed and be of the non-static, self-grounding type. Tips to be properly sized to ensure complete atomization and the spray pattern is to be continuous and free of all fingering effects. E. Roller Application: Proper length nap rollers to be used to ensure a smooth application free of runs, sags, roller marks,or air bubbles. Use longer nap for rougher surfaces when specified on PLANS. Phenolic core lambs wool type rollers to be used when polyurethanes, epoxies, or other types activated coatings are applied by roller. Standard type rollers to be used on water based and enamel coatings. Rollers to be of sufficient quality to leave finished surfaces free of lint, roller nap, runs, sags,and other imperfections. Roller is not to exceed 24 inches in length. F. Metal Surfaces 1. Shop-prime metal surfaces, if required, prior to delivery to job site. 2. After delivery and prior to installation, keep all coated metal surfaces clean and free from corrosion. Clean and touch up or repaint damaged areas with additional primer. 3. After erection or installation of metal work, clean and touch up all rust spots, all places where primer has been rubbed or scraped off, and all bolts and nuts. After previously applied paint has hardened, and when surfaces to receive succeeding coats of paint have been cleaned and dried, apply finish paint in accordance with Tables 1 and 2. Allow 7 days or more, as recommended by coating manufacturer, for curing of final coat for submerged surfaces. 4. Factory-Finished Equipment: After installation of factory-finished machinery and electrical equipment, check base coats carefully and touch up all damaged surface areas. Do not paint nameplates, serial number bases, chrome, or bronze trim. Clean off any excess paint that impairs convenient removal of covers on gauges, instrumentation, or other equipment fitted with doors or covers. 5. Factory-Primed Equipment: Delay final field coating to manufacturer's primed equipment until equipment has been installed and is in proper working order in accordance with the applicable Section. G. Mixing and Tinting 1. Deliver paints and enamels ready mixed to job site. 2. Accomplish job mixing and job tinting only when acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3. Mix only in mixing pails placed in suitably sized non-ferrous or oxide resistant metal pails. 4. Use tinting colors recommended by manufacturer for the specific type of finish. 5. Multiple-Component Coatings: a. Prepare using all the contents of the container for each component as packaged by the manufacturer. b. No partial batches permitted. c. Do not use multiple component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. d. Provide small quantity kits for touch up painting and for painting small areas. e. Mix only components specified and furnished by coating manufacturer. f. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. H. Special Requirements: Cast iron or ductile iron piping and valves for interior and exterior aboveground installation with a factory-applied bitumastic or asphaltum varnish coating to April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 7 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings be cleaned by abrasive blasting to a MACE No. 3 finish for interior installations and a NACE No. 2 finish for exterior surfaces. Primer and finish coat to be applied in accordance with Table 1. If primer is not applied within 24 hours, surfaces to be retreated. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Leave all parts of moldings and ornaments clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners and depressions. B. Remove all masking products used to protect hardware or built-in work. C. Final Cleaning and Touch Up 1. Touch up and restore finish where damaged. 2. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. D. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable. E. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes and Holidays 1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of coating manufacturer. 2. Repair fusion bonded coatings as recommended by original applicator. Applicator to furnish liquid repair kits for this purpose as recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3. Apply finish coats, including touch up and damage-repair coats, in a manner which presents a uniform texture and color-matched appearance. F. Unsatisfactory Application 1. If coating has improper finish color or insufficient film thickness: Clean and top coat surface with specified material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain and follow specific surface preparation information for top coating from coating manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled,or abraded paint,and feather edges. Follow with primer and finish coat in accordance with this Section. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and top coat may be required. 3. Evidence of runs, sags, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections to be cause for rejection. 4. Repair defects in coating system per written recommendations of coating manufacturer. 5. Leave all staging in place until ENGINEER has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to inspection and approval by ENGINEER. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Schedule field operations to avoid settling of dust or grit on freshly painted surfaces, and adequately protect machinery or other equipment in vicinity of abrasive blasting work. B. Request review by OWNER of first finished room, space, or item,of each color scheme for color, texture, and workmanship. C. Use first acceptable room, space or item(as determined by OWNER), as project standard for each color scheme. D. For spray application, paint an area no smaller than 100 square feet as the project standard. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902-Page 8 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings 3.06 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.07 CLEANING A. During the progress of the work, remove from the project site at the close of each days work, all oily rags, discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and dispose of in accordance with national, state, and local regulations. B. On completion of operations, remove all spots, oil, and stain from all surfaces and leave entire project in clean condition as far as this work is concerned. C. Remove from premises all containers and debris resulting from this work and dispose of in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. D. Upon completion of the work remove staging and scaffolding from the site. 3.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR is to perform routine quality control testing on each coat to ensure the integrity of the protective coating. At a minimum,the following tests are to be performed. 1. Dry film thickness. 2. Holiday testing. 3. Any additional tests as recommended by coating manufacturer. B. Any and all testing performed by the ENGINEER is for the sole purpose of verifying compliance with this specification. CONTRACTOR is not to rely upon testing performed by the ENGINEER as a means of quality control. C. CONTRACTOR to provide the following equipment for use by the ENGINEER. 1. One magnetic pull-off type, non-destructive paint film thickness gauge, such as a Mikrotest thickness gauge. Thickness gauge to become OWNER's. 2. One set of certified coating thickness calibration standards produced by the U.S. Department of Commerce. Calibration standards to become OWNER's. 3. One "wet sponge", low voltage, D.C. type holiday detector, such as the Tinker- Rasor Electrical Holiday Detector. D. Provide the ENGINEER with the proper safety equipment for observation and testing of the applied coating. E. To facilitate ENGINEER's inspection of coated surfaces, CONTRACTOR to provide scaffolding/rigging and adequate illumination as required to perform the dry film thickness reading and holiday test inspections as required by this specification and the referenced standards. Provide personnel to move the scaffolding, lighting, or rigging at the request of the ENGINEER. F. No equipment is to be placed in service until the protective coating has been tested and approved by the ENGINEER. 3.09 PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR is solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including safety of all persons (including employees) and property during performance of the work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Conform with safety provisions of the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act, any equivalent State law, and all other applicable Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, and codes. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 9 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings B. Protect floors and all other areas where work is done,with suitable drop cloths. C. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect all hardware, hardware accessories, lighting fixtures, switchplates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, labels, nameplates, etc. and other surfaces not intended to be painted prior to surface preparation and painting. Reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. D. CONTRACTOR is cautioned of the potential risk of damage and/or nuisance to the adjoining property and/or structures. CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing necessary equipment and/or controls to minimize the carryover of dust, paint, and abrasives. If excessive dust, paint, or abrasives are determined by the OWNER, or their representative, to be affecting adjoining property and/or structures, CONTRACTOR to utilize shrouds, drop tubes, or other means to confine a minimum of 95 percent of the abrasive, paint, and other material to the associated work area. E. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering motor. 3.10 SCHEDULES A. Attachments to this Section define System Schedule (Table 1) and Coating Schedule (Table 2). 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 10 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings TABLE 1 —SYSTEM SCHEDULE Table 2—Material Reference Surface Minimum Preparation/ 1st 2nd 3rd Total Mils Type of Surface Exposure Cleaning Primer Coat Coat Coat Thickness Concrete Walls and Interior Paragraph - 3 4 4 3.0 (Finish Ceilings 3.02 B Coat) Exterior Manufacturer's - 2 4 4 3.0 (Finish Specification Coat) Concrete Block Buildings Exterior Manufacturer's - 2 4 4 3.0 (Finish Specification Coat) Concrete Block Walls lnterior2 - Paragraph - 3 4 4 3.0 (Finish Painted 3.02 B Coat) Interior(2) - Paragraph - 3A - - NA Sealed 3.02 B Wood Exterior and Manufacturer's 10 11 11 - 4.5 Interior Specification Wood, Clear Finish, Satin Interior Manufacturer's 23, 24 25 26 26 4.0 Specification Wood, Clear Finish, Gloss Interior Manufacturer's 23, 24 25 27 27 4.0 Specification Wallboard(Semi-Gloss) Interior Manufacturer's 19 20 22 22 4.0 +texture Specification Wallboard (Flat) Interior Manufacturer's 19 20 21 21 4.0 +texture Specification Metal Doors, Frames and Exterior and NACE-#4 18 9 - - 4.0 Windows Interior 1.0 Mils Surface Profile Structural and Misc. Steel Exterior NACE-#2 16 18 9 - 7.0 1.0-2.0 Mils Surface Profile Structural and Misc. Steel Interior NACE-#3 16 17 - - 5.5 1.0-2.0 Mils Surface Profile Piping and Valves Interior2 NACE-#3 6 17(') - - 4.5 Exteriorm NACE-#2 6 18 9 - 6.0 1.0-2.0 Mils Surface Profile Valves and Bolting on C.I. Buried - - 14(7) 14(7) - 32.0 Pipe April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902-Page 11 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings TABLE 1 —SYSTEM SCHEDULE Table 2—Material Reference Surface Minimum Preparation/ 1st 2nd 3rd Total Mils Type of Surface Exposure Cleaning Primer Coat Coat Coat Thickness Factory Finished Interior and Hand Clean 5(4) 8(s) 8(5) — 4.5 Machinery, Electrical, and Exterior Motors(3) Galvanized Steel Interior Solvent 15 17 — — 2.9 Cleaning Galvanized Steel and Exterior Solvent 15 18 9 — 4.4 Galvanized Pipe Conduit Cleaning Threads NOTES: (1) Surface or piping above ground exposed to weathering. (2) Surface or piping above ground sheltered from weathering. (3) Use coating system per equipment Section when specified. (4) Optional: Use manufacturer's standard primer if compatible with specified finish coats. (5) Optional: Use manufacturer's standard finish coat. (6) (NOT USED) (7) Coatings used must be in the latest publication of National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)ANSI/NSF ---- Standard 61. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 12 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings TABLE 2—COATING SCHEDULE Min. Dry Mils Symbol Per Coat* Service Generic Type Brand and Manufacturer 1. NA Primary Sealer Chemical Penetrant Aqua-Gard-CreteGard Corp. Seal Krete- ICI Devoe#89424 2. NA Weather-proof Acrylic Emulsion ACRO 2290 DTM Acrylic Latex-ACRO Primary Sealer Amercoat 148-Ameron Tru-Glaze 4010 - ICI Devoe 3. NA Primary Sealer Vinyl-Acrylic Emulsion ACRO 1153 Latex Block Filler-ACRO with Epoxy Esters Amercoat 148-Ameron Blaxfil 4000- ICI Devoe 3A. NA CMU, Clear Block Siloxane Sealer, 10% OKON W-2 Sealer Siloxane-Acrylic Saver Systems WB Emulsion Aqua-Trete EM -Sivento 4. 1.5 Finish Coat Acrylic Emulsion ACRO 2288 Exterior Latex-ACRO Amercoat 220-Ameron LifeMaster-Pro 4226-ICI Devoe 5. 1.5 Metal Primer Alkyd ACRO 1104 Heavy Duty Primer-ACRO Amercoat 5105-Ameron Carbocoat 150-Carboline Devguard 4160 - ICI Devoe 6. 2.0 Metal Primer or Polyamide Cured Epoxy ACRO 4422 Epoxy Primer-ACRO Concrete Surfaces Resin Amercoat 385PA-Ameron Carboguard 888-Carboline 13-R-62-Epoxy Primer-Valspar BarRust 231 - ICI Devoe 7** 2.0-4.0 (as Metal Primer Polyamide Cured Epoxy ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy- recommended) Resin ACRO Amercoat 385PA-Ameron Carboguard 561 -Carboline Valspar 90HS-Valspar BarRust 233H - ICI Devoe 8. 1.5 Finish Coats Alkyd, Straight Long-Oil ACRO 2214 Heavy Duty Enamel - ACRO Amercoat 5450 -Ameron Carbocoat 139-Carboline Devguard 4308- ICI Devoe 9. 2.0 Finish Coat Aliphatic Urethane ACRO 4429 Polyurethane-ACRO Amercoat 450HS-Ameron Carbothane 134HG -Carboline V40 Polyurethane Enamel -Valspar Devthane 389- ICI Devoe 10. 1.5 Wood Primer Oil Base ACRO 2214 Enamel (Thinned 10%) - ACRO Amercoat 5105-Ameron Carbocoat 139 -Carboline Ultrahide 2110 - ICI Devoe April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 13 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings TABLE 2—COATING SCHEDULE Min. Dry Mils Symbol Per Coat* Service Generic Type Brand and Manufacturer 11. 1.5 Finish Coat Alkyd, Straight Long-Oil ACRO 2214 Heavy Duty Enamel - ACRO Amercoat 5405-Ameron Carbocoat 139 -Carboline Devguard 4308- ICI Devoe 12.** 4.0-6.0 (as Submerged Steel, Polyamide-Cured ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy- recommended) Iron, or Concrete Epoxy Resin ACRO Surface Amercoat 370-Ameron Carboguard 561 -Carboline BarRust 231 -ICI Devoe 13. 10 Submerged Steel, Coal-Tar Epoxy Two ACRO 4467 Coal Tar Epoxy-ACRO Iron, or Concrete Component Amercoat 78HB-Ameron Surface Bitumastic 300M-Carboline 14. 16 Buried Steel or Iron Tar-Base Pitch ACRO 8500 Heavy Duty Coal Tar - ACRO Bitumastic No. 50-Kop-Coat Devtar 247- ICI Devoe 15. 0.4 Galvanized Metal Vinyl Wash Primer ACRO 1162 Vinyl Wash Primer-ACRO Primer Galva-Prep-Ameron Rustbond Penetrating Sealer-Carboline Devran 205- ICI Devoe 16. 3.0 Steel Above Ground High Ratio Silicate ACRO 5502 Inorganic Zinc-ACRO &Above Waterline Inorganic Zinc Dimetcote 9-Ameron VI 3-F-12 Inorganic Zinc-Valspar Catha-Coat 302H- ICI Devoe 17.** 2.5 Steel Interior Polyamide Cured Epoxy ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy- Resin ACRO Amercoat 385-Ameron Carboguard 561 -Carboline Bar-Rust 231, Devran 224HS - ICI Devoe 18. 2.0 Intermediate Finish ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy- ACRO Amercoat 385-Ameron Carboguard 561 - Carboline Devran 220- ICI Devoe 19. NA Texture Emulsion Ready-Mixed Texture Compound - U.S.Gypsum Speedhide Texture Emulsion - PPG 20. 1.2 Sealer Vinyl-Latex Quick-Drying Latex Sealer,6-2-PPG Interior Vinyl Latex Primer-Sealer,50801 -Devoe April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902-Page 14 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings TABLE 2—COATING SCHEDULE Min. Dry Mils Symbol Per Coat* Service Generic Type Brand and Manufacturer 21. 1.4 Finish Coat-Flat Synthetic Alkyd Resin Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel-Negley Speedhide Alkyd Flat, 6 Line-PPG 50801 - Devoe 22. 1.4 Finish Coat Semi- Synthetic Alkyd Resin Coronado Supercoat 5000 Gloss Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen Enamel, 6 Line-PPG Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel -26XX Devoe 23. NA Wood Filler Alkyd Resin w/Linseed Paste Wood Filler- Negley Oil Natural Paste Wood Filler-PPG Interior Solvent Base Paste Wood Filler 4800- Devoe 24. NA Stain Synthetic Alkyd Resin Coronado Quick Seal Rez Interior Wiping Stain, Alkyd Oil Type, Quick Drying, 77-302- PPG Penchrome DF203- ICI Devoe 25. 1.0 Sealer/Primer Synthetic Alkyd Resin Rez Sealer-Primer, 77-1 -PPG 26. 1.5 Clear Finish, Satin Polyurethane Varnish Coronado Polyurethane 67 Series Rez Polyurethane Satin Clear Plastic Varnish, 77-89- PPG DF500 - ICI Devoe 27. 1.5 Clear Finish, Gloss Polyurethane Varnish Coronado Polyurethane 67-10 Rez Exterior/Interior Polyurethane Gloss Clear Plastic Varnish, 77-55-PPG *Or manufacturer's standard,whichever is greater. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum standard, if applicable. **For potable water use. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 09902—Page 15 of 15 Painting and Protective Coatings THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 11260 CHLORINATION SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Furnish, install, test, and place in service a complete chlorination system as shown on PLANS and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show general arrangement, location, and basic dimensions. B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Structural Steel ASTM A105 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications ASTM A106 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid PVC Compounds and CPVC Components ASTM D1785 Standard Specification for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2467 Standard Specification for PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D 2564 Standard Specifications for Solvent Cements for PVC Plastic Pipe Systems ASTM D 2672 Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement CHLORINE INSTITUTE Chlorine Institute's Chlorine Manual Pamphlet No. 6 Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine 1.04 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) June 1,2021 11260—Page 1 Of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements �• 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping Systems Identification: Chlorine services are identified by the following abbreviations: 1. CGP—Chlorine Gas Pressure: Solvent welded schedule 80 black steel pipe with 30001b fittings in accordance with paragraph 2.02/F. 2. CGV-Chlorine Gas Vacuum: Solvent welded schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15064, "Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System." 3. CLS-Chlorine Solution: Solvent welded schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15064, "Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System." 4. CLVT—Chlorine Gas Vent: Solvent welded schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15064, "Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System." 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Specifications Section 01300, "Submittals" and Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". 1. Shop Drawings. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Shop drawings showing piping and equipment layout if different from that shown on PLANS. b. Shop drawings showing piping schematic and pipe sizes if different from that shown on PLANS. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions for all components and accessories. d. Catalog bulletins or comparable illustrations and data sheets for all components and accessories. Material submitted must describe and illustrate materials of construction, dimensions, ratings, and functions of each item. e. Injector performance curves, including capacity in pounds per day, water supply pressure, and water supply flow rate for various back pressures. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Furnish certified report prepared by manufacturer's technical representative certifying satisfactory installation, operation and in-service placement of units. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Chlorine piping systems to be fabricated, installed and tested in accordance with Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 6 (latest edition)and this Section. B. Standardization 1. Entire chlorination system, including chlorinators, valves, injectors, scales, and automatic switchover equipment to be provided as a package system by one vendor. 2. All components of a given type to be by a single manufacturer. C. System Coordination: Contract Documents describe details of complete equipment installation for purpose specified. CONTRACTOR is responsible for all details necessary to properly install, adjust, and place in operation a working system. D. Preventative Maintenance Service Contract: 1. Provide a one-year Service Contract for Chlorination System,with a minimum of four site visits per year. 2. Duration of Service Contract is to be one year from CONTRACT Final Completion. 3. The one-year Service Contract shall have cost deposited in a bank CD .._ _ (certificate of deposit)in an amount equal to 100 percent of the total"not to June 1,2021 11260—Page 2 of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements exceed"one year cost of the Service Contract, with one fourth of the total cost deducted after each visit. 4. Service Contract to be provided by equipment manufacturer/manufacturer authorized representative and is to cover, at a minimum, the following items: a. Quarterly inspections,testing,cleaning, and adjustments. b. Provide assistance to OWNER's operations and maintenance staff, including diagnostics and troubleshooting service. c. Manufacturer's authorized representative to be present at project location within five days of notification of need for services. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials and equipment to jobsite with sufficient protection to ensure arrival in undamaged condition. B. Store mechanical equipment on sleepers above grade and completely protected from damage and exposure to the elements until installation. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hydro, Wallace & Tiernan (Siemens Water Technologies), Capital Controls (DeNora), or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Chlorinators 1. General: a. Service: Chlorine b. Capacity: Unit Designation Rotameter Capacity (ppd) CL-I 500 CL-2 500 c. Number of Units: 2. d. Electric Service: 120V, single phase, 60 Hertz. 2. Design Features: a. Wall-mounted, corrosion-resistant, polyethylene wall panel, suitable for wet or dry gas service. b. Variable orifice for regulating feed rate. c. Rotameter with direct reading, 6"(min.) linear scale. d. Injector vacuum gauge. e. Feed Range: 20:1, manual; 10:1 automatic mode. f. Accuracy: 4% of full scale. g. Suitable for use with remote vacuum-regulator check unit. h. Integral process controller for flow-proportional control with manual override, 4-20mA input signal from pump station flow meter. Vacuum Switches: 1) DPDT contacts, rated at 5A at 120V AC. Normally open contacts that close on falling vacuum. 2) Factory mounted in chlorinator cabinets for the following: a) Low Vacuum (Loss of injector water supply). June 1,2021 11260-Page 3 Of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements b) High Vacuum (Loss of gas supply). B. Vacuum Regulating Valve: Each I 501b cylinders to have a dedicated vacuum regulating valve with gas flow meter. The vacuum regulating valve to have the following features: 1. Capacity: Minimum capacity of 100 pounds of chlorine per 24 hours. 2. Valve shall provide a positive tight shut-off with Hastelloy-C inlet adapter and easily removable fiberglass filter. 3. The vacuum regulator body parts shall be constructed of corrosion resistant PVC material. 4. Provide integral vacuum shut-off utilizing a spring-loaded diaphragm that controls vacuum and closes tight upon loss of vacuum. 5. Provide pressure relief valve to prevent build-up of pressure within the gas control system. Provide connections for vent tubing and route tubing to exterior. C. Ejectors: 1. Number Required: two 2. Size: 3/4-inch, small throat. 3. Materials to resist corrosion and erosion. 4. Operational Parameters: a. Maximum Feed Rate: 500 ppd. b. Design Back Pressure: 4 psig c. Minimum Water Supply Pressure: 20 psig d. Design Water Flow: 25-30 gpm e. Gas Feed Source and Flow Rate Control: Flow-Paced, wall-mounted chlorinator. f. Water Inlet Connection: 1-inch NPT g. Gas Inlet Connection: 5/8"Tubing h. Solution Line: 2"Sch 80 PVC D. Automatic Change-Over System: 1. General: a. Purpose: To automatically switch the chlorine supply from the on-line bank of cylinders to the standby bank of cylinders. b. System to consist of a diaphragm-protected pressure switch sensing the gas feed vacuum level. As the first bank of cylinders nears the empty condition, the vacuum level in the gas supply line between the vacuum regulating valves and the chlorinator reaches the vacuum set point and trips the switchover to the other bank of cylinders. c. Wall mounted, reference PLANS for installation schematic. d. Operating vacuum: 10" to 115" H2O with switchover vacuum level from 30"to 90" H2O. e. Connections: 1/2" NPT for gas inlet and outlet. E. Piping and Valves: 1. Chlorine Gas Pressure: ASTM A106 Schedule 80 black steel with 3,000#forged fittings or flexible connections of copper per the requirements of this Section. 2. Chlorine Gas Vacuum: Solvent welded Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15064, "Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System". 3. Chlorine Solution: Solvent welded Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 15064, "Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System". 4. Flexible Connectors Between cylinders and Header Racks (Pigtails): 5/8-inch cadmium plated, soft seamless copper tubing. 5. Header and Line Valves (vacuum): Size as shown on PLANS and construct in accordance with Chlorine Institute specifications. Valves to be true union ball type, same material as adjacent piping: Spears, or equal. -- � F. Accessories June 1,2021 11260—Page 4 Of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements 1. Scales: a. Capable of weighing chlorine cylinders within each bank of on-line and stand by cylinders. Include separate readouts for each scale. Furnish scale with suitable tare bars and weights so that scale indicate net chlorine weight with an accuracy of one percent full scale. Fully protect all parts of scale from corrosive action of chlorine. b. Ten required, one scale and indicator for each I 501b cylinder within each bank of cylinders. c. Dial readout factory calibrated to 150 pound and 1-pound increments. Accurate within 1 percent of full scale. Dial readout no less than 4- inches diameter. d. Provide provisions for tare adjustments. e. Scale frame to have a 2-part epoxy finish, per Section 09902, Paint and Protective Coatings". 2. Cylinder support frame: Justrite Model No. 35166, or equal. Cylinder storage rack to accommodate five, 150-lb cylinders wide and 1 cylinder deep. Racks to be equipped with safety chains for securing cylinders within rack. 3. Supports, hangers, braces, and spacers required to adequately support equipment and piping from wall, floor, or ceiling. All supports to be of corrosion- resistant materials. Install with stainless steel nuts, bolts, washers, etc. H. Spare Parts: 1. Chlorinator: a. One preventative maintenance kit. b. One differential valve diaphragm, if required. c. One trimmer valve diaphragm, if required. d. One gasket set for rotameter. e. One gasket set for V-notch plug. f. One 500 ppd rotometers with seat, float and other accessories to adapt to chlorinators furnished. 2. Vacuum Regulator: a. One preventative maintenance kit. b. One set of replacement diaphragms. c. One set of replacement gaskets. 3. One Emergency repair kit for 150 pound cylinder 4. Two spare switches for high/low vacuum alarm complete with diaphragm seals. 5. Pigtails: 10. 6. Provide all other manufacturer's recommended spare parts necessary to maintain each piece of equipment for a period of one year. 2.03 FABRICATION A. All carbon steel pipe, fittings, and component systems for chlorine piping system service to be pickled or solvent cleaned to remove scale and foreign material, thoroughly dried, and sealed prior to shipment to job site. Any solvent used must be compatible with chlorine service. B. Fabrication: Manifold assemblies to be shop fabricated, by qualified personnel, in strict accordance with Chlorine Institute recommendations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL June 1,2021 11260—Page 5 of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements A. Materials and equipment to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, Chlorine Institute standards, and applicable codes and ordinances. B. Install shop fabricated components in accordance with fabricator's recommendations. C. Installation procedures to ensure that foreign material and contaminants are prevented from entering the system. D. Sealant used on threaded connections to be suitable for chlorine service. E. All carbon steel piping in chlorine service to be painted safety yellow in accordance with Section 09902, "Painting and Protective Coatings". PVC piping to be unpainted. F. Provide pipe identification system in accordance with Section 15190, "Identification of Mechanical Systems". Marker Legend to be as follows: Service Legend Chlorine Gas(CG) CHLORINE GAS Chlorine Solution (CS) CHLORINE WATER G. Install warning and hazard identification signs in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. 3.02-3.04 (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Services: 1. Furnish services and training required in Section 01445, "Manufacturers Field Services". Chlorination equipment manufacturer's technical representative to provide a minimum of one (1) day of on-site services, to inspect installation and assist CONTRACT in testing all equipment to ensure that it functions properly. B. Testing of Chlorine Gas Piping: 1. Prior to beginning pressure testing flush all piping with water to remove construction debris. 2. Clean, hydrostatically test, dry, and then test again with dry air or nitrogen in accordance with the testing procedures for chlorine gas piping in Section 02687, "Testing of Installed Piping Systems"and Chlorine Institute Pamphlet No. 6. C. Testing of Chlorine Gas Vacuum Piping: 1. Flush piping with clean water to remove construction debris. 2. Dry piping using the same procedures for chlorine gas piping. 3. Test in accordance with the procedures for vacuum lines in Section 02687, "Testing of Installed Piping Systems". D. Testing of Chlorine Solution Lines: Flush and hydrostatically test in accordance with Section 02687, "Testing of Installed Piping Systems". E. Upon satisfactory completion of pipe testing, manufacturer's technical representative to assist CONTRACTOR in placing system into operation. 1. After installation of equipment operate each unit to demonstrate its ability to operate without leakage and to perform its specified functions satisfactorily. 2. Have manufacturer's service engineer test pacing and trimming system at 10, 50 and 80 percent of scale to demonstrate that chlorinator response to pacing and trimming signals is within manufacturer's published accuracy statement. June 1,2021 11260—Page 6 Of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements 3. Test loss of vacuum switches and alarms, and loss of chlorine and high gas pressure switches and alarms by shutting down water supply to each chlorinator and altering chlorine gas supply. Repeat tests as necessary and correct defects. 4. Clean, repair to satisfaction of the OWNER, or replace all equipment or property damaged by testing procedures at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Operate chlorinators over 8-hour period at fixed rates to demonstrate that feed rate is within manufacturer's published range. 3.06-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 11260-Page 7 of 7 Chlorination System Lake Creek PS Chlorine Improvements -~ � THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 11266 DRY EMERGENCY CHLORINE GAS SCRUBBER SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Design,fabricate, install,test, and place in service all equipment and materials necessary for a Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber (DECGS) system for chlorine absorption. System to be a completely packaged unit,pre-assembled, piped,wired, skid-mounted,and include a FRP scrubber containment vessel,fan, chemically impregnated dry media for chlorine removal, and controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show general arrangement, location, and basic dimensions. B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA) ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS(ASCE) ASCE-7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C582 Standard Specification for Contact Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic(RIP) Laminates for Corrosion Resistant Equipment ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials ASTM D2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor ASTM D2997 Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe ASTM D4024 Standard Specification for Machine Made "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Flanges June 1,2021 11266-Page 1 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 ASTM D4097 Standard Specification for Contact Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks ASTM D4167 Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans and Blowers ASTM E84 Standard Test Method For Surface Burning Characteristics Of Building Materials NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS(U.S. Dept.of Commerce)(NBS) NBS PSI 5-69 Voluntary Product Standards-"Custom Contact- Molded Reinforced - Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment' NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION(NEMA) NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1,000 Volts Maximum) AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches ICS 2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 70 National Electrical Code(NEC) UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY(UL) 508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels 1.04 (NOT USED) 1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. General: DECGS System is to consist of a complete "once-through" scrubber system for treating the chlorine contaminated air from an accidental release of the contents of up to five(5), 150-lb chlorine cylinder. The ECGS system is to consist of the induced draft fan, an FRP tank to hold the dry media, media sample ports, valves and fittings, exhaust air chlorine concentration sensor instrumentation and controls, rain hood, ductwork, and all other equipment and accessories as shown on the PLANS and specified herein to provide a total DECGS system. B. Performance Criteria: 1. The DECGS system is to be designed for the following conditions: a. Chlorine Design Release Rate: 11.5 lbs/mm . b. Total chlorine content to be treated: 5 cylinders c. Storage Building Volume: 2,920 ft3 d. Minimum Ventilation Rate: 400 cfm e. Draft across scrubber(for duct loss): 2.0"W.C. f. Maximum Chlorine Outlet Concentration: 5 ppm. g. Power Supply: 480V/3 Phase/60 Hz 2. System to demonstrate a minimum overall system removal efficiency of 99.997% so that the discharge concentration is 5 ppm or less at the design release rates noted above and specified in the Uniform Fire Code. 3. The pressure in the chlorine supply/storage room is not to exceed ambient atmospheric pressure from the beginning of a design leak event to the time the scrubber system shuts off. June 1,2021 11266-Page 2 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 4. Design the fan to handle the minimum required airflow from the chlorine storage room including the resistance of all ductwork, fittings, and system components. C. Structural Design Criteria: 1. General: The DECGS System is to be self-supporting without the use of guys or other external supports and designed specifically for the specific gravity of the contents,wind load,chemically resistant to chlorine gas,and temperature changes due exterior exposure to the elements. 2. The minimum loading design basis to be as required by applicable local codes and specifications. The following external loads and forces are to be considered in structural design of the DECGS system. a. Dead loads; b. Live loads including vibration; c. Wind loads; d. Thermal loads; e. Seismic loading per UBC Code; f. Erection loads; and e. Anchor lug attachment to the shell. 3. Live Loads: a. Minimum live loading and reductions in live loads to be as specified in ASCE-7. b. Working Pressure Scrubber Portion: 7.0 to 8.0 in.WC vacuum. 4. Thermal Loads: Consideration to be given in design of DECGS to thermal forces resulting from: a. Complete or partial anchoring of piping and equipment. b. Sliding or rolling friction of piping and equipment. c. Expansion and contraction of the tank. 5. Erection Loads: Consideration to be given in design of tank to combination of loads that may occur during erection including: l � a. Dead weight of tank. b. Wind. 6. Wind: Wind loading to be in accordance with current City of Round Rock Building Code. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Specifications Section 01300, "Submittals" and Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". 1. Shop Drawings. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Drawings of system showing assemblies, arrangements, piping,electrical, mounting details, equipment outline dimensions, fitting size and location, motor data, operating weights of all equipment and sufficient information to allow the ENGINEER to check clearances, connections, and conformance with the Specifications. b. Process and instrumentation diagram showing process and piping schematic with all instrumentation and control devices. c. Catalog bulletins or comparable illustrations and data sheets for all components and accessories. Material submitted must describe and illustrate materials of construction, dimensions, ratings, and functions of each item. d. Specifications, performance data, and calibration curves for fan, and auxiliary components. e. Complete instrumentation, control, logic and power wiring diagrams in sufficient detail to allow installation of the instrumentation, controls, and electrical power components. June 1,2021 11266—Page 3 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 f. Test Results: media test results, signed and sealed by an independent second party, about previously performed chlorine containment test, demonstrating compliance with the UFC discharge emission requirements. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Certificate of Conformance as required in Paragraph 1.07-Quality Assurance. 4. Furnish certified report prepared by manufacturer's technical representative certifying satisfactory installation, operation and in-service placement of units. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standardization: All products furnished under this section to be of a single manufacturer regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of DECGS systems. B. System Coordination: The PLANS show, and this Specification covers, general design features and material requirements of complete equipment installation for the DECGS system. CONTRACTORNendor is responsible for the detailed design and construction of the system, all associated electrical work, and installation details necessary to properly install,adjust,and place in operation a working system. All electrical control panels,wiring, conduits devices and other components not shown on PLANS but required for a complete and functional system that meets code requirements are responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. C. Codes: The design of the DECGS system is to comply with the rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work specified herein, including, but not limited to, the Uniform Fire Code(UFC)with local amendments and the Uniform Building Code. D. All design computations and detail drawings are to be prepared by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. Provide certificate signed and sealed by same engineer stating that the computations and drawings are in conformance with design criteria. E. The scrubber system manufacturer to have performed chlorine containment testing using the same dry media and similar equipment from previous installations. Test results shall demonstrate continuous monitoring of exhaust stack chlorine concentrations less than 5 ppm chlorine. Test results to exhibit conformance to the UFC for discharge emissions and to be made part of the required transmittals for approval prior to release for fabrication. The performance of and all costs and liabilities associated with performance testing to be the responsibility of the scrubber manufacturer. F. Preventative Maintenance Service Contract: 1. Provide a one-year Service Contract for DECGS System, with a minimum of four site visits per year. 2. Duration of Service Contract is to be one year from CONTRACT Final Completion. 3. The one-year Service Contract shall have cost deposited in a bank CD (certificate of deposit) in an amount equal to 100 percent of the total"not to exceed"one year cost of the Service Contract,with one fourth of the total cost deducted after each visit. 4. Service Contract to be provided by equipment manufacturer/manufacturer authorized representative and is to cover, at a minimum, the following items: a. Quarterly inspections,testing, cleaning, and adjustments. b. Provide assistance to OWNER's operations and maintenance staff, including diagnostics and troubleshooting service. c. Manufacturer's authorized representative to be present at project location within five days of notification of need for services. June 1,2021 11266—Page 4 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Shipping: 1. Ship factory fabricated assemblies in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulations, properly match-marked for ease of field erection. 2. Ship on skids or within a protective framework to prevent damage during transit. Provide internal cross bracing as necessary to prevent distortion damage during shipping. Flanges are to be equipped with flange protectors and all openings are to be covered during shipment. Inspect unit upon delivery to the jobsite and ensure that there are no holes or cracks. 3. Loose parts (couplings, nuts and bolts, gaskets, etc.) are to be shipped in crates that are clearly marked as to contents. B. Handling and Unloading: Unload and handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Handle unit to prevent damage during unloading and installation. Follow manufacturer's instructions on lifting and setting. C. Storage: 1. Store in an area that will avoid damage due to traffic. Store and temporarily support equipment prior to installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 2. Exposure to normal weather conditions is acceptable; however, avoid contact with other materials like carbon steel, aluminum, concrete, and corrosive chemicals. 3. Store at job site on 4"x4" blocking at 6-foot spacing. Protect from corrosion and mechanical damage. 4. Store motors,control panels, and all other electrical appurtenances in buildings or trailers that have a concrete or wooden floor, a roof and fully closed walls on all sides. Protect the equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, vibration and moisture. 5. Connect space heaters to a power source and keep heaters in operation. Rotate all shafts that have bearings on at least a monthly basis. 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. DECGS system to be designed, fabricated, and constructed to provide satisfactory operation with minimum maintenance under the following environmental conditions: 1. Outdoor Installation: a. Temperature: 15°F to 100°F. b. Full Sunshine. c. Relative Humidity: 10%to 100%. d. Wind: Per the Building Code. e. Snow Load: Per the Building Code. 1.10- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, provide DECGS system from one of the following manufacturers: 1. De Nora, Capital Controls EST Type DES Series; 2. Pure Air Filtration, LLC of Northcross GA.; 3. Or equal. June 1,2021 11266-Page 5 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 B. Listing as an acceptable manufacturer does not relieve the manufacturer from conforming to contract specifications, including, but not limited to, the performance requirements. Clearances shown on the PLANS are to be maintained. Any such proposed changes or modifications are subject to review and acceptance of the OWNER. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. The DECGS system is to be a single-pass system that draws chlorine-laden vapor from the chlorine storage area, treats the vapor, and then discharges it to the atmosphere outside the building. The chlorine concentration in the discharge is not to exceed 5 ppm at any time. The system to also lower the concentration in the room to 1 ppm after the leak has stopped. 2. The DECGS system is to provide sufficient draft to overcome the resistance of ductwork, fittings and dampers and maintain a negative pressure in the chlorine storage area to prevent chlorine vapor leakage to the atmosphere. 3. System Operation: Design the DECGS system for complete and automatic operation in response to a start signal from chlorine leak detectors located in the chlorine storage area or in response to manual activation. 4. The entire DECGS system to be a skid-mounted, packaged system. The major components of the scrubber system shall include: a. A corrosion resistant, FRP vessel with deep media beds b. Corrosion resistant media supports c. Dry chlorine media d. Corrosion resistant discharge plenum with circular discharge duct connections e. Corrosion resistant foul air exhaust fan/blower f. Media bed monitoring ports g. Control/motor stater panel B. Media Storage Vessel: 1. General: The DECGS system to be a once through absorber, designed to remove minimum of 99.997% of chlorine vapor in a single pass. 2. Configuration: Horizontal or vertical; 3. Construction: FRP (Hetron 922, or Derakane 41 premium Vinyl Ester Resin with an MEKP cure system). Provide top coat with UV inhibitor. 4. Vessel to be skid mounted complete with an FRP induced draft fan/blower. 5. The exhaust stack shall be provided with a straight outlet with rain cap to prevent rain water from entering the system. The exhaust stack shall be equipped with a chlorine sensor to detect chlorine gas levels in the discharge air stream. 6. Construct vessel and all components which will hold a chlorine release without caulked, screwed, or riveted joints. Utilize seamless materials, welded construction, or gasketed joints. All gaskets shall be compatible with chlorine. C. Dry Chlorine Media: 1. Chlorine removing media shall be tested for conformance with the specifications and removal requirements and shall have been installed in at least five (5) prior, similar applications. 2. Media shall be chemically impregnated on an alumina oxide substrate and be spherical in shape, porous, non-flammable and capable of removing chlorine throughout the entire media bed. 3. Impregnant shall be applied during pellet formation, such that the impregnant is uniformly distributed throughout the pellet volume. 4. Media shall be supplied by the scrubber manufacturer. 5. Dry media shall be installed within the media storage vessel and shall be supported by chlorine resistant perforated screens or varying sizes of support media. When perforated screens are used for media support, support screens along the internal June 1,2021 11266-Page 6 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 walls of the vessel by FRP angles integrally bonded to the vessel walls. Provide support of the interior span of the screen using equally spaced FRP rectangular beams integrally bonded to the vessel walls. When media support is provided through various sized media, load media to a minimum depth of 3 inches per layer, with layers graded such that no transition is greater or less than 1/2 the diameter between adjacent layers in order to prevent media migration. 6. Provide a minimum of two (2) independent media chambers, each equipped with media specific for the removal of chlorine gas. Each chamber shall include a means for quick media removal and replacement using access hatches, vacuum ports, etc. 7. Provide each media section with a sample port, a minimum 1-inch diameter which extends into the bed a minimum of 12-inches. The sample probes shall be blocked off with a cap or ball valve constructed of CPVC. 8. Provide pressure gauge to continuously monitor the pressure drop across the media bed. Mount pressure gauge on the vessel, and provide a local read-out of the pressure drop through the media. D. Miscellaneous Design Features of the DECGS System: 1. Skid Mounted System: The complete ECGS system, including scrubber, fan, ductwork and controls is to be constructed as a single piece of unitary construction. All system components (fan, control panel, etc.) are to be completely skid- mounted, piped and wired. Control panel is to be mounted as shown on PLANS. 2. Anchors and Lugs: a. Furnish tie downs or anchor lugs designed to anchor the tank and contents. b. Provide a minimum of three FRP lifting lugs permanently attached and suitable for lifting and transporting the tank without structural damage. 3. All access doors and hatches shall use neoprene gasketing to prevent any air leakage. 4. Manufacturer shall provide a media replacement warranty valid for 10 years from the date of start-up of the unit. The warranty shall provide replacement media in the event that more than 50% of the media in the scrubber is consumed. The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient replacement media to reinstate the scrubber to its full capacity for chlorine removal. 5. Manufacturer shall provide media analysis a minimum of once per year, based on samples collected by Owner and transferred to manufacturer for testing and analysis. Yearly samples and tests shall confirm the remaining media life. E. Induced Draft Fan (blower): 1. General: a. Type: Centrifugal with backward curved blade type wheel. b. Industrial duty, fiberglass reinforced plastic construction with adjustable sheaves AMCA rated for capacity and sound. c. Fan assembly to be UV resistant, weatherproof and spark-proof construction suitable for outdoor chemical service. d. Fan wheel to be statically and dynamically balanced. e. Provide two(2)spare V-belts. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Minimum Air Flow Rate: 400 scfm b. Total Pressure Drop: 7.0 to 8.0 in.WC 3. Construction: a. Construction to conform to ASTM C582 and ASTM D4167. b. Wheel: Vinyl ester resin with an ASTM E84 Class II rating of 30 or less and minimum of 10-mil Type C(chemical)glass surface veil. c. Housing: Fiberglass-reinforced vinyl ester resin with an ASTM E84 Class II rating of 30 or less and 10-mil minimum Type C (chemical) glass surface veil with rigid bracing to increase structural integrity. June 1,2021 11266-Page 7 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 d. Resin: Suitable for exposure to the specific service conditions. e. Graphite impregnate all surfaces exposed to the airstream to prevent the buildup of static electricity. Provide embedded grounding lugs in housing for connection to external ground connection. f. Curved scroll design with 1-inch NPT drain connection at the bottom of the scroll. g. Flanged and drilled connections on inlet and outlet. h. Position bearing support brackets to directly oppose belt tension forces. Fan Shafts: Solid stainless steel, Type 316. Teflon labyrinth shaft seal. j. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball or spherical roller, self-aligning, pillow block design with an L-10 life of 30,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9. k. Factory install sheaves and drive belts for design condition. Furnish with OSHA-approved weatherproof FRP drive cover. 4. Motor: a. Motor HP: Determined by Scrubber Manufacturer b. Voltage: 230/460VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz. c. Enclosure: TEFC d. RPM: 1,800 e. Service Factor: 1.15 f. Construction Features: Per Section 16220, Electric Motors. F. FRP Ductwork: 1. General: Rectangular, square, and circular-shaped fiberglass(FRP)air ducts and plenums to be provided at the locations shown on PLANS. All fittings to be fiberglass. Smooth bends or internal turning vanes to be provided at elbows, tees and other points in the duct systems where air flow changes direction. 2. Duct Dimensions: Duct and plenum dimensions noted on the PLANS are net inside, indicating the clear space required inside the duct. 3. Resins: Select resins for contact with chlorine laden air at concentrations up to 150,000 ppm. 4. Fabricate ductwork in accordance with Section 15892, "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Ductwork and Accessories". 5. Duct Deflections: Design the ductwork to meet the following: a. Rectangular Duct: Maximum deflection of a side is not to exceed 2 percent of the width of the side at a test vacuum pressure of 6 inch W.C. When supported as specified or shown on PLANS, horizontal, rectangular ducting is not to sag in excess of 2 percent of the shortest side as measured from a straight and true centerline of the duct to the actual midpoint of the installed duct. b. Round Duct: Maximum deflection is not to exceed 2 percent of the duct diameter under an imposed hoop(point)loading of 550 lbs. The maximum sag of horizontally installed round duct is not to exceed 2 percent of the diameter when supported as specified or shown on PLANS when supported as specified or shown on PLANS. c. Any internal support components of the ductwork are not to increase the system pressure drop. 6. Supports: Unless otherwise shown on the PLANS, support all runs of duct at least every 8 feet and more frequently if required to meet the sag requirements specified herein. Supports to be fabricated out of stainless steel and designed to meet the installation requirements. Attachment of the supports to fiberglass ducting with screws is unacceptable. G. DECGS System Controls: 1. General: a. Provide a complete operating control system for DECGS system. The DECGS is to be operable from the locally mounted control panel. b. The starters are to be located in the local control panel, shall be sized for June 1,2021 11266-Page 8 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 up to 10 hp, 460VAC and shall include overload heaters. c. Electrical/instrumentation devices mounted on the DECGS are to have an enclosure classification of at least NEMA 4X. 2. Power Requirements: Local Control Panel(LCP)to operate from a single 480-volt, 3-phase power source. 3. Operator Controls and Indications: a. Provide the following operator controls and indications: 1) Hand Switches: a) Scrubber System, HAND/OFF/AUTO b) Scrubber Fan, HAND/OFF/AUTO 2) Pushbuttons: a) RESET b) E-STOP push-pull style push button 3) Status Indicating Lights (push to test style): a) System Power ON b) Fan Running 4) Alarm Indicating Lights: a) CHLORINE LEAK DETECTED b) EXHAUST HIGH CHLORINE c) FAN FAIL 5) Other: a) Alarm Horn. b) Exhaust Chlorine Concentration Readout 4. External Interfaces: a. Discrete Outputs from Local Control Panel to DCS: Provide the following maintained contact outputs, which will be used as discrete inputs to the DCS. Contacts to be noble metal or hermetically sealed, and suitable for 10 amps at 120 VAC. 1) System in AUTOMATIC. 2) Control Panel power on 3) Stop building ventilation exhaust fan, close louvers 4) Common trouble alarm. 5) Scrubber Fan running. 6) Scrubber fail to run on comments. b. Discrete Inputs to Local Control Panel: Provide for the following contact inputs to the control panel from external devices. Inputs from external devices will be dry contacts. Sensing voltage to be 120 VAC. Set points are to be established by DECGS manufacturer and are not to require, or allow, adjustment by the operator. 1) From External Contacts: a) A start DECGS command from the chlorine gas detection system. DECGS operation is to begin when this circuit is OPENED. Connections to this point to be via marked terminal blocks in the local control panel. c. Analog Inputs to the Local Control Panel: 1) Chlorine Exhaust Concentration: 4-20mA signal from a chlorine concentration analyzer in the exhaust stream. Analyzer is provided and connected by the DECGS manufacturer as part of the DECGS system. 5. Functional Requirements: a. General: The controls for the DECGS system are to be self-contained and complete. The controls are to start the DECGS system automatically based on a discrete signal from the chlorine leak detectors in the storage area. The remote signals will be normally closed and will open upon detection of leak. Once the DECGS system is started in the automatic mode, the system is to operate continuously until it is manually stopped at --- _, the local control panel. June 1,2021 11266—Page 9 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 b. Normal Condition: The normal condition of the DECGS is in standby mode with all control switches (System, Fan, Pump, and Mixer) in the AUTO position; 480VAC is applied to the local control panel; and both of the initiating circuits closed. c. System Switch: 1) HAND Position: Used to manually simulate a chlorine leak and initiate the DECGS operation for testing or maintenance. When in this position, the fan runs unless disabled by its respective control switches. 2) OFF Position: Used to ensure that the DECGS system does not attempt to start during periods of downtime or maintenance. The DECGS system is disabled when the switch is in this position. 3) AUTO Position: Normal position of the switch and it allows the DECGS system to be started by either of the initiating circuits. d. Fan Switch: 1) HAND Position: Used to manually run the fan for testing or maintenance. No interlocks or timers other than the motor overloads control this function. 2) OFF Position: Used to ensure that the fan does not attempt to start during periods of downtime or maintenance. Fan is disabled when the switch is in this position. 3) AUTO Position: Normal position for the switch and it is used to allow the fan to be started by the normal DECGS start sequence subject to either of the initiating circuits or the HAND position of the System switch. e. Leak Detected Light: Illuminated whenever either of the initiating circuits is open-circuited. Not illuminated at any other time. f. System Ready Light: Illuminated whenever all of the following conditions are true: 1) System switch is in the AUTO position; 2) Fan switch is in the AUTO position; and 3) There are no active alarms. g. Common Trouble Alarm: Illuminated whenever any of the following conditions are true: 1) Fan motor overload is tripped. h. Scrubber Exhaust High Indicator: Illuminated whenever the chlorine concentration in the exhaust is above 5 ppm. 6. Field Devices: All of these devices are to be provided, installed, connected, and tested as items integral to the ECGS system: a. Chlorine Sensor: 1) General: a) Function: Continuously measure, indicate, and transmit chlorine gas concentration. b) Type: Electrochemical sensor. c) Parts: Analyzer unit and transmitter unit with sensor element. 2) Service: a) Measurement Type: Gas diffusion b) Sample Temperature Range: -40°F to 140°F. c) Ambient Temperature Range: -13°F to 122°F d) Range: 0-10 ppm, or as established by DECGS manufacturer. e) Repeatability: ±2% f) Linearity: ±2% g) Accuracy: ±1% h) Operating Range: 100:1 3) Receiver/Operator Interface: June 1,2021 11266—Page 10 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 a) Display: 31/2 digit LCD. b) Touch keypad c) Output Contacts: Three electromechanical relays for HIGH ALARM, LOW ALARM, SYSTEM FAILURE, rated 5A at 250 VAC. 4) Enclosure: a) Electronics: NEMA 1 Panel mounted. b) Power Requirements: 120VAC, 60Hz. H. Electrical Components and Accessories: 1. General: a. Provide all necessary electrical components and wiring for a complete, functional system. b. See Section 13390, "Package Control Systems" for general instru- mentation and control requirements. All instrumentation, control and electrical components provided under this Section are to comply with the requirements of Section 13390, "Package Control Systems". c. All equipment on the DECGS system to be pre-wired to a single terminal junction box for connection to the control panel. d. Wire raceways to be per Section 16110. 2. Local Control Panel Enclosure: a. Rating: NEMA 4X b. Minimum Metal Thickness: 14 gauge. c. Type 316 stainless steel construction, unless otherwise specified. d. Rubber-gasketed, hinged outer door with continuous stainless steel hinge and stainless steel 3-point twist type latches. e. Stainless steel or copper-free aluminum back panel with provisions to mount control devices and terminal strip for field connections. f. Size panel to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted on or in the panel. g. Furnish cooling fans with air filters if required to dissipate heat. h. Control Panel Features: 1) Disconnect: Main power disconnect switch or circuit breaker device, mechanically interlocked with door so that the main power must be"OFF"before door can be opened. 2) Motor Starters: Provide full voltage motor starters with overload relays for all motor operated equipment. Motor starters to be NEMA size 2 (minimum). The magnetic starter shall have overload heaters. 3) Control Power Transformer: Sized for anticipated loads from devices/controls. 4) Heater and thermostat for condensation protection and to maintain temperature above 40°F. 3. Wiring: a. Reference Division 16 for project wiring requirements. b. Wiring Interface Entering or Leaving Enclosures: 1) For analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2) For special signals, terminate power (240 volts or greater) at manufacturer's standard connectors. c. Restrain control and signal wiring in control panels by plastic ties or ducts. Secure hinge wiring at each end so bending or twisting will occur around the longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with a sleeve. d. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Install abrasion protection for wire bundles passing through holes or across edges of sheet metal. June 1,2021 11266—Page 11 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 e. Use manufacturer's recommended tool with sized anvil for crimp terminations. No more than one wire may be terminated in a single crimp lug. No more than two lugs may be installed on a single screw terminal. f. Do not splice or tap wiring except at device terminals or terminal blocks. 4. Alarm Horn (on building): a. Sound Output Level: 100 dB nominal at 10 feet. b. Dimensions: 4-3/8 inches in height and width, and 2.5 inches in depth,for horn and enclosure. c. Diaphragm: Stainless steel. d. Cast aluminum neoprene-gasketed weatherproof housing. e. Mounting: Surface mount. f. Projector: None, unless otherwise noted. g. Power: 120V AC, 50/60 Hz, unless otherwise noted. h. UL listed, FM, CSA approved. Manufacturer: Federal Signal Corp.; Model 350WB. 5. Control Devices: a. Push-Button Switch and Selector Switch: Heavy-duty, oil-tight construction rated for 600 volts AC, 10 amps continuous; Square D, Class 9001, Type K. b. Pilot Light: Push-to-test LED type. Light to include a miniature bayonet base lamp designed for 6.3 volts AC with a minimum life of 20,000 hours; Square D, Class 9001, Type K. c. Relays: Control relays shall be magnetically held and shall have convertible contacts. Control relays shall be UL listed with NEMA A300 rated contacts and coil voltage, number of poles, and pole arrangement as indicated and required herein. All relays shall be of the same manufacturer. Relays shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700, IDEC RH Series, or equal. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fiberglass fabrication to be contact molded manufactured in accordance with NBS PS 15-69 and ASTM D4097. Any visual defects are not to exceed ASTM D2563 Table 1. All non-molded surfaces to be coated with resin incorporating paraffin to facilitate a full cure of the surface. 2. Shop-prepare all surfaces to be field epoxy bonded. Seal all cut edges, bolt-holes, secondary bonds to be sealed with a resin coat prior to the final paraffinated resin coat. All voids to be filled with a resin paste. Finish trim corners and edges. 3. Coat exposed surface and surfaces in contact with moisture or earth with gel coat of colored resin. Coat surfaces with a polyurethane coating to prevent ultraviolet surface degradation. 4. Cure components prior to shipment and remove materials which contain fiber blemish, pinholes and dry spots or which may be incompatible with adjacent building materials. B. Resin: 1. Thermosetting epoxy vinyl ester type, suitable for service temperatures and capable of withstanding continuous exposure to the internal environment. Resin is to be a premium vinyl ester type such as Hetron 922 by Ashland Chemicals, Derakane 411 by Dow Chemical or approved equal. 2. The resin is not to contain any fillers or pigments except as required for fire retardancy and in no case is the amount of filler to exceed 5%of the total laminate weight. 3. Resin is to have the following minimum properties: a. Barcol Hardness(per ASTM D2583): 30 b. Flexural Strength, (per ASTM D790) psi: 20,500 June 1,2021 11266—Page 12 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 c. Flexural Modulus, psi: 500,000 d. Tensile Strength, (per ASTM D638) psi: 12,500 e. Heat Distortion Temperature, OF: 221 C. Glass Reinforcing: Chopped strand,woven roving, and/or unidirectional roving. 1. Glass fiber reinforcement is to be commercial grade corrosion resistance borosilicate glass. 2. All glass fiber reinforcement to be Type E electrical grade. 3. Surfacing veil to be 10 mm Nexus 1012 or equal. 4. Mat to be Type E (electrical grade) glass, 11/2 oz. per sq.ft. with a nominal fiber length of 1.25"±0.25", with a silane finish and styrene soluble binder. 5. Continuous glass roving, used in chopper gun spray-up applications to be Type E grade with chrome or silane coupling agent. 6. Woven roving used for reinforcement to be 24 oz. per sq. yd. Type E glass and have a 5 x 4 plain weave. D. Gel Coat: 1. Thermosetting polyester type, suitable for continuous exposure to the external environment. 2. The resin is not to contain any fillers or pigments except as required for fire retardancy and in no case is the amount of filler to exceed 5%of the total laminate weight. 3. Resin to employ an ultraviolet inhibitor. E. Fabrication: Fiberglass laminate is to consist of an inner corrosion liner, an interior structural layer, and an exterior layer. 1. Inner Corrosion liner: a. Inner surface is to be resin rich barrier with a surfacing veil for additional corrosion protection. Inner surface is to be 10-20 mils thick and is not to exceed 20%±5%glass by weight. Glass to be non-continuous fiber. b. The remainder of corrosion liner to consist of two layers of 11/2 oz. per sq. ft. chopped strand mat. If the application is by chopper gun spray up, the glass fiber to be%-to 2-inch length. c. Total corrosion liner thickness to be a minimum of 100 mils and have a resin to glass ratio of 80/20. d. All edges of reinforcement to be lapped a minimum of 1". 2. Interior Structural Layer: Structural laminate is to consist of alternating layers of 11/2 oz. per sq. ft. mat or chopped glass and 24 oz. per sq. yd. woven roving. Chopped fibers are to be½-inch to 2 inches in length. Glass content to be 45%± 5% by weight. The minimum laminate thickness is to be determined based on structural loading conditions. 3. Exterior Layer: Exterior layer to consist of a white gel coat containing ultra violet light inhibitors with a layer of chopped strand roving. Thickness is to be 12 - 15 mils. The exterior surface is to be smooth, with no exposed fibers or sharp projections. F. Miscellaneous: 1. Tie down lugs to be integrally molded into the walls of the scrubber vessel. 2. Fasteners: a. Exterior: Unless otherwise specified,all fasteners, and metal attachments, such as anchors, brackets etc. to be ANSI Type 316 stainless steel. Anchor bolts to be Type 316 stainless steel and designed for the specified loads. b. Interior: Interior fasteners to be of corrosion resistance materials such as FRP, CPVC, or polypropylene. 3. Connections: June 1,2021 11266—Page 13 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 a. Air inlet, air outlet, drain, and all connections shown on the PLANS to be fabricated in the factory by the manufacturer. b. All flanges 6" in diameter or smaller to be reinforced with plate or conical gussets. c. Access flanges for manways and media access flanges to be air-tight to the pressure equal to or higher than the corresponding fan static pressure and to be watertight. 4. Gaskets: Unless otherwise specified, all gaskets to be neoprene. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Factory-inspect all fiberglass fabrications and certify in writing that each component meets the following requirements. 1. Blisters: None on interior; maximum size on exterior to be '/<-inch diameter by 1/16-inch high; maximum density of 1 per square foot. 2. Burned Areas: None. 3. Chips: None on interior; maximum on exterior'/e-inch with maximum thickness no greater than 10 percent of wall thickness; maximum density of 1 per square foot. 4. Cracks: None. 5. Crazing: None on interior; maximum length on exterior of 2-inch, with a maximum density of 5 per square foot and a minimum separation of 2 inches. 6. Dry Spots: None on interior; maximum of 2 square inches per square foot on exterior. 7. Exposed Glass: None. 8. Exposed Cut Edges: None. 9. Foreign Matter: None. 10. Pits a. Interior: Maximum 1/8-inch diameter by 1/32-inch deep; maximum of 10 per square foot. b. Exterior: Maximum 1/8-inch diameter by 1/16-inch deep; maximum of 10 per square foot. 11. Scratches: None(coated). 12. Surface Porosity: None. 13. Acetone Sensitivity: No surface tackiness permitted. 14. Entrapped Air a. Interior: None at the surface, 1/16-inch diameter and a maximum of 10 per square inch within laminate. b. Exterior: 1/8-inch diameter and a maximum of 4 per square inch or 1/16- inch diameter and a maximum of 10 per square inch. B. Manufacturer to completely assemble and test DECGS system at the factory. All equipment is to be aligned and functionally tested at the factory. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment as indicated on the PLANS and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. All components are to be square and true, without warp, twist,sag, or buckle. B. Foundation to be smooth and provide continuous full bottom support. Set tank on¼"thick, 60 durometer, neoprene sheet. C. Anchor equipment to the concrete pad with stainless steel anchor bolts. June 1,2021 11266—Page 14 of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 D. Conduits and field wiring from the control panel to remote mounted instruments and devices to be per applicable specification sections. E. Reseal all cut edges with a pigmented compatible resin system. Epoxy bond and mechanically fasten all field joints using non-metallic or stainless steel hardware. F. Calibrate and test all system gas sensors, controls, and alarms. G. After completion of all procedures specified above, clean and touch up any damaged coating system as required. 3.02—3.04 (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Services: Furnish services and training required in Section 01445, "Manufacturers Field Services". B. Placing in Service: 1. Before Start-Up: a. Make sure all rotating elements are free and clear. b. Check direction of motor rotation on all equipment. c. Have manufacturer's representative inspect and approve installation. 2. Complete unit,when assembled and operating,to be free from excessive vibration, cavitation, and noise. 3.06—3.07 (NOT USED) 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide for a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate the operation of the system. 1. Field performance test shall be conducted for a minimum duration of four(4)hours. 2. Demonstrate all components function properly and that the unit produces the required airflow rate and that the exhaust chlorine sensor is functioning properly. 3. Field test does not require leaking of chlorine but does require sensor activation to confirm function. 4. Demonstrate air flow rate from the chlorine storage room and pressure drop through the system. B. Demonstration/testing to be witnessed by the City of Round Rock Fire Department. CONTRACTOR to notify Fire Department a minimum of 48 hours prior to testing. 3.09-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 11266-Page 15 Of 15 Dry Emergency Chlorine Gas Scrubber System Job No.60633796 :-==w THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 15063 INSTALLATION OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes all work necessary to install aboveground piping as specified herein and as shown on the PLANS. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show sizes, elevations, arrangements, special encasement, and specials. B. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA) AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems 1.04- 1.10 (NOT USED) 1.11 SCHEDULING A. Slab, Floor, Wall and Roof Penetrations: 1. Order wall pipes and sleeves sufficiently early to ensure they are available for placement in concrete forms. 2. Verify size and location of building and structure penetrations before forming and placing concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examination -Verification of Existing Pipe and Penetrations: 1. Prior to ordering materials, expose all existing pipes which are to be connected to new pipelines. 2. Verify the size, material,joint types,elevation, horizontal location,and pipe service of existing pipes. - � 3. Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify adequacy of wall pipes, sleeves, and other openings before installing connecting pipes. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 15063—Page 1 of 4 Installation of Aboveground Piping B. Preparation - New Pipe and Fittings: 1. Inspect before exposed pipe or fitting is installed or buried pipe or fitting is lowered into the trench. 2. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly, remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe, and keep clean during and after installation. C. Coatings: 1. Install exterior protective coating on all pipes as specified in other Specification Sections. 2. Color-code and label non-submerged piping per applicable Specification Section. 3. Damaged Internal Coatings: Repair damaged areas in field with material equal to original coating. D. Valves: Locate where shown on the PLANS and install per applicable Specification Section. E. Wall Pipes: Provide wall pipes with thrust collar for all penetrations through concrete walls, floors, slabs, or roofs that are to be watertight unless otherwise specified or shown on PLANS. Coat buried fasteners on wall pipes per applicable Specification Section. 3.02 JOINTING PIPE A. Flanged: 1. Wire brush flange and clean inside of pipe before placing gasket. 2. Setting Gasket: If non-graphite gaskets are used, apply graphite and water solution to gasket before placing on flange. 3. Tightening Bolts: After initial alignment, place flange bolts with all heads in the same direction. Tighten flange bolts, each in turn, at a uniform rate around joint until all are tight. B. Restrained Flange Adapter Joints: 1. Use only when shown on PLANS or authorized by ENGINEER. 2. Install in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and as specified above. C. Special Jointing Procedures: 1. New Piping that Connects to Existing Piping: a. General: Any connection to existing piping will require, at a minimum, new gaskets and new nuts and bolts. b. Preparation: 1) Excavate and expose piping for underground connections. Install temporary supports for aboveground piping. 2) Inventory materials to verify that all fittings, gaskets, nuts, bolts, etc. are on hand to complete connection. 3) Coordinate isolation operations in conjunction with plant or utility personnel. Do not close valves or stop equipment. 4) Isolate and drain existing piping. a) If existing line is a wastewater line, direct drainage to sanitary sewer. b) If existing line is a water line, then direct drainage to nearest storm sewer or swale. c. Underground: Remove any thrust blocking that may exist after the pipe has been removed from service. 1) Connection to Plug or Existing Fitting: Remove existing plug or fitting. Make new connection using mechanical joint or bell and spigot jointing procedure above, as applicable. Install thrust restraint as applicable. 2) Connection to Pipe Barrel:Cut existing pipe using a guillotine saw, milling cutter, or abrasive saw. Square pipe ends and bevel pipe. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 15063—Page 2 of 4 Installation of Aboveground Piping Seal exposed metal with coal tar epoxy. Insert new fitting(s) as shown on plans. Complete connection using a solid sleeve, cutting-in sleeve, or other coupling approved by ENGINEER. Install thrust restraint as applicable. d. Above Ground: 1) Connection to Existing Flange: Remove blind flange or existing fitting. Face existing flange to obtain a uniform sealing surface. Install new piping or fittings as shown on the PLANS using the flanged jointing procedure above with a new gasket and new nuts and bolts. 2) Cut existing pipe using a guillotine saw, milling cutter, or abrasive saw. Square pipe ends and bevel pipe. Seal exposed metal with coal tar epoxy. Insert new fittings as shown on PLANS and complete joint with a restrained flanged coupling adapter or a coupling with thrust restraint. Install piping support under new connection. 2. Connections to Other Pipe Materials: Make connection using coupling approved by ENGINEER with appropriate transition gaskets. 3.03 ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Clean each piece of piping to remove dirt, grease and other foreign matter. 2. Start with piping at"cast-in"wall fittings and work toward equipment. If"block-outs" are shown on PLANS, grout the same with high strength, non-shrink grout after piping is installed and aligned. 3. Run lines parallel to building lines. 4. DO NOT spring or force pipe into place or weaken structural portions of the building or structure. S. Support piping as shown on PLANS and as required to distribute loads to structures, hangers, piping specials, and equipment so that excess stresses do not occur. Set all hangers and supports before flange bolts are tightened. 6. Align hangers supporting adjacent piping with equal support spans where possible. 7. Bring individual runs of piping to true grade and alignment by means of erection bolts and drift pins without forcing. 8. Bolt holes on flanges are to straddle vertical centerline of pipe. 9. Align and make up piping before grouting equipment to assure accurate alignment, then disconnect piping during grouting. 10. After equipment is grouted and grout set, make up piping, making use of flexible joints provided for that purpose, or as otherwise shown. Correct alignment as necessary to prevent stresses in flexible joints. Refer to flexible coupling manufacturer's instructions for permissible limits of alignment. 11. Valve Orientation: a. As shown where valve handwheels are shown. b. Where valve handwheels are not shown, orient to permit easy access to the valve operator, and to avoid interferences. 12. Pipe Tap Connections: a. Taps to the pipe barrel are unacceptable. b. To Ductile Iron Piping: Connect only with service saddle or at a tapping boss of a fitting,valve body, or equipment casting. B. Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters and Service Saddles 1. Thoroughly clean oil, scale, rust and dirt from the pipe to provide a clean seat for the gasket. 2. Wipe gaskets clean prior to installations. 3. Lubricate flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets with soapy water or manufacturer's standard lubricant before installation on the pipe ends. 4. Install couplings, service saddles and anchor studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 15063—Page 3 of 4 Installation of Aboveground Piping 5. Tighten bolts progressively, drawing up bolts on opposite sides a little at a time until all bolts have a uniform tightness. 6. Use only torque-limiting wrenches to tighten bolts. 3.04 THRUST RESTRAINT A. General: 1. Thrust restraint and ties for aboveground and underground piping is generally shown on the PLANS of the individual pipelines; however, their absence does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for providing them as required for a complete and operating system. 2. Provide thrust restraints to withstand test pressure specified. B. Location: 1. At pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends and other locations where unbalanced forces exist. 2. Provide thrust blocks and ties where required, whether or not shown. 3. Use thrust restraint for pressure pipelines at all bends,tees, points where reducers or changes in pipe diameter occur,fire hydrants or flushing valves, and all plugged openings. Provide restraint for an adequate length along pipeline on either side of a restrained joint to achieve a restrained system. 3.05—3.07 (NOT USED) 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Hydrostatically test all piping systems installed at the test pressures shown on PLANS or specified elsewhere in the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 2. All tests are to be witnessed and acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3. Test lines laid under structures or pavement prior to such construction. B. Field-test all piping in accordance with Standard Specification Item No. 510. C. Repairs: Repair leaks and retest repaired sections at no additional cost to OWNER, including damage due to testing. 3.09 CLEANING A. Following assembly and testing, and prior to disinfection and final acceptance, flush pipelines with water to remove accumulated construction debris and other foreign matter. B. Flush until all foreign matter is removed from the pipeline. C. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches and other items as required to properly dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. D. Minimum Flushing Velocity: 2.5 fps. 3.10 SCHEDULES (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 Job No.60633796 15063—Page 4 of 4 Installation of Aboveground Piping SECTION 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, tools, and supervision for Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride(CPVC) pressure piping systems. B. PVC sewer pipe (ASTM 3034) and PVC water mains (AWWA C900 and C905) are specified elsewhere. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show wall thickness,fittings, and type of joints. B. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specification Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM D698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Compounds (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Compounds. ASTM D1785 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. ASTM D2241 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series). ASTM D2464 Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM D2466 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ASTM D2467 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. ASTM D2774 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping. April 30,2021 15064-Page 1 Of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 ASTM D2855 Standard Specification for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings. ASTM F438 Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ASTM F439 Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM F441 Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. ASTM F493 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: 1. Catalog data to verify compliance with this Section. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NSF Approval: All material used in the manufacture of the pipe and fittings is to be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)for conveying potable water. Pipe and fittings are to carry the NSF label. 1.08 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Shipping 1. Pipe to be loaded, blocked, and lagged as necessary to ensure protection against damage during shipping. 2. Loose parts (couplings, nuts and bolts, gaskets, etc.)are to be shipped in crates that are clearly marked as to contents. B. Handling and Unloading 1. Unload and handle piping in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. 2. Maintain plugs and flange protectors in openings to protect the pipe. 3. Do not dump piping off of transport vehicle. Any damaged, chipped, or cracked fittings or pipe to be replaced at Contractor's expense. C. Storage 1. Store in an area that will avoid damage due to traffic. 2. Exposure to normal weather conditions is acceptable, however, cover piping to avoid exposure to UV light. 3. Store at job site on 4" x 4" blocking at 6' spacing. Piping may be stacked a maximum of three rows high as long as 4" high spacers are used on 6'centers. 4. Keep interior of piping free of all foreign matter. 1.09-1.11 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 15064—Page 2 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Pipe and Fittings 1. George Fischer Sloane, Inc 2. J-M Manufacturing, 3. Harvel Plastics 4. Certainteed 5. Celanese 6. Or equal. B. Thread Lubricant, Tape: DuPont, Manning, Maxwell &Moore, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. PVC and CPVC Material: Type 1, grade 1 per ASTM D1784. 1. PVC: Cell classification 12454-B per ASTM D1784. 2. CPVC: Cell classification 23447-B per ASTM D1784. B. Pipe 1. PVC Schedule 40/80: Per ASTM D1785. 2. PVC SDR type: Per ASTM D2241. 3. CPVC Schedule 40/80: Per ASTM F441. C. Fittings: Injection-molded, threaded or socket-type fittings and flanges. 1. PVC: a. Socket: 1) Schedule 40: Per ASTM D2466. 2) Schedule 80: Per ASTM D2467. b. Threaded: 1) Schedule 40: Per ASTM D2466. 2) Schedule 80: Per ASTM D2464. 2. CPVC: a. Socket: Per ASTM F439. b. Threaded: Per ASTM F437. D. Solvent Cements: Use fast-drying solvent for 144-inch sizes and smaller. Use heavy slow-drying type for 2-inch and larger sizes. Solvent to be furnished by manufacturer of pipe used. Cement is to be compatible with piped fluid. 1. PVC: Per ASTM D2564. 2. CPVC: Per ASTM F493. 3. Use only silica-free cements when jointing lines carrying sodium hypochlorite. E. Thread Lubricant 1. Liquid: Teflon base liquid in plastic squeeze bottles. Use liquid lubricant on permanent joints. 2. Tape: Teflon base tape. Use tape on all joints for valves or joints that may be disconnected often. F. Gaskets: Full-faced elastomeric(55-80 Durometer"A"), 1/8"thick. Material to be EPDM, unless otherwise noted for fluid compatibility. G. Expansion Joints: CPVC (1/2-inch through 4-inch) and Type I PVC (6-inch through 12- inch)piston -type joints with Teflon-impregnated seal rings for service other than chlorine April 30,2021 15064-Page 3 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 solution. Refer to PLANS for joints for chlorine service. H. Bolting: Machine bolts and standard hexagon nuts with N.C. threads, 304 SS unless otherwise designated on PLANS. 2.03 FABRICATION (NOT USED) 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fittings are to be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. B. The fittings and pipe are to be uniform in color, opacity, density and other physical properties. C. Marking 1. Pipe: Each length of pipe is to bear the manufacturer's name, date code, nominal pipe size, schedule size with pressure rating in psi for water at 73F, ASTM designation, and NSF seal. 2. Each fitting is to bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule, and NSF mark. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide unions or flanges to permit removal of all valves, equipment, and any section of pipe without cutting the installed pipe. B. Provide expansion joints for temperature variations exceeding 30°F or with straight runs longer than 50 feet. C. Hangers and Supports 1. Use only commercial metallic hangers and supports as detailed on the PLANS. All hangers to be galvanized unless otherwise designated on PLANS. 2. Pitch all horizontal runs of piping to drain. 3. Use spring hangers on vertical runs of piping when necessary to provide for expansion. 4. Use roller and sliding, guided supports on horizontal runs of piping when necessary to provide for expansion. 5. Anchor and brace pipe at expansion joints to force expansion and contraction within joint without buckling. Follow manufacturer's published instructions. 6. Minimum span to be as shown on the PLANS or as recommended in the published manuals of the pipe manufacturer for the sizes and weights being used. Use 90 F for inside piping and 110 F for outside piping when selecting span dimensions. Span to be the shortest required or recommended in any case of conflict between PLANS and published data. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION,AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS A. Jointing—Solvent Cement Socket(solvent welded joints) 1. Square end of pipe to be inserted into socket. Saws are recommended over April 30,2021 15064—Page 4 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 wheel type cutters. 2. Deburr inside and outside diameter of end to be inserted into socket. a. For Pipe< 2": Create a slight chamfer on end of pipe. b. For Pipe 2" and Larger: Bevel end of outside diameter of pipe with a I 5` chamfer approximately 3/32"deep. 3. Inspect, clean, and assemble joint per pipe and solvent cement manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Remove excess cement with a dry cloth or rag while the cement is still soft. B. Jointing-Flanged System 1. Join the flange to the pipe using the appropriate jointing procedure (threaded or socket). 2. Align the flanges and gasket by inserting all the bolts through the matching bolt holes. Do not use the flanges to draw piping together. When inserting the bolts, place all bolts with all heads in the same direction. Flat washers must be used under every bolt head and nut. 3. Tighten flange bolts, using the recommended bolt tightening sequence, at a uniform rate around joint until all are tight. 4. Using a torque wrench, tighten each bolt in the same recommended sequence to the recommended torque value. C. Jointing-Threaded 1. Only threaded x socket fittings may be used for threaded joint connections. Direct threading of pipe is not acceptable. 2. Approved Threaded Joints: a. Plastic male to plastic female. b. Plastic male to metal female. c. Metal male to plastic female is not to be used unless there is no other option. In that case, the plastic female part is to be reinforced with a SS band clamp. 3. Join the fitting to the pipe using the socket solvent cement jointing. 4. Apply Teflon tape or pipe dope to male threads. 5. Make up joint. D. Installation Aboveground 1. Clean each piece of piping to remove dirt, grease and other foreign matter. 2. Start with piping at "cast-in" wall sleeves and work toward equipment. If"block- outs" are shown on PLANS, grout the same with high strength, non-shrink grout after piping is installed and aligned. 3. Run lines parallel to building lines. 4. Cut and fit pipe accurately to measurements established at the site. Use only methods of cutting and jointing as recommended in instruction manuals published by the manufacturer of the materials being used. Use only strap wrenches for tightening threaded joints. 5. DO NOT spring or force pipe into place. 6. Support piping as shown on PLANS and as required to distribute loads to structures, hangers, piping specials, and equipment so that excess stresses do not occur. 7. Align hangers supporting adjacent piping with equal support spans where possible. 8. Align and make up piping before grouting equipment to assure accurate alignment, then disconnect piping during grouting. 10. After equipment is grouted and grout set, make up piping, making use of flexible joints provided for that purpose, or as otherwise shown. April 30,2021 15064-Page 5 Of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 E. Installation Underground 1. Lay pipe and fittings in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and per ASTM D2774. 2. Do not lay pipe in water or when, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, trench conditions are unsuitable. 3. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe at all times during placement. 4. Excavation and Preparation of Trench: a. Geometry: Maximum width per detail on PLANS. b. Brace trench and drain as necessary to accomplish work safely and efficiently as defined by CONTRACTOR's Trench Safety Plan. c. Dewater trench as necessary by pumping, well pointing, or other means to keep trench clear of water. Deliver discharge from pumps to natural drainage ditches or to drains. Attain discharge permit if required at no additional cost to OWNER. d. Minimum depth of cover 36 inches under finished grade; 18 inches under flow lines of drainage ditches; depth of cover at other locations as shown on PLANS. e. Place pipe base material to proper grade for full width and length of trench. Minimum depth of pipe base below barrel of pipe to be as shown on Detail on PLANS. 5. Pipe Laying: a. Keep interior of pipe free of foreign matter. b. Before lowering pipe into trench, inspect pipe for defects. Replace defective joints and pipe. c. Do not block under pipe. d. Do not lay pipe in water. 6. Backfill in the Pipe Zone(Unless Otherwise Noted on PLANS): a. The pipe zone includes the full width of the excavated trench from the pipe bottom of the trench to a level 12 inches above the top outside surface of the pipe barrel. b. Deposit select backfill material in the trench simultaneously on both sides of pipe for the full width of trench in horizontal lifts not exceeding 8 inches uncompacted thickness. c. Work the material under the haunches of the pipe by slicing with a shovel. d. Moisten backfill and compact with tamping bars and/or mechanical compactors. e. Compact material at the sides of the pipe with vibratory plate compactors to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 at moisture contents from—3%to+2%of optimum. f. Do not operate the vibratory compactor over the top of the pipe until the full depth of the pipe zone material has been placed. 7. Backfilling and Cleanup(Unless Otherwise Noted on PLANS): a. Time of Backfilling: Backfill as soon as practicable after completion of laying and jointing of pipe. b. Backfill Procedure Above Pipe Zone: 1) Procedure Under Roadways: Place backfill above pipe zone in thin (approximate 4-inch) layers, moistened and thoroughly compacted to a density of 95 percent of the maximum in accordance with ASTM D698. 2) Procedure Under Structures: Bring bearing surface to required grade by placing thoroughly compacted, approved moist material in thin (about 4-inch) layers. Compact to density equal to undisturbed material in trench sides. April 30,2021 15064—Page 6 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 3) For trench located in areas other than those previously stated, and not designated for improvement, place backfill above pipe zone to within 18 inches of surface. Compact in 12-inch layers (loose) to a density of 85% of the maximum in accordance with ASTM D698. Above this area, place backfill in one layer with sufficient amount of previously excavated material neatly rounded over trench to allow for settlement during consolidation. 8. Marking Tapes: Install along centerline of all pipe on top of last lift of pipe zone material. Use care to prevent damage to tape; repair any damage incurred. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test all piping systems in accordance with Section 02687, "Testing of Installed Piping Systems". All equipment, gauges, pumps, and leak detectors to be provided by CONTRACTOR. All tests to be witnessed and approved. B. Testing may not be performed on the completed system until at least 24-hours has passed since completing the last solvent-cemented joint. 3.06-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 15064—Page 7 of 7 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping System Job No.60633796 --=: THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 15141 PROCESS PIPING SUPPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and labor necessary for the design, furnishing, construction, and installation of all pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors shown, specified, or required for a complete and operable piping system. B. The absence of pipe supports, restraints and related details on the PLANS does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for providing them. Pipe supports and restraints shown on the PLANS, if any, are shown only to convey the design intent or where specific types and locations are required for a particular location and are not intended to represent a complete support system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show sizes, materials, elevations, and arrangements of piping. B. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS(ASME) ASME B31.1 Power Piping AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A123 Specifications for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A575 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY INC. (MSS) MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials, Design and Manufacture MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports—Selection and Application MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports—Fabrication and Installation Practices MSS SP-90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS(FS) FS WWH-171 Hangers and Supports, Pipe April 30,2021 15141 —Page 1 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) UL-203 Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service 1.04 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. The intent of this Specification is that all process piping systems shown on the PLANS be provided with pipe hangers and supports. 2. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the design of the pipe support system. Reference Paragraph 1.07 B. B. Design Requirements 1. Select and design within the specified spans and component requirements. 2. The absence of pipe supports and details on the PLANS does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for sizing and providing supports as required for the process piping shown on the PLANS. 3. Meet requirements of MSS SP-58. 4. Structural Design Criteria: a. Dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes and appurtenances filled with water plus any insulation. b. Safety factor: Minimum of 5. 5. Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor the supports to withstand the shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each support. 6. Framing Support System: a. Beams: Size such that beam stress does not exceed 25,000 psi and maximum deflection does not exceed 1/240 of the span. b. Column Members: Size in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended method. c. Support Loads: Determine based on pipes filled with water. d. Electrical Conduit Support: Include provision for electrical conduit routing in the design of the framing support system. 7. The load rating for universal concrete inserts is not to be less than that of the hanger rods they support. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following in accordance with Specifications Section 01300, "Submittals". 1. Shop Drawings. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Furnish drawings of all pipe supports, hangers, anchors, and guides. Drawings of each piping system locating each support, hanger, guide, or anchor. Installation details, materials, loads or forces and deflection of all hangers and supports. b. Engineered hanger assemblies are to be detailed on 81/2" x 11" sheets. Each sketch to include a location plan showing the location of the hanger in relation to columns and equipment. c. Manufacturer's catalog data, literature, and engineering data for all hangers and supports. 2. Certificate of Conformance as required in Paragraph 1.07-Quality Assurance. April 30,2021 15141 —Page 2 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each type of pipe hanger or support from no more than one manufacturer. B. Piping Support Design 1. The design, computations, and detail drawings for the pipe supports and hangers are to be prepared by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. 2. Piping support design engineer is to be ordinarily engaged in the design and analysis of pipe support systems. 3. The design engineer is to develop a detailed support system specific to the piping material, pipe joints, valves, piping appurtenances, system pressures and temperatures proposed as part of the Work. 4. Provide certificate signed and sealed by same engineer stating that the pipe support computations and pipe support drawings are in conformance with the design criteria. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Loose parts are to be shipped in crates that are clearly marked as to contents. Ship fabricated supports in largest sections permissible by carrier regulations. B. All materials are to be inspected for size, quality and quantity upon delivery to site. C. Store in a covered dry location until time of installation. 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate the location and placement of concrete inserts and drilling of structural members. B. Review installation procedures required under other Sections and coordinate the Work that must be installed with, or attached to, the hangers and supports. 1.11 SCHEDULING (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Code Compliance: All piping systems and pipe connections to equipment to be properly supported, to prevent undue deflection, vibration, and stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. All supports and parts thereof to conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1, except as supplemented or modified by these Specifications. B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes are to be attached to structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members to be provided by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. All supplementary members to be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction. C. Support Spacing: Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position to be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components, such as flanges and valves, impose concentrated loads. Where calculations are not made or more stringent April 30,2021 15141 -Page 3 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 requirements from pipe manufacturers prevail, suggested maximum spacing of supports are given in the tables below. Vertical supports to be spaced to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects. D. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers to be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allow for free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress on equipment. All hangers to have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers to be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, to include hydraulic shock suppressors. E. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage to be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than ½-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment to be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. F. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers to be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. All spring-type hangers to be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports to be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. The support to be designed for a maximum variation in supporting effort of 25 percent for the total travel resulting from thermal movement. G. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or joints to be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints. Design to allow the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points and to be structurally suitable to withstand all loads imposed. H. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides to be so designed and insulated, that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers to be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. J. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment, like chemical feeders, pumps, etc., to be firmly attached to fabricated frames made of angles, channels, or I-beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping to be supported on fabricated pipe stands, consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps, securing the pipes. K. Submerged Supports: All submerged or partially submerged piping to be supported with hangers, brackets, clips, or fabricated supports and anchors of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise shown. L. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, fiberglass, and other plastic pipes, to be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, all supports on plastic and fiberglass piping to be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields. April 30,2021 15141 -Page 4 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 M. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, all copper tubes in buildings and structures to be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar, suitable material, at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger. N. Manufacturers 1. Basic Engineers, Pittsburgh, PA. 2. Bergen-Paterson Corp., Boston, MA. 3. Elcen Metal Products Company, Franklin Park, IL. 4. Grinnell Corp., Cranston, RI. 5. NPS Industries, Inc., Secaucus, NJ. 2.02 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General 1. Materials for Supports and Hangers: Materials for pipe supports and hangers to be as specified or shown on PLANS. When PLANS lack such information, hangers, supports, and anchor bolts to be manufactured/fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. Fabricate pipe supports of the correct material to the general configuration indicated by catalogs when specified items are not available in specified material. 3. Manufacturer's catalog/figure numbers are typical of the types and quality of pipe supports and hangers to be provided. 4. Special support and hanger details are shown to cover typical locations where standard catalog supports are inapplicable. 5. Furnish fabricated and standard hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods,washers,and other accessories. 6. Run piping in groups and parallel to building lines where practical. Provide minimum clearance of 1-inch between pipe and other Work. 7. Install hangers and supports at all locations where piping changes direction. 8. All hangers and supports to be capable of adjustment after placement of piping. 9. Each type of hanger or support is to be the product of one manufacturer. Types of hangers to be kept to a minimum. 10. Vertical Piping to be supported at each floor and between floors by stays or braces designed to prevent rattling and vibration. 11. Chain,wire, strap, or perforated bar hangers are not acceptable. 12. Piping may not be suspended from piping above it. 13. Provide thrust supports designed to be field adjusted and capable of restraining the loads generated by pipe movement due to expansion and contraction. 14. Provide intermediate or guide supports at intervals not exceeding 20 feet. 15. Guide supports to cradle the bottom 90 degrees of the pipe, and the bearing surface is to be contoured to fit the pipe. 16. Unless noted otherwise on PLANS, do not clamp piping to building surfaces; use offset supports. 17. Where concrete supports are shown, apply two layers of 15-pound building felt under the pipe in contact with the concrete. Neatly trim felt around support. 18. Pitch piping to drain when shown on PLANS. 19. Provide lateral and longitudinal support as required to resist lateral loading such as wind. 20. Dissimilar Metals: a. Thin walled stainless steel piping is to be isolated from carbon steel by using stainless steel or fiberglass hangers or supports. b. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals by using copper-plated, rubber or vinyl coated or stainless steel hangers or supports. B. Saddle Supports 1. Pedestal Type: Schedule 40 steel pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. ---> 2. Nonadjustable Saddle, MSS SP-58,Type 37 with U-bolt. April 30,2021 15141 -Page 5 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 a. Manufacturers and Figures: �--- 1) Grinnell, Figure 259. 2) B-Line, Figure B3093. 3. Adjustable Saddle, MSS SP-58, Type 38 without clamp. a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure 264. 2) B-Line, Figure B3092. 4. Neoprene Waffle Isolation Pad: a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Mason Industries,Type W. 2) Korfund, Korpad 40. C. Hangers 1. Hanger, MSS SP-58, Type 1 and Type 6. a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure 104 or 260. 2) B-Line, Figure B3198H or B3100. 2. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS SP-58. 3. Attachments to Steel Beams: Concentric loading I-beam clamp, MSS SP-58, Type 21, 28, 29 or 30,which engage both sides of the flange. 4. Wooden Beam Attachments: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than 21/2 inches thick. 5. Concrete Attachment: Concrete inserts, MSS SP-58, Type 18, continuous channel insert or clip angles with anchor bolts. 6. Welding Insulation Saddles: MSS SP-58, Type 39 for insulated steel piping. a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure Series 160. 2) B-Line, Figure Series B3160. 7. Insulation Shields: Galvanized steel and stainless steel, MSS SP-58,Type 40. a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure 167. 2) B-Line, Figure B3151. D. Wall Brackets 1. One-Hole Clamp Type: a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure 126. 2) Or equal. 2. Welded Steel, MSS SP-58,Type 33(heavy-duty): a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure 199. 2) B-Line, Figure B3607. 3. Channel Type: a. Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut. 2) Kin-Line. E. Pipe Clamps 1. Riser Clamps, MSS SP-58,Type 8. a. Manufacturers and Figures: 1) Grinnell, Figure 261. 2) B-Line, Figure B3373. F. Channel Type Support Systems: 12-gauge, 1-5/8-inch wide series, pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, class G90, or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or, when ---- required by location, FRP. April 30,2021 15141 -Page 6 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 1. Members and Connections: Design for all loads with a safety factor of 5. 2. Manufacturers and Models: a. Kin-Line, Series CI3812. b. Unistrut, Series P3200. G. Pipe Guides 1. Intermediate Guides a. Piping 6-Inches and Smaller: Pipe clamp with oversize pipe sleeve to provide minimum 1/8-inch clearance. 1) Manufacturers: a) Kin-Line, Inc., Figure 417. b) Grinnell Power Strut, Figure P5932. b. Piping 8-Inches and Larger: Specially formed U-bolts with double nuts to provide 1/4-inch minimum clearance around pipe. 1) U-Bolt Stock Size: a) 8-Inch Pipe: 5/8-inch U-bolt. b) 10-Inch Pipe: 3/4-inch U-bolt. c) 12 Through 16-Inch Pipe: 7/8-inch U-bolt. d) 18 Through 30-Inch Pipe: 1-inch U-bolt. e) Greater Than 30-Inch Pipe: As shown on the PLANS. 2. Alignment Guides: a. Piping 8-Inches and Smaller: Galvanized steel spider or sleeve type. b. Piping 10-Inches and Larger: Galvanized roller type guides. c. Manufacturers: 1) Flexonics. 2) Kin-Line. H. Pipe Anchors 1. Galvanized steel anchor chair with U-bolt strap. ""- a. Manufacturers and Models: 1) Grinnell, Figure 198. 2) B-Line, Figure B3147A or B3147B. Concrete Inserts 1. Concrete inserts shall be MSS SP-58 malleable Type 18. 2. Where shown or required, concrete inserts to be of the continuous type capable of supporting 2,000 pounds per foot of insert. Section to be 1-5/8-inch wide and 1-5/8-inch deep. The continuous inserts to be as manufactured by one of the following: a. Unistrut Corporation. b. B-Line. J. Beam Clamps: Steel beam clamps to be of malleable iron and conform to MSS SP-58. K. Wall Brackets: Brackets for wall mounting to be MSS SP-58, Type 32 or 34. L. Hanger Rods 1. Hanger rods are to be straight and installed vertical. 2. Hanger rods are to be sized as required to adequately suspend the attached load with a minimum safety factor of 2. Secure all hanger rods to structural members. 3. Hanger rods to be subject to tensile loading only. 4. All rigid rod hangers to provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. 5. Hanger rod steel to conform with ASTM A575, with square head nut on top and running thread on the bottom end. 6. Minimum size single hanger rods to be in accordance with the schedule below unless otherwise shown or specified. Double rods used for pipe 8 inches and greater may be 1/4-inch less in diameter than indicated. April 30,2021 15141 -Page 7 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 Pipe Size(inches) Rod Diameter(inches) Less than 2 3/8 2Y2 '/z 4-6 '/< 8-12 7/8 14-20 1 Larger than 20 11/4 7. All threads are UNC unless otherwise specified. 8. Use expansion anchors only to support rods, hangers and brackets for piping 2-inches and smaller, and only if the expansion anchors are designed to carry 100 percent of the full load, hangers and/or bracket and pipe load. M. Supports for Vertical Piping 1. Provide riser clamp placed under hub, fitting or coupling with approved solid bearing on steel sleeve at each floor level. 2. Where riser clamps are used with plastic piping, modify so as not to exert any compressive forces on the pipe. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise shown or specified, all fabricated pipe supports, other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, to be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot- dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM 123. B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports to receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09902, "Painting and Protective Coatings". 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. General: All pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts to be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports to be coordinated with the formwork. B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers to be positioned in such a way as to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods to be vertical, without offsets. Hangers to be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible,without interference with other work. C. All supports to be securely fastened. D. Furnish two nuts(one for locking purposes)on all hanger rods. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Locate hangers, supports and accessories to support piping, valves and at all concentrated loads. B. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within maximum span lengths specified to support continuous pipeline runs. April 30,2021 15141 —Page 8 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 C. Locate hangers and supports to prevent vibration or swaying and to provide for expansion and contraction. D. Install items to be embedded before concrete placement. E. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement during concrete placement. F. Install hanger and support units on piping systems as recommended by manufacturer. G. Adjust hangers and supports and place grout for concrete supports to bring pipelines to specified elevations. 3.03 ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS A. General 1. Install CONTRACTOR-designed and selected support system, as approved, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and as specified herein. 2. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. 3. Support large or heavy valve, fittings and/or appurtenances independently of connected piping. 4. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. 5. Provide supports at piping changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints and couplings, and where otherwise shown. 6. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. 7. Vibration Isolation Pad: Provide for pedestal type pipe supports under base flange adjacent to equipment and where required to isolate vibration. 8. Insulated Piping: a. Install oversized supports to fit the closed-cell rigid insulation inserts. b. Install supports with galvanized or stainless steel protection shields and oversized rollers. 9. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. 10. Dielectric Barrier: a. Provide between supports and copper or stainless steel pipe. b. Provide between stainless steel supports and nonstainless steel ferrous piping. 11. At each channel type support, provide every pipe with intermediate pipe guide, except where pipe anchors and alignment guides are required. 12. Channel Type Support Framing System Spacing: a. Install on 10-foot maximum centers, unless otherwise shown. b. Generally satisfactory for steel and ductile iron pipe 3 inches and larger. c. Other pipelines and special situations will require supplementary hangers and supports. B. Support Methods 1. Horizontal Suspended Pipes: a. Single Pipes: Adjustable swivel-ring, split-ring, or clevis hangers. b. Multiple Pipes: Trapeze hangers with channel type supports. 2. Horizontal Pedestal Mounted: Saddle type supports. 3. Horizontal Wall Mounted: Wall brackets. 4. Vertical Pipes: Wall brackets, base elbows,or riser clamps on floor penetrations. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) April 30,2021 15141 -Page 9 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers and supports to be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports to be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges. 3.06-3.09 (NOT USED) 3.10 SCHEDULES Unless noted otherwise on PLANS, support piping as required to distribute the load on the structure. Maximum distances between pipe supports to be as follows: A. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 &80 Steel Pipe Pipe Size Suggested Max. Span (inches) (Feet) 1/2 6 3/4&1 8 114to2 10 3 12 4 14 6 17 8& 10 19 12&14 23 16&18 25 20&Above 30 B. Support Spacing for Copper Tubing Pipe Size Suggested Max. Span (inches) (Feet) 1/2tol% 6 2to4 10 6&Above 12 C. Support Spacing for PVC/CPVC Pipe, Schedule 40 or 80 Pipe Size Suggested Max. Span (inches) (@100°F](Feet) 1/2 4 3/4 4 1 4.5 1% 5 11/2 5 2 5 21/2 6 3 6 4 6.5 6 7.5 8 8 10 8.5 12 9.5 D. Support Spacing for Thin Wall Stainless Steel Pipe: Per applicable specification section. April 30,2021 15141 -Page 10 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 E. Support Spacing for Ductile Iron Pipe Pipe Size Suggested Max.Span (inches) (Feet) All Sizes One Support per Length of 20 Feet (Support Located at Joint) F. Support Spacing for Welded, Fabricated Steel Pipe Practical Safe Spans for Simply Supported Pipes in 120°Contact Saddles Nominal Size Wall Thickness(inches) (inches) 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Span, L-ft 24 33.4 37.4 40.5 43.0 45.2 47.0 26 33.7 37.7 41.0 43.6 45.9 47.8 28 33.9 38.1 41.4 44.1 46.5 48.5 30 34.2 38.4 41.9 44.8 47.5 49.4 32 34.4 38.7 42.2 45.2 47.7 50.0 34 34.5 38.9 42.5 45.5 48.2 50.4 36 34.7 39.1 42.8 45.9 48.6 50.9 54.8 38 34.8 39.3 43.0 46.2 48.9 51.3 55.4 40 34.9 39.5 42.3 46.5 49.2 51.7 55.9 42 35.0 39.5 43.5 46.7 49.6 52.1 56.3 45 39.8 43.7 47.1 50.0 52.5 56.9 ' ' 48 40.0 44.0 47.4 50.4 53.0 57.5 61.2 • 51 40.2 44.2 47.7 50.7 53.4 58.0 61.8 54 40.4 44.4 47.9 51.0 53.7 58.4 62.4 57 40.5 44.6 48.2 51.3 54.1 58.9 62.9 - _ 60 40.6 44.8 48.4 51.5 54.4 59.2 63.3 66.8 69.9 63 40.7 44.9 48.6 51.8 54.6 59.6 63.8 67.4 70.5 66 40.8 48.7 52.0 54.9 59.9 64.2 67.8 71.0 72 41.0 45.3 49.0 52.4 55.3 60.5 64.9 68.7 72.0 78 41.2 45.5 49.3 52.7 55.7 61.0 65.5 69.4 72.9 84 41.3 45.7 49.6 53.0 56.1 61.5 66.1 70.1 73.6 90 41.4 45.9 49.8 53.2 56.4 61.9 66.6 70.7 74.3 96 41.6 46.0 50.0 53.5 56.6 62.2 67.0 71.2 75.0 For steel pipe sizes not used in this table, the support spacing to be designed so that the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi. This may be calculated by using the formula: L _ 7,500tD 32t+D where: t = Thickness, in. D = Diameter, in. L = Safe Span,ft. Maximum deflection of pipe to be limited to 1/360th of the span. G. Variances: For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the above spacings should be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. April 30,2021 15141 -Page 11 Of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 15141 -Page 12 of 12 Process Piping Supports Job No.60633796 SECTION 15332 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Design, furnish and install a complete automatic wet pipe fire sprinkler system, fire alarm system, and emergency alarm system for protection in the Chlorine Storage Building at the Lake Creek Pump Station in compliance with the City of Round Rock Fire Code and the Contract Documents. B. This specification section is intended to be a performance specification for a fire sprinkler system,fire alarm system, and emergency alarm system. C. The information shown on the PLANS is schematic in nature. The PLANS show, and this Specification covers general design features and material requirements for the fire protection system. D. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the detailed design and construction of the system, including pipe sizes, number and spacing of sprinkler heads, mounting height, all associated electrical work, and installation details. E. All fire alarm control panels, wiring, conduits, devices and other components not shown on PLANS, but required for a complete and functional fire protection system that meets code requirements, are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. F. Obtain City of Round Rock Fire Department approval before installation of system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS show general arrangement, location, and basic dimensions. B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A795 Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION AGENCY(NFPA) NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances April 30,2021 15332- Page 1 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 -, NFPA 70 National Electric Code NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code NFPA 291 Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants UNDERWRITERS LABORTORY(UL) UL 04 Fire Protection Equipment Directory UL 262 Gate Valves for Fire Protection Service UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems UL 2075 Standard for Gas and Vapor Detectors and Sensors FM GLOBAL FM Approval Guide—Fire Protection Division 1.04 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. A complete automatic fire sprinkler system and new fire service shall be designed, furnished and installed for the Chlorine Storage Building. 2. A complete automatic fire alarm, fire detection and notification system shall be designed, furnished and installed for the Chlorine Storage Building. 3. A complete emergency fire alarm system shall be designed, furnished and installed for the Chlorine Storage Building. 4. The water supply for the sprinkler systems is to be supplied from the Pump Station's potable water(PW)system as noted on the PLANS. B. The sprinkler system starts at connection to the Pump Station PW distribution system, as shown on PLANS, and is to include, but not be limited to, the following components: 1. Riser Connection 2. Fire department connection. 3. Alarm check valve. 4. Main drain and pressure gauges. 5. Test and Drain, as required. 6. Flow switch connected to the fire alarm system 7. Tamper switch connected to the fire alarm system 8. Sprinkler control valve. 9. Addressable fire alarm control panel. 10. DACT for central station monitoring. 11. Fire detection system. 12. Fire Manual pull stations. 13. Fire Horn/Strobes. 14. Emergency Alarm manual pull stations for Chlorine leakage. 15. Emergency Alarm horn/strobes for chlorine leak. ---- 16. Field junction boxes, conduit and conductors. April 30,2021 15332- Page 2 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 C. Design Criteria: 1. General: a. The design, installation, and equipment shall conform in all respects to the rules, regulations, and requirements of the City of Round Rock adopted edition of the International Fire Code, NFPA-13, State Board of Insurance Requirements, F.M. Global, and Underwriter's Laboratories. b. System shall include materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside the building to provide system complete and ready for use. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for acceptance. c. Provide shop drawing in accordance with NFPA13. d. All sprinkler system mains and branches are to be installed as close as possible to the structural members of the building. 2. Water Distribution: a. Perform public water flow testing in accordance with NFPA 291 for sprinkler system hydraulic calculations and sprinkler system sizing. Notify OWNER and Round Rock Fire Department of time and date testing will be performed. Make all tests in presence of representative of OWNER. b. Fire service shall be buried as shown on the PLANS. c. Distribution shall be uniform throughout the area in which the sprinkler heads will open. Discharge from individual sprinklers in the hydraulically most remote area shall be not less than 100 percent of the specified density. d. Friction Losses: Calculate losses in piping in accordance with the Hazen- Williams formula with 'C' value as specified in NFPA 13 for the piping material employed. Velocity in the sprinkler piping shall be limited to a maximum of 20 ft/sec 3. Sprinkler Type: a. Finished ceilings: Concealed sprinklers, White cover plate, 165E 4. Hazard Rating: a. Chlorine Storage Building: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2. 5. Hydraulic Design: a. Density: not less than 0.20 gpm per square 1,500 foot over. b. Inside Hose Stream: 0 gpm; Outside Hose Stream: 250 gpm. c. Provide a safety margin of 10.0 psig into the hydraulic calculations. d. Base hydraulic calculations on the indicated static pressure, available flow and corresponding residual pressure at the junction with the water distribution piping system. Provide the indicated pressure cushion between total calculated demand and the water supply. 5. Location of Sprinkler Heads: a. Sprinkler shall be uniformly spaced to ensure full area coverage and avoid obstructions. b. Spacing of sprinklers and position and orientation of sprinklers in relation to the ceiling, walls, and obstructions shall conform to NFPA 13 for the hazard occupancy indicated. c. Maximum sprinkler head spacing shall not exceed limits specified in NFPA 13 for the corresponding hazard occupancy. d. In finished areas, sprinkler heads are to be located as near as possible to the center of the ceiling aligned with adjacent light fixtures. e. Exact locations to be verified prior to installation on shop drawing submittal. 6. Prepare shop drawings per NFPA 13 for review and approval by the OWNER and Round Rock Fire Department. April 30,2021 15332- Page 3 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 D. Fire Alarm and Emergency Alarm System Criteria 1. General: a. The design, installation, and equipment shall conform in all respects to the City of Round Rock adopted edition of the International Fire Code, NFPA-72, State Board of Insurance Requirements, F.M. Global, and Underwriter's Laboratories. b. Outside electric bell to match other site outdoor fire alarm sounds. c. Provide proper smoke detection coverage. d. Provide proper horn/strobe coverage. e. Provide a pull station at each exit. f. Circuit survivability shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. g. Batteries shall be sized for 24 hour standby and 5 minutes alarm condition. h. Fire alarm system shall be supervised by Site Operations Control Room and by a Central Station. Provide Emergency Alarm Manual pull stations for Chlorine leak. j. Provide Emergency Alarm Horn/Strobes for Chlorine leak. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish in accordance with Specifications Section 01300, "Submittals" and Section 01730, "Operation and Maintenance Data". 1. In addition to the review and approval process specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", the Fire Protection system is to be submitted to the Round Rock Fire Department for review and approval. Allow extra review time over and above the times listed in Section 01300, "Submittals" to accommodate the additional reviewing authorities. 2. Shop Drawings. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Hydraulic Test Reports. b. Hydraulic Calculations. c. Product Data: Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and accessories proposed for installation, in compliance with the PLANS and Specifications. List to include catalog identification numbers, drawings, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data and material necessary to define completely all components of the work. Approval of materials and equipment to be based on manufacturer's published data, and is tentative, subject to submission and approval of signed and sealed working plans as described in Paragraph 1.06 A.2.d. d. Working Plans signed and sealed by a Certified System Technician. Show data essential for proper installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of the systems supply and piping. Drawings shall clearly show location of sprinkler heads with spacing dimensions as well as orientation of sprinkler heads in relation to obstructions; piping system layout including valve risers and trim, inspectors test connections, fire department connection, gauges, system drains, isolation valves, water flow alarms; and support and hangers. Building sections shall show typical branch line, main line and sprinkler head elevation above the floor. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. e. Tests and Reports: 1) Submit written report of inspections and field testing to OWNER for review and determination of acceptance of completed installation. 2) Contractor's material and test certification for fire protection system in accordance with NFPA-1 3. April 30,2021 15332- Page 4 Of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Furnish certified report prepared by manufacturer's technical representative certifying satisfactory installation, operation and in-service placement of system. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Automatic sprinkler systems to be designed and installed by a company specializing in sprinkler systems design and installation. The company to be a Fire Protection Contractor licensed by the Texas State Board of Insurance Underwriters with a minimum of five years experience in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler systems. B. Hydraulic calculations, working drawings, record drawings, and installation inspection reports shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies(NICET)as an engineering technician with minimum Level-III certification in automatic sprinkler system program. Submit data for acceptance showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of hydraulic calculations and working drawings. C. Contractor Qualifications a. License to perform work specified in this section. b. NICET Level III in Fire Sprinkler Water Based Systems Layout certification for project managers, superintendents, and system designers. c. NICET Level III in Fire Alarm Systems certification for project managers, superintendents, and system designers. D. Design and installation to be in accordance with applicable codes, laws, standards, and guides for fire protection systems. E. Equipment and components to bear UL and FM label or marking. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials and equipment to jobsite with sufficient protection to ensure arrival in undamaged condition. B. All mechanical equipment to be stored on sleepers above grade and to be completely protected from damage and exposure to the elements until installation. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Tyco Fire Protection Systems,Watts/AMES Fire&Waterworks, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Fire protection equipment shall be listed or approved for fire protection intended application. B. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Fusible link type, 155°F temperature rating. 2. Minimum nominal K factor of 8. April 30,2021 15332-Page 5 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 3. Wax coat sprinkler heads. 4. Provide approved sprinkler head wire guards for all sprinkler heads located 7 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor level. 5. Automatic Sprinkler - Concealed adjustable head flush polished brass sprinkler heads of proper temperature rating to be installed throughout the areas with ceilings. 6. Upright or pendant type of proper temperature rating to be installed in the maintenance shop area, storage, and mechanical equipment room areas. 7. Sprinklers to be factory bronze in all utility spaces, stairwell landings and areas under landings. 8. Spare Sprinkler Heads: Furnish spare sprinklers as required by NFPA 13 including minimum of three heads of each type and temperature rating used and two suitable socket wrenches, contained in steel cabinets suitable for use as a service kit. Install steel cabinets in locations as directed. C. Aboveground Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A795, galvanized, minimum Schedule 40. 2. Fittings, Flanges and Joints: In accordance with NFPA-13, threaded, flanged, or socket welded; minimum 150 lbs.; R.F. flanges. 3. Hangers-Type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories for use in a sprinkler system and spaced in accordance with the requirements of the NFPA. 4. Minimum system pressure rating: 175 psig D. Sprinkler System Control Valve: System control valve to be Tyco Model CV-1 FR Riser Check Valve, Reliable Model G Riser Check Valve, or approved equal. Valve to be rated for 250 psi minimum service pressure. E. Valves: Provide valves of types listed and approved for fire service. The following valves are representative of the design, materials, and working features desired as manufactured by Tyco, Nibco, Reliable, or equal. 1. Post Indicator Valve: Mueller A-20806 or approved equivalent. 2. Gate Valves 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Outside screw and yoke indicating type, iron body, bronze mounted gate valves, straightway pattern, flanged ends, 175 psig working water pressure. 3. Butterfly Valves: Indicator type, built-in double pole/double throw tamper switch, 175 psig working water pressure. Butterfly valves of sizes up to 6 inch shall have locking type handles. Butterfly valves 8 inch size shall have gear operators, Victaulic No. 708-W. Butterfly valves may be substituted for gate valves except where NFPA/Underwriter specifically requires an outside screw and yoke gate valve. 4. Ball Valves 3 Inch and Smaller: Brass body, chrome plated brass ball with nylon seat, cadmium plated vinyl insulated handle, female NPT inlet and outlet, 600 psig working water pressure, Potter Roemer 4400 Series or equivalent acceptable product. 5. Check Valves 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body, bronze mounted, flanged ends, swing type for placement in the horizontal position, 175 psig working water pressure, Jenkins Figure No.477J or equivalent acceptable product. Provide flanged inspection and access cover plate for check valves 4 inch and larger. 6. Check Valves 2 Inch and Smaller: Iron body, stainless steel trim, EPDM seal, screwed ends, silent check type, 200 psig working water pressure, Mueller Steam Specialty Figure No. 303-AT, or equivalent acceptable product. 7. Drain and Inspectors Test Valves: Copper alloy ball valve with integral tamper resistant test orifice, sight glass, tapped and plugged port, and locking kit, suitable for 300 psig non-shock cold water,AGF Manufacturing Inc. Model 1000 or equivalent acceptable product. Orifice size shall be noted on indicator plate and shall equal smallest sprinkler orifice installed in the hydraulically remote area of the sprinkler zone served. Valves shall be line size. April 30,2021 15332-Page 6 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 8. Automatic Ball Drip Valve: 1/2-inch, bronze body, corrosion resistant metal ball and spring, threaded ends, 175 psig working water pressure. 9. Water flow Switch: Potter Electric VRS-CR or approved equal. 10. All valves shall be equipped with a compatible tamper switch. 11. Tamper Switch: Potter OSYSU-1 Supervisory Switch or approved equal. 12. Seismic Sway Bracing: Tolco or approved equal. F. Backflow Preventers: 1. Provide listed and approved reduced pressure backflow preventer with OS&Y gate valve on both ends and strainer on inlet. Body shall be epoxy coated cast iron with rubber check valve disks, bronze seats, stainless steel trim, and bronze test cocks. 2. Backflow prevention assemblies shall have current"Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR shall be acceptable as the required documentation." Double check backflow preventers shall be tested and certified under ASSE 1015. 3. Backflow Preventer Test Valves: 2-1/2 inch hose gate valve, iron body, bronze mounted, straightway or angle pattern, Flanged end, 175 psig working water pressure. Provide hose threads to suit local fire department with cap and chain. 4. For backflow preventer testing, provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly UL 668 hose valves with 2.5 inch National standard male hose threads with cap and chain. G. Drains and Test Pipes: Provide drains at base of risers,valved sections inside building, at alarm valves, and at other locations in accordance with NFPA-1 3 for complete drainage of system. Pipe drains to approved locations. H. Pressure Gauges: 1. Pressure gauges shall be listed and approved for fire protection service, ASME B40.1, 3 percent accuracy or better, with wetted parts consisting of bronze Bourdon tube and brass socket, and corrosion-resistant ABS case and heat- resistant polycarbonate window. The movement shall be designed to provide shock and vibration resistance. Gauges shall withstand temperatures of minus 40 to 150 degrees F(-40 to 66 degrees C). 2. Gauges shall have a minimum 3-1/2 inch diameter face. Dial gradations reading in "PSIG" (bar) shall be such that the normal operating pressure of the system installed shall be indicated near the middle of the scale. Pressure gauge range to be 0 to 250 psig minimum. 3. Select gauges for use on "wet"systems with pressurized water piping. 4. Gauges shall be equipped with a ball valve shutoff and snubber. An outlet, at least 1/4-inch size, plugged for the installation of the inspector's gauge shall be located between each valve and gauge. 5. Provide Dwyer Model 35W or equivalent acceptable product by Ashcroft, AMETEK, or U.S. Gauge Division. Smoke Detectors: Fire-Cite SD355 addressable plug-in smoke detectors with B2IOLP base or approved equal, and compatible with Fire Alarm panel. J. Monitor Module: Fire-Cite MDF-300 or approved equal. K. Control Module: CRF-300 Addressable relay module. L. Manual Pull Stations: Fire-lite BG-I2LX Addressable or approved equal. M. Visual and Audio Alarms: Listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 for public mode evacuation. 1. Indoors: System Sensor P2RL or approved equal. April 30,2021 15332- Page 7 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 2. Outdoors: System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance P2RHK or approved equal. 3. Emergency Alarm; System Sensor P2RL with Yellow LENS-A2 N. Fire Alarm Panel: 1. Provide an addressable non-proprietary fire alarm panel to annunciate alarms in response to input signals. The panel input signals to include flow switch, tamper switches,fire alarm pull stations and smoke and heat detectors. 2. Front panel controls to include tone silence, alarm silence, alarm activate and system reset. 3. Power supply: Power supply to the panel is 120V, single phase. 4. Power Supply to Field Input and Output Devices: Fire alarm panel to include power supplies for all input/output circuits that require power source. 5. Furnish dry contacts for a common trouble alarm for output to the Pump Station's distributed control system. 6. Fire Alarm Panel to be Honeywell Fire-Cite ES-50X or equal. O. Electrical Construction: Reference applicable specification sections for requirements for conduit and wire in accordance with NFPA 70. EMT conduit is not acceptable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Secure written approval of the Round Rock Fire Department prior to beginning any installation work. B. Coordinate the work under this Specification Section with other trades so that the sprinkler system components are installed at the proper time, fit in the available space, and access for maintenance is provided. Verify existing field conditions. C. Overhead Pipe Routing: 1. New Buildings: Route pipe to avoid conflicts or interference with building lighting, mechanical equipment, ductwork, piping and electrical conduits. Locations of these items are shown or called for on the PLANS. 2. In all storage areas it is intended that maximum obtainable headroom be achieved. D. Protect and maintain OWNER's facilities affected by construction. Facilities affected by construction to be restored to their original condition. E. Perform field fire flow tests at or near each building location, using City of Round Rock Fire Department testing protocol, to verify flow rates and pressures. Submit the results of the fire flow tests. 3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Handle, transport, and store sprinklers with care to prevent mechanical damage. Use only special wrenches, designed for sprinklers, to tighten fittings. B. Install nozzles to clear all interferences in order to spray on all required surfaces or areas. Locate sprinklers with minimum interference to discharge pattern by building structural members. C. Use U-type hangers of round Type 316 stainless steel or approved adjustable 316 stainless steel types per NFPA-13. April 30,2021 15332- Page 8 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 D. Locate manufacturer's instruction charts describing equipment operation and maintenance near major sprinkler devices. E. Seal sprinkler valves in open position to discourage unauthorized persons from tampering with the valves. Use No. 16 wire braided or twisted type to prevent pulling out of lead seal. F. Repair pipe and fittings weld or abrasion wounds with two coats of zinc rich paint to dry film thickness of 1.5 mils per coat. G. Provide identification signs on all major sprinkler system devices, including all control, drain, test, and alarm valves to identify their purpose, function, and area covered. Plainly mark all valves with direction to open. If not marked by valve manufacturer, paint or otherwise mark direction of opening on the valve. H. Provide test connections and connections to flush sprinkler piping with fresh water. These connections to include valves for supply and draining of each header and lateral. Paint all unpainted metallic surfaces red in accordance with Section 09902, "Painting and Protective Coatings". J. Fire Alarm System Sequence of Operation: 1. System responses to alarm conditions shall be in accordance NFPA 72 requirements. 2. The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the system database as an event. a. The system shall automatically display on the control panel Liquid Crystal Display the first event of the highest priority by type. Priorities and types shall be: Alarm ii. Supervisory iii. Trouble iv. Monitor 3. Chlorine gas sensor alarm shall be connected with a monitor module as a supervisory signal to the fire alarm system, activate indoor and outdoor horn/yellow strobes and report back to plant and Central Station. 4. Emergency alarm pull station for Chlorine leak shall activate indoor and outdoor horn/yellow strobe. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Start-Up and Field Testing: 1. Flushing: Thoroughly flush underground piping under pressure before making connection to sprinkler risers to ensure removal of all stones or other obstructing material. Suitable method of flushing branch mains to sprinkler risers is to use hose attached to temporary piping. Flushing through 2-inch sprinkler drain is not suitable. Leave final sprinkler system free of obstructing materials upon completion of flushing operations, and in good working order. 2. Hydrostatic Tests for Leakage: Test in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. Provide a Contractor's Material & Test Certificate For Underground Piping in accordance with NFPA 24. 4. Provide a Contractor's Material & Test Certificate For Aboveground Piping in accordance with NFPA 13. April 30,2021 15332- Page 9 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 B. Fire Alarm System Start-Up and Field Testing: 1. The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a trained manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the function as specified. 2. The Installing Contractor and the Fire Alarm System Vendor shall, upon the request of Owner, attend any and all project meetings for the purpose of accurately determining progress. 3. It shall be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor to assure that construction debris does not adversely affect any sensing devices installed as part of this project. Should it be deemed necessary by the Owner's construction manager, the installing contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning of all smoke detectors prior to final acceptance. 4. Test all wiring for continuity, shorts, and grounds before the system is activated. 5. Proof-test cable shielding for shielded cable. 6. Proof-test insulation resistance to ground and between insulated conductors in accordance with ANSI/NETA ATS-2017. 7. Insulation proof-test only required for cables installed along the train way to ancillary facilities and for"home-run" legs of class A circuits from the last device on the circuit to the circuit controller. 8. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. 9. All testing shall be witnessed by an Owner's representative and reported in accordance with ANSI/NETA ATS-201 7, Section 5.4 and submitted with the initial as-built documents submission. 10. The Contractor shall submit fire alarm system as-builts drawings to the owner for review a minimum of two (2) weeks before the scheduled testing. Owner will provide comments within five (5) business days of as-builts being submitted. The Contractor shall address comments submitted by Owner re-submit as-builts to be used as part of the SCI. 11. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that all devices and circuits are functioning properly. After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that all panel functions were tested and operated properly. 12. Provide a Record of Completion in accordance with NFPA 72. B. Furnish services and training required in Section 01445, "Manufacturer's Field Services". 3.06-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement and payment for work under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 15332- Page 10 of 10 Fire Protection System Job No.60633796 SECTION 15402 PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Furnish and install plumbing systems, including fixtures, water, waste, drain, and vent piping as shown on PLANS and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. PLANS define sizes, materials, end connections, working pressures, and test pressures and general run and arrangement of piping. B. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specification Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE(ANSI) ANSI B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fitting ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Pressure Fittings AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 74 Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A 182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High- Temperature Service ASTM A 888 Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications ASTM B 32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal ASTM B 42 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes ASTM B 88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM B 813 Standard Specification for Liquid and Past Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube ASTM C 564 Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings April 30,2021 15402—Page 1 of 6 Plumbing Job No.60633796 ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. ASTM D 2466 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ASTM D 2467 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM D 2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Piping Systems. ASTM D 2665 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA) AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains 1.04 DEFINITIONS Plumbing systems refers to fixtures, pipe,fittings, and appurtenances that are normally installed by Plumbers as that trade is defined under Building Construction Crafts designations and includes waterlines, waste lines, compressed air, and fuel gas pipelines. Process pipelines and equipment are not included under this definition. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide new and/or modify existing plumbing systems,complete and ready for operation. Plumbing systems including manufacturer's products to be in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of the applicable Plumbing Code in the jurisdiction where the Work occurs. Plumbing systems includes all piping within buildings to a point 5 feet outside of building walls. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals". 1. Shop Drawings: In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Catalog/brochures for all items. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE Work to comply with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. Any modifications required to comply with said rules and regulations made at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.08- 1.11 (NOT USED) April 30,2021 15402—Page 2 of 6 Plumbing Job No.60633796 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Fixtures: 1. General: a. Fixture fittings and piping which are exposed shall be heavy-duty chrome. b. Stops: 1) Fixtures,except showers, shall have stops at the fixtures' service. 2) Stops for laboratory equipment, and for other equipment or fixtures for which stops have not been otherwise specified in this Section, shall be chrome-plated straight pattern compression stops or chrome-plated angle 3) pattern compression stops. c. Escutcheons to be used for all wall penetrations: 1) Material: Chrome-plated steel plate. 2) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: I. Dearborn Brass Co., Model Number 5358. II. Keeney Manufacturing Co., Model Number 102 or Number 105. 2. Toilets, urinals, lavatories,and showers: a. Provide as indicated on the Drawings. b. Meet ADA accessibility standards. c. EPA WaterSense labeled. d. Flush valve water closets: 1) Wall mounted vitreous china elongated bowl. 2) Water-saver type, siphon jet action; 1-1/2-inch top spud; chrome- plated 3) flush valve with vacuum breaker; non-hold-open type handle with flush volume adjustability at 1.28 gallons per flush; 1-inch screwdriver angle stop and flush connection. 4) White solid plastic seat with open front, stainless steel hinge and check. 5) Concealed carrier: I. Mounting height as required. e. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Flush valve water closets: I. Zurn Ind. Inc. II. American Standard, Inc. III. Crane Co. IV. Kohler Co. 2) Flush valves: Zurn Ind. Inc. II. Sloan Valve Co. 3. Lavatories: a. Wall mounted 20-inch by 18-inch vitreous china bowl with backsplash and front overflow. b. Concealed arms and concealed wall hanger. c. 1-inch diameter drilling for soap dispenser and soap depression. April 30,2021 15402-Page 3 of 6 Plumbing Job No.60633796 d. 4-inch center inlets; faucet, 4-inch centers;automatic flow control; 1/2- inch male IP connectors; chrome finish, 3/8-inch supply assemblies, 3/8- inch angle valve, loose key handles; escutcheon drain with integral perforated grid, 1-1/4-inch diameter by 4-inch tail piece; adjustable cast brass"P"trap with 1-1/4-inch inlet, 1-1/4-inch outlet, escutcheon and chrome finish. e. Faucet that delivers not more than 0.5 gpm at 60 psig inlet. f. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Zurn Ind. Inc. 2) American Standard, Inc. 3) Crane Co. 4) Kohler Co. B. Waterlines: 1. Provide CPVC. 2. Fittings: Socket or threaded fittings C. Drain, Waste, and Vent Lines: Provide one of the following materials as noted on piping schedule. 1. Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe per ASTM D3034(SDR 35). D. Water hammer arresters: 1. Stainless steel shell. 2. Hydro-pneumatic cushion of argon gas. 3. Elastomer bellows, stainless steel adapter, and female threaded plug. 4. Size arresters for each fixture supply branch: a. Determined in accordance with the PDI Standard PD1-WH2O1. � - 5. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co., Series 5000. b. Josam Co. 75000. c. Zurn Ind., Inc., Series Z-1700. 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 -3.02 (NOT USED) 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General Requirements: 1. Place inserts and sleeves before concrete is cast. Cut slabs or walls only when approved by ENGINEER. 2. The PLANS do not attempt to show exact details of fixtures, nor integral piping accessories for fixtures and equipment to be installed. 3. Verify measurements and dimensions at the site. 4. Locations shown for piping are approximate and subject to reasonable revision as required and approved at time of installation. 5. Change location of fixtures and equipment only when approved by ENGINEER. 6. Install galvanized sleeves for piping through slabs and walls. Furnish escutcheon plates at finished floors,walls, and siding, unless otherwise detailed. 7. When fixtures require both hot water and cold water supplies, provide the hot water supply to the left of the cold water supply. April 30,2021 15402-Page 4 of 6 Plumbing Job No.60633796 8. Provide offsets around local obstructions. B. Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Install fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's piping diagrams and instructions. 2. Trap and vent each plumbing fixture as required by code. 3. Install fixtures true and plumb with separate stops for each fixture supply. 4. Do not use galvanized nipples between copper water supply and angle stops. 5. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons at pipe penetrations of floors, walls and ceilings. 6. Insulate hot water and drain pipe under lavatories with systems specifically manufactured and approved for handicapped use applications. C. Waterlines: 1. Pitch waterlines to drain at low points. 2. Provide unions to facilitate makeup and removal of valves and sections of the system. 3. Pipe Insulation: Smoothly secure longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips with adhesive. Provide fittings and valves with insulation and finishing cement of same thickness as adjoining piping insulation. 4. Shock Absorbers: Provide waterlines with shock absorbers for water hammer. Include arresters at risers and branches. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Drain, Waste, and Vent Lines: 1. Pitch waste, drain, and vent piping uniformly '/-inch per foot, and in no case less than 1/8-inch per foot. 2. Extend risers 10 inches above roof and counter to roof jack;flash roof with 3-pound lead extending to base of roof jack in all directions; make weatherproof joint. Turn counter flashing into vent pipe. 3. Place cleanouts at end and points of change in direction of waste and drain pipes, at foot of risers, and at offsets or points where indicated or required. Cleanout same size as pipe; close with screw plug. At finished floors or wall, provide brass caulking ferrules with extended brass flange covers having counter-sunk head. E. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts for drain connections to yard piping. Reference plans for additional details. F. Hangers and Supports: 1. Reference Section 15140 "Plumbing Supports and Anchors"for support spacing. 2. Size to accommodate pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Use permanent rustproof anchors for securing to the structure. 4. Support vertical stacks at the base, just below the roof line, and as otherwise necessary to keep in alignment. 5. Support piping to prevent sagging, vibration, or damage from expansion and contraction. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Test during or upon completion of work as specified or required. Provide material and labor required for tests. Notify ENGINEER prior to tests; conduct tests in presence of ENGINEER. Flush lines twice prior to tests. April 30,2021 15402-Page 5 of 6 Plumbing Job No.60633796 B. Test: 1. Test vertical waste vents as soon as set. Plug outlets, fill to top of vertical lines, and hold for 24 hours. Make final test after roughing in is complete and before connecting sewer. 2. Hydrostatically test water piping as specified in Item 510. 3. Repair any leaks or defects and retest. Do not proceed with work until acceptable test completed. C. Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by CONTRACTOR's operations in accordance with AWWA C651 and as specified in Item 510. 3.06 ADJUSTING (NOT USED) 3.07 CLEANING A. At end of construction, clean plumbing fixtures, faucet aerators and drains. Replace fixtures and/or accessories damaged during construction. B. Adjust fixtures and equipment and leave in a working condition. 3.08-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION /4' April 30,2021 15402—Page 6 of 6 Plumbing Job No.60633796 SECTION 15500 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section covers general requirements for mechanical installations of HVAC Systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Related work as called for on PLANS, or in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. B. All work to be provided in compliance with all applicable codes as enforced by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM) ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded, and Seamless ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A501 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY(AWS) AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code-Steel 1.04 DEFINITIONS Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on PLANS and in the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 34, "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: Reference other equipment/material specification sections for specific submittal requirements. In general,submittals are required for, but not limited to,the following items: 1. Basic Materials 2. Ventilation Fans April 30,2021 15500—Page 1 Of 4 General Requirements for HVAC Systems Job No.60633796 3. Louvers 4. Air-Cooled Condensing Units 5. Duct Specialties 6. Duct Fabrication Drawings 7. Fire Dampers 8. Dampers 9. Damper Activators 10. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Reports 11. Control Panels B. Furnish the following in accordance with Specification Section 01300, "Submittals": 1. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of metal fabrications,and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application of joint sealers, access panels, and doors. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. 1.09- 1.11 (NOT USED) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Mechanical Equipment Nameplate Data: Provide all power-operated mechanical equipment with a permanent operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. B. Miscellaneous Metals- Unless specified elsewhere, or noted otherwise on PLANS: 1. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A36. 2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500. 3. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A501. 4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, welded. 5. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, non- corrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications. 6. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required, unless indicated otherwise. C. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber to be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. 2. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32". April 30,2021 15500-Page 2 of 4 General Requirements for HVAC Systems Job No.60633796 2.03-2.04 (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough-In: 1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. 2. Refer to equipment specifications for rough-in requirements. 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements. 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regula- tions, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems,materials,and equipment to conform with shop drawing submittals, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpen- dicular to other building systems and components. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. B. Erection of Metal Supports and Anchorage: 1. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, align- ment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. 2. Field Welding: Comply with AWS"Structural Welding Code". C. Erection of Wood Supports and Anchorage: 1. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, Hailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location,alignment,and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. April 30,2021 15500—Page 3 of 4 General Requirements for HVAC Systems Job No.60633796 2. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. 3. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. D. Electrical Construction: Electrical construction to be in accordance with Division 16, electrical Specifications. 3.04-3.05 (NOT USED) 3.06 ADJUSTING Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment. Final adjustment to be performed by trained personnel. 3.07 CLEANING Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 3.08-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 15500—Page 4 of 4 General Requirements for HVAC Systems Job No.60633796 SECTION 15892 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Furnish and install fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork and accessories as shown on PLANS and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Related work as called for on PLANS or specified in this or other Sections. 1.03 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION(AMCA) AMCA 500 Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE(ANSI) r � ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws(Inch Series) ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts(Inch Series) ANSI B18.22.1 Plain Washers AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure and High-Temperature Service ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property- Durometer Hardness April 30,2021 15892-Page 1 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories ASTM D2310 Standard Classification for Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe ASTM D2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts ASTM D2996 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe ASTM D3982 Standard Specification for Contact Molded"Fiberglass"(Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Ducts ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS(U.S. Dept. of Commerce)(NBS) NBS PS15 Voluntary Product Standards-"Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced - Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment' 1.04- 1.05 (NOT USED) 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to the items specified in Section 01300, "Submittals", furnish the following: a. Duct: 1) Statement of resins and reinforcing proposed for use. 2) Pressure, vacuum, and temperature rating of duct. 3) Dimensions of subassemblies to be shipped. 4) Manufacturer's data and descriptive literature for duct accessories. 5) Drawings showing layout, support, and joint details. 6) Stamped and signed structural engineering design calculations. 7) Name of manufacturer. b. Dampers and Blast Gates: 1) Statement of resins and reinforcing proposed for use. 2) Pressure, vacuum, and temperature rating. 3) Materials of construction. 4) Total weight including operator. 5) Drawings showing overall dimensions and connection size. 6) Type and model. 7) Name of manufacturer. 8) AMCA 500 leakage test results by AMCA-approved laboratory. c. Expansion Joints: 1) Type and model. 2) Materials of construction. 3) Force required for expansion/contraction. 4) Name of manufacturer. d. Supports: 1) Location plan. 2) Type and details. 3) Materials of construction. 4) Stamped and signed structural engineering design calculations. April 30,2021 15892-Page 2 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories 2. Quality Control Submittals: a. Manufacturer's factory inspection report and certification of compliance. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. d. Detailed information on structural, mechanical, electrical, or other modifications necessary to adapt the arrangement or details shown to the ductwork installation. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not ship ducting by nesting small diameter components inside larger diameter components. B. Protect flanged sections by bolting to the flange wooden blinds 2 inches greater than outside diameter of the flange. C. For unflanged components use either rigid plugs inside the ends to prevent deflection or protect with wooden boxes. D. Crate materials whenever practical prior to shipment. E. Firmly fasten and pad components shipped to prevent shifting of the load or flexing of components while in transit. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Service Conditions: Ductwork and accessories to be located in a moist chlorine environment. 2.02 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Resin: 1. Resin to be premium corrosion-resistant, fire-retardant vinyl ester resin such as Ashland Chemical Hetron FR 992, Dow Chemical Derakane 510-A, AOC Vipel K022-BBB or approved equal. 2. FRP fabrications to not exceed a flame spread index of 25 and smoke development rating of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Tunnel Test. 3. Structural wall resin to contain a minimum of 3 percent antimony trioxide to achieve the desired low flame spread index requirement. 4. Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather resistance. 5. Color. Use no dyes, pigments, or colorants, except in the exterior gel coat. Exterior gel coat to be white. April 30,2021 15892-Page 3 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories B. Method of Construction: 1. Inner Surface: Inner surface exposed to the exhaust environment to be a resin- rich liner between 0.01-inch and 0.02-inch thick obtained by using one layer of Nexus veil saturated with the specified resin. Resin content to be a minimum of 90 percent. 2. Interior Layer: Resin-rich interior surface of nominal 100 to 120 mils thick for the entire corrosion barrier, using chopped strand glass mat or chopped glass roving backing the veil. Use no additive in the corrosion barrier. The inner surface and interior layer combined to have a glass content of 27 percent plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Structural Layer: Fabricated using either hand lay up construction per NBS PS-15 or filament wound. Structural layer to not be less than the following thicknesses: Diameter Thickness 6"-20" 1/8" 20"-28" 3/16„ 30"- 58" 1/4" 60"-72" 5/16" 4. Exterior Coat: Resin rich with no exposed raw fibers. For exterior duct, resin coat with ultraviolet(UV)inhibitor. C. Reinforcement: 1. Chopped Strand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 11/2 ounces per square foot, with silane finish and styrene soluble binder. 2. Continuous Roving for Chopper Gun Spray-Up: Type E glass. - - 3. Woven Roving: Type E glass, nominal 24 ounces per square yard, 4 by 5 weave, with silane type finish. 4. Continuous Roving for Filament Winding: Type E glass with a silane type finish. D. Fasteners: 1. Bolts: ASTM A193, Type 316 stainless steel, ANSI B18.2.1, ASA coarse thread series, Grade B 8M heavy hex head. Length such that after installation bolts will project 1/8-inch to 3/8-inch beyond outer face of the nut. 2. Nuts: ASTM A194, Type 316 stainless steel, ANSI B18.2.2, Grade 8M. 3. Washers: ANSI B18.22.1,flat, Type 316 stainless steel. 2.03 DUCTWORK DESIGN A. Design Requirements: 1. Conform to ASTM D2996, ASTM D2310, and NBS Ps-I 5. 2. Duct manufacturer's design for round section, including duct wall thickness and stiffeners. 3. A 1/4-inch laminate to have the following minimum physical properties: Minimum Ultimate Tensile Strength ASTM D638 12,000 psi Minimum Flexural Strength ASTM D790 19,000 psi Minimum Flexural Modulus of Elasticity(tangent) ASTM D790 800,000 psi B. Service Conditions: 1. System Maximum Vacuum: 16 inches of water column. 2. Ambient Temperature: 20°to 104°F. 3. Location: As shown on PLANS. April 30,2021 15892-Page 4 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories 2.04 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fittings and special sections to be reinforced or their shell thickness increased where combined stresses due to internal pressure and bending will exceed maximum stress. Shell thickness or reinforcing to be as required to keep combined stresses below maximum recommended. B. Round duct to have a safety factor of 10 to 1 for pressure and 5 to 1 for vacuum service. C. Provide flange connections, unless butt joints can be installed in strict compliance with this Specification Section. D. Butt joints to be overlaid both inside and outside. Butt joints to only be permitted in duct sections that are accessible for inside overlay. Field butt joints, when needed, to be made at locations at least 12 inches from any increasing or decreasing cross-section of duct. Minimum width of overlay to be as follows: Minimum Total Duct Size Width of Overlay 12"- 16" 10" 18"-20" 14" 24"- 36" 18„ 42"-54" 24" 60"-72" 26" E. Butt joints to be built up in successive layers and to be crevice-free in accordance with ASTM D3982. Width of the first layer to be 4 inches (minimum). Successive layers to increase uniformly to the specified minimum total width of overlay; centered on the joint. Crevices to be filled with resin, leaving a smooth inner surface. F. The inner surface of butt joints to be free of cracks and crazing, with a smooth finish, with an average of not more than two pits per square foot (pits to be less than 1/8-inch diameter and maximum of 1/32-inch deep), and covered with sufficient resin to prevent exposure of inner surface fabric. Minimal waviness is permissible provided surface is smooth and free of pits. G. Flange dimensions (except thickness) and drilling patterns for all flanges that connect to equipment, valves, or dampers are to correspond to ASME/ANSI B16.5, Class 150 or ASME/ANSI B16.1, Class 125. H. Furnish gussets on flanged nozzles from ducts. I. Back Face of Flanges: Spot-faced, flat and parallel to the flange face, and of sufficient diameter to accept an SAE metal washer under the bolt head or nut. J. Duct and Fittings: 1. Round: ASTM D2310; NBS PS-I 5; duct to be manufactured by Spunstrand; Paramount Fabricators; Perry Fiberglass; Red Ewald, Inc.; or approved equal. Rectangular: Contact molded to a thickness as dictated by structural calculation; reinforcing with angles or tees is acceptable to meet required pressure/vacuum service. 2. Joints: Butt wrapped unless otherwise indicated on the PLANS except flanged at connections to expansion joints, butterfly valves, or mechanical equipment to facilitate disassembly. 3. Fittings: Plain end or flanged, manufacturer's standard sizes. Comply with April 30,2021 15892-Page 5 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories NBS Ps-I 5 with a chemical resistance equal to or greater than the duct. 4. Gaskets: Full-face, ASTM D2240, Type A Durometer 50-70; 3/16-inch minimum thickness, Hypalon. 5. Flanges to have a minimum thickness of 3/4-inch. 6. Transitions: Glass-fiber reinforced, with wall stiffness equal to that of duct, designed using the pipe design criteria. Maximum deflection of a side to be less than 1 percent of the width of that side at the design internal pressure. Shop- installed reinforcing such as ribs or angles to be used if required to meet deflection requirements. K. Marking: 1. Identify each duct component with the fabricator's name, resin, minimum thickness, and date of manufacture. 2. Use permanent marking. Seal decals and labels into laminate exterior with resin. 3. For piece marking used for installation, use oil-based paint for easy removal. L. Cure products to at least 90 percent of the minimum Barcol hardness specified by resin manufacturer. 2.05 SUPPORTS A. Supports for FRP ductwork to comply with the appropriate SMACNA Standards for duct installation and shall be located at the maximum spans as shown in ASTM D3982. Except as otherwise indicated, provide vinyl ester FRP fasteners, straps, unistruts, trim and angles for support of ductwork,with anchors of Type 316 stainless steel. B. Supports to transmit loads into the building structural frame. C. CONTRACTOR to submit his proposed support details plan for approval. D. Where specific support details are indicated on the PLANS, CONTRACTOR to provide supports of that type or, where required by calculations, more stringent supports to be provided. E. No attempt has been made to indicate all supports necessary on the PLANS. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide a complete support system meeting all specified requirements. 2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS/FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide where indicated on the PLANS or where not indicated on the PLANS as required for proper duct installation. Expansion joints and flexible connections to be flanged type unless specifically indicated to be plain end (slip-on)type on PLANS. B. Material: Fabric-reinforced Hypalon resistant to UV light; continuous wrapping of material to not be permitted. C. Flanged type expansion joints to be W-design configuration, constructed with compound curve molded corners with arch premolded. Corners on rectangular expansion joints to be completely molded and free of splices. D. Backing Rings: 3/8-inch thick, 2 inches wide, Type 316 stainless steel, ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 25 diameter and drilling. E. Length: 12 inches, flange-to-flange(sizes 24-inch diameter and larger) April 30,2021 15892-Page 6 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories 1. Extension: 1.0 inch. 2. Compression: 4.0 inches. 3. Lateral Offset: 3.0 inches. F. Length: 6 inches,flange-to-flange (sizes 24-inch diameter and smaller) 1. Extension: 0.5 inch. 2. Compression: 2.0 inches. 3. Lateral Offset: 1.0 inch. G. Thickness: 1/4-inch, minimum. H. Flanges to be a minimum of 3/4-inch thick. Slip-on type expansion joints and flexible connections to be sized to fit tightly on the outside diameter of the duct, secured in place by stainless steel worm screw type adjustable clamps to provide gas-tight connection. J. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Holz Rubber Company, Inc.; Style 945(flanged style) 2. Composites USA, Flame Guard-Class 1 Series. 2.07 BUTTERFLY DAMPERS A. Design Requirements: 1. Each damper to be designed for the following conditions: a. Air Temperature Range: 20°to 104°F. b. Differential Pressure: 12 inches WC. B. Materials: 1. Resin to be premium corrosion-resistant, fire-retardant vinyl ester resin such as Ashland Chemical Hetron FR 992, Dow Chemical Derakane 510-A, AOC Vipel K022-BBB or approved equal. 2. FRP fabrications to not exceed a flame spread index of 25 and a smoke development rating of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Tunnel Test. 3. Structural wall resin to contain a minimum of 3 percent antimony trioxide to achieve the designed low flame spread index requirement. 4. Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather resistance. 5. For dampers in exterior locations, resin coat with ultraviolet(UV)inhibitor. 6. Color: Use no dyes, pigments, or colorants, except in the exterior gel coat. Exterior gel coat to be white. C. Construction: 1. Frames: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with vinylester resin as described herein. 2. Blades: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with vinylester resin as described herein; stiffeners as required. a. 36-inch and under: 0.25 inch thick. b. Above 36 inches: 0.50 inch thick. 3. Axles: Continuous fiberglass reinforced plastic rod with vinylester resin as described herein; 6 inches extension beyond frame; stiffeners as required. 4. Bearings: Molded PTFE. 5. Blade stops: Fiberglass reinforced plastic bar with vinylester resin as described herein. 6. Blade seals: Viton. 7. Shaft seals: Viton. April 30,2021 15892-Page 7 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories 8. Flanges: Flanges to comply with PS 15-69 Table 5 at design pressure of 25 psi and to have ANSI B16.1, Class 25 diameter and drilling. 9. Bolts: ASTM A193, Type 316 stainless steel, ANSI B18.2.1, ASA coarse thread series, Grade B 8M heavy hex head. Length such that after installation bolts will project 1/8-inch to 3/8-inch beyond outer face of the nut. 10. Nuts: ASTM A194, Type 316 stainless steel, ANSI B18.2.2, Grade 8M. 11. Washers: ANSI B18.22.1,flat, Type 316 stainless steel. D. Dampers: 1. Butterfly dampers to be of the single-blade type complete with channel-type frame,close-fitting blade, full-length axle, and bearings. 2. Butterfly dampers to have the same inside dimensions as the connecting ductwork. 3. Butterfly dampers to have axles not less than 3/-inch in diameter and to be continuous through the damper. 4. Butterfly dampers used for isolation service to be furnished with a blade seal and shaft seal. 5. Butterfly dampers used for balancing only to be furnished with a full circumference molded in blade stop. 6. Isolation dampers to have a maximum leakage rate of 5.25 cubic feet per minute per square foot of damper area, at a differential pressure of 30 inches WC. AMCA leakage tests to be furnished as part of the submittal. 7. Dampers to be Swartwout Model 914, or equal. E. Lever Actuators: Provide for dampers 24-inch diameter and smaller: 1. Hand quadrant type. 2. Constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Locking quadrant suitable for positioning the blade at intermediate position. 2.08-2.10 (NOT USED) 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Inspections: Inspect fabrications for required construction, intended function and conformance with referenced standards. B. Inspection of products is required prior to shipment unless specifically waived in writing by ENGINEER. C. Notify ENGINEER one week prior to the estimated date of inspection. D. Repairs authorized by ENGINEER to be reinspected before final acceptance unless specifically waived. E. Butterfly Dampers, Blast Gates, and Backdraft Dampers: Prior to shipment, a randomly selected butterfly damper, blast gate, and backdraft damper of each size to be factory tested. Test procedures to be in accordance with AMCA 500 test for leakage and deflection and to be performed by an AMCA approved laboratory. Deflection at damper design pressure to not exceed diameter divided by 180 (maximum deflection = D/180). Leakage rates to not exceed specified values. April 30,2021 15892—Page 8 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify dimensions and conditions in the field. B. Lay out routing in straight lines parallel to building lines. C. Coordinate support locations with layout and joints. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cut, fit, and install in accordance with duct manufacturer's recommendations. B. Ductwork to be free of vibration when in operation. All necessary vibration isolation devices to be provided and installed by CONTRACTOR. C. Install plumb and straight and in proper alignment. D. All necessary provisions to be taken to provide for adequate expansion and contraction of ductwork and fittings. E. Antiseize thread compound to be applied to all nuts and bolts. F. Flange bolts to be tightened to slightly compress gaskets without disturbing the flanges in order to make a good seal. A flat washer to be installed under each nut and bolt head. G. Proper alignment and grade of ductwork to be maintained by use of laser beam equipment or surveying instruments. Surveying instruments to be utilized for verifying laser equipment accuracy due to thermal deflection from differences between the ground temperature and the air temperature within the pipe. H. Field Joints: 1. Provide material in kit form;one kit for one joint. 2. Make joints only when ambient temperature is above 55°F and below 100°F. 3. Prior to joining, ends shall be ground smooth. All dust and debris must be fully removed. Ends shall be resin-coated to prevent corrosion, in pipe 24" diameter and above an interior corrosion wrap is required. The joint shall be of equal strength as the pipe. A butt and wrap sequence and thickness chart shall be shown on the fabrication drawings. The laminate sequence for each size duct shall be supported be a separate section in the design calculations. 4. Field butt joints to be made by the duct manufacturer or by employees of the CONTRACTOR who have been trained and certified by duct manufacturer. Written certification to be submitted by duct manufacturer indicating individuals employed by the CONTRACTOR who have satisfactorily completed all training and instruction. I. Dampers: Unless otherwise necessary for proper operation of damper, axles to be installed in the horizontal position. 3.03 CLEANING A. Ductwork to be blown clean using the system fans; purged continuously for not less than 48 hours at a flow rate not less than the design flow rate. If required, the system fan to April 30,2021 15892—Page 9 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories be throttled on the inlet side to prevent motor overload. A temporary screen to be installed on the system fan inlet to protect the fan from entering debris. B. Dampers to be smooth, clean, and free from blisters and dirt when installed. 3.04 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. All finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and sufficient supports, anchoring, interference, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. B. All ductwork to be field tested after installation and before concealment or burying, with an air test to 150 percent of the maximum working pressure for a period of 4 hours. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials and devices at no extra cost to the OWNER. 1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the test procedures. 2. Any leaks to be corrected and the pipe retested until no further leaks appear. 3.05-3.10 (NOT USED) 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION April 30,2021 15892—Page 10 of 10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic(FRP) Job No.60633796 Ductwork and Accessories SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL WORK—GENERAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide complete and operational systems for both normal and standby electric power systems, normal and emergency lighting systems, grounding systems and other specified systems, including the installation and wiring of miscellaneous equipment and devices. Perform all work and testing as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. 1. Provide conduit, wiring and connections for power, control, lighting, instrumentation and alarms for equipment furnished by others unless otherwise specified and indicated. 2. Provide temporary circuits, overcurrent devices, conduit and wiring, and other equipment required during construction and change-over from existing to proposed electric system. Perform work at the convenience of the Owner. 3. Install all raceways and equipment to meet the seismic design criteria. Raceways supports and equipment anchoring shall be provided as specified in the Division 16 sections which form a part of the Contract Documents. 4. Disconnecting, removing, and relocating existing electrical equipment is a part of this Contract and this Section. Make equipment scheduled for removal free of shock hazard. 5. Provide electrical relocation work associated with the relocation of equipment for the existing and new facilities, including disconnecting all existing wiring and conduits and providing new wiring and conduit to the relocated equipment. Make equipment scheduled for relocation free of electrical shock hazard. 6. The equipment enclosure classification of the plant areas are indicated on the drawings. Provide all equipment, devices and material meeting the requirements for these area classifications unless otherwise noted or specified. 7. Review the electrical underground system and the civil yard piping. Install the electrical underground system in a manner that avoids conflicts with manholes, catch basins, etc. provided under other Divisions of the specifications 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in the building structures during the progress of construction to allow for the electrical installation. June 1,2021 16050-Page 1 Of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 C. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate and integrate the installation of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. E. Coordinate the installation of large equipment prior to closing in the building. F. Sequencing and scheduling work at existing facilities: 1. Remove and demolish equipment and materials in such a sequence that the existing and proposed plant will function properly with no disruption of power. Continuous service is required on all circuits and outlets affected by the work detailed in the contract, except where the Owner will permit an outage for a specific time. Obtain Owner's consent before removing any circuit from continuous service. 2. Coordinate electrical power outages to the electrical systems and equipment with the Owner. Where duration of proposed outage cannot be allowed by the Owner, phase the work to allow the system or equipment to be re-connected to the electrical power system within the time frame allowed by the Owner or provide temporary power connections as required to maintain service to the systems or equipment. The temporary power can be from a generator or another part of the facility not affected by the outage provided there is sufficient spare capacity. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1 and as specified. B. Install electrical work in conformance with latest rules and requirements of National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 70 (National Electrical Code) and in accordance with requirements of State and Local Codes. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall have been engaged in work of a similar nature to this contract for the past 5 years. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall have a minimum of five projects of equal or greater size with the type of equipment specified under this project. 1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1: 1. The following defines a minimum for all Division 16 shop drawing and data submittals: a. Submit shop drawings delineated by specification number with all information for one piece of equipment provided as one package. b. Partial submittals will be returned without action. c. Submit bills of material: Include a numbered list of all components, with manufacturer's name, catalog number, rating, and other identification. Place item number or similar identification on all other drawings where item appears. June 1,2021 16050—Page 2 of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 d. Submittal shall include: (1) Manufacturer's drawings (2) Panel layout (3) Equipment layout (4) Schematic diagram (5) One line diagram (6) Control sequence diagrams (7) Interconnection diagrams (8) Wiring diagrams (9) Catalog data e. Submit only completed drawings showing all local and remote devices associated with each item. f. Mark shop drawings and data submitted showing only items applicable to specific contract. g. Where additions and modifications are made to existing equipment, provide drawings which include both retained existing equipment and new work. h. Submit time-current characteristic curves for all submitted protection devices such as circuit breakers and fuses. i. Submit other documentary or descriptive information as required for each assembly to demonstrate compliance with the applicable contract documents. 2. Shop drawings and data are required for the following list: a. Starting Equipment Data List -Submit blank list initially to verify acceptable format. Submit final list at completion of the project. b. Harmonic Analysis c. Conduit and Fittings d. Bus Ducts and Supports e. Wire and Cable f. Ladder Type Cable Tray and Fittings g. Wiring Devices h. Transformers i. Manholes, Handholes, and Associated Equipment and Devices June 1,2021 16050—Page 3 of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 j. Grounding Equipment and Devices k. Panelboards I. Lighting Fixtures and Accessories m. Lightning Protection System n. Fire Alarm System o. Control Stations p. Enclosures q. Control Panels r. Safety Switches s. 600 Volt Motor Control Centers and Motor Controls t. Field Acceptance Test Reports u. Record Drawings 3. Submit instruction manuals for installation, operation, and maintenance of equipment, and parts list for equipment listed below. Specifically mark standard publications forming a part of this contract. Cross out, blank out, or otherwise delete non-applicable items. Submittals which do not clearly indicate items and features provided shall be rejected. a. Lightning Protection System b. Fire Alarm System c. 600 Volt Motor Control Centers 1.07 NAMEPLATES AND LABELING: A. Provide nameplates and labels as specified in Section 16075. 1.08 INTERFERENCE AND ERRONEOUS LOCATIONS: A. Locations of electrical equipment, devices, outlets, and similar items, as indicated, are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined during construction. B. Verify in field, all data and final locations of work installed under other sections of specifications, required for placing of electrical work. C. In case of interference with other work or erroneous locations with respect to equipment or structures, furnish all labor and materials to complete the work. 1.09 SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to the requirements indicated on the structural drawings and as specified in Division 1 and in Division 16. June 1,2021 16050—Page 4 of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 B. All raceways and equipment installed under Division 16 shall use earthquake resistant supporting systems as specifically required in each applicable section. 1.10 APPROVAL AND MARKING EQUIPMENT: A. Insure that devices and materials are listed and/or labeled by UL, wherever standards have been established by that organization. Where a UL listing is not available for equipment, submit certified test reports of a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), approved by the local inspecting authority, indicating that equipment is in conformance with local code requirements or any other applicable requirements. Tests and inspections for approval of equipment shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. B. Clearly mark equipment, devices and material with name or trademark of manufacturer and rating in volts and amperes and other pertinent information on a nameplate. 1.11 ELECTRIC SERVICE: A. Electrical power system for the facility operates at 480/277 volt, 3-phase, 4 wire, 60 Hertz. B. Earth and rock excavation, backfill, concrete masonry, concrete reinforcement, and construction joints required for electrical work is included under this section and shall conform to requirements specified under applicable sections of Contract for General Construction. 1.12 EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Certain items of control equipment and other equipment are indicated on electrical drawings for connection, but are specified in other sections pertaining to plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning, mechanical process, instrumentation, etc. Such items are not furnished as part of electrical work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT: A. Carefully dismantle and salvage electrical equipment, switches, fixtures, conduits, cables,wiring, boxes, as necessary to carry out proposed changes. Rehabilitate and relocate items of equipment as required and as indicated or specified. 1. Deliver material and equipment not indicated for reuse to Owner for his disposal. B. Remove from site and dispose of material and equipment not indicated for reuse. 3.02 WORK IN EXISTING STRUCTURES: A. In general, any or all existing electrical equipment and services are to remain in operation and shall not be disturbed unless otherwise noted in these Specifications and/or on the drawings or as required for the proper execution of the work. June 1,2021 16050—Page 5 Of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 B. In each area of the work, disconnect and carefully remove the existing electrical equipment and devices so noted. With the exception of items indicated as having to be re-used, all such existing equipment and devices shall be disposed of as specified herein. If not required by the Owner, remove them from the premises and site. All existing electrical equipment and devices indicated as not removed or abandoned are to be maintained in operation and any circuits disturbed by the construction shall be restored. C. Maintain existing electrical services and systems to and in the buildings throughout the project and all "down-time" shall be scheduled at least two weeks in advance with the permission of the CM and such scheduling shall be rigidly adhered to. 3.03 DEMOLITION: A. Survey the existing electrical systems and equipment identified for removal with representatives from the other trades prior to performing any demolition work. Identify all conduit and equipment to be removed with tags or paint. B. Where a piece of equipment is to be removed all associated ancillary components(e.g. solenoid valves, pressure switches, etc)and associated wiring and conduit shall also be removed. C. Equipment, building or structures scheduled for complete demolition shall be made safe from electrical shock hazard prior to demolition. Disconnect all electrical power, communications, alarm and signal system. D. Equipment scheduled to be turned over to the Owner shall be carefully disconnected, removed and delivered to the Owner where indicated. Provide labor, hoisting and transportation of the equipment. All other miscellaneous electrical materials, devices, etc., associated with the r equipment being turned over shall be demolished and removed from the site. E. Remove electrical work associated with equipment scheduled for demolition except those portions to remain or be reused. F. Unless otherwise specifically noted, remove unused exposed conduit and support systems back to point of concealment including abandoned circuit above accessible ceiling finishes. Removed unused wiring back to source(or nearest point of usage). G. Disconnect abandoned outlets and removed devices. Removed abandoned outlets if conduit services them is abandoned or being removed. Provide blank covers for abandoned outlets which are not removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned electrical equipment unless otherwise indicated or specified. I. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories. J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. K. Where electrical systems pass through the demolition areas to serve other portions of the premises, they shall remain or be suitably relocated and the system restored to normal operation. L. The electrical and process equipment to be removed or relocated under this contract has been identified on the Drawings. June 1,2021 16050—Page 6 Of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 M. Trace out existing wiring that is to be relocated, or removed and perform the relocation or removed work as required for a complete operating and safe system. N. Remove exposed conduits, wireways, outlet boxes, pull boxes and hangers made obsolete by the alterations, unless specifically designated to remain. Patch surfaces and provide blank covers for abandoned outlets which are removed. O. All equipment, materials, controls, motor starters, branch and feeder breakers, panelboards, transformers, wiring, raceways, etc. furnished and installed to the temporarily keep circuits energized shall be removed when the permanent installation is fully operational. 3.04 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: A. Store equipment in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. B. Protect electrical equipment from the weather, especially from water dripping or splashing upon it, at all times during shipment, storage, and construction. C. Do not store equipment outdoors. D. Where equipment is installed or stored in moist areas, or unheated buildings, provide acceptable means to prevent moisture damage. Provide uniformly distributed source of heat in electrical equipment to prevent condensation and damage to electrical insulation systems. 3.05 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED EQUIPMENT: A. Damaged equipment shall not be used. Equipment damaged in shipment, storage, installation or through other means shall be replaced without additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment showing signs of water damage shall be rejected regardless of dielectric test results. C. All electrical equipment is considered "in storage" regardless of location until first energized. Manufacturer's recommendations for storage precautions, conditions and care shall be followed. 3.06 STARTING EQUIPMENT DATA LIST: A. Obtain data from the equipment supplier shop drawing submittals or equipment nameplates, and prepare a complete tabulation of all motors over 1/3 hp, electric heaters over 3 kW, and starting equipment for both, to be furnished on the project. 1. Include in tabulation firm the following information: a. Name and identification of equipment. b. Manufacturer. c. Horsepower or kilowatt rating. d. Voltage. e. Phase. f. Speed. June 1,2021 16050—Page 7 of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 g. Full load current. h. Locked rotor current or code letter. i. Type of enclosure(open drip-proof, totally enclosed,fan cooled, etc.). j. NEMA size of starter or contactor. k. Overload heater size. I. Type of starter(full-voltage, reduced-voltage, autotransformer, etc.). m. Breaker trip setting or fuse size. n. Voltage of starter operating coil. o. If starter is at a motor control center, list motor control center number. 2. Final acceptance of the electrical system is contingent upon submittal of the complete motor and electric heater tabulation. 3. Arrange tabulation in groups by MCC or building location. 4. Furnish six copies of the tabulation to the CM when a submission is made. 3.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: rt � A. Drawings and specifications are typical of work to be done and of the arrangement desired. Provide accessories and appurtenances which the CM deems functionally necessary for a complete installation, whether or not explicitly indicated or described. 3.08 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: A. The Contractor shall maintain a master set of as-built drawings showing the changes and deviations from the contract drawings. B. A minimum of 30 days prior to application for Final Payment, submit two sets of drawings for approval that are marked to show the as-installed equipment, devices, raceway locations and wiring. The markings on the drawings are to be neat, clean and legible. 3.09 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16050—Page 8 of 8 Electrical Work-General Job No.60633796 SECTION 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide supports from building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A123/A123M: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. A653/A653M: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. A924/A924M: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. E119: Standard Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 6. E814: Standard Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. B. FM Global (FM): 1. Approval Guide,A Guide to Equipment, Materials&Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). D. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL):Applicable listings. 1. FRD: Fire Resistance Directory. 2. 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. 723: Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. 1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. June 1,2021 16070—Page 1 of 5 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data in accordance with the requirements of Division 16. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Steel or malleable iron. 2.02 COATINGS: A. Protect steel and malleable iron supports, support hardware, and fasteners with zinc coating. B. Provide products for use outdoors. C. Use PVC coating where indicated on Drawings. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows: 1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for intended service. 4. Nuts, Washers, and Bolts: Stainless steel. C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps,and cap screws. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. E. U-Channel Systems: Channels, with 9/16 inch (14 mm) diameter holes, at minimum of 8 inch (200 mm) on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of same manufacture. 2.04 U-CHANNEL SYSTEMS: A. Manufacturers, Stainless Steel/Galvanized Steel Channel. 1. Unistrut Corp. 2. Power-Strut. June 1,2021 16070—Page 2 of 5 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 3. B-Line Systems, Inc. B. Manufacturers, Fiberglass Channel. 1. Omnistrut, Champion Fiberglass. 2. Durostrut, Enduro Composite Systems. 3. Struttech, Entrum Industries. C. Provide Type 316 stainless steel channel or fiberglass channel with corresponding accessories. D. Channels, with 9/16 inch (14 mm) diameter holes, at minimum of 8 inch (200 mm) on center, in top surface. E. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of same manufacture. F. Provide hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication for steel channel and accessories. G. Provide channel of the proper material to match equipment classifications. 2.05 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Shop or field fabricate supports or manufacture supports assembled from U-channel components. B. Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves using one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3 inch (75 mm)and smaller. 20 gage(0.9 mm). b. 4 inch (100 mm)to 6 inch(150 mm): 16 gage(1.5 mm). c. Over 6 inch (150 mm): 14 gage(1.9 mm). 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe. 2.06 FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SEALERS: A. Manufacturers: 1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam,"Dow Corning Corp. 2. "Pensil 851,"General Electric Co. June 1,2021 16070—Page 3 of 5 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 B. Two part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through penetration fire stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors. C. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with NEC and following requirements: 1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by safety factor of at least 4. Where this determination results in safety allowance of less than 200 lbs (890 N), provide additional strength until there is minimum of 200 lbs (890 N) safety allowance in strength of each support. 3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. 4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch (6 mm) diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. 6. In vertical runs, arrange support so load produced by weight of raceway and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. E. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated wall or floor construction. F. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs below grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. G. Conduit extending through roof shall pass through ceiling box at roof line. June 1,2021 16070—Page 4 of 5 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 1. Provide 14 gage (1.9 mm) minimum copper box complete with watertight soldered seams and flanged to serve as pitch pocket for each conduit. 2. Install conduit and pitch pocket in advance of roofing work. H. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with following: 1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut in concrete shall not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. 3. Load applied to any fastener shall not exceed 25 percent of proof test load. Use vibration and shock resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. 3.02 CHANNELS: A. Support electrical components as required to produce same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. B. Install metal U-channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes,junction boxes,transformers, and other devices. C. Install Type 316 stainless steel for mounting of electrical equipment in outdoor areas and on below grade, outside building and structure walls. D. Install galvanized steel channels for interior building mounting of electrical equipment except for those locations listed above and unless otherwise indicated. E. Install fiberglass channel in chemical areas with NEMA 4X enclosures. 3.03 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16070—Page 5 of 5 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. A13.1: Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE): 1. ANSI/IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. 1. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data in accordance with the requirements of Division 16. B. Product Data: C. Submit for each type of product specified. D. Samples: Submit for each color, lettering style, and or graphic representation required for identification materials; samples of labels and signs. E. Miscellaneous: Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1. June 1,2021 16075—Page 1 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS: A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ASME A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Conform to ASME A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size. 1. Color: Black legend on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage. D. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self adhesive vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with clear, wear and chemical resistant coating. E. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color coded, acrylic bands sized to suit diameter of line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when placed in position. F. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inch wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 to 51 mm wide). ✓ G. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape with following features: 1. Size: Not less than 6 inch wide by 4 mils thick(152 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. H. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. I. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014 inch (0.4 mm) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. J. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. K. Aluminum Faced Card Stock Tags: Wear resistant, 18 point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) thick, laminated with moisture resistant acrylic adhesive, and punched for fastener. Preprinted legends suit each application. L. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2 by 2 inch (51 by 51 mm)by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). June 1,2021 16075-Page 2 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 M. Comply with IEEE C2. 2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS: A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ASME A13.1, NFPA 70,or as specified elsewhere. B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches(129 sq cm), 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face. 2. Punched for mechanical fasteners. C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior, Metal Backed, Butyrate Signs: Wear resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 inch (1 mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to application. 1/4-inch(6.4 mm)grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts,flat washers and lock washers. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self extinguishing, 1 piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with following features: 1. Minimum Width: 3/16-inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (222 N)minimum. 3. Temperature Range: -40 to 185 degrees F(-40 to 85 degrees C). 4. Color: As indicated where used for color coding. B. Paint: Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and or designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. June 1,2021 16075—Page 3 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 D. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. E. Self Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. F. Identify feeders over 600 Volt with "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2 inch (51 mm) high, stenciled with paint at 10 feet (3 m) intervals over continuous, painted orange background. Identify following: 1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inch (305 mm) of basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall. 3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts, exposed in building, or concealed above suspended ceilings. 4. Surface of exposed conduits. G. Install painted identification as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime Surfaces: For galvanized metal, use single component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use heavy duty, acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear, alkali resistant, alkyd binder type sealer. 3. Apply 1 intermediate and 1 finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. 4. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Identify Raceways and Exposed Cables of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed and accessible raceways of systems listed below for identification. 1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap around, colored plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or combination of both. Make each color band 2 inch (51 mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2 color markings in contact, side by side. a. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. b. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. c. Security System: Blue and yellow. d. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. e. Telecommunications System: Green and yellow. Install Caution Signs for Enclosures Over 600 Volt: Use pressure sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange field. Install on exterior of door or cover. J. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Label externally as follows: June 1,2021 16075-Page 4 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure sensitive, self adhesive plastic label on cover. 2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, water proof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. K. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inch (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 inch (400 mm), use single line marker. 1. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. L. Color Code Conductors: Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout secondary electrical system. 1. Field applied, color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger than 10 AWG. a. Colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for distance of 6 inch (150 mm)from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last 2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1 inch (25 mm) wide tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inch (76 mm) from terminal and spaced 3 inch (76 mm) apart. Apply with special tool or pliers, tighten to snug fit, and cut off excess length. 2. 208/120 Volt System: As follows: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green. 3. 480/277 Volt-System: As follows: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Yellow. c. Phase C: Purple. d. Neutral: Grey. e. Ground: Green. June 1,2021 16075-Page 5 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 M. Power Circuit Identification: Use metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms. 1. Legend: 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations. 2. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties;fasten bands using integral ears. N. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. 3. Multiple Control and Communications Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use consistent system of tags, color coding, or cable marking tape. O. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved, plastic laminated instruction signs with accepted legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. 2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch (9 mm) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and or emergency operations. P. Install identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text with 1/2-inch (13 mm)high lettering on 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use lettering 2 inch (51 mm) high. Use black lettering on white field. Apply labels for each unit of following categories of equipment. a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Electrical substations. e. Motor control centers. f. Motor starters. June 1,2021 16075—Page 6 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 g. Push button stations. h. Power transfer equipment. i. Contactors. j. Remote controlled switches. k. Dimmers. I. Control devices. m. Transformers. n. Inverters. o. Rectifiers. p. Frequency converters. q. Battery racks. r. Power generating units. s. Telephone switching equipment. t. Clock/program master equipment. u. Call system master station. v. TV/audio monitoring master station. w. Fire alarm master station or control panel. x. Security monitoring master station or control panel. 2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, push buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. 3.02 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16075—Page 7 of 7 Electrical Identification Job No.60633796 %-`-� THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 16110 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide complete raceway systems, with matching accessories, fittings, boxes, and other hardware as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. When non-metallic raceway systems are specified, provide green insulated grounding conductor sized per National Electrical Code(NEC)requirements. B. All raceway runs are indicated diagrammatically to outline general routing of raceway. Unless specifically identified for installation in concrete walls or slabs, raceways shall be run exposed with raceway supporting systems. Avoid interfering with pipes, ducts, structural members, or other equipment. Any installation deviations from the contract requirements shall be corrected at no cost to Owner. C. Provide raceway systems in accordance with the following: 1. In NEMA 12 or NEMA 1 areas, use galvanized rigid steel raceway systems. 2. In NEMA 4 areas, and where subject to wetting or wash down, use galvanized rigid steel raceway systems. 3. In exterior building applications, use galvanized rigid steel raceway systems. 4. In chemical areas and those areas designated NEMA 4X, use PVC coated rigid steel raceway systems. 5. Inside concrete slabs or walls, use PVC Schedule 80 raceway systems. D. All raceway systems shall be installed in accordance with the criteria described in this section. Any proposed deviations from these requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing for review and disposition. 1. Use Type 316 stainless steel support systems for exterior application and in NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X areas. 2. Use fiberglass reinforced support systems in NEMA 4X and chemical areas. 3. All NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 areas shall use hot dipped galvanized steel support systems. E. Aluminum conduit and boxes are not acceptable products. F. All raceways shall be supported to NEC requirements and to meet all applicable seismic criteria. Raceways 2 inch (50 mm) outside diameter or greater shall be independently supported in a manner to meet the criteria to resist failure during earthquake events. All hardware supports shall be specifically designed for the magnitude of the earthquake event as defined in Division 16. June 1,2021 16110-Page 1 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 1.02 REFERENCES: B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. RN-1: Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2. TC-2: Electrical Plastic Tubing(EPT)and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-80) 3. TC-3: Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). D. Occupational Safety& Health Act(OSHA). 1. Regulation 1910.7 E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 1: Electrical Flexible Metal Conduit 2. 6: Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit 3. 94: UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 4. 360: Electrical Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel 5. 651: Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit 6. 886: Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Locations, Class 1, Groups A, B, C, and D and Class 11, Groups E, F, and G 7. 1242: Intermediate Metal Conduit 8. 1684: UL Standard for Safety Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00: B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 10. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 43 00 and as specified. B. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeledby UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term"NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. June 1,2021 16110-Page 2 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. Regulatory requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association(NFPA)70. 1.05 SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to the requirements specified in Division 1. B. It shall be the responsibility of manufacturer and supplier along with the Electrical Contractor to conform to the seismic design requirements for this project and for the work of this specification section. C. Install supports for raceway systems greater than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter to meet the seismic requirements indicated and specified. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Rigid Metal Conduit and polyvinyichioride-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Triangle/PWC, Inc. 2. Perma-Cote Industries. 3. Republic Steel Corporation. 4. Robroy Industries. 5. Allied Tube and Conduit. B. Polyvinylchloride(PVC) Conduit: 1. Triangle/PWC, Inc. 2. Robroy Industries. 3. Carlon Electrical Sciences, Inc. C. Flexible Conduit: 1. American Flexible Conduit Company. 2. Anamet, Inc. 3. Electri-Flex Company. 4. International Metal Hose Company. D. Boxes and Fittings: June 1,2021 16110-Page 3 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 1. O.Z./Gedney Company. 2. Crouse-Hinds Electrical Construction Materials. 3. Appleton Electric Company. E. Support Systems: 1. Michigan Hanger Co., (0-Strut). 2. Thomas&Betts(Superstrut). 3. Unistrut Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Rigid Metal Conduit: 1. Provide galvanized rigid metal conduit, each with a coupling on one end and thread protector on other end. 2. Hot-dip galvanize rigid steel conduit over entire length, along interior and exterior surfaces, including threads. Conduit shall conform to UL 6. B. Flexible-Metal Conduit: 1. Provide flexible-metal conduit for use in dry areas and match fittings, size, and material to rigid conduit to which it is connected. Flexible-metal conduit shall conform to UL 1. 2. Provide liquid-tight flexible-metal conduit for use in damp areas consisting of flexible-metal conduit, with liquid-tight, sunlight-resistant jacket extruded over the conduit. Provide stainless steel, braided flexible conduit in NEMA 4X, corrosive areas. On larger than 1- 1/4 inch (30 mm), furnish separate external ground wire. Liquid-Tight flexible-metal conduit shall conform to UL 360. C. Polyvinylchloride(PVC)Conduit: 1. Provide PVC conduit Schedule 80 conforming to NEMA Standard TC-2 and UL-651. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3 as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. D. Polyvinylchloride-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Provide polyvinylchioride-coated (PVC-Coated), rigid steel conduit conforming to NEMA Standard RN-1 consisting of hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit, as specified hereinbefore, with a polyvinylchloride jacket bonded to the outside of all conduit surfaces with a nominal thickness of 40 mils meeting the requirements of NEMA RN-1, 3.1. The adhesive strength of the bonding to equal or exceed tensile strength of the coating. Provide couplings and fittings for this conduit conforming to the requirements of NEMA RN-1, 3.5. 2. A two-part urethane coating shall be applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings at a two mil thickness. The interior coating shall be flexible to allow field bending without cracking or flaking. June 1,2021 16110-Page 4 Of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 E. Boxes: 1. In NEMA and NEMA 12 areas, provide standard, sheet-metal, outlet and junction boxes constructed of code-gauge, galvanized sheet steel. Size each box as required by the NEC. 2. Provide boxes containing fixture studs for hanging fixtures. Use concrete-tight boxes for installation in concrete. Do not use shallow boxes unless building construction is such that it is impossible to use standard-depth boxes. 3. Provide outlet boxes and fittings for hazardous locations conforming to UL 886 for class, group, and division indicated. 4. Provide cast boxes with covers or device plates suitable for the area classification. Use cover screws of stainless steel or high brass for iron boxes. 5. Provide polyvinylchloride boxes for use as junction boxes and provide high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes for use as device boxes, pull boxes, and terminal boxes for use with polyvinylchloride conduit. Size each box as required by the NEC. 6. Provide pull boxes below motor control center installations (20 inches (500 mm) by 20 inches (500 mm) by 12 inches (300 mm)deep minimum.) Boxes of dimensions 10 inches (250 mm) by 10 inches (250 mm) by 6 inches (150 mm) deep and larger shall be hung from ceilings constructed of angle or channel frames, and shall be made of sheet metal with welded joints. All welds shall be ground smooth. Provide neoprene gaskets for complete sealing. Sectionalize covers longer than 36 inch (900 mm)to facilitate handling and gasket sectionalized covers where covers meet, using angle iron or channel cross members at the joint. Sheet metal shall be not less than No. 12-gage (0.1046 mm) galvanized sheet steel. Fabricate interior angles and supports of galvanized steel. Provide each box with a grounding lug for connection to the nearest ground bus. Current capacity of ground lug shall be at least that required by the NEC for the largest feeder entering the equipment. 7. Construct telephone cabinets of 14 gage (0.0747) galvanized steel with a hinged, lockable, flush door and handle mechanism. Provide backboard of 3/4-inch (20 mm) x 4 feet(1.2 m)x 8 feet(2.4 m) exterior grade plywood behind the cabinet. Cabinet sizes and locations shall be as indicated on the drawings and required by the telephone company. Furnish and install specific telephone cabinet termination materials as directed by the telephone company. F. Fittings: 1. Provide cast-iron fittings of malleable iron or a mixture of gray iron and cast steel. 2. Provide suitable expansion fittings where conduits cross expansion joints. Equip these fittings with grounding straps,clamps, and copper bonding jumpers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Perform all work in accordance with the NEC. June 1,2021 16110—Page 5 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 B. Use no conduit less than 3/4-inch(20 mm)in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS: A. For conduits and other raceways installed in open areas, not adjacent to and secured to structural elements, and 2 inch (50 mm) outside diameter or greater, support such raceways using seismic restraints rated for the applicable project earthquake criteria. B. Methods of Restraining Raceways: 1. Utilize threaded rod with rod stiffeners and transverse channel braces at approximately 45 degrees angle, at 15 feet(4.5 m)on center, maximum, and on one side of rod support. 2. Utilize longitudinal bracing with channel braces at 30 feet(9.1 m)on center, maximum. 3. Strap raceways directly to transverse channel braces, using pipe strap with both ends of strap bolted into the channel brace. 4. Do not rigidly brace raceways to different parts of a building that may respond differently during an earthquake. Seismic restraints shall not limit expansion and contraction of the raceway support system. 5. Provide flexible connections for conduits 2 inch (50 mm) outside diameter or greater than when terminating to fixed equipment to prevent loss of raceway integrity in the event of an earthquake. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS: A. Install expansion fittings wherever conduits cross structural expansion joints. Keep the fittings in line with conduit, and install with regard to temperature so that full working range of expansion is available. B. Do not install fittings to replace elbows and pull boxes, unless space or other problems make use of fittings necessary. Use oversize fittings whenever large cable is installed, in order to maintain proper bending radius. C. Terminate ends of all floor conduits installed for future use with couplings and readily removable plugs set flush with finished floor surface. Cap spare wall conduits at wall where they enter building. D. Equip ends of all conduits with conduit fittings. Fit conduits terminating at motor control center or power distribution equipment, or in box above or below, with grounding type bushings, or solidly ground by locknuts or other acceptable fittings. Connect each grounding bushing to ground bus by a bare or green-covered copper wire. Do not use ground wire smaller than 12 AWG. Install ground wire larger than 12 AWG when required by NEC. Where conduits terminate in unprotected areas or where bonding is required over expansion joint, flexible conduit or equivalent; use ground wires 6 AWG. copper or larger. E. Terminate conduits entering gasketed sheet-metal boxes or gasketed sheet-metal equipment enclosures with gasketed hubs. June 1,2021 16110-Page 6 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 F. Terminate conduits entering nongasketed sheet-metal boxes or enclosures with double locknuts and insulated bushings, or with acceptable equivalent. G. Join raceways with fittings listed for the purpose. Make joints tight. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. 2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. 3. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS: A. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to walls and ceiling beams. Make all changes in directions with listed bends, elbows, and pull boxes. Space parallel runs uniformly throughout. Secure in place by hangers and fasteners. Ground raceways by connection to properly grounded enclosures, bonding, or other means, to obtain permanent low resistance path to ground throughout installation. Ensure that raceway sections in single run and in parallel runs are of same type and finish. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide minimum 7 feet(2 m) headroom. B. Support raceways concealed above suspended ceilings from slab above ceiling in same manner as exposed raceways. Do not support raceways from ceiling supports. C. Provide cast-in-place inserts in concrete to support all runs, unless otherwise permitted. Use stainless steel sleeve type concrete anchors for installing boxes, and conduit supports. Provide Type 316 stainless steel nut, bolts, and washers, for use with concrete anchors. D. Support conduits by hangers or pipe straps spaced according to NEC, but in no case more than 10 feet(3 m)on centers. E. Provide hot-dipped galvanized supports for galvanized conduit. F. When specified on the Contract Drawings, install conduits in slabs as close to middle of concrete slabs as practicable without disturbing reinforcement. Do not use conduit with outside diameter exceeding one-third of slab thickness. Do not place conduits closer than three diameters on centers, except at cabinet locations where slab thickness is increased as permitted by Engineer. G. Where conduits are concealed in bottom floor slab, place in concrete slab and not in fill below slab. Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 4 inches(100 mm)of concrete cover. 1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods and to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. June 1,2021 16110-Page 7 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (25 mm) trade size parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. H. Stub-Up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit. Flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, terminate ends of floor conduits installed for future use with couplings and readily removable plugs 8 inch (250 mm) above finished floor surface. Cap spare wall conduits at wall entrance to building. I. Provide sleeves passing through exterior walls and slabs which are wall entrance seals of watertight construction. For new construction, furnish watertight seal between slab and sleeve, and between sleeve and conduit or cable similar to O.Z./Gedney Type "FSK". For existing construction, furnish watertight seal for use in core bit drilled holes that provides seal between concrete and conduit or cable similar to O.Z./Gedney Type "CSM1". Use wall-entrance seals of malleable iron with watertight sealing gland which may be tightened any time after installation. J. Do not use dissimilar metals in conjunction with each other. Use an insulation between adjoining surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. Maintain electrical continuity of system. Use bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other acceptable materials as insulation. K. Install fittings to match raceway being used. L. Install expansion fittings wherever conduits cross structural expansion joints at connections between buildings. Keep fittings in line with conduit, and install with regard to temperature so that full working range of expansion is available. M. Where conduits pass through firewalls, grout hole around the conduit to the full depth of the material penetrated. N. Provide separate raceways for all low voltage instrumentation raceways (50 volts and below) from control and power raceways. O. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely, and install the lockouts with dished part against the box; use two lockouts, one inside and one outside the box. P. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. Q. Install pull wires in all empty raceways. Use 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 lb (890 N) tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches (300 mm)of slack at each end of the pull wire. R. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. S. Complete raceway installation before beginning conductor installation. T. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. June 1,2021 16110—Page 8 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 U. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. V. Where metal conduits rise through floor slabs in wet areas, provide PVC Coated Rigid conduits for a distance of 6 inches(150 mm)above and below slab grade. 3.05 BENDS: A. Make all bends carefully to prevent distortion of circular cross section. Field bend conduit shall have an inside radius of not less than nine diameters. B. Where bends of less than nine diameters are necessary, use standard factory elbows. Size conduit to permit cable-bending radius within the factory elbow of at least eight times cable diameter. C. Allow no conduit greater than 50 feet (15.2 meters) to have more than two 90 degree bends or equivalent thereof between pulling points. For conduits less than 50 feet(15.2 meters)in length, allow only three 90 degree bends between pulling points. 3.06 CUTTING,THREADING AND CONNECTING: A. Make all field cuts in conduits squarely, file cut ends, ream to remove rough edges and thread in accordance with NEC. No running thread permitted. Make all connections mechanically strong and tight, and with acceptable connectors. Where conduit surface coating is damaged or removed in the cutting, threading or reaming process, restore the surface to its original condition. 3.07 CONDUIT CLEANING: A. Clean all conduit carefully before and after installation, ream ends free of burrs, and free inside surfaces from all imperfections likely to injure cable. B. After installation of each complete new conduit run, snake the run with band to which is attached a tube cleaner with cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit. Remove and replace all conduit through which mandrel will not pass. C. Use a sponge with steel brush to clean steel conduit and use a sponge with nylon brush to clean PVC conduits. D. After cleaning, protect ends of all conduit with standard caps to prevent entrance of water, concrete, debris, or other foreign substance. 3.08 CONDUIT DRAINAGE: A. Where practicable, pitch conduit to drain to outlet boxes, or install so as to avoid trapping moisture. Where dips are unavoidable in exposed conduits, install fitting with drain hole at low point. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF BOXES: A. Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal boxes only in dry, accessible locations. Install cast-metal boxes in exterior concrete or masonry walls, in floor slabs, in basements, all other below grade locations and elsewhere as indicated. Cast metal boxes shall be used (unless otherwise indicated) where vapor-tight fixtures are required, for all surface mounting of wall switches and receptacles and for all outdoor use. Install pull boxes for motor control centers and large ceiling hung boxes where indicated. June 1,2021 16110-Page 9 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 B. Install boxes in conformance with all the requirements of NEC. Install boxes designed for type of construction involved. Support boxes in same manner as required for conduit. Size boxes to provide bending radius for wire or cable of at least eight times diameter or in accordance with NEC, whichever is larger. C. Center all outlets in panels, or spaces and adjust to structural finish. Where specific locations are not indicated, locate outlets with respect to equipment served. D. Place all outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes, in accessible locations when they are installed above or behind plastered ceilings, furred spaces, or suspended ceilings. Install access panels of suitable size. Mark all access panels for all boxes so panels can be readily located in future. Mark, using metal tabs or plastic buttons which cannot mark ceilings or walls, appropriate for type of construction being used. E. Assemble cast-metal boxes with threaded conduit hubs in such manner that conduit connections and gasketed covers are watertight. Close all unused threaded openings with pipe plugs and compound. F. Provide cast boxes with covers and device plates suitable for the area classification. Install screws of stainless steel or high brass for iron boxes. 3.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT: A. At all motors and electrically operated equipment to which conduit connections are made, install with a complete connection between end of conduit and terminal box of motor or other equipment. B. Install the conduits in locations permitting direct connection to motors. C. Make connections between rigid raceway and motor or equipment subject to vibration and adjustment using flexible conduit. Make each connection with at least one quarter bend so that no vibration can be transmitted beyond flexible connection. D. Install flexible metal conduit, fittings, and accessories in dry areas in accordance with requirements of NEC. E. Install liquid-tight flexible metal conduit in damp and corrosive areas. Locate conduit to reduce the possibility of damage to the exterior coating. Use fittings that screw into flexible conduit and provide gaskets. F. Use maximum of 6 feet (2 m) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures and; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install liquid-tight flexible metal conduit in areas subject to wetting due to fire protection sprinklers or broken or ruptured water line. Locate conduit to reduce the possibility of damage to the exterior flexible conduit jacket. Use fittings that screw into flexible conduit and provide gaskets. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. 3.11 HAZARDOUS AREAS: A. Install all conduits, fittings, equipment and devices within areas to comply with requirements of NEC for Hazardous Locations, Class, Division, and Group as indicated on the drawings. June 1,2021 16110—Page 10 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 B. In such hazardous locations, seal conduits terminating at boxes enclosing circuit-opening equipment at entrance to enclosure with compound-filled, commercial, sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive or combustible gases through conduits. C. Seal all conduits leading from or entering such hazardous locations at points of exit or entrance with two-part epoxy sealant. D. Install conduit connections with at least five threads tightly engaged, and made up with suitable thread compound. E. Where drain/seal fittings are required, they shall be of malleable iron construction with an internal drainage path which provides a visual means to ensure that the compound chamber is properly filled. The installation shall enable the drain/breather fitting and filler plug to be installed right after the compound is poured. 3.12 PROTECTION: A. Provide protection and install in accordance with manufacturer printed instructions. The conduit and raceway equipment manufacturers, to ensure that coatings, finishes, and enclosures are without damage or deterioration at completion of project. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer. 3.13 FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Label all raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements of Division 16. 3.14 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16110—Page 11 of 11 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System Job No.60633796 •-=. THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 16120 ELECTRIC WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide wires and cables for complete electrical systems as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8: Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 3. B33: Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. Insulated Cables Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)/National Electrical Mfg's Association (NEMA): 1. S-61-4021/WC 5: Thermoplastic Insulated Wire&Cable. 2. S-66-524/NEMA WC 7; Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene Insulated Wire and Cable. 3. S-68-5161WC 8: Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire &Cable. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Telecommunications Industry Association (TlA)/Electronic Industries Association(EIA): 1. ANSIITIA/EIA-568-B; Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 44: Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. 83: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. 3. 854: Service Entrance Cables. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Division 1: B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's product data in accordance with the requirements of Division 16. June 1,2021 16120—Page 1 of 5 Electric Wires and Cables Job No.60633796 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1. B. Deliver wire and cables in full reels protected against injury. Deliver reels with factory attached UL approved tags showing the manufacturers name and the type of insulation, size, and length of wire in each coil or reel. C. Accept wire and cable on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. D. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Protect from weather. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. 1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA: A. Wire for lighting, single phase circuits shall be Type XHHW or THWN-THHN. B. Wire for three phase circuits shall be Type XHHW. C. Service conductors shall be 600V rated type RHW. D. Single conductor wire for control, indication and metering shall be Type THWN-THHN No. 12 or 14 AWG, stranded. E. Multi-conductor control cable shall be used for the underground system and shall be No. 12 or 14 AWG, stranded with overall jacket. F. Wire for process instrumentation shall be twisted shielded pairs No. 14 AWG, stranded with overall jacket. G. Ground wires shall be Type THW, green. Bare ground wires shall be soft drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. H. Wire for power circuits installed in duct banks shall be type RHW. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. 600V Cable: 1. Okonite. 2. Southwire. 3. American Insulated Wire. B. Control and Metering Wire: 1. Belden Wire and Cable. 2. Alpha Wire. June 1,2021 16120—Page 2 of 5 Electric Wires and Cables Job No.60633796 3. Coleman Cable. C. Cable Fireproofing Tape: 1. MAC Products, Inc. 2. 3M Electrical Products. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Furnish copper conductors. Material and stranding of conductors to conform to ASTM B3, ASTM B33, and to ASTM B8,for the appropriate class. B. Uncoated, soft or annealed copper wire conforming to ASTM B3. C. Wires and Cables for Maximum 600-Volt Power Circuits: For No. 8 AWG gauge and smaller provide type THWN/THHN or RHW. Where used in lighting or receptacle branch circuits provide No. 12 AWG gauge and No. 10 AWG gauge as solid conductor. Provide other wire with Class C stranding. Provide No. 6 AWG gauge and larger as XHHW-2 with Class B stranding. Provide wires and cable conforming to UL 83. D. Wires and Cables for Control, Indicating, Metering, or Alarm Circuits: Single and multi-conductor control cable, copper conductors, Class B or C stranding. Insulation; 600-volt polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, or EPR. Continuous rating of 90C dry and 75C wet. Color coding conforming to Table K-2, ICEA/NEMA S-61-40211WC 5. E. Shielded Cable for Instrumentation Wiring: 7-strand copper conductors, size No. 14 AWG. Insulate conductors individually with color coded polyethylene or polyvinylchloride. Twist pairs with varying lay (if more than one pair) and cover with cable tape and copper or aluminum coated Mylar shielding tape and tinned copper drain wire. Jacket: polyvinylchloride. Cables: rated 600 volts and 90 degrees C. F. Category 5e Cable: Category 5e cable shall consist of 4 twisted pairs of different lay and ground wires, enclosed by an overall conductive mylar backed aluminum foil shield. This shall be enclosed by an overall thermoplastic jacket. The cable shall meet the applicable requirements of ANSIiTlNlEA-568-B. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Perform work in accordance with the National Electrical Code. B. Provide power cable identification as follows: System Voltage Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C 208/120V White Black Red Blue 240/120V White- Black- Red- None Gray Stripe Blue Stripe Blue Stripe 480/277V Gray Brown Yellow Purple C. Use green to identify insulated ground conductors. June 1,2021 16120—Page 3 of 5 Electric Wires and Cables Job No.60633796 NOTE: Colored insulation, tapes or sleeves may be used to provide color coding. Insulated ground conductors must have green covering. D. Permanently post means of identification of grounded and ungrounded conductors for each nominal voltage system at each panelboard and motor control center. E. In power and multiconductor cables manufactured without a grounding conductor identify one of the multiconductors as the equipment grounding conductor at each cable end and at every point where the conductors are accessible. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WIRING: A. Unless otherwise indicated, use no conductor smaller than No. 12 AWG for power, No. 14 AWG for control, and No. 14 AWG for shielded applications. B. Install conductors continuous from outlet to outlet and make no splices except within outlet or junction boxes. C. Install cable in underground raceway system without splices. There shall be no splices between connection points unless otherwise indicated. D. Draw all conductors contained within a single conduit at the same time. E. Apply wire pulling compound to conductors being drawn through conduits. Use pulling compound, Minerallac No. 100, Y-er-Eas, Yellow 77, High Performance Polywater Cable Lubricant or acceptable equivalent. F. Use no cable bend with radius of less than eight times its diameter. G. Wires and cables installed without prior submittal review are subject to removal at no additional expense. 3.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION: A. Label each wire at both termination points. Carry individual conductor or circuit identification throughout, with circuit numbers or other identification clearly stamped on terminal boards and printed on directory cards in distribution cabinets and panelboards. B. Identify each wire in junction boxes, cabinets, and terminal boxes where total number of control, indicating, and metering wires is three or more and no terminal board is provided, including all power wire. Where no termination is made use a plastic-coated, self-adhesive, wire marker and where termination is made use a, plastic, pre-printed sleeve wire marker. C. In cases similar to above where terminal boards are provided for the control, indicating, and metering wires, identify all wires including motor leads and other power wires too large for connection to terminal boards, by sleeve wire markers as specified above. D. In manholes and handholes, identify each power wire by laminated plastic tag located so it is easily seen. Control wires to be bundled and marked as listed in conduit and wire schedule. 3.04 CONNECTORS,TERMINAL LUGS AND BOARDS: A. For wiring of circuits consisting of No. 10 or No. 12 AWG solid wires, such as for lighting branch circuits, use self-insulated pressure type connectors for all splices or joints. June 1,2021 16120—Page 4 of 5 Electric Wires and Cables Job No.60633796 B. Terminate all wires connected to terminal boards, terminal blocks, or to other similar terminals by means of ring and tongue, nylon self-insulated,tin-plated copper pressure terminals. C. Terminal boards shall be 600 volts and rated for 125 percent of the ampacity of the connected circuit. They shall have screw terminals, with white marking strips for wire identification, of the 4- 6-, 8-, or 12-pole type, as necessary. D. Wire connections for which terminals are not supplied, for example, at solenoids or motor terminal junction boxes: 1. 10 AWG and smaller. Use self insulated pressure-type connectors. 2. 8 AWG and larger: Use insulated, mechanical type with set screw or follower bearing directly on the wire. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. E. Clearly and permanently mark terminal strips with ink or indelible pencil. Mark each wire consistently throughout entire system, using notation of wires given on manufacturer's wiring diagrams wherever possible. 3.05 FIELD TESTING: A. For conductors No. 6 AWG gauge and larger: 1. Insulation resistance tests: a. Utilize 1,000 VDC megohmmeter for 600 V insualted conductors. b. Test each conductor to ground and adjacent phase conductors in accordance with IEEE 118. c. Investigate values less than 100 megohms. 2. Perform continuity test by ohmmeter for all conductors installed. B. Submit results of all cable tests on forms indicating cable size, voltage, and date with name of tester and witness. 3.06 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16120-Page 5 of 5 Electric Wires and Cables Job No.60633796 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide field test, and place in operating condition, wiring devices as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Federal Specifications(FS): 1. W-C-596-F: Plug, Electrical Connector, Receptacle, Electrical. 2. W-S-896-F: (1P-2P-3W) Switch, Toggle, Single Unit with wall plates. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD 1: General Requirements for Wiring Devices 2. WD 6: Wiring Devices—Dimensional Requirements C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). D. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 20: General Use Snap Switches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's product data in accordance with requirements of Division 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER'S COMPLIANCE: A. Manufacturer's acceptance contingent upon products compliance with specifications. B. Provide all devices with UL label. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Allen-Bradley Co. B. Appleton Electric Co. June 1,2021 16140—Page 1 of 5 Wiring Devices Job No.60633796 C. Cooper Wiring Devices. D. Eaton-Cutler Hammer, Inc. E. Crouse-Hinds Co. F. Hubbell Electrical Products. G. Pass&Seymour, Legrand. H. OZ Gedney. I. Nelson Electric. 2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Wall Switches: 1. Provide alternating current, general-use, snap switches, in flush device boxes or on outlet box covers, totally enclosed in composition case, with insulated mounting yoke and sidewired, binding screw-type terminals. Single-pole, 2-pole, 3-way, or 4-way switches rated 20 amperes at 120/277 volts a.c. Switch to meet Fed. Spec. W-S-896-F and UL-20. 2. Switches for controlling lighting: a. Cooper Wiring Device Cat. No. 2221, 222, 2223, or 2224. b. Hubbell Cat. No. 1221, 1222, 1223 or 1224. c. Bryant Electric Cat. No. 4901,4902, 4903 or 4904. d. Pass&Seymour, Cat. No. 20AC1, 20AC2, 20AC3 or 20AC4 3. Provide pilot type lighting for switches controlling lights in seldom frequented locations. B. Watertight Switches: 1. Provide watertight switches consisting of flush mounting switches in NEMA Type 4 gasketed cast metal boxes. Switch operable through shaft in matching cast metal cover, twenty-ampere, 120/277-volt switch enclosures: a. Crouse-Hinds Type MC or MCC. b. Appleton Cat. No.WDM 175 and WVGI c. OZ Gedney Cat. No. WSP and WCT120 C. Flush Receptacles: 1. Provide 20-ampere, 125-volt flush receptacles constructed in flush device boxes, and of grounding type in composition case with insulated mounting yoke, side-wired, binding screw-type terminals. Receptacles to conform to Fed. Spec. W-C-596-F. 2. Duplex receptacles: June 1,2021 16140—Page 2 of 5 Wiring Devices Job No.60633796 a. Cooper Wiring Devices Cat. No. 5362. b. Hubbell Cat. No. 5362. c. Bryant Electric Cat. No. 5362. d. Pass&Seymour Cat. No. 5342. 3. Duplex GFCI Type Receptacles: a. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. Cat. No. CR5352. b. Cooper Wiring Devices Cat. No. GF20. c. Leviton Manufacturing Company Cat. No. 6899. 4. Single receptacles: a. Cooper Wiring Devices Cat No. 5361. b. Hubbell Cat. No. 5361. c. Pass&Seymour Cat. No. 5351. D. Special Receptacles: 1. Provide weatherproof devices rated 20 ampere, 125-volt, consisting of single receptacles with spring-loaded, soft-gasketed hinged covers with stainless steel spring. Covers as follows: a. Hubbell Cat. No. 5206. b. Bryant Electric Cat. No. 4510. c. Crouse-Hinds Cat. No. WLRS-1. 2. Provide in corrosive areas (NEMA 4X) a receptacle similar to the weatherproof device described above. Cover as follows: a. Crouse-Hinds Cat. No. WLRS-1-S752. 3. Provide watertight, gasketed cast-metal enclosures with covers in areas subject to hose- down, meeting requirements, and either standard single or duplex type: a. Appleton Electric Cat. No.AEE3382 and AEP3361,Style 2. b. Crouse-Hinds Cat. No. ARRH33 and APJ3385, Style 2. 4. Provide receptacles with matching plug or cord cap designed to meet NEMA 4 requirements when plug, cord and receptacle are assembled. E. Outlet Boxes and Enclosures: 1. Provide outlet boxes and enclosures conforming to Section 26 05 33and enclosure schedule on the drawings unless otherwise indicated. June 1,2021 16140—Page 3 of 5 Wiring Devices Job No.60633796 F. Device Plates: 1. Provide device plates suitable for type of outlet boxes and enclosures used. Plates for flush-mounting by device manufacturer. Plates for surface-mounting boxes by either device manufacturer or box manufacturer. 2. Provide flush device plates of high corrosion resistant,Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Provide flush device plates of material and finish indicated, in certain designated areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Perform all work in accordance with the NEC. 3.02 CONNECTION: A. Securely and rigidly attach wiring devices in accordance with regulating agency, and as indicated, avoiding interference with other equipment. B. Securely fasten nameplates using screws, bolts, or rivets and centered under or on the device, unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 GROUNDING: A. Ground all devices in accordance with NEC. B. Ground switches and their metal plates through switch mounting yoke, outlet box, and raceway system. C. Ground flush receptacles and their metal plates through positive ground connection to outlet box and grounding system. Maintain ground to each receptacle by spring-loaded grounding contact to mounting screw, or by grounding jumper, both making positive connection to outlet box and grounding system at all times. 3.04 LABELING: A. All wall plates to be engraved with the panelboard alpha-numeric identifier and circuit breaker number. 1. Characters to be 5/16 inch (8 mm)in size and black in color. 2. All engravings to match panelboard typed circuit breaker directories. 3.05 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. June 1,2021 16140-Page 4 of 5 Wiring Devices Job No.60633796 (m �' 3.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16140—Page 5 of 5 Wiring Devices Job No.60633796 - THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK I ' ' - - -' SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide panelboards rated 600 volts or less and 1200 amperes or less. B. Provide with circuit breakers and cabinets complete, as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Federal Specifications(FS): 1. QQ-S-365B: General Requirements for Silver Plating, Electra Deposited 2. W-C-375B: Automatic Circuit Breakers. 3. W-P-1 I 5A: Panel, Power Distribution. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 volts maximum) 2. AB 1: Molded Case Circuit Breakers 3. PB 1: Panelboards C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC) D. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 50: Cabinets and Boxes 2. 67: Panelboards 3. 86A: Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors 4. 489: Circuit Breakers, Molded Case and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's product data in accordance with requirements of Division 16. June 1,2021 16160-Page 1 of 5 Panelboards Job No.60633796 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1 and as specified. B. All panelboards shall be designed, manufactured and assembled in accordance with the referenced standards. C. Listing and Labeling: All panelboards shall be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), or other nationally-recognized testing laboratory(NRTL). D. Single-source Responsibility: Provide panelboards products that are new, and from the same manufacturer for each building or job. Panelboard components shall be from the same manufacturer, or listed as an assembly thereof. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon products'compliance with the specifications: 1. Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Corp. 4. Schneider Square D. 2.02 PANELBOARDS: A. Factory assembled deadfront type panelboards. B. Furnish panelboards complete with branch circuit breakers and a main circuit breaker or main lugs only as indicated. C. Furnish panelboards with full capacity separate ground bus, separate insulated neutral bus and furnish panelboards connected to a 3 phase, 4 wire service or single phase, 3-wire service as indicated. D. Provide panelboards with the voltage, frequency and current ratings as indicated conforming to NEMA Standard PBI, Federal Specification W-P-I I 5A. U.L. 67, and the NEC. E. Furnish the panelboard main and neutral buses, with minimum 98 percent conductivity rectangular copper bars provided with bolted type lugs as necessary. F. Drill buses to fit either "A", "B" or "C" Phase connectors, and ensure that connectors are inter- changeable and installed in a distributed phase sequence. G. Silver plate buses, connectors and terminals to a minimum thickness of 0.005-in., conforming to the requirements of Federal Spec. QQ-S-365B. H. Prevent terminal lugs from turning per NEMA standard PB 1 and ensure they are suitable for the conductor material and size. June 1,2021 16160-Page 2 of 5 Panelboards Job No.60633796 I. Provide main bus-bracing for each panel board adequate for 10,000 amperes symmetrical short circuit at 240 volts and 14,000 amperes symmetrical short circuit at 480 volts unless otherwise indicated. J. Where the word "space" occurs on panel schedules, provide all necessary hardware in the space, including connection straps, mounting brackets, and filler plates so that only the addition of a future circuit breaker is required. Connection straps shall be rated a minimum of 100A in panelboards of 400A rating or less and a minimum of 225A in panelboards above 400A rating, unless otherwise noted on panel schedules. K. Provide integral transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) in accordance with Section 16400 where indicated on the drawings. 2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. Each circuit breaker shall be bolted into position in the panelboard, whether by direct bolted connection to the bus or by being bolted to the panelboard frame. Each circuit breaker shall be replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Plug-on circuit breakers held in place only by spring force of the bus lug and the pressure of the deadfront are not acceptable. B. Furnish frame sizes, trip settings and number of poles as indicated. Clearly and visibly mar circuit breakers with ampere trip rating. Furnish breakers meeting the requirements of F.S. W-C- 375B and NEMA ABI. C. Furnish all breakers with quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanisms and thermal-magnetic, inverse time-limit overload and instantaneous short circuit protection on all poles, unless otherwise indicated. Automatic tripping indicated by the breaker handle assuming a clearly distinctive position from the manual ON and OFF position. Furnish breaker handle that is trip- free on overloads. D. Do not use single pole breakers with handle ties or bails in lieu of multi-pole breakers. E. For each panelboard, furnish quantity four handle lock devices for individual breakers to prevent the manual opening of the selected breakers. Turn devices over to Owner at completion of the project work. F. Ensure that voltage and interrupting rating of all breakers in a panelboard is not less than voltage and short circuit rating of the panelboard main buses, as indicated. Furnish breakers suitable to operate satisfactorily at the frequency indicated. G. Furnish ground fault interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers for certain circuits as indicated on the drawings. H. Furnish single pole breakers with full module size. Do not install two pole breakers in a single module. I. Furnish time-current characteristic curves and catalog information and data for each size of breaker furnished. 2.04 MINI-POWER CENTERS: A. General: Provide a combination transformer and panelboard as specified and indicated. 1. Transformer: The transformer shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated, NEMA 3R, dry- type, general purpose, 480V three-phase primary, 208/120V three-phase secondary, 60- June 1,2021 16160-Page 3 Of 5 Panelboards Job No.60633796 Hz, 2-5% full capacity primary taps above and below normal, copper primary and secondary windings, maximum temperature rise of 115°C at rated kVA, sound level rating shall not exceed NEMA ST 20 standards. Provide kVA rating as indicated. Comply with DOE energy efficiency standards as defined by 10 CFR Part 431.196 - Energy Conservation Standards for all transformers 15 kVA and larger. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, dead front, safety type with full-sized neutral bus, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings,types,and arrangements shown. C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom as required. D. Mains: Circuit breaker as indicated. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Bolt-on, molded-case circuit breakers with minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes at 240Vac. 2. Molded-case circuit breakers shall have toggle handles that indicate when tripped. 3. Where multiple pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. 4. Circuit breakers shall be replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. F. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses. G. Additional Requirements: 1. The complete mini-power center shall be UL listed, rated for a minimum of 14,000 AIC rms, symmetrical at 480Vac, complete with lifting eyes and mounting brackets. 2.05 CABINETS: A. Provide cabinets with NEMA enclosure type as indicated and without knockouts. Drill cabinets only for the exact conduit entrances and mounting bolts. B. Finish cabinet fronts, trims and surface-mounted boxes in ANSI No. 61 or 49, light-gray enamel over a rust-inhibitive primer. Attach the fronts (exterior trims) to the boxes or interior trims, by quarter-turn, indicating trim clamps. Design cabinets for surface or flush mounting as indicated. C. Unless otherwise specified, construct panelboard cabinets of code-gauge galvanized, sheet steel and equip with gutters of ample size for the risers and outgoing circuits. Ensure that the cabinets do not exceed 78 inch (1980 mm)in height. D. Trims for branch circuit panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door over all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semi flush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Door-in-door trim shall be provided. Both hinged trim and trim door shall utilize three point latching. No tools shall be required to install or remove trim. Trim shall be equipped with a door-actuated trim locking tab. Equip locking tab with provision for a screw such that removal of trim requires a tool, at the Owner's option. Installation shall be tamper resistant with no exposed hardware on the panelboard trim. E. Provide enclosure with the following side gutter dimensions: June 1,2021 16160-Page 4 of 5 Panelboards Job No.60633796 1. Left side minimum 4-1/2 inch(114 mm) measured from inside lip of the box to the installed deadfront. 2. Right side; minimum 4-1/2 inch (114 mm) measured from inside lip of the box to the installed deadfront. With the door-in-door cover in place; minimum 3-1/4 inch (83 mm) from installed outer door hinge to the installed deadfront. 2.06 FACTORY TESTING: A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Mount panelboards, plumb and rigid without distortion of the box. Mount such that the height of the top operating handle does not exceed 6 feet 7 inches(2 m)from the floor. B. Hang each door of the cabinet on semi- or fully-concealed hinges with a combination catch and lock. C. On cabinets 48 inch (1200 mm) high and over, install a 3 point catch assembly latching at top, bottom and approximate middle. D. Verify all panelboard locks are keyed alike. E. Provide typed directory card filled-out to clearly indicate the load served. F. Door hinge to be on the side opposite escape route if applicable. G. Adjust transformer taps of mini-power center as required. 3.02 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION y . June 1,2021 16160—Page 5 of 5 Panelboards Job No.60633796 y._w .- w THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 16400 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) components in combination with the electrical distribution system equipment as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. The distribution system includes switchboards, motor control centers, 480V distribution panels and 120V panelboards. B. The components shall provide protection for electrical and electronic devices against the damaging effects of surges, transients and electrical line noise. C. Where indicated on the electrical contract drawings, provide separate, modular components from the electrical distribution equipment enclosures. Provide conduit, cable and all associated components for a complete SPD system installation. It shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to verify adequate space for locating modular SPD equipment adjacent to associated electrical distribution equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41.1: IEEE Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less)AC Power Circuits 2. C62.45: Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage(1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits B. Military Standard(MIL): 1. 220A: Radio Frequency Interference and Electromagnetic Interference C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 volts maximum) 2. LS 1: Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code (NEC). E. Underwriters Laboratory(UL): 1. 1449: Standard for Safety, Surge Protective Devices-Third Edition. 2. 1283: Standard for Safety, Electromagnetic Interference Filters June 1,2021 16400-Page 1 of 6 Surge Protection Devices Job No.60633796 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1: 1. Shop drawings, manufacturer's product data, and component ratings in accordance with this section and the requirements of Division 16. 2. SPD type, model number, system voltage, phases, modes of protection, Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) Voltage Protection Rating (VPR), Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR), and Nominal Discharge Current(In). 3. Provide outline drawings and internal wiring diagrams. 4. List all required installation criteria including circuit breaker trip rating to meet UL 1449, Third Edition. 5. Identify all cable sizes, distance limits and accessory devices when SPD units are to be provided in separate enclosures, where applicable. 6. For informational/purposes only, submit installation instructions and separate from all other submittals. 7. UL 1449 listing and summary of factory test data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. SPD units and all components shall be designed manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable UL Standard ANSI/UL 1449 Third Edition. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Provide in accordance with Division 16 and as specified. B. Shipping: 1. Ship equipment and materials, except where partial disassembly is required by transportation regulations or for protection, complete with identification and quantity of items. 2. Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating contents and pieces of equipment for which intended. 3. Deliver spare parts after installation but before start-up of system as specified. Deliver to Owner after completion of work. C. Storage: 1. Inspect and inventory items upon delivery to site. 2. Store and safeguard equipment, material and spare parts. 1.06 WARRANTY AND SERVICE: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1 and as specified. June 1,2021 16400—Page 2 of 6 Surge Protection Devices Job No.60633796 B. The Surge Protection Device (SPD) manufacturer is to warranty the components against defective materials and workmanship for a period of five years following delivery from the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Surge Protection Device components. 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. Phoenix Contact. 4. Siemens. 5. General Electric Company. 2.02 PROVISIONS: A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Operating Temperature: minus 40 degrees C to 60 degrees C. 2. Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 percent. J � 3. Operating Altitude: 0 to 12,000 Feet(0 to 3,660 meters). 4. Audible Noise: Less than 35 dBA at 3 feet(1 m). B. Electrical Requirements: 1. The maximum continuous operating voltage of all suppression components utilized is not to be less than 115 percent of the nominal operating voltage at the installed location. 2. ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) - The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR for the device shall not exceed the following: Volts L-N L-L N-G 208Y/120 460V 1000V 700V 480Y/277 1100V 1800V 1000V 3. The ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-1991 Category C3 let through voltages shall not exceed the following Volts L-N N-G 208Y/120 550V 470V 480Y/277 900V 920V 4. The SPD components are to be rated as follows: 480V Service Entrance 250 kA per phase at each structure 125 kA per mode June 1,2021 16400-Page 3 of 6 Surge Protection Devices Job No.60633796 480V Distribution 160 kA per phase Panels 80 kA per mode 120/208V Panelboards 120 kA per phase 60 kA per mode 5. The mode of operation is to protect against surges and transients as follows: System Configuration Protection Mode Single Phase, Two Wire(L,N)+ Ground L to G,L to N, and N to G Single Phase, Two Wire(L,L)+Ground L to L, and L to G Split Phase,Three Wire+ Ground L to L, L to G,L to N, and N to G Three Phase, Three Wire (Delta)+ Ground L to L,and L to G Three Phase, Four Wire(Wye)+ Ground L to L, L to G,L to N, and N to G 2.03 OPERATION: A. The suppression system shall incorporate a hybrid designed Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOV) surge suppressor. The system shall not use silicone avalanche diodes, air gaps or other methods of suppression. B. Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 50 dB at 100 kHZ. C. SPD shall provide surge current diversion between each phase conductor and the neutral conductor, between each phase conductor and ground and between the neutral conductor and ground. For delta systems, the SPD shall have components directly connected between each -- - phase conductor and between each phase conductor and ground. D. The SPD shall provide a low impedance path for surge current using over sized conductors with equal impedance paths to each suppression element. Plug-in style connections or printed circuit boards for use in the path of surge current shall not be used. E. Operating Parameters: 1. The maximum response time shall not exceed 1 nanosecond. 2. Provide with a noise filtering system capable of managing noise levels produced by electro-magnetic interference and radio frequency interference. The noise filtering system shall reject a minimum of 50db at 100 kHz as measured by the 50 Ohm Insertion Loss Method (Military Standard 220A). 3. The parallel system components shall operate over a minimum frequency range of 47 Hertz to 63 Hertz. 4. The SPD components shall limit total harmonic distortion produced to less than one percent. 5. SPD component ratings to be per UL 1449. 6. Each unit shall be factory tested at the maximum continuous operating voltage and short circuit tested, prior to delivery. F. Product Components: June 1,2021 16400—Page 4 of 6 Surge Protection Devices Job No.60633796 1. Protection and Filtering Elements: a. The SPD components shall consist of replaceable protection modules designed to suppress and divert transient voltages and surge currents. Each protection module shall contain one or more individually fused metal oxide varisters capable of withstanding over 1000 surges of Category C (IEEE/ANSI C62.41.1) current rated at 10,000 amperes. b. Each protection module shall contain filtering elements capable of providing noise attenuation. c. The SPD components shall substantially limit transient waveform rise-time characteristics. The components are to be configured as parallel connected, current carrying elements designed to enhance the surge suppression and diversion performance of the protection modules. 2. Provide individual fusing to allow the SPD to be isolated during fault conditions. 3. Provide red and green solid-state status lights which indicate operational status of each unit and visual diagnostic monitoring of each component and module. Provide audible alarm to activate on fault condition, with a silence switch and push-to-test alarm switch. 4. Provide surge counter with battery backup to retain memory upon loss of AC power. 5. Provide remote status monitoring with form C dry contacts monitoring all phases. 2.04 SHOP TESTING: A. Perform factory performance testing on each unit. The test to consist of the following: 1. High voltage impedance test. 2. Current test. B. Tests shall be in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1 Cat. A, B, &C. 2. ANSI/IEEE C62.45. 3. Military Standard 220A. 4. Underwriters Laboratory UL 1449. C. Submit certified documentation of all factory tests performed. D. Perform above tests in addition to standard factory tests. 2.05 SPARE PARTS: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1 and as specified. B. Provide one spare protection module of each type for on-site spare parts purposes. June 1,2021 16400—Page 5 of 6 Surge Protection Devices Job No.60633796 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Visually inspect delivered unit(s) and accessories for conformance with drawings and specifications. Replace all components found to exhibit defects. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install unit in compliance with the manufacturers printed instructions. All electrical installation work shall be in accordance with UL Listing Requirements and applicable National or Local Electrical Codes. B. For units mounted adjacent to electrical distribution equipment, verify conduit and wire for the SPD components are as specified by the SPD manufacturer and installed in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code. C. Verify UL 1449,third edition, label is provided on each unit. 3.03 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16400—Page 6 Of 6 Surge Protection Devices Job No.60633796 SECTION 16402 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide complete underground distribution system as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents. B. Conform to lines, grades, elevations, and dimensions. Resolve interferences with other underground conduit, piping or equipment, either new or existing with the CM. Match components suitable for proper installation. C. Provide concrete encasement of duct system where indicated. Include forms and reinforcing in installation. Perform work in accordance with Division 16. D. Provide manholes and handholes complete with ground rods, windows, ladders, frames, covers, cable racks, supports, pulling irons, and other inserts. Use reinforced concrete. Perform work in accordance with Division 16. E. Provide Schedule 80 polyvinylchloride (PVC) conduit for power and control circuits and furnish and install rigid galvanized steel conduits for instrumentation, communication and fire circuits. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code(NEC). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00: B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data in accordance with requirements of Division 16. C. Provide"Record"drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER'S COMPLIANCE: A. Manufacturer's acceptance contingent upon products'compliance with specifications. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Polyvinylchloride(PVC) Conduit: 1. Specified in Section 16110. B. Rigid Steel Conduit, Galvanized: June 1,2021 16402-Page 1 of 5 Underground Ducts and Raceways Job No.60633796 1. Specified in Section 16110. C. Manhole Waterproofing Material: 1. Heavy Duty Black, No. 46-449, by Tnemec Company, Inc., No. Kansas City MO. 2. Hi-Build Bituminous Coating, No. 64-J-5, by Valspar Corporation, Baltimore, MD. 3. Bitumastic Super Service Black, by Kop-Coat, Inc., Pittsburg, PA. 2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Conduit Spacers: Furnish conduit spacers made of plastic to maintain spacing between conduits. B. Concrete: Minimum compressive strength, 3,000 psi (20 MPa). C. Hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit used underground to be painted with bituminous paint. D. Manhole Frames and Covers: 1. Heavy duty gray cast iron. 2. Conform to details indicated on the drawings and as specified. 3. Provide machine-finished seat. 4. Mark"ELECTRICAL"on cover of manhole. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS: A. Lay conduits, indicated to be direct buried in the ground, in trench on 3 inch (75 mm)bed of sand and cover with an equivalent 3 inch (75 mm)bed of sand. Ensure that no rocks come in contact with conduit during backfilling. Dig trenches to depth and location indicated. B. Provide minimum separation of power and control conduits of 3 inch (75 mm) both vertically and horizontally. Build ductbank layer by layer, backfill and compact each layer to provide support for next layer. C. Separate power and control ducts from instrument ducts by a minimum of 12 inches(300 mm). D. Backfill ductbank in layers and tamp or"puddle" as directed by the CM. Provide yellow ductbank marker tapes, reading "Caution - Electrical Lines Below", over entire length of ductline. Locate tapes 12 inches(300 mm)below grade. Provide a tape for every 12 inches(300 mm)of width of ductline. E. Install conduit, indicated to be encased in concrete with spacers and reinforcing, as specified and as indicated. Rigid galvanized steel conduits to be painted with bituminous paint. F. Install conduit runs following routing on drawing and running in straight lines. Where deviation from a straight line becomes necessary, install bends of radius which allow for rodding and installation of cable. June 1,2021 16402-Page 2 of 5 Underground Ducts and Raceways Job No.60633796 G. Accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, by long sweep bends having minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet (8 m) Manufactured bends can be used at ends of short runs of 100 feet(30 m) or less, and then only at or close to the end of run. Provide long sweep bends made up of one or more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof. Install manufactured bends with minimum radius of 36 inch (1,000 mm)where larger radius cannot be used. H. Lay ductlines to minimum slope of 4 inch (100 mm) per 100 feet (30 m) and slope to manholes and handholes, as indicated. Ductlines are to slope away from buildings. I. Install spacers at intervals of approximately 4 feet (1200 mm)and stagger between tiers of ducts to provide not less than 12 inches (300 mm) of longitudinal separation. Install base spacers to provide at least 3 inches (75 mm) between bottom of trench and underside of bottom conduits. Completely fill space with concrete. Firmly wire conduits and spacers together before concrete is placed. J. Ductbanks are to be formed, unless trench conditions allow for neat placement of concrete with specified clearances. K. Prior to placing of concrete, remove all dirt, sand, and any other debris from between conduits and from trench bottoms. Hold conduits in place to prevent floating or accidental movement. L. Stagger joints in conduits at least 6 inches (150 mm). Do not allow couplings to rest on bottom of trench. Install couplings for plastic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. M. Install concrete encasements so minimum clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) from concrete to parallel pipes, lines, structures, etc., is maintained. Where ducts cross, minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) is required. Do not allow the top of concrete to be less than 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade or paving. Submit special conditions which may require lesser clearances or special conditions which may require greater than 30 inches (750 mm) depth to CM for acceptance. N. Where a connection is made to existing ductline, bond or dowel concrete encasement to existing encasement. Use waterstop between ductpours and between manholes or buildings and ductwork as indicated. O. Do not use power-driven vibrators for spading of concrete around ducts. P. Roll and grade backfill, and restore surface to condition equal to the site finish grade, or as otherwise indicated. Q. Locate ductbank markers at ends of all ductbanks except at manholes or handholes, at approximately every 200 feet (65 m) along duct run, and at each change in direction of duct run. Place markers approximately on ductbank. Install markers 6 inches (150 mm) square or round section by 3 feet (1 m) long made of Class B concrete. Imprint the letter"D" or cast it on top of the marker. Install top of duct markers flush in paved areas, protruding no more 2-inches above finished grade in unpaved areas. In finished lawns, allow marker to protrude 1/2-inch (12 mm). R. Keep conduits clean of concrete, dirt, and other substances during the course of construction. After the ductlines have been completed, pull a standard flexible mandrel not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, having a diameter approximately 1/4-inch (6 mm) less than the inside diameter of the conduit, through each conduit, after which pull a brush with stiff bristles through each conduit to make certain that no particles of earth, sand, or gravel have been left in the line. Replace conduit runs that do not allow the passage of the mandrel at no additional cost to the June 1,2021 16402-Page 3 of 5 Underground Ducts and Raceways Job No.60633796 Owner. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in the lead wire. Install in spare conduits a pull wire or rope, and plug and seal spare conduits after cleaning. 3.02 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES: A. Construct manholes and handholes of 3,000 psi (20 MPa)concrete cast in place, as indicated. B. Install manholes with cable racks, hooks, insulators, and other features, as indicated. C. Place a 6 inch (150 mm)crushed-stone base under each manhole and handhole. D. Construct cast-in-place manholes and handholes with forms, complete with centering cores and molds, to conform to shape, form, line, and grade required and maintain sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load. Make all joints leakproof and arrange horizontally or vertically. Place forms on successive units for continuous surfaces and fit to accurate alignment, assuring a smooth completed surface,free from irregularities. E. At convenient point close to wall, drive a ground rod into earth as indicated. Extend ground rod approximately 6 inches (150 mm) above finished manhole floor. After completion of manhole or handhole, connect 6 foot(2 m) length of No. 4 bare copper ground wire to ground rod and coil it within manhole or handhole for connection to steel supports and cover. F. Size, space, and place reinforcing bars as indicated and as specified. G. Set manhole and handhole frames to the required grade, in full bed of concrete mortar to make watertight connection. H. Install tops of manhole and handhole covers in unpaved areas approximately 1/2-inch (12 mm) above finished grade, and in paved areas install flush with finished surface of paving. I. Install galvanized corrosion-resistant channel support, with continuous slot and required fittings designed for concrete encasement. J. Install inserts in the manholes as indicated. K. Install two cable pulling irons in wall opposite each ductbank entrance into manhole, one 6 inch (150 mm)above floor and one 6 inch (150 mm) below the roof of manhole. Where indicated on drawings, install additional features such as openings in manhole walls for future conduit entrances. Seal future entrances with required courses of brick. L. Where ductlines enter manholes, terminate conduits in end bells. Terminate steel conduit entering manholes and handholes in grounding bushing. 3.03 MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE WATERPROOFING: A. Apply two coats of bituminous waterproofing material to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes. Apply by brush or spray, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow time between coats to permit sufficient drying. 1. Two coats applied with a minimum dry film thickness of 12 to 14 mils (0.30 to 0.36 mm) per coat. June 1,2021 16402—Page 4 of 5 Underground Ducts and Raceways Job No.60633796 3.04 RECORD DRAWINGS OF UNDERGROUND WORK: A. Furnish one set of marked copies of contract drawings, showing exact routing and depths of all underground conduit, duct handholes and manholes. Furnish scaled plot plans, showing principal outline of buildings and structures. Reference conduits, ducts, and manholes, and all bends deviating from straight line, dimensionally from fixed objects or structures. 3.05 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16402—Page 5 of 5 Underground Ducts and Raceways Job No.60633796 -- � THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide a single, complete, integrated grounding system, including conductors, raceways, and connections, as indicated and in compliance with Contract Documents, and in accordance with the National Electrical Code Article 250 and the National Electrical Safety Code. B. Include grounding of switchgear,substations, motor control centers,electric equipment enclosures etc., outdoor substations, transformers, switch structures, etc.; ground grid systems with ground rod and water pipe connections; structural steel, and lightning protection system. C. Include grounding conductors completely inter-connecting water supply pipe,ground rods,ground grid, substation, switchgear and motor control center ground buses, other distribution equipment, and other groundable equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. ANSI/IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B3: Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8: Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 3. B33: Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE): 1. Standard 81: Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,Ground Impedance,and Earth Surface Potential of a Ground System. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70: National Electrical Code. 2. 780: Lightning Protection Code. E. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. 467: Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment. June 1,2021 16450—Page 1 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data in accordance with requirements of Division 16. C. Submit catalog and dimensional data for the following: 1. Ground rods 2. Exothermic welding 3. Connecting hardware D. Submit grounding system test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER'S COMPLIANCE: A. Manufacturer's acceptance contingent upon products'compliance with the specifications. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. Ground Rods: 1. ERICO Products Inc. 2. Galvan Electrical Products. 3. Nehring Electrical Works. B. Exothermic Welding: 1. ERICO Products, Inc. 2. American Brass Mfg. Co. 3. Orgo-Thermit, Inc. C. Connecting Hardware: 1. American Brass Mfg. Co. 2. Thomas and Betts 3. Anderson Electric Corp. 2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Conductors: June 1,2021 16450—Page 2 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 1. Provide copper grounding conductors bare or insulated, sized as indicated. When not indicated on the drawing provide in accordance with the NEC. Provide protection of conductors in locations where physical damage would result from direct exposure. 2. Ground and bond wires for substations, main panels and distribution points, and ground rod connections shall be annealed bare copper conforming to ASTM B3, stranded, with 98 percent conductivity. 3. Equipment ground conductors run with circuit conductors and grounding electrode conductor shall be 600 volt with green insulation, unless noted otherwise on the Contract documents. 4. Unless noted otherwise, all conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, Class B in accordance with ASTM B8. a. Uninsulated conductors shall be bare copper in accordance with ASTM B3,tinned in accordance with ASTM B33. b. Use tinned-coated in corrosive environments including when buried in earth or embedded in concrete. B. Ground Bus: 1. Provide a 4 by 1/4 inch(100 by 6 mm)copper bar complete with bolted type connectors as indicated. 2. Bus bar shall have 18 pre-drilled holes,two standoff insulators,two stainless steel mounting brackets and four stainless steel assembly bolts and lock washer. C. Connectors and Fasteners: 1. Provide ground clamps which are UL listed for use on copper or brass pipes. 2. Provide ground clamps,for use on iron pipes,of galvanized or malleable iron, or of standard noncorrosive material for use on iron pipes. 3. Provide ground clamps, for use on pipes, with rigid metal base providing good contact by proper seating on the pipe. Do not use strap type clamps. D. Ground Rods: 1. Ground rods shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL Standard 467. 2. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel rods not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm)in diameter and not less than 10 feet(3 m) long per section. 3. Ground rods shall be clean and smooth with the following characteristics: a. Cone-shaped point on the first section. b. Die-stamped near the top with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the length of the rod in millimeters or feet. E. Ground Access Wells: June 1,2021 16450—Page 3 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 1. Provide I 2"x12"x12"polymer concrete ground access well where indicated on plans. 2. Provide engraved cover with "ground" indicator. 3. Rated for a minimum of 20,000 lbs. 4. Provide Harger GAW series or approved equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXOTHERMIC WELDING: A. Welding shall be by the exothermic process. B. Within the welding procedure, include the proper mold and powder charge and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Welding processes shall be the exothermic fusion type that will make a connection without corroding or loosening. D. The welding process shall join all strands and not cause the parts to be damaged or weakened. E. Completed connection or joint shall be equal or larger in size than the conductors joined and have the same current-carrying capacity as the largest conductor. F. Paint buried ground connection with a bitumastic paint. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. Install grounding conductors so that they will not be exposed to physical damage. Install connections firm and tight. Arrange conductors and connectors so no strain on connections. B. Run grounding conductors associated with direct burial cables in common trenches above cables except as indicated otherwise. C. Bury equipment grounding conductors 30 inches deep. Bring loops or taps up for connection to equipment or other items to be grounded. D. Where raceways are used to contain and protect grounding conductors, install in accordance with Division 16. E. Where bare grounding conductors are contained within metallic raceways, bond ends of raceways to conductors. F. Install loop type, low impedance,grounding system interconnecting all components so at least two grounding connections are provided for each major item of electrical equipment. Ensure that severing of any single grounding conductor in this system does not remove grounding protection on any major item. G. Connect structural steel to the external perimeter loop of grounding conductors installed around all sides of building foundation, buried at least 30 inches below grade. Connect to each vertical column by loop or tap. Connect two opposite points on external loop to two different points on grounding system. June 1,2021 16450-Page 4 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 H. Buried and concealed ground connections shall use exothermic welding. I. Make accessible connections to structural members by exothermic welding process or by bolted connector. Connections to equipment or ground bus by bolted connectors. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GROUND RODS: A. Install ground rods in manholes in accordance with requirements specified under the section Underground Distribution Systems. Connect each grounding conductor entering a manhole to ground rod by exothermic weld. B. Install ground rods where indicated. Install the top of the rod 12 inch (300 mm)below the ground surface. C. Make connection to overall grounding system as indicated. D. Ensure that final resistance of interconnected ground system is 5 ohms, or less. Measure ground resistance in normally dry conditions, and not less than 48 hours after rainfall. 3.04 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING: A. Ground each piece of electrical equipment by means of a grounding conductor installed in raceway feeding that piece of equipment. Grounding conductors installed in conduit with insulated conductors to be furnished with green, 600 volt insulation. Ground conductors are in addition to and not to be considered as the neutral wire of the system. B. Connect power transformer cases and neutrals to grounding system. Connect neutral ground connection at transformer terminal. Provide two separate, independent, diagonally opposite, connections for power transformers so removal of one connection will not impair continuity of other. C. Connect two separate ground connections from ground grid to ground bus of switchgear assemblies, motor control centers, switchboards and all outdoor substation and transformer equipment. Ensure that each connection for item of equipment is from different section of ground grid. D. Connect a grounding conductor between panelboard and grounding system. Where a grounding bar is furnished with panelboard, connect grounding conductor to bar. E. Conduits entering metal enclosures shall utilize bonding type locknuts and grounding bushings. Locknuts that gouge into the metal enclosures are not acceptable. F. Where conduits are not effectively grounded by firm contact with a grounded enclosure, apply grounding bushings on at least one end of conduit run. Conduit connections shall be wrench tight. G. Install a separate grounding conductor from ground system to motors of 100 horsepower and larger, in addition to raceway system. Ground motor ground connection to motor frame, independent of mounting bolts or sliding base. Ground motor to nearest point on grounding system, unless otherwise indicated. H. Connect grounding conductors from equipment in area where ground bus is required to ground bus. Connect ground bus to grounding system. Mount ground bus on 600 volt pedestal insulators. I. Connect lightning arresters to ground system by suitable conductors. Where lightning arresters are furnished with electrical equipment and grounding connections are not inherently provided, June 1,2021 16450-Page 5 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 ensure that suitable separate grounding conductor connects lightning arresters with system ground. J. Connect generator neutral to grounding system by a grounding conductor. Connect grounding conductor to generator disconnect enclosure and generator neutral on generator side of disconnect. Ground generator frame with two separate independent connections, so removal of one connection will not impair continuity of other. K. Ground each street lighting standard by ground rod driven near base of standard, in accordance with requirements of National Electric Safety Code. Connect ground rods to grounding conductor brought with street lighting feeder cable. L. Ground transformers, lightning arresters, insulators and other appurtenances, installed on poles, poles and timber structures, or metal structure. Run grounding conductors between poles or structure and ground rods. Protect grounding conductor by molding applied for at least 8 feet (2500 mm) above ground, with both molding and conductor stapled. Install ground rod where indicated and driven until top of rod is 1 foot(300 mm)below ground. M. Ground wire fences when used to enclose electrical equipment or when overhead electrical lines cross fence. Unless otherwise indicated, provide grounding by buried outside peripheral ground loop; connections to each corner fence post and nearby ground rod; flexible connections to each gate; and at least two connections to grounding system from approximately opposite positions on fence. N. Connect individual ground rods to the grounding loop using the direct burial grounding cable. O. Bond individual cable tray sections with bonding jumpers. 3.05 SIGNAL GROUNDING: A. Ground signal surge protection and shields of twisted, shielded cable using a signal bonding conductor. The signal bonding conductor shall be a continuous path from the instrument surge protection or shield to the grounding electrode conductor. The signal bonding conductor shall be isolated from the equipment grounding conductor for its entire path. B. Where convenient several signal bonding conductors may be conbined, providing that all the following conditions are met: 1. The combined signal bonding conductor shall have the equivalent cross section of the conductors that it was combined from or three times the cross section of the largest conductor that it was combined from,whichever is less. 2. The combined signal bonding conductor shall be isolated from the equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where two signal bonding conductors are combined use a three port insulated splice. 4. Where three or more signal bonding conductors are combined, use a copper bus mounted on 600 volt insulators. Attach each conductor to the bus using an insulated ring tongue lug and screw terminal. 3.06 FIELD TESTING: A. Test grounding systems for ground resistance. Total resistance from any point on the ground network to the building counterpoise must not exceed 50 milliohms. June 1,2021 16450-Page 6 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 B. Ground resistance and counterpoise tests must be made during dry weather and no sooner than 48 hours after rainfall. Conditions of soil and weather shall be documented on test forms. C. Conduct tests using the ratio method that measures the ratio of the resistance to earth of an auxiliary test electrode to the series resistance of the electrode under test and a second auxiliary electrode. Perform measurements in accordance with IEEE Standard 81. D. Indicating instrument must be self-contained and include a direct-current generator, synchronized current and potential reversers, crossed-current and potential coils, direct-reading ohmmeter, series resistors, and range-selector switch. Calibrate direct-reading ohmmeter for ranges of 0 to 20 ohms and 0 to 200 ohms. E. Place auxiliary grounding electrodes in accordance with instrument manufacturer's recommendations but not less than 50 feet(15 m)apart, in accordance with IEEE Standard 81. F. Perform continuity test on all power receptacles to ensure that the ground terminals are properly grounded to the facility ground system. G. Furnish copies of test reports on ground system. 3.07 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Provide in accordance with Division 1. 3.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate measurement or payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. END OF SECTION June 1,2021 16450-Page 7 of 7 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Job No.60633796 02000 PLANS, DETAILS AND NOTES If applicable, insert reference(s) to project plans; details; and notes CITY OF ROUND ROCK Utiliti & Environills-m-ital Services UOO nr i Rued Round Rods, Texas 78665 BID TABULATION PROJECT: Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System I m[)ravem--&. 131 DS EXTENDED AND CHECKED BY: Amanda Taylor DATE: July 13, 2021 LOCATION: UOOStinrise Rd Campan Name: B-5 Construction Com n Inc. MatousCor�trudion, Ltd. Legion Devel meet LLC BID DATE: 7/13/202110 a.m. Statement of Safety? Yes Addendum(s)? Yes Bid Bond.? Yes Statement of Safety? Yes Addendum(s) Yes Bid Bond? Yes Statement d Safety? Yes Addendum(s)?Yes Bid Bond? Yes Stat�t � Safety? Yes Addendum(s)? Bid Bond.? Yes ITEM APPROX QTY. UNIT UNITPRICE COST UNIT PRICE COST UNIT PRICE COST UNIT PRICE COST 1 Construction of the Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System 1 L S $17160,239-00 $1,160,239.00 $11217,000-00 I $11217,000.00 $1,260,000.00 $1,260, 000. 00 $0.00 TOTAL $1,1609239.00 - $192179000m00 $-1926090OOmOO $0600 Page 1 of 1 Updated 6/17/19 =71�M AECOM 512 454 4797 tel 13640 Briarwick Drive 5124548807 fax Suite 200 Austin, Texas 78729 www.aecom.com July 21, 2021 Christopher Perkins, P.E. Senior Utility Engineer City of Round Rock 3400 Sunrise Road Round Rock, TX 78665 RE: City of Round Rock Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine System Improvement Project — Contractor Award Recommendation Dear Mr. Perkins: On July 13, 2021, the City of Round Rock opened bids for the above referenced project. Three competitive bids were submitted. All the bid packages contained the required information. Based on the bid tabulation, Bw5 Construction of Magnolia, TX is the low bidder. We have reviewed the submitted bid reference sheet from B"5 Construction for the Lake Creek Pump Station Chlorine Improvement Project. AECOM takes no exception with awarding this project to the low bidder, Bw5 Construction. AECOM will prepare conformed drawings and specifications as needed for the contract and the Contractor. We look forward to working with you and the awarded Contractor to complete this very important project. Should you have any questions or require additional information, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned at (512) 454-4797v Sincerely, Shelby Eckols, P.E. Senior Vice President nCnTlelr+A T� nc iwro-C�CCTCr1 MA aTlcc► CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 10fl Complete Nos. 1- 4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos, 1, 2, 39 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2021-777195 B-5 CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC., MAGNOLIA, TX United States Hate Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state -_ agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 07/12/2021 being filed. CITY OF ROUND ROCK Date Acknowledged: 07/28/2021 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. 000000 LAKE CREEK PUMP STATION CHLORINE SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of business) Nature of interest (check applicable) Controlling Intermediary BELL JR., CECIL MAGNOLIA, TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is ,and my date of birth is My address is (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in County, State of , on the day of , 20 (month) (year) Signature of authorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission wwwethics.state,tx,us Version Vl.l.ceffd98a